RU - Vol 2 - R7 - 15

REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
MINISTRY OF WATER AND ENVIRONMENT

Plot 22/28 Port Bell Road, Luzira
Kampala, UGANDA
Water management and development project

CONSULTANCY SERVICES FOR DESIGN REVIEW (WHERE APPLICABLE), FEASIBILITY
STUDY, DETAILED ENGINEERING DESIGNS, AND CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION OF THE
SMALL TOWNS IN RUKUNGIRI, KATWE-KABATORO AND KOBOKO
BIDDING DOCUMENTS - VOL. 2: RUKUNGIRI

Project ID: N€P123204
Proc.Ref.: MWE/SVRCS/12-13/01473
Consultant:
HEAD OFFICE: Padova (Italy), 35030 – Rubano – via della Provvidenza, 13 – tel. +39 049 8976844 – fax +39 049 8976784
Capital stock € 5,000,000 – VAT number and registration at the Chamber of Commerce of Padova : 01155390287
www.sgi-spa.it – info@sgi-spa.it
PROJECT: 1404501 JUNE 2015

REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
WATER MANAGEMENT AND DEVELOPMENT PROJECT (WMDP)
CREDIT NO. 51270-UG
WATER SUPPLY AND SANITATION IN

RUKUNGIRI MUNICIPALITY, KATWE-KABATORO
AND KOBOKO TOWNS
ICB No.: MWE/WRKS/15-16/00013a
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
VOLUME 2a:
SECTION IV : BIDDING FORMS
- Bill Of Quantities
SECTION VII : WORKS REQUIREMENTS
- Specification and Supplementary Information
SEPTEMBER 2015
Ministry of Water & Environment

P.O.Box 20026
Kampala - Uganda
SCHEDULE OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
Section Subject
VOLUME 1 – Common for Lot 1 (Rukungiri), Lot 2 (Katwe-Kabatoro), Lot 3 (Koboko)
I INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (ITB)

II BID DATA SHEET (BDS)
III EVALUATION AND QUALIFICATION CRITERIA
IV BIDDING FORMS
- Letter of Bid
- Appendix to Bid
- Bill of Quantities (bound separately as Volume 2)
- Technical Proposal
- Personnel
- Bidders Qualification without Prequalification
- Form of Bid Security
V ELIGIBLE COUNTRIES
VI BANK POLICY - CORRUPT AND FRAUDULENT PRACTICES
VII WORKS REQUIREMENTS
- Scope of Works
- Specification and Supplementary Information (bound
separately as Volume 2)
- Drawings (bound separately as Volume 3)
VIII GENERAL CONDITIONS (GC)
- General Conditions
- Appendix: General Conditions of Dispute Board Agreement
- Procedural Rules
IX PARTICULAR CONDITIONS (PC)
- Part A: Contract Data
- Part B: Specific Provisions
X ANNEX TO THE PARTICULAR CONDITIONS – CONTRACT
FORMS
- Letter of Acceptance
- Contract Agreement
- Performance Security
- Advance Payment Security
- Retention Money Security
ATTACHMENT: INVITATION FOR BIDS
VOLUME 2 – Lot 1 (Rukungiri)
IV BIDDING FORMS
- Bill of Quantities
VOLUME 3 – Lot 1 (Rukungiri)

- Drawings
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
CREDIT NO. 51270-UG

AND KOBOKO TOWNS
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
VOLUME 2a:
SECTION IV : BIDDING FORMS
- Bill Of Quantities
SEPTEMBER 2015

P.O.Box 20026
Kampala - Uganda
BILL OF QUANTITIES
FOREWORD
For convenience and for reference purposes, certain Materials, Plant and other inputs or processes may have
been designated in the Specifications and in other Contract Documents by brand name, trade name or
catalogue name and number. Such designation shall be deemed to be followed by the words “or equivalent
approved” or “equal (approved)” or “or similar (and) approved” whether such words are shown or not.
Any reference to national standards such as BS shall also be deemed to be followed by the words “or
equivalent”.
Grand Summary
Grand Summary:
TOTAL COSTS FOR First Phase
TOTAL
Sr ITEMS
UGX
A.RP.06 GENERAL ITEMS --------------------
1 General Items
B.RP.05.1 WTP’S CIVIL WORKS --------------------
1 Intake works
2 Water treatment plant siteworks
3 Fine screening and flow divider
4 Chemical building (flocculant)
5 Clariflocculator
6 Filters building and backwash
7 Disinfection building, mixing and storage tanks
8 High lift pumping station
9 Equalization
10 Sludge thickening
11 Drying beds
12 Power house
13 Emergency generator room
14 Administration and workshop building
B.RP.05.2 WTP’S MECHANICAL WORKS --------------------
0 Intake works
1+2 Fine screening and flow divider
3 Clariflocculator
4 Chemical building (flocculant)
5+6 Filters building and backwash
7+8 Disinfection building, mixing and storage tanks
9 High lift pumping station
10 Emergency generator room
11 Power house
12 Administration and workshop building
13 Equalization
14 Sludge thickening
15 Drying beds
16 Instrumentation
B.RP.05.3 WTP’S ELECTRICAL WORKS --------------------
1 Electrical works for WTP
C.RP.03.1 TRANSMISSION PIPELINES --------------------
1 Raw water pumping main
2 Pure water pumping transmission system
3 Pure water gravity system - trunk 2
TOTAL
Sr ITEMS
UGX
C.RP.03.2 RESERVOIRS --------------------
1 R1
D.RP.02 SANITATION --------------------
6 Latrine 1
7 Latrine 2
8 Waste water discharge
TOTAL
5% Contingencies
GRAND TOTAL
GENERAL ITEMS
Summary:
ADDITION TOTAL
Sr GENERAL ITEMS N°
UGX UGX
1 General Items 1
Carried to Grand Summary
General Items First phase
ART. ITEM DESCRIPTION U.M. TOTAL COST
COD. QUANTITY UNIT TOTAL
Contractual Requirements
G.1 Insurance of works covering all installations during and up to 28 days
Sum 1
after the end of the defects liability period
G.2 Third party insurance Sum 1
G.3 Insurance of Contractors Equipment Sum 1
Offices and Housing
G.4 Establishment and removal of site offices for the Engineer's staff.
Sum 1
According to the instructions of the Engineer.
G.5 Provision of rented office accommodation for the Engineer's staff
before establishment of site offices. According to the instructions of Month 3
the Engineer.
G.6
Provision of fully furnished rented residential type accommodation for
Month 14
the Engineer's staff. According to the instructions of the Engineer.
G.7 Maintenance of offices for the Engineer's staff including provision
and payment of utility services. According to the instructions of the Month 14
Engineer.
G.8 Maintenance of housing accommodation for the Engineer's staff
including provision and payment of utility services, 24x7 security,
Month 14
housekeeping and food. According to the instructions of the
Engineer.
G.9 Provision of fully furnished rented office & residential type
accommodation for the Resident Engineer in Rukungiri. According Month 14
to the instructions of the Engineer.
G.10 Maintenance of office & housing accommodation for the Resident
Engineer in Rukungiri, including provision and payment of utility
Month 14
services, 24x7 security, housekeeping and food. According to the
instructions of the Engineer.
Transport Vehicles
G.12 Provision of 5-door SUV transport vehicle of 2900 cc minimum
engine capacity, wheel drive 4x4, 5 doors and 5 seats - standing No. 1
costs. According to the instructions of the Engineer.
G.13 5-door SUV transport vehicle - maintenance and running costs.
km 70,000
G.14 Provision of Pick-up transport vehicle of 2900 cc minimum engine
capacity, double cabinet, 4 doors - standing costs. According to the No. 1
G.15 Pick-up transport vehicle - maintenance and running costs.
km 25,000
G.16 Provision of motorcycle On-Off-Road of 650 cc minimum engine
capacity - standing costs. According to the instructions of the No. 1
Engineer.
G.17 Motorcycle On-Off-Road - maintenance and running costs. According
km 25,000
to the instructions of the Engineer.
Communication
G.18
Establish communication system and dedicated email (mobile,
Sum 2
wireless or leased line) system for the Engineer's office
G.19
Maintenance of communication system and dedicated email (mobile,
Month 28
wireless or leased line) system for the Engineer's office
Equipment for use by the Engineer's staff
G.20 Provision of office furniture & equipment for the Engineer Sum 2
G.21 Maintenance of office furniture & equipment for the Engineer Month 28
G.22 Provision & maintenance of laboratory equipment for use by the
Sum 1
Engineer
G.23 Provision & maintenance of surveying equipment for use by the
Month 7
Engineer
G.24 Provision of office stationary & office consumables for use in the
Month 28
Engineer's office
Attendance upon the Engineer's staff
G.25 Unskilled labour Month 14
G.26 Technician/Draftsman Month 14
A.RP.06.1 - BoQ of General Items Pag. 1

General Items First phase
ART. ITEM DESCRIPTION U.M. TOTAL COST
COD. QUANTITY UNIT TOTAL
Testing of Materials
G.27 Concrete works test cubes No. 200
Testing works
G.28
Pressure testing, sterilisation and commissioning of water mains km 30
G.29 Water tightedness tests for all water retaining structures including
Sum 1
sterilisation and commissioning
Temporary Works
G.30 Establishment & removal of site sign-boards No. 3
G.31 Maintenance of site sign-boards until the issue of the Taking-over
Month 14
Certificate
Provisional Sums
G.32 Location and/or alteration of existing services Sum 1 10,000,000 10,000,000
G.33 Soil and geotechnical investigation for Intake. According to the
No. 3 5,647,000 16,941,000
G.34 Soil and geotechnical investigation for WTP. According to the
No. 5 5,420,000 27,100,000
G.35 Soil and geotechnical investigation for Reservoir. According to the
No. 3 5,647,000 16,941,000
G.38
Due diligence visit to the plants of the manufacturers which will
provide pumps and main equipment, including the travel cost and 5-
No. 1 31,680,000 31,680,000
days DSA for 4 MWE officials and 2 people belonging to the
Engineer's staff. According to the instructions of the Engineer.
G.39 HIV - AIDS awareness programme, including regular provision of

Sum 1 100,000,000 100,000,000
condoms to the workforce.
Miscellaneous
G.40 Prepare operation and maintenance manuals as per specifications
Sum 1
and to the Engineer's approval
G.41 Prepare ''as-built'' or record drawings as per specifications and to
Sum 1
Engineer's approval
METHOD RELATED CHARGES
G.42 Mobilisation on site Sum 1
G.43 Demobilise on completion of the Works Sum 1
G.44 Supply and/or erect Contractor's site offices Sum 1
G.45 Maintain Contractor's site offices, including all services Month 14
G.46 Remove Contractor's site offices on completion of the Works Sum 1
Fixed charge items
G.47 Storage sheds and workshop Sum 1
Time related charge items
G.48 Supervision Month 14
Carried to Summary
A.RP.06.1 - BoQ of General Items Pag. 2

WATER TREATMENT
PLANT CIVIL WORKS
Summary:
TOTAL COSTS FOR First phase
ADDITION TOTAL
Sr N°
WTP'S CIVIL WORKS UGX UGX
1 Intake works 1
2 Water treatment plant siteworks 1
3 Fine screening and flow divider 1
4 Chemical building (flocculant) 1
5 Clariflocculator 2
6 Filters building and backwash 1
7 Disinfection building, mixing and storage tanks 1
8 High lift pumping station 1
9 Equalization 1
10 Sludge thickening 1
11 Drying beds 1
12 Power house 1
13 Emergency generator room 1
14 Administration and workshop building 1
RUKUNGIRI WATER TREATMENT PLANT
Intake works
ART. CIVIL WORKS U.M. TOTAL COST
COD. TO BE DONE QUANTITY UNIT TOTAL
B.1.1 DEMOLITION AND SITE CLEARANCE
General site clearance ha 0.11
General site clearance for works
B.1.3 DEMOLITION AND SITE CLEARANCE
Trees
Cut and dispose of trees of the following girth; include removal of nr 4
stump and backfilling the hole left with top soil
Girth 500 mm-1 m
B.1.4
DEMOLITION AND SITE CLEARANCE
Stumps
Remove and dispose of stumps of the following diameter; include for nr 4
grabbing up the roots and backfilling the hole left with top soil
Diameter 150-500 mm
B.1.7 EARTHWORKS
Excavation for foundations
m³ 124
Topsoil
Strip top soil,depth not exceeding 0.3m for site
B.1.11
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
m³ 345
Excavation for foundations in material other than topsoil, rock or
artificial hard material, commencing surface is the formation level
Depth 2-5m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.10 m³ 251
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.15 m³ 73
Excavation for foundations in rock, commencing surface is the
exposed surface of the rock
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.16 m³ 382
Depth 2-5m
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
B.1.18 Trimming of excavated surfaces for whole structure in the following m² 107
materials
Material other than topsoil, rock, or artificial hard material inclined at
an angle not exceeding 45 degrees to the horizontal
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
Rock surfaces inclined at an angle not exceeding 45 degrees to the
horizontal
B.RP.05.1.1 - BoQ of the civil works for WTP Pag. 1

Intake works
EARTHWORKS
Preparation
B.1.21 Preparation of excavated surfaces for whole structure in the following m² 182
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
Disposal of Excavated Material
B.1.23 m³ 596
Disposal of excavated material to sites as specified and as directed
by the Engineer
Material other than topsoil,rock,or artificial hard material
EARTHWORKS
B.1.24 m³ 526
by the Engineer
Rock
EARTHWORKS
Filling
Structures
Filling by methods specified and to depths as shown in the drawings
B.1.25 m³ 205
with the following materials
Selected excavated granular material other than topsoil, rock or
artificial hard material to tank base and compacted to 98% MOD
AASHTO
EARTHWORKS
Filling
Structures
B.1.26 m³ 55
Excavated rockfill to structure stabilisation
EARTHWORKS
Filling
General filling - Shoreline
B.1.27 m³ 59
Filling to to stabilise shoreline by methods specified and to depths as
shown in the drawings with the following materials
Excavated rockfill for shoreline stabilisation
EARTHWORKS
Landscaping
B.1.29 m² 173
Turfing for lawns; include filling with excavated topsoil and the
preparation of the surfaces
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Provision of Concrete
Ordinary Designed Mix Concrete
Grade C20
B.1.33 m³ 37
Designed mix, grade C20 concrete, to BS 5328, with ordinary
portland cement to BS 12 , aggregate to BS882 , for the following
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C35A
B.1.35 m³ 574
Designed mix, grade C35A concrete, to BS 5328, with ordinary
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate

Intake works
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Placing Mass Concrete
Blinding
B.1.37 m³ 37
'Placing blinding concrete, for ground slab, grade C20, of the
following thickness
Thickness not exceeding 150mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Placing Reinforced Concrete
Bases, Footings and Ground Slabs
B.1.43 m³ 69
Placing reinforced concrete C35A, for ground slab and of the
following thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.44 m³ 69
following thickness
Thickness 300-500mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.45 m³ 143
following thickness
Thickness 500-1000mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Suspended Slabs
B.1.48 m³ 92
Placing reinforced concrete, grade C35A, for top slab of the following
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.53 m³ 10
Placing reinforced concrete, grade C35A, for walls of the following
thickness
Thickness not exceeding 150 mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.55 m³ 179
thickness
Thickness 300 - 500mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Beams
B.1.57 m³ 7
Placing reinforced concrete, grade C35A, for beams of the following
thickness
Cross-sectional area 0.03 - 0.3 m2
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Columns
B.1.59 m³ 5
Placing reinforced concrete, grade C35A, for square of the following
cross-sectional area
CONCRETE ANCILLARIES
Formwork-Fair Finish
B.1.61 Fair Finish Plane Horizontal m² 21
Plane fair finish horizontal formwork of the following width
Width: 0.4-1.22 m
Width exceeding 1.22 m

Intake works
B.1.63 Fair Finish Plane Vertical m² 40
Plane fair finish vertical formwork of the following width
Width: 0.1-0.4 m
Reinforcement
B.1.66 Deformed high yield steel bars in grade 460 and ductility class B t 53
(460B) to BS4449 and of the following sizes
Nominal size, 6-20mm
Joints
B.1.67 m 520
Plastic waterstops of PVC to BS 903 of the following width
Width 150 - 300mm
Concrete Accessories
B.1.69 Finishing of top surfaces m² 84
Finishing of top surfaces by the following methods
Class U3 Steel float finish
BRICKWORK, BLOCKWORK AND MASONRY
Solid burnt clay brickwork
Solid burnt clay brickwork to BS 3921, jointed with ordinary 1:4
B.1.87 m² 116
cement mortar, hoop irons every three courses, and of the following
thicknesses
300 mm thick
B.1.88 Damp proof course of bitumen impregnated fabric to BS 6398 for the m 10
following wall thickness
300 mm thick
PAINTING
High Gloss
Masonry
B.1.90 External quality weather guard paint, two coats, to the following m² 831
smooth concrete surfaces; include surface preparation
Surfaces of walls inclined at an angle exceeding 60 degrees to the
horizontal
PAINTING
Emulsion Paint
Masonry
B.1.91 Internal quality vinyl silk paint, two coats, to the following smooth m² 128
concrete surfaces; include surface preparation
horizontal
WATER PROOFING
Damp Proofing
B.1.92 Rendering m² 128
Surfaces to walls inclined at an angle exceeding 60 degrees to the
horizontal in ordinary cement mortar
Inserts
B.1.82 nr 2
Pipe inserts projecting from two faces of the concrete and of the
following sizes, excluding supply of pipe
125 mm ND

Intake works
Inserts
B.1.84 nr 3
200 mm ND
Inserts
B.1.85 nr 5
250 mm ND
WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
Flexible polyethylene sheeting, gauge 1000, or similar approved, laid
B.1.93 m² 182
to the surface of blinding concrete or sand blinded hardcore fill
Surfaces inclined at an angle not exceeding 30 degrees to the
horizontal
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Building Finishes
B.1.133 m² 208
Roof covering with 80x80 cm slabs laid on protective layers and sub-
layers as indicated in the drawings and to the Engineer's satisfaction.
ROADS AND PAVINGS

Sub-Bases
Shape road surface by medium grading to camber and crossfall with
B.1.248 a motor grader m² 575
Depth not exceeding 150 mm
- access road
ROADS AND PAVINGS
Sub-Bases and Bases
Provide, transport up to site, spread, shape, stabilise and compact to
atleast 95% MDD AASHTO gravel material for flexible sub-base, of
B.1.249 thickness 150-300 mm. m² 575
Including supply and laying of prime coat layer and execution of road
pavement made of 15 cm-thick reinforced concrete.
- access road
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Fences
100x100mm Concrete post of C25 concrete and wire galvanised wire
B.1.255 m 58
chain link fence of gauge 10 to BS 1722, with triple row of barbed wire
on top, anchored into blockwork dwarf wall as per drawings, height
2.5-3 m
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Gates
B.1.256 Supply and complete installation of metal field gate to BS 3470 in C25 nr 1
concrete pad foundations; complete and of the following widths
Width 2 m, one leaf
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Gates
concrete pad foundations; complete
width 4-5 m with motor and wheels for sliding opening

Intake works
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Windows
Supply and installation of windows with crystals, performed with
different profiles depending on the size and location, comprising:
frames made by steel with open joints, mm of section 45 (for fixed
frames) and 52 mm (for opening swinging doors ), complete with sills
45 mm with lateral development of the flaps - 2 cm, internal thickness
12/10 of internal flaps, interior and exterior trims - for covering the
cables - safety crystals 3 +3, or ventilation grid - fixed aluminum type -
B.1.97 nr 1
hinges and locking devices of movement with a hammer handle or
lever. including the formation of protective grates and network against
the birds, which comprises the production of the lintel and shoulders,
to be carried in reinforced concrete, including the respective
reinforcing iron and the formworks, all anchored to the walls of
buildings
Overall size 1200 x 1200 mm high comprising 200mm permanent
louvered vent and single shutter complete with 4mm thick clear glass
panes, and burglar proofing
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Doors
Supply and installation of external doors over 2.0 meters in width, with
closure of the manual type (as book), for passage of machinery in
general, consist of: modular aluminum elements, sliding on the upper
and lower galvanized steel guides, with folding doors that open to
"four or more modules (panels) that is in function on the width of the
door . the modules will be divided into sections that can be of type:
closed with infill panel sandwich double sheet of aluminum with
B.1.101 nr 2
soundproof internal lining , grille of ventilation with fixed type
aluminum with unbreakable glass 3 +3. They must be complete:
internal and external trims, appropriately sized hinges, locks and
handles. Including the construction of lintel and shoulders , to be
carried reinforced concrete, including the respective reinforcing iron
and the formworks, all anchored to the walls of buildings
Three leaf louvered door overall size 2100 x 2000mm high filled in
with 100 x 2mm thick mild steel louvers welded to frame ( 2500 mm x
2500 mm)
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
B.1.117 Plumbing and Drainage m 5
Supply and lay ID 125mm CI PN6 drainage pipework.
Carried to Summary

RUKUNGIRI WATER TREATMENT PLANT First phase
Water treatment plant siteworks
B.1.1 General site clearance ha 1.61

Anti-termite Treatment
B.1.2 sum 1
Apply Anti-termite treatment to the final excavation level and
excavated sides of all foundations to receive permanent works

Trees
B.1.3 Cut and dispose of trees of the following girth; include removal of nr 11
Girth 500 mm-1 m

Stumps
B.1.4 Remove and dispose of stumps of the following diameter; include for nr 6
Diameter 150-500 mm

Stumps
Diameter 500mm -1 m
EARTHWORKS
B.1.6 m³ 1,667
Topsoil
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.8 General excavation, for road works and parking area, in material m³ 1,389
other than topsoil, rock or artificial hard material, commencing surface
is the stripped ground level
Depth 0.25-0,5m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.9 m³ 1,039
Depth 0.5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.10 m³ 440
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.13 General excavation, for road works and parking area, in material m³ 18
Depth 0.25-0,5m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.14 m³ 249
Depth 0,5-1m

EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.15 m³ 101
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
B.1.22 m³ 1,667
by the Engineer
Top soil
EARTHWORKS
B.1.23 m³ 2,868
by the Engineer
EARTHWORKS
B.1.24 m³ 367
by the Engineer
Rock
EARTHWORKS
Landscaping
B.1.29 m² 10,117
Turfing for lawns; include filling with excavated topsoil and the
preparation of the surfaces
PIPEWORK-PIPES
Plastic Pipes
uPVC Pipes
B.1.136 m 1,357
uPVC drain pipes, to EN 1401-1, with joints to ISO 1452-3, 25 mm
OD PN6, laid in trench to the following depths
Depth not exceeding 1.5m
PIPEWORK-PIPES
Plastic Pipes
uPVC Pipes
B.1.138 m 63
PIPEWORK-PIPES
Stainless steel Pipes
B.1.152 Stainless steel pipes, 60mm ND, all to ISO 559:1991 and to PN6 laid m 242
in trench to the following depths
PIPEWORK-PIPES
Cast or Spun Iron Pipes
Ductile spun iron pipes with spigot and socket type joints and cement
B.1.157 m 104
mortar linings, 100mm ND, all to EN 545 and to PN6 laid in trench to
the following depths
PIPEWORK-PIPES
Plastic Pipes
uPVC Pipes
B.1.139 m 17
PIPEWORK-PIPES
B.1.158 m 92

PIPEWORK-PIPES
B.1.159 m 115
PIPEWORK-PIPES
Plastic Pipes
uPVC Pipes
B.1.141 m 81
PIPEWORK-PIPES
B.1.162 m 99
PIPEWORK-PIPES
B.1.163 m 33
Depth 1.5 - 2 m
PIPEWORK-PIPES
B.1.164 m 104
PIPEWORK-PIPES
B.1.165 m 35
Depth 1.5 - 2 m
PIPEWORK-PIPES
Plastic Pipes
uPVC Pipes
B.1.147 m 52
PIPEWORK-PIPES
Plastic Pipes
uPVC Pipes
B.1.148 m 17
Depth 1.5-2m
PIPEWORK-PIPES
B.1.166 m 98
Depth 1.5 - 2 m
PIPEWORK-PIPES
Plastic Pipes
uPVC Pipes
B.1.142 m 299
uPVC conduit pipes for cable protection, 160 mm OD, laid in trench to
Depth 1.5-2m

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES
uPVC Pipe Fittings
B.1.171 Bends nr 10
uPVC bends with push-fit joint to use with uPVC pipes, PN6 - 45
degree 40 mm OD
uPVC Pipe Fittings
B.1.172 Bends nr 2
degree 40 mm OD
uPVC Pipe Fittings
B.1.173 Bends nr 1
uPVC bends with push-fit joint to use with uPVC pipes, PN6 - 22.5
degree 110 mm OD
uPVC Pipe Fittings
B.1.178 Bends nr 1
degree 160 mm OD
uPVC Pipe Fittings
B.1.182 Bends nr 6
degree 225 mm OD
uPVC Pipe Fittings
B.1.183 Bends nr 6
degree 225 mm OD
uPVC Pipe Fittings
B.1.184 Bends nr 6
degree 225 mm OD
uPVC Pipe Fittings
B.1.188 Bends nr 3
degree 315 mm OD
uPVC Pipe Fittings
B.1.190 Bends nr 10
degree 315 mm OD
Stainless Steel Pipe Fittings
Bends
B.1.200 nr 5
Stainless steel 22.5 degree bends, all to PN6, and of the following
sizes
60 mm ND

B.1.201 Bends nr 3
Stainless steel 45 degree bends, all to PN6, and of the following sizes
60 mm ND

B.1.202 Bends nr 1
Stainless steel 90 degree bends, all to PN6, and of the following sizes
60 mm ND


Cast or Spun Iron Pipe Fittings
Bends
B.1.208 nr 14
Ductile iron all flanged 90 degree bend, to EN 545, flanges to EN
1092-2, all to PN6, cement mortar lined, and of the following sizes
100 mm ND

Bends
B.1.209 nr 2
Ductile iron all flanged 22.5 degree bends, to EN 545, flanges to EN
125 mm ND

Bends
B.1.210 nr 1
Ductile iron all flanged 45 degree bends, to EN 545, flanges to EN
125 mm ND

Bends
B.1.213 nr 6
150 mm ND

Bends
B.1.214 nr 7
150 mm ND

Bends
B.1.218 nr 1
Ductile iron all flanged 22.5 degree bends, to EN 545, flanges to EN
250 mm ND

Bends
B.1.219 nr 7
250 mm ND

Bends
B.1.220 nr 4
250 mm ND

Bends
B.1.221 nr 1
Ductile iron all flanged 22.5 degree bend, to EN 545, flanges to EN
300 mm ND


Bends
B.1.222 nr 2
300 mm ND

Bends
B.1.223 nr 6
300 mm ND

Bends
B.1.225 nr 12
350 mm ND

Bends
B.1.226 nr 7
350 mm ND

Junctions and Branches
B.1.227 nr 5
Ductile iron all flanged tee to EN 545, flanges to EN 1092-2, all to
PN6, cement mortar lined, and of the following sizes
200/200 mm ND
Double Collars
B.1.228 nr 3
Viking Johnson or similar, wide range coupling to fit all pipe spigots
to PN6, and of the following sizes
200 mm ND
Double Collars
B.1.229 nr 5
Viking Johnson or similar, wide range coupling to fit all pipe spigots
to PN6, and of the following sizes
300 mm ND
Adaptors
B.1.230 Flange adaptor of large tolerance conforming with EN 14525, maxi nr 5
type to fit all pipe spigots, flanges to EN 1092-2, all to PN6, and of the
following sizes
200 mm ND
Adaptors
B.1.231 Flange adaptor of large tolerance conforming with EN 14525, maxi nr 7
type to fit all pipe spigots, flanges to EN 1092-2, all to PN6, and of the
following sizes
300 mm ND


Straight Specials
B.1.232 nr 4
Ductile iron flanged and plain ended pipe, to EN 545, flanges to EN
1092-2, cement mortar lined, all to PN6 and of the following sizes
200 mm ND and not exceeding 3.5m length

Straight Specials
B.1.233 nr 5
Ductile iron double flanged pipe, to EN 545, flanges to EN 1092-2,
cement mortar lined, all to PN6 and of the following sizes

Straight Specials
B.1.234 nr 3
Ductile iron double flanged pipe, to EN 545, flanges to EN 1092-2,
cement mortar lined, all to PN6 and of the following sizes
PIPEWORK - MANHOLES AND PIPEWORK ANCILLARIES

Manholes
In-situ Concrete Manhole
B.1.235 nr 2
Reinforced concrete manhole complete, include lockable cover slab,
all finishes and of the following depths
Manholes
B.1.236 nr 3
Depth 1.5-2m
PIPEWORK - MANHOLES AND PIPEWORKANCILLARIES
Manholes
B.1.237 nr 1
Depth 2.5-3m
Other Chambers
In-situ concrete washout out fall structure, complete including flap
B.1.239 valve, all fittings and pipework necessary to complete installation, as nr 8
specified in drawings, and of the following depths; all fittings and
pipework to PN6
French Drains, Ditches and Trenches
Excavation
B.1.240 m 69
Trapezoidal section ditches, lined with concrete of the following cross
section area
Area 0.25-0.5 m²
Other Pipework Ancillaries
B.1.241 nr 1
Marker Posts
Marker posts for valves
B.1.242 nr 2
Marker Posts
Marker posts for meters
B.1.243 nr 2
Marker Posts
Pipe markers

PIPEWORK-SUPPORTS AND PROTECTION, ANCILLARIES TO
LAYING AND EXCAVATION
Extras to Excavation and Backfilling
B.1.244 m³ 52
In Pipe Trenches
Extras to excavation in pipe trenches in the following materials
In rock
B.1.245 Sorround m 60
'Pipe surrounds, of selected excavated granular material, for the
following pipe sizes
Diameter not exceeding 200 mm ND
Surrounds
B.1.246 m 127
Pipe surrounds, of imported granular material, for the following pipe
sizes
Diameter 200-300 mm ND
Concrete Stools and Thrust Blocks
B.1.247 Thrust Blocks nr 7
Mass concrete grade C15 thrust blocks for pipes and fittings, volume
0.2 - 0.5 m³, for the following pipe sizes
ROADS AND PAVINGS
Sub-Bases
B.1.248 a motor grader m² 258
- access road
ROADS AND PAVINGS
Sub-Bases and Bases
B.1.249 thickness 150-300 mm. m² 258
- access road
ROADS AND PAVINGS
Surfacing
Wearing course of asphalt concrete and slurry double surface
B.1.250 m² 258
bitumen seal, placed and rolled; to Engineer's approval
- access road
ROADS AND PAVINGS
Sub-Bases
B.1.248 a motor grader m² 3,949
- WTP area
ROADS AND PAVINGS
Sub-Bases and Bases
B.1.249 thickness 150-300 mm. m² 3,949
- WTP area

ROADS AND PAVINGS
Surfacing
Wearing course of asphalt concrete and slurry double surface
B.1.250 m² 3,949
bitumen seal, placed and rolled; to Engineer's approval
- WTP area
ROADS AND PAVINGS
Kerbs
B.1.251 Supply and construct Kerbs of pre-cast concrete to BS 7263 of cross m 1,344
section area 0.05-0.1 m² to the following alignment
Straight or curved to a radius exceeding 12 m
ROADS AND PAVINGS
Kerbs
B.1.252 Supply and construct Kerbs of pre-cast concrete to BS 7263 of cross m 71
section area 0.05-0.1 m² to the following alignment
To a radius not exceeding 12 m
ROADS AND PAVINGS
Drainage
B.1.253 nr 12
Supply and installation of grid to drain rainwater size marked on the
approved drawings
ROADS AND PAVINGS

Walkways
B.1.254 m² 395
Concrete (C20) paved walkway in 600 x 600 x 50mm thick sections;
include sand bedding, earthworks, jointing and edge protection
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Fences
100x100mm Concrete post of C25 concrete and wire galvanised wire
B.1.255 m 581
chain link fence of gauge 10 to BS 1722, with triple row of barbed wire
on top, anchored into blockwork dwarf wall as per drawings, height
2.5-3 m
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Gates
concrete pad foundations; complete and of the following widths
Width 2 m, one leaf
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Gates
concrete pad foundations; complete
width 4-5 m with motor and wheels for sliding opening
Carried to Summary

Fine screening and flow divider
B.1.1 General site clearance ha 0.05
Trees
B.1.3 Cut and dispose of trees of the following girth; include removal of nr 2
Girth 500 mm-1 m

Stumps
Diameter 150-500 mm
EARTHWORKS
B.1.7 m³ 26
Topsoil
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.9 m³ 69
Depth 0.5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.10 m³ 69
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.11 m³ 88
Depth 2-5m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.8 General excavation, for road works and parking area, in material m³ 9
Depth 0.25-0,5m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.16 m³ 206
Depth 2-5m
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials

EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
Preparation
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
B.1.23 m³ 121
by the Engineer
EARTHWORKS
B.1.24 m³ 231
by the Engineer
Rock
EARTHWORKS
Filling
Structures
B.1.25 m³ 82
AASHTO
EARTHWORKS
Filling
Structures
B.1.26 m³ 23
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C20
B.1.33 m³ 13
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C35A
B.1.35 m³ 126
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Blinding
B.1.37 m³ 9
following thickness

IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.38 m³ 5
Filling
Placing plain concrete for filling, grade C20
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.43 m³ 8
following thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.45 m³ 52
following thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Suspended Slabs
B.1.48 m³ 0.3
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Suspended Slabs
B.1.49 m³ 13.1
thickness
Thickness 300-500mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.55 m³ 52
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Beams
B.1.57 m³ 1
thickness
Width: 0.4-1.22 m
Reinforcement
Joints
B.1.67 m 276
Width 150 - 300mm

Inserts
B.1.82 nr 6
125 mm ND
Inserts
B.1.84 nr 3
200 mm ND
WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
B.1.93 m² 70
horizontal
WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
Sand cement screed of 1:3 cement sand mortar, applied to concrete,
B.1.94 m² 417
25 mm thick, prepared and applied
Surfaces of vertical walls, include primice finish inclined at an angle
exceeding 30 degrees to the horizontal
WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
B.1.96 Sand cement screed of 1:3 cement sand mortar, applied to concrete, m² 247
'External Surfaces of vertical wall
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Plumbing and Drainage
B.1.118 nr 1
Supply and installation of 250 mm OD flexible rubber pipe for
discharge of screened material.
Carried to Summary

Chemical building (flocculant)
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.9 m³ 149
Depth 0.5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.10 m³ 132
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.14 m³ 17
Depth 0,5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.15 m³ 35
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.16 m³ 283
Depth 2-5m
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
Preparation
materials
EARTHWORKS
Preparation
materials
horizontal

EARTHWORKS
B.1.23 m³ 281
by the Engineer
EARTHWORKS
B.1.24 m³ 334
by the Engineer
Rock
EARTHWORKS
Filling
Structures
B.1.25 m³ 104
AASHTO
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C10
B.1.32 m³ 19
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C20
B.1.33 m³ 13
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C25
B.1.34 m³ 266
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Blinding
B.1.36 m³ 19
Placing blinding concrete, for ground slab, grade C10, of the following
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.38 m³ 13
Filling
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.40 m³ 9
Placing reinforced concrete C25, for ground slab and of the following
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm

IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.41 m³ 139
thickness
Thickness 300-500mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Suspended Slabs
B.1.46 m³ 49
Placing reinforced concrete, grade C25, for top slab of the following
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.50 m³ 2
Placing reinforced concrete, grade C25, for walls of the following
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.52 m³ 51
thickness
Thickness 300-500mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Beams
B.1.56 m³ 7
Placing reinforced concrete, grade C25, for beams of the following
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Columns
B.1.58 m³ 10
Placing reinforced concrete, grade C25, for square of the following
Width: 0.1-0,4 m
Width: 0.4-1,22 m
Reinforcement

B.1.87 m² 187
thicknesses
300 mm thick
300 mm thick
PAINTING
High Gloss
Masonry
horizontal
PAINTING
Emulsion Paint
Masonry
horizontal
WATER PROOFING
Damp Proofing
WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
B.1.93 m² 166
horizontal
WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
B.1.95 m² 121
'Surfaces of floors inclined at an angle not exceeding 30 degrees to
the horizontal
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Doors
Supply and installation of exterior doors with one or two steel doors,
accompanied by at least three hinges, with mortise lock strike plate
B.1.102 nr 1
with rim and chrome, including the supply and installation of marble
threshold
Single leaf louvered door with size 1000 mm x 2100 mm high filled in
with 100 x 2mm thick mild steel louvers welded to frame

MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Doors
B.1.105 nr 1
Three leaf louvered door overall size 2100 x 2000mm high filled in
with 100 x 2mm thick mild steel louvers welded to frame ( 3500 mm x
5100 mm)
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Doors
B.1.107 nr 1
Four leaf louvered door overall size 2100 x 2000mm high filled in with
100 x 2mm thick mild steel louvers welded to frame ( 4000 mm x
3000 mm)
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Windows
B.1.98 nr 7
buildings

MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Building Finishes
Building finishes including, constructing C20 1.0x2.0m entrance
B.1.129 ramps, 20x100mm high 1:3 cement-sand skirting, 1500mm high toilet sum 1
wall ceramic tiling and C20 concrete window cills, 1000mm wide C20
concrete splash apron, complete to the specifications and as directed
by the Engineer
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
B.1.130 Building Finishes m² 96
Supply and lay glazed ceramic tiling for the chemical mixing tanks
Carried to Summary

Clariflocculator
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.9 m³ 166
Depth 0.5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.10 m³ 129
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.11 m³ 382
Depth 2-5m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.14 m³ 18
Depth 0,5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.15 m³ 55
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.16 m³ 255
Depth 2-5m
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
Preparation
materials

Clariflocculator
EARTHWORKS
Preparation
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
B.1.23 m³ 539
by the Engineer
EARTHWORKS
B.1.24 m³ 359
by the Engineer
Rock
EARTHWORKS
Filling
Structures
B.1.25 m³ 332
AASHTO
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C20
B.1.33 m³ 12
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C25
B.1.34 m³ 1.4
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C35A
B.1.35 m³ 207
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Blinding
B.1.37 m³ 7
following thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.38 m³ 5
Filling

Clariflocculator
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.44 m³ 97
following thickness
Thickness 300-500mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Suspended Slabs
B.1.48 m³ 12
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.51 m³ 1.4
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
- Stairs
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.54 m³ 44
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.55 m³ 50
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Beams
B.1.57 m³ 4
thickness
Width: 0.1-0,4 m
Width: 0.4-1.22 m
Width: 0.1-0.4 m
Width: 0.4-1,22 m

Clariflocculator
Reinforcement
Joints
B.1.67 m 385
Width 150 - 300mm
Class U3 steel trowel finish
Inserts
B.1.74 nr 2
Pipe inserts projecting from one face of the concrete and of the
following sizes, excluding supply of pipe.
125 mm ND
Inserts
B.1.81 nr 1
110 mm OD
Inserts
B.1.82 nr 1
125 mm ND
Inserts
B.1.83 nr 1
150 mm ND
Inserts
B.1.86 nr 2
350 mm ND
PIPEWORK - MANHOLES AND PIPEWORKANCILLARIES
Manholes
B.1.237 nr 1
Depth 2.5-3m
Reinforced concrete manhole complete, include lockable valve
B.1.238 nr 1
surface box in cover slab, step irons, benching, all finishes and of the
following depths
Depth 3.5-4m
MISCELLANEOUS WORK
Open Grid Flooring
Mild steel open grid flooring to BS 4592, galvanized to BS 729,
B.1.262 m² 29
complete with galvanized frames and supports, fixed onto a
reinforced concrete structure, and of the following widths
Width not exceeding 6.0m
Carried to Summary

Filters building and backwash
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.9 m³ 136
Depth 0.5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.10 m³ 106
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.11 m³ 60
Depth 2-5m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.14 m³ 15
Depth 0,5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.15 m³ 45
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.16 m³ 241
Depth 2-5m
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
Preparation
materials

EARTHWORKS
Preparation
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
B.1.23 m³ 302
by the Engineer
EARTHWORKS
B.1.24 m³ 302
by the Engineer
Rock
EARTHWORKS
Filling
Structures
B.1.25 m³ 698
AASHTO
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C20
B.1.33 m³ 161
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C35A
B.1.35 m³ 1,517
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Blinding
B.1.37 m³ 64
following thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.38 m³ 97
Filling
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.43 m³ 33
following thickness
Thickness 150-300mm

IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.44 m³ 318
following thickness
Thickness 300-500mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Suspended Slabs
B.1.48 m³ 364
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.53 m³ 7
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.54 m³ 11
thickness
- Channels
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.54 m³ 1
thickness
- Stairs
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.55 m³ 773
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Beams
B.1.57 m³ 9
thickness
Width: 0.1-0,4 m
Width: 0.1-0.4 m
Width: 0.4-1,22 m

Reinforcement
Joints
B.1.67 m 1,599
Width 150 - 300mm
Inserts
B.1.72 nr 8
100 mm ND
Inserts
B.1.75 nr 16
150 mm ND
Inserts
B.1.76 nr 8
200 mm ND
Inserts
B.1.77 nr 2
250 mm ND
Inserts
B.1.78 nr 6
300 mm ND
Inserts
B.1.79 nr 1
315 mm ND
WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
B.1.93 m² 529
horizontal

WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
B.1.94 m² 1,703
WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
B.1.96 Sand cement screed of 1:3 cement sand mortar, applied to concrete, m² 1,484
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Doors
External doors over 2.0 meters in width, with closure of the manual
type (as book), for passage of machinery in general, consist of:
modular aluminum elements, sliding on the upper and lower
galvanized steel guides, with folding doors that open to "four or more
modules (panels) that is in function on the width of the door . the
modules will be divided into sections that can be of type: closed with
B.1.116 nr 1
infill panel sandwich double sheet of aluminum with soundproof
internal lining , grille of ventilation with fixed type aluminum with
unbreakable glass 3 +3. They must be complete: internal and external
trims, appropriately sized hinges, locks and handles. Including the
construction of lintel and shoulders , to be carried reinforced
concrete, including the respective reinforcing iron and the formworks,
all anchored to the walls of buildings.
Main Steel Door 2500mm x 2500mm high
MISCELLANEOUS WORK
Doors
Supply and installation of internal steel doors with single or double
doors up to 2 meters in width, for access to the premises, consisting
B.1.111 nr 1
of chassis and counter frame at tubular steel galvanized panels,
simple galvanized sheet steel thickness 10 / 10 mm with lock and
handle and also horizontal chrome handle for antipanic
Single leaf door overall size 900 x 2100mm high with 200 steel pvo
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Windows
B.1.98 nr 1
buildings
MISCELLANEOUS WORK
Manhole Cover
B.1.263 nr 8
Aluminium cover with stainless steel of following sizes.
800 mm x 800

B.1.87 m² 112
thicknesses
300 mm thick
300 mm thick
PAINTING
High Gloss
Masonry
horizontal

Disinfection building, mixing and storage tanks
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.9 m³ 391
Depth 0.5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.10 m³ 299
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.11 m³ 391
Depth 2-5m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.14 m³ 46
Depth 0,5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.15 m³ 132
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.16 m³ 846
Depth 2-5m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.17 m³ 907
Depth 5-7.5m
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
horizontal

EARTHWORKS
Preparation
materials
EARTHWORKS
Preparation
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
B.1.23 m³ 1,081
by the Engineer
EARTHWORKS
B.1.24 m³ 1,932
by the Engineer
Rock
EARTHWORKS
Filling
Structures
B.1.25 m³ 114
AASHTO
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C20
B.1.33 m³ 65
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C25
B.1.34 m³ 42
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C35A
B.1.35 m³ 733
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate

IN-SITU CONCRETE
Blinding
B.1.37 m³ 49
following thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.38 m³ 16
Filling
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.41 m³ 22
thickness
Thickness 300-500mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.44 m³ 194
following thickness
Thickness 300-500mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.45 m³ 51
following thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Suspended Slabs
B.1.46 m³ 15
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Suspended Slabs
B.1.48 m³ 112
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.50 m³ 2
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.51 m³ 1
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.54 m³ 113
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.55 m³ 261
thickness

IN-SITU CONCRETE
Beams
B.1.56 m³ 3
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Columns
B.1.59 m³ 2
Reinforcement
Joints
B.1.67 m 702
Width 150 - 300mm
Inserts
B.1.77 nr 9
250 mm ND
Inserts
B.1.78 nr 1
300 mm ND
Inserts
B.1.85 nr 9
250 mm ND
B.1.87 m² 48
thicknesses
300 mm thick
300 mm thick
WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
B.1.93 m² 294
horizontal
WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
B.1.94 m² 1,213

WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
B.1.96 Sand cement screed of 1:3 cement sand mortar, applied to concrete, m² 368
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Doors
B.1.108 closed with infill panel sandwich double sheet of aluminum with nr 1
Double leaf door 2500 x 2400mm (W x H) with 300mm permanent
louvered vent with 75 x 2mm steel louvers
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Windows
B.1.98 nr 2
buildings
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Building Finishes
B.1.133 m² 44
Carried to Summary

High lift pumping station
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.9 m³ 288
Depth 0.5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.10 m³ 236
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.11 m³ 437
Depth 2-5m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.14 m³ 52
Depth 0,5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.15 m³ 104
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.16 m³ 466
Depth 2-5m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.17 m³ 577
Depth 5-7.5m
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
horizontal

EARTHWORKS
Preparation
materials
EARTHWORKS
Preparation
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
B.1.23 m³ 1,075
by the Engineer
EARTHWORKS
B.1.24 m³ 1,198
by the Engineer
Rock
EARTHWORKS
Filling
Structures
B.1.25 m³ 140
AASHTO
EARTHWORKS
Filling
Structures
B.1.26 m³ 94
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C10
B.1.32 m³ 37
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C25
B.1.34 m³ 409
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate

IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C35A
B.1.35 m³ 153
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Blinding
B.1.36 m³ 37
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.40 m³ 5
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.41 m³ 201
thickness
Thickness 300-500mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.44 m³ 63
following thickness
Thickness 300-500mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Suspended Slabs
B.1.46 m³ 17
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.50 m³ 7
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.52 m³ 119
thickness
Thickness 300-500mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.55 m³ 71
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.53 m³ 36
thickness

IN-SITU CONCRETE
Columns
B.1.58 m³ 25
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Columns
B.1.59 m³ 20
Width: 0.1-0,4 m
B.1.63 Fair Finish Plane Vertical m² 1,045
Width: 0.1-0.4 m
Reinforcement
Class U2 wood float finish
Inserts
B.1.81 nr 1
110 mm OD
Inserts
B.1.83 nr 4
150 mm ND
PIPEWORK-SUPPORTS AND PROTECTION,

ANCILLARIES TO LAYING AND EXCAVATION
Other Isolated Pipe Supports
B.1.265 Galvanised steel pipe supports 6mm thick, as in drawings, complete nr 4
including 10mm thick foundation bases, straps and bolting, all
galvanised to BS 729, for the following height and pipe sizes
150mm ND, height 1.0-1.5m
Inserts
B.1.84 nr 3
200 mm ND

PIPEWORK-SUPPORTS AND PROTECTION,

ANCILLARIES TO LAYING AND EXCAVATION
Other Isolated Pipe Supports
B.1.266 Galvanised steel pipe supports 6mm thick, as in drawings, complete nr 3
including 10mm thick foundation bases, straps and bolting, all
galvanised to BS 729, for the following height and pipe sizes
200mm ND, height 1.0-1.5m

B.1.87 m² 388
thicknesses
300 mm thick
300 mm thick
PAINTING
High Gloss
Masonry
horizontal
PAINTING
Emulsion Paint
Masonry
horizontal
WATER PROOFING
Damp Proofing
B.1.92 Rendering m² 1,100
WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
B.1.93 m² 260
horizontal
WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
B.1.95 m² 171
the horizontal
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
B.1.110 Rolling Shutter m² 12
Supply and fix MS rolling shutter of size 3000 x 3500 (W x H)
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Doors
B.1.103 nr 1
threshold

MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Windows
B.1.98 nr 14
buildings
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Building Finishes
B.1.133 m² 280
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
B.1.267 Pump Plinth Joints sum 7
Movement joint fill around pump plinths
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Pump Plinth Joints
Pump house finishes including, constructing 20x100mm high 1:3
B.1.268 sum 1
cement-sand skirting, C20 concrete window cills, 700mm wide C20
concrete splash apron, etc complete to the specifications and as
directed by the Engineer
Carried to Summary

Equalization
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.9 m³ 48
Depth 0.5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.10 m³ 47
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.15 m³ 6
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.16 m³ 45
Depth 2-5m
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
Preparation
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
B.1.23 m³ 47
by the Engineer
EARTHWORKS
B.1.24 m³ 51
by the Engineer
Rock

Equalization
EARTHWORKS
Filling
Structures
B.1.25 m³ 44
AASHTO
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C20
B.1.33 m³ 6
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C25
B.1.34 m³ 2
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C35A
B.1.35 m³ 65
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Blinding
B.1.37 m³ 6
following thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.51 m³ 2
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
- Stairs
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.43 m³ 4
following thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.44 m³ 17
following thickness
Thickness 300-500mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.45 m³ 13
following thickness

Equalization
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Suspended Slabs
B.1.48 m³ 10
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.54 m³ 11
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.55 m³ 9
thickness
Width: 0.4-1,22 m
Reinforcement
Joints
B.1.67 m 127
Width 150 - 300mm
Inserts
B.1.71 nr 1
80 mm ND
Inserts
B.1.73 nr 1
110 mm ND
Inserts
B.1.78 nr 1
300 mm ND

Equalization
Inserts
B.1.79 nr 1
315 mm ND
Carried to Summary

Sludge thickening
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.9 m³ 30
Depth 0.5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.10 m³ 12
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.15 m³ 16
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.16 m³ 25
Depth 2-5m
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
Preparation
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
B.1.23 m³ 41
by the Engineer
EARTHWORKS
B.1.24 m³ 41
by the Engineer
Rock

Sludge thickening
EARTHWORKS
Filling
Structures
B.1.25 m³ 33
AASHTO
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C20
B.1.33 m³ 5
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C25
B.1.34 m³ 2
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C35A
B.1.35 m³ 52
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Blinding
B.1.37 m³ 5
following thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.51 m³ 2
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
- Stairs
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.43 m³ 3
following thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.44 m³ 14
following thickness
Thickness 300-500mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.45 m³ 11
following thickness

Sludge thickening
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Suspended Slabs
B.1.48 m³ 8
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.54 m³ 9
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.55 m³ 7
thickness
Width: 0.4-1,22 m
Reinforcement
Joints
B.1.67 m 86
Width 150 - 300mm
Inserts
B.1.73 nr 1
110 mm ND
Carried to Summary

Drying beds
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.9 m³ 259
Depth 0.5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.10 m³ 69
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.14 m³ 25
Depth 0,5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.15 m³ 163
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
Preparation
materials
EARTHWORKS
Preparation
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
B.1.23 m³ 328
by the Engineer

Drying beds
EARTHWORKS
B.1.24 m³ 189
by the Engineer
Rock
EARTHWORKS
Filling
Structures
B.1.25 m³ 78
AASHTO
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C20
B.1.33 m³ 32
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C35A
B.1.35 m³ 148
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Blinding
B.1.37 m³ 32
following thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.43 m³ 86
following thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.54 m³ 62
thickness
Width: 0.4-1.22 m
Reinforcement
Joints
B.1.67 m 242
Width 150 - 300mm

Drying beds
Inserts
B.1.75 nr 10
150 mm ND
Inserts
B.1.76 nr 10
200 mm ND
B.1.244 m³ 8
In Pipe Trenches
In rock
B.1.245 Sorround m 38
'Pipe surrounds, of selected excavated granular material, for the
following pipe sizes
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
B.1.135 m³ 40
Supply and place approved filter media
Carried to Summary

Power house
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.9 m³ 112
Depth 0.5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.10 m³ 149
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.14 m³ 112
Depth 0,5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.15 m³ 149
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.16 m³ 223
Depth 2-5m
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
B.1.23 m³ 260
by the Engineer
EARTHWORKS
B.1.24 m³ 483
by the Engineer
Rock

Power house
EARTHWORKS
Filling
Structures
B.1.25 m³ 41
AASHTO
EARTHWORKS
Filling
Structures
B.1.26 m³ 18
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C10
B.1.32 m³ 22
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C20
B.1.33 m³ 148
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C25
B.1.34 m³ 290
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Blinding
B.1.36 m³ 22
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.38 m³ 148
Filling
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.40 m³ 18
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.41 m³ 99
thickness
Thickness 300-500mm

Power house
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Suspended Slabs
B.1.46 m³ 58
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.50 m³ 4
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.51 m³ 59
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.52 m³ 38
thickness
Thickness 300-500mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Beams
B.1.56 m³ 7
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Columns
B.1.58 m³ 7
Reinforcement
B.1.87 m² 91
thicknesses
300 mm thick

Power house
300 mm thick
PAINTING
High Gloss
Timber Surfaces
'Upper surfaces of facial board inclined at an angle not exceeding 30
degrees to the horizontal
PAINTING
High Gloss
Masonry
horizontal
PAINTING
Emulsion Paint
Masonry
horizontal
WATER PROOFING
Damp Proofing
WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
B.1.93 m² 201
horizontal
WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
B.1.95 m² 71
the horizontal

Power house
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Doors
B.1.109 nr 1
Double leaf door overall size 2400 x 2000mm high with 200 steel pvo
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Windows
B.1.98 nr 1
buildings
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
B.1.123 Plumbing and Drainage nr 1
Supply and install gulley traps complete with concrete chambers
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Building Finishes
B.1.134 m² 85
Constructing floor as indicated in the drawings and to the Engineer's
satisfaction.
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Gratings
Supply and installation of 30 mm high grating for walking with
B.1.260 m² 28
galvanized steel angle 50x70x6 mm with fixing support to reinforced
concrete to complete installation.
Fixed to both reinforced concrete structure and steel members
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
B.1.261 Pebbles m² 8
Supply and lay of pebbles of 40 -50 mm sizes to fill on grating.
Carried to Summary

Emergency generator room
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.9 m³ 113
Depth 0.5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.10 m³ 151
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.14 m³ 113
Depth 0,5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
Preparation
materials
EARTHWORKS
Preparation
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
B.1.23 m³ 264
by the Engineer
EARTHWORKS
B.1.24 m³ 113
by the Engineer
Rock

EARTHWORKS
Filling
Structures
B.1.25 m³ 77
AASHTO
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C10
B.1.32 m³ 28
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C20
B.1.33 m³ 21
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C25
B.1.34 m³ 166
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Blinding
B.1.36 m³ 28
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.38 m³ 21
Filling
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.41 m³ 68
thickness
Thickness 300-500mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Suspended Slabs
B.1.46 m³ 43
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Beams
B.1.56 m³ 22
thickness

IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.52 m³ 28
thickness
Thickness 300-500mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Columns
B.1.58 m³ 6
Reinforcement
B.1.87 m² 108
thicknesses
300 mm thick
300 mm thick
PAINTING
High Gloss
Masonry
horizontal
PAINTING
Emulsion Paint
Masonry
horizontal
WATER PROOFING
Damp Proofing

WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
B.1.93 m² 128
horizontal
WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
B.1.95 m² 92
the horizontal
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Doors
B.1.106 nr 1
Single leaf door overall size 3000 x 4000mm high with 200 steel pvo
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Windows
B.1.98 nr 1
buildings
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
B.1.123 Plumbing and Drainage nr 1
Carried to Summary

Administration and workshop building
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.9 m³ 127
Depth 0.5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.10 m³ 80
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Ordinary Soil
B.1.11 m³ 48
Depth 2-5m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.14 m³ 32
Depth 0,5-1m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.15 m³ 80
Depth 1-2m
EARTHWORKS
Rock
B.1.16 m³ 191
Depth 2-5m
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
EARTHWORKS
Trimming
materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
Preparation
B.1.20 Preparation of excavated surfaces for whole structure in the m² 55
following materials
BoQ of the civil works for WTP Pag. 66

EARTHWORKS
Preparation
B.1.21 Preparation of excavated surfaces for whole structure in the m² 128
following materials
horizontal
EARTHWORKS
B.1.24 m³ 151
by the Engineer
Rock
EARTHWORKS
Filling
Structures
B.1.25 m³ 423
AASHTO
EARTHWORKS
Filling
Structures
B.1.26 m³ 112
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C10
B.1.32 Designed mix, grade C10 concrete, to BS 5328, with ordinary m³ 16
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C20
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Grade C25
aggregate sizes
10mm aggregate
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Blinding
B.1.36 Placing blinding concrete, for ground slab, grade C10, of the m³ 16
following thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.38 m³ 25
Filling

IN-SITU CONCRETE
B.1.39 Placing reinforced concrete C25, for ground slab and of the following m³ 17
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
thickness
Thickness 300-500mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Suspended Slabs
B.1.46 Placing reinforced concrete, grade C25, for top slab of the following m³ 40
thickness
Thickness 150-300mm
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Walls
B.1.50 Placing reinforced concrete, grade C25, for walls of the following m³ 4
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Beams
B.1.56 Placing reinforced concrete, grade C25, for beams of the following m³ 11
thickness
IN-SITU CONCRETE
Columns
B.1.58 Placing reinforced concrete, grade C25, for square of the following m³ 10
Reinforcement

B.1.87 cement mortar, hoop irons every three courses, and of the following m² 274
thicknesses
300 mm thick
300 mm thick
PAINTING
High Gloss
Masonry
External quality weather guard paint, two coats, to the following
B.1.90 smooth concrete surfaces; include surface preparation m² 219
horizontal
PAINTING
Emulsion Paint
Masonry
horizontal
WATER PROOFING
Damp Proofing
WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
B.1.93 to the surface of blinding concrete or sand blinded hardcore fill m² 129
horizontal
WATER PROOFING
Protective Layers
B.1.95 25 mm thick, prepared and applied m² 93
the horizontal
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Doors
Supply and installation of doors single and double doors, built with
wooden inner frame hive, boundaries in wood edges on both sides
made of poplar plywood - 4 mm thick - more the veneered ,
accompanied by at least three hinges, with mortise lock ( chromated
B.1.113 boundaries ), coated with paints with two components, which nr 4
comprises the realization of the lintel and of any shoulders, to be
carried in reinforced concrete, including the respective reinforcing
iron and the formworks, all anchored to the walls of buildings
Single leaf door overall size 800mm x 2100mm (W x H including
200mm wood pvo)

MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Doors
Supply and installation of doors single and double doors, built with
wooden inner frame hive, boundaries in wood edges on both sides
made of poplar plywood - 4 mm thick - more the veneered ,
accompanied by at least three hinges, with mortise lock ( chromated
B.1.114 boundaries ), coated with paints with two components, which nr 1
comprises the realization of the lintel and of any shoulders, to be
carried in reinforced concrete, including the respective reinforcing
Single leaf door overall size 1000mm x 2100mm (W x H including
200mm wood pvo)
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Doors
B.1.102 with rim and chrome, including the supply and installation of marble nr 2
threshold
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Doors
Supply and installation of external doors over 2.0 meters in width,
with closure of the manual type (as book), for passage of machinery
in general, consist of: modular aluminum elements, sliding on the
upper and lower galvanized steel guides, with folding doors that
open to "four or more modules (panels) that is in function on the
width of the door . the modules will be divided into sections that can
be of type: closed with infill panel sandwich double sheet of
B.1.104 aluminum with soundproof internal lining , grille of ventilation with nr 1
fixed type aluminum with unbreakable glass 3 +3. They must be
complete: internal and external trims, appropriately sized hinges,
locks and handles. Including the construction of lintel and shoulders ,
to be carried reinforced concrete, including the respective reinforcing
Four leaf door overall size 3500 x 2800mm high with 200 steel pvo
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Windows
45 mm with lateral development of the flaps - 2 cm, internal
thickness 12/10 of internal flaps, interior and exterior trims - for
covering the cables - safety crystals 3 +3, or ventilation grid - fixed
B.1.99 aluminum type - hinges and locking devices of movement with a nr 4
hammer handle or lever. including the formation of protective grates
and network against the birds, which comprises the production of the
lintel and shoulders, to be carried in reinforced concrete, including
the respective reinforcing iron and the formworks, all anchored to the
walls of buildings
400 x 600mm high comprising 200mm pvo complete with 4mm thick
clear glass panes and burglar proofing

MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Windows
45 mm with lateral development of the flaps - 2 cm, internal
thickness 12/10 of internal flaps, interior and exterior trims - for
covering the cables - safety crystals 3 +3, or ventilation grid - fixed
aluminum type - hinges and locking devices of movement with a
B.1.100 hammer handle or lever. including the formation of protective grates nr 7
and network against the birds, which comprises the production of the
lintel and shoulders, to be carried in reinforced concrete, including
the respective reinforcing iron and the formworks, all anchored to the
walls of buildings
1000 x 1200mm high comprising 200mm permanent louvered vent
complete with 4mm thick clear glass panes, and burglar proofing
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
B.1.119 Supply, lay and fix OD 65mm uPVC PN 6 drainage pipework and sum 1
fittings complete from all house outlets to gulley traps including all
traps and fittings to make connection functional.
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Supply and lay ID 80mm CI PN6 drainage pipework
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
B.1.123 nr 2
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Supply and Install Vitreous China WC bowl with P outlet 9 litre
B.1.124 cistern with valve fittings and seat and cover, complete with valve nr 2
cistern fittings, including outlet and inlet valves, internal overflow,
connecting fitments from cistern to bowl and all accessories to make
functional
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Supply and install wash hand basin in Vitreous China approximately
B.1.125 560 x 405mm with one tap hole and chain-stay hole, complete with nr 2
chromium plated pillar tap, Chrome plated chain waste, plastic bottle
trap, pedestal and all accessories
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Excavate and construct standard manholes in 200mm thick
B.1.126 blockwork, depth not exceeding 1.0m, bonded in CM (1:5) and nr 2
rendered internally with C.M (1:4), concrete benching, complete with
and including CI frame and cover, and interconnecting OD 110mm
pvc drain pipes to house

MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
B.1.128 Supply and installation of water tank with 2 m3 and water heater 80 l nr 1
with all accessories to complete installation to provide the hot water.
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Building Finishes
Building finishes including, constructing 20x100mm high 1:3 cement-
sand skirting, 1500mm high toilet wall ceramic tiling, kitchen
B.1.132 worktops 1400x450mm with tiled finish, C20 concrete window cills, sum 1
1000mm wide C20 concrete splash apron; complete for whole
house, to the specifications and as directed by the Engineer
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Excavate and Construct Septic Tank of effective capacity 5m3 in
B.1.269 blockwork and reinforced concrete, rendered smooth inside nr 1
complete with inlet and outlet manholes benching, heavy duty cast
iron manhole covers
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Excavate and Construct 1500mm top/bottom diameter x 2.0m deep
B.1.270 soak pit including filling with hardcore, covering with 2 layers of nr 1
gauge 1000 polyethylene sheet complete including connecting to
septic tank with OD 110mm pvc drain pipes
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
B.1.279 Supply and Install Kitchen sink single bowl single drain stainless nr 1
steel; include 600mm wide tiled worktop, all plumbing works and
accessories to make functional
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
B.1.128 Supply and installation of water tank with 2 m3 and water heater 80 l nr 1
with all accessories to complete installation to provide the hot water.
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
Building Finishes
Building finishes including, constructing 20x100mm high 1:3 cement-
sand skirting, 1500mm high toilet wall ceramic tiling, kitchen
B.1.132 worktops 1400x450mm with tiled finish, C20 concrete window cills, sum 1
1000mm wide C20 concrete splash apron; complete for whole
house, to the specifications and as directed by the Engineer
Carried to Summary

WATER TREATMENT
PLANT MECHANICAL
WORKS
Summary:
ADDITION TOTAL
Sr N°
WTP'S MECHANICAL WORKS UGX UGX
0 Intake works 1
1+2 Fine screening and flow divider 1
3 Clariflocculator 2
4 Chemical building (flocculant) 1
5+6 Filters building and backwash 1
7+8 Disinfection building, mixing and storage tanks 1
9 High lift pumping station 1
10 Emergency generator room 1
11 Power house 1
12 Administration and workshop building 1
13 Equalization 1
14 Sludge thickening 1
15 Drying beds 1
16 Instrumentation 1
Intake works First phase
ART. MECHANICAL WORKS U.M. TOTAL COST
B.2.61 Supply and installation of: Automatic coarse sceen.
No. 1
According to the instructions of the supervisor engineer.
B.2.62 Supply and installation of: Conveyor belt.
No. 1
B.2.63 Supply and installation of: Lifting water centrifugal pump for
Rukungiri Inlet. No. 1
B.2.65
Supply and installation of: Lifting backwashing centrifugal pump.
No. 1
B.2.66
Supply and installation of: Bridge crane for lifting pumping station.
No. 1
B.2.86 Supply and installation of: Fire extinguisher wall
Type portable fire extinguisher with metal casing type, capacity 6 kg,
No. 2
powder-purpose classes of fire 34ABC, rechargeable type According
to the instructions of the supervisor engineer.
B.2.1 Supply and installation of: Stainless steel sluice gate.
m² 22
B.2.42 Supply and installation of: Ductile iron pipes ND 250 mm.
m 11
-pos.1
B.2.45 Supply and installation of: Accessories and miscellaneous.
kg 330
g) flanges
-pos.1 ND250mm
kg 37
*) reductions
-pos.1 ND250-200mm
kg 66
*) Te
-pos.1 ND250/100mm with 3 flanges

B.2.52 Supply and installation of: Motorized gate valve ND 250 mm.
No. 1
-pos.1
B.2.6 Supply and installation of: Flat body gate valve ND 200 mm.
No. 1
-pos.2
B.2.28
Supply and installation of: Swing check (clapet) valve ND 200 mm.
No. 1
-pos.2
m 12
-pos.2 L=5x1,00+3,50+2,00m
kg 53
e) dismantling joints
-pos.2 ND200
B.RP.05.2.0 - BoQ of the Mechanical Works for WTP Pag. 1

kg 105
g) flanges
-pos.2 ND200mm
kg 26
*) reductions
-pos.2 ND200-150mm
kg 57
*) Te
-pos.2 ND200/200mm
No. 1
-pos.2
No. 1
-pos.4
m 3
-pos.4
kg 6
g) flanges
-pos.4 ND125mm
kg 14
*) reductions
-pos.4 ND125-100mm
m 10
-pos.5
kg 21
*) Te
-pos.5 ND100/100mm
No. 1
-pos.5
No. 1
-pos.6
B.2.25
No. 1
-pos.6
m 2
-pos.6

kg 5
g) flanges
-pos.6 ND100mm
kg 49
*) Te
-pos.6 ND200/100mm
i) welded elbows and/or elbows in sectors kg 138
- pos.1 ND250mm, pos.2 ND200mm, pos.4 ND125mm, pos.5

ND100mm, pos.6 ND100mm
kg 255
c) vertical rising ladder
detail 'J'
kg 89
c) vertical rising ladder
detail 'Y'
kg 356
d) railings, handrails, walkways, carpentry
L=7,50+7,50+6,00+6,00m
kg 143
- aluminium covering
kg 743
- wire net
B.2.112 Supply and installation of: Remote terminal unit 32 DI + 2 AI
No. 1
- to be installed at the intake works
- wire net
Carried to Summary

Fine screening and flow divider First phase
B.2.69 Supply and installation of: Automatic fine screening.
No. 1
B.2.70 Supply and installation of: Horizontal screw conveyor.
No. 1
B.2.71 Supply and installation of: Compactor for screened material.
No. 1
B.2.1 Supply and installation of: Stainless steel sluice gate.
m² 11
- pos.1
m 3
- pos.1
kg 31
g) flanges
- pos.1 DN200mm
kg 248
i) welded elbows and/or elbows in sectors
- pos.1 ND200mm 90° with flanges

kg 150
*) reduction
- pos.1 ND200÷100mm with flanges

kg 57
*) Te
- pos.1 ND100/60mm with 3 flanges

No. 4
- pos.2
m 13
- pos.2
m 4
- pos.2
kg 145
g) flanges
- pos.2 DN125mm
kg 112
*) Te
- pos.2 ND125/125mm with 3 flanges

m 4
- pos.3
B.RP.05.2.1+2 - BoQ of the Mechanical Works for WTP Pag. 4

Fine screening and flow divider First phase
kg 10
g) flanges
- pos.3 DN60mm
kg 28

kg 1,060
*) calm sheet
L=0,08+0,60+1,15+0,60+0,08, H=3,20 thk.3mm
B.2.46 Supply and installation of: Stainless steel weir gate.
kg 142
- overflow water board detail ' ' thk=3mm
kg 548
kg 458
b) cover grids and well trapdoors
pre GF 103
kg 46
at TC 104
kg 436
calm
kg 446
at pos.2
Carried to Summary

Clariflocculator
B.2.72
Supply and installation of: Claryflocculateur radial bridge with mixer.
No. 1
B.2.35 Supply and installation of: Stainless steel pipes ND 125 mm.
m 3
- pos.3 L=3,10m
kg 6
g) flanges
- pos.3 ND125mm
kg 8
*) deflector
- pos.3 ND125mm
No. 1
- pos.4
B.2.13 Supply and installation of: Quick closing/opening gate valve ND 100
mm.
According to the instructions of the supervisor engineer. No. 1
- pos.4
B.2.53 Supply and installation of: Telescopic valve ND 150 mm.
No. 1
- pos.4
m 5
- pos.4 L=3,00+1,50m
kg 5
g) flanges
- pos.4 ND100mm
kg 12
g) flanges
- pos.4 ND125mm
kg 3
*) reduction
- pos.4 ND125÷100mm
B.2.34
Supply and installation of: UPVC for pressure pipes ND 110 mm.
m 1
- pos.5 L=1,20m

kg 3
h) elastic joints
- pos.5 ND110mm

Clariflocculator
B.2.33
m 17
- pos.7 L=8,50+6,50m
kg 846
channel R=6,80 L=0,60m

kg 97
small chamber
kg 124
small chamber
kg 605
- handrails for tank R=7,30m

kg 30
- handrails for scale

kg 48
- handrails for small chamber

kg 66
- handrails for small chamber

kg 314
- overflow water board detail 'X' Thomson type R=6,25m H=200mm
thk=3mm
kg 380
- scum guard edge detail 'X' R=6,05m Total lenght=250mm
thk=3mm
kg 297
a) brackets and supports
- fixing support
Carried to Summary

Chemical building (flocculant) First phase
B.2.93 Supply and installation of: Dissolving group of alumia.
No. 1
B.2.94 Supply and installation of: Metering pump for reagents.
No. 2
B.2.95 Supply and installation of: Bridge crane [Chemical building]
No. 1
No. 1
B.2.32
m 24
- L=5,50+1,00+1,80+2,60+7*1,50
B.2.48 Supply and installation of: Ball valves Ø 1 1/2".
No. 7
- No. 3+2+2
kg 55
B.2.116 Supply and installation of Emergency Shower with chain and handle,
PPR/GI water pipework, valves, fittings, shower tray 80x80x10cm,
No. 1
including connection to the water inlet pipe, complete, to the
Engineer's satisfaction.
Carried to Summary

Filters building and backwash First phase
B.2.73 Supply and installation of: Support for filter bed and water and air
distribution system. No. 64
B.2.74
Supply and installation of: Production and distribution air group.
No. 1
B.2.75 Supply and installation of: Volumetric blower.
No. 1
B.2.76 Supply and installation of: Cooling fan compressor room.
No. 1
B.2.77 Supply and installation of: Cooling fan filters building.
No. 8
B.2.78 Supply and installation of: Soundproofing and filtering system for
blower room. No. 1
B.2.79 Supply and installation of: Water lifting centrifugal pump.
No. 2
B.2.80 Supply and installation of: Bridge crane for filters building.
No. 1
B.2.82 Supply and installation of: Filtration package.
m³ 103
to the instructions of the supervisor engineer. No. 2
-at floor 0: No.1

-at floor 1 No. 1:
B.2.27
No. 1
-pos.8
B.2.24
No. 2
-pos.4
No. 2
-pos.3
No. 2
-pos.4
B.2.54 Supply and installation of: Stainless steel sluice gate with pneumatic
actuator.
According to the instructions of the supervisor engineer. m² 6
-inlet
B.2.54 Supply and installation of: Stainless steel sluice gate with pneumatic
actuator.
According to the instructions of the supervisor engineer. m² 1
-outlet
B.2.55 Supply and installation of: Butterfly valve with pneumatic actuator
ND 100.
-pos.10
ND 150.
-pos.7

ND 200.
-pos.6
m 20
-pos.2
m 5
-pos.3
m 2
-pos.4
m 25
-pos.5
m 16
-pos.6
m 20
-pos.7
m 2
-pos.8
m 30
-pos.9
m 16
-pos.10
kg 400
kg 944
kg 144
-handrails
kg 102
-handrails ladder
kg 388
-pos.6 ND200mm

kg 286
-pos.7 ND150mm
kg 36
-pos.8 ND150mm
kg 230
-pos.10 ND100mm
kg 60
f) 'gas' threaded connectors
kg 1,380
g) flanges
h) elastic joints kg 38
SF 113
PC 117
kg 1,390
kg 180
l) accessories for installing the remote control lines
kg 88
Carried to Summary

Disinfection building, mixing and storage tanks First phase
B.2.89 Supply and installation of: Preparator and dosing equipment for
disinfectant solution. Including provision of disinfectant needed to
satisfy the estimated consumption for 6 months after the No. 1
commissioning of the WTP, in accordance with the instruction of the
Supervisor Engineer.
B.2.91 Supply and installation of: Withdrawal water pump.
No. 1
B.2.92 Supply and installation of: Dosing pump.
No. 1
m 7
- pos.3 L=0,70+1,00+1,60m
kg 158
g) flanges
- pos.3 ND250mm No.2+3+1

kg 130
- pos.3 ND250mm 90°

kg 135
- pos.3 ND250mm
B.2.59
Supply and installation of: Motorized butterfly valve ND 250 mm.
No. 2
- pos.3
m 3
- pos.4 L=0,70+0,70m
kg 106
g) flanges
- pos.4 ND250mm No.2+2

kg 135
- pos.4 ND250mm
B.2.59
Supply and installation of: Motorized butterfly valve ND 250 mm.
No. 2
- pos.4
B.2.47 Supply and installation of: Ball valves Ø 1".

No. 1
- pos.5
kg 842
- chimney stainless steel ND300mm thk.10mm L=1,00m

Disinfection building, mixing and storage tanks First phase
- aluminium covering detail 'X' ND600mm

kg 187
pos.2 : No.2
1° spillway : No.2
tank : No.14
out : No.2
kg 24
- aluminium covering detail 'X' 600x600mm
pos.5 : No.2
kg 158
- aluminium covering detail 'X' 800x1000mm
pos.3 : No.4
pos.4 : No.4
kg 68
- grating cover in disinfection building
B.2.116 Supply and installation of Emergency Shower with chain and handle,
PPR/GI water pipework, valves, fittings, shower tray 80x80x10cm,
No. 1
including connection to the water inlet pipe, complete, to the
Carried to Summary

High lift pumping station First phase
B.2.67 Supply and installation of: Centrifugal pump - High lift pumping
station of Rukungiri WTP According to the instructions of the No. 1
supervisor engineer.
B.2.83 Pressurization group for internal potable water - High lift pumping
station. No. 1
B.2.84 Bridge crane - High lift pumping station.
No. 1
Valve PN 25
Valve PN 10
B.2.28
Valve PN 25
No. 2
B.2.87 Supply and installation of Air Vessel (water-hammer arrester tank),
installed on reinforced concrete basement into WTP and connected
No. 1
to transmission pipeline. According to the instructions of the
m 12
m 21
- Curves
- Dismantling joint kg 826
- Flanges
- Tees
- Handrails
Carried to Summary
B.RP.05.2.9 - BoQ of the mechanical works for WTP Pag. 14

B.2.85 Supply and installation of: Bridge crane
No. 1
No. 2
kg 88
- airing opening grating
Carried to Summary

Power house
B.2.81
Supply and installation of: Cooling system for electrical room.
Condensing unit in heat pump systems to refrigerant flow Variable
controlled by Inverter Technology dc, modular structure for side-by-
side installation of more external drives, with the ability to connect
No. 1
up to 40 indoor units with a minimum capacity of 2.2Kw.
- Thermal power: 46,000 BTU/h
- Number of internal unit: 2

No. 2
kg 484
transformer box
kg 66
transformer box
kg 385
kg 297
*) galvanized wire net
kg 396
*) galvanized wire net door
kg 1,350
*) grating sub pebbles
kg 149
*) transformer way
Carried to Summary

B.2.86
Supply and installation of: Fire extinguisher wall
No. 1
powder-purpose classes of fire 34ABC, rechargeable type
B.2.115 Supply and installation of: Laboratory equipment.
No. 1
B.2.110 Supply and installation of: Work shop equipment.
No. 1
Carried to Summary

Equalization
B.2.96 Supply and installation of: Submersible centrifugal pump for
equalization tank. No. 2
m 2
- pos.1
kg 45
g) flanges
- pos.1 DN300mm
kg 149

No. 2
- pos.2
- pos.2 m 28
No.2 x L=4,00+1,00m
5,00+4,00m
No.2 x 3,00m
kg 119
g) flanges
- pos.2 DN100mm
kg 114

kg 24
*) reduction

kg 37
*) aluminium covering detail 'W'
-holes
kg 155
- scum guard detail 'X' R=3,00m H=0,25 thk=3mm
kg 13
- scum guard detail 'X' fixing support
kg 133
- overflow water board detail 'Y' R=3,20 H=0,20 thk=3mm

Equalization
kg 146
detail 'Z' ND600mm thk=3mm
kg 17
detail 'Z' plate ND800mm thk=3mm
kg 28
- detail 'Z' fixing support

Carried to Summary

Sludge thickening
B.2.97 Supply and installation of: Submersible centrifugal pump for sludge
thickening tank. No. 2
m 9
- pos.1 L=3,00+4,00+1,00m
kg 46
g) flanges
- pos.1 DN150mm
kg 101

m 9
- pos.2 L=3,00+4,00+1,00m
kg 30
g) flanges
- pos.2 DN100mm
kg 57

No. 2
- pos.4
- pos.4 m 25
No.2 x L=4,00+1,00m
4,00+3,00m
No.2 x 3,00m
kg 119
g) flanges
- pos.4 DN100mm
kg 114

kg 24
*) reduction

Sludge thickening
kg 37
*) aluminium covering detail 'W'
-holes
kg 95
- overflow water board detail 'X' R=2,30 H=0,20 thk=3mm
kg 103
detail 'Z' ND600mm thk=3mm
kg 17
detail 'Z' plate ND800mm thk=3mm
kg 28
- detail 'Z' fixing support

Carried to Summary

Drying beds
B.2.31
Supply and installation of: Galvanized steel pipes ND 100 mm.
m 11
- pos.2

kg 50
g) flanges
- pos.2 ND100mm
kg 26
- pos.2 ND100mm 90°

B.2.14 Supply and installation of: Butterfly valves ND 100 mm.
No. 5
- pos.2
kg 578
-grid detail 'B'

Carried to Summary

Instrumentation
B.2.98 Supply and installation of: Pressure meter and transmitter for
pressure pipes.
- intake works
B.2.99 Supply and installation of: Automatic sampler.
No. 1
- intake works
B.2.100
Supply and installation of: Ultrasonic flow meter for triangular weir.
No. 1
- fine screening station and sump divider
B.2.101 Supply and installation of: Turbidity meter

No. 4
- filters and filters backwashing
B.2.102
Supply and installation of: Compressed air distribution system group.
No. 1
B.2.103
Supply and installation of: Ultrasonic water level meter for filters.
No. 8
B.2.104 Supply and installation of: Air flow meter.
No. 2
B.2.105
Supply and installation of: Time control device for motorized gate.
No. 1
- equalization tank
B.2.106
Supply and installation of: Time control device for motorized gate.
No. 1
- sludge thickening tank
B.2.107 Supply and installation of: Water flow meter.

No. 1
- high lift pumping station
pressure pipes.
- high lift pumping station

pressure pipes.
- filters
B.2.111 Supply and installation of: PLC.
No. 1
kg 149
B.2.113 Supply and installation of: Remote terminal unit 8 DI + 2 AI
No. 1
- to be installed at the Reservoir (water tank)
Carried to Summary

WATER TREATMENT
PLANT ELECTRICAL
WORKS
Summary:
ADDITION TOTAL
Sr ELECTRICAL WORKS FOR WTP N°
UGX UGX
1 Electrical works for WTP 1
ITEM NO. ITEM DESCRIPTION U.M. TOTAL COST
QUANTITY UNIT TOTAL
PROVISIONAL SUMS for works to be executed by others
SUPPLY AND COMPLETE ISTALLATION OF POLE
STRUCTURES, CONDUCTORS AND ACCESSORIES FOR 11 KV
INCOMING LINE AT WTP, POLE STRUCTURES, CONDUCTORS
AND ACCESSORIES FOR TRANSMISSION UPTO INTAKE RAW
A
WATER PUMP HOUSE (DISTANCE APPROXIMATELY 1000
METERS).
INCLUDING CONNECTION OF UMEME POWER.
COMPRISING THE FOLLOWING:
B.3.167 Electricity connection to new installations sum 1
B.3.46 100X116 mm RSJ poles 13 m long nr 21
B.3.44 100X116 mm RSJ poles 9 m long for stude support nr 2
B.3.45 100X116 mm RSJ poles 11 m long for D.P. structure nr 2
B.3.151 Double pole cut point channel 75X75X6 mm nr 4
B.3.146 crass arm 11 kV(75X40X6 mm) nr 15
B.3.142 Top fitting for 11 kV line nr 15
B.3.138 50X6 M.S. flat Kg 100
B.3.156 11 kV pin Insulator with pin nr 90
B.3.154 11 kV disc Insulators7000 Kg nr 30
B.3.153 11 kV strain set (55 Sq.mm conductor) set 30
B.3.158 11 kV Arc break switch (Gang Operated) set 6
B.3.155 11 kV vaccum circuit breaker/LBS ringmain unit(1I/C & 2 O/G) nr 2
B.3.163 440 volts 1000 Amps air circuit breaker nr 6
B.3.161 11 kV 95 sq.mm XLPE cable m 100
B.3.150 Out door type heat shrink end joint nr 4
B.3.152 In door type heat shrink end joint nr 8
B.3.31 240 Sq.mm 3.5 C XLPE LT cable m 150
B.3.86 LT control pannel with all accessories nr 2
287,969,054 287,969,054
B.3.144 HT stay sets nr 16
B.3.141 HT stay G.I. wire Kg 350
B.3.127 Bird Guard nr 15
B.3.139 G.I wire 8 SWG for line Guarding Kg 400
B.3.140 G.I. strip 25X5 Kg 100
B.3.145 HT earthing set set 30
B.3.32 100 SQMM ACSR CONDUCTOR - DOG m 3,000
Intake raw water pump house
B.3.44 100X116 mm RSJ poles 9 m long for stude support nr 2
B.3.45 100X116 mm RSJ poles 11 m long for D.P. structure nr 2
B.3.151 Double pole cut point channel 75X75X6 mm nr 4
B.3.155 11 kV vaccum circuit breaker/LBS ringmain unit(1I/C & 2 O/G) nr 2
B.3.150 Out door type heat shrink end joint nr 4
B.3.152 In door type heat shrink end joint nr 8
B.3.144 HT stay sets nr 16
B.3.127 Bird Guard nr 15
B.3.139 G.I wire 8 SWG for line Guarding Kg 400
B.3.140 G.I. strip 25X5 Kg 100
B.3.145 HT earthing set set 30
Works to be executed by the Contractor
ELECTRICAL WORKS (WTP)
B.3.168 Contractor's supervision and attendance on above Work Item A sum 1
SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING, COMMISSIONING OF 1250
B
KVA DG SET
B.RP.05.3.1 - BoQ of the electrical works for WTP Pag. 1

QUANTITY UNIT TOTAL
B.3.126
415V, 3Ph, 1500 RPM, Prime rated 1250 kVA DG set as per
specification and drawings with accessories listed below.
Battery with Stand, leads, cover & accessories.
Residential Type Silencer
Set of Hoses
990 Liters day tank with base frame
Drip Trays
990 Liters Intermediate tank with 1.5 Mts. Height base frame.
500 Litrs over flow tank with base frame
AVM pads for 1250KVA DG sets
Alternator Adoptor box suitable to receive 1600A/2000A Sandwich
bus ducts for connecting the DG Control panel. nr 1
Acoustic Enclosure suitable for 1250 KVA DG set
Fuel piping
38mm dia Class B Ms Pipe
Ball Valves-38mm dia
38mm dia Shut off valves
4 level control Switch
3 level control switches
Diesel transfer pump
Set of Hoses for Inlet & Outlet
38mm dia pipe Fuel flow meter
C WATER TREATMENT PLANT
BLOCK NO. 11
Power House
B.3.119
RMU - 11KV, 200A, WITH 1 INCOMER, METERING UNIT, 2 NOS. nr 1
OUTGOING WITH BREAKER FOR 2 NOS. TRANSFORMERS.
B.3.113 1250 KVA, 11KV:0.433KV, ONAN, INDOOR TYPE
nr 1
TRANSFORMERS
B.3.149 Transfor Relay Panel nr 1
B.3.143 Breaker Control Panel nr 1
B.3.55 ACB - 2500 A/4p/EDO nr 1
B.3.56 MCB - 2 A nr 4
B.3.135 Auto Changeover - 2500 A nr 1
(PCC - Feeder Panel)
B.3.53 ACB - 1250 A/4p/EDO nr 1
B.3.50 ACB - 630 A/4p/EDO nr 2
B.3.79 MCCB - 200 A nr 1
FEEDER NO. 1
B.3.128 FP1 - 1000 A - 1I/C + 2 O/g - BUS BAR SIZE 80 X 10 mm nr 1
BLOCK NO. 9
High Lift Pumping Station
B.3.53 ACB - 1250 A/4p/EDO nr 1
B.3.84 MCCB - 630 A nr 3
B.3.103 FASD - 200 kw nr 3
B.3.75 MCCB - 63 A nr 9
B.3.57 MCB - 6 A nr 3
B.3.62 MCB - 32 A nr 3
B.3.61 MCB - 20 A nr 1
B.3.58 MCB - 10 A nr 1
B.3.107 SMPS - 10 A nr 1
B.3.137 Conactors - 45 A nr 9
B.3.110 CAPACITOR-25 KVAR nr 9
BLOCK NO. 7 & 8
Chemical Building (Chlorine), Chlorine mixing Tank and Storage
Tank
B.3.77 MCCB - 100 A nr 1
B.3.69 MPCB - 16A nr 2
B.3.67 MPCB - 6.3 A nr 8
B.3.62 MCB - 32 A nr 1
B.3.96 DOL Starter - 7.5 kw nr 2
FEEDER NO. 2
B.3.129 FP2 - BUS BAR 400 A (Cu 40 x 10 mm) nr 1
BLOCK NO. 5 & 6
Filters and Back Wash Building
B.3.83 MCCB - 400 A nr 1
B.3.74 MPCB - 40 A nr 2
B.3.73 MPCB - 32 A nr 3
B.3.71 MPCB - 25 A nr 3
B.3.68 MPCB - 10 A nr 9
B.3.64 MPCB - 2.5 A nr 8

QUANTITY UNIT TOTAL
B.3.76 MCCB - 63 A - 2B nr 1
B.3.62 MCB - 32 A nr 2
B.3.101 FASD - 15 kw nr 2
B.3.99 FASD - 11 kw nr 2
B.3.100 FASD - 11.5 kw nr 1
B.3.98 FASD - 9 kw nr 3
B.3.94 DOL Starter - 4 kw nr 8
B.3.109 SMPS - 230 VAC INPUT; 24 VDC - 50 A OUTPUT nr 1
BLOCK NO. 13
Equalization Tank
B.3.72 MCCB - 32 A nr 1
B.3.67 MPCB - 6.3 A nr 2
B.3.58 MCB - 10 A nr 2
BLOCK NO. 14
Thickener
B.3.72 MCCB - 32 A nr 1
B.3.67 MPCB - 6.3 A nr 2
B.3.58 MCB - 10 A nr 2
FEEDER NO. 3
B.3.130 FP3 - BUS BAR 400 A (Cu 40 x 10 mm) nr 1
Clariflocculator
BLOCK #3/1
B.3.72 MCCB - 32 A nr 1
B.3.68 MPCB - 10 A nr 1
B.3.60 MCB - 16 A nr 1
B.3.58 MCB - 10 A nr 2
BLOCK #3/2
B.3.72 MCCB - 32 A nr 1
B.3.68 MPCB - 10 A nr 1
B.3.60 MCB - 16 A nr 1
B.3.58 MCB - 10 A nr 2
BLOCK NO. 4
Chemical Building Flocculant
B.3.77 MCCB - 100 A nr 1
B.3.70 MPCB - 20 A nr 1
B.3.67 MPCB - 6.3 A nr 7
B.3.62 MCB - 32 A nr 1
B.3.58 MCB - 10 A nr 2
BLOCK NO. 1 & 2
Fine Screening and Flow Divider
B.3.75 MCCB - 63 A nr 1
B.3.64 MPCB - 2.5 A nr 4
B.3.67 MPCB - 6.3 A nr 1
B.3.58 MCB - 10 A nr 1
B.3.60 MCB - 16 A nr 1
B.3.58 MCB - 10 A nr 2
BLOCK NO. 12
Administration, Workshop and Laboratory Building
B.3.77 MCCB - 100 A nr 1
B.3.60 MCB - 16 A nr 2
B.3.72 MCCB - 32 A nr 2
B.3.58 MCB - 10 A nr 1
FEEDER NO. 4
BLOCK NO. 10
Emergency Generator Room
B.3.77 MCCB - 100 A nr 1
B.3.60 MCB - 16 A nr 2
B.3.62 MCB - 32 A nr 2
B.3.58 MCB - 10 A nr 1
B.3.40 Emergency Lamps - 100 w nr 2
BLOCK NO. 11
Power House lighting & Distribution
B.3.77 MCCB - 100 A nr 1
B.3.60 MCB - 16 A nr 2
B.3.72 MCCB - 32 A nr 2
B.3.58 MCB - 10 A nr 1
Cables
B.3.27 Cabling of 11 KV [E] XLPE, AYFY ,3 Core X 240 mm2 cables in
PVC duct/Cable trays/surface complete with terminations, glanding, m 40
clipping and all accessories.

QUANTITY UNIT TOTAL
B.3.23 Cabling of 1.1KV [ XLPE], AYFY,3½ Core X 240 mm2 cables in PVC
duct/Cable trays/surface complete with terminations, glanding, m 280
B.3.17 Cabling SUBMERSIBLE - CU CABLE, 3C X 10 mm2 cables of
following sizes in PVC duct/Cable trays/surface complete with m 30
terminations, glanding, clipping and all accessories.
B.3.14 Cabling AL, AYFY, XLPE, cables of following sizes in PVC
duct/Cable trays/surface complete with terminations, glanding,
m 150
3½C X 240 mm2
m 140
3½C X 400 mm2
m 440
3½C X 300 mm2
m 470
3½C X 185 mm2
m 35
3½C X 150 mm2
B.3.1 Cabling AL, AYFY, PVC , cables of following sizes in PVC
m 140
3C X2.5 mm2
m 215
3C X4 mm2
m 40
3C X10 mm2
m 75
3C X 6 mm2
m 125
3C X4 mm2
m 40
3C X 35 mm2
m 10
3C X2.5 mm2
m 30
3C X 16 mm2
m 275
3C X10 mm2
m 40
3C X4 mm2
m 110
3½C X35 mm2
m 25
3½C X 95 mm2

QUANTITY UNIT TOTAL
m 45
3½C X35 mm2
m 134
3½C X 25 mm2
Site Lighting
B.3.36
Post top lantern made with die-cast aluminium base in grey powder
coat, acryric opal spherical bowl and conical canopy in spun
nr 32
aluminium with dark grey powder coat, internal aluminium reflector, to
IP65 complete with one no. 150W HPSV Sodium Vapour Lamp on
50mm diameter 4m steel pole complete with all accessories.
B.3.37
Post top lantern made with die-cast aluminium base in grey powder
coat, acryric opal spherical bowl and conical canopy in spun
nr 15
aluminium with dark grey powder coat, internal aluminium reflector, to
IP65 complete with 2 nos. 250W HPSV Sodium Vapour Lamp on
50mm diameter 4m steel pole complete with all accessories.
B.3.49 Earthing for site lighting nr 3
Fittings for Internal Electrification
B.3.41
2x40W,1200mm, surface fluorescent luminaire for 40W T5 linear
nr 106
fluorescent lamps weather proof and corrosion resistant, with
electronic control gear, as PIERLITE 2x40W or equal approved.
B.3.39 450 W - HPMV lamp nr 64
Earthing and Lightning Protection
B.3.34
Copper tape of hard drawn high conductivity copper 3mm x 25mm
m 1,015
cross section for horizontal and down conductors complete with fixing
clips and all accessories as by FURSE or equal.
B.3.33 General Earthing by 70mm2 stranded bare copper cable complete
m 57
with all accessories.
ELECTRICAL WORKS (Intake)
SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING, COMMISSIONING OF 630
D
KVA DG SET
B.3.166
415V, 3Ph, 1500 RPM, Prime rated 630 kVA DG set as per
specification and drawings with accessories listed below.
Battery with Stand, leads, cover & accessories.
Residential Type Silencer
Set of Hoses
990 Liters day tank with base frame
Drip Trays
990 Liters Intermediate tank with 1.5 Mts. Height base frame.
500 Litrs over flow tank with base frame
AVM pads for 630KVA DG sets
Alternator Adoptor box suitable to receive 1600A/2000A Sandwich
bus ducts for connecting the DG Control panel. nr 1
Acoustic Enclosure suitable for 630 KVA DG set
Fuel piping
38mm dia Class B Ms Pipe
Ball Valves-38mm dia
38mm dia Shut off valves
4 level control Switch
Diesel transfer pump
Set of Hoses for Inlet & Outlet
38mm dia pipe Fuel flow meter
E INTAKE
B.3.119
RMU - 11KV, 200A, WITH 1 INCOMER, METERING UNIT, 2 NOS. nr 1
OUTGOING WITH BREAKER FOR 2 NOS. TRANSFORMERS.
B.3.111 630 KVA, 11KV:0.433KV, ONAN, INDOOR TYPE
nr 1
TRANSFORMERS
B.3.149 Transfor Relay Panel nr 1
B.3.143 Breaker Control Panel nr 1
B.3.85 PCC PANEL nr 1
B.3.53 ACB - 1250 A/4p/EDO nr 1
B.3.136 ISOLATOR-4P - 1250 A nr 1
B.3.133 CHANGEOVER-4P-1250 A nr 1
MCC PANEL
B.3.52 ACB - 3P-1250 A - EDO nr 1
B.3.78 MCCB - 200A - 3P nr 5

QUANTITY UNIT TOTAL
B.3.68 MPCB - 10 A nr 2
B.3.65 MPCB - 4A nr 2
B.3.71 MPCB - 25 A nr 1
B.3.69 MPCB - 16A nr 1
B.3.68 MPCB - 10 A nr 9
B.3.59 MCB-SP-10A nr 1
B.3.63 MCB - 63A nr 2
B.3.62 MCB - 32 A nr 2
B.3.94 DOL Starter - 4 kw nr 2
B.3.106 STAR DELTA STARTER - 200 kw nr 5
B.3.110 CAPACITOR-25 KVAR nr 10
B.3.104 STAR DELTA STARTER - 11 kw nr 1
LAMPS
B.3.38 HPSV-250W nr 12
B.3.39 450 W - HPMV lamp nr 6
B.3.42 TUBE LIGHTS - 2X40 W nr 12
B.3.43 FLOOD LIGHTS-500W nr 6
B.3.108 SMPS - 230 VAC 1PH I/P; 24VDC,10A O/P nr 2
B.3.40 Emergency Lamps - 100 w nr 2
B.3.35 EARTH ELECTRODE, CONDUCTOR SETS nr 10
Cables
B.3.26 Cabling of 11 KV [E] XLPE, AYFY ,3 Core X 120 mm2 cables in
PVC duct/Cable trays/surface complete with terminations, glanding, m 35
B.3.23 Cabling of 1.1KV [ XLPE], AYFY,3½ Core X 240 mm2 cables in PVC
duct/Cable trays/surface complete with terminations, glanding, m 120
m 210
3½C X 240 mm2
m 690
3C X10 mm2
m 275
3C X 6 mm2
m 240
3C X 70 mm2
Carried to Summary

TRANSMISSION
PIPELINES
Summary:
Civil Works of Pipelines Network and ADDITION TOTAL
Sr N°
Facilities UGX UGX
1 Raw water pumping main 1
2 Pure water pumping transmission system 1
3 Pure water gravity system - trunk 2 1
RAW WATER PUMPING MAIN
ART. CIVIL WORKS U. TOTAL COST
A. DEMOLITION AND SITE CLEARANCE
General Site Clearance
C.1.1.2 General site clearance for pipe trench ha 0.30
Trees
Cut and dispose of trees of the following girth; include removal of
C.1.1.3 stump and backfilling the hole left with top soil nr 15
Girth 500 mm-1 m
Stumps
Remove and dispose of stumps of the following diameter; include for
C.1.1.6 grabbing up the roots and backfilling the hole left with top soil nr 15
Diameter 150-500 mm

Diameter 500 mm -1 m
B. PIPEWORK-PIPES
uPVC Pressure Pipes
uPVC pressure pipes conforming to ISO 1452-2, with flexible joints,
all to PN16, OD 225mm, including trench excavation and lowering,
C.1.2.3.14 m 2323
laying and jointing of pipes, to the following depths

C.1.2.3.15 m 419
Depth 1.5-2m

all to PN10, OD 315 mm, including trench excavation and lowering,
C.1.2.2.23 m 634
- back wash water

C.1.2.2.24 m 112
Depth 1.5-2m
- back wash water
C. PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

Adaptors
Flange adaptor, Maxi Type or similar wide range adaptor to fit pipe
C.1.3.39.2 spigots, flanges to EN 1092, all to PN16 and of the following sizes nr 24
200 mm ND
300 mm ND
Valves and Penstocks
NRV
Flanged Non return Valves shall confirming to BS EN 12334:2001,
C.1.4.11.1 flanges to EN 1092, all to PN16 the follwing pipe sizes. nr 3
200 mm ND
Air Valves
Flanged anti shock, anti surge double air valves shall conform to BS
EN 1074 : 2000 Part 4, 50 mm ND, as specified, flanges to EN 1092,
complete with isolating gate valve to ISO 7259, flange on socket tee,
C.1.4.14.4 thrust blocks, distance pieces, all to PN16 as specified and all fittings nr 15
necessary to make the connection complete; for the following pipe
sizes
200÷225 mm ND
Washouts
C.RP.03.1.1 - BoQ of the Civil Works of Pipelines Network and Facilities Pag. 1
Type 2 Washout as specified in the drawings, complete with tee,
adaptors, drainage pipes, gate valves, flap valve, thrust blocks, and
C.1.4.20.2 all other fittings necessary to make the complete installation on pipes nr 3
of the following sizes;all to PN16
200÷225 mm ND
Plastic pipe Fittings
Bends
HDPE bends to use with HDPE pipes joined by fusion welding or
C.1.3.14.9 uPVC bends with push-fit joint to use with uPVC pipes, PN16 - 90 nr 6
degree 225 mm OD
degree 225 mm OD
C.1.3.14.11 uPVC bends with push-fit joint to use with uPVC pipes, PN16 - 22,5 nr 15
degree 225 mm OD
C.1.3.14.12 uPVC bends with push-fit joint to use with uPVC pipes, PN16 - 11.25 nr 12
degree 225 mm OD
C.1.3.13.25 degree 315 mm OD nr 2
- back wash water

C.1.3.13.26 degree 315 mm OD nr 2
- back wash water

C.1.3.13.27 degree 315 mm OD nr 5
- back wash water

C.1.3.13.28 degree 315 mm OD nr 4
- back wash water

D. PIPEWORK-MANHOLES AND PIPEWORK ANCILLARIES
Other Chambers
In-situ Concrete Chambers
Concrete washout outfall structure, complete, as specified in
C.1.4.25.1 drawings, and of the following depths nr 1
Concrete valve chamber, complete as specified in the drawings, and
C.1.4.25.2 of the following depths nr 8
Supply and installation of concrete manholes and concrete structures,
including excavation, backfill, removal of debris, water table lowering,
C.1.4.25.4 nr 17
step irons, frame and cast iron manhole cover. Internal dimensions
60x60x100÷150 cm.
Reinstatement
Roads
Breaking up, temporary and permanent reinstatement of tarmac roads

for the following pipe sizes (Inclusive of processing the necessary
C.1.7.1.20 m 1160
approvals from the relevant authorities)
Diameter above 300 mm, up to trench width 1.8 m

Marker Posts
C.1.7.1.24 Marker posts for valves (sluice / butterfly / PRV) nr 3
C.1.7.1.23 Marker posts for air valves nr 19
C.1.7.1.25 Marker posts for wash outs nr 16
C.1.7.1.21 Marker posts for pipes nr 4
E. PIPEWORK-SUPPORTS AND PROTECTION, ANCILLARIES TO
Provision of Concrete Anchor Blocks
Grade C15
Designed mix, grade C15 concrete, to BS 5328, with ordinary portland
cement to BS 12 , aggregate to BS 882 , for the following aggregate
C.1.7.1.13 m³ 124
sizes
10mm aggregate
Blinding
C.1.7.1.11 thickness: m³ 124
- thickness 150 mm
In Pipe Trenches
C.1.7.1.12 m³ 452
In rock
Surrounds
Pipe surrounds, of selected excavated granular material, for the
C.1.7.1.1 following pipe sizes m 3139
C.1.7.1.4 sizes m 244
Pipe surrounds, of mass concrete, for the following pipe sizes
C.1.7.1.8 m 105
Thrust Blocks
C.1.7.1.14 0.2÷0.5m³, for the following pipe sizes nr 12
Carried to Summary
PURE WATER PUMPING TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
C.1.1.1 General site clearance for pipe route ha 0.53
Trees
Girth 500 mm-1 m
Girth 1-2 m
Girth 2-3 m
Stumps
Diameter 150-500 mm


Diameter 1m -2m
B. PIPEWORK-PIPES
mortar linings, 350 mm ND DI C40 Pipes, all to EN 545 and including
C.1.2.9.6 approved rubber gaskets, trench excavation, lowering, laying and m 4238
jointing of pipes, to the following depths
mortar linings, 350 mm ND DI C40 Pipes, all to EN 545 and including
C.1.2.9.7 approved rubber gaskets, trench excavation, lowering, laying and m 748
jointing of pipes, to the following depths
Laid in Trenches; Depth 1.5 - 2 m
C.PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

Ductile Iron Fittings
Bends
Ductile Iron all flanged 90 degrees bends to EN 545, flanges to EN
C.1.3.26a.1 1092, all to PN40, cement mortar lines and of the following sizes nr 10
350 mm ND
Ductile Iron all flanged 45 degrees bends to EN 545, flanges to EN

350 mm ND
Ductile Iron all flanged 22.5 degrees bends to EN 545, flanges to EN

350 mm ND
Ductile Iron all flanged 11.25 degrees bends to EN 545, flanges to EN

350 mm ND
Double Collars
Viking Johnson or similar, wide range coupling to fit all pipe spigots to
C.1.3.55.1 PN40, and of the following sizes nr 19
350 mm ND
Adaptors
Flange adaptor of large tolerance, maxi type to fit all pipe spigots to
C.1.3.45a.1 ISO 1452, flanges to EN 1092, all to PN40, and of the following sizes nr 38
350 mm ND
Air Valves
PURE WATER PUMPING TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
C.1.4.16a.4 thrust blocks, distance pieces, all to PN40 as specified and all fittings nr 12
sizes
350 mm ND
Washouts
Type 2 Washout as specified in the drawings, complete with all fittings
necessary to make the installation; include surface boxes as specified
C.1.4.24b.1 nr 8
including down pipe, all to PN40, on pipes of the following sizes
350 mm ND
NRV
C.1.4.12a.1
Flanged Non return Valves shall confirming to BS EN 12334:2001,
flanges to EN 1092, all to PN40 the follwing pipe sizes. nr 1
350 mm ND
Other Chambers
In-situ Concrete Chambers
Pre-cast Concrete Chambers
Marker Posts
Grade C15
C.1.7.1.13 m³ 73
sizes
10mm aggregate
Blinding
C.1.7.1.11 thickness: m³ 73
- thickness 150 mm
In Pipe Trenches
C.1.7.1.12 m³ 962
In rock
Surrounds
C.1.7.1.5 sizes m 349
Pipe surrounds, of mass concrete, and for the following pipe sizes
C.1.7.1.9 m 150
Thrust Blocks
Diameter above 300 mm up to 450 mm ND
Carried to Summary
PURE WATER GRAVITY SYSTEM - Trunk 2
Trees
Girth 500 mm-1 m
Stumps
Diameter 150-500 mm

B. PIPEWORK-PIPES
uPVC Pressure Pipes
C.1.2.2.29 m 1444

C.1.2.2.30 m 255
Depth 1.5-2m

C.1.2.3.24 m 666

C.1.2.3.25 m 118
Depth 1.5-2m

Junctions
Ductile iron all flanged tee to EN 545 , flanges to EN 1092-2, all to
C.1.3.30.15 PN10 and of the following sizes nr 1
450/450 mm ND
450/450 mm ND
Adaptors
450 mm ND
450 mm ND
Tapers
Ductile iron all flanged concentric taper to EN 545, flanges to EN 1092-
C.1.3.27.7 2 all to PN10, cement mortar lined, and of the following sizes nr 1
450/150 mm ND

450/150 mm ND
Double Collars
450 mm ND
Bends
degree 450 mm OD
degree 450 mm OD
degree 450 mm OD
degree 450 mm OD
degree 450 mm OD
degree 450 mm OD
degree 450 mm OD
Inline Sluice/Butterfly Valves: Hand Operated
All flanged Ductile Iron Butterfly valves to BS EN 593 : 2004 for
potable water, flanges to BS 1092-2, all to PN10 for operation by
C.1.4.6.7 hand wheel, for the following sizes; include the supply of hand wheel nr 6
and chamber construction
450 mm ND
450 mm ND
Air Valves
sizes
450 mm ND
sizes
450 mm ND
Washouts
adaptors, drainage pipes, Gate/ Sluice, flap valve, thrust blocks, and
of the following sizes; all to PN10
450 mm OD
450 mm ND
Other Chambers
Crossings
Open Channels
Unlined open channels crossings for pipes of the following sizes
C.1.7.1.28 nr 3
Not exceeding 300 mm ND
Marker Posts
Grade C15
C.1.7.1.13 m³ 51
sizes
10mm aggregate
Blinding
- thickness 150 mm
In Pipe Trenches
C.1.7.1.12 m³ 479
In rock
Surrounds
C.1.7.1.6 sizes m 174
Diameter above 300 ND up to 450 mm ND
C.1.7.1.10 m 74
Thrust Blocks
Tee connection arrangement
450/150 mm ND
450/150 mm ND
Flange adaptor, Maxi Type or similar wide range adaptor to fit HDPE
C.1.3.38.5 pipe, flanges to EN 1092, all to PN10 and of the following sizes nr 2
450 mm ND
450 mm ND

150/80 mm ND

150/80 mm ND
All flanged DI gate valves to BS EN 1074 : 1-2000 and BS EN 1074 :

2- 2000 or BS 5163-1: 2004 for diameters up to and including 600mm
for potable water, flanges to EN 1092, all to PN10 for operation by tee
C.1.4.1.4 nr 2
key, with extension spindle not exceeding 1.5 metres long, and of the
following sizes
80 mm ND
Blank flange drilled to EN 1092 and to PN10 for flanges of the
C.1.3.46.1 following sizes nr 2
80mm ND
Concrete chamber for tee connection arrangement, complete as
C.1.4.25.3 specified in the drawings, and of the following depths nr 2
Carried to Summary
Trees
Girth 500 mm-1 m
Stumps
Diameter 150-500 mm

B. PIPEWORK-PIPES
uPVC Pressure Pipes
C.1.2.3.24 m 5372

C.1.2.3.25 m 948
Depth 1.5-2m

Junctions
400/250 mm ND
Adaptors
C.1.3.43.2 ISO 1452, flanges to EN 1092, all to PN16, and of the following sizes nr 28
450 mm ND
Double Collars
450 mm ND
Bends
degree 450 mm OD
degree 450 mm OD
degree 450 mm OD
degree 450 mm OD
450 mm ND
Butterfly Valves
450 mm ND
Air Valves
sizes
450 mm ND
Washouts
450 mm ND
Other Chambers
Crossings
Open Channels
C.1.7.1.28 nr 4

C.1.7.1.29 nr 4
Diameter above 300 mm ND up to 450 mm ND
Marker Posts
Grade C15
C.1.7.1.13 m³ 71
sizes
10mm aggregate
Blinding
- thickness 150 mm
In Pipe Trenches
C.1.7.1.12 m³ 1219
In rock
Surrounds
C.1.7.1.6 sizes m 442
C.1.7.1.10 m 190
Thrust Blocks
450/150 mm ND
450 mm ND

150/80 mm ND
Pressure Reducing Valve of following sizes

C.1.4.9.1 nr 2
80 mm ND
C.1.4.1.4 nr 3
following sizes
80 mm ND
80mm ND
Carried to Summary
Trees
Girth 500 mm-1 m
Stumps
Diameter 150-500 mm

B. PIPEWORK-PIPES
uPVC Pressure Pipes
C.1.2.2.27 m 2856

C.1.2.2.28 m 504
Depth 1.5-2m

C.1.2.3.22 m 3643

C.1.2.3.23 m 643
Depth 1.5-2m

Junctions
400/150 mm ND
400/150 mm ND
Adaptors
400 mm ND
400 mm ND
Tapers
450/400 mm ND

450/400 mm ND
Bends
degree 400 mm OD
degree 400 mm OD
degree 400 mm OD
degree 400 mm OD
degree 400 mm OD
degree 400 mm OD
degree 400 mm OD
degree 400 mm OD
400 mm ND
400 mm ND
Butterfly Valve
400 mm ND
Air Valves
sizes
400 mm ND
sizes
400 mm ND
Washouts
400 mm OD
400 mm ND
Other Chambers
Crossings
Open Channels
C.1.7.1.29 nr 4
Reinstatement
Roads
C.1.7.1.20 m 180

Marker Posts
Grade C15
C.1.7.1.13 m³ 42
sizes
10mm aggregate
Blinding
- thickness 150 mm
In Pipe Trenches
C.1.7.1.12 m³ 1475
In rock
Surrounds
C.1.7.1.6 sizes m 535
C.1.7.1.10 m 229
Thrust Blocks
400/150 mm ND
400 mm ND

150/80 mm ND
Pressure Reducing Valve of following sizes

C.1.4.9.1 nr 2
80 mm ND
C.1.4.1.4 nr 2
following sizes
80 mm ND
80mm ND
Carried to Summary
Trees
Girth 500 mm-1 m
Stumps
Diameter 150-500 mm

B. PIPEWORK-PIPES
uPVC Pressure Pipes
C.1.2.2.25 m 323

C.1.2.2.26 m 57
Depth 1.5-2m

Junctions
350/300 mm ND
Adaptors
350 mm ND
Tapers
300/250 mm ND
Double Collars
350 mm ND
Bends
degree 355 mm OD
300 mm ND
Butterfly Valve
300 mm ND
Air Valves
sizes
350÷355 mm ND
Washouts
355 mm OD
Other Chambers
Crossings
Open Channels
C.1.7.1.29 nr 1
Reinstatement
Roads

C.1.7.1.20 m 339

Marker Posts
In Pipe Trenches
C.1.7.1.12 m³ 73
In rock
Surrounds
C.1.7.1.6 sizes m 27
C.1.7.1.10 m 11
Carried to Summary
Trees
Girth 500 mm-1 m
Stumps
Diameter 150-500 mm

B. PIPEWORK-PIPES
uPVC Pressure Pipes
C.1.2.2.21 m 460

C.1.2.2.22 m 62
Depth 1.5-2m
Supply and erect inlet metallic pipe for the existing elevated tank,
including cutting and welding existing tank and all necessary
C.1.2.9.8 anchoring structures. Sum 1
As per the instruction of the Engineer.
Pipe diameter 250 mm
Junctions
350/300 mm ND
Adaptors
Flanged adaptor to fit uPVC pipe spigots to ISO 1452, flanges to EN
C.1.3.34.5 1092, all to PN10, and of the following sizes nr 2
300mm ND
Tapers
300/250 mm ND
Bends
degree 280 mm OD
degree 280 mm OD
degree 280 mm OD
degree 280 mm OD
Butterfly Valve
250 mm ND
Air Valves
sizes
250 mm ND
Washouts
280 mm OD
Other Chambers
Crossings
Open Channels
C.1.7.1.28 nr 2
Marker Posts
Grade C15
C.1.7.1.13 m³ 5
sizes
10mm aggregate
Blinding
- thickness 150 mm
In Pipe Trenches
C.1.7.1.12 m³ 79
In rock
Surrounds
C.1.7.1.5 sizes m 37
C.1.7.1.9 m 16
Thrust Blocks
Carried to Summary
Trees
Girth 500 mm-1 m
Stumps
Diameter 150-500 mm

B. PIPEWORK-PIPES
uPVC Pressure Pipes
C.1.2.2.19 m 2139

C.1.2.2.20 m 357
Depth 1.5-2m
Supply and erect inlet metallic pipe for the existing elevated tank,
including cutting and welding existing tank and all necessary
C.1.2.9.8 anchoring structures. Sum 1
As per the instruction of the Engineer.
Pipe diameter 250 mm
Junctions
400/300 mm ND
Adaptors
250 mm ND
Tapers
C.1.3.28.5 2 to PN16, and of the following sizes nr 3
300/250 mm ND
250 mm ND
Bends
degree 250 mm OD
degree 250 mm OD
C.1.3.14.15 uPVC bends with push-fit joint to use with uPVC pipes, PN16 - 22,5 nr 9
degree 250 mm OD
degree 250 mm OD
C.1.4.1.11 nr 4
following sizes
250 mm ND
Butterfly Valve
250 mm ND
Air Valves
sizes
250 mm ND
Washouts
250 mm ND
Other Chambers
Crossings
Open Channels
C.1.7.1.28 nr 2
Reinstatement
Roads
C.1.7.1.19 m 520

Marker Posts
Grade C15
C.1.7.1.13 m³ 1
sizes
10mm aggregate
Blinding
- thickness 150 mm
In Pipe Trenches
C.1.7.1.12 m³ 460
In rock
Surrounds
C.1.7.1.4 sizes m 175
C.1.7.1.7 m 75
Thrust Blocks
Carried to Summary
RESERVOIRS
Summary:
RESERVOIRS ADDITION TOTAL
Sr N°
UGX UGX
1 R1 1
RESERVOIR R1 First phase
Earthworks
C.2.2.1 Excavation section required for the realization of artefacts including
deposit of excavated material in the area of the yard and backfilling to m³ 661
completed artefact.
C.2.2.2 Lowering of the groundwater table for the realization of structures in
general, including rental and use of the necessary
m³ 661
equipment.According to the instructions of the supervisor engineer.
C.2.2.3 Transportation of excavated material to landfill area within 5 Km

m³ 661
Structural works
C.2.3.1 Waterproofing foundations including
- laying of non wowen film with a weight of 350 g/m²;
m² 57
- laying waterproof coating;
- protective cover.
C.2.3.2 Concrete (rbk 20 n/smm) including pump, vibration and smoothing of
m³ 31
concrete surfaces.
C.2.3.3 Concrete C35A for foundation and elevation including formwork and
concrete vibration
m³ 0.3
- support pipes
concrete vibration
m³ 167
- foundations
concrete vibration
m³ 209
- elevations
concrete vibration m³ 102
- insole
C.2.3.4 Supply and installation of deformed high yield steel bars in grade 460
and ductility class B (460B) to BS4449, for reinforced concrete
structures kg 19
- support pipes
structures kg 15,067
- foundations
structures kg 18,796
- elevations
kg 7,135
structures
- insole
C.2.3.6 Supply and laying of waterstop strip for construction joints. According
m 99
C.2.4.1 Internal coating of walls and bottom tank type epoxy polyaminic
m² 587
(aliphatic cycle) solvent free
C.2.3.7 Light concrete and coating with bituminous membrane m² 283
C.2.3.8 Formation of masonry THK 20 cm m² 33
C.2.4.4 Supply and installation of exterior doors with one or two steel doors,
with rim and chrome, including the supply and installation of marble m² 10
threshold.According to the instructions of the supervisor engineer.
C.RP.03.2.1 - BoQ of the Reservoirs Pag. 1

C.2.4.5 Supply and installation of windows with crystals, performed with
frames made from extruded aluminum alloy series with open joints,
mm of section 45 (for fixed frames) and 52 mm (for opening swinging
doors ), complete with sills 45 mm with lateral development of the
flaps - 2 cm, internal thickness 12/10 of internal flaps, interior and
exterior trims - for covering the cables - safety crystals 3 +3, or
ventilation grid - fixed aluminum type - hinges and locking devices of
movement with a hammer handle or lever. including the formation of m² 8
protective grates and network against the birds, which comprises the
production of the lintel and shoulders, to be carried in reinforced
concrete, including the respective reinforcing iron and the formworks,
all anchored to the walls of buildings. According to the instructions of
the supervisor engineer.
Floor, Plasters and Paintings

C.2.4.2 Interior floor finish quartz concrete pavement. According to the
m² 88
instructions of the supervisor engineer.
C.2.4.6 Plaster for interior and / or exterior made by hydraulic lime mortar
dosed at 3 q.li / mc applied on bricks or concrete for ceilings, vaults,
cornices and other sloped surfaces, including parapets and niches. m² 902
Rating for full vacuum up to holes of 2 mq. According to the
instructions of the supervisor engineer.
C.2.4.7 Paintings m² 682
External works
C.2.2.4 Granulate mixed and stabilized m³ 198
C.2.9.1 Kerb m 55
C.2.9.2 Grassing m² 220
C.2.9.3 Supply and installation of galvanized fence including reinforced
m² 352
concrete foundation
C.2.4.8 Supply and installation of gutters m 70
C.2.6.5.2 Supply and laying of UPVC sewage pipes of ND 315 mm. According
m 99
C.2.6.7.2 Supply and installation of concrete manholes and concrete structures,
including excavation, backfill, removal of debris, lowering water table
except the only manhole cover. Internal dimensions of 50x50x50 cm. No. 6
According to the Engineer's instructions.
C.2.6.6.1 Supply and installation of concrete manhole covers for manholes and
chambers 50x50. According to the Engineer's instructions. No. 6
Ironworks
C.2.5.1 Supply and laying of labored iron. According to the instructions of the
kg 176
- water tank access
kg 1,100
- galvanized steel parapet
kg 2,200
- galvanized steel staircase

kg 2,200
- galvanized steelm ladder
C.2.5.2 Grid iron m² 11
C.2.5.3 Metal grid for aeration No. 2
Mechanical works
C.2.6.2.2 Supply and laying of stainless steel pipes of ND 300 mm. According
m 27
m 21
m 8
C.2.6.3.5 Supply and laying of stainless steel reduction cone ND 400/300
No. 3

No. 1
No. 1
C.2.7.3 Supply and installation of strainer No. 2
C.2.7.1.4 Supply and installation of: Butterfly valves ND 300 mm. According to
No. 5
the Engineer's instructions.
C.2.7.1.2 Supply and installation of: Butterfly valves ND 200 mm. According to
No. 2
the Engineer's instructions.
C.2.7.2.4 Disassembly joint - ND 300 No. 1
C.2.5.4 Stainless steel pipe ND 150 mm for aeration No. 1
C.2.8.1.2 Supply and installation of mechanical flowmeter (Woltman) in outlet
No. 1
pipe - OD 300 mm
C.2.8.2.1 Supply and installation of ultrasonic water level meter for storage
No. 1
reservoirs, battery powered.
Carried to Summary

SANITATION
Summary:
SANITATION ADDITION TOTAL
Sr N°
UGX UGX
6 Latrine 1 1
7 Latrine 2 1
8 Waste water discharge 1
Latrine 1 First phase
D.1.2.1 Excavation of broad cross-section for environmental remediation in
general, leveling and road foundations, including storage of m³ 33.8
excavated material in the site.
D.1.2.2 Excavation of sections required for the realization of artefacts
including deposit of excavated material in the area of the yard and m³ 18.9
backfilling to completed artefact.
D.1.2.4 Supply, laying and compaction of boulders, sub-base and
waterproof coating for the formation of sub-foundation of the m³ 15.2
manufactured articles in general.
D.1.3.3 Execution of concrete (rbk 20 n/smm) including pumping, vibration
m³ 5.1
and smoothing of concrete surfaces.
D.1.3.4 Execution of concrete platform (including: footing form, rbk 250
m³ 18.3
concrete casting, concrete vibration).
D.1.3.5 Execution of concrete elevation (including: elevation form, rbk 350
m³ 3.9
D.1.3.7 Supply and installation of deformed high yield steel bars in grade
460 and ductility class B (460B) to BS4449, for reinforced concrete kg 2,348.0
structures
D.1.3.8 Execution of foundation curb made of bricks 24 x 12 x 8 cm,
m³ 2.3
including rendering and waterproofing on both surfaces.
D.1.3.9
Construction of external walls and internal partitions with bricks 24 x
12 x 8 cm, including underground surface finishing with rendering
and waterproofing on both surfaces and upground surface finishing
with: cement sand plastering, rendering and painting on exterior
m² 88.0
surface and cement plastering, painting on interior surface from the
foundation curb up to the cover connecting element, with the
exclusion of the surfaces of doors and windows.
• thickness of the Wall 20 cm.
D.1.3.10 Construction of external walls and internal partitions with bricks 24 x

12 x 8 cm, including rendering for interior and exterior surfaces.
Waterproof layer to be realized from the foundation curb up to the
m² 59.6
cover connecting element, with the exclusion of the surfaces of
doors and windows.
D.1.4.1 Finishing of interior floor of the rooms with quartz concrete
pavement.
m² 1.7
- grid for small chambers
D.1.4.5 Construction of roofing, complete as in the drawings and as
specified. Works include tie beams, purlins, rafters, struts, wall plate,
fascia board, metal lathe ceiling and eaves, and all roofing timber, m² 95.7
gauge 28 blue prepainted GCI sheets and ridges to the Engineer's
satisfaction.
D.1.4.7
Supply and installation of approved solid hardwood doors with three
coats of polyurethane varnish on general surfaces of door as
described; 50mm two panel framed door comprising 50 x 100mm
stiles, top, middle and bottom rails all grooved and with both panels
No. 8.0
filled with 30 x 100mm vertical tongued and grooved battens with
rubber door stops, all iron mongery and locking arrangements of the
following sizes:
• Single leaf door overall size 800mm x 2100mm (W x H).
D.1.4.2
Supply and installation of internal steel doors, with single or double
doors up to 2 meters in width, consisting of chassis and counter
m² 8.9
frame in tubular steel galvanized panels and simple galvanized
sheet steel with thickness 10 / 10 mm, with lock and handle.
D.1.4.3 Supply and installation of exterior doors with one or two steel doors,
m² 8.3
threshold.
D.RP.02.6 - BoQ of the Sanitation Pag. 1

D.1.4.4
of section 45 mm (for fixed frames) and 52 mm (for opening
swinging doors), complete with: sills of thickness 45 mm with lateral
development of the flaps of 2 cm, internal flaps thickness 12/10
m² 4.1
mm, interior and exterior trims for covering the cables, safety
crystals 3+3 or fixed aluminum type ventilation grid, hinges, locking
devices, movement with a hammer handle or lever. Works include
the realization of protective grates and networks against the birds, of
lintel and shoulders in reinforced concrete, and the respective
reinforcing iron and formworks, all anchored to the building walls.
D.1.4.14 Construction of Urinal facility with perforated DN 20 PPR/GI water

pipework, valves, fittings, floor trap, domical removable cast iron No. 1.0
grating, gulley trap.
D.1.4.15 Construction of Shower Closet with DN 13 PPR/GI water pipework,
valves, fittings, floor trap, domical removable cast iron grating, gulley
No. 2.0
trap, elevated perforated circular shower head, 13mm diameter
chromium plated pillar taps.
D.1.4.16
Provision of materials and construction of a hand washing facility
complete with wash hand basins, DN 13/20 GI/PPR plumbing
pipework, uPVC drainage pipework, all fittings, gulley and bottle
traps, valves, 13mm diameter chromium plated pillar taps, waste No. 2.0
outlet gratings, all accessories, including single low level wash hand
basin for disabled person's usage; as per specifications and
drawings and to the Engineer's approval.
D.1.4.17 Supply and install squatting type low level water closet suite
complete with WC pan, heavy duty cistern complete with anti-vandal
No. 4.0
cage, flush pipe, connected to nearest manhole; all to the Engineer's
satisfaction
D.1.4.18 Supply and installation of seat low level water closet suite type
complete with WC pan, heavy duty cistern, flush pipe complete with
No. 2.0
anti-vandal cage, connected to nearest manhole; all to the
D.1.4.9
Supply and installation of approved solid hardwood shelves 300mm
wide and 18mm thick, including mounting brackets and fasteners to m² 21.0
firmly hang the shelves on the wall, to the Engineer's satisfaction.
D.1.4.10
Supply and installation of ND 25mm GI pipe toilet grab rail for the
disabled toilet complete with all fittings and ancillaries including No. 4.0
anchoring into the floor and wall to the Engineer's approval.
D.1.4.11
Building finishes including: constructing 20x100mm high 1:3 cement-
sand skirting, 700mm wide C20 concrete splash apron; supply and
installation of 6no. toilet paper holders, installation of floor drains Sum. 1.0
with associated pipework and fittings connected to soak pit,
complete to the specifications and as directed by the Engineer.
D.1.4.20
Supply and installation of service line connection including all PN 10
GI/PPR/HDPE plumbing pipe work, fittings and ancillaries from the No. 1.0
distribution main to the water taps and flush systems.
Carried to Summary

general, leveling and road foundations, including storage of m³ 33.8
excavated material in the site.
D.1.2.2 Excavation of sections required for the realization of artefacts
including deposit of excavated material in the area of the yard and m³ 18.9
backfilling to completed artefact.
waterproof coating for the formation of sub-foundation of the m³ 15.2
manufactured articles in general.
D.1.3.3 Execution of concrete (rbk 20 n/smm) including pumping, vibration
m³ 5.1
and smoothing of concrete surfaces.
D.1.3.4 Execution of concrete platform (including: footing form, rbk 250
m³ 18.3
D.1.3.5 Execution of concrete elevation (including: elevation form, rbk 350
m³ 3.9
D.1.3.7 Supply and installation of deformed high yield steel bars in grade
460 and ductility class B (460B) to BS4449, for reinforced concrete kg 2,348.0
structures
D.1.3.8 Execution of foundation curb made of bricks 24 x 12 x 8 cm,
m³ 2.3
including rendering and waterproofing on both surfaces.
D.1.3.9
Construction of external walls and internal partitions with bricks 24 x
12 x 8 cm, including underground surface finishing with rendering
and waterproofing on both surfaces and upground surface finishing
with: cement sand plastering, rendering and painting on exterior
m² 88.0
surface and cement plastering, painting on interior surface from the
foundation curb up to the cover connecting element, with the
exclusion of the surfaces of doors and windows.
D.1.3.10 Construction of external walls and internal partitions with bricks 24 x

12 x 8 cm, including rendering for interior and exterior surfaces.
Waterproof layer to be realized from the foundation curb up to the
m² 59.6
cover connecting element, with the exclusion of the surfaces of
doors and windows.
D.1.4.1 Finishing of interior floor of the rooms with quartz concrete
pavement.
m² 1.7
- grid for small chambers
D.1.4.5 Construction of roofing, complete as in the drawings and as
specified. Works include tie beams, purlins, rafters, struts, wall plate,
fascia board, metal lathe ceiling and eaves, and all roofing timber, m² 95.7
gauge 28 blue prepainted GCI sheets and ridges to the Engineer's
satisfaction.
D.1.4.7
Supply and installation of approved solid hardwood doors with three
coats of polyurethane varnish on general surfaces of door as
described; 50mm two panel framed door comprising 50 x 100mm
stiles, top, middle and bottom rails all grooved and with both panels
No. 8.0
filled with 30 x 100mm vertical tongued and grooved battens with
rubber door stops, all iron mongery and locking arrangements of the
following sizes:
• Single leaf door overall size 800mm x 2100mm (W x H).
D.1.4.2
Supply and installation of internal steel doors, with single or double
doors up to 2 meters in width, consisting of chassis and counter
m² 8.9
frame in tubular steel galvanized panels and simple galvanized
sheet steel with thickness 10 / 10 mm, with lock and handle.
D.1.4.3 Supply and installation of exterior doors with one or two steel doors,
m² 8.3
threshold.

D.1.4.4
of section 45 mm (for fixed frames) and 52 mm (for opening
swinging doors), complete with: sills of thickness 45 mm with lateral
development of the flaps of 2 cm, internal flaps thickness 12/10
m² 4.1
mm, interior and exterior trims for covering the cables, safety
crystals 3+3 or fixed aluminum type ventilation grid, hinges, locking
devices, movement with a hammer handle or lever. Works include
the realization of protective grates and networks against the birds, of
lintel and shoulders in reinforced concrete, and the respective
reinforcing iron and formworks, all anchored to the building walls.
D.1.4.14 Construction of Urinal facility with perforated DN 20 PPR/GI water

pipework, valves, fittings, floor trap, domical removable cast iron No. 1.0
grating, gulley trap.
D.1.4.15 Construction of Shower Closet with DN 13 PPR/GI water pipework,
valves, fittings, floor trap, domical removable cast iron grating, gulley
No. 2.0
trap, elevated perforated circular shower head, 13mm diameter
chromium plated pillar taps.
D.1.4.16
Provision of materials and construction of a hand washing facility
complete with wash hand basins, DN 13/20 GI/PPR plumbing
pipework, uPVC drainage pipework, all fittings, gulley and bottle
traps, valves, 13mm diameter chromium plated pillar taps, waste No. 2.0
outlet gratings, all accessories, including single low level wash hand
basin for disabled person's usage; as per specifications and
drawings and to the Engineer's approval.
D.1.4.17 Supply and install squatting type low level water closet suite
complete with WC pan, heavy duty cistern complete with anti-vandal
No. 4.0
cage, flush pipe, connected to nearest manhole; all to the Engineer's
satisfaction
D.1.4.18 Supply and installation of seat low level water closet suite type
complete with WC pan, heavy duty cistern, flush pipe complete with
No. 2.0
anti-vandal cage, connected to nearest manhole; all to the
D.1.4.9
Supply and installation of approved solid hardwood shelves 300mm
wide and 18mm thick, including mounting brackets and fasteners to m² 21.0
firmly hang the shelves on the wall, to the Engineer's satisfaction.
D.1.4.10
Supply and installation of ND 25mm GI pipe toilet grab rail for the
disabled toilet complete with all fittings and ancillaries including No. 4.0
anchoring into the floor and wall to the Engineer's approval.
D.1.4.11
Building finishes including: constructing 20x100mm high 1:3 cement-
sand skirting, 700mm wide C20 concrete splash apron; supply and
installation of 6no. toilet paper holders, installation of floor drains Sum. 1.0
with associated pipework and fittings connected to soak pit,
complete to the specifications and as directed by the Engineer.
D.1.4.20
Supply and installation of service line connection including all PN 10
GI/PPR/HDPE plumbing pipe work, fittings and ancillaries from the No. 1.0
distribution main to the water taps and flush systems.
Carried to Summary

Waste water discharge First phase
general, leveling and road foundations, including storage of
excavated material in the site. m³ 4.5
- for connection septic tank

D.1.2.5 Supply, laying and compacting of sand, fine gravel or arid material
for the formation of sub-foundation and abutment of the pipes in
general. m³ 2.5
- for connection septic tank

D.1.6.2 Supply and laying of UPVC sewage pipes complying with EN 1401-
1, of ND 160 mm.
m 6
- for connection septic tank Latrine
D.1.3.1
Excavation and construction of Septic Tank of effective capacity
20m3 in blockwork and reinforced concrete, rendered smooth
inside, complete with inlet and outlet manholes benching and heavy
Sum. 2.0
duty cast iron manhole covers.
- Latrine
D.1.2.3 Excavation of trenches for the construction of pipelines or channels

including deposit of excavated material in the area of the yard and
backfilling to completed conduct. m³ 35.3
- Latrine uPVC Ø110 mm

general. m³ 19.6

1, of ND 110 mm.
m 49
- Latrine

general. m³ 14.5

1, of ND 160 mm.
m 36
- Latrine

general. m³ 148.5

1, of ND 200 mm.
m 371
- Latrine
D.1.6.11 Supply and installation of concrete manholes and concrete
structures, including excavation, backfill, removal of debris, water
table lowering, and excluding the only manhole cover. Internal
No. 6.0
dimensions of 40x40x40 cm.
- Latrine

Waste water discharge First phase
D.1.5.2 Supply and installation of ductile cast iron manhole cover.
kg 198.0
- Latrine
No. 2.0
- Latrine
kg 88.0
- Latrine
No. 9.0
- Latrine
kg 524.7
- Latrine
D.1.6.14 Supply and installation of additional ring for concrete manholes,
including excavation, backfill, removal of debris, water table
lowering, and excluding the only manhole cover. Internal dimensions
No. 6.0
of 40x40 for h = 50 cm.
- Latrine
No. 2.0
of 50x50 for h = 50 cm.
- Latrine
No. 9.0
of 60x60 for h = 50 cm.
- Latrine
- Gravel bed
waterproof coating for the formation of sub-foundation of the
manufactured articles in general. m³ 220.0
- Gravel bed
D.1.6.5 Supply and laying of perforated uPVC pipes complying with EN 1401-
1, with flexible joints to ISO 1452, 200mm OD PN6, for wastewater
dispersion m 11
- Gravel bed
D.1.9.2 Supply and laying of fencing (height 2,00 m).
m 50
- Gravel bed
D.1.9.4 Supply and laying of gate for fencing.
No. 1.0
- latrine.
Carried to Summary

REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
CREDIT NO. 51270-UG

AND KOBOKO TOWNS
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
VOLUME 2a:
SECTION VII : WORKS REQUIREMENTS
SEPTEMBER 2015

P.O.Box 20026
Kampala - Uganda
SPECIFICATION
FOREWORD
For convenience and for reference purposes, certain Materials, Plant and other inputs or processes may have
been designated in the Specifications and in other Contract Documents by brand name, trade name or
catalogue name and number. Such designation shall be deemed to be followed by the words “or equivalent
approved” or “equal (approved)” or “or similar (and) approved” whether such words are shown or not.
Any reference to national standards such as BS shall also be deemed to be followed by the words “or
equivalent”.
RU.A.RP.07
SPECIFICATION OF
GENERAL ITEMS
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Ministry of water and environment
Feasibility study, detailed design of the small towns in Rukungiri, Katwe-Kabatoro and Koboko
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL CLAUSES ...................................................................................................... 5

1.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 5
1.2 PURPOSE AND LOCATION OF THE WORKS ................................................................... 5
1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS ..................................................................... 5
1.4 PLANT DESIGN ........................................................................................................... 8
1.5 DESIGN LIFE ............................................................................................................... 9
1.6 REGULATIONS, STANDARDS, CODES AND STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ...................... 9
1.7 DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................... 10
1.8 ISSUED DRAWINGS ................................................................................................... 10
1.9 BID DRAWINGS ......................................................................................................... 10
1.10 APPROVED DRAWINGS ............................................................................................. 11
1.11 PROCEDURE FOR APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS ............................................................. 13
1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS ................................................................................................. 13
1.13 CONTRACTOR'S CALCULATIONS AND TECHNICAL DETAILS ..................................... 14
1.14 PROGRAMME ............................................................................................................ 14
1.15 PROGRESS MEETINGS AND REPORTS ........................................................................ 15
1.16 ORGANISATION OF ACTIVITIES ................................................................................. 16
1.17 NOTICE OF OPERATIONS ........................................................................................... 16
1.18 PACKING AND PROTECTION ...................................................................................... 16
1.19 COMMISSIONING ....................................................................................................... 17
1.20 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING .............................................................. 18
1.20.1 Training for individual items of Plant and Equipment ................................. 18
1.20.2 Training after completion ............................................................................. 19
1.20.3 Training after issue of the Taking-Over Certificate ..................................... 19
1.21 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS....................................................................................... 19
1.22 WATER AND ELECTRICITY SUPPLY ........................................................................... 20
1.23 CONTRACTOR'S FACILITIES ...................................................................................... 20
1.24 STORAGE OF PLANT .................................................................................................. 20
1.25 LEVEL DATA ............................................................................................................ 22
1.26 CLIMATIC DATA AND LOCATION LEVEL................................................................... 22
RU_A_RP.07 – Technical specifications of the General Items

Pag. 2
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1.27 CONTAMINATION OF WATER SUPPLIES .................................................................... 22

1.28 SITE ACCESS AND BOUNDARY .................................................................................. 23
1.29 USE OF PUBLIC HIGHWAYS AND ROADS ................................................................... 24
1.30 PRIVATE PROPERTY .................................................................................................. 24
1.31 CLEARANCE OF THE SITE .......................................................................................... 24
1.32 CONDITION OF THE SITE ........................................................................................... 25
1.33 ACCESS FOR THE EMPLOYER AND ENGINEER ........................................................... 25
1.34 NOISE ....................................................................................................................... 25
1.35 TEMPORARY WORKS ................................................................................................ 26
1.36 LATRINES ................................................................................................................. 26
1.37 PHOTOGRAPHS.......................................................................................................... 26
1.38 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT ......................................................................................... 27
1.39 LANGUAGES ............................................................................................................. 27
1.40 CONTRACT SIGNBOARD ............................................................................................ 27
1.41 ADVERTISING ........................................................................................................... 28
1.42 SAFETY REGULATIONS ON SITE ................................................................................ 28
1.43 PROTECTION OF EXISTING PUBLIC AND PRIVATE SERVICES ..................................... 28
1.44 PERMITS ................................................................................................................... 29
1.45 INSURANCE ............................................................................................................... 29
1.46 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT......................................................................... 29
1.46.1 Safety, Security and Environmental Management ....................................... 29
1.46.2 Specific Environmental Issues to be considered .......................................... 31
1.47 EQUIVALENCY OF STANDARDS AND CODES ............................................................. 34
1.48 ALTERNATIVES TO PROPRIETARY BRANDS ............................................................... 35
2 ENGINEER’S REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 36

2.1 OFFICE ACCOMMODATION FOR THE ENGINEER ........................................................ 36
2.1.1 Location of the Buildings ............................................................................. 36
2.1.2 Site Office Building ...................................................................................... 37
2.1.3 Access Roads and Parking ............................................................................ 38
2.1.4 Furniture, Fixings, Laboratory Equipment etc. ............................................ 38
2.1.5 Stationery and Office Supplies ..................................................................... 38
2.1.6 Laboratory Supplies and Equipment ............................................................ 39
2.1.7 Water, Gas and Electricity ............................................................................ 39
2.1.8 Communications ........................................................................................... 39

Pag. 3
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.1.9 Surveying Instruments and Equipment ......................................................... 40

2.1.10 Computers ..................................................................................................... 40
2.2 RESIDENTIAL ACCOMMODATION FOR THE ENGINEER ............................................... 44
2.3 OFFICE & RESIDENTIAL ACCOMMODATION FOR THE RESIDENT ENGINEER .............. 46
2.3.1 Building ........................................................................................................ 46
2.3.2 Furniture, Fixings, Equipment, Supplies, etc. .............................................. 48
2.3.3 Computers ..................................................................................................... 49
2.4 OFFICE ACCOMMODATION FOR WATER AUTHORITY’S STAFF .................................. 50
2.5 TRANSPORT FOR THE ENGINEER ............................................................................... 51
2.6 ASSISTANCE TO THE ENGINEER ................................................................................ 54
3 SOIL AND GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS .................................................. 70
4 SUPERVISION ................................................................................................................ 71

Pag. 4
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1 GENERAL CLAUSES
1.1 GENERAL
In these Specifications and elsewhere in connection with the Contract, any reference to Defects
Liability Period and Project Manager (in an appropriate context) shall be construed as Defects
Notification Period and Engineer respectively.
1.2 PURPOSE AND LOCATION OF THE WORKS
The purpose of the Works is to construct a water supply and sanitation system for Rukungiri
Municipality in the Republic of Uganda.
1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS
Water Supply works
Water Treatment Plant’s civil works
The Works to be executed by the Contractor shall include the following:
(a) Construction of new intake works,

(b) Construction of site works including access road and parking, pipework, fencing,
drainage, etc.
(c) Construction of structure for fine screening and flow divider,
(d) Construction of building for storing chemicals,
(e) Construction of 2 no. clariflocculators,
(f) Construction of structure for filters and backwash equipment,
(g) Construction of building for housing disinfection equipment and mixing / storage
tank,
(h) Construction of pump station,
(i) Construction of equalization tank,
(j) Construction of sludge thickener,
(k) Construction of sludge drying beds,
(l) Construction of power house,
(m) Construction of building for housing emergency generator.

Pag. 5
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Water Treatment Plant’s mechanical works
(a) Supply, installation and commissioning of mechanical equipment at intake works,

(b) Supply, installation and commissioning of mechanical equipment for fine screening
and flow divider,
(c) Supply, installation and commissioning of mechanical equipment for
clariflocculators,
(d) Supply, installation and commissioning of mechanical equipment for chemical
building,
(e) Supply, installation and commissioning of mechanical equipment for filters and
backwash building,
(f) Supply, installation and commissioning of mechanical equipment for disinfection
building & for mixing and storage tank,
(g) Supply, installation and commissioning of mechanical equipment for pump station,
(h) Supply, installation and commissioning of mechanical equipment for emergency
generator room,
(i) Supply, installation and commissioning of mechanical equipment for power house,
(j) Supply, installation and commissioning of mechanical equipment for equalization
tank,
(k) Supply, installation and commissioning of mechanical equipment for sludge
thickening,
(l) Supply, installation and commissioning of mechanical equipment for sludge drying
beds,
(m) Supply, installation and commissioning of SCADA, PLC and instrumentation for
control and automatic functioning of intake pump station, water treatment plant, and
master balancing reservoir.
Water Treatment Plant’s electrical works
(a) Supply, installation and commissioning of electrical equipment for the intake works
and water treatment plant.
Transmission pipelines

Pag. 6
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
(a) Supply, laying, testing and commissioning of either DN 225 HDPE PN16 raw water
pumping lines and associated fittings or DN 225 uPVC PN16 raw water pumping
lines, whichever is cheaper,
(b) Supply, laying, testing and commissioning of either DN 315 HDPE PN6 backwash
and waste water line or DN 315 uPVC PN6 backwash and waste water line, whichever
is cheaper,
(c) Supply, laying, testing and commissioning of DN 350 DI Class 40 bars pure water
pumping line and associated fittings,
(d) Supply, laying, testing and commissioning of either DN 450 HDPE PN10 pure water
transmission main and associated fittings or DN 450 uPVC PN10 pure water
transmission main and associated fittings, whichever is cheaper,
(e) Supply, laying, testing and commissioning of either DN 450 HDPE PN16 pure water
(f) Supply, laying, testing and commissioning of either DN 400 HDPE PN16 pure water
(g) Supply, laying, testing and commissioning of either DN 400 HDPE PN10 pure water
(h) Supply, laying, testing and commissioning of either DN 355 HDPE PN10 pure water
(i) Supply, laying, testing and commissioning of either DN 280 HDPE PN10 pure water
(j) Supply, laying, testing and commissioning of either DN 250 HDPE PN10 pure water
(k) Supply and erect inlet pipeline for the existing Rwanyakashesha elevated tank in
Rukungiri Municipality,
(l) Supply and erect inlet pipeline for the existing Bwoma elevated tank in Rukungiri
Municipality.
Civil Works for Water Supply Reservoirs
(a) Construction of new 700 m3 RCC master balancing reservoir (GSR) at Mukazi hill.
Sanitation works
Civil and Mechanical Works for public latrines
(a) Construction of 2 No public toilets to be located in designated areas within the

Municipality,

Pag. 7
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
(b) Construction of 2 No. septic tanks, one for each of the toilets,
(c) Supply, laying and commissioning of DN 200 uPVC PN6 waste water line,
(d) Construction of 1 No. gravel bed structure.
Work to be Executed by Others
Work to be executed by UMEME.
UMEME will energise the installed transformers.
1.4 PLANT DESIGN
The whole of the Plant shall be designed and constructed to the best standard.
A manufacturer's standard design may be used for a Plant item where such a design is available and
where it is at least equal to and compatible with that required by the Specification.
The Plant shall be new, of sound workmanship and robust design, and of a grade and quality
suitable for the duty concerned and for the climatic conditions at the Site.
The Plant shall be designed to provide adequate protection against the entry of vermin and dust and
to minimise fire risk and consequential fire damage.
All parts, which can be worn or damaged by dust, shall be totally enclosed in dust proof housings.
All equipment shall operate without excessive vibration and with minimum of noise.
All similar items of Plant and their components together with spare parts shall be made from the
same materials and shall be fully interchangeable.
All manually operable Plant not located inside a building shall be provided with facilities for
making it tamper proof. This is in addition to any requirements of the Specification for securing
Plant under operational conditions.
The standards of workmanship and finish shall be uniform throughout and the final colours shall be

Pag. 8
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
designated by the Engineer.
Materials used in the Works which are or can be in contact with the untreated or treated water shall
not contain any matter which could impart taste or odour or toxicity or otherwise be harmful to
health or adversely affect the water conveyed. Approval by the Uganda National Bureau of
Standards will generally be regarded as satisfactory evidence of suitability.
1.5 DESIGN LIFE
All materials and equipment shall be designed for long life and continuous operation during
prolonged periods with a minimum of maintenance and the Contractor may be called upon to
demonstrate this for any component either by the service records of similar equipment elsewhere or
by records of extensive type tests.
Routine maintenance and repair shall, as far as possible, not require the services of highly skilled
personnel.
The materials of construction of the Plant shall be selected, taking into consideration their location
and duty, such that the economic life of the Plant is not less than 25 years.
Except for consumable items such as gland packing, carbon brushes etc. which normally require
replacement more frequently, no part subject to wear shall have a life from new to replacement or
repair of less than three years of continual operation. Where major dismantling is required to
replace a part, such life shall be not less than five years.
1.6 REGULATIONS, STANDARDS, CODES AND STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
The Contractor shall obtain at least one copy of each ISO, BS, EN or other approved standard and
reference work which is referred to in the Specification, and of each other standards which applies
to materials which are being supplied to, or workmanship executed on, the Works. These standards
and reference works shall be supplied to the Engineer within 90 days of the Engineer’s Order to
Commence the Works and will be available to the Contractor at all reasonable times.
Except where otherwise specified all materials and workmanship shall comply with current national
standards provided that these standards are not less stringent than the equivalent British Standards
or Codes of Practice or provided that they comply with the requirements of the International
Organisation for Standardisation (ISO) or the International Electro-technical Commission (IEC), as
appropriate.
The electricity installation shall comply with all relevant statutory regulations and standards current
at date of the bid, unless otherwise indicated within this Specification. Electrical installations shall,

Pag. 9
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
where relevant, be in accordance with the IEE Regulation for Electrical Installations, 16th Edition.
1.7 DRAWINGS
The Drawings comprise the following.
 Issued Drawings
The Issued Drawings as hereinafter described.
 Bid Drawings
The Bid Drawings as hereinafter described.
 Approved Drawings
Approved Drawings as hereinafter described. Manufacture of the Plant shall not begin, nor shall
erection of the Plant commence, until the appropriate Approved Drawings are available. The
Plant shall be manufactured and erected in accordance with the Approved and Engineer’s
Drawings.
 Engineer’s Drawings
The drawings issued from time to time by the Engineer.
 Record Drawings
Record Drawings as hereinafter described.
1.8 ISSUED DRAWINGS
These are drawings issued to the Contractor with the Bid Documents for the purposes of preparing a
bid.
Such drawings shall be deemed to have been issued for the guidance of bidders, and shall be
referred to for the interpretation of the Contract only where the drawings supplied by the Contractor
at the time of bidding and incorporated in the Contract are insufficient.
1.9 BID DRAWINGS
The Bid Drawings are supplied by the Contractor for the purpose of illustrating his bid, namely:

Pag. 10
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
 a layout of the whole scheme, scale 1 : 100;
 drawings and technical details of the Plant in sufficient detail to illustrate that the several items
of Plant are suitable for their intended purpose.
Where Bid Documents including Bid Drawings show features not in compliance with this
Specification, and where such features are not listed in the Technical Schedules then the
requirements of the Issued Documents will be taken as the basis of the Contract.
1.10 APPROVED DRAWINGS
With reference to Sub-Clause 6.1 of the General Conditions of Contract the Contractor shall submit,
for approval, each drawing in the following categories and schedule.
 Preliminary Layout Drawings

 These shall be submitted within 1 month of the Commencement Date.
 These drawings shall show locations of major structures and site layouts.
 Preliminary Civil Outline Drawings

These shall be submitted within 2 months of the Commencement Date.
These drawings shall include information to allow the structural design to commence.
These drawings shall inform the Engineer of the basic physical shape, including channel sizes,
and positions relative to one another, of the structures, and confirm the hydraulic levels through
the plant.
They shall indicate in broad terms the locations for plinths and pipelines (greater than
250 mm NB) through walls. Location, line and level of major equipment/structures shall be
positioned to an accuracy of ±300 mm. They shall not detail final position for equipment and
loadings or wall thicknesses and the like.
Loadings’ accuracy for major plant shall not be less than final load nor greater than 120% of
final load.

Pag. 11
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
 Detailed General Arrangement Drawings

These shall be submitted within 3 months of the Commencement Date.
These drawings shall include information required to allow all major structural design and civil
general arrangement drawings to be completed.
These drawings shall comprise:
 general arrangement drawings to scale of site plans showing each structure and building,
principal routes for cables, pipes and chemical ducts and services;
 drawings of each building/structure shown in plan and elevation to show position of major
items of plant.
 Final Civil Outline Drawings

 These shall be submitted within 4 months of the Commencement Date.
 These drawings shall include information to allow all major civil detail drawings to be
completed.
 These drawings shall include final positions and loadings and dimensions of major plant.
 Plant Drawings
These shall be submitted within 5 months of the Commencement Date and shall include but not
be limited to:
 general arrangement drawings to illustrate the position of the Plant in relation to the
appropriate part of the Works in sufficient detail to show all the principal dimensions,
methods of support and other relevant information;
 drawings of the Plant in sufficient detail for the Engineer to satisfy himself that jointly and
severally the items of the Plant are suitable for their intended purpose;
 sectional drawings of each major item of the Plant, with a parts list and a list of materials to
be used for each part. General arrangement of electrical panels with foundation and cable
access details;
 diagrammatic outline and detail drawings of all services to, from and between the several

Pag. 12
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
items of the Plant, including potable and process water supplies, pipework, connections and
fittings, electrical single line and schematic diagrams, cable schedules and site cable layout,
connections and fittings, and drainage pipework and fitting;
 requirements for incoming supplies, services etc and details of interface connections in
respect of the Plant, particularly where such connections are at the limit of Contract;
 details of wastes, effluent discharges, etc and details of interface connections in respect of
the Plant, particularly where such connections are at the limit of Contract;
 detailed drawings of the Plant and data in sufficient detail as may be reasonably required for
the Engineer to satisfy himself as to the stability, durability and safety of the works and for
ascertaining of inspection of the Plant during construction that it is in conformity with the
Contract;
 fully detailed installation drawings giving complete dimensions of pedestals, cuts, chases,
bolt holes, ducts and other provisions to be made in the civil structures and on site of fixing
the Plant.
1.11 PROCEDURE FOR APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS
Unless otherwise indicated within this Specification preliminary copies of drawings for approval
shall be submitted to the Engineer.
Any alterations required by the Engineer to be made to drawings submitted for approval shall be
made by the Contractor without extra charge, or extension of time, provided such alterations are not
consequential upon a change in the requirements of the Contract.
Drawings when approved will be stamped with the Engineer’s approval stamp and one copy of each
such approved drawing will be returned to the Contractor.
Acceptance of Bid Drawings shall not be deemed to confer the Engineer's approval upon them.
1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide a set of as built drawings for the works. He shall submit four original
hard copies, in colour, of the drawings a soft copy (digital format), a print out of the co-ordinates of
the fixtures (e.g. valves, bends, manholes, etc.) and an electronic copy of the co-ordinates. The
Contractor shall agree the details of the electronic copies with the Engineer.

Pag. 13
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
A coloured and framed drawing showing all valves, pipe runs etc, together with detailed operating
instructions for use in the treatment plant and pumping stations and four full sets of Record
Drawings will be required by the Employer on the completion of the work. The Drawings and one
soft copy (digital format) shall be fully dimensioned, general arrangement and detail drawings
together with electrical wiring diagrams. All drawings submitted for approval shall be included in
the record drawings. Revised drawings shall be submitted within one month of any amendments
made during erection. The record drawings shall be submitted along with the relative operating
instruction manuals.
1.13 CONTRACTOR'S CALCULATIONS AND TECHNICAL DETAILS
Within two months of the Commencement Date the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer design
calculations and technical details of the Plant and structures further to those accepted with his Bid,
in sufficient detail for the Engineer to satisfy himself that the items of the Plant and the structures
are jointly and severally suitable for their intended purpose.
The design calculations and technical details shall include design calculations, piping and
instrumentation diagrams, hydraulic flow diagrams, technical details and schedules of major plant
and structures.
The Contractor shall also provide such additional details and calculations and other data as may be
reasonably required by the Engineer to satisfy himself to the stability, durability and safety of the
works and for ascertaining and inspection of the plant and structures during construction that it is in
conformity with the Contract.
The Contractor shall submit as part of his technical details, the magnitude and frequency of all out
of balance forces of the plant to allow them to be taken into account in the structural design of civil
and building structures.
1.14 PROGRAMME
Before commencing the Works the Contractor shall, submit to the Engineer for his approval a
programme showing the order in which he proposes to carry out the Works. The programme shall
be in the form of a bar chart, or any other form as may be agreed by the Engineer, and shall be co-
ordinated to take into account transportation and delivery times for the materials and for climatic
and other conditions to provide for the completions of the Works in accordance with the Contract.
The programme shall clearly indicate the following:
 the sequence of each activity, the proposed start and completion dates of each activity, the rate
of progress and the cumulative quantity of percentage of work expected to be achieved on each
activity by the end of each month;

Pag. 14
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
 dates by which major drawings requiring the Engineer’s approval will be submitted (a period of
three weeks shall be allowed from date of receipt of these drawings for such approval);
 the time allocated for work by others, including those of the Employer and by utility
undertakings.
Sufficient space should be provided in the programme for recording the actual progress against the
programmed progress for each activity.
The programme shall be submitted with details of the following:
 a statement giving the numbers and categories of supervisory and technical staff and skilled and
unskilled workers to be employed on the Works;
 a list and type details of major Constructional Plant (including vehicles) which the Contractor
proposes to employ on the Works;
 details of the Contractor’s methods of working for all operations;
 a statement giving the proposals for location or locations and sizes of accommodation, offices,
workshops and stores;
 details of the programme for the Works from the date of receipt of the Engineer’s order to
commence the Works including a complete resource allocation showing the number of units and
allotted times for each unit of Constructional Plant, materials and labour allocated to each part
of the Works.
1.15 PROGRESS MEETINGS AND REPORTS
During the period of the Contract, the Contractor shall allow for all consultations with the Employer
and the Engineer and his staff in Rukungiri, Kampala, or elsewhere as necessary.
From the commencement of the work on Site there will be a series of monthly Site progress
meetings to coordinate the civil and plant works. Representatives of the Contractor, approved by the
Engineer, shall attend monthly progress meetings on Site or at the offices of the Employer. In
addition, approved representatives of the Contractor shall attend further meetings in cases of
emergencies or for other reasons when called upon by the Employer.

Pag. 15
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer each month a report on his progress in the performance
of the Contract. The report shall include a copy of the approved programme with the current
progress for each activity shown.
1.16 ORGANISATION OF ACTIVITIES
The Contractor shall organise his activities within the Contract Area in such a way as to minimise
disruption to both the public, to water consumers and his sequence of working shall be clearly
indicated in the Programme. The Contractor shall submit a fully detailed programme of work to the
Engineer for approval.
1.17 NOTICE OF OPERATIONS
The Contractor shall give full and complete written notice of all important operations to the
Engineer sufficiently in advance to enable the Engineer to make such arrangements, as he may
consider necessary for inspection or for any other purpose. The Contractor shall not commence any
important operation without the written approval of the Engineer.
Important works shall include all operations occurring on the site outside the following hours:
Monday to Friday: 8:00 am to 5:00 p.m; and Saturday: 8:00 am to 12:00 noon.
1.18 PACKING AND PROTECTION
Before any item is despatched from a manufacturer's factory it shall be adequately protected and
packed so as to arrive at the Site intact and undamaged. The Engineer shall be given at least 14 days
notice that packing will commence. The method of protection and packing must be suitable to
withstand the conditions, which may be experienced in shipment and delivery to the Site. It should
also be suitable to withstand long periods of storage out of doors.
No one crate or package shall contain items of Plant intended for incorporation in more than one
part of the Works.
All items shall be clearly marked for identification against the packing list, which shall be placed in
every crate or package and protected in a waterproof envelope.
All crates and packages shall be clearly marked with a waterproof pen and weatherproof material to
show the weight and where the weight is bearing, and where the sling should be attached. They
shall also be marked to identify the packing lists.

Pag. 16
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Bright parts and bearing surfaces shall be protected from corrosion by the application of a rust-
preventive lacquer, high melting point grease or similar. A sufficient quantity of appropriate solvent
shall be supplied with the Plant for the removal of this protection.
Each crate or package shall have a clear indelible and, as far as possible, indestructible unique
identification cypher, also quoted on the packing list inside it. Three copies of the packing list shall
be posted separately to the Engineer at the time of shipment.
All flanges and mating surfaces shall be protected by means of a wooden template or similar. The
bolts for securing this template shall not be secured by the bolts, screws etc, which form part of the
final installation.
1.19 COMMISSIONING
The Contractor is required to provide suitable personnel, to be approved by the Engineer, to operate
each section of the Works during commissioning, i.e. the setting to work and testing of individual
components of the Works or the complete Works. This shall include Tests on Completion.
Commencing during the commissioning period the Contractor shall instruct the Employer's staff in
the operation and maintenance of each section of the Works.
When all testing have been completed and accepted by the Engineer, the Contractor shall operate
each section of the Works as a whole for a minimum period of 30 days. This operation shall be at
the maximum capacity of the section of the Works, or lesser rate if required by the Engineer for
certain periods.
Training of the Employer's staff shall take place during the operation period.
During the 30 days described above, the Contractor shall demonstrate that the Plant can produce
consistently the specified quality of water at the design range of outputs. A comprehensive record
shall be made of all aspects of the plant operation during this time and the results provided to the
Engineer in the form of a commissioning report. This report shall include, but not be limited to,
daily records of chemical and power usage and at least daily records of all laboratory tests on raw
and treated water demonstrating the performance of the plant.
Further tests may be required by the Engineer during the Defects Liability Period to determine the
performance of the Plant under raw water conditions different from those prevailing during the 30
day operation period. During the Further Tests, the Contractor's site staff shall provide on Site a
qualified water treatment chemist approved by the Engineer. Should the Plant fail the test by not
meeting the requirements of the Specification, the Plant shall be made good and re-tested by the
Contractor at his own expense.

Pag. 17
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1.20 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING
The Contractor shall provide comprehensive training for the Employer's operation and maintenance
staff and operators. The Employer will provide all the necessary operating staff and maintenance
personnel to carry out the 30 day operation, for each section of the Works, under the Contractor's
direction and to take over the plant operation after the 30 days operation.
Three months prior to commencement of the training the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with
a detailed programme of the various phases of the training.
The Contractor shall provide the following personnel to achieve the training requirements of the
contract:
 Training expert (fluent in English and experienced in training unskilled operators in all aspects
of management and operation of the works provided under this Contract; this shall be
demonstrated by the submission of the CV to the Engineer and the latter's approval to his
appointment prior to the commencement of the training services; the total duration of the
training expert's input shall be a minimum of two months which may be split into a number of
visits).
 Operations Engineer (fluent in English and subject to the Engineer's approval after submission
of the CV; during the 30 days operation period for each of the sections of the Works he shall be
fully responsible for the direction of the Employer's operating staff and for the correct
operation; during the Defects Liability Period he shall act in an advisory capacity to the
Employer; the Contractor shall provide sufficient personnel to provide an operation, training
and advisory service acceptable to the Engineer).
Training shall be provided in the following categories:
 Training in the operation of individual items of plant and equipment.

 Training after completion, before issue of the Taking-Over Certificate.
 Training after issue of the Taking-Over Certificate.
1.20.1 Training for individual items of Plant and Equipment

Training in the maintenance, installation and operation of the following categories of plant and
equipment is to be given to the Employer's staff prior to the hands-on training during the 30 days
operation period for each of the sections of the Works:
 raw water pumps;

 pure water pumps;
 hydraulic surge protection;
 clariflocculators;
 filters and backwash;
 disinfection equipment;

Pag. 18
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
 sludge treatment;
 system control;
 plant monitoring including daily records;
 electrical switchgear;
 operation and maintenance of public latrines.
1.20.2 Training after completion

Instruction shall be given to the Employer's operators and supervisory staff in the form of hands-on
training throughout the 30 days operating period for each of the sections and parts of the Works.
This training will be given as an integral part of the operation and shall be continuous during the 30
days period for each of the sections of the Works. All aspects of the plant operation shall be covered
and the Contractor shall provide sufficient training personnel to cover all the necessary aspects
fully.
1.20.3 Training after issue of the Taking-Over Certificate

Following formal acceptance of the plant or part thereof by the Employer, the Contractor shall
continue to provide training in an advisory capacity, while responsibility for the normal operation
shall lie with the Employer. Training during this period shall include the provision of advice and
assistance when required by the Employer.
1.21 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
The Contractor shall provide five original sets, in colour, of instruction manuals for each of the
sections of the Works to cover all items of the Plant and process. The manuals shall describe the
installation and operation as a whole and give step by step procedures to enable the Employer to
carry out any operations likely to be required during the life of the Plant including erection,
commissioning, testing, operation, maintenance, dismantling and repairs. The instructions shall
include the operation of valves, penstocks, stoplogs, etc existing or provided by others where the
operation of these items is part of or associated with any aspect of the Plant operation.
The maintenance instructions shall include lubrication charts, testing and replacement procedures to
be carried out daily, weekly, monthly and at other intervals to ensure trouble-free operation. Where
applicable, fault location charts should be included to facilitate finding the cause of imperfect
operation or breakdown.
Sections of the manuals shall be devoted to each size and type of equipment with relevant detailed
descriptions of construction, maintenance and operation with lists of parts and procedures for
ordering spares.
The Contractor shall supply five original sets, in colour, of manuals and record drawings for each
section of the Works to the Engineer two months before starting the tests on completed plant
systems. Where appropriate preliminary draft copies of instructions shall be submitted during

Pag. 19
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
erection to facilitate erection and testing of equipment prior to Plant commissioning. Two complete
sets of manuals shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval including certification of equipment,
three months before the final submission described above.
The manuals shall be fully bound and indexed to A4 size with the name of the Employer,
Contractor, the Contract number and name of the scheme clearly marked. A collection of
manufacturer's descriptive leaflets will not be acceptable as an instruction manual.
1.22 WATER AND ELECTRICITY SUPPLY
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the supply of water and electricity for the
purposes of the Works.
In the event of a structure of pipeline failing on hydraulic test, the Contractor shall be responsible
for disposing of the test water to allow repairs to be carried out, and for costs of any water tankers
required for supplying water for subsequent re-tests.
Water and wastewater derived from the construction, testing and completion of the Works shall be
disposed of to the satisfaction of the Engineer so as to cause no damage or complaint.
The Contractor shall carry out the construction works without causing interruption of water supply
from the existing sources to the consumers. In case an interruption of the supply is inevitable,
communication shall be given to all relevant Local Authorities with minimum 48 h prior notice. The
interruption shall be as short as possible and shall in no case last longer than 12 hours.
1.23 CONTRACTOR'S FACILITIES
The Contractor shall provide all site facilities including offices, workshops, stores, accommodation,
washing, sanitation etc. necessary for use by his own staff, for the execution of the Works.
The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements for drainage from his site facilities
and shall be responsible for payment of all charges in connection therewith.
1.24 STORAGE OF PLANT
The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear all costs of securely storing the Plant and
Equipment, both on and off site, in suitable environmental conditions to prevent deterioration of the
Plant and Equipment until it is incorporated into the Works. The standard of storage to be provided
by the Contractor for the Plant and Equipment shall be as follows.

Pag. 20
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
All electrical Plant and Equipment and moving mechanical Plant and Equipment shall be stored by
the Contractor in suitable wind and watertight buildings to be provided by the Contractor at his own
expense. The stores shall be dust free and shall be adequately ventilated and heated by the
Contractor at his own expense, to prevent condensation and deterioration of the Plant and
Equipment. The heating shall be provided by a thermostatically controlled heating system. The
stores shall also be adequately lit. The stores and its services shall be approved by the Engineer. The
giving of such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his liabilities for the safe and proper
storage of the Plant and Equipment under the Contract.
All other Plant and Equipment shall be stored by the Contractor in secure compounds to be
provided by the Contractor at his own expense. Such Plant and Equipment shall be protected as
appropriate to prevent its deterioration while in store.
While the Plant and Equipment is in store the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to
maintain the Plant and Equipment in a serviceable condition and these precautions shall be to the
approval of the Engineer. Such minimum precautions shall include, but not be limited to, the
measures described below.
 Motors shall be stored under polythene with their heaters energised at all times. Packing strips
shall be inserted in the air gaps to prevent rotors from resting on stator cores and bearings shall
be removed.
 Circuit breaker panels, motor control centres and switchboards shall be stored under polythene
and the heaters shall be energised at all times.
 Oil-filled transformers shall be pressurised with an inert gas.
 All flanges shall be closed off with metal caps and all small openings shall be stopped with
plastic plugs or caps.
 All shaft exits from casing and bearing housings shall be sealed with Denso tape moulded into
place. All closures shall be taped over and the tape painted with three coats of tretoplast sac to
form a complete seal.
 All exposed ferrous non-stainless machined surfaces shall be coated with a bitumen solution.
 Thrust and journal bearings shall be removed from the pump and packed in the pump. Journal
bearings shall be stored as a matched pair.
 Plant and Equipment shall be inspected every three months to ensure that the packing is intact

Pag. 21
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
and that the Plant has not been contaminated by the ingress of moisture.
 The Plant and Equipment shall be examined every six months and desiccants replaced. All
rolling elements of Plant and Equipment shall be given 1.25 turns at each inspection.
Notwithstanding the above requirements, the Contractor shall be liable for the safe and proper
storage of all Plant and Equipment under the Contract.
1.25 LEVEL DATA
The GPS reference points are provided in the Report RU_A_RP.05 “Topographic survey:
Benchmark’s monograph”.
1.26 CLIMATIC DATA AND LOCATION LEVEL
The Contractor shall take account of the following site climatic conditions at the site of the Works
both in the design and selection of all plant and equipment and the construction of the Works.
 Maximum ambient temperature 26 oC
 Minimum ambient temperature 12 oC
 Location Level 1397 m-1759 m AMSL.
1.27 CONTAMINATION OF WATER SUPPLIES
Before any person is engaged on work involving a risk to the purity of potable water supplies or
deemed to involve such a risk by the Engineer, he shall be tested to indicate that he is not a carrier
of typhoid or other water-borne disease and he shall be informed of the dangers of contamination.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any person who has been certified by a doctor as
suffering from an illness associated with looseness of the bowels, and no such person shall be
employed on such work until the Employer's medical adviser is satisfied that it is safe for him to be
so employed.
The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of `Safeguards to be Adopted in the Operation and
Management of Waterworks' published by HMSO (UK).

Pag. 22
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1.28 SITE ACCESS AND BOUNDARY
It is the Contractor’s responsibility to make provision for any additional accommodation, any
special or temporary wayleave, or any tip for the disposal of surplus materials, or any borrow pit or
quarry required by him outside the Working Areas to carry out the Works.
For the purposes of this Clause, ‘accommodation’ shall be deemed to include housing, offices
including office accommodation for the Engineer, workshops, warehouses, and storage areas.
In the event of the Contractor making use of any special or temporary wayleave or additional
accommodation required by him or any tip for the disposal of surplus materials, or any borrow pit
or quarry, he shall obtain the written consent of the owner, occupier or authority having charge of
the land in which such wayleave, accommodation or tip is situated and shall make a record agreed
by the owner, occupier or authority as aforesaid of the condition of the surface of that land before
entering thereon.
The Contractor shall permit the Engineer and any person authorised by the Engineer access for the
purposes of the Contract to any such special or temporary wayleave or additional accommodation.
In the event of the Contractor making use of any special or temporary wayleave or additional
accommodation made available to him for the purpose of the Contract, the land in which such
wayleave or accommodation is situated shall be deemed to be part of the Site.
The Contractor shall not use the site for any purpose not required by the Contract.
Access to the Site will be as follows:
Using the new site roads or existing roads to be constructed
The Contractor shall at all times confine his operations within the Site boundaries.
The Contractor shall execute the Works in such manner as to minimise interruption and interference
with the operation of the existing facilities. Access to the existing facilities shall be maintained to
the satisfaction of the Engineer at all times.
The Contractor shall execute the Works in such a manner as to minimise the deterioration of the
raw water quality.
The Contractor shall apply to the Engineer in writing at least 28 days before starting any work

Pag. 23
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
which involves interference with existing structures, equipment, etc. or otherwise interferes with or
interrupts the Employer's normal operation. The Contractor shall not execute such work until he has
received permission to proceed in writing from the Engineer.
1.29 USE OF PUBLIC HIGHWAYS AND ROADS
The Contractor shall ensure that roads and thoroughfares used by him in any way are not dirtied as a
result of such use and in the event of their becoming thus dirtied in the opinion of the Engineer, the
Contractor shall take all necessary steps to clean them, at no extra cost to the Employer. The
Contractor shall obtain all permits required for carrying out the Works on public roads and shall
liaise with the appropriate authorities with regard to the timing and execution of the road works.
The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing and maintaining temporary road diversions for
the duration of the roadwork. The road shall be kept open at all times during the road works period,
and the work shall be carried out in such a manner as to minimise the disruption to traffic.
1.30 PRIVATE PROPERTY
The Contractor shall make a record, to be agreed by the Engineer, of the condition of the surfaces of
any private property, private lands or of any public cultivated or maintained lands over which
access to the Site lies before any work is commenced, to make them suitable for access. He shall
keep such surfaces in a reasonable state of cleanliness and repair during the execution of the Works.
On the termination of the Contractor’s use of such access he shall restore the surfaces to a condition
at least equal to that existing before his first entry on them.
The Contractor shall not first enter any part of the Site in private lands without the prior permission
of the Engineer and without first having obtained the consent of the owner of such lands. The
Contractor shall give a minimum of two weeks’ notice to the Engineer of his intention to begin
works in any area.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times, vehicular and pedestrian access to all
properties, private and public, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and not impede access to any
properties.
1.31 CLEARANCE OF THE SITE
The Contractor shall clear the Site to the extent required by the Engineer for checking the setting
out. Clearance of the Site shall also include the demolition and removal of all articles, objects and
obstructions, which are expressly required to be cleared. The Contractor shall not clear the Site of
any structure without the prior written permission of the Engineer. The Contractor shall remove the
material arising from such clearance and dispose of it in a manner and at a location, on or off the

Pag. 24
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Site, to the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall fill and make good with appropriate materials those cavities and losses of soil,
which result from clearing the parts of the Site not subsequently to be occupied by the Permanent
Works.
1.32 CONDITION OF THE SITE
The Contractor shall maintain the Site in a clean, tidy and healthy condition for the whole of such
time as he is responsible for the care of the Works.
The Works shall be kept in a dry state and any water entering the Works from any source shall be
collected and discharged in a safe manner approved by the Engineer.
1.33 ACCESS FOR THE EMPLOYER AND ENGINEER
The Contractor shall permit the Employer and the Engineer and any person authorised by the
Employer or the Engineer, including workmen of the Employer, other contractors or utility
undertakings, access for the purposes of the Contract, or performing their normal duties, to all areas
of the Site and to any additional accommodation or temporary wayleave for the duration of the
contract period.
1.34 NOISE
The background sound level at any point along the boundary of the Site or Working Areas, arising
from the operation of any mechanical equipment, with the exception of the diesel generators, shall
not exceed 70 dB (A). The background sound level at any point along the boundary of the Site,
arising from the operation of the diesel generators for standby generation shall not exceed 80 dB
(A).
No item of Plant and Equipment, shall produce a sound pressure level exceeding 85 dB(A) when
measured at a distance of 1 m from the reference surface of that item requirement of ISO 3746
Àcoustic Determination of Sound Power Levels of Noise Services - Survey Methods' or the
equivalent ANSI SI.36.
Sound pressure levels shall be measured in dB (A), using a calibrated sound meter meeting the
requirements of BS 5969 with the responses speed set to `slow'. The background noise level shall be
at least 10 dB (A) below the operating noise level of the machine or other item of Plant and
Equipment.

Pag. 25
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The Contractor shall produce certified evidence from the manufacturer that the appropriate tests
have been carried out on all items of the same type which is in all relevant respects similar to the
item to be supplied. Such relevant respects would include the running speeds, the power input under
the loading conditions which would produce the most noise, the power input under normal
operating conditions (if different from the foregoing), the number of stages (for rotary machines) or
the number of cylinders (for reciprocating machines).
If an item in its standard build does not comply with the above requirement, the Contractor shall be
required to reduce the sound pressure level by providing improved or additional silencers or fitting
sound insulating materials to the item.
1.35 TEMPORARY WORKS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval full details of his proposals for temporary
works at the Site, at least 14 days prior to the intended start of such work.
The Contractor shall not proceed with such work until he has received the Engineer’s written
approval of his proposals for the temporary works. Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of
his obligations and liabilities under the Contract.
1.36 LATRINES
Throughout the period of construction of the Works the Contractor shall provide, maintain and
clean suitable and sufficient latrines for use by his employees. He shall ensure that his employees
do not foul the site but make proper use of the latrines. Cost for the provision and maintenance
thereof shall be included in the Contract Price.
Where practicable the latrines shall be connected to the nearest sewer, or if this is not practicable
the Contractor shall provide an adequately sized septic tank and soak away or alternative approved
by the Engineer.
1.37 PHOTOGRAPHS
The Contractor shall supply soft copies of photographs and un-mounted prints not less than 250 x
200 mm of such portions of the Works, in progress and completed, as may be directed by the
Engineer and specified herein. The photographs shall not be retouched. The photographs shall be
the property of the Employer and shall be delivered to the Engineer with the prints. No prints of the
photographs shall be supplied to any other person without the written permission of the Engineer.
The photographs shall be in two categories:

Pag. 26
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
 progress photographs;
 record photographs.
Both categories of photographs shall be properly referenced to the approval of the Engineer and on
the back of each print shall be recorded the date of the photograph, the direction in which the
camera was facing, an identifying description of the subject and the reference.
Photographs taken for record purposes as ordered by the Engineer or as specified herein shall be
supplied with three prints, having the reverse of one subscribed with the signatures of the
Contractor and the Engineer (or their authorised representatives) for the purpose of attestation. If
required, the Contractor may at his own expense have an additional print similarly attested for his
retention.
The Contractor shall supply one soft copy and three prints of each progress photograph ordered by
the Engineer. He shall supply two additional prints of progress photographs selected by the
Engineer for incorporation in albums. He shall supply two sets of albums, mount the prints, and title
the prints and albums all to the approval of the Engineer.
The taking of photographs of the Works by the Contractor for any other purpose whether for use in
Uganda or in any other country shall not be carried out without written approval from the Engineer.
1.38 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
All designs, drawings, specifications and manuals shall use SI (kg, m, s) units and all
measurements, dimensions and performance data shall be quoted in those units.
1.39 LANGUAGES
All drawings, instructions, signs, notices, name-plates etc for use in the operation and maintenance
of the completed works shall be in English.
Warning signs shall be in English.
1.40 CONTRACT SIGNBOARD
The Contractor shall supply and erect contract signboards at locations to be specified by the
Engineer. The signboards shall be of substantial construction to the approval of the Engineer and
the lettering shall be black on a white background. The layout and dimensions of the signboards
shall be approved by the Engineer.

Pag. 27
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1.41 ADVERTISING
The Contractor shall not use any part of the Site for any form of advertising without the prior
written approval of the Engineer.
1.42 SAFETY REGULATIONS ON SITE
The Contractor shall comply with all statutory and other regulations concerning the safety of his site
staff, operatives, staff of the Employer and Engineer and members of the public, as a result of his
operations. He shall obtain copies of all regulations and shall make them available on Site for
inspection by the Engineer.
Notwithstanding the above the Contractor shall ensure that the following primary site safety rules
are adhered to at all times.
 All open excavations shall be fenced off with temporary fencing at all times, and shall be
adequately lit at night.
 Excavating and earthmoving plant and equipment must not encroach on live carriageways at
any time. The Contractor shall ensure that all items of plant working adjacent to live
carriageways are accompanied by a Banksman at all times.
 Construction materials, bedding material and excavated material stored adjacent to the pipe
trench must be safely and securely stored, and must not encroach onto the live carriageways,
pedestrian footpaths, private or public access ways or watercourses, unless prior approval is
given by the Engineer.
1.43 PROTECTION OF EXISTING PUBLIC AND PRIVATE SERVICES
The Contractor shall notify all public authorities, utility companies and private owners of proposed
works, which will affect them not less than one week before commencing the Works.
The Contractor shall adequately protect, uphold, maintain and prevent damage to all services and
shall not interfere with their operation without the prior consent of the public authorities, utilities,
utility companies, private owners, or the Engineer as appropriate.
If any damage to services results from the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall immediately
carry out the following:

Pag. 28
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
 Notify the Engineer and appropriate public authority, utility company or private owner.
 Make arrangements for the damage to be made good without delay to the satisfaction of the
public authorities, utility company or private owner as appropriate. The Contractor shall be
liable for all costs for making good such damage.
The Engineer may issue instructions or make other such arrangements, as he deems necessary, to
repair rapidly any essential services damaged during the execution of the Contract. Such
arrangements shall not affect any liability to pay for making good the damage.
1.44 PERMITS
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for obtaining all necessary permits, licences and
permissions required for the execution of the Works, prior to the commencement of the Works.
1.45 INSURANCE
The Contractor is required to maintain insurance for the Works in accordance with the Conditions
of Contract, including insurance of all pipework, fixtures, fittings, valves and meters etc. supplied
by others, for which the Contractor is solely responsible. In addition, the Contractor is required to
maintain the value of his insurance cover and Performance Security in respect of the rise and fall of
costs, in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.
1.46 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
1.46.1 Safety, Security and Environmental Management
1. Before the order to commence the Works, the Contractor is required to implement the
Environmental Management Plan (EMP) as specified in the Environmental Impact
Assessment, prepared for the particular water and sanitation project. The plan shall spell out
how the Contractor is to achieve environmental targets and objectives specified in the EMP
and agreed upon by the Employer and NEMA. The plan shall include, to the extent
practicable and reasonable, all the steps to be taken by the Contractor to protect the
environment in accordance with the provisions of the “National Environmental Management
Policy”, 1994; “The National Water Policy” of 1999 and “Waste Discharge Regulations” of
1998. Where the EMP does not exist, the clauses contained herein shall form the basis of a
rehabilitation (restoration) plan.
2. Notwithstanding the Contractor’s obligation under the above sub-clause, the Contractor
shall implement all measures necessary to restore the sites to acceptable standards and abide

Pag. 29
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
by environmental performance indicators specified under EMP to measure progress towards

achieving objectives during execution or upon completion of the Works. These measures
shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
(a) Ensure that existing water flow regimes in rivers, streams and other natural or irrigation
channels is maintained and/or re-established where they are disrupted due to civil works
being carried out.
(b) Ensure that noise levels emanating from machinery, vehicles and noisy construction
activities are kept at a minimum for safety, health and protection of workers within the
vicinity of high noise levels and communities near rock-blasting areas.
(c) Minimize the effect of dust on the surrounding environment resulting from earth mixing
sites, dispersing coal ashes, vibrating equipment, temporary access roads, etc. to ensure
safety, health and the protection of workers and communities living downwind of dust
producing activities.
(d) Prevent oils, lubricants and waste water used/produced during the execution of works from
entering into rivers, streams, irrigation channels and other natural water bodies/reservoirs
and also ensure that stagnant water in uncovered borrow pits is treated in the best way to
avoid creating possible breeding grounds for mosquitoes.
(e) Prevent and minimize the impacts of quarrying, earth borrowing, piling and building of
temporary construction camps and access roads on the bio-physical environment including
protected areas and arable lands; local communities and their settlements. In as much as
possible rehabilitate (restore) all sites to acceptable standards.
(f) Upon discovery of ancient heritage, relics, graves or anything that might or is believed to be
of archeological or historical importance during the execution of works report such findings
to Ministry of Tourism, Wildlife and Heritage in fulfillment of the relevant legislation and
outline measures aimed at protecting such historical or archeological resources.
(g) Discourage construction workers from engaging in the exploitation of natural resources such
as hunting, fishing and collection of forest products or any other activity that might have a
negative impact on the social and economic welfare of the local communities.
(h) Implement soil erosion control measures in order to avoid surface run off and prevent
siltation, etc.
(i) Ensure that garbage, sanitation and drinking water facilities are provided in construction
workers camps.
(j) Ensure public safety and meet traffic safety requirements for the operation of work to avoid
accidents.
3. The Contractor shall indicate the period within which he/she shall maintain status on site
after completion of the Works to ensure significant perturbations arising from such works
have been taken into account.
4. The Contractor shall adhere to the proposed activity implementation schedule and the
monitoring plan/ strategy to ensure effective feedback of monitoring information to both
Engineer and the Employer so that impact management can be implemented properly, and if
necessary, adapt to changing and unforeseen conditions.

Pag. 30
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
5. The Employer environmental staff in conjunction with the NEMA shall inspect significant
sites where the Works have been carried out and proposed mitigation measures implemented
and shall give certification regarding the adequacy or inadequacy of rehabilitation
(restoration) measures carried out on the bio-physical environment and compensation for
socio-economic disruption resulting from implementation of the Works.
6. If the Contractor fails to implement the approved Environmental Management Plan, the
Employer shall seek legal redress through NEMA and appropriate penalties shall be
instituted in accordance with the provisions of the relevant policy.
1.46.2 Specific Environmental Issues to be considered
1. Worksite/Campsite Waste Management
(a) All vessels (drums, containers, bags, etc.) containing oil/fuel/surfacing materials and other
hazardous chemicals must be bundled in order to contain spillage. All waste containers litter
and any other waste generated during the construction shall be collected and disposed of at
designated sites in line with the waste management regulations of the NEMA.
(b) All drainage and effluent from storage areas, workshops and campsites shall be captured and
treated before being discharged into the drainage system in line with the water pollution
control regulations of the NEMA.
(c) Used oil from maintenance shall be collected and disposed of appropriately at designated
sites or be re-used or sold for re-use locally.
(d) Entry of runoff to the site shall be restricted by constructing diversion channels or holding
structures such as banks, drains, dams, etc. to reduce the potential of soil erosion and water
pollution.
(e) Construction waste shall not be left in stockpiles at the project site. Waste and other excess
material shall be used for rehabilitating (restoring) borrow areas and landscaping around the
road.
(f) If other spoil disposal sites are necessary, they shall be located in areas of low land use value
and where they will not result in material being easily washed into drainage channels.
Wherever possible, spoiled materials should be placed in low-lying areas and should be
compacted and planted with species indigenous to the locality.
2. Material Excavation
(a) Contractors shall obtain appropriate licenses/permits from relevant authorities to operate
quarries or borrow areas.
(b) The location of quarries and borrow areas shall be subject to approval by relevant authorities
including traditional authorities if the land on which the quarry or borrow areas fall is
traditional land and by the Environmental Management Unit.

Pag. 31
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
(c) Extraction sites shall not be located in the vicinity of settlement areas, cultural sites,
wetlands or any other valued ecosystem component and shall not be located at less than 1
km from such areas.
(d) Extraction sites shall not be located adjacent to stream channels wherever possible to avoid
siltation of river channels. Where they are located near water sources, borrow pits and
perimeter drains shall surround quarry sites.
(e) Extraction sites shall not be located in forest reserves. However, where there are no other
alternatives, permission shall be obtained from the NFA and an environmental impact study
shall be conducted.
(f) Extraction sites shall not be located on high or steep ground or in areas of high scenic value.
(g) Only sites that can easily be rehabilitated (restored) shall be chosen. Areas with minimal
vegetation cover such as flat and bare ground or areas covered with grass only or covered
with shrubs with height of less than 1.5 m.
(h) Extraction site boundaries shall be demarcated and marked to minimize vegetation clearing.
(i) Vegetation clearing shall be restricted to the area required for safe operation of construction
work. Vegetation clearing shall not be done for more than three months in advance of
operation.
(j) Extraction site shall not be located in archeological areas. Excavations in the vicinity of such
areas shall proceed with great care and shall be done in the presence of the staff of the
Ministry of Tourism, Wildlife and Heritage.
(k) Stockpile areas shall be located in areas where trees can act as buffers to prevent dust
pollution. Perimeter drains shall be built around stockpile areas. Sediment and other
pollutant traps shall be located at drainage exits from workings.
3. Rehabilitation and Soil Erosion Prevention
(a) To the extent practicable rehabilitate (restore) the site progressively so that the rate of
rehabilitation is similar to the rate of construction.
(b) Always remove and retain topsoil for subsequent rehabilitation (restoration). Soils shall not
be stripped when they are wet as this can lead to soil compaction and loss of structure.
(c) Topsoil shall not be stored in large heaps. Low mounds of no more than 1 to 2 m high are
recommended.
(d) Re-vegetate the stockpile to protect the soil from erosion, discourage weeds and maintain an
active population of beneficial soil microbes.
(e) Locate stockpiles where they will not be disturbed by future construction activities.
(f) To the extent practicable reinstate natural drainage patterns where they have been altered or
impaired.
(g) Remove toxic materials and dispose of them in designated sites. Backfill excavated areas
with soils or overburden that is free of foreign material that could pollute ground water and
soil.

Pag. 32
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
(h) Identify potentially toxic overburdened screen with suitable material to prevent mobilization
of toxins.
(i) Ensure the reshaped land is formed so as to be inherently stable, adequately drained and
suitable for the desired long-term land use and that would allow natural regeneration of
vegetation.
(j) Minimize the long-term visual impact by creating landforms, which are compatible with the
adjacent landscape.
(k) Minimize erosion by wind and water both during and after the process of reinstatement.
(l) Compacted surfaces shall be deep ripped to relieve compaction unless subsurface conditions
dictate otherwise.
(m) Re-vegetate the area with plant species that will control erosion, provide vegetative
diversity, and that will through succession; contribute to a stable and compatible ecosystem.
The choice of plant species for rehabilitation (restoration) shall be done with preference to
the local plant species and in consultations with local research institutions, forest department
and the local people, as they will be long-term beneficiaries.
4. Water Resources Management
(a) The Contractor shall at all cost avoid conflicting with water demands for local communities.
(b) Abstraction of water both surface and underground shall only be done with the consultation
of the local community and after obtaining a permit from the relevant Water Authority.
(c) Abstraction of water from wetlands shall be avoided. Where necessary, authority has to be
obtained from relevant authorities.
(d) Temporary damming of streams and rivers shall be done in such a way that disruption of
water supplies to communities downstream is avoided and maintain the ecological balance
of the river system.
(e) No construction water containing spoils or site effluent especially cements and oil shall be
allowed to flow into natural water drainage courses.
(f) Wash water from washing out of equipment shall not be discharged into water courses or
road drains.
(g) Site spoils and temporary stockpiles shall be located away from the drainage system and
surface runoff shall be directed away from stockpiles to prevent erosion.
5. Traffic Management
(a) Location of access roads/detours shall be done in consultation with the local community
especially where access road shall traverse important ecosystem component. Access roads
shall not traverse wetland areas.
(b) Upon the completion of the Works, all the roads shall be rehabilitated.

Pag. 33
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
(c) Access roads shall be sprinkled with water at least 5 times a day in settled areas and 3 times
a day in unsettled areas to suppress dust emissions.
6. Health and Safety
(a) The Contractor in advance of the construction work shall mount an awareness and hygiene
campaign. Workers and local residents shall be sensitized on health risks particularly of
AIDS.
(b) The Contractor will be enforced to provide personal protective equipment to the workers,
with penalty for non compliance. Workers will be encouraged to wear the equipment
provided, for their own safety.
(c) Adequate road signs to warn pedestrians and motorists of construction activities, diversions,
etc. shall be provided at appropriate points.
(d) Construction vehicles shall not exceed maximum speed limit of 40 km per hour.
(e) All necessary first aid arrangements will be available on Site.
(f) Emergency procedures and communication protocols will be in place prior to any activity on
Site in order to deal with any emergency, which may arise; and, maintaining a safe and
healthy place of work.
(g) Prior to any activity on Site a formal agreement will be established with a local Medical
Doctor (Doctor on call) to support any medical treatment which may be required.
(h) A briefing about safety and health precautions referred to as a tool box talk, will be
conducted regularly by all the supervisors and the foremen to their respective workforce.
(i) Enough toilets and urinals will put in place at assigned locations on Site and will be
maintained clean and dry. Contents of these facilities will be contained so as to avoid
environmental pollution.
(j) Safe drinking water will be provided on Site and workers will be encouraged to drink
enough water.
(k) Alcohol, intoxicants and non-prescribed medicine shall not be permitted on Site and the
persons suspected to be under their influence shall not be allowed onto the Site.
(l) The Contractor will implement the provisions in the Workers Compensation Act (of 2000)
and more importantly will sensitize workers about their pay and other entitlements like
compensation, insurance, taxation, etc
1.47 EQUIVALENCY OF STANDARDS AND CODES
Wherever reference is made in the Contract to specific standards and codes to be met by the
materials, Plant, and other supplies to be furnished, and work performed or tested, the provisions of
the latest current edition or revision of the relevant standards and codes in effect shall apply, unless
otherwise expressly stated in the Contract. Where such standards and codes are national, or relate to
a particular country or region, other authoritative standards that ensure substantial equivalence to

Pag. 34
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
the standards and codes specified will be accepted subject to the Engineer’s prior review and
written approval. Differences between the standards specified and the proposed alternative
standards must be fully described in writing by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer at least
28 days prior to the date when the Contractor desires the Engineer’s approval. In the event the
Engineer determines that such proposed deviations do not ensure substantially equal performance,
the Contractor shall comply with the standards specified in the documents.
1.48 ALTERNATIVES TO PROPRIETARY BRANDS
For convenience and for reference purposes, certain Materials, Plant and other inputs or processes
may have been designated in the Specifications and in other Contract Documents by brand name,
trade name or catalogue name and number. Such designation shall be deemed to be followed by the
words “or equivalent approved” or “equal (approved)” or “or similar (and) approved” whether such
words are shown or not. The Contractor may offer other Materials, Plant and other inputs or
processes which have similar characteristics and which provide performance at least substantially
equivalent to those specified, which will be accepted, subject to the Engineer’s prior review and
written approval. The burden of providing evidence as to comparative quality and suitability of
alternatives shall be upon the Contractor and such evidence must be submitted to the Engineer at
least 28 days prior to the date when the Contractor desires approval. No such alternative shall be
used without prior written approval by the Engineer.

Pag. 35
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2 ENGINEER’S REQUIREMENTS
The procedure to be followed in providing the Engineer’s facilities (requirements) such as vehicles,
office and residential accommodation, equipment and furniture for the office and residential
accommodation shall be as outlined below:
(a) The Contractor shall first submit the technical details, together with any brochures and
leaflets, of the vehicles, equipment, furniture, etc for approval by the Engineer.
(b) The Engineer shall inspect the proposed facilities, where appropriate, at the supplier’s
premises.
(c) The Engineer shall approve or make comments on the proposed facilities.
(d) The Contractor proceeds to procure the approved facilities.
The Contractor shall be responsible, and shall be deemed to have allowed in his rates and prices, for
delivery of facilities to their final destinations, unpacking, disposing to rooms, assembling,
connecting up and testing of electrical appliances, installation of all the required software, and
setting the facilities to work.
2.1 OFFICE ACCOMMODATION FOR THE ENGINEER

The Contractor shall provide a Site office, for the use of the Engineer. The Contractor shall
maintain, service and insure the offices for the Contract period or for such additional or lesser time
as the Engineer may direct. The offices shall be for the sole use of the Engineer’s staff.
On completion of the Works, or at such time as specified by the Engineer, the ownership of the
office (if not rented) and all furniture and equipment, except for survey equipment, shall be
transferred to the Employer. Prior to handing over to the Employer, the Contractor, shall provide
and maintain the office accommodation, furniture, equipment, facilities and services without any
interruption.
The Contractor shall carry out complete redecoration, including re-painting, of the office
accommodation before handing over to the Employer. The Contractor shall be deemed to have
allowed in his rates and prices for this redecoration.
2.1.1 Location of the Buildings

The Site office building shall be provided at a position on the Site or as specified by the Engineer.
Surface water drainage facilities shall be provided to protect the buildings from surface run-off and
to convey it away from the buildings.

Pag. 36
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.1.2 Site Office Building

The Contractor shall construct or alternatively rent a Site office building.
The Site office building shall have a minimum floor area of 125 m2 and a clear inside height of not
less than 2.6 m. The Contractor shall submit his proposals for the office building to the Engineer for
approval. The offices shall be constructed of new, durable, strong and weatherproof material to the
satisfaction of the Engineer in respect of design, siting and construction. The floor shall be of
suitable construction adequately damp-proofed, ant-proofed and termite-proofed.
The whole of the office accommodation shall be adequately ventilated, insulated against heat and
cold, water tight, lighted, painted, mosquito proofed and vermin proofed. It shall be adequately
wired for electric light and power. The building shall have burglarproof lockable doors,
burglarproof windows with lined curtains and shall be divided up by blockwork partitions into
private offices and meeting rooms as required by the Engineer. Covered communal passageways
shall connect separated units.
Each individual office shall have a toilet, in addition to a set of communal toilets, to cater for the
Engineer and his staff. Each toilet shall be complete including wash hand basin, towel rail and toilet
roll holder. The office shall be provided with a kitchen complete including kitchen sink and tile-
topped working surface.
The office accommodation shall be detached completely from the Contractor’s site offices although
they may both be contained within one compound suitably guarded and fenced with a 1.8 m high
chain-linked fence and gate with padlock and chain.
The Contractor shall provide 24 hour armed security guarding for the Engineer’s office.
The Contractor shall provide all services and infrastructure. The Contractor shall provide a piped
potable water supply to the toilets and kitchens with a waterborne sewerage system discharging to
septic tanks, cesspits, or soakaways, a storm water drainage system, and a yard tap with a lockable
device. The Contractor shall provide an electricity supply of sufficient power for general use. The
Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the water and electricity services and pay all charges
and fees for the supplies.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain cleaning staff and cleaning facilities. The Contractor
shall also provide an adequate refuse disposal service for the office. The office, including toilets,
shall be cleaned daily and shall be maintained for the duration of the Contract. A supply of toilet
paper, soap and towels is to be provided and maintained; clean towels are to be supplied each day.
The office as well as all the equipment and furniture supplied under this Contract shall be insured
on a full comprehensive basis against theft, fire, water damage and burglary.

Pag. 37
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The office with all furniture, fixings, equipment, services, carport etc., all as detailed below, shall be
provided complete within 63 days after the Commencement Date. Until the office accommodation
is ready for occupation, the Contractor shall provide, starting from the Commencement Date,
alternative office accommodation of comparable area and facilities to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. This alternative office accommodation shall be furnished and equipped with similar
facilities as described below. If the office accommodation for the Engineer’s staff is not ready for
occupation within the specified period of 63 days, the Contractor shall provide, at his risk and cost
beyond the specified period of 63 days, the alternative office accommodation for the Engineer’s
staff.
2.1.3 Access Roads and Parking

All accommodation shall be provided with temporary, well drained access roads 3 m wide and
covered carports for 2 cars. Access roads and the surfaces of the carports shall be surfaced with a
minimum thickness of 150 mm of well-compacted gravel properly graded, cambered, drained, and
culverted. The carports shall be surfaced with a minimum thickness of 50 mm of well-compacted
crushed stone aggregates of 20 mm nominal size.
In addition, the access and other roads around the offices shall be treated to make them dust free by
using crushed stone. They shall be well-drained and kept trafficable and free from mud at all times.
2.1.4 Furniture, Fixings, Laboratory Equipment etc.

The Contractor shall supply the furniture, fixtures and equipment listed in Table 4, and shall install
them in the offices as required by the Engineer. They shall be for the sole use of the Engineer and
his staff. All furniture, fixtures and equipment shall be supplied new, following the Engineer’s
approval of a manufacturer's description or catalogue. The Contractor shall keep insured all
furniture, fixtures and equipment to their full value (including duty where appropriate) and shall
maintain them in good order until the end of the maintenance period. On completion of the Works,
the equipment shall be transferred to the Employer.
2.1.5 Stationery and Office Supplies

The Contractor shall supply all stationery and office consumables required for the normal
functioning of the Engineer’s offices, including inter alia survey books, drawing office supplies,
computer DVDs (re-writable and recordable), computer printout paper, (but excluding headed
correspondence paper), copying paper, catridges for printers, catridges (toner) for photocopier, box
files A4, index dividers for A4 box files, ruled pads A4, squared pads A4, pocket files (document
wallets) A4, erasers, self sticking notes (post-it), pens (assorted colours), envelopes (assorted sizes),
pencil refills (leads) 0.5 mm 2B or HB and staples.
The Contractor shall also supply books for Site records including: Daily Works Records, Notice of
Operation, Request for Inspection/Approval, Measurement Records (Sheets), Confirmation of
Verbal Instructions, Site Instructions and Site Diary. The books shall be of A4 size, with minimum
of 50 pages; and each page shall be self-carbonised and in triplicate; and each page shall have a

Pag. 38
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
serial number. A sample page of each book shall be approved by the Engineer before the Contractor
places procurement orders for the books.
The Contractor shall also supply all consumables and spare parts for photocopier and computers
from the manufactures’ authorized representatives. The Contractor shall put in place a service
contract with each authorized representative of the manufacturer of the office equipment.
The Contractor shall supply all the required stationery, office consumables, spare parts for office
equipment, and books for Site records from the Commencement Date until the Taking-Over
Certificate has been issued for the Works or until such time as specified by the Engineer. If the
Contractor fails to provide the supply, the Engineer shall be entitled to withhold the issue of a
Payment Certificate until such time as the supply is provided.
2.1.6 Laboratory Supplies and Equipment

The Contractor shall supply all materials, chemicals and other laboratory consumables required for
conducting the tests outlined in these Specifications as directed by the Engineer for the full period
that the Engineer’s Site office is on the Site or for such greater or lesser period as required by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain, but is not limited to, the following items:
(a) Apparatus conforming to BS 1881 “Methods of Testing Concrete” to enable site compaction
and slump tests to be performed and sufficient steel cube moulds, with base plates and
tamping rods, to enable sufficient concrete cubes to be made.
(b) One complete set of BS sieves to comply with BS 410 for “Test Sieves” and all other
apparatus necessary for the purpose of testing sand, ballast and stone.
(c) Sufficient equipment to carry out daily tests indicated in these Specifications, especially the
equipment to test the soil compaction.
2.1.7 Water, Gas and Electricity

The Contractor shall supply or make provision for 24 hour water, gas and electricity supplies to the
Engineer's Site office and shall arrange for sewage and refuse disposal.
Whenever these supplies are not available from the public utility services, the Contractor must
continue to provide the facilities from his own resources.
2.1.8 Communications
The Contractor shall arrange for the installation, commissioning and maintenance in use of two
telephone lines to serve the Engineer's Site office from the public exchange. The Contractor shall
ensure that one of these lines has the facility for international telephone calls and full time internet
access facilities. Both shall have the facility for local telephone calls. Handsets shall be provided.

Pag. 39
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
In addition, he has to supply and maintain one mobile phone with postpaid system.
The Contractor shall allow in his rates for paying all costs, charges and fees in connection with the
provision, hire and use of these telephones and internet / email services.
All necessary accessories, fittings, spares and maintenance for the telecommunications systems
shall be provided by the Contractor who will be responsible for paying for the necessary licences
for installing and operating these facilities. On completion of the Works, all communications
equipment shall be transferred to the Employer.
2.1.9 Surveying Instruments and Equipment

The Contractor shall supply, for the sole use of the Engineer, survey and other instruments and
equipment, as listed in Table 5. The instruments and equipment shall be new and shall be
maintained in a good state of repair. In the event of loss or damage, they shall be replaced by items
of a similar nature. On completion of the Contract or at such time as specified by the Engineer, all
survey instruments and equipment shall revert to the ownership of the Contractor.
2.1.10 Computers
The Contractor shall supply computer hardware and software as detailed below and in
Table 1 to Table 3 for the sole use of the Engineer and his staff.
The desktop computers are to be tower computers of a reputable make. They shall be 2 in number
with one having a high specification and the other medium specifications as detailed below.
The laptop computers are to be 1 No. and of a reputable make with high specifications as detailed
below.
2.1.10.1High Performance Computer

The Contractor shall supply 1 No. (one) high performance computer with high specifications as
follows:
Table 1 - HIGH PERFORMANCE COMPUTER SPECIFICATIONS
Hardware
Processor I Core 7
Speed 8.0 GHz

Pag. 40
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
hard Disk Capacity 500 GB
RAM 8.0 GB
DVD-RW ROM 48 x 12 x 50 or better
Graphics Card 2 GB
Ethernet Card Built in
Sound Card
Internal Modem 128 k
Peripherals
Keyboard
Mouse with scroll wheel
21” Flat screen Colour Monitor
Ports
8 No. USB ports
Parallel port, Serial,

At least 1 No. of each following ports: PS/2
Software
Windows 7
Microsoft Office 2010
2014 Antivirus Software: Norton or Kaspersky
AutoCAD 2014
AutoCad Map or similar approved GIS software
UPS
APC or similar 500 kVA
The computers brand shall be approved by the Engineer, it shall have widescreen display colour
monitor and shall be supplied with a suitable automatic voltage regulator with surge protection. Full
documentation and backup discs for the software and the computers are to be provided.

Pag. 41
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.1.10.2Medium Performance Computers

The Contractor shall supply 1 No. (one) medium performance computer with medium specifications
as follows:
TABLE 2 - MEDIUM PERFORMANCE COMPUTERS SPECIFICATIONS
Hardware
Processor I Core 3
Speed 4.0 GHz
hard Disk Capacity 500 GB
RAM 4.0 GB
DVD-RW ROM 48 x 12 x 50 or better
Graphics Card 1 GB
Sound Card
Internal Modem 56 k
Peripherals
Keyboard
17” Colour Monitor
Ports
6 No. USB ports
Parallel port, Serial,

At least 1 No. of each following ports: PS/2
Software
Windows 7
AutoCAD 2014

Pag. 42
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
UPS
APC or similar
The computers brand shall be approved by the Engineer, it shall have widescreen display colour
monitor and shall be supplied with a suitable automatic voltage regulator with surge protection. Full
documentation and backup discs for the software and the computers are to be provided.
2.1.10.3Laptop Computers
The Contractor shall supply 1 No. (one) laptop computers with specifications as follows:
Table 3 - HIGH PERFORMANCE LAPTOP COMPUTERS SPECIFICATIONS
Hardware
Processor I Core 7
Speed 8.0 GHz
hard Disk Capacity 500GB
RAM 8.0 GB
DVD-RW ROM
Graphics Card 3 GB
Sound Card
Internal Modem 128 k
Peripherals
Keyboard
15.4" Colour Monitor of widescreen display
Software
Windows 7

Pag. 43
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
AutoCAD 2014 compatible with 64 bit
The computers brand shall be approved by the Engineer. All hardware and all software shall be
supplied new and fully licensed in the name of the Employer.
2.1.10.4Printer & Related Equipment

The Contractor shall supply one A3 colour printer and one A0 colour plotter as specified below:
(a) Colour Printer: HP Officejet 7000 or equiv. Wide

Format capable of printing up to 33 pages per minute (ppm) black and
32 ppm colour.
(b) Colour Plotter: HP Design 650C or equiv. (ISO A0 format)
including stand and paper roll holder
On completion of the Contract or at such time as specified by the Engineer, the ownership of all
computers and such like equipment shall be transferred to the Employer. The laptop computer will
be handed over to the Employer at the end of the Defects Notification Period.
2.2 RESIDENTIAL ACCOMMODATION FOR THE ENGINEER

The Contractor shall rent approved, furnished and equipped residential accommodation for the
Engineer’s staff to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The residential houses for the Engineer’s staff
shall be separate from that of the Contractor’s staff housing.
Each house shall have a minimum floor area of 100 m2 and shall have at least a kitchen, a sitting
room, 2 bedrooms, one of them self-contained with a separate toilet and bathroom.
The Contractor shall provide armed guards at all times to ensure adequate security of the houses,
furniture and equipment and the Engineer’s staff. The Contractor shall, at all times, be responsible
for the immediate replacement of any and all items stolen or damaged.
In all cases where gas or kerosene appliances are provided, the Contractor shall be responsible for
purchasing refill gas cylinders and kerosene and supplying them promptly to the houses as required.
Each house shall have a compound with sufficient parking space and a garden. The individual
compounds within which the residential houses for the Engineer's staff will be located shall each
have external security lights and each be bounded by a perimeter wall or by 1.8 m high chain-link
fencing, surmounted by a minimum of two tensioned strands of barbed wire, and provided with a

Pag. 44
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
suitable entrance gate, all to the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain one domestic assistant per house. The Contractor shall
also provide everyday food to the Engineer’s staff, and an adequate refuse disposal service for each
house.
The Contractor shall hand over each house to the Engineer including the following items:
(a) Provision and maintenance of furniture and equipment for all rooms to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. The Contractor is to allow in his rates for delivery to houses, unpacking and
disposing to rooms and connecting up and testing of electrical appliances. The furniture and
equipment to be provided for each house shall be new and shall be as indicated in Table 6
below. The Contractor shall supply, install, connect and set to work the items of furniture and
equipment for each house. One house shall be equipped, in addition to the other items, with a
washing machine.
(b) Provision and maintenance of adequate potable water and electricity supplies, if necessary
from his own resources, water borne sanitation facilities and other essential services. The
Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the water and electricity services and pay all
charges and fees for the supplies.
(c) Provision and purchasing refill cooking gas cylinders and kerosene.
(d) Provision and maintenance of all temporary access roads, footpaths, fencing and gates.
(e) General maintenance including the garden and repair of the premises including complete
external and internal redecoration, including re-painting, before handing over to the Engineer
and later on to the Land Lord.
(f) Provision and maintaining of highly effective 24 hour armed security guarding for each
house.
(g) Provision and maintaining of a domestic assistant and an adequate refuse disposal service.
Residential accommodation for the Engineer’s staff shall be ready for occupation within 35 days
after the Commencement Date. Until the residential accommodation is ready for occupation, the
Contractor shall provide, starting from the Commencement Date, alternative residential
accommodation including hotel accommodation for the Engineer’s staff. All alternative
accommodation shall be acceptable to the Engineer in location, quality, facilities and
accommodation. If the residential accommodation for the Engineer’s staff is not ready for
occupation within the specified period of 35 days, the Contractor shall provide, at his risk and cost
beyond the specified period of 35 days, the alternative residential accommodation including hotel
accommodation for the Engineer’s staff.
On completion of the Works, or at such time as specified by the Engineer, the furniture, equipment
and other items provided by the Contractor shall become the property of the Contractor. Prior to
reverting to the Contractor, the Contractor shall provide and maintain the residential
accommodation, furniture, equipment, facilities and services without any interruption.

Pag. 45
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.3 OFFICE & RESIDENTIAL ACCOMMODATION FOR THE RESIDENT ENGINEER

2.3.1 Building
The Contractor shall provide a rented detached building in Rukungiri comprising an office as well
as a residential accommodation, for the use of the Resident Engineer. The Contractor shall
maintain, service and insure the office and the residential accommodation for the Contract period or
for such additional or lesser time as the Engineer may direct. The office shall be for the sole use of
the Engineer’s staff.
The office & residential accommodation shall be either located in two different floors, or separate
by a wall and having separate access doors.
The building shall be provided in Rukungiri or in its vicinity, wherever specified by the Engineer.
The office part and the residential accommodation part shall have a minimum floor area of 100 m2
each, and both shall have a clear inside height of not less than 2.6 m. The Residential
accommodation shall have at least a kitchen, a sitting room, 2 bedrooms, one of them self-contained
with a separate toilet and bathroom. It shall be fully furnished and equipped to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. At least one toilet shall be provided in the office part of the building. The toilet shall be
complete including wash hand basin, towel rail and toilet roll holder. The office shall be provided
with a kitchen complete including kitchen sink and tile-topped working surface. The Contractor
shall submit his proposals for the office building to the Engineer for approval.
The office & residential accommodation shall be of new, durable, strong and weatherproof material
to the satisfaction of the Engineer in respect of design, siting and construction. The floor shall be of
The whole of the accommodation shall be adequately ventilated, insulated against heat and cold,
water tight, lighted, painted, mosquito proofed and vermin proofed. It shall be adequately wired for
electric light and power. The building shall have burglarproof lockable doors, burglarproof
windows with lined curtains and shall be divided up by blockwork partitions into private offices and
meeting rooms as required by the Engineer. Covered communal passageways shall connect
separated units.
All accommodation shall be provided with well drained access roads 3 m wide and covered carports
for 2 cars. In addition, the access and other roads around the building shall be well-drained and kept
trafficable and free from mud at all times.
The building shall have a compound with sufficient parking space. The compound shall have
external security lights and be bounded by a perimeter wall or by 1.8 m high chain-link fencing,

Pag. 46
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
surmounted by a minimum of two tensioned strands of barbed wire, and provided with a suitable
entrance gate, all to the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide 24 hour armed security guarding for the office & residential
accommodation for the Resident Engineer, to ensure adequate security of the building, furniture and
equipment and the Resident Engineer. The Contractor shall, at all times, be responsible for the
immediate replacement of any and all items stolen or damaged.
The Contractor shall provide all services and infrastructure. The building shall have a piped potable
water supply to the toilets and kitchens with a waterborne sewerage system discharging to septic
tanks, cesspits, or soakaways, a storm water drainage system, and a yard tap with a lockable device.
The Contractor shall supply or make provision for 24 hour potable water, gas and electricity
supplies to the Resident Engineer's office & residential accommodation and shall arrange for
sewage and refuse disposal. The electricity supply shall be of sufficient power for general use. The
Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the water and electricity services and pay all charges
and fees for the supplies.
Whenever these supplies are not available from the public utility services, the Contractor must
continue to provide the facilities from his own resources.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain cleaning staff and cleaning facilities. The office &
residential accommodation, shall be cleaned daily and shall be maintained for the duration of the
Contract. A supply of toilet paper, soap and towels is to be provided and maintained; clean towels
are to be supplied each day.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain one domestic assistant. The Contractor shall also provide
everyday food to the Resident Engineer, and an adequate refuse disposal service.
The building as well as all the equipment and furniture supplied under this Contract shall be insured
on a full comprehensive basis against theft, fire, water damage and burglary.
The office & residential accommodation with all furniture, fixings, equipment, services, carport
etc., all as detailed, shall be provided complete within 35 days after the Commencement Date. Until
the accommodation is ready for occupation, the Contractor shall provide, starting from the
Commencement Date, alternative office & residential accommodation of comparable area and
facilities to the satisfaction of the Engineer. This alternative office & residential accommodation
shall be furnished and equipped with similar facilities as described below. If the office & residential
accommodation for the Resident Engineer’s staff is not ready for occupation within the specified
period of 35 days, the Contractor shall provide, at his risk and cost beyond the specified period of
35 days, the alternative accommodation including hotel accommodation for the Resident Engineer..

Pag. 47
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The Contractor shall provide general maintenance to the building including the repair of the
premises, including complete external and internal redecoration, including re-painting, before
handing over to the Engineer and later on to the Land Lord.
On completion of the Works, or at such time as specified by the Engineer, the furniture, equipment
and other items provided by the Contractor except Computers and Printed & related equipment shall
become the property of the Contractor. Prior to reverting to the Contractor, the Contractor shall
provide and maintain the residential accommodation, furniture, equipment, facilities and services
without any interruption.
2.3.2 Furniture, Fixings, Equipment, Supplies, etc.

The Contractor shall supply the furniture, fixtures and equipment listed in Table 7, and shall install
them in the office as required by the Engineer. They shall be for the sole use of the Engineer and his
staff. All furniture, fixtures and equipment shall be supplied new, following the Engineer’s approval
of a manufacturer's description or catalogue. The Contractor shall keep insured all furniture, fixtures
and equipment to their full value (including duty where appropriate) and shall maintain them in
good order until the end of the maintenance period.
The Contractor shall also supply the furniture, fixtures and equipment listed in Table 8 below. The
Contractor is to allow in his rates for delivery to the residential accommodation, unpacking and
disposing to rooms and connecting up and testing of electrical appliances. The furniture and
equipment to be provided shall be new. The Contractor shall supply, install, connect and set to work
the items of furniture and equipment for the residential accommodation which shall include, in
addition to the other items, a washing machine.
The Contractor shall supply all stationery and office consumables required for the normal
functioning of the Resident Engineer’s office, including inter alia survey books, drawing office
supplies, computer DVDs (re-writable and recordable), computer printout paper, (but excluding
headed correspondence paper), copying paper, catridges for printers, box files A4, index dividers
for A4 box files, ruled pads A4, squared pads A4, pocket files (document wallets) A4, erasers, self
sticking notes (post-it), pens (assorted colours), envelopes (assorted sizes), pencil refills (leads) 0.5
mm 2B or HB and staples.
The Contractor shall also supply all consumables and spare parts for the computers from the
manufactures’ authorized representatives. The Contractor shall put in place a service contract with
each authorized representative of the manufacturer of the office equipment.
The Contractor shall supply all the required stationery, office consumables, and spare parts for
office equipment from the Commencement Date until the Taking-Over Certificate has been issued
for the Works or until such time as specified by the Engineer. If the Contractor fails to provide the
supply, the Engineer shall be entitled to withhold the issue of a Payment Certificate until such time
as the supply is provided.

Pag. 48
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The Contractor shall arrange for the installation, commissioning and maintenance in use of one
telephone line to serve the Resident Engineer's office from the public exchange. The Contractor
shall ensure that one the line has the facility for international telephone calls and full time internet
access facilities. It shall also have the facility for local telephone calls. Handset shall be provided.
In addition, he has to supply and maintain one mobile phone with postpaid system.
The Contractor shall allow in his rates for paying all costs, charges and fees in connection with the
provision, hire and use of these telephones and internet / email services.
All necessary accessories, fittings, spares and maintenance for the telecommunications systems
shall be provided by the Contractor who will be responsible for paying for the necessary licences
for installing and operating these facilities.
On completion of the Contract or at such time as specified by the Engineer, the ownership of all
computers and such like equipment shall be transferred to the Employer. The laptop computer will
be handed over to the Employer at the end of the Defects Notification Period.
2.3.3 Computers
The Contractor shall supply computer hardware and software as detailed below and in
Table 1 and Table 3 for the sole use of the Resident Engineer.
The desktop computers are to be tower computers of a reputable make. They shall be 1 in number
having a high specification as detailed below.
The laptop computers are to be 1 No. and of a reputable make with high specifications as detailed
below.
2.3.3.1 High Performance Computer & Laptop

The desktop computer shall have widescreen display colour monitor and shall be supplied with a
suitable automatic voltage regulator with surge protection. Full documentation and backup discs for
the software and the computers are to be provided.
The computers brand shall be approved by the Engineer.
All hardware and all software shall be supplied new and fully licensed in the name of the Employer.

Pag. 49
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.3.3.2 Printer & Related Equipment

The Contractor shall supply one A3 colour printer as specified below:
(a) Colour Printer:HP Officejet 7000 or equiv. Wide Format capable of printing
up to 33 pages per minute (ppm) black and 32 ppm colour.
2.4 OFFICE ACCOMMODATION FOR WATER AUTHORITY’S STAFF

Note: The Contractor shall not provide office accommodation for Water Authority’s Staff under
this Contract.
Before the Taking-Over Certificate has been issued for the Works, the Contractor shall provide
(either buy or construct) a permanent office for the use of the Water authority’s staff, whose
ownership shall be transferred to the Employer on completion of the Works.
The office building shall be provided at a position specified by the Engineer.
The office building shall have a minimum floor area of 125 m2 and a clear inside height of not less
than 2.6 m. The Contractor shall submit his proposals for the office building to the Engineer for
approval. The offices shall be constructed of new, durable, strong and weatherproof material to the
satisfaction of the Engineer in respect of design, siting and construction. The floor shall be of
The whole of the office accommodation shall be adequately ventilated, insulated against heat and
cold, water tight, lighted, painted, mosquito proofed and vermin proofed. It shall be adequately
wired for electric light and power. The building shall have burglarproof lockable doors,
burglarproof windows with lined curtains and shall be divided up by blockwork partitions into
private offices and meeting rooms as specified by the Engineer. Covered communal passageways
shall connect separated units.
Each office building shall have a set of communal toilets. Each toilet shall be complete including
wash hand basin, towel rail and toilet roll holder.
The Contractor shall provide a piped potable water supply to the toilets with a waterborne sewerage
system discharging to septic tanks, cesspits, or soakaways, a storm water drainage system, and a
yard tap with a lockable device. The Contractor shall provide an electricity supply of sufficient
power for general use.

Pag. 50
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
All accommodation shall be provided with well drained access roads 3 m wide and covered carports
for 2 cars. Access roads and the surfaces of the carports shall be surfaced with a minimum thickness
of 150 mm of well-compacted gravel properly graded, cambered, drained, and culverted. The
carports shall be surfaced with a minimum thickness of 50 mm of well-compacted crushed stone
aggregates of 20 mm nominal size.
In addition, the access and other roads around the offices shall be well-drained, and treated to make
them dust free by using crushed stone.
2.5 TRANSPORT FOR THE ENGINEER

The Contractor shall supply motor vehicles as detailed below.
 5-door SUV (Land Cruiser): 1 nr.

 Pick-up trucks: 1 nr.
 Motorcycle On-Off road: 1 nr.
These vehicles shall be for the sole use of the Engineer and his staff and shall be available at all
times. Only those makes of vehicles having satisfactory permanent repair and maintenance facilities
already well established in Kampala will be acceptable and shall first be approved by the Engineer.
All the 4-wheel vehicles shall be new right-hand drive diesel-powered Toyota vehicles or
equivalent, as directed by the Engineer. They shall have four wheel drive capability, high ground
clearance, an engine capacity of at least 2900 cc, power steering, power windows, anti-lock braking
system, air bags for driver and front passenger, lockable glove box, and central locking system. The
front seats for all vehicles shall be separate and all seats shall have headrests.
The vehicles shall be fitted with the manufacturer's tropical and off-highway extras including tow
bars, front bull bars and air conditioning. The vehicles shall be equipped with an auto alarm system,
central locking system and radio and compact disc facilities. Each vehicle shall also be provided
with a first aid kit supplied by the supplier of the vehicles. Kerb weight and tyre pressures shall be
stated on each vehicle, and the vehicles shall conform in all respects to the regulations of the
appropriate registration authority.
The pick-ups shall be double cabin type. Each pick-up shall have wireless door entry and locking
system, front automatic wheel hubs for four wheel drive, side impact beams, and a tonneau cover
supplied by the supplier of the vehicles.
The 5-door SUV (Land Cruiser) shall be fully covered with permanent rooves and have adequate
seating for a driver and six passengers. Each SUV shall have wireless key and remote, switch for
four wheel drive, and side impact protection bars.

Pag. 51
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The On-Off road motorcycle shall comply with the following specifications:
Minimum engine capacity: 650 cc

Engine type: Single-Cylinder
Engine stroke: 4-stroke
Cooling: air
Valves: 4
Compress ratio: 8:3:1
Starter: electric
Transmission type: Manual
Number of speeds: 5
Brake type: hydraulic disc
Minimum Fuel capacity: 10 L
The Contractor shall provide competent English-speaking drivers to the approval of the Engineer
for all 4-wheel vehicles used on the Site. Each driver shall have a minimum continuous driving
experience of 8 years, with a certificate in defensive driving, and aged between 30 and 55 years old.
The minimum net (take-home) monthly salary for any of these drivers shall be Uganda Shillings
five hundred thousand excluding all taxes and all other statutory deductions such as pay as you earn
and excluding all other benefits and allowances such as housing allowance, medical expenses and
fees and per diem allowances for travelling. Any driver found unsuitable by the Engineer shall be
replaced immediately.
These drivers shall be available during all normal Site working hours and when specifically
required by the Engineer, outside those hours.
The vehicles provided shall be maintained at all times in good running order. Should any vehicles at
any time become, in the opinion of the Engineer, unserviceable by normal use in the conditions and
demands of the Site, the Contractor shall replace them without delay. If the Contractor fails to
provide replacement transport, the Engineer shall be entitled to withhold the issue of a Payment
Certificate until such time as a replacement is provided.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary fuel, lubricants, etc, and shall bear all expenses in
connection with running, servicing, maintenance, repairs, upkeep, licensing and insurance. All
vehicles shall be serviced, maintained and repaired at the supplier’s workshop.
Insurance for all vehicles shall be ‘comprehensive’ for the replacement value of each vehicle and
shall also include:

Pag. 52
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
(a) cover for the Engineer and his staff driving the vehicle, and for any other persons that the
Engineer requires to be included;
(b) usage on the business of the Engineer and his staff for social, domestic and pleasure purposes;
and
(c) liability to third parties (including passengers whether the Engineer, his staff or others) for an
unlimited indemnity in respect of death or personal injury and for the maximum indemnity
reasonable in respect of loss, destruction or damage to property.
When not used by the Engineer the Contractor shall provide adequate and secure garaging for each
vehicle and will not permit use of any vehicle other than that authorised by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide similar replacement vehicles whenever the original vehicles are not
available for use for whatever reasons.
On completion of the Works, the vehicles, except one, shall be handed over to the Employer. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the running, servicing, maintenance, repairs, etc of one of the
vehicles which shall be handed over to the Employer at the end of the Defects Notification Period.
Before the vehicles are handed over to the Employer, the Contractor shall first arrange for a
complete overhaul of each vehicle to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall arrange
for transfer of ownerships and registration in favour of the Employer and pay all costs and fees. The
final complete overhaul of each vehicle, before it is handed over to the Employer, shall include:
(i) servicing of the vehicle;

(ii)fitting the vehicle with new tyres, new spare tyre, and new battery(ies);
(iii)repair of all dents;
(iv)cleaning up and technical verification of all important parts of the vehicle;
(v)replacement of the parts found damaged or worn-out;
(vi)repair and/or replacement of worn-out or damaged seats, seat covers, and floor mats;
(vii)spraying of the vehicle to the same original colour as directed by the Engineer.
All the Contractor’s expenses and costs arising under this Clause shall be reimbursed against the
rates and prices entered in the Bills of Quantities. Purchase costs will be paid after handing over of
the vehicles to the Engineer. Standing costs are on a number basis while operating costs will be paid
according to the kilometres travelled as recorded on the vehicle odometers.
The standing costs will include items such as provision of the vehicles, insurance, registration, road
taxes, delivery to Site, garaging and provision of temporary replacement vehicles. The rate will also
include for the cost of the final complete overhaul, transfer of ownership and registration in favour
of, and delivery of all vehicles to, the Employer.
The kilometre rate will include all day-to-day running expenses such as fuel and lubricants, routine
servicing, maintenance including provision of new tyres and batteries, repairs, provision of drivers

Pag. 53
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
and their overtime.
The vehicles shall be provided within 56 days after the Commencement Date. Prior to the supply of
the vehicles, the Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary similar vehicles starting from the
Commencement Date. If the vehicles for the use of the Engineer and his staff are not supplied
within the specified period of 56 days, the Contractor shall provide, at his risk and cost beyond the
specified period of 56 days, the temporary similar vehicles for the Engineer’s staff.
2.6 ASSISTANCE TO THE ENGINEER

The Contractor shall supply such labour, either continuously or from time to time, as may be
required by the Engineer, to assist in the checking of materials on Site and in the laboratory, the
setting out of the Works and in measuring the Works.
The Contractor shall provide one draftsman (excellent in Auto-CAD) whenever the Engineer
requires the services of a draftsman during the whole duration of the Contract.
The Contractor shall provide all tools, protective clothing, wooden pegs, iron pins, water, concrete
and transport for labourers as may be required by the Engineer and his staff for supervision of the
Works.
The Contractor shall keep all buildings provided by himself or the Employer, for the use of the
Engineer and his staff, in a well maintained, clean and fully habitable condition and shall maintain
all access roads, car parks, footpaths, fences, gates, drains, potable water supplies and water-borne
sewage disposal systems in a good state of repair, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The
Contractor shall also provide an adequate refuse disposal service for all residences and offices. The
Contractor shall maintain all furniture and equipment, provided by him, in a good state of repair and
usable condition and shall replace any item which becomes unserviceable due to fair wear and tear.
The Contractor shall provide soap and towels in the offices of the Engineer, cleaning and sanitary
staff, cleaning equipment and day and night watchmen.
Table 4 - FURNITURE, FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT FOR ENGINEER’S OFFICE
Item Description Unit Quantity

No
Supply, install, connect and set to work the following items

of furniture, fixtures and equipment in the Engineer’s office.
1 Desk, metal framed (2.0 m x 1.0 m approx), with 6 drawers nr 2

Pag. 54
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

No
fitted with locks
2 Chair, swivel, upholstered, wheeled chair with arms for nr 2

above desks
3 Desk, metal framed (1.7 m x 0.8 m approx.), with three nr 3

drawers fitted with locks
4 Chair with arms for above desks nr 3
5 Table, metal framed (1.2 m x 0.9 m approx.) nr 2
6 Table, metal framed (4 m x 2 m approx.) nr 1
7 Chairs, metal framed, upholstered for above table nr 10
8 Filing cabinet, metal, 4 drawer with suspended filing nr 3

system, locking
9 Cupboard, double door, metal with 4 shelves, locking (0.9 nr 2

m wide x 0.45 m deep x 1.8 m high approx.)
10 Scale rule, flat and triangular nr 4
11 Calculator, 11 digits, with scientific functions nr 3
12 Mechanical pencil sharpener nr 1
13 Waste paper basket nr 5

Pag. 55
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

No
14 Letter tray, A4 size (each set of 3 trays) set 6
15 Sundry office items: paper punches (4 inc 1 heavy duty), set 1

staplers (4 inc 1 heavy duty), scissors (4), staple removers
(4), clutch or mechanical pencils 0.5mm (4) clipboard A4
size (4),
16 Plain paper Canon photocopier, desktop type with variable

magnification that can take both A4 and A3 full-size copies, nr 1
minimum capacity 25 copies/minute, including (i) supply of
consumables and spare parts, (ii) service contract with the
manufacturers’ authorized representative and (iii) automatic
voltage stabilizer with surge protection suitable for this
equipment.
17 Benching and shelving as required As req’d
18 Horizontal plan chest on legs with eight drawers (1525 x nr 1

1080 x 740 mm high approx.)
19 Desktop computer, colour monitor as specified in Clauses nr 2

2.1.10, 2.1.10.1 and 2.1.10.2 and Table 1 and Table 2
20 Laptop computers as specified in Clauses 2.1.10 and nr 1

2.1.10.3 and Table 3
A3 colour printer HP Officeject 7000 Wide Format or

21 nr 1
equivalent, capable of printing up to 33 pages per minute
(ppm) black and 32 ppm colour
22 Colour Plotter HP Designjet 650 DIN A0 Format or

equivalent including stand and paper roll holder nr 1

Pag. 56
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

No
23 Scanner, 1600x3200 dpi, A4 size, with USB port and nr 1

software
24 nr nr
Software as specified
25 Internet facilities nr 1
26 Electric stove, 2 ring type nr 1
27 Electric refrigerator 0.28 cubic metre capacity nr 1
28 Electric Philips metallic kettle, minimum capacity of 1.7 nr 1

litres
29 Drinking mugs nr 12
30 Crockery set comprising: 1 coffee pot, 1 tea pot, 1 milk jug, set 1
3 sugar bowls, 12 cups and saucers, 12 side plates, 18 tea
spoons, 12 small knives and 2 metallic flasks each of
capacity 2 litres
31 Tea tray nr 3
32 Electric fans nr 4
33 Fire extinguisher including refills and servicing. nr 1

Pag. 57
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

No
34 First aid kit nr 1
35 Notice board, secured (1.5 m x 1 m approx) nr 4
36 Safe 0.125 cubic metre capacity (to be secured to wall or nr 1

floor of office). Suitable to protect contents against fire and
theft and manufactured by recognised manufacturer.
37 Water heater, 140 litres storage capacity nr 1
38 Toilet brush with holder (at least) nr 2
39 Mop and bucket nr 1
40 Plastic bucket nr 3
41 Plastic jerry cans 25 litre capacity for petrol and other nr 5

liquids
42 Broom nr 2
43 Dust pan and brush nr 1
44 Sony digital camera, optical zoom x5, digital zoom x6,

minimum 10 megapixels, storage media/capacity of 4 GB nr 1
memory card, size of LCD monitor of 2.5 inches, high
speed USB 2.0 memory stick reader, JPEG-RAW file
format, complete with downloading cable, strap, carrying

Pag. 58
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

No
case and manuals.
Table 5 - SURVEYING INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT

Nr

of surveying equipment for the Engineer’s office.
1 Total Station (Theodolit WILD T1000, Distomat WILD nr 1

DI5, data recorder WILD GRE4 or similar approved),
notebook with surveying software RIB STRATIS,
complete with tripod, carrying case and all accessories
2 Level, Zeiss NI 2 automatic level, or similar approved, nr 1

complete with tripod, carrying case and all accessories
3 Levelling staff, engine divided 4 m long, folding, including nr 2

staff level
4 Staff levelling plate nr 2
5 Steel tape, 100 m length nr 1
8 Steel tape repair kit nr 1
9 Fibreglass, PVC coated tape, 30 m length nr 2

Pag. 59
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

Nr
10 Steel hand tape, 3 m long nr 4
11 Steel hand tape, 5 m long nr 4
12 Ranging rod, 3 m length nr 10
13 Arrow, 400 mm length nr 25
14 Conical plummet, 200 g weight nr 1
15 Steel straight edge 1 m long nr 1
16 Spirit level with aluminium body, 1 m long nr 1
17 Torpedo level with aluminium body, 150 mm long nr 2
18 Pipe measuring tape with linear and diametric scales nr 2
19 String line, 50 m long nr 2
20 Optical square nr 1
21 Hammer, 3 kg weight nr 1
22 Hand shovel nr 2

Pag. 60
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

Nr
23 Pedometer, measuring to 10 000 m at 0.1 m intervals nr 1
24 Pocket counter, counting to 9999 with push button for nr 1

automatic return plus re-set knob
25 Thermometer, maximum and minimum graduated in oC nr 1

and oF
26 Thermometer, wet and dry bulbs, graduated in oC and oF nr 1
27 Concrete thermometer nr 1
28 Rain gauge with measuring bottle nr 1
29 Flask with thermal insulation, 1 litre capacity nr 2
30 Water containers, 5 litre capacity nr 2
31 Portable digital Schmidt Hammer for concrete strength nr 1

tests, percussion energy 2207 Nm (0.225 kgm), weight not
exceeding 1.1 kg.

Pag. 61
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Table 6 - FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT FOR ENGINEER’S RESIDENTIAL ACCOMMODATION
Item No. Item Description Unit Quantity of

items per house
1 Bed with mattress nr 4
2 Pillows nr 4
3 Bed sheets, pairs nr 4
4 Pillow case nr 8
5 Blankets nr 4
6 Dressing table with mirror and stool nr 2
7 Chest of drawers nr 3
8 Wardrobe (if not built in) nr 3
9 Bedside tables nr 3
10 Bedside chairs nr 3
11 Bedside rugs nr 4
12 Bedside lamps nr 3
13 Mosquito nets nr 4
14 Medicine cabinet (if not built in) nr 1
15 Bathroom stools nr 2
16 Bathroom mats nr 2
17 Dining table (extended type to accommodate 6 nr 1

covers)
18 Dining chairs nr 6
19 Sideboard nr 1
20 Lounge chairs nr 4
21 Settee nr 1
22 Coffee table nr 1

Pag. 62
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
23 Occasional tables nr 3
24 Book case nr 1
25 Writing desk nr 1
26 Kitchen chairs nr 1
27 Drinking water filter nr 1
28 Refrigerator (300 litres capacity with deep- nr 1

freeze compartment not less than 50 litres)
29 Electrical/gas cooker with 2 gas burners and 2 nr 1

radiant plates, oven and grill, including all
connections and accessories.
30 Gas cylinders, each 15kg nr 2
31 Waste paper bins nr 4
32 Hurricane lamps nr 2
33 Lampshades, for all light set 1
34 Lined curtains, for all windows set 1
35 Electric light bulbs i.e. energy savers as set 1

required
36 Plastic refuse bin with cover, minimum nr 1

capacity 70 litres
37 Crockery set comprising:
6 plates, 6 forks, 6 knives, 2 frying pans, 4 set 1

cooking pots, 2 serving spoons, 1 sugar bowl, 6
cups and saucers, 6 teaspoons, 6 table spoons, 6
glasses, 1 flask.

Pag. 63
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Table 7 - FURNITURE, FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT FOR RESIDENT ENGINEER’S OFFICE

No

of furniture, fixtures and equipment in the Resident
Engineer’s office.
1 Desk, metal framed (2.0 m x 1.0 m approx), with 6 drawers nr 1

fitted with locks
2 Chair, swivel, upholstered, wheeled chair with arms for nr 1

above desks
3 Desk, metal framed (1.7 m x 0.8 m approx.), with three nr 2

drawers fitted with locks
4 Chair with arms for above desks nr 2
5 Table, metal framed (1.2 m x 0.9 m approx.) nr 1
6 Table, metal framed (4 m x 2 m approx.) nr 1
7 Chairs, metal framed, upholstered for above table nr 8
8 Filing cabinet, metal, 4 drawer with suspended filing nr 2

system, locking
9 Cupboard, double door, metal with 4 shelves, locking (0.9 nr 1

m wide x 0.45 m deep x 1.8 m high approx.)
10 Scale rule, flat and triangular nr 1

Pag. 64
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

No
11 Calculator, 11 digits, with scientific functions nr 1
12 Mechanical pencil sharpener nr 1
13 Waste paper basket nr 3
14 Letter tray, A4 size (each set of 3 trays) set 3
15 Sundry office items: paper punches (4 inc 1 heavy duty), set 1

staplers (4 inc 1 heavy duty), scissors (4), staple removers
(4), clutch or mechanical pencils 0.5mm (4) clipboard A4
size (4),
16 Benching and shelving as required As req’d
17 Horizontal plan chest on legs with eight drawers (1525 x nr 1

1080 x 740 mm high approx.)
18 Laptop computers as specified in Clauses 2.1.10 and nr 1

2.1.10.3 and Table 3
A3 colour printer HP Officeject 7000 Wide Format or

19 nr 1
equivalent, capable of printing up to 33 pages per minute
(ppm) black and 32 ppm colour
20 Scanner, 1600x3200 dpi, A4 size, with USB port and nr 1

software
21 nr nr
Software as specified

Pag. 65
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

No
22 Internet facilities nr 1
23 Electric stove, 2 ring type nr 1
24 Electric refrigerator 0.28 cubic metre capacity nr 1
25 Electric Philips metallic kettle, minimum capacity of 1.7 nr 1

litres
26 Drinking mugs nr 6
27 Crockery set comprising: 1 coffee pot, 1 tea pot, 1 milk jug, set 1
2 sugar bowls, 6 cups and saucers, 6 side plates, 12 tea
spoons, 6 small knives and 2 metallic flasks each of
capacity 2 litres
28 Tea tray nr 2
29 Electric fans nr 2
30 Fire extinguisher including refills and servicing. nr 1
31 First aid kit nr 1
32 Notice board, secured (1.5 m x 1 m approx) nr 2
33 Safe 0.125 cubic metre capacity (to be secured to wall or nr 1

floor of office). Suitable to protect contents against fire and

Pag. 66
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

No
theft and manufactured by recognised manufacturer.
34 Water heater, 140 litres storage capacity nr 1
35 Toilet brush with holder (at least) nr 1
36 Mop and bucket nr 1
37 Plastic bucket nr 2
38 Plastic jerry cans 25 litre capacity for petrol and other nr 3

liquids
39 Broom nr 1
40 Dust pan and brush nr 1
Table 8 - FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT FOR RESIDENT ENGINEER’S RESIDENTIAL ACCOMMODATION

items per house
1 Bed with mattress nr 2
2 Pillows nr 2
3 Bed sheets, pairs nr 2
4 Pillow case nr 4
5 Blankets nr 2
6 Dressing table with mirror and stool nr 1

Pag. 67
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

items per house
7 Chest of drawers nr 2
8 Wardrobe (if not built in) nr 2
9 Bedside tables nr 2
10 Bedside chairs nr 2
11 Bedside rugs nr 2
12 Bedside lamps nr 2
13 Mosquito nets nr 2
14 Medicine cabinet (if not built in) nr 1
15 Bathroom stools nr 1
16 Bathroom mats nr 1
17 Dining table (to accommodate 4 covers) nr 1
18 Dining chairs nr 4
19 Sideboard nr 1
20 Lounge chairs nr 2
21 Settee nr 1
22 Coffee table nr 1
23 Occasional tables nr 2
24 Book case nr 1
25 Writing desk nr 1
26 Kitchen chairs nr 1
27 Drinking water filter nr 1
28 Refrigerator (300 litres capacity with deep- nr 1

freeze compartment not less than 50 litres)
29 Electrical/gas cooker with 2 gas burners and 2 nr 1

radiant plates, oven and grill, including all

Pag. 68
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

items per house
connections and accessories.
30 Gas cylinders, each 15kg nr 2
31 Waste paper bins nr 2
32 Hurricane lamps nr 1
33 Lampshades, for all light set 1
34 Lined curtains, for all windows set 1
35 Electric light bulbs i.e. energy savers as set 1

required
36 Plastic refuse bin with cover, minimum nr 1

capacity 70 litres
37 Crockery set comprising:
6 plates, 6 forks, 6 knives, 2 frying pans, 4 set 1

cooking pots, 2 serving spoons, 1 sugar bowl, 6
cups and saucers, 6 teaspoons, 6 table spoons, 6
glasses, 1 flask.

Pag. 69
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3 SOIL AND GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS
Detailed geotechnical investigations shall be carried out in every site before the construction of
intake facilities, WTP, or reservoirs takes place, to confirm the structural designs.
These investigations will include the following:
 Drilled boreholes at continuous coring with rotation system to 20 m below ground level,
with sampling and storage of representative samples (number 3 for each borehole);
 N° 2 soil samples in overburden and N° 1 sample in rock, to carry out the laboratory tests
for geotechnical characterization of soil;
 Specific Geotechnical Laboratory Test, depending on the typology of extracted sample -
 Oedometric Consolidation Test for cohesive soils,
 Grain Size Analysis and Triaxial Test for granular soils,
 Point Load Test to determine rock strength indexes.
The details of the geotechnical investigations required in each site are described below:
 Kahengye Intake (RU_I1): n° 3 drilled boreholes to 20 m. b.g.l. and n° 9 Geotechnical
Laboratory Test;
 WTP for Rukungiri scheme (RU_W1): n° 5 drilled boreholes to 20 m. b.g.l. and n° 15
Geotechnical Laboratory Test;
 Mukazi Proposed MBR (RU_R1): n° 3 drilled boreholes to 20 m. b.g.l. and n° 9
 Rwanyakashesha Proposed SR (RU_R2): n° 3 drilled boreholes to 20 m. b.g.l. and n° 9
 Bwoma Proposed SR (RU_R3): n° 3 drilled boreholes to 20 m. b.g.l. and n° 9 Geotechnical
Laboratory Test;
 Kebisoni Proposed SR (RU_R4): n° 3 drilled boreholes to 20 m. b.g.l. and n° 9 Geotechnical
Laboratory Test;
 Buyanja Proposed SR – Gravity Scheme - (RU_R5): n° 3 drilled boreholes to 20 m. b.g.l.
and n° 9 Geotechnical Laboratory Test;
 Buyanja Proposed HLR (RU_R6): n° 3 drilled boreholes to 20 m. b.g.l. and n° 9
 Rwerere Proposed SR (RU_R7): n° 3 drilled boreholes to 20 m. b.g.l. and n° 9 Geotechnical
Laboratory Test.

Pag. 70
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
4 SUPERVISION
This cost will cater for the supervision activities involving town level participatory Multi-
Stakeholder Forums (MSF) and Town Project Teams (TPT) related to monthly site meetings,
routine construction progress reviews and monitoring.
The Contractor will also assist the Consultant at organizing and carrying out a training program for
6 MWE staff persons. The training will take place in the field, throughout the construction and
defect liability phases as follows:
o 7 training on-the-job sessions during the construction phase;
o training sessions during the defect liability phase.
During the training sessions, the staff from MWE will accompany the Contractor staff in the
supervision and oversight of the work. The training shall cover all aspects of the engineering
services, in particular:
 the organization and management of the Work Supervision Office;
 the Work Supervision methodology:
o Validation of administrative files and working drawings
o Siting of the structures to be built
o Oversight of the various execution phases (networks, civil engineering, and

equipment)
o Establishment of service orders
o Leading construction site and coordination meetings
o Drafting establishment and activity reports, the final report, and maintenance manuals
o Administrative and financial supervision
o Inspecting as-built drawings
o Acceptance of the work
 Company relations;
Construction site safety verification.

Pag. 71
RU.B.RP.06.1
SPECIFICATION OF
WTP’S CIVIL WORKS
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 EARTHWORKS ..................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 SITE CLEARANCE AND DEMOLITION .................................................................................. 1
1.3 EXCAVATION OF ARTIFACTS AND BASINS .......................................................................... 2
1.4 EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES ............................................................................................. 3
1.5 TIMBERING AND DEWATERING OF EXCAVATIONS .............................................................. 3
1.6 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING OF PIPE TRENCHES ......................................................... 4
1.7 REINSTATEMENT OF SURFACES ......................................................................................... 6
2 CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT ............................................................................. 7

2.1 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................. 7
2.2 APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................... 8
2.2.1 Reference British Codes ..................................................................................... 8
2.3 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 9
2.4 MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE ..................................................................................... 9
2.4.1 Aggregates ......................................................................................................... 9
2.4.2 Coarse Aggregates ........................................................................................... 11
2.4.3 Fine Aggregates ............................................................................................... 11
2.4.4 Cement ............................................................................................................. 12
2.4.5 Admixture for Concrete .................................................................................... 13
2.5 STEEL ............................................................................................................................ 20
2.5.1 For Reinforcement ........................................................................................... 20
2.6 STORING OF MATERIALS ......................................................................................... 20
2.7 WORKMANSHIP .......................................................................................................... 20
2.7.1 Concrete ........................................................................................................... 20
2.7.2 Mix Design ....................................................................................................... 21
2.7.3 Trial mixes ........................................................................................................ 24
2.7.4 Nominal Mix Concrete ..................................................................................... 25
2.7.5 Batching of Concrete ........................................................................................ 26
2.7.6 Mixing & Transportation of concrete .............................................................. 28
2.7.7 Transportation of concrete ............................................................................... 28
2.7.8 Actions before placement of concrete .............................................................. 28
2.7.9 Preparatory Works/Surface Preparation ......................................................... 29
2.7.10 Placing and Compaction of Concrete .............................................................. 31
2.7.11 Construction Joints & Cold Joints ................................................................... 33
2.7.12 Requirements for Concreting in Special cases ................................................. 36
2.7.13 Finishes to Exposed Surfaces of Concrete ....................................................... 37
2.7.14 Curing of Concrete ........................................................................................... 38
2.7.15 Testing of Concrete .......................................................................................... 42
2.7.16 Steel Reinforcement .......................................................................................... 45
2.7.17 Shuttering ......................................................................................................... 49
2.7.18 Damp Proof Course Concrete .......................................................................... 53
2.7.19 Grout ................................................................................................................ 54
2.7.20 Concreting in Water Retaining Structures ....................................................... 55
2.7.21 Application of Live Load .................................................................................. 60
2.8 SPECIAL CONCRETES & STRUCTURES.................................................................. 60
2.8.1 Precast Concrete .............................................................................................. 60
2.8.2 Foam Concrete ................................................................................................. 65
2.8.3 Light Weight Concrete ..................................................................................... 65
RU_B_RP.06.1 – Technical specification of WTP’s civil works

Pag. i
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.9 BRICKWORK, BLOCKWORK AND MASONRY ...................................................... 66

2.9.1 Water proofing ................................................................................................. 66
2.9.2 Rendering ......................................................................................................... 67
2.9.3 Painting ............................................................................................................ 67
3 PIPES, FITTINGS AND PIPE WORK .............................................................................. 68

3.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPES AND FITTINGS ................................................................................. 68
3.2 PVC PIPES ....................................................................................................................... 68
3.3 STEEL PIPES ..................................................................................................................... 68
3.4 PE PIPES .......................................................................................................................... 69
3.5 STAINLESS STEEL PIPES ................................................................................................... 69
3.6 JOINTS ............................................................................................................................. 69
3.6.1 Flanged joints................................................................................................... 69
3.6.2 Flange adaptors ............................................................................................... 70
3.6.3 Mechanical Couplings...................................................................................... 70
3.6.4 Flexible joints for cast (spun) and ductile iron pipes ....................................... 71
3.6.5 Joints for uPVC pipes ....................................................................................... 71
3.6.6 Joints for HDPE pipes...................................................................................... 71
3.7 SETTING OUT OF PIPELINES.............................................................................................. 72
3.8 HANDLING PIPES ............................................................................................................. 72
3.9 LAYING AND JOINTING OF PIPES ...................................................................................... 73
3.10 THRUST BLOCKS AND ANCHORS ...................................................................................... 74
3.11 CLEANING ....................................................................................................................... 74
3.12 TESTING OF PIPELINES - PRESSURE MAINS ....................................................................... 75
3.13 STERILISATION AND COMMISSIONING OF PIPELINES ........................................................ 76
3.14 CONCRETE MANHOLE FOR PIPELINE WORK ...................................................................... 76
4 MISCELLANEOUS WORKS ............................................................................................. 78

4.1 WINDOWS, DOORS, FENCE AND GATES ............................................................................ 78
4.2 UPVC ELECTRICAL CORRUGATED CONDUIT .................................................................... 79
4.3 CONCRETE MANHOLE FOR CABLES WORK ....................................................................... 79
4.4 ROADS AND PAVING ........................................................................................................ 80
4.4.1 Sub-Base and Base ........................................................................................... 80
4.4.2 Surfacing .......................................................................................................... 80
4.4.3 Kerbs ................................................................................................................ 80
4.5 SANITARY WATER SYSTEM .............................................................................................. 81

Pag. ii
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1 EARTHWORKS
1.1 Introduction
The Contractor shall have due regard to the recommendations contained in the BS
6031. All testing of soils shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1377 "Method of
Testing Soils for Civil Engineering Purposes".
1.2 Site clearance and demolition
The Contractor shall clear the ground, on or below which the Works are to be
erected by removing all vegetation and superficial obstructions. Combustible material
may be disposed of by strictly controlled burning approved by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall remove all other cleared material from the Site of the Works to a tip
provided by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
Scrub, hedges, debris and other obstacles such as huts, trees etc. along the routes
of the pipelines shall be cleared to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Where adequate
space is available, a working width of up to 7.0 m will be allowed for pipelines laid
manually and up to 15.0 m if mechanical plant is extensively used. There will be some
locations where this working area will not be available. The Contractor will be deemed
to have visited the pipeline and sewer routes to check for himself such locations, and
allowed in his rates for working in such conditions.
All trees within 2.0 m of the pipeline centre lines shall be felled and the roots
grubbed up. Trees with a girth of less than 0.5 m shall be deemed to be included in the
clearance of scrub etc. and shall not be paid for separately.
Where directed by the Engineer or as shown on the Drawings the Contractor shall
demolish, break up and remove buildings, structures and superficial obstructions on the
Site in the way of or otherwise affected by the Works. He shall clear each part of the
Site at the times and to the extent required or approved by the Engineer.
Pag. 1
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1.3 Excavation of artifacts and basins
Excavation of trench for the artifacts, basins and ancillary related works , in
ordinary soil of any nature and consistency, executable by mechanical means, including
the rock, including the extraction of boulders and the removal or demolition of artifacts
of any kind of volume up to 0.50 m³, for cutting and uprooting of trees and stumps, the
charges for any pumping out, the demolition of pavements and road foundations of any
non-reusable type, including the leveling of the plans of the excavation, the deposit
alongside of the excavation of the material, the backfilling with material from the
excavations; they are also including the burden of protection of areas of work and safety
signage for day and night , as well as the expenses relating to preventive detection and
reporting of underground utilities (electrical or telephone cables, pipes , pipelines,
sewers, irrigation canals, drains roads, etc..). And claim also covers the burden of
sorting the material up and free of stones for the First backfill of the artifacts or basins,
and the topsoil that may be present on surface, the perfect restoration of the campaign
plan by mechanical means, the compaction of the material, any refills. Including the cost
of transporting the waste material or if it is not deemed acceptable by supervisor
engineer and its cost to the landfill. Any excavated material not required or permitted for
backfilling of excavations shall be run to a tip provided by the Contractor. The disposal
tip and manner of disposal shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The rates for
excavation entered by the Contractor in the Bills of Quantities shall include for this
disposal. The volume of excavation will be computed on the basis of the width
determined by the conventional type sections attached and of the project depth plus the
thickness of the substrate. It must include in the price all charges resulting from any
increase in section, over the kind of sections attached, resulting from the nature of the
soil, the presence of water, rock, artifacts, etc.. or arising from weather events of any
kind, all executed in a workmanlike manner and in accordance with the directions of the
Pag. 2
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1.4 Excavation Of Trenches
Excavation of trench for the construction of pipes and ancillary related works , in
ordinary soil of any nature and consistency, executable by mechanical means, excluding
reporting of underground utilities (electrical or telephone cables, pipes, pipelines,
sewers, irrigation canals, drains roads, etc..). And claim also covers the cost of the
demolition and perfect restoration of the ditches covered by the works with pounded
earth , the burden of sorting the material up and free of stones for the First backfill of the
pipe, and the topsoil that may be present on surface, the perfect restoration of the
campaign plan by mechanical means, the compaction of the material, any refills.
Including the cost of transporting the waste material or if it is not deemed acceptable by
supervisor engineer and its cost to the landfill. The volume of excavation will be
computed on the basis of the width determined by the conventional type sections
attached and of the project depth of the bottom pipe plus the thickness of the substrate. It
must include in the price all charges resulting from any increase in section, over the kind
of sections attached, resulting from the nature of the soil, the presence of water, rock,
artifacts, etc.. or arising from weather events of any kind, all executed in a workmanlike
manner and in accordance with the directions of the supervisor engineer.
1.5 Timbering and dewatering of excavations
All open excavation shall be securely timbered with suitable timber (or alternative
form of sheeting other than timber) whenever necessary. Timber may be left in
excavations as such excavations are being backfilled, with the Engineer's approval. Only
such timber or sheeting, which the Engineer shall instruct to be left in position, shall be
Pag. 3
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
paid for by the Employer and payment for such timber or sheeting shall be at the rates
stated in the Bills of Quantities. No support work shall be removed until the authority of
the Engineer is given.
Every precaution shall be taken by the Contractor against slips, falls or subsidence
in the excavations, but if any slips, falls, or subsidences should occur, the Contractor
must at once make good the same, including all surface restoration and reinstatement, at
his own cost. if any such fall, slip or subsidence disturbs or weakens any foundation or
supports to the Works or adjacent buildings, pipes etc., or causes a space to exist outside
the new work itself, the Contractor shall execute such additional works as the Engineer
may required, in consequence thereof, and fill up the space so caused with concrete, or
other suitable material, as the Engineer may direct, all at the Contractor's expense.
All excavations shall be kept free from water until construction work is completed
and for such time as the Engineer considers necessary to safeguard the permanent work,
all at the Contractor's expense.
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for supporting the sides and
dewatering of trenches or pits and shall not be relieved of his responsibilities under the
Contract because no objection has been raised by the Engineer to the conditions of the
work.
1.6 Excavation and backfilling of pipe trenches
The Contractor shall excavate, fill and reinstate, in advance of his trench
excavation, all such holes as may be required for the location of underground utilities
along any pipeline route. The cost of these trial holes shall be deemed to be included in
the rates for excavation.
Excavation shall be made in open cut unless tunnelling or heading is specified or

approved by the Engineer.
Trenches for pipes shall be excavated to the lines, widths and depths shown on the
Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer, and shall be of sufficient width to give an
Pag. 4
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
equal clearance on both sides of the barrel of the pipe or pipes. Excavation for fire
hydrants, valve chambers or any other water works structure shall be carried out to the
levels and outlines of such structures, and the rates shall include for any additional
excavation or other temporary works required.
The trench shall be dug to within 15 cm of its formation and proper grade pegs
shall then be set in bottom of the trench, by the Contractor, for the accurate taking out of
the rest of the excavation.
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, due to the fault of the Contractor, the ground
becomes weathered prior to the laying of the pipes, the Contractor shall remove the
weathered soil and replace it with suitable compacted material to the original formation
level at his own expense.
Any excavated material not required or permitted for backfilling of excavations

shall be run to a tip provided by the Contractor. The disposal tip and manner of disposal
shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The rates for excavation entered by the
Contractor in the Bills of Quantities shall include for this disposal.
No pipes shall be laid and no excavation filled in or covered with concrete until
the formation has been inspected and permission to proceed with the work obtained
from the Engineer.
Where pipes are to be laid under a road formation or in cutting, the trenches shall
generally be excavated after the earthwork is completed. The Engineer may permit these
pipe trenches to be excavated before the earthwork is completed, but payment for the
excavation of the trench will only be made upon the volume excavated below the road
formation.
Where trench excavation is carried out close to existing structures, and carried to a
level below that of existing foundations, these buildings must be protected from possible
failure resulting from the trenching operations, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The
Contractor must allow for these temporary protection works in his rates.
Pag. 5
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1.7 Reinstatement of surfaces
All surfaces of roads, paths, fields, gardens, verges, etc., whether public or private,
which are disturbed during the execution of the Contract, shall be initially restored on a
temporary basis by the Contractor. Permanent reinstatement shall commence only when
the backfilled material has properly consolidated.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the temporary reinstatement and

permanent reinstatement of all surfaces, whether or not the area requiring restoration is
within the limits of his excavations, if the necessity for the restoration arises from causes
due to the operations of the Contractor. The Contractor's prices shall include for
restoring all surfaces so damaged to their original conditions as no extra payment will be
made for any such work.
Pag. 6
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2 CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT
The types of concrete to be considered for construction of the Water Treatment

Plant civil structures are indicated in the following Tables.
Concrete
Blinding layer below foundations of Liquid C 20 Grade
retaining structures & Plain concrete for having cube strength of 20 N/mm2
filling (100mm thickness)
Blinding layer below foundations, trenches C 10 Grade
and Plain cement concrete below foundation having cube strength of 10 N/mm2
of brick walls, RR masonry walls, for
structures other than Liquid Retaining
structures (100mm thickness)
Reinforcement concrete for Liquid Retaining C 35A Grade
structures having cube strength of 35 N/mm2
Reinforcement concrete for structures other C 25 Grade
than Liquid Retaining structures having cube strength of 25 N/mm2
2.1 SCOPE
This Contract covers the general requirements for concrete using on-site
production facilities including requirements in regard to the quality, handling, storage of
ingredients, proportioning, batching, mixing, transporting, placing, curing, protecting,
repairing, finishing and testing of concrete; formwork; requirements in regard to the
quality, storage, bending and fixing of reinforcement; grouting.
It shall be very clearly understood that the specification given herein are brief and
do not cover minute details. However, all works shall have to be carried out in
accordance with the relevant standards and codes of practices or in their absence in
accordance with the best accepted current engineering practices or as directed by
Pag. 7
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
ENGINEER from time to time. The decision of ENGINEER as regards the specification
to be adopted and their interpretation and the mode of execution of work shall be final
and binding on CONTRACTOR and no claim whatsoever will be entertained on this
account.
2.2 APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
The following specifications, standards and codes, including all official

amendments/revisions and other specifications & codes referred to therein, should be
considered a part of this contract. In all cases the latest issue/ edition/ revision shall
apply. In case of discrepancy between this contract and those referred to herein below or
other specifications forming a part of this contract document, this contract shall govern.
2.2.1 Reference British Codes
1) BS:8007 Code of practice for Design of concrete

Structures for retaining aqueous liquids.
2) BS:6399 (Part-1) Loading for Buildings - Code of practice for dead &
imposed loads.
3) BS:6399 (Part-2) Loading for Buildings - Code of practice for wind loads.
4) BS:6399 (Part-3) Loading for Buildings - Code of practice for imposed
roof loads.
5) BS:8110 (Part-1) Structural use of concrete - Code of practice for design
and construction.
6) BS:8110 (Part-2) Structural use of concrete - Code of practice for special
circumstances.
7) BS:8110 (Part-3) Structural use of concrete – Design charts.
8) BS:5328 (Part-1) Concrete – Guide to specifying concrete.
9) BS:5328 (Part-2) Concrete – Methods for specifying concrete mixes.
10) BS:5328 (Part-3) Concrete – Specifications for procedures to be used in
producing and transporting concrete.
sampling, testing & accessing compliance of concrete.
12) CP:3 Basic data for the design of buildings- chapter V-
Loading Part-2- wind loads.
13) Reynolds Handbook Reinforced concrete designer’s handbook.
Pag. 8
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.3 GENERAL
ENGINEER shall have the right at all times to inspect all operations including the
sources of materials, procurement, layout and storage of materials, the concrete batching
and mixing equipment, and the quality control system. Such an inspection shall be
arranged and ENGINEER’s approval obtained, prior to starting of concrete work. This
shall, however, not relieve CONTRACTOR of any of his responsibilities. All materials
which do not conform to this specification shall be rejected.
Materials should be selected so that they can satisfy the design requirements of
strength, serviceability, safety, durability and finish with due regards to the functional
requirements and the environmental conditions to which the structure will be subjected.
Materials complying with codes/standards shall generally be used. Other materials may
be used after approval of the ENGINEER and after establishing their performance
suitability based on previous data, experience or tests.
2.4 MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE
2.4.1 Aggregates
Aggregates shall comply with the requirements of relevant British Codes. They
shall be hard, strong, dense, durable, clean and free from veins and adherent coating,
vegetable matter and other deleterious substances; and shall be obtained from approved
sources. Aggregates shall not contain any harmful material such as pyrites, coal, lignite,
shale or similar laminated material, clay, alkali, soft fragments, seashells and organic
impurities in such quantity as to affect the strength or durability of concrete. Aggregates,
which are chemically reactive with alkalis of cement, shall not be used.
Aggregates, which are not sufficiently clean, shall be washed in clean fresh water
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Pag. 9
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.4.1.1 Testing
All aggregates shall be subject to inspection and testing. The CONTRACTOR

shall submit- samples for testing as may be required by the Engineer. Sampling and
testing shall be carried out in accordance relevant British Codes .
2.4.1.2 Grading
The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the full range of aggregate used for making
concrete is graded in such a way as to ensure a dense workable mix. The delivery of
aggregates will commence only when the Engineer has approved the samples and the
quality and grade shall be maintained consistent and equal to the approved sample.
Before construction commences, the CONTRACTOR shall carry out a series of tests on
the aggregates and on the concrete made there from to determine the most suitable
grading of the available aggregates. Once the most suitable grading has been found, the
grading shall be adopted for the construction of the works and periodic tests shall be
carried out to ensure that it is maintained.
2.4.1.3 Size and grading of fine aggregates
The grading shall conform to relevant British Codes and shall be within the limits
of Grading Zone. The maximum size of particle shall be 4.75mm and shall be graded
down. Sand containing more than 10% of fine grains passing through 150 micron sieve
or having the fineness modulus less than 2 shall not be used for concrete work.
2.4.1.4 Size and grading of coarse aggregates
The nominal maximum size of the aggregates for each mark of concrete or for
each type of work shall be according to relevant British Codes. The aggregates shall be
well graded and the grading shall conform to relevant requirements of British Codes
depending upon the maximum nominal size as specified or as required. The maximum
size of coarse aggregate shall be as stated on the drawings, but in no case greater than
1/4 of the minimum thickness of the member. Plums 160 mm and above of a reasonable
size may be used where directed. Plums shall not constitute more than 20% by volume
of the concrete.
Pag. 10
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.4.1.5 Fine aggregate for mortar and grout
The grading of fine aggregate for mortar and grout shall be within the limits of
grading zone and as defined in relevant British Codes.
2.4.1.6 Storage & stacking
Care shall be taken in the storage to avoid intrusion of any foreign materials into
the aggregates and where two types of aggregates are stored close to each other, they
shall be separated by a wall or plate. In case of stockpiling, care shall be taken to avoid
forming pyramids resulting in segregation of different sized materials. The height of the
stacks shall be generally limited to 150 cm.
2.4.2 Coarse Aggregates
2.4.2.1 Types
The type of coarse aggregate viz., stone chips, gravel or broken brick shall be as
specified. Unless otherwise specified, stone chips shall be used as coarse aggregate.
2.4.2.2 Stone chips
It shall be crushed or broken from hard stone obtained from approved quarries of
igneous or metamorphic origin. The stone chips shall be hard, strong, dense, durable and
angular in shape. It shall be free from soft, friable, thin, flat, elongated or laminated and
flaky pieces and free from dirt, clay lumps, and other deleterious materials like coal,
lignite, silt, soft fragments, and other foreign materials which may affect adversely the
strength & durability Of concrete. The total amount of deleterious /foreign materials
shall not exceed 5% by weight according to relevant British Codes. If found necessary
the stone chips shall be screened and washed before use.
2.4.3 Fine Aggregates
Unless specified otherwise it shall either be natural river sand or pit sand. Sand
shall be clean, sharp, strong, angular and composed of hard siliceous material. It shall
not contain harmful organic impurities in such form or quantities as to affect adversely
the strength and durability of concrete. Sand for reinforced concrete shall not contain
Pag. 11
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
any acidic or other impurities, which is likely to attack steel reinforcement. The
percentage of all deleterious materials including silt, clay etc., shall not exceed 5% by
weight. If directed sand shall be screened or washed before use to the satisfaction of
Engineer. The fineness modulus of sand shall neither be less than 2.0 nor more than 3.2.
2.4.4 Cement
Ordinary Portland cement Portland Pozzolanic cement complying with the

requirements of relevant British Codes shall be used for making plain and reinforced
concrete, cement grout and mortar.
Other types of cement may be used depending upon the requirements of certain
jobs with the approval of the Engineer.
Only one type of cement shall be used in any one mix. The source of supply, type
or brand of cement within the same structure or portion thereof shall not be changed
without approval from ENGINEER.
2.4.4.1 Testing of samples
The sampling of cement for testing shall be according relevant British Codes. All
tests shall be in accordance with the relevant clauses of British Codes.
2.4.4.2 Contractor's responsibility
From the time a consignment of cement is delivered at site and tested and
approved by the Engineer until such time as the cement is used on the works, the
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for keeping the same in sound and acceptable
condition and at his expense and risk. Any cement which deteriorates while in the
CONTRACTOR's charge and is rejected as unsuitable by the Engineer, shall be
removed from the site to outside the limits of work at the cost of CONTRACTOR
within two days of ordering such removal by the Engineer.
2.4.4.3 Stock of cement
In order to ensure due progress, the CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain on
the site at least such stock of cement as the Engineer may from time to time consider
Pag. 12
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
necessary. No cement shall be used upon the works until it has been accepted as
satisfactory by the Engineer.
2.4.4.4 Storage of cement
The cement shall be stored in such manner as to permit easy access for proper
inspection and in a suitable weather-tight, well-ventilated building to protect it from
dampness caused by ingress of moisture from any source. Different types of cement
shall be stored separately. Cement bags shall be stacked at least 15 to 20 cm clear of the
floor leaving a space of 60 cm around the exterior walls. The cement shall not be
stacked more than 10 bags high. Each consignment of cement shall be stacked
separately to permit easy access for inspection. Cement stored for more than 90 days
shall be tested prior to use on work.
2.4.4.5 Water
Water used for both mixing and curing shall conform to relevant British Codes.
Potable waters are generally satisfactory.
Water used for mixing concrete and mortar and for curing shall be clean and free
from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, salts, sugar, organic materials or other
substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel. The pH value of water shall
generally be not less than ‘6’. Water has to meet the requirements as per relevant
British Codes. Water shall be obtained from an approved source. Where it is obtained
from a source other than a supply main, it shall be tested to establish its suitability.
Water for construction purpose shall be stored in proper storage tanks to prevent any
organic impurities getting mixed up with it. CONTRACTOR shall make his own
arrangements for storing water at site in tanks to prevent contamination
2.4.5 Admixture for Concrete
2.4.5.1 Approval
Admixtures to concrete shall not be used without the written consent of the
Engineer. When permitted, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish full details from the
Pag. 13
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
manufacturer and shall carry out such test as the Engineer may require before any
admixture is used in the work. Accelerating, retarding, water-reducing and air entraining
admixtures shall conform to relevant British Codes and integral water proofing
admixture to relevant British Codes. Admixtures may be used in concrete as per
manufacturer’s instructions only with the approval of ENGINEER based upon evidence
that with the passage of time neither the compressive strength nor its durability is
reduced. An admixture’s suitability and effectiveness shall be verified by trial mixes
with the other materials used in the works. If two or more admixtures are to be used
simultaneously in the same concrete mix, their interaction shall be checked and trial
mixes done to ensure their compatibility. There should also be no increase in risk of
corrosion of the reinforcement or other embedments. Calcium chloride shall not be used
for accelerating set of the cement for any concrete containing reinforcement or
embedded steel parts. When calcium chloride is permitted such as in mass concrete
works, it shall be dissolved in water and added to the mixing water by an amount not
exceeding 1.5 percent of the weight of the cement in each batch of concrete. The
designed concrete mix shall be corrected accordingly.
Water proofing of concrete structures shall be achieved by applying the water

proofing methods described in paragraph 2.9.1.
2.4.5.2 Usage
Admixtures may be used to modify one or more of the following properties of

fresh concrete
a) To increase workability without increasing water content or to decrease the

water content at the same workability.
b) To retard or accelerate both initial and final setting times.
c) To reduce or prevent settlement.
d) To create slight expansion in concrete and mortar.
e) To modify the rate or capacity for bleeding or both.
Pag. 14
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
f) To reduce segregation of concrete, mortars and grouts.
g) To improve penetration and/or pump ability of concrete, mortars and

grouts.
h) To reduce rate of slump loss.
2.4.5.3 Admixtures may also be used to modify one or more of the

following properties of hardened concrete.
a) To retard or reduce heat generation during early hardening.
b) To accelerate the rate of strength development.
c) To increase the strength of concrete or mortar (compressive, tensile or

flexural).
d) To increase the durability or resistance to severe conditions of exposure

including the application de-icing salts.
e) To decrease the capillary flow of water.
f) To decrease the permeability to liquids.
g) To control the expansion caused by the reaction of alkalis with certain

aggregate constituents.
h) To produce cellular concrete.
i) To increase the bond of concrete to steel reinforcement.
j) To increase the bond between old and new concrete.
k) To improve impact resistance and abrasion resistance.
l) To inhibit the corrosion of embedded metal.
m) To produce coloured concrete or mortar.
While modifying any particular property, care shall be taken to ensure that other
properties are not affected adversely.
Pag. 15
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.4.5.4 Types
2.4.5.4.1Integral water proofer
Admixtures used as integral water proofer shall be free of chlorides and sulphates
and shall conform to relevant British Codes. The application and doses shall be as per
manufacturer's specification.
2.4.5.4.2Finely Divided mineral. admixtures
1) CEMENTITIOUS - Natural cements like hydraulic lime, slag cements

(mixtures of blast furnace slag and lime) and granulated blast furnace
slag.
2) POZZOLANIC - A siliceous or siliceous and aluminium material which in

itself possesses little or no cementations value, but will in finely divided
form and in presence of moisture, chemically react with calcium hydroxide
at ordinary temperatures to form compounds possessing cementations
properties, e.g Fly ash, volcanic glass, diatomaceous earth and certain
shale and clays either head treated or natural.
3) OTHER - Finely divided quartz, silica sands, dolomite and calcite

limestone, marble, granite and other rocks, asbestos waste and hydrated
lime.
These being extremely fine powders, their mineral admixtures will influence the
fresh paste in a manner similar to cement. They can be used to augment the cement in
mixtures deficient in fines. Many concretes contain large amount of Portland cement
than necessary for strength requirements to provide workability or pumpability. A
portion or all of this excess cement may be replaced with a suitable mineral admixture.
They are usually used in the proportion of 15-35% by weight of the cement and in
proportioning, the concrete should be considered as part of the cementing medium,
provided they are uniformly blended with cement.
Pag. 16
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The placeability of concrete containing blast furnace slag is generally greater than
indicated by static slump test or water/cement ratio. In medium or rich concretes, the
increase in water requirements caused by their use may reduce strength. Pozzolanic
admixture s usually increases the strength of concrete especially at later ages. The
addition of fly-ash, natural pozzolana and granulated slag in sufficient quantities will
increase the sulphate resistance of concrete.
2.4.5.5 Accelerating admixtures
Calcium Chlorides will also affect the following properties
a) may increase drying, shrinkage and creep. The longer the concrete is
allowed to cure, the less will be the effect on shrinkage and creep.
b) may lower the resistance of concrete to freezing and thawing and to attack
by sulphates and other injurious solutions.
c) may increase the rate of temperature residue to the heat of hydration and in
large sections may therefore increase the stresses caused by thermal
contraction.
d) can cause corrosion of adequately embedded reinforcing steel in the

concrete. Where large concentrations of stray currents are present, such as
in concrete used in structures for electric railroads, power houses or
electrolytic reduction plants.
e) galvanized metal embedded in concrete containing calcium chloride may

be expected to corrode at an accelerated rate.
f) combinations of metals such as aluminum alloy, conduit and steel

reinforcing should not be used in concrete containing calcium chloride as
electrolytic corrosion may take place.
For allowable limits of Calcium Chloride refer ACI Committee 201.
1) Calcium Chloride will not increase the flexure strength of concrete

to the same degree as the compressive strength and decreases in the
Pag. 17
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
flexure strength are generally obtained at or after 28 days. The total

chloride content in the concrete should be limited as specified in
relevant British Codes.
2) Calcium aluminates cement blended with Portland cement:
Strength will be reduced significantly, shrinkage and swelling on immersion will

increase drastically and durability will be poor.
2.4.5.6 Air-entraining admixture
a) The water reduction is possible due to entrained air. The volume of this
water reduction is less than the volume of entrained air, therefore to
compensate for the volume of entrained air, the fine aggregate volume
must also be reduced.
b) Despite reduction in the water/cement ratio usually obtained by the use of

air entrainers, it may reduce strength, particularly, in concretes of high or
moderate cement content.
2.4.5.7 Water reducing and set controlling admixtures
Admixtures of the hydroxylated carboxylic acid type may tend to increase the
bleeding rate and segregation in concrete deficient in fines (aggregate fines of cement).
When prolonged retardation is employed care must be taken to prevent the drying of the
concrete.
The water reducing admixture should be added at the same time in the mixing
cycle, in order to obtain a uniform setting time among the batches.
Then admixtures in many cases will increase the slump loss.
Increases in the flexural strength of concrete containing water reducing admixtures

are usually attained but they are not proportionately as great as the increase in the
compressive strength.
Pag. 18
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.4.5.8 General
Suitable remedial measures as recommended by the manufacturers and approved

by the Engineer shall be taken to eliminate any disadvantages arising from the mix of
admixtures.
While using the admixtures the maximum amount chloride expressed either in
percentage of cement concrete shall not exceed the limit as specified relevant British
Codes.
2.4.5.9 Interval of Routine Test
All materials used for the works shall be tested before use. Manufacturer’s test
certificate shall be furnished for each batch of cement/steel and when directed by
ENGINEER samples shall also be got tested by the CONTRACTOR in a laboratory
approved by ENGINEER at no extra cost to OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall furnish
manufacturer’s test certificates and technical literature for the admixture proposed to
used. If directed, the admixture shall be got tested at an approved laboratory at no extra
cost.
The routine tests of materials, delivered at site shall be at the following intervals :
 Aggregates - Fortnightly or for every 200 M3 for each aggregate

whichever is earlier and in other respects generally as per relevant British
Codes.
 Cement - Fortnightly or for each consignment within 4 days of delivery

and other respects generally as per relevant British Codes.
 Water - Once in two months for each source supply and in other respects
generally as per relevant British Codes.
 Reinforcement - For each consignment within 4 days delivery in

accordance with relevant British Codes.
Pag. 19
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.5 STEEL
2.5.1 For Reinforcement
Reinforcing bars for concrete shall be round steel bars of the following types as
may be shown on drawing:
i. Plain mild steel bars conforming to relevant British Codes.
ii. Deformed high tensile yield steel bars in grade 460 and ductility class B
(460B) as per relevant British Codes.
iii. Reinforcement fabrics confirming to relevant British Codes.
iv. Thermo mechanically treated (TMT) high strength deformed bars.
All reinforcement bars shall be of uniform cross sectional area and be free from
loose mill scales, dust, loose rust, coats of paint, oil or other coatings which may destroy
or reduce bond.
2.6 STORING OF MATERIALS
All material shall be stored in a manner so as to prevent its deterioration and

contamination which would preclude its use in the works. Requirements of relevant
British Codes shall be complied with.
2.7 WORKMANSHIP
2.7.1 Concrete
This chapter covers the workmanship, special requirements & regulations with
which the CONTRACTOR must comply to achieve the following two objectives:
a) The provision, at all locations on the site of dense workable concrete,

having the specified characteristic strength.
b) The placing of concrete at all elevations, well compacted by vibrations, in

well aligned and well fixed formwork ensuring the internal and external
dimensions of structures as per drawings and maintaining the size, shape,
Pag. 20
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
number and locations of reinforcements, inserts etc., as specified in the

drawings, providing the surface finish after stripping off the formwork to
ensure structural configurations as per drawings as well as within the
specified tolerance limits, curing and guaranteeing the characteristic
strength, all as specified.
The mixing, placing, compacting, curing and finishing of concrete shall be done
according to relevant British Codes.
2.7.2 Mix Design
2.7.2.1 General
At the commencement of the contract the CONTRACTOR shall make preliminary

tests to determine the proportions by weight of cement, fine aggregates, coarse
aggregates and water necessary to produce required grades of concrete. The mix
proportions shall be selected to ensure that workability of the fresh concrete is suitable
for the conditions of handling and placing and when concrete hardens, it shall have the
required strength, durability and surface finish. The CONTRACTOR shall get approval
of Engineer to proportions before he starts concreting. However such approval shall not
relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility to produce concrete having
compressive strengths as laid down in the foregoing Table.
No departure from the approved proportions will be permitted during the works
unless and until the Engineer gives written permission for any change in proportion. The
Engineer shall have authority at any time to check whether the mixing of concrete is
carried out according to the approved proportions. For the all major and important R.C.
works and for all special works, the design of mixes shall be made by the
CONTRACTOR at his own cost, for each grade of concrete as well as for various
workability. The design of mixes shall be made according to relevant British Codes or
any other approved standard methods. The concrete made by designing the mix is
termed hereinafter as "Design Mix Concrete" .The cement content for various grades of
concrete shall be based on design mix. However, irrespective of requirement of cement
Pag. 21
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
found out from design mix, cement content of concrete shall not be reduced below the
quantities specified as under except for the cases specifically approved by the Engineer.
The minimum cement content as specified in relevant British Codes above shall be
adopted irrespective of whether the CONTRACTOR achieves the desired strength with
less quantity of cement. The CONTRACTOR’s quoted rates for concrete shall provide
for the above eventuality and nothing extra shall become payable to the
CONTRACTOR in this account. Even in the case where the quantity of cement
required is higher than that specified above to achieve desired strength based on an
approved mix design, nothing extra shall become payable to the CONTRACTOR.
The strength requirements of the concrete mixes ascertained on 150 mm cubes as

per relevant British Codes.
2.7.2.2 Water Cement Ratio
Where a particular water cement ratio is stipulated in the design or drawing along
with the characteristic grade of concrete the design of mix shall be carried out by
adjusting the other variable factors to obtain the characteristic strength of concrete with
stipulated water cement ratio. In the structures where the impermeability and shrinkage
of concrete have an important bearing on the durability and serviceability of the
structures, such as water retaining structures, basements,, underground premises,
tunnels, pumphouses, exposed structures near sea side or deserts, prestressed structure,
thin precast members etc., the water cement ratio shall be kept low and preferably not
exceeding 0.45. The water cement ratio, as achieved in the Mix Design or as specified in
the drawings shall be adhered to strictly and shall not be varied without the permission
of the Engineer.
2.7.2.3 Workability
The workability of fresh concrete shall be such that the concrete is just suitable for
the conditions of handling & placing so that after compaction it becomes completely
consistent and homogeneously surrounds all the reinforcement and completely fills the
formwork.
Pag. 22
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The workability of fresh concrete at the place of batching/mixing shall be

measured by compaction factor test and at the place of disposition by means of slump
test. During the finalization of Trial Mixes, the relationship between compaction factor
and slump test shall be established for each grade of concrete as well as for various
levels of workability. The workability tests shall be carried out in accordance with
Normally, in the condition of low water cement ratio as well as for medium/high
workability, the workability shall be achieved by increasing the cement content, in
consistent with added water.
In cases where the cement content is to be limited to reduce the heat of hydration,
and the water cement ratio is also to be kept low to reduce the permeability or due to
other requirements the desired workability may be achieved with use of limited doses of
plasticizer or air entraining agent. In such cases the method of mixing and dosage of the
plasticizer/air entraining agent shall be according to the manufacturer's specification and
with the approval of the Engineer.
The usual limits of consistency for various types of structures are given below :
2.7.2.4 Limits of consistency
Unless otherwise specified the limits of consistency shall be as follows
Slump in mm with standard
Degree of cone as suitable per relevant

Use for which concrete is suitable
workability British Codes
Minimum Maximum
Large mass concrete structure with

Very low 0.0 25.0 heavy compaction equipment, roads and
the like.
Low 25.0 50.0 Uncongested wide and shallow R.C.C
Pag. 23
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
structures
Deep but wide R.C.C structures with

Medium 25.0 75.0
congestion of reinforcement and inserts
Very narrow and deep R.C.C structures,

High 75.0 125.0 with congestion due to reinforcement
and inserts
Note :
Not with standing anything mentioned above, the slump to be obtained for work in
progress shall be as per direction of the Engineer.
With the permission of the Engineer, for any grade of concrete, if the water has to
be increased in special cases, cement shall also be increased proportionately to keep the
ratio of water to cement same as adopted in trial mix design for each grade of concrete.
No extra payment will be made for this additional cement.
2.7.2.5 Durability
The durability of concrete, depending on the exposure condition, is to be taken

into account while designing the mix. For given aggregates the cement content should
be sufficient to make sufficiently low water cement ratio .
2.7.3 Trial mixes
After approval of the Mix Design by the Engineer, the CONTRACTOR shall
make in presence of Engineer the Trial Mixes for each grade of concrete as well as for
required workability.
Before starting the trial mixes, necessary preparatory works like sieve analysis of
the aggregates, determination of densities of different ingredients and moisture contents,
in the aggregates, shall be completed according to the relevant British Codes. Each trial
mix shall be handled and compacted by method which the CONTRACTOR proposes to
use for that mix in the works and the mixes shall not show tendency of inadequate
compaction by the method proposed.
Pag. 24
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The compacting factor and the slump of each trial mix shall be determined
immediately after mixing and the values shall not exceed the maximum value obtained
the mix design.
Six numbers of 150 mm test cubes shall be made from each trial mix. These shall
be cured and tested in accordance with relevant British Codes. In order to have the
specified characteristic strength in the field, the concrete mix as designed in the Design
Mix shall have higher average compressive strength depending on the degree of quality
control at site. If the size and special requirement of the work so warrants, the trial may
be extended to cover larger ranges of mix proportions as well as other variables such as
alternative source of aggregates, maximum size and grading of aggregates and different
type and brands of cement.
Before commencement of the concreting works of particular grade of concrete, the

CONTRACTOR must complete the work of trial mixes and subsequent testing of test
cubes obtained there from the design of the approved Mix for that particular grade of
concrete. The entire cost of all the trial mixes including all the preparatory works for
trial mixes, preparation of test cubes and their testing shall be borne by the
CONTRACTOR.
2.7.4 Nominal Mix Concrete
Nominal mix concrete may be used for all concrete of Grade C-10 and above. If
design mix concrete cannot be used for any reason for Grade C-15 & C-20, nominal mix
concrete may be used with the permission of Engineer. Nominal mix concrete shall not
be used, in any case for Grade of concrete above C-25. Mix Design and preliminary
tests are not necessary for Nominal Mix Concrete. However works tests shall be carried
out as per relevant British Codes. Proportions for Nominal Mix Concrete and w/c ratio
may be adopted as per relevant British Codes. However, it will be CONTRACTOR’s
sole responsibility to adopt appropriate nominal mix proportions to yield the specified
strength.
Pag. 25
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.5 Batching of Concrete
2.7.5.1 Cement
Cement shall always be batched by weight. A separate weighing device shall be

provided for weighing cement. Where the weight of cement is determined by accepting
the weight per bag, number of bags shall be weighed separately to determine the average
net weight of cement per bag and the same shall be checked regularly
2.7.5.2 Aggregates
For both Design Mix concrete and Nominal Mix concrete the aggregates (coarse
and fine) shall be batched by weight.
In particular cases, or where weigh-batching is not possible proportioning by

volume batching may be allowed by the Engineer, provided the CONTRACTOR
guarantees the uniformity of aggregates throughout the period of construction. For this
purpose, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the Engineer sufficient data indicating the
weight/volume relationship of aggregates for different types of concrete and after such
approval, periodic checks on the weight/volume relationship of the aggregates shall be
made by the CONTRACTOR to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Where aggregates are moist and volume batching is adopted, allowance shall be
made for bulking in accordance with relevant British Codes.
Suitable adjustments shall be made for the variation in the weight of aggregates
due to variation in moisture contents.
2.7.5.3 Water
Water may be measured either by weight or by volume. When measured by

volume, it shall be by well calibrated conical shaped jar or vessel or from a calibrated
tank fitted to the mixer.
Adjustment of water due to moisture contents in coarse & and fine aggregates
It is very important to maintain the water cement ratio constant at its correct value.
For the correct determination of amount of water to be added in the concrete mix, to
Pag. 26
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
maintain the water cement ratio constant, the amount of moisture content in both coarse
and fine aggregates shall be taken into consideration, be as frequently as possible, the
frequency for a given job being determined by the Engineer according to weather
conditions.
Determination of moisture content in the aggregates Determination of moisture

content in the aggregates shall be according to relevant British Codes. Where tests are
not conducted, the amount of surface water may be estimated from the following table:
2.7.5.4 Surface water carried by Aggregates
Aggregates % by weight Lit/m3
Very wet sand 7.5 120
Moderately wet sand 5.0 80
Moist sand 2.5 40
Moist gravel & stone chips+ 1.25 - 2.5 20-40
+Coarser the aggregate, less the water it will carry.
2.7.5.5 Admixtures
Any solid admixture, to be added, shall be measured by weight, but liquid or semi
liquid admixture may be measured by weight or volume.
2.7.5.5.1Accuracy of batching
The accuracy of batching shall be within the following tolerance:
Cement within plus or minus 1.00% by weight.
Aggregate within plus or minus 2.00% by weight.
Water within plus or minus 0.50% by weight.
Pag. 27
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.6 Mixing & Transportation of concrete
2.7.6.1 Mixing of Concrete
2.7.6.1.1Machine mixing
Concrete shall always be mixed in mechanical mixer. Water shall not, normally,
be charged into the drum of the mixer until all other ingredients are already in the drum
and mixed for at least one minute. Mixing shall be continued until there is uniform
distribution of materials and the mass is uniform in color and consistency. The mixing
time from the time of adding water shall be in accordance with relevant British Codes
but in no case less than 2 minutes or at least 40 revolutions.
2.7.6.1.2Hand mixing
When hand mixing is permitted by the Engineer it shall be carried out on a water
tight platform and care shall be taken to ensure that mixing is continued until the mass is
uniform in color and consistency. In case of hand mixing 10% extra cement shall be
added to each batch at no extra cost to the OWNER.
2.7.7 Transportation of concrete
Concrete shall be transported from the place of mixing to the place of placing
concrete as rapidly as practicable by such means which will prevent the segregation or
loss of any of the ingredients and maintain the required workability. No water shall be
mixed with the concrete after it has left the mixer. Where concrete is transported over
long distances, the CONTRACTOR shall provide suitable means by which different
grades of concrete are readily identifiable at the place of final deposit.
2.7.8 Actions before placement of concrete
2.7.8.1 Programme of works
At the beginning of every fortnight, the CONTRACTOR shall give his detailed
concreting programme for that fortnight to the Engineer. Such programmes, shall
specify all information such as the locations where concrete is to be poured., type/grade
Pag. 28
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
of concrete, volume of concrete to be poured, number and type of Vibrators proposed to

be used as well as proposed to keep as standby, number of skilled technicians and
supervisors proposed to be engaged, the proposed time and period of pouring etc.
2.7.8.2 Checking & approval
Before placement of concrete, the CONTRACTOR shall get all the form works,
reinforcements, inserts, conduits, openings, surface preparation etc., checked and
approved by the Engineer. To facilitate such checking, the CONTRACTOR shall
complete all his works according to the drawings and specifications well in advance
before placement of concrete at least 36 hours for all major/important/complicated
works and 24 hours for all minor/ordinary/simple works. The checks are purely in the
interest of the work and to draw the CONTRACTOR's attention to his contractual
obligations to execute the works according to the drawings/specification and do not
relieve the CONTRACTOR from his responsibility in getting the end results for the
quality & strength of concrete and for maintaining the shape, level & dimensions of the
finished concrete, as well as the inserts, openings, other features within the tolerance
limits.
2.7.9 Preparatory Works/Surface Preparation
2.7.9.1 For concrete directly on earth foundation
Earth foundation on which direct placement of concrete is specified, shall be

rammed and consolidated as directed by the Engineer such that it does not crumble and
get mixed with concrete during or after placement. If the foundation is quite wet, the
same shall be kept dry and then sufficiently consolidated, if necessary, a thin top layer
of the wet soil shall be removed and replaced by sand or other suitable materials as
directed by the Engineer without any extra cost to the OWNER. Care shall also be
taken that earth from the sides also does not get mixed with the concrete, during or after
placement, before it has sufficiently set and hardened.
The earth foundation, over which concrete is to be placed direct, shall not be kept
abandoned at the specified level and concrete shall be placed immediately following the
Pag. 29
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
final preparation of the formation otherwise suitable measures shall be taken, as directed
by the Engineer without any extra cost to the OWNER.
2.7.9.2 For construction joints
All such joints shall have continuous square bond grooves to produce a substantial
and watertight key. Where the placement of concrete has to be resumed on a surface
which has hardened, it shall be roughened, cleaned by wire or bristle brushing,
compressed air, water jet etc., and thoroughly wetted.
For vertical construction joints neat cement slurry shall be applied on the surface
immediate before the placement of concrete. For horizontal joints the surface shall be
covered with a layer of freshly mixed mortar about 10 to 15 mm thick composed of
cement and sand in the same proportion as the cement and sand in the concrete mix and
applied immediately before placing of the concrete. On this surface (i.e. on the surface
of joints) a layer of concrete not exceeding 150 mm in thickness shall first be placed
and shall be well rammed against old work, particular attention being paid to corners
and close spots. To ensure water tightness, care shall be taken to punn concrete properly
against the old surface.
a) On vertical surfaces of masonry
When the concrete is placed on the vertical surface of masonry (as in the case of
thin concrete fins projected from the vertical masonry surface), a groove of dimension as
directed by the Engineer shall be cut in the masonry to ensure a proper bond and the
surface shall be cleaned thoroughly. Before the placement of concrete, the surface shall
be kept moist by spraying water at least for the period of 2 hours and a thick coat of
cement slurry shall be applied immediately before the placement of concrete.
b) Over walls
Building paper over average 12mm thick cement sand bearing plaster of 1:4 mix
with neat cement finish shall be provided at the bearings of slabs over walls as directed
by the Engineer.
Pag. 30
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.9.3 Inside the formwork (cleaning, surface preparation etc.)
The interior of the form works, where the concrete is to be placed, shall be
thoroughly washed by high pressure water jet or air jet to completely clean the entire
volume from all sort of dirt, grease/oil, foreign and deleterious materials etc. The
reinforcement shall be completely clean and free from all sorts of dirt, grease/oil, rust,
foreign/deleterious materials etc., Before placement of concrete, the form works coming
in contact with concrete, shall be coated with form oil or raw linseed oil material or
provided with any approved material to prevent adhesion of concrete to the form work,
but utmost care shall be taken so that such oily material do not come in contact with the
reinforcement.
2.7.10 Placing and Compaction of Concrete
The concrete shall be placed and compacted before setting commences & should
not be subsequently disturbed. No water shall be mixed with the concrete after it has left
the mixer. Method of placing should be such as to preclude segregation. Approved
mechanical vibrator shall be used for compacting concrete, and concrete shall not be
over vibrated or under vibrated. No concrete shall be placed until the place of deposit
has been thoroughly inspected and approved by the Engineer. All inserts and
embedments properly secured in position and checked and forms properly oiled. No
concrete shall be placed in the absence of the Engineer.Concrete shall be placed on
clean bed having the designed level. The bed shall be cleaned of all debris and other
objectionable materials. Seepage water, if any, shall be controlled or diverted.
Concreting shall not be carried on during rains unless all precautions have been
taken by the CONTRACTOR and necessary permission has been given by the Engineer.
Suitable measures shall be taken to control the temperature of concrete.
Where plums are permitted in massive concrete, they shall be washed and
carefully placed. No stone shall be closer than 30 cm to an exposed face, nor nearer than
15 cm to an adjacent stone.
Pag. 31
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Concrete shall not be dropped from a height of more than 2m except through a
chute, the design and type of which shall be subject to approval of the Engineer. The
concrete shall be placed, spread and compacted by approved mechanical vibrator.
Vibrators shall not be used for pushing concrete to adjoining areas. For members
involving vertical placing of concrete (e.g. columns, walls etc.,) each lift shall be
deposited in horizontal layer extending the full width between shuttering and of such
depth that each layer can be easily and effectively vibrated and incorporated with the
layer below by means of compaction. For member involving horizontal placing of
concrete (e.g. slabs, beams etc.,) the concrete shall be placed along the line of starting
point in such quantities as will allow members to be cast to their full depth along the full
width between side shuttering and then gradually brought towards the finishing point
along its entire front parallel to the starting line. Vibration and surface finish shall
follow behind the placement as closely as possible. Utmost care shall be taken to avoid
the displacement of reinforcements/embedded parts or movement of formwork or
damage to faces of the formwork or transmission of any harmful vibration/shocks to the
concrete, which has not yet hardened sufficiently.
All members shall be concreted at such a rate that no cold joint is formed and
fresh concrete is placed always against green concrete, which is still plastic and
workable. Should any unforeseen occurrence results in a stoppage of concreting for one
hour or such other time as might allow the concrete, already placed, to begin to set
before the next batches can be placed, the CONTRACTOR shall make at his own cost,
suitable tongue and groove construction joint, as approved by the Engineer. Any
additional reinforcement required as directed by the Engineer shall also be provided by
the CONTRACTOR at his own cost. Before placement of new batches of concrete over
that construction joint, the surface preparation according to this specification, stipulated
earlier, shall be done by the CONTRACTOR .The concrete shall be worked well up
against whatever surface it adjoins and compacted to such a degree that it reaches its
maximum density as a homogeneous mass, free from air and water holes and penetrates
to all corners of moulds and shuttering and completely surround the reinforcement. All
Pag. 32
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
measures shall be taken to make the shape, size, and location of the finished concrete
including its embedments, holes, openings etc., well within the accepted tolerance limit.
2.7.11 Construction Joints & Cold Joints
2.7.11.1 Construction joints
Normally, the construction joints including crank inducing joints shall be

constructed as per locations and details indicated on the drawings. Where the location of
the joint is not specified in the drawings, it shall be in accordance with the following
guide lines :
(a) In Columns
 In case of Projection from basement slab 300 mm from the top of base slab
or 75 mm from the top of the haunches whichever is higher.
 In framing of beam at different elevation, 75 mm below the lowest soffit of

the beam and in case of projection from beams and slabs 75 mm from the
top surface of the beam/slab or at the top surface of beam/Slab whichever
facilitates formwork.
 For columns under flat slabs, 75 mm below the lowest soffit of the slab.
(b) In walls (horizontal construction joints)
 Walls projecting from base slab 300 mm from top of base slab.
 Walls supporting the suspended slab 75 mm from the lowest soffit of the
slab.
Note: In the case of water retaining structures and structures under the
influence of ground water, approved water bars of suitable size shall be provided
to make the joint completely water tight.
(c) In beams
Pag. 33
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Beams shall be cast, as a rule, without a joint. But if provision of a joint is

unavoidable, the joint for simply supported beam shall be vertical and at the middle of
the span ; in continuous beam, the same shall be at the point of minimum shear force.
(d) In suspended slabs
 In slab of small span, there shall be no construction joints.
 In slabs of large span and continuous slabs, construction joint, if allowed

by the Engineer shall be vertical at the middle of span and at the right
angles to the principal reinforcement.
(e) In walls (Vertical construction joint)
As a rule, walls shall be cast monolithically without any vertical construction

joint, unless specified in the drawing. However, for a long wall, the Engineer may allow
vertical construction joint and the same shall be at the place of minimum shear force. In
water retaining structures and in structures under the influence of ground water
approved water bars of suitable size shall be provided to make the joints completely
water tight.
(f) In slabs resting on ground
 For Plain concrete: Concreting shall be done in alternate panels not

/exceeding 10 sq.m in area. The largest panel dimension shall be 5 m.
 For nominally reinforced slab: The area of pour shall not exceed 40 sq.m
and the maximum panel dimension shall not exceed 8m.
 For the basement slabs which act as structural member: There shall be no
construction joint.
 In ribbed beam
The beams shall be cast monolithically with the slab in one continuous operation.
In all construction joints the reinforcements shall pass through as per drawings and
the same shall not be disturbed in any way. The vertical construction joints shall be
Pag. 34
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
provided by insertion of board keeping provision for passage of reinforcement/

fixtures/embedments. All construction joints shall be made to form a tongue and groove
joint.
2.7.11.2 Cold joint
An advancing face of a concrete pour, which could not be covered before expiry
of initial setting time for unexpected reasons, is called a cold joint. The CONTRACTOR
shall remain always vigilant to avoid cold joints. If however, a cold joint is formed due
to unavoidable reasons, the following procedures shall be adopted for treating it:
a) If the concrete is so green that it can be removed manually and if vibrators

can penetrate the surface without much effort, fresh concrete can be placed
directly over the old surface and the fresh concrete along with the old
concrete shall be vibrated systematically and thoroughly.
b) In case the concrete has hardened a bit more than (a), but can still be easily
removed by a light hand pick, the surface shall be raked thoroughly and the
loose concrete removed completely without disturbing the rest of the
concrete in depth. Then a rich mortar layer of 12 mm thickness, shall be
placed on the cold joint,and then the fresh concrete shall placed on the
mortar layer and vibrated thoroughly, penetrating deep in to the layer of
concrete.
c) In case the concrete at the joint has become so stiff that it cannot be
remoulded and mortar or slurry does not rise inspite of extensive vibration, a
tongue and groove joint shall be made by removing some of the older
concrete and the joint shall be left to harden at least for 12-24 hours. It will
then be treated as regular construction joint and the surface preparation of
the same, before placement of concrete, shall be as described in the
appropriate clauses of these specifications.
Pag. 35
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.12 Requirements for Concreting in Special cases
2.7.12.1 Concreting in deep lifts
Placing of concrete in lifts exceeding 2 M in columns and walls is in the category

of deep lifts. Before commencement of work, the CONTRACTOR shall submit for the
approval of the Engineer, the details of the methods he proposes to adopt for concreting.
The placement of concrete shall preferably be by tremie, chute or any other approved
method. In structures of heavy/complicated reinforcement or in complicated form
works, the CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient number of windows in the form
works as directed by the Engineer to check the placement and compaction of concrete in
different stages. Such windows shall be closed as soon as the concreting reaches the
bottom level of the same.
2.7.12.2 Concreting under water
When it is necessary to deposit concrete under water, the special requirements,

over and above those of this specification shall be in accordance with relevant British
Codes.
2.7.12.3Cold weather concreting
When conditions are such that the ambient temperature may be expected to be 4.5
degree C or below during the placing and curing period, the work shall conform to
2.7.12.4 Hot weather concreting
When concreting in very hot weather the CONTRACTOR shall take all
precautions as stipulated in relevant British Codes and stagger the work to cooler parts
of the day to ensure that the temperature of wet concrete used, specially in massive
structure, does not exceed 38 degree ‘C'. Positive temperature control by methods like
pre-cooling, post cooling or cooling of concrete by circulating cold water through small
embedded pipe lines inside concrete, if required, shall be specified and shall be
undertaken.
Pag. 36
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.12.5 Concreting in large pours (mass concrete)
The aim of controlling the concreting in large pours is to reduce cracking caused
by shrinkage due to heat of hydration. The CONTRACTOR shall submit detailed
proposal to the Engineer for approval about the method of pouring and the measures to
reduce heat of hydration, which he proposes to adopt. The maximum height of lifts will
depend on the type of cement used. The use of cement having low heat of hydration,
could allow greater lifts.
The CONTRACTOR shall provide all the necessary arrangements like pre-cooling
of aggregates, cooling of fresh concreting by passing cold water through pipes placed
inside the concrete or such other measure least 48 hours before the placement of
concrete and also provide the facility for recording of temperature at least 24 hours
prior to placement of concrete.
The minimum interval between concreting of successive lifts, separated by

horizontal construction joint shall be six days or as directed by the Engineer. The
minimum interval between the concreting of adjacent pours separated by vertical
construction joints shall be three (3) days, or as directed by the Engineer.
2.7.13 Finishes to Exposed Surfaces of Concrete
This shall include, the provision of normal finishes in both formed & unformed
surfaces as and where directed by the Engineer. Some common finishes are indicated
below:
2.7.13.1 Surface which do not require plastering
Surface in contact with casings shall be brought to a fair and even surface by
working the concrete smooth against casings with a steel trowel while it is being
deposited and also by working over the surface with a trowel immediately after the
removal of the casings or centrings, removing any irregularities and stopping air holes,
etc. Use of mortar plaster is not permissible for correcting levels, removing unevenness
etc. However, if, in the opinion of the Engineer, such plastering is unavoidable then the
Pag. 37
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
thickness of plaster shall in no case exceeds 5 mm and the plastering shall be in cement
and sand mortar.(1:3).
2.7.13.2 Exposed surfaces which need plastering
Surfaces of beams/columns flushing with the block work or other structures where
intended to plaster, shall be hacked adequately as soon as the shuttering is stripped off
so that proper bond with the plaster can develop.
2.7.13.3 Surface for non-integral finish
Where a non-integral finish such as floor finish is specified or required, the

surface of the concrete shall be struck off at the specified levels and finished rough.
2.7.13.4 For monolithic finish
Where no more finishing course is to be applied as in the case of basement floor,

industrial flooring or the screed concrete flooring etc, the concrete shall be completed
and struck off at the specified levels and sloped with a screed, board and then floated
with a wooden float. Steel trowelling is then started after the concrete has hardened
enough to prevent the excess of fines and water to rise to the surface but not hard
enough to prevent proper finishing. Trowelling shall be such that the surface is flat,
smooth and neatly finished.
2.7.14 Curing of Concrete
2.7.14.1 General
The purpose of curing is to prevent loss of moisture from the concrete itself so that
the cement inside the concrete is sufficiently hydrated which of course is slow and
prolonged process. As soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently the curing shall be
started. To cure the concrete properly and sufficiently is also the sole responsibility of
the CONTRACTOR.
Pag. 38
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.14.2 Different methods of curing
Any one of the following methods may be used for curing as approved by the
Engineer:
a) Curing by direct water.
b) Curing by covering the concrete with absorbent material and kept damp.
c) Covering the concrete with an impervious sheet
d) Curing by providing protective membrane.
e) Curing by chemical coating.
2.7.14.2.1 Curing by direct water
This is done either by ponding or spraying water.
 Ponding
Ponding is widely used for curing slab and pavements. Earth bunds are formed
over the slabs and water is pumped or poured into them and the same is replenished at
interval to make up for the loss of evaporation. As this type of curing is one of the best
methods, 10 days of curing after final setting is sufficient.
 By spraying water
Curing is done by spraying water by suitable means at approved time, intervals.

While spraying, it shall be ensured that the complete area is covered. In order to avoid
cracking, cold water shall not be applied to massive members immediately after striking
the form work, while the concrete is still warm. Alternate wetting and over drying shall
be avoided. Curing by spraying water shall be continued at least for 18 days after final
setting.
2.7.14.2.2 Curing of concrete with absorbent material

kept damp
Pag. 39
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The entire concrete surface is covered either with hessian, burlap, sawdust, sand,
canvas or similar material and kept wet continuously for at least 12 days after final
setting.
2.7.14.2.3 Curing by covering concrete surface with

an impervious sheet
This is achieved by covering the entire concrete surface with water proof paper or
plastic sheets specially manufactured for this purpose. The waterproof papers are stuck
together by adhesive compound and the plastic sheets can be welded at site. Such type
of covering shall be kept at least for 24 days after the final setting. It is preferable to
have sheet as white in appearance since the white colour will reflect hot sunrays and
keep the concrete temperature at reasonable level.
2.7.14.2.4 Curing by providing protective membrane

by applying a curing compound
This is achieved by applying a membrane forming compound (curing compound)

over the concrete surface. Generally these are available in emulsion form, liquid. The
application of the curing compound should be started, immediately after stripping off
the shuttering in case of formed surface and after the surface has hardened in case of
unformed surface.
The curing compound membrane forming emulsion dry up within 3 to 4 hours

after application and forms a continuous coherent adhesive membrane over the concrete
surface. Such membrane serves as a physical barrier to prevent the loss of moisture from
the concrete itself. Membrane forming emulsions are generally colored black. or white
to improve visibility for ensuring uniform application. Black color shall never be used
for curing in very hot weather. In order to, prevent glare, a coloring pigment may be
added to white compounds.
 Black curing compounds are either Bituminous or Asphaltic

emulsions and shall be used to the surface, which are to be covered
Pag. 40
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
by back filling or on the floor, which is to be covered with tiles and

linoleum.
 White curing compound shall be used to the surfaces of tall

structures under exposure of hot sun where other method of curing
cannot be properly ensured.
2.7.14.2.5 Curing by chemical coating
For chemical curing sodium silicate or calcium chloride is used. The use of
calcium chloride shall not be done without the approval of the Engineer. Normally the
sodium silicate mixed with water is applied over concrete surface and when it dries up it
forms a thin varnish like film, which fills up the pores and surface voids and prevents
evaporation of water. This also acts like curing compound but only difference is that
curing compounds are available in ready mixed emulsion forms while sodium silicate is
to be mixed with water at site.
2.7.14.3 Limitation to use of different methods of curing
i. Curing by the processes as indicated in Cl 7.15.3 & 7.15.4 give very good results
normal warm climate for maturity of concrete.
ii. In cold weather, the process as indicated in Cl 7.15.4 gives very good result for
maturity of concrete.
iii. Where water cement ratio is less than 0.5 the methods indicated in Cl 7.15.3 &
7.15.4 shall not be used.
iv. In warm climate also, where the methods of curing as indicated cannot be
properly ensured, any suitable method of curing as indicated in 7.15.5 or as
approved/directed by the Engineer shall be adopted.
Pag. 41
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.15 Testing of Concrete
2.7.15.1 General
The CONTRACTOR shall carry out, entirely at his own cost, all sampling and
testing in accordance with the relevant British Codes and as supplemented herein. The
CONTRACTOR shall get all tests done in approved Laboratory and submit to the
Engineer, the test result in triplicate within 3 days after completion of the test.
2.7.15.2 Consistency test (tests of fresh concrete)
At the place of deposition/pouring of the concrete, to control the consistency,

slump tests and/or compacting factor tests shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR in
accordance with relevant British Codes as directed by the Engineer.
The results of the slump tests/compacting factor tests shall be recorded in a

register for reference duly signed by both the CONTRACTOR and the Engineer. That
register shall be considered as the property of the OWNER and shall be kept by the
CONTRACTOR at site in safe custody.
The results of the slump tests/compacting factor tests shall tally, within accepted
variation of plus or minus 12% with the results in the respective design mix, in case of
mix design concrete and with the values indicated in IS: 456 in case of nominal mix
concrete.
For any particular batch of concrete, if the results do not conform to the
requirements as specified or do not conform to any requirement of this specification, the
Engineer has the right to reject that batch and the CONTRACTOR shall remove the
same immediately from the site, at no cost to the OWNER.
2.7.15.3 Strength test of concrete
While placing concrete, the CONTRACTOR shall make 6 nos. of 15 cm test cubes
from particular batches of concrete as desired by the Engineer. The frequency of taking
test cubes shall be according to relevant British Codes or as directed by the Engineer.
Pag. 42
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The cubes shall be prepared, cured and tested according to relevant British Codes.
Out of 6 nos. Of test cubes 3 shall be tested for compressive strength at 7 days after
casting and the remaining 3 at 28 days after casting.
A register shall be maintained at site by the CONTRACTOR with the following

details entered and signed both the CONTRACTOR and the Engineer. That register
shall be considered as the property of the OWNER.
 Reference to the specific structural member
 Mark on cubes
 The grade of concrete
 The mix of concrete
 Date and time of casting
 Crushing strength at 7 days
 Any other information directed by the Engineer.
2.7.15.4 Acceptance criteria for test cubes
The acceptance criteria of concrete on strength requirement shall be in accordance

with the stipulations under relevant British Codes.
2.7.15.5 Non-destructive tests on hardened concrete
If there is doubt about the strength or quality of a particular work or the test results
do not comply with the acceptance criteria as stipulated under relevant British Codes,
non-destructive tests on hardened concrete like core test and/or load tests or other type
of non destructive tests like ultrasonic impulse test etc. shall be carried out, as may be
directed by the Engineer, by the CONTRACTOR at entirely his cost. The core tests and
load tests shall comply with the requirements of relevant British Codes. In case of other
types of special tests like ultrasonic impulse test etc., the relevant stipulation of clauses
of relevant British Codes shall be applicable.
2.7.15.6 Concrete below specified strength
In case of failure of test cubes to meet the specified requirements the Engineer
may take one of the following actions:-
Pag. 43
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1) Instruct the CONTRACTOR to carryout additional test and/or works to

ensure the soundness of the structure at CONTRACTOR's expense.
2) Reject the work and instruct that section of the works to which the failed
cubes relate shall be cut out and replaced at CONTRACTOR's expense and the
resultant structures affected due to such rejection shall be made good at
CONTRACTOR's expense.
3) Modification/remedial measures if approved by the engineer to be carried

out at CONTRACTOR's expense.
4) Accept the work with reduction in the rate in appropriate item subject to
the provisions of IS 456 provided it is technically acceptable. The reduction in
the rate shall be as given below :-
i. When test strength of the sample is above 90% of the characteristic

strength, payment shall be made 10% less than the contract rate.
ii. When test strength of the sample is between 80-90% of the characteristic
strength, payment shall be made 25% below than the contract rate.
2.7.15.7 Concrete failed in non-destruction tests
In case the test results of the core tests or load tests in a particular work do not
comply with the requirements of clauses for load tests of relevant British Codes the
whole or part of the work concerned shall be dismantled and replaced by the
CONTRACTOR as may be directed by the Engineer at no extra cost to the OWNER and
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. No payment for the dismantled concrete including
relevant formwork, reinforcement, embedded fixtures etc. shall be made. In the course
of dismantling if any damage occurs to the adjacent structure or embedded item, the
same shall be made good, free of charge by the CONTRACTOR, to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
Pag. 44
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.16 Steel Reinforcement
2.7.16.1 Material
The specifications of materials shall be as per relevant British Codes.
2.7.16.2 Storage
Steel reinforcement shall be stored in such a manner that they are not in direct
contact with ground. Bars of different classifications and sizes shall be stored separately.
In cases of long storage or in coastal areas, reinforcement shall be stacked above ground
level by at least 15 cm, and a coat of cement wash shall be given to prevent scaling and
rusting at no extra cost of the OWNER.
2.7.16.3 Bending and placing
Bending and placing of bars shall be in conformity with relevant British Codes.
2.7.16.4 Lapping / Welding of Reinforcement
Normally the lapping of reinforcement bars shall be by mechanical means

satisfying the requirements of relevant British Codes. However, in case of congestion of
reinforcement the welding of reinforcement may be adopted with approval of Engineer.
The following procedure shall be adopted in case of welding of reinforcement.
Welding of mild steel reinforcement bars conforming to relevant British Codes

and shall be done in accordance with relevant British Codes with additional precaution
that for lap welded joints the throat thickness of weld beads shall be at least 3mm or 0.6
times the nominal size of weld (which is the radius of bar) whichever is more. Welding
of cold worked high strength deformed bars conforming to relevant British Codes shall
be done using electric arc welding process using low hydrogen electrodes (Ferro Weld- I
or Ferro Weld-11 or equivalent). Oxy-acetylene welding shall not be used.
Butt welding of bars upto 32 mm diameter for vertical splices shall be done either
by single bevel groove weld or double bevel groove weld, with bevel angle 45 degree.
But welding of bars upto 32 mm diameter for horizontal splices shall be done either by
single Vee-groove weld or double Vee-groove weld with chamfered angle of 45 degree
Pag. 45
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
to 60 degree. The diameter of welded joint shall be 1.2 times the diameter of bar. Edge
preparation for butt welding shall be done by shearing, machining and grinding. Oxy-
acetylene flame shall not be used for cutting. Chamfered faces shall be smooth finished
by hand file if required.
Lap welding of bars upto 20 mm diameter shall have a minimum bead length of 12
times the diameter of bar or 200 mm whichever is more arranged on one or both sides.
The throat thickness of weld beads shall be 5 mm or 0.75 times the nominal size of weld
(which is the radius of bar) whichever is more.In case of unsymmetrical lap weld with
weld bead on one side only, the maximum length of each weld bead shall be 6 times the
diameter of bar or 100 mm (whichever is more), separated by an equal length in between
weld beads. Splice bars used in symmetrical weld joint shall have same diameter as the
parent bars. Lap joint with single splice bars shall have weld beads on both sides. Lap
welding of bars above 20 mm shall be done using splice plate or splice angle. Thickness
of splice plate shall not be less than 0.65 times the diameter of bar and width shall not be
less than twice the diameter of bar. The size of splice angle shall be such that its area of
cross section is at least 1.62 times the area of bar being spliced.
More than one third of the bars shall not be welded at any one section and welded
joints shall be staggered at a distance of 50 times the diameter of bars. Welding shall not
be done at bends or curved parts of bars and it shall be located at least at a distance of 50
times the diameter of bar from bends.
2.7.16.5Tests
Test pieces of welded bars shall be selected and tested in accordance with the
provisions of relevant British Codes. The number of tests will be as laid down in
relevant British Codes or such larger number as the Engineer may decide having regard
to the circumstances.
2.7.16.6Cleaning
All steel for reinforcement shall be free from loose scales, rust coatings, oil,
grease, paint or other harmful matters immediately before placing the concrete. To
Pag. 46
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
ensure this, reinforcements with coatings shall be cleaned thoroughly before

bending/placement of the same.
2.7.16.7 Placing in position
All reinforcements shall be accurately fixed and maintained in positions as shown

on the drawings and by adequate means like mild steel chairs and/or concrete spacer
blocks as required. Bars intended to be in contact at crossing points, shall be securely
tied together at all such points by 20G annealed soft steel wire or by tack welding in
case of bars larger than 25 mm dia, as may be directed by the Engineer. Binders shall
tightly embrace the bars with which they are intended to be in contact and shall be
securely held. The vertical distance between successive layer bars shall be maintained
by provision of mild steel spacer bars. They should be spaced such that the main bars do
not sag perceptibly between adjacent spacers. The binding wire shall be single strand for
16G, two strands for 18G and three strands for 20G . The binding wires shall be soft
annealed black wire.
2.7.16.8 Clear cover
Clear cover shall be as specified in the drawings. If nothing is specified in the

drawing the clear cover shall be in accordance with the relevant clause of relevant
British Codes.
2.7.16.9 Light structural work and embedded metallic parts,

conduits, Fabrication of metallic parts & light structural.
Fabrication of all structural steel work shall be done in accordance with relevant
British Codes. Workmanship shall match to the best practice in modern structural shops.
Greatest accuracy shall be observed in the manufacture of every part and all identical
parts shall be strictly interchangeable. Steel work shall be shop fitted and shop
assembled as far as practicable to minimize site work and to meet transport restrictions.
All materials shall be straight and if necessary before being worked shall be straightened
of flattened by pressure and shall be free from twists. Shearing or flame cutting may be
used and the resulting edges shall be clean and straight. Flame cut edges shall be
Pag. 47
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
planed/cleaned by chipping or grinding. Sheared members shall be free from distortion

at sheared edges. Welding and welded work shall conform to relevant British Codes.
Mild steel electrodes conforming to relevant British Codes shall be-used.
2.7.16.10 Transportation and Storages
All pieces shall be properly identified and bundled for transportation to work site.
Care shall be exercised in the delivery, handling and storage of material to ensure that
material is not damaged in any manner. Materials shall be kept free of dirt, grease and
foreign matter and shall be stored properly on skids or any other suitable supports to
avoid contact with ground, damage due to twisting, bending etc.
2.7.16.11 Erection of light structural work
Erection of light structural work shall be carried out in accordance with the
provisions of relevant British Codes. No component which is bend or twisted shall be
put in place until the defects are corrected. Components seriously damaged during
handling shall be replaced. No riveting, permanent bolting or welding shall be done until
proper alignment has been completed. Whenever field welding is to be done it shall be
in accordance with the requirements of shop fabrication. Shop paints shall be removed
before field welding for a distance of at least 50 mm on either side of the joints.
2.7.16.12 Erection of embedded metallic parts, inserts,

conduits
Bolts and inserts shall be securely fixed imposition as shown in the drawings,
before commencement of concreting. Bolts shall be checked for accuracy in alignment
on both the axes. Limits of tolerance in alignment and level shall be as shown in the
drawing or described elsewhere in these specifications. Where bolts are housed in
sleeves, special care shall be taken after concreting is over and has partly set to ensure
that the bolts move within the sleeves. The annular space of the sleeve shall be plugged
suitable stoppers to prevent the ingress of grout, dust, rubbish or other foreign material
into it, both during and after concreting. Opened conduits shall be plugged similarly.
Where channels, irregular profiles or other similar inserts are required to be placed in
Pag. 48
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
concrete, special care shall be taken to keep the grooves of such profiles free from the
ingress of concrete, slurry etc., by suitable packing material, if necessary.
All threads for bolts and inserts shall be greased at intervals and kept covered to
prevent damage.
Necessary templates, jigs, fixtures, supports shall be used as may be specified or

required or directed by the Engineer . Templates shall invariably be supported such that
the same is not disturbed due to vibration ,movement of labourers ,materials ,shuttering
works ,reinforcement etc while concreting. CONTRACTOR will have to suitably bend
,cut or otherwise adjust the reinforcement in concrete at location of inserts as directed by
Engineer.
The CONTRACTOR shall ensure proper protection of all bolts ,Inserts Etc from
weather by greasing or other approved means such as applying white lead putty and
wrapping them with gunny bags or canvas or by other means as directed by Engineer to
avoid damage due to movement of labourers, materials equipment etc. Exposed surfaces
of embedded materials shall be painted with one coat of anticorrosive paint or
bituminous paint. If welding is to be done subsequently on the exposed surfaces of the
embedded parts, the painting for a length of 50mm beyond each side of the weld line
shall be cleaned off.
2.7.17 Shuttering
2.7.17.1 General
All shuttering, formwork, supports and staging shall be designed by the

CONTRACTOR and be subject to approval by the Engineer. The CONTRACTOR shall
submit drawings and calculations to the Engineer for scrutiny when called upon to do
so. The shuttering shall be designed for a live load of 400 Kg/m2 in addition to the
weight of the green concrete, or such other load as the Engineer may specify. The
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the correctness and strength of the formwork
including its supports and centering and approval by the Engineer will not relieve him of
responsibilities.
Pag. 49
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.17.2 Material
The staging and supports may be of round or sawn timber or tubular or other
shapes in steel. Round timber shall preferably extend over the full height in one piece.
These shall be securely jointed or otherwise fastened and spaced at suitable intervals as
the design may warrant and shall be suitably braced at regular intervals horizontally and
diagonally.
The form work shall be of steel plate on steel frame, wooden boards with steel
sheet lining, or plywood or seasoned timber board. Where ornamental and curved
surfaces are required the material shall be very good seasoned timber or plywood, which
can be shaped correctly.
2.7.17.3 Fixing
The shuttering shall conform to the shapes, lines, levels and dimensions shown in
the drawing. It shall be fixed in perfect alignment and securely braced so as to be able to
withstand, without appreciable displacement, deflection or movement of any kind, the
weight of all construction, movement of persons and plant. It shall be so constructed as
to remain rigid during the placing and compacting of concrete without shifting or
yielding and shall be sufficiently water tight to prevent loss of slurry from the concrete.
All props shall be supported on sole plates and double wedges. At the time of
removing props these wedges shall be gently eased and not knocked out. The formwork
shall be so designed that the sides are independent of the soffits and the side forms can
be removed easily without any damage or shock to the concrete.
2.7.17.4Wrought shuttering
Wrought shuttering shall be such as to produce a first class fair face on the
concrete free from board marks or any other disfigurements. This shall be used for
exposed surfaces where specified or directed by the Engineer. It may be made of heavy
quality plywood or steel sheets having smooth, plain surface.
Pag. 50
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The joints in shuttering shall be arranged in a regular pattern approved by the

Engineer. Wrought shuttering shall be aligned within a tolerance of 3mm.
2.7.17.5 Rough shuttering
Rough shuttering shall be used for all surface of concrete walls, footings etc.,
which are not exposed in the finished work or which are to receive plaster and as
directed by the Engineer. It may be made of timber, ordinary plywood or steel sheets.
2.7.17.6 Slip form shuttering
Slip forms, where used, shall provide a smooth, even surface true to dimensions
and alignment. The concrete surface produced by such shuttering shall be free from
lines, bulges and unseemly offsets. Slip forms shall have prior approval of the Engineer
and the CONTRACTOR shall submit complete information required in this regard.
2.7.17.7 Special provision
Wherever concreting of narrow member is required to be carried out within

shutters of considerable depth, temporary openings in the sides of the shutters shall if so
directed by the Engineer, be provided to facilitate cleaning, pouring and consolidation of
concrete.
In liquid retaining structures and structures below ground water level, through
bolts for the purpose of securing and aligning the form work shall not be used. Forms
shall be given an upward camber, if so desired by the Engineer, to ensure that long
beams do not have any sag. The camber may be 1 in 250 or as the Engineer may direct.
The joints in form work shall be sealed by adhesive tapes or by other means, to prevent
any leakage of slurry or mortar if so directed by the engineer.
2.7.17.8 Preparation for concreting
Before any concreting is commenced the shuttering shall be carefully examined

for dimensional accuracy and safety of construction. The space to be occupied by
concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned out to remove rubbish, debris, shavings and saw
dust. The surface in contact with concrete shall be coated with an approved substance
Pag. 51
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
such as mould oil or other non-staining mineral oil to prevent adhesion. Where
necessary the surface shall be wetted to prevent absorption of moisture from concrete.
Care shall be taken to avoid the reinforcements coming in contact with shutter oil.
2.7.17.9 Removing
Removal of forms shall never be started until the concrete has thoroughly set and
aged to attain sufficient strength to carry twice its own weight plus the live load that is
likely to come over it during construction. Removal of forms shall not entail chipping or
disfiguring of the concrete surface. Shuttering shall be removed without shock or
vibration and shall be eased off carefully in order to allow the structure to take up its
load gradually.
Under normal circumstances (generally where temperatures are above 21 degree

‘C'), and where ordinary portland cement is used shuttering may be struck after the
expiry of the following periods :
i. Walls, columns & vertical faces: 24 to 48 hours as may be directed

by the Engineer.
ii. Bottom of slab up to 4.5 m span: 7 days
iii. Bottom of slab above 4.5 m span and bottom of beam and arch, rise up to 6 m
span: 14 days
iv. Bottom of beam and arch rise over 6 m span: 21 days
These periods may be increased at the discretion of the Engineer. Special care
shall be taken while striking the shuttering of cantilevered slabs and beams, portal
frames etc. Before removing the form work, the CONTRACTOR must notify the
Engineer to enable him to inspect the condition of the finished concrete immediately
after the removal of the form works.
Any damage resulting from faulty preparation premature or careless removal of

shuttering shall be made good by the CONTRACTOR at his own expense.
Pag. 52
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.17.11 Irrecoverable shuttering
In cases where the shuttering cannot be removed without damaging the structure
itself or where removal of shuttering is rendered impossible due to the nature of
construction or where the Engineer may so instruct, such shuttering shall be classified as
irrecoverable shuttering. However, such abandoning of shuttering will be permitted
only in situations where it will not remain exposed or otherwise cause damage of any
kind.
2.7.17.12 Metal Forms
Where permanently left-in-place metal forms or deck are shown in drawings or

otherwise ordered to be provided by the Engineer, they shall satisfy the requirements
with regard to load carrying capacity. The metal forms shall be obtained from a reputed
manufacturer whose performance guarantee shall be obtained and submitted to the
Engineer. Designs and drawings giving full details shall be submitted to the Engineer in
advance for approval.
2.7.18 Damp Proof Course Concrete
Thickness: It shall be as specified in the drawings .
2.7.18.1 Mix
The grade of mix shall be as specified in the drawing. If nothing is specified, the
mix shall be as per relevant British Codes.
Approved water proofing admixture shall be mixed with cement as per

manufacturer's specifications. The water cement ratio shall be as low as possible to
increase the impermeability of concrete and in no case more than 0.5.
2.7.18.2 Preparation of base surface
The base surface shall be well roughened by chipping and brushing with steel
brush and shall be cleaned of all dirt, dust, grease, oil and all other foreign & deleterious
materials. Then the surface shall be well moistened with water.
Pag. 53
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.18.3 Placing and compaction
Just prior to placement of D.P.C. Concrete, a thick coat of cement slurry shall be
applied on the base surface. The placement shall be as specified for the concrete in
beams. The concrete shall be well compacted to make it dense.
2.7.18.4 Finishing
When the concrete has set enough but remains still green, the top surface shall be
marked in regular pattern by steel trowel so as to have proper bond with the future work.
2.7.18.5 Curing
The D.P. course shall be kept continuously moist at least 7 days.
2.7.19 Grout
2.7.19.1 Scope
The scope covers the grouting under base plates, grouting between the joints of
precast concrete, grouting the pockets/holes/opening etc.
2.7.19.2 Materials
Grouting under base plates of equipments/structures shall be of Non shrink type of

approved make and strength one grade higher that the base concrete.
2.7.19.3 Workmanship
The surface of the concrete over which grouting is to be applied shall be

thoroughly prepared to provide a clean rough surface. If necessary, chipping shall be
carried out on such surface to make it completely rough. Then the surface shall be
wetted. Bolt pockets shall be cleaned immediately before the base plate is placed in
position. Before grouting the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with compressed air/
water jet.
Before placement of grout, the surfaces (except in the case of bolt holes) shall be
wetted with cement slurry. In case of bolt holes/pockets water from such pockets shall
be thoroughly removed by some suitable means and no cement slurry shall be applied.
Pag. 54
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Hand mixing is not permitted and the grout shall always be machine mixed. If
however in some special cases where the quantity of grout is so small that it cannot be
machine mixed, hand mixing may be allowed but the same shall be done under the strict
supervision of an experienced supervisor of the CONTRACTOR.
The grout shall be placed within 30 minutes of being mixed. The grout shall be
poured And then worked into position by suitable means until the space is completely
filled. The CONTRACTOR shall take all possible measures during grouting so that the
grout fills the space completely and thoroughly. Where the gap is very small or
unapproachable for the placement of concrete, the CONTRACTOR shall grout by
pressure grouting and in that case the mix may be of cement sand mortar of the
appropriate grade but in any case the water cement ratio shall be as low as possible.
Neither "Dry" grout (having slump 6mm or less) nor expanding wet grout shall be
grouted with any type of vibrating machine.
2.7.19.4 Curing
After 5-6 hours of grouting, the same shall be covered with wet gunny bags and
the surface shall be kept continuously moist at least for 10 days.
2.7.20 Concreting in Water Retaining Structures
2.7.20.1 General requirements
All work intended to exclude water or by which water is to be conveyed or retained,

shall be made watertight. The Contractor shall examine the Contract Documents to satisfy
himself that he can achieve watertightness, with the materials and labour enumerated therein.
Should he consider them insufficient to achieve watertightness, then he shall include in his
rates for such additional materials and labour as he considers necessary. All leaks which may
appear on test or may develop during the Defects Liability Period through whatever cause
arising, shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
The basic specifications as regards 'mix' design, placing, compacting, curing etc.
shall conform to the requirements as specified hereinbefore in this chapter. Over and
Pag. 55
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
above the materials and workmanship shall conform to the stipulations of relevant
British Codes to make dense and impervious concrete. As specified herein before all the
construction joints shall be provided with approved water bars. The expansion and
construction joints, if any, shall be provided with the requirements as specified in the
drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
2.7.20.2 Building in Pipes
As far as possible all pipework, whether supplied by the Employer or the Contractor,
which passes through any part of a concrete water retaining structure, shall be built-in as
concreting proceeds, the shuttering being trimmed around the pipe. Where however, through
non-availability of the pipework or because of the need to set or assemble the pipework
accurately relative to other pipes or equipment, and subject to the consent of the Engineer, the
Contractor may box out for the pipework.
The cost of this work shall be included in the rates for fixing such pipes and also for the
provision and fixing of waterbars around the whole of the boxed-out area as directed by the
Engineer. No reinforcement bars passing through the area of the boxing out shall be cut
unless specifically provided for on the Drawings. Pipes shall not be welded to reinforcement.
2.7.20.3 Forced Ventilation
The Contractor shall provide, operate and maintain such fans or other devices necessary
to force a steady flow of air through covered tanks and reservoirs after the roofs have been
completed so that the joints may be thoroughly dried before priming and all fumes, arising
from the making of the joints, are removed from the tanks to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.7.20.4 Lighting
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at the Site a supply of electricity to provide
adequate lighting to enable work to be carried out and inspection made in tanks, reservoirs
and sumps which have been roofed over.
Pag. 56
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.20.5 Cleaning
On completion of the construction of all reservoirs, tanks, sumps and channels, but
before testing, the Contractor shall clear away from them all internal rubbish and shall brush
down first dry and then with water, all concrete surfaces. Sufficient water shall be used so
that all matter collected in the washout and drainage channels is carried to the outfalls without
silting the drains. The Contractor shall provide all necessary apparatus for cleaning purposes
and shall ensure that the joint seals are not damaged during cleaning operations.
2.7.20.6 Testing
All concrete structures designed to retain water or other liquids shall be tested by the
Contractor after completion for watertightness. Such testing shall not begin until the structure
has been fully completed and all concrete has reached its specified strength. The Contractor
shall make preparations to begin testing as soon as possible after each main structure has been
completed.
After cleaning to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the structure shall be filled, at an
approximately uniform rate of increase of water level of not more than 2m in 24 hours, to the
intended top water level. The water shall be allowed to stand in the structure for a period of 7
days after which time the level shall be recorded and further measurements made at intervals
of 24 hours for 7 days. The structure may be deemed to be watertight if the total drop in
surface level does not exceed 10 mm in 7 days, taking into account the losses due to
evaporation. As an aid to assessing the water losses by evaporation and recharge through
rainfall, the Contractor shall install an evaporation pan and a rain gauge of specification
acceptable to the local meteorologic authorities at the site of the structure to be tested. The
cost of these shall be included in the Contractor's rates. If the total loss is greater than 10 mm,
the Contractor shall at once investigate the cause, and shall determine the point or points of
leakage, the water level being lowered in stages as required. The level measurements shall be
carried out using a hook gauge. The Contractor shall carry out any further remedial work
necessary to stop such leakage in a manner directed by the Engineer. The structure shall
subsequently be recleaned and testing repeated. All investigation, remedial, recleaning and
retesting work shall be at the Contractor's expense.
Pag. 57
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
If the structure does not satisfy the conditions of the test, and the daily drop in water
level is decreasing, the period of test may be extended for a further 7 days and, if the specified
limit is then not exceeded, the structure may be considered as satisfactory. Where internal
division walls occur in the structure, each compartment shall be, individually, similarly tested.
The structures will not be accepted by the Employer until they have been ascertained to
be in a perfectly usable and watertight condition.
No claim for extra payment to the Contractor shall be allowed if for any reason the
Engineer is unable to allow filling or emptying to be carried out at the time requested by the
Contractor.
2.7.20.7 Disinfection
On completion of the test for watertightness, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the
interior of the reservoir or tank by hosing down the roof, walls, columns, baffle walls and
floor, as applicable, with clean, potable water from an approved source, and remove all debris,
soil, silt or other material.
After the reservoir or tank has been cleaned as described, the Contractor shall, when
instructed by the Engineer and under his direction, disinfect the reservoir or tank by
chlorination as described below.
The Contractor shall provide a suitable chlorine-based disinfectant generator (including

the provision of the raw material to produce the chlorine-based disinfectant), which shall be
capable of injecting the required concentration of chlorine solution at a steady rate into the
reservoir or tank.
The Contractor shall introduce at least 30 parts per million of free chlorine whilst filling
the reservoir or tank to a minimum depth of 100mm. The Contractor shall then spray all
surface areas to the underside of the roof, walls, columns and pipework with the heavily
chlorinated water by means of a stirrup pump or similar appliance. No pump which requires
petrol or fuel oil for its prime mover shall be used inside the reservoir or tank, but at the
Engineer's discretion an electrically driven pump may be used.
Pag. 58
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
On completion of the spraying to the Engineer's satisfaction, the heavily chlorinated

water shall be drained out of the reservoir or tank and each compartment shall be filled with
potable water, from an approved source, to a minimum depth of 200mm. This water shall
then be drained out and the reservoir or tank filled with potable water to overflow level.
Samples shall be taken as directed by the Engineer after the reservoir or tank has been
full for a period of at least two hours and shall be sent to a qualified bacteriologist for
analysis. If the results of the tests show that the water contains any presumptive or typical
coliform organisms in a 100 ml water sample then disinfection shall be repeated until the tests
show that all pollution has been eliminated. If it proves necessary to repeat the disinfection
procedure, the cost of water and bacteriological examination of water shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
On completion of disinfection the Contractor shall close off access to the reservoir or
tank to all personnel, and no further work shall be permitted in areas allowing direct access to
the interior of the reservoir. Should any unauthorised access occur, and if the Engineer rules
that contamination may have resulted, the Contractor shall carry out at his own expense such
tests, as the Engineer may require, to determine the extent of the contamination, and shall also
carry out and bear the cost of any additional disinfection measures required by the Engineer.
The safe disposal of the heavily chlorinated water shall be included in the rates for
disinfection.
2.7.20.8 Testing of Roofs
The roofs of reservoirs and tanks shall be watertight.
Prior to the addition of any roof screed the roof shall be tested for watertightness by
covering it with clean potable water to a minimum depth of 25mm for a period of 3 days.
Where this, in the opinion of the Engineer, is impractical because of roof falls or otherwise,
the roof shall be thoroughly wetted by continuous hosing for a period of six hours. On
completion of the wetting the roof shall be inspected and regarded as satisfactory if no leaks
or damp patches show in the soffit.
Pag. 59
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.21 Application of Live Load
The designated live load shall be allowed on any structure only after 28 days, after
proper curing is carried out, on the last concrete poured in structure.
2.8 SPECIAL CONCRETES & STRUCTURES
2.8.1 Precast Concrete
2.8.1.1 General
The following clauses shall be read in conjunction with the section relating to
concrete and reinforced concrete.
2.8.1.2 Precasting Yard
The precast units shall be cast on, or their shutters supported from a suitably
prepared casting yard or level, unyielding area/large enough to accommodate the largest
item of work intended to be cast at a time. The yard shall be prepared at a convenient
place sufficient material can be stored. Mixers can be installed and other facilities can be
made available.
2.8.1.3 Shutters
Forms must ensure correct geometric outline, dimensions and surface finish of the
members to be cast. They shall be designed such that they are strong and easy to
assemble and dismantle and convenient for cleaning and oiling. They shall be strongly
constructed, jointed and smooth to ensure true sharp arise and a perfect surface. The
form may be of wood, steel lined on wood or steel. Ordinary steel form may be of
welded channel frame with hinge mounted sides covered by 4 to 6 mm steel plate
lugs may be provided for lifting the forms by crane or trolley, or wheels may be
provided. The joints of the form should be such that it shall not permit any leakage of
cement slurry.
2.8.1.4 Workmanship
Workmanship shall conform to the clauses relating to concrete and reinforced

concrete.
Pag. 60
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
In the case of precast members having congested reinforcement at certain places a

suitable mix design shall be done in advance, with aggregate, the maximum size which
can pass through the gap between reinforcement at that place and this mix used at that
place only. Slump tests shall be done each day at the beginning of the work. At least one
set of cubes must be taken for all important items irrespective of quantity and time.
2.8.1.5 Vibrating
Extra care must be taken in vibrating the concrete. Only low or medium frequency
vibrator of small needle, which can pass through the gap between reinforcement, shall
be used. Where this cannot be used with ease, surface vibrators shall be used.
2.8.1.6 Casting tolerance
The casting tolerances, unless otherwise specified in the drawing, shall be as

follows. These tolerances shall not come in the way of correct, assembly, performance
and appearance of the structure. These permissible deviations for the units are
consistent with the variation in the position of the adjoining components in the structure.
The permissible deviations given below are a general guide and where closer values are
necessary, they can be specified by the Engineer. For irregular, curved or specially
shaped units, the necessary dimensions and permissible deviations shall be as
defined/specified on the drawings, or as specified by the Engineer. Particular attention is
drawn to the fact that tolerance can be cumulative.
2.8.1.7 Size
Permissible deviations shall be as specified below as plus or and minus value

related to the work size of the member length
Upto 3m plus or Minus 6mm
3m to 4.5m ---- do----- 9mm
4.5m to 6m ----do----- 12mm
Additional for every subsequent 6m ----do----- 6mm
Pag. 61
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Cross Section (each direction) Up to 500mm -----do----- 6mm
500mm to 700mm -----do----- 9mm
Additional for every subsequent 250mm -----do----- 3mm
Straightness or bow (deviation from intended line)
upto 3m -----do---- 6mm
3m to 6m -----do---- 9mm
6m to 12m -----do---- 12mm
Additional for every subsequent 6m -----do---- 6mm.
2.8.1.8 Squareness
When considering the squareness of a corner, the longer of the two adjacent sides
being checked should be taken as the base line. The shorter side should not vary in its
distance from a perpendicular so that the difference between the greatest and shortest
dimensions exceeds Length of shorter sides:
2.8.1.9 Length of shorter sides
Upto and including 1.2m ....... 6 mm
Over 1.2 m but less than 1.8m ....... 9 mm
1.8m and over ...... 12 mm
For the purpose of this requirement any error due to lack of straightness should be
ignored, squareness should be measured with respect to the straight lines which are
most nearly parallel with the features being checked. When the nominal angle is other
than 90 degree, the included angle between check lines should be varied accordingly.
2.8.1.10 Twist
Any corner should not be more than the deviation stated from the plane containing
the other three corners:
Upto 600mm wide and upto 6m in length ...... 6mm
Pag. 62
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Over 600mm wide and for any length ...... 12mm.
2.8.1.11 Flatness:
The maximum deviation from a 1.5m straight edge place in any position on a
nominally plane surface should not exceed 6mm.
2.8.1.12 Striking shutters
The method and interval after casting of units, of striking the side shutters shall be
subject to approval of the Engineer. The use of crowbars and sledgehammers is not
permitted. In the event of any damage resulting from premature removal of shutters or
from any other cause the unit or units concerned will be liable to rejection and
replacement by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost.
2.8.1.13 Curing
The top and sides of all precast units shall be kept covered in a damp condition for
at least 10 days after casting or for such periods as the Engineer may decide. Steam
curing, which reduces considerably the production time, may be used subject to
approval of the Engineer and must be carried out with strict observance of all pertinent
variables e.g temperature, relative humidity (from 60 to 90%) preheating time, treatment
at constant temperature, cooling off period and the time during which the concrete is left
to harden under normal conditions before being sent to the curing chamber.
2.8.1.14 Lifting and stacking
Precast units shall not be lifted, transported or used in the work until they are
properly hardened and sufficiently matured. The crushing tests on the test cubes will be
used to assess the maturity of the units. The CONTRACTOR shall satisfy the Engineer
that the methods proposed for lifting transporting and setting precast units will not
overstrain or damage the precast unit due to any cause whatsoever. Lifting and stacking
of precast units shall be undertaken without causing shock, vibration, or undue stress to
or in the units. Units damaged will be liable to rejection and if rejected shall be
Pag. 63
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
immediately broken up and removed from site. The CONTRACTOR shall replace such
rejected units at his own cost.
The lifting and storage area must be equipped with adequate lifting machinery.
Rows of stacked pieces must be separated by aisles, allowing through traffic, and
convenient manoeuvring of vehicles and cranes. Identification tags must always face the
aisles and lifting hooks on top. Spacing blocks are to be placed in between two elements
and beneath the lowest member and all supports from top to bottom must be arranged
strictly vertical. Stacking shall be done on a hard surfaced floor, preferably of concrete,
with slope fox drainage of rainwater.
2.8.1.15 Marking
The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all precast units are properly marked in
clean and legible manner with the reference number and the date of casting and it shall
be clearly visible where the units are stacked. Reinforced precast members shall be
clearly marked to indicate the top face.
2.8.1.16 Precast record
Full and accurate records shall be maintained of all precast work. Every unit shall
have a reference number, date of casting, date of removal from bed and the date and
position of placing recorded together with test results.
2.8.1.17 Erection
The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval the
sequence and scheme he proposes to adopt for erection of precast structural elements.
The precast units shall be handled and erected with utmost care to prevent damage to
them as well as to other adjoining constructions. All measures necessary for the safety
of personnel shall be taken.
Erection of large and heavy pieces such as portable frames, columns, trusses,
rafters and purlins shall be done using crane or derrick. The CONTRACTOR shall
employ skilled workers having adequate experience who will under the supervision of a
Pag. 64
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
competent foreman. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all tools, tackles, false work,
staging, supports and equipment required for erection of precast concrete structure.
2.8.1.18 Finishing
All exposed faces of precast articles shall be brought to a fair, even and smooth
surface by suitable rendering. Precast units, which are intended to be plastered, shall be
sufficiently rough to provide a good key to the plaster.
2.8.2 Foam Concrete
This shall be of average 50mm thickness or as specified or as shown on drawings.

This may be laid in in-situ in suitable panels or in precast blocks. The insulating
properties shall be such that the thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.125 Kcl m/m2h/
degree C. The weight of the insulating material shall be from 0.5 to 0.75 gm/cm3,
strength not less than 5Kg/sq.cm or (0.5N/sq.mm.). In general, the main ingredients of
Foam Concrete are cement, fly ash and foaming agent and the work shall be carried on
by specialised Agencies/Companies. Before starting the laying of foam concrete
samples shall be prepared at site and got tested for approval of the Engineer.
The foam concrete laid shall be sufficiently strong to take the usual workloads and
standard loads expected on the roof. Any damaged portion shall be, removed and
replaced forthwith. Approval of the Engineer shall be taken before laying the water-
proofing over the insulation. While laying the foam concrete, sample batches of mix
shall be kept for test if so desired by the Engineer.
2.8.3 Light Weight Concrete
2.8.3.1 General Use
This type of concrete is used as inter layer concrete over the main structural
concrete, in industrial buildings, to cater to space for concealed conduits and other types
of service pipings. As such this also acts as subgrade for the floor finish.
Pag. 65
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.8.3.2 Materials
The coarse aggregates shall be porous like broken brick bats or any other approved
materials. The grading shall be as specified in the Concrete Chapter. The fine aggregates
and cement shall be as specified in concrete in this series.
2.8.3.3 Density
The density shall vary from 1.2 t/m3 to 1.7 t/m3.
2.8.3.4 Mixing, laying, compaction and curing
All the works shall conform to the specification concrete in this series.
2.9 BRICKWORK, BLOCKWORK AND MASONRY
Construction of external walls and internal partitions with bricks of any thickness,
with the exclusion of the surfaces of doors and windows, shall be carried out to the
Engineer’s satisfaction.
2.9.1 Water proofing
Surfaces inclined at an angle not exceeding 30 degrees to the horizontal shall be

made waterproof by means of flexible polyethylene sheeting, gauge 1000, or similar
approved, laid to the surface of blinding concrete or sand blinded hardcore fill.
Internal surfaces of vertical walls, including primice finish inclined at an angle

exceeding 30 degrees to the horizontal, shall be made waterproof by means of sand
cement screed of 1:3 cement sand mortar, applied to concrete, 25 mm thick.
Surfaces of floors inclined at an angle not exceeding 30 degrees to the horizontal

shall be made waterproof by means of sand cement screed of 1:3 cement sand mortar,
applied to concrete, 25 mm thick.
External surfaces of vertical walls shall be made waterproof by means of sand

Pag. 66
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.9.2 Rendering
Surfaces of walls in ordinary cement mortar, inclined at an angle exceeding 60

degrees to the horizontal, shall be finished by rendering, to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
2.9.3 Painting
Upper surfaces of facial board of timber surfaces inclined at an angle not

exceeding 30 degrees to the horizontal shall be painted by external quality weather
guard high gloss paint, two coats, after adequate smoothing and surface preparation.
External surfaces of walls inclined at an angle exceeding 60 degrees to the

horizontal shall be painted with external quality weather guard high gloss paint, two
coats, after adequate smoothing and surface preparation.
Internal surfaces of walls inclined at an angle exceeding 60 degrees to the

horizontal shall be painted with internal quality vinyl silk paint, two coats, after
adequate smoothing and surface preparation.
Pag. 67
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3 PIPES, FITTINGS AND PIPE WORK
3.1 Ductile iron pipes and fittings
Pipes and fittings shall comply with the following standards:-
Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings - EN 545 : 2010
Flanges - EN 1092-2 : 1997
Flexible joints for use with ductile iron pipes shall be of an approved pattern, be
capable of withstanding an axial deflection of at least one and one-half degrees and shall
remain watertight up to the maximum works hydrostatic proof test pressure for which
the pipe is designed.
Ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be coated externally and internally throughout,
in accordance with the provisions of EN 545 : 2010.
3.2 PVC pipes
PVC pipes shall be un-plasticised PVC and manufactured in accordance with ISO
1452 : 2009 "Plastics piping systems for water supply and for buried and above-ground
drainage and sewerage under pressure. Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC U)" or
BS EN 1401-1 : 2009 "Plastic piping systems for non-pressure underground drainage
and sewerage. Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U). Specifications for pipes,
fittings and the system", whichever is applicable. All joints and fittings shall be
approved and shall comply with ISO 1452-3 : 2010.
3.3 Steel pipes
Pipes and fittings shall comply with the following standards:
Steel Pipes - ISO 559:1991, EN 10224:2002, EN 10255:2004, EN

10311:2005, BS 4515:2009.
Fittings - EN 10241:2000
Pag. 68
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3.4 PE pipes
PE Pipes - BS EN 12201-Part 1 & 2
Fittings - BS EN 12201-Part 3
3.5 Stainless steel pipes
Stainless steel Pipes - BS 4825, BS4677
Fittings - BS 4825
3.6 Joints
3.6.1 Flanged joints
All flanges shall conform to EN 1092 unless otherwise specifically mentioned.

Flanged joints for cast (spun) and ductile iron pipes are specials, for steel pipes and for
valves shall be made, unless specified otherwise, with full face rubber joint gaskets and
steel bolts and nuts which shall include two washers per bolt. Joint gaskets shall be
made from 3 mm thick rubber to BS. 1154 and of such physical properties as to be
capable of forming permanent watertight joints. The use of jointing paste or grease will
not be permitted. No jointing material shall be left protruding into the bore of the pipe
work.
All bolts shall first be tightened by hand and bolts, on opposite sides of the joint
circumference, shall then be alternatively and progressively tightened with a standard
spanner so as to ensure even pressure all round the joint.
Where flanged joints are to remain exposed in ducts and buildings, all damaged
sheathing or coatings to the barrels of pipes, adjacent to joints shall be made good by
cleaning the affected areas which shall then be primed and re-sheathed or recoated to the
same thickness as the original protection. All other surfaces of joints shall be cleaned,
Pag. 69
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
painted with an approved rust inhibitor and then shall receive one coat of an approved
bituminous paint.
Where pipes or joints have been supplies with their external surface bare, or
primed only with a rust inhibitor, for the purpose of later painting with non-bituminous
gloss paints, then instead of the application of one coat of a bituminous paint they shall
receive one coat of a red lead primer, to B.S. 2523, before painting.
Where flanged joints are to be buried, the exterior of all joints and their parts and
the barrels of pipes, for a distance of a 150 mm from the backs of both the joint sides,
shall be cleaned of any rust, and any damaged or loose coating, then dried. The prepared
pipe surface, and the joint, shall then be protected by lap wrappings, with approved
water resistant tape, in accordance, with the manufacturer's instructions. The cost of this
protection shall be included in the rate for making the joint.
Where steel flanged pipes are being used with bitumen coating and fibre glass
protection, the joints shall be protected by first cutting the fibre glass protection, to
expose the bitumen coating, a distance of 75 mm from the back of each flange. The
flanges, bolts, and all exposed metal shall be cleaned, dried and given two coats of quick
drying bituminous paint. The flanges and bolts shall then be covered, to a minimum
thickness of 12 mm, with approved hot run bitumen using a special mould or where no
mould is available, the protection may be completed by hand, care being taken to join
the new bitumen to the existing external bitumen coating.
3.6.2 Flange adaptors
Approved flange adaptors shall be used to joint flanged pipes, specials and valves
to plain ended pipes. They shall be joined in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and protected as specified for flanged joints.
3.6.3 Mechanical Couplings
In jointing asbestos cement, cast (spun) iron, steel or other plain ended pipes with
mechanical couplings, the Contractor shall take account of the manufacturer's
Pag. 70
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
recommendations as to the methods and equipment to be used in assembling the joint. In

particular the Contractor shall render the end of each pipe perfectly smooth so as to
allow the joint sleeve to slide freely, and where necessary shall recoat the pipe ends with
two coats of quickly drying bituminous paint. The joint shall be protected as for flanged
joints except where the diameter is 600 mm or greater when the coupling shall also be
sealed internally in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.6.4 Flexible joints for cast (spun) and ductile iron pipes
In jointing cast (spun) and ductile iron spigot and socket pipes and specials with
flexible joints the Contractor shall take account of the manufacturer's recommendations
as to the methods and equipment to be used in assembling the joints. The Contractor
shall ensure that the spigot end of the pipe to be joined is smooth and has been properly
chambered, that the rubber ring is correctly positioned in the socket and that the two
pipes are accurately in line before the joint is made. After the joints have been made the
Contractor shall ensure, by the use of suitable feeler gauge, that the rubber ring is evenly
seated in its correct final position. The rubber rings and any recommended lubricant
shall be obtained only through the pipe supplier.
3.6.5 Joints for uPVC pipes
Joints used in conjunction with uPVC pipes shall conform to ISO 1452-3:2010.
3.6.6 Joints for HDPE pipes
Pipe joining for pipes buried underground, below pavement or slab or concealed in
slab shall use electro-fusion or fully automatic butt fusion jointing unless instructed
otherwise by Engineer Incharge.
The following types of fittings shall comply to BS EN 12201 –3
a) Spigot fittings
b) Electro-fusion fittings and
c) Mechanical fittings and joints
Pag. 71
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3.7 Setting out of pipelines
The Engineer will set out the salient points of the pipeline alignments, hereinafter
referred to as "principal points", and will provide levels at these points which shall be
treated as bench marks. The Contractor shall be responsible for securing and
maintaining the principal points and restoring to their original position and level and
which are displaced or removed. The Contractor shall check the levels of the principal
points with reference to the specified datum and immediately inform the Engineer
should any discrepancies arise.
The Contractor shall be completely responsible for all setting out from information
provided by the Engineer based on the principal points.
Reference pegs and bench marks of basic points established by the Contractor
shall be made of steel pins 450 mm long and 12 mm diameter in C 20/20 concrete, cast
at least 0.25 m into the ground, set 25 mm out of the concrete. The chainage, level and
other markings required by the Engineer shall be engraved or clearly marked with paint
on the surface of the concrete. The Contractor shall establish temporary bench marks at
intervals along the pipeline route not exceeding 200 m and shall provide the Engineer
with a schedule of their levels.
Prior to any excavation being carried out, the levels of the existing ground shall be
agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer. In the event the Contractor fails to take
the requisite levels, then the ground levels shown on the Drawings or determined by the
Engineer shall be taken as correct.
The Contractor shall allow in his rates for any costs arising from errors in line or
level of the Contractor's basic setting out.
3.8 Handling pipes
The Contractor shall submit, prior to undertaking any work, his proposals for
handling pipes and all fittings to the Engineer for approval. Such proposals shall ensure
that all pipes are properly handled both by his staff and by any cartage contractor.
Pag. 72
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
During transport, pipes shall not be allowed to rest on narrow cross-members of vehicles
or anything else that might give concentrated loads, due to the weight of the pipe or
bumping of the vehicle, but shall be properly supported on soft material. Sufficient
labour and equipment shall be on hand before loading or unloading is commenced and
under no circumstances shall any material be dropped from a vehicle. PVC pipes and
fittings shall be protected from bright sunlight at all times. Polyethylene pipes are
characterized by being tough and resilient and are relatively light. Though it is easy to
handle, they are prone to damage by scoring by sharp objects. Therefore, careful
handling is always required and the dragging of straight pipes and coils should be
avoided whenever possible.
The handling of pipes exceeding 200 mm diameter, other than by means of a

crane, is specifically forbidden. The Contractor shall maintain a suitable mobile crane on
the Site and shall use it for all loading, unloading, transferring between vehicles and
lowering into the trench of such pipes. The crane shall be fitted with a sling of ample
width. Wire rope slings or hooks in the end of pipes shall not be used.
The Contractor, when formulating his proposals for handling pipes, shall take into
account the manufacturer's recommendations for such operations.
The Engineer shall have the right to reject consignments, or stocks of piping, from
which failed pipes have been drawn, or order them to be pressure tested outside the
pipelines, even though no defects are apparent.
3.9 Laying and jointing of pipes
Pipe laying shall only commence after the Engineer has inspected and approved of
the excavated trench. The pipe bed, as prepared, being shaped to ensure uniform bearing
over the whole of the length of the pipe and include a depression made in the bed to
accommodate each pipe joint. Just before pipe laying, the trench shall be cleaned of all
stones, soils and other debris that might have fallen therein.
Pipes and fittings shall then be laid upon the bed and jointed by experienced
personnel only. Pipe joints shall be made strictly following the pipe manufacturer's
Pag. 73
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
instructions and specifications and to the Engineer's approval. Joint rings and ends of
pipes must be completely free of dirt and grit when the joints are being assembled.
Joints shall be made before any deflections are taken and, when set to curves, the
external surfaces of spigots in the joint shall not butt against the internal surface of the
socket. At least one quarter of the total available movement in the joint shall be left in
any direction.
All mechanical plant and tools necessary for properly jointing the pipes shall be
provided by the Contractor and shall be utilized as recommended by the manufacturers.
Where pipes pass under roads and railways, they shall be adequately protected and
have beds, surrounds and covers as indicated on the Drawings and to the Engineers'
approval.
3.10 Thrust blocks and anchors
Thrust blocks and anchors shall be provided as shown on the Drawings or as

directed by the Engineer. Thrust blocks shall be cast against undisturbed soil and neither
contact nor encase the pipe beyond the fitting joints nor encase the joints. The blocks
shall have been completed and hardened and cured for at least 7 days before testing of
the pipeline. Straps and ties for anchorage shall be as shown on the Drawings.
Payment for anchor blocks will be by number including the volume of concrete in
the block and all earthwork, formwork and other operations required for their
construction. No payment shall be made for any temporary or permanent anchor blocks
constructed by the Contractor specifically for the testing of the pipeline.
3.11 Cleaning
All debris shall be cleared from the inside of the pipe before a joint is completed.
Before testing is undertaken on a pipeline section, the pipeline shall be cleared internally
to ensure that no foreign matter remains inside the pipes. Pigs or polyurethane swabs
may be used for this purpose provided that the Contractor takes all necessary
precautions using this equipment.
Pag. 74
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3.12 Testing of pipelines - pressure mains
All pipelines shall be subjected to a hydrostatic testing prior to commissioning.

The test pressure shall be the maximum sustained operating pressure or the maximum
static pressure, plus 5 bars, whichever is the greater. In calculating the pressure, the
anticipated surge pressure shall be taken into account. These pressures shall not in any
case exceed the manufacturer's stipulated maximum pressures for the pipe.
For the initial construction period the lengths of pipelines to be tested shall not
exceed 0.5 km. At the discretion of the Engineer this length may, as the Contract
proceeds, be extended to a maximum of 1.5 km. The Contractor shall give the Engineer
not less than 24 hours notice of any proposed testing.
Before testing commences, all anchorages shall be in position, all concrete thrust
blocks shall have attained their required strength and, where pipe joints are deflected to
produce large radius curves, the backfill between the pipe body and the trench side shall
be compacted to the final requirements. The Contractor shall provide for transmitting
the unsupported end thrusts to solid ground at the ends or into the sides of the trenches.
Testing will not be permitted against a closed valve.
All joints in the pipeline shall be fully exposed to allow for proper inspection
during the testing period. However the Contractor may, at the Engineer's discretion,
backfill between pipe joints.
Proper facilities for the evacuation of air from pipelines during filling shall be
provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall also provide all pipe stops, pressure
gauges, pumping equipment and all apparatus necessary to conduct the hydrostatic test.
All gauges shall be tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
In addition to the test on separate sections, the main, on completion, shall be

retested in whole, or in parts to be determined by the Engineer, to the same pressure and
by the same procedure as those for individual sections.
The Contractor shall allow in his rates for the provision of all potable/clear water
required for testing.
Pag. 75
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3.13 Sterilisation and commissioning of pipelines
Pipelines that are to convey potable water and have successfully passed the
hydrostatic test and been connected to the existing systems, shall be scoured out until
the wash water runs clear. They shall then be recharged with potable water containing at
least 40 mg/l of free chlorine. The solution shall be added in a manner and rate approved
by the Engineer.
The pipeline shall then be allowed to stand for a period of at least 24 hours during
which period all intermediate in-line valves shall be operated at least once after this
period, the residual free chlorine shall be measured at the end of the pipeline furthest
from the point of injection of the chlorine solution. if the free residual chlorine is less
than 10 mg/l, the disinfection process shall be repeated until this value is achieved or
bacteriological tests, in an approved laboratory, indicate that no contamination of
portable water occurs within the pipeline.
These bacteriological tests, in all cases, will be required before any pipeline,
conveying potable water, is taken into service.
Upon the issue of satisfactory bacteriological test reports, the chlorinated water
shall be run to waste, the pipeline recharged with potable water and taken into service.
The Contractor shall dispose of the waste chlorinated water in a manner avoiding
pollution of natural waters, reservoir and artificial water courses.
3.14 Concrete manhole for pipeline work
Construction of inspection pit with manhole for water networks and sewage, made
in-situ concrete with dosage and resistance according to the indications of the design
drawings. This includes the following charges:
a) excavation, in any type of soil and backfill with suitable material, in excess
of those required by sections type of pipe laying;
Pag. 76
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
b) the provision and in-situ concrete of concrete and reinforcement/rods steel

B450C to withstand loads maps of first category, as specified in the details
of construction or, if not sufficient, according to the static calculations;
c) joints watertight;
d) the inclusion of the pipes;
e) the lowering of groundwater;
all performed in a workmanlike manner in accordance with the construction

details and the indications given by the Works Management and included the burden of
supplying and laying of cast iron manhole cover.
Pag. 77
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
4 MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
4.1 Windows, doors, fence and gates
Windows with crystals, performed with different profiles depending on the size
and location, comprising: frames made by steel with open joints, mm of section 45 (for
fixed frames) and 52 mm (for opening swinging doors ), complete with sills 45 mm with
lateral development of the flaps - 2 cm, internal thickness 12/10 of internal flaps, interior
and exterior trims - for covering the cables - safety crystals 3 +3, or ventilation grid -
fixed aluminum type - hinges and locking devices of movement with a hammer handle
or lever. including the formation of protective grates and network against the birds,
which comprises the production of the lintel and shoulders, to be carried in reinforced
concrete, including the respective reinforcing iron and the formworks, all anchored to
the walls of buildings with measures indicated on the drawings.
Internal steel doors with single or double doors up to 2 meters in width, for access
to the premises, consisting of chassis and counter frame at tubular steel galvanized
panels, simple galvanized sheet steel thickness 10 / 10 mm with lock and handle and
also horizontal chrome handle for antipanic.
Exterior doors with one or two steel doors, accompanied by at least three hinges,
with mortise lock strike plate with rim and chrome, including the supply and installation
of marble threshold with aeration slots.
External doors over 2.0 meters in width, with closure of the manual type (as book)
for passage of machinery in general and aeration slots, consist of: modular aluminum
elements, sliding on the upper and lower galvanized steel guides, with folding doors that
open to "four or more modules (panels) that is in function on the width of the door . the
modules will be divided into sections that can be of type: closed with infill panel
sandwich double sheet of aluminum with soundproof internal lining , grille of
ventilation with fixed type aluminum with unbreakable glass 3 +3. They must be
complete: internal and external trims, appropriately sized hinges, locks and handles.
Pag. 78
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Including the construction of lintel and shoulders , to be carried reinforced concrete,

including the respective reinforcing iron and the formworks, all anchored to the walls of
buildings.
Doors single and double doors, built with wooden inner frame hive, boundaries in
wood edges on both sides made of poplar plywood - 4 mm thick - more the veneered ,
accompanied by at least three hinges, with mortise lock (chromated boundaries), coated
with paints with two components, which comprises the realization of the lintel and of
any shoulders, to be carried in reinforced concrete, including the respective reinforcing
iron and the formworks, all anchored to the walls of buildings. with measures indicated
on the drawings.
Supply and fix of fence with 100x100mm Concrete post of C25 concrete and wire
galvanised wire chain link fence of gauge 10 to BS 1722, with triple row of barbed wire
on top, anchored into blockwork dwarf wall as per drawings, height 2.5-3 m.
Supply and complete installation of metal field gate to BS 3470 in C25 concrete
pad foundations; according to the approved drawings
4.2 uPVC electrical corrugated conduit
Supply and laying of pipes structured UPVC double-wall corrugated externally

and internally smooth with crushing strength 450 N, in rolls of 50 or 25 m, including the
cost of delivery and insertion of iron wire for pulling the cables.
4.3 Concrete manhole for cables work
Construction of inspection pit with manhole for cables, made in-situ concrete with
dosage and resistance according to the indications of the design drawings. This includes
the following charges:
f) excavation, in any type of soil and backfill with suitable material, in excess
Pag. 79
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
g) the provision and in-situ concrete of concrete and reinforcement/rods steel

h) joints watertight;
i) the inclusion of the pipes;
j) the lowering of groundwater;

supplying and laying of concrete manhole cover.
4.4 Roads and paving
4.4.1 Sub-Base and Base
Shape road surface by medium grading to camber and crossfall with a motor
grader for depth not exceeding 150 mm
Provide, transport up to site, spread, shape, stabilise and compact to at least 95%
MDD AASHTO gravel material for flexible sub-base for depth 150-300 mm.
The item includes supply and laying of prime coat, execution of road pavement
made of 15 cm of reinforced concrete C10, including the steel bars used to reinforce
concrete, to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
4.4.2 Surfacing
Wearing course, of asphalt concrete of minimum thickness 5 cm after compaction,

and slurry double surface bitumen seal, placed and rolled as specified; to Engineer's
approval.
4.4.3 Kerbs
Construct Kerbs of pre-cast concrete to BS 7263 of cross section area 0.05-0.1 m²
Pag. 80
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
4.5 Sanitary water system
Supply and installation of sanitary water system consists of:
- Water distribution network, both cold and hot galvanized steel seamless DN 1 " to a
length of pipe not less than 50 m complete shutoff valves and fittings;
- No. 1 roof water tank with minimum volume of 2 m³ complete with four ball valves
from 1”, one float valve from 1” and one over flow 3”;
- Water heating system for sanitary use of the electric type, each of one complete with
tank for accumulation with minimum volume of 80 l complete with two ball valves
from ½";
- Vitreous China WC bowl with P outlet 9 litre cistern with valve fittings and seat and
cover, complete with valve cistern fittings, including outlet and inlet valves, internal
overflow, connecting fitments from cistern to bowl and all accessories to make
functional;
- Wash hand basin in Vitreous China approximately 560 x 405 mm with one tap hole
and chain-stay hole, complete with chromium plated pillar tap, Chrome plated chain
waste, plastic bottle trap, pedestal and all accessories to make functional.
- Septic tank of 6 m³ for the collection of the waste water. The execution including:
excavations, boulder, concrete, steel bars used to reinforce concrete and connection
to main sewage network. According to the approved drawing, the septic tank shall
be made by three chamber suitable for the collection of the waste water of the
houses; the last chamber should not have the bottom so that the clarified goes under
ground
Pag. 81
RU.B.RP.06.2
SPECIFICATION OF
WTP’S MECHANICAL
WORKS
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPECIFICATION VG 001 – STAINLESS STEEL SLUICE GATE ............................................... 1
SPECIFICATION VG 002 – FLAT BODY GATE VALVE ........................................................... 2
SPECIFICATION VG 003 – QUICK CLOSING/OPENING GATE VALVE ................................ 3
SPECIFICATION VG 004 – BUTTERFLY VALVES .................................................................... 4
SPECIFICATION VG 005 - SWING CHECK (CLAPET) VALVE ................................................ 5
SPECIFICATION VG 006 - PIPING ................................................................................................ 6
SPECIFICATION VG 007 - ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS ...................................... 8
SPECIFICATION VG 008 - STAINLESS STEEL WEIR GATE .................................................. 11
SPECIFICATION VG 009 - BALL VALVE .................................................................................. 13
SPECIFICATION VG 010 - GATE VALVE WITH RUBBER WEDGE (NOT
UTILIZED) ........................................................................................... 14
SPECIFICATION VG 011 - ELECTRIC MOTORS (SEE ANNEX: “RU_B_RP.05.3 -
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF WTP’S ELECTRICAL
WORKS”) ............................................................................................. 14
SPECIFICATION VG 012 - FLOAT VALVE (NOT UTILIZED) ................................................ 14
SPECIFICATION VG 013 – MOTORIZED GATE VALVE ........................................................ 15
SPECIFICATION VG 014 – KNIFE GATE (NOT UTILIZED) ................................................... 16
SPECIFICATION VG 015 – MV BOARDS AND TRANSFORMERS (SEE ANNEX:
“RU_B_RP.05.3 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF
WTP’S ELECTRICAL WORKS”) ...................................................... 17
SPECIFICATION VG 016 – LOW VOLTAGE BOARDS POWER CENTER (SEE ANNEX:
“RU_B_RP.05.3 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF WTP’S
ELECTRICAL WORKS”) ................................................................... 17
SPECIFICATION VG 017 – MCC MOTOR CONTROL CENTER PANEL BOARDS (SEE
ANNEX: “RU_B_RP.05.3 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF
SPECIFICATION VG 018 – ASP (AUXILIARY SERVICE PANEL) (SEE ANNEX:
SPECIFICATION VG 019 – POWER AND SIGNAL CABLES (SEE ANNEX: “RU_B_RP.05.3
- TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF WTP’S ELECTRICAL
WORKS”) ............................................................................................. 17
RU_B_RP.06.2 – Technical specification of WTP’s mechanical works

Pag. i
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VG 020 – ELECTRIC ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS (SEE

ANNEX: “RU_B_RP.05.3 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF
SPECIFICATION VG 021 – TELESCOPIC VALVE .................................................................... 18
SPECIFICATION VG 022 – STAINLESS STEEL SLUICE GATE WITH PNEUMATIC
ACTUATOR......................................................................................... 19
SPECIFICATION VG 023 – BUTTERFLY VALVE WITH PNEUMAIC ACTUATOR ............ 20
SPECIFICATION VG 024 – MOTORIZED BUTTERFLY VALVE ............................................ 21
SPECIFICATION GA 101 – TELESCOPIC COARSE SCREEN ................................................. 23
SPECIFICATION NT 102 – CONVEYOR BELT ......................................................................... 25
SPECIFICATION PC 103 – HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMP FOR WATER
INLET ................................................................................................... 26
SPECIFICATION PC 104 – HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMP FOR INLET
BACKWASHING ................................................................................ 28
SPECIFICATION CP 105 – OVERHEAD CRANE FOR LIFTING STATION ........................... 30
SPECIFICATION CP 106 – HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMP FOR HIGH
LIFTING STATION ............................................................................. 32
SPECIFICATION GA 107 - AUTOMATIC FINE SCREENING ................................................. 34
SPECIFICATION TC 108 - HORIZONTAL SCREW CONVEYOR ........................................... 36
SPECIFICATION PB 109 - COMPACTOR FOR SCREENED MATERIAL............................... 37
SPECIFICATION CP 110 – CLARIFYING TANK RADIAL BRIDGE....................................... 39
SPECIFICATION DA 111 – SUPPORT FOR FILTER BED AND WATER AND AIR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ................................................................. 42
SPECIFICATION GP 112 – PRODUCTION AND DISTRIBUTION AIR GROUP .................... 44
SPECIFICATION SF 113 - VOLUMETRIC BLOWER ................................................................ 45
SPECIFICATION VV 114 - COOLING VENTILATION GROUP .............................................. 46
SPECIFICATION VV 115 - COOLING VENTILATION GROUP .............................................. 48
SPECIFICATION FS 116 – VENTILATION, SOUNDPROOFING AND FILTERING
SYSTEM FOR BLOWER ROOM ....................................................... 50
SPECIFICATION PC 117 - HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMP FOR
BACKWASHING FILTERS................................................................ 51
SPECIFICATION CP 118 – OVERHEAD CRANE FOR FILTER BUILDING ........................... 53
SPECIFICATION GE 119 – STAND BY GENERATORS (SEE ANNEX:
“RU_B_RP.05.3 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF

Pag. ii
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION SA 120 – UNDERGROUND GASOIL TANK (SEE ANNEX:

SPECIFICATION CS 121 – COOLING SYSTEM FOR ELECTRICAL BUILDING ................. 56
SPECIFICATION CT 122 – FILTRATION PACKAGE ............................................................... 58
SPECIFICATION GP 123 – PRESSURIZATION SET FOR POTABLE WATER ...................... 59
SPECIFICATION CP 124 – OVERHEAD CRANE FOR LIFTING STATION ........................... 60
SPECIFICATION CP 125 – OVERHEAD CRANE FOR EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL
POWER BUILDING ............................................................................ 62
SPECIFICATION SM 126 - EXTINGUISHER WALL ................................................................. 64
SPECIFICATION AT 127 – AIR TANK ....................................................................................... 65
SPECIFICATION PC 201 - SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP FOR SLUDGE .............. 66
SPECIFICATION PC 202 - SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP FOR SLUDGE .............. 67
SPECIFICATION DR 301 – DISINFECTANT SOLUTION PREPARATION SYSTEM ........... 68
SPECIFICATION PC 302 – HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMP ........................................ 71
SPECIFICATION PD 303 - METERING PUMP ........................................................................... 72
SPECIFICATION SS 304 – DISSOLVING GROUP OF ALUMINA ........................................... 73
SPECIFICATION PD 305 - METERING PUMP ........................................................................... 75
SPECIFICATION CP 306 - OVERHEAD CRANE FOR CHEMICAL (ALUMINA)
BUILDING ........................................................................................... 76
SPECIFICATION ZX 401 – PRESSURE METER AND TRANSMITTER FOR
PRESSURE PIPES ............................................................................... 78
SPECIFICATION ZX 402 – AUTOMATIC SAMPLER ............................................................... 79
SPECIFICATION ZX 403 – ULTRASONIC FLOW METER FOR TRIANGULAR
WEIR .................................................................................................... 80
SPECIFICATION ZX 404 – TURBIDITY TRANSMITTER DEVICE ........................................ 81
SPECIFICATION ZX 407 – COMPRESSED AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUP ............ 83
SPECIFICATION ZX 406 – ULTRASONIC LEVEL METER AND TRANSMITTER .............. 84
SPECIFICATION ZX 407 – DIGITAL DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE AIR FLOW
METER ................................................................................................. 85
SPECIFICATION ZX 408 - TIME CONTROL DEVICE .............................................................. 86
SPECIFICATION ZX 409 - TIME CONTROL DEVICE .............................................................. 87
SPECIFICATION ZX 410 - ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION FLOW METER
FOR PRESSURE PIPES ...................................................................... 88
SPECIFICATION ZX 411 – PRESSURE METER AND TRANSMITTER FOR
PRESSURE PIPES ............................................................................... 90

Pag. iii
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION ZX 412 – MONITORING AND AUTOMATION SYSTEM .......................... 91

SPECIFICATION ZX 413 – WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT ............................................................ 97
SPECIFICATION ZX 414 – LABORATORY MATERIAL ....................................................... 100
SPECIFICATION ZX 501 - EMERGENCY SHOWER .............................................................. 114

Pag. iv
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VG 001 – STAINLESS STEEL SLUICE GATE
Construction characteristics
Sluice gates shall be manufactured in stainless steel AISI 304 electrically-welded plate or
section bars, and machined frame and guide rails.
The sluice gates wall orifices will have the following forms:
1) Rectangular, with three leak-proof sides
2) Circular
3) Triangular weir
4) Rectangular or square, with four leak-proof sides
The seas shall be applied at least on the part of the gate which is in contact with the sewage.
The gate shall be normally leak-proof on both parts.
The sluice gate shall be constituted by:
a) Leak-proof, sliding grooves
b) Knife
c) Control bar
d) Pedestal installed gear operator
e) Hydraulic seals.
Component description
Ref. a) They must be manufactured in stainless steel AISI 304 electrically-welded plates or
section bars, on which will be machined so as to install the frame and guide rails.
The slide in grooves must be equipped with appropriate anchoring studs for the
installation on cement walls or counter-plate for the frame installation, guide rails and
adjustable wedge pads with tapped stainless steel regulating screws.
Ref. b) Manufactured in stainless steel AISI 304 plates equipped with reinforced bracing
constructed to accommodate the H20 flap that will weigh on the sluice gate.
The slurry wall, on the two sides where the seal will be, will be machined so as to
provide a hydraulically sealed surface.
Ref. c) They will be manufactured in stainless steel AISI 304 according with the
measurements provided. At the summit, a pair of reduction cone-shaped gearboxes
where the control bars will not be provided.
Ref. d) They must be employed where it proves impossible the direct activation of the sluice
gate and they may be of internal or external screw, provided e.g., of appropriate
external brackets and threaded sleeve.
Ref. e) The hydraulic seals will be mechanical on all sides except the threshold that will be by
rubber gasket.

Pag. 1
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VG 002 – FLAT BODY GATE VALVE
Installation characteristics:
Wafer type gate valves will be installed primarily on waste and sludge lines.
Field of application:
The gate valve will depend on the nominal pipe size:
o Those laid down by the standard NP-6, up to ND 300
o Those laid down by the standard NP-4, from ND 350 to ND 500
o Those laid down by the standard NP-2,5, from ND 600
Independently from the nominal pipe size, the flange couplings will be drilled and processed
by NP-10 standards.
Construction characteristics:
- Body : in ductile iron GG-25
- Bonnet : in ductile iron GG-25
- Closing wedge : in cast iron
- Sealing rings : in brass
- Stem : in brass
- Stem bushing : in bronze
- Stuffing box : in cast iron
- Seal elements : hemp cord
- O-ring : rubber canvas
- Hand-wheel : in cast iron
- Bolts : in steel
- Rods : in steel

Pag. 2
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VG 003 – QUICK CLOSING/OPENING GATE VALVE
Quick opening gate valves will be installed primarily waste and sludge lines.
The gate valve will depend on the nominal pipe size:
o Those laid down by the standard UNI 1284 PN-6, up to DN 300
o Those laid down by the standard UNI 1284 PN-4, from DN 350 to DN 500
o Those laid down by the standard UNI 1284 PN-2,5, from DN 600
Independently from the nominal pipe size, the flange couplings will be drilled and processed
by UNI 2229 PN-10 standards.
The valve gates will be flat body type operated by a lever, and it will have the following
characteristics:
- Body : in ductile iron GG-25
- Bonnet : in ductile iron GG-25
- Closing wedge : in cast iron G-20
- Sealing rings : in brass
- Stem : in brass
- Stem bushing : in bronze
- Stuffing box : in cast iron
- Seal elements : hemp cord
- O-ring : rubber canvas
- Extension rod and lever : in forged steel
- Bolts : in steel
- Rods : in steel

Pag. 3
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VG 004 – BUTTERFLY VALVES
In principal butterfly valves most be used on those fluid lines that do not have particular
problems with solid content and on air and gas lines.
The optimal field of application of these types of valves is included from DN 200 onward
except where otherwise indicated.
The planned butterfly valves will not only be for regulation, but they must also be an
interception device; therefore, they must be hermetically sealed.
The valves will be structured in the following essential parts:
- Body: in forged and welded steel
- Stem: in stainless steel AISI 420
- Disc: in stainless steel AISI 420
- Upstream and downstream seal: According to the standards ISO 5208, category A; NF E
29-311, rate 3; DIN 3202, part 3, rate 1
- Couplings: To be carried out between counter flange UNI/DIN NP
10.
- Operator: For the purpose of the valve's size and working pressure of
the installation, the valve must be equipped with the
following control devices:
a) Command lever up to DN 350 and with operating
pressures lower than 10 m of c. a)
b) Reduction gear closed in an airtight box, with wheel
and mechanic position indicator in all installations and
where specifically requested.

Pag. 4
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VG 005 - SWING CHECK (CLAPET) VALVE
The swing check valves will be installed on sludge and waste lines.
The swing check valves to be installed will be those used in the field of application according
to standards and they will have:
- NP-10 kg/cm² for the field of application from ND 40  300
- NP-8 kg/cm² for the field of application from ND 350  600
- NP-6 kg/cm² for the field of application from ND 700  1,000
The swing check valves will be the "clapé" type with inspection flange and they will be made
of the following:
- Body : cast iron G-20
- Bonnet : cast iron G-20
- Plate seat : cast iron G-20
- Valve position : Brass
- Swing hinge flap : Brass
- BTFE bushes and plugs : Brass
- Seals : synthetic rubber
- Coupling flange : drilling and processing according to NP-10

Pag. 5
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VG 006 - PIPING

The supply of every single element that composes the plant include the connection lines for
wastes, sludge, reagents, service fluids, etc. And the hydraulic interception and regulation
devices.
For every area, in addition to the equipment and machines described in detail, provided also
are:
- pipes in carbon and stainless steel for wastes and sludge, scattering of a compressed air
network with the adequate pipe diameter according to the project;
- Special parts, supports
The piping and special parts will be manufactured in:
- Ductile iron (wastes, sludge and air lines)
- Stainless steel AISI 304 (for special applications along the wastes, sludge and air lines)
- UPVC (reagent dosage / wastes / mains water)
The piping will be provided with appropriate supports and anchoring; the piping and the
special parts are to be incorporated in the structure will be equipped vise like flange.
Ductile iron pipes

Pipes and fittings shall comply with the following standards:-
Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings - EN 545 : 2010
Flanges - EN 1092-2 : 1997
Flexible joints for use with ductile iron pipes shall be of an approved pattern, be capable of
withstanding an axial deflection of at least one and one-half degrees and shall remain watertight up
to the maximum works hydrostatic proof test pressure for which the pipe is designed.
Ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be coated externally and internally throughout, in
accordance with the provisions of EN 545 : 2010.
In this article it is comprised the supply and installation of rubber gasket (O ring), special
parts and fittings necessary for jointing pipes of ductile iron according to BS EN 545, with internal
and external coating according to BS EN 545.
Stainless steel pipes

The following indications regard mostly the use of stainless steel pipes for water, wastes and
compressed air transport in general (therefore, not to be considered for low pressure air transport
lines). The pipes used will be in stainless steel AISI 304 and will comply with the norms:
PIPES Material AISI 304

Pag. 6
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Wall thickness for ND < 300: 2 mm

for ND = or > 300: 3 mm
Junction butt welding;
FITTING Material AISI 304
Wall thickness like pipes
Ends Butt welded
FLANGE Material AISI 304
Rating NP 16
UPVC pipes
PVC pipes shall be un-plasticised PVC and manufactured in accordance with ISO 1452 : 2009
"Plastics piping systems for water supply and for buried and above-ground drainage and
sewerage under pressure. Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC U)" or BS EN 1401-1 :
2009 "Plastic piping systems for non-pressure underground drainage and sewerage.
Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U). Specifications for pipes, fittings and the
system", whichever is applicable. All joints and fittings shall be approved and shall comply
with ISO 1452-3 : 2010.
Flexible pipes
Realization of flexible rubber pipe DN 150 mm, wall thickness 10 mm, suitable for potable
water delivery.
The pipe shall be sufficiently flexible and elastic to adapt and follow the movement of the
pontoons, which are subject to wave motion and to consequent planimetric displacements.
The outer layer shall be made of synthetic rubber resistant to abrasion and aging. The inner
layer shall be made of synthetic rubber, with high strength textile reinforcements capable to
ensure an operating pressure of 10 bar and burst over 30 bar. It shall be appropriate to the
extreme climatic conditions of the installation site and for continuous exposure to UV rays.
The tolerance on inner diameter shall be according to ISO 1307 and on wall thickness
according to DIN 7715 T4 S2.
The overall pipe will be realized through provision of hose rolls of suitable length. Hoses
shall be joined together by steel fittings AISI 316 applied by pressing a ring of steel AISI 304
with fixed flange connection on one end and movable flange on the other end, with drilling
DN 150 mm PN 10 bar.
The pipeline shall be installed under the decking of pontoons and / or other floating structures
and be supported by an adequate plastic or metal structure approved by the works director.
Provision shall include, in addition to the pipes, joints, fittings, connections, supports,
assembly accessories, leakage tests.

Pag. 7
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VG 007 - ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS

This specification concerns the following components:
a) Brackets, supports and cover for vent
b) Cover grids and well trapdoors
c) Vertical rising ladder
d) Railings, handrails, walkways, carpentry
e) Dismantling joints
f) "Gas" threaded connectors
g) Flange and blind flange
h) Elastic joints
i) Curves, tees, reductions
l) Joints, curves, tees, reduction and fittings for UPVC pressure pipes
m) Cylindrical float
n) Suction strainer
Ref. a) They will be made in metal beams or flat plates electrically-welded together. The use
of junction boxes for rectangular, square, round, etc., pipes are not permitted. They
will be made in material compatible with the supporting structure, they must be e.g.,:
painted steel for structures in painted steel, in hot dip galvanized steel for structures in
hot dip galvanized steel, in stainless steel for structures in stainless steel, etc. The
brackets and supports must be completed with needed bots, nuts and washers. The
cover for vent should be installed in according to the drawings and is made in stainless
steel AISI 304 and shall comply with grid of protection in according to the drawings.
The cover must be completed with needed bots, nuts and washers
Ref. b) Subject where indicated differently on the drawings, all the well covers, walk ways
and other work areas most be made with the use of stripe plates 3 + 2 thick and
properly stiffed by metal beams so to create resistant structures to withstand loads of
500 kg/m² or from hot dip galvanized steel grating with the same resistant
characteristics.
Different conditions of stress will be indicated in the project papers.
These coverings must be equipped of suitable containment frames made also in metal
beams electrically welded (L shape) equipped with brackets for grouting to the
reinforced concrete.
Ref. c) The vertical rising ladders will be made in section bars of hot dip galvanized steel
after completion.
Depending on the height and use, they may be:

Pag. 8
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
- Vertical with rungs with or without safety net;

- Sub vertical (75° inclination on the horizon);
- grating step.
The ladders must be complete of all necessary components for their use in regard to
the safety regulations; they will be equipped with railing, handrail, safety net,
intermediate landings etc.
During the construction, full metallic type section bars in hot dip galvanized steel only
will be used after completion; excluded are the tubular from all areas except for the
handrails.
The walkways such as balconies and walkways for access or links and steps must be
made in grated hot dip galvanized steel.
The vertical ladder must be completed with needed bots, nuts and washers.
Ref. d) In the construction of these structures only section bars in hot dip galvanization after
completion and of all full structure parts such as: plates, I, L angles etc.
The use of tubular structures is permitted for the making of the handrail only.
All the parts must be connected together by means of electric-welding, with the care to
have pre-established points of expansion joints.
The railings, handrails, walkways must be completed with needed bots, nuts and
washers.
Ref. e) Used to facilitate the assembly and the dismantlement of the line instrumentation; it
will be set up in the following way:
- Steel main body
- Mobile flange with hole and with features like this as the line components
- Fixing tie rods
- Retaining ring.
- The dismantling joints must be completed with needed bots, nuts and washers.
Ref. f) They will be in cast iron, manufactured according to the international norm 150/R-49 -
1957. The employed series will be the cone threaded type, thus avoid using connector
1 3 1 3
ND 1 /8", 1 /4", 2 /4", 2 /4" diameters currently not standardize.
Ref. g) The flanges and the blind flanges expected in the construction of the plant will be
those with support collar NP 10 to butt weld with features lathed. The flange must be
completed with needed bots, nuts and washers.
Ref. h) The joints most are essentially made of the following parts:
- Flanged ends with drilling held as provided to other components of the line;
- Elastic body (sealing joint) consisting of synthetic material (EDPM);
- Closing gland of the same material of the flange.
- The joints must be completed with needed bots, nuts and washers.

Pag. 9
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Ref. i) The curves, tees and reductions must unite with pipes or between themselves by
flanges.
Ref. l) Joints, curves, tees, reductions and fittings for UPVC pressure pipes shall comply with
the relevant requirements of ISO 1452. Solvent welded joints are not acceptable,
UPVC pipes and fittings should be jointed through mechanical joints.
Ref m) The cylindrical float is made of HDPE with the thickness shown on the drawings and
will be filled with foam. The set of 3 cylinders as indicated on the drawings will be the
floating system of the works on the lake. Is left to the contractor of the work the
verification to the buoyancy of the works on the lake.
Ref n) The strainer will be made of stainless steel AISI 304 plate molded and machined with
appropriate slots.

Pag. 10
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VG 008 - STAINLESS STEEL WEIR GATE
The use of weir gates can be expected in the following cases:
a) On custom bell hole
b) Touches the gutter
c) Wells flow dividers
In view of their use there can be two types:
- Fixed
- Adjustable (manually or with servomechanism)
In turn both, types and for all installations may be of the following forms: triangular, variable
angle, plane angle and hole calibrated.
1) Fixed weir gate: they are made in stainless steel (AISI 304) complete with stiffeners and
mounting accessories also in stainless steel. Dimension characteristics are
specified from time to time in special designs and assembly attached to
the project. In principle the fastening to concrete structures will happen
by means of expansion anchors except in certain cases specified from
time to time, where you can use nails fixed by "nail gun".
2) Adjustable weir: generally this category belongs to the triangular weirs (with an angle that
is comprised between 40  120°) and plain angle. Regardless of design,
adjustment can be done without distinction with manual operation or
using pneumatic devices or motors, however, accompanied by an
emergency manual operation. The weirs will be structured in the
following essential parts:
a) Sliding frame and fixing to the structure
b) Control devices
c) Device for detecting the overflow position or the weir summit with
respect to a fixed point to be defined (overflow height), able to send this
value to the monitoring system and the flow meter;
All the parts will be made in plates or section bars of stainless steel.
Component description:
a) The fixed sliding frame will be made with section bars or reinforced plates welded between
them grouting to the existing structures will happen by means of section bars full of carbon
steel and bolts or by means of threaded dowels or brackets if the frame will be self-
supporting. In both cases one of the parts will be equipped with slotted holes for the final
adjustments of the whole group. The bolts will be in AISI 304.

Pag. 11
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
b) The control devices, depending on the size of the weir gate to be used will be slowly made
more accurately until the use of adjustable sliding sleds and sealing devices on sliding side.
c) Control and manual control devices will be agreed upon with the project management the
opportunity of installation of conical gear reducer or other similar type.
As well as in the case of motorized maneuver you must provide for, in design-related
mechanical and functional those accessories intended to control and reporting through electrical
signals.
Also in the parts and structures for manoeuvre training, we will employ exclusively solid
plates.

Pag. 12
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VG 009 - BALL VALVE
Ball valves will be used on small diameter piping of gas scattering lines, air and reagents in
general.
Valves planned up to ND 50 will be at full bore, complete with threaded sleeve for
disassembly or, if required, with flanged connections.
- Body : stainless steel AISI 304 or UPVC
- Stem : Duralumin or similar
- Sphere : stainless steel AISI 304 or UPVC
- Junction / flange : stainless steel AISI 304 or UPVC
- Stem : stainless steel AISI 304 or UPVC

Pag. 13
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VG 010 - GATE VALVE WITH RUBBER WEDGE (NOT UTILIZED)
SPECIFICATION VG 011 - ELECTRIC MOTORS (SEE ANNEX: “RU_B_RP.05.3 -

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF WTP’S ELECTRICAL WORKS”)
SPECIFICATION VG 012 - FLOAT VALVE (NOT UTILIZED)

Pag. 14
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VG 013 – MOTORIZED GATE VALVE
The motorized gate valves will be, in principle, installed in wells, pipelines, etc.; their
nominal pressure shall depend on the pressure of the pipe they belong to.
The valve-body shall comply with the specification VG 002.
The gate valve shall always be provided with emergency manual hand-wheel.
The electric driving system shall be realized by means of a control unit mounted directly on
the valve-body and shall consist of:
a) 380/50 Hz electric motor with power 30% higher than the power needed for the normal
functioning.
b) Gear reducer directly keyed to the electric motor, with gear or worm, with overload protection
device.
c) Upper and lower end-of-stroke devices
d) Start-up electric docking device in case of manual operation.
With the generally utilized 1500 RPM electric motor, the gear ratio shall be of 1:1/2.
The entire drive unit will be realized in strict accordance with safety regulations in force, as
for both the electrical and mechanical parts, to avoid risks for the operators.

Pag. 15
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VG 014 – KNIFE GATE (NOT UTILIZED)

Pag. 16
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VG 015 – MV BOARDS AND TRANSFORMERS (SEE ANNEX:

ELECTRICAL WORKS”)
SPECIFICATION VG 016 – LOW VOLTAGE BOARDS POWER CENTER (SEE ANNEX:

“RU_B_RP.05.3 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF WTP’S ELECTRICAL
WORKS”)
SPECIFICATION VG 017 – MCC MOTOR CONTROL CENTER PANEL BOARDS (SEE

ANNEX: “RU_B_RP.05.3 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF WTP’S
SPECIFICATION VG 018 – ASP (AUXILIARY SERVICE PANEL) (SEE ANNEX:

WORKS”)
SPECIFICATION VG 019 – POWER AND SIGNAL CABLES (SEE ANNEX:

WORKS”)
SPECIFICATION VG 020 – ELECTRIC ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS (SEE

ANNEX: “RU_B_RP.05.3 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF WTP’S

Pag. 17
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VG 021 – TELESCOPIC VALVE
The telescopic valve must be installed in principle on the lines of sludge extraction.
Field size:
The valve must have stroke and diameter as shown in the drawings of this project.
- Sliding tube of suitable diameter provided with the sealing device and sliding seats superiorly,
such as to make it easily accessible for inspection and maintenance operations;
- Steel telescopic tube worked and adjusted externally, with internal dimensions and excursion
tailored to the characteristics defined in the project drawings;
- limit switchs and threaded sleeve to slide;
- Column for maneuver provided with cast iron hand wheel
- Rod adjustment and telescopic link - column for maneuver, made of AISI 316.

Pag. 18
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VG 022 – STAINLESS STEEL SLUICE GATE WITH PNEUMATIC

ACTUATOR
In principle, the gates will have to be employed on those lines of fluids that do not present any
particular problems of solids content and on the air and gas lines.
By reason of their use may be equipped with pneumatic actuator of the single acting type ON
/ OFF
The pneumatically operated gates as a whole will consist of the following basic parts:
a) Gates
b) Pneumatic Actuator
c) Accessories
Ref a) they shall comply with the specification VG 001;
Ref b) pneumatic actuator:
- simple effect type, usually ON / OFF or where explicitly requested, with the following
accessories:
- Adapter for solenoid valves (in the case that the valve is installed directly on the actuator)
- visual position indicator of the gate
- Electrical contacts of limit switches for remote position ON / OFF of the gate
- Solenoid pilot because of the needs of the system can be installed: directly to the actuator in a
suitable container or common for the entire system. The solenoid valve will have a degree of
electrical protection compatible with the type of installation adopted.
The actuator must have the following characteristics:
- Power supply: compressed air or inert gas, filtered, lubricated or
unlubricated at a maximum pressure of 10 bar
- Lubrication: perennial
- Operating temperature: - 30 ° C + 80 ° C
Ref c) The gate must be equipped with the following accessories:

- manual gearbox with bypass for manual override.

Pag. 19
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VG 023 – BUTTERFLY VALVE WITH PNEUMAIC ACTUATOR
In principle, the butterfly valves must be used on fluid lines that do not have any particular
problems of solid contents and on air and gas lines.
The field of optimal application of valves of this type is understood by the ND 200 onwards ,
except where indicated otherwise.
By reason of their use may be equipped with an actuator of the single acting type to ON / OFF
The butterfly valves with pneumatic control as a whole will consist of the following basic
parts:
a) Butterfly valve
b) Pneumatic Actuator
c) Accessories
Ref a) it shall comply with the specification VG 004
Ref b) Pneumatic actuator:
- Single acting type, usually to ON / OFF or where explicitly requested, with the following
accessories:
- Adapter for solenoid valves (in the case that the valve is installed directly on the actuator)
- Visual indication of valve position
- Electrical contacts of limit switches for remote position of the ON / OFF valve
- Solenoid pilot valve that , because of the needs of the system, can be installed: directly to the
actuator in a suitable container or common for the entire system. The solenoid valve will have a
degree of electrical protection compatible with the type of installation adopted.
The actuator it must have the following characteristics:
- Power supply: compressed air (or inert gas), filtered, lubricated or
unlubricated at a maximum pressure of 10 bar
- Lubrication: perennial
- Operating temperature: - 30 ° C + 80 ° C
- Angle of rotation Max: 90 ° standard
Ref c) The valve must be equipped with the following accessories:
- Gear box with bypass for manual override

Pag. 20
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VG 024 – MOTORIZED BUTTERFLY VALVE
In principal butterfly valves most be used on those fluid lines that do not have particular
problems with solid content and on air and gas lines.
The optimal field of application of these types of valves is included from ND 200 onward
except where otherwise indicated.
The planned butterfly valves will not only be for regulation, but they must also be an
interception device; therefore, they must be hermetically sealed.
The motorized butterfly valves will be, in principle, installed in wells, pipelines, etc.; their
nominal pressure shall depend on the pressure of the pipe they belong to.
The butterfly valve shall always be provided with emergency manual hand-wheel.
The electric driving system shall be realized by means of a control unit mounted directly on
the valve-body and shall consist of:
a) 380/50 Hz electric motor with power 30% higher than the power needed for the normal
functioning.
b) Gear reducer directly keyed to the electric motor, with gear or worm, with overload protection
device.
c) Upper and lower end-of-stroke devices
d) Start-up electric docking device in case of manual operation.
With the generally utilized 1400 RPM electric motor, the gear ratio shall be of 1:1/2.
The valves will be structured in the following essential parts:
- Body: in forged and welded steel
- Stem: in stainless steel AISI 420
- Disc: in stainless steel AISI 420
- Upstream and downstream seal: According to the standards ISO 5208, category A; NF E
29-311, rate 3; DIN 3202, part 3, rate 1
- Couplings: To be carried out between counter flange UNI/DIN NP
10.
- Operator: For the purpose of the valve's size and working pressure of
the installation, the valve must be equipped with the
following control devices:
a) Command lever up to ND 350 and with operating
pressures lower than 10 m of c. a)

Pag. 21
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
b) Reduction gear closed in an airtight box, with wheel

and mechanic position indicator in all installations and
where specifically requested.
The entire drive unit will be realized in strict accordance with safety regulations in force, as
for both the electrical and mechanical parts, to avoid risks for the operators.

Pag. 22
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION GA 101 – TELESCOPIC COARSE SCREEN
Characteristics of installation:
- Width : m 1.20
- Height : m 5.50 from the channel base to the upper platform.
- Maximum water level in the channel: m 0.91 upstream the screen in minimum water level
conditions of the river
- Maximum water level in the channel: m 3.00 upstream the screen in maximum water level
conditions of the river
Functional characteristics:
The screen shall receive and treat efficiently a river water of 400 m³/h.
The screen shall be built in a way to be perfectly efficient under the over described working
conditions.
It shall have the following main characteristics:
- Maximum working = 430 m³/h
- Distance between rake bars = 50 mm.
The screen shall have the following main constituents:
- Supporting frame made by bent steel sheet, electro-welded, 20° slope to the vertical.
- Fixed monoblock steel screen, bolted in the support frame.
- Rake carrier made by tubolars; steel rake sliding on the fixed screen. The rake approaches
and leaves the screen by means of a telescopic cylinder. The ascent and descent motion of
the group rake-trolleys is given by a hydraulic piston.
- Hydraulic unit complete with: oil pan, oil level indicator, vent, safety valve, pressure switch,
solenoid valves controlling hydraulic pistons, valves.
- Starter depending on an automatic timer and an emergency control level.
- Protections of all moving parts appropriate to meet all regulations on the safety.
- The grid shall be accompanied by all the accessories necessary for its proper functioning,
including the level control device for the automatic start.
Materials
Stainless steel AISI 304
Telescopic cylinder composed by:
- Steel pipe Fe 52
- Chromed steel stem
- Internal element in steel Fe 52

Pag. 23
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
- Cast iron head.

Pag. 24
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION NT 102 – CONVEYOR BELT
The horizontal conveyor belt shall be installed to serve the coarse screen GA 101. It will be
placed on a concrete support elevated on the ground level. The horizontal conveyor belt will be
slightly inclined toward the outlet point, so as described in the design drawings.
Functional characteristics:
The belt shall convey the coarse material coming from the screen GA 101 and discharge it in
a roll-off container.
The conveyor belt will be horizontal-type, with supporting frame in steel and belt in rubber.
The belt shall be equipped with appropriate side guard sheets, of suitable motorization and
with pulling means and a connector device for the unloading.
The belt will have the following dimensions:
- Width: 600 mm
- Length: 2,700 mm
Materials:
- Frame: galvanized steel
- Motorized roller and stand-by: galvanized steel and rubber
- Supporting rollers : PVC
Closed-ring belt : PVC and nylon, resistant to weathering and chemicals.

Pag. 25
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION PC 103 – HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMP FOR WATER INLET
The horizontal centrifugal pump will be installed in the main lifting station house located near
Kahengye river. The pump will be lift the raw water from the river to the screen section of the
WTP.
Operating and performance characteristics:

- Flow (l/s) = 31.5 27.7 10
- Head (m) = 70 92.5 110.50
- Liquid to lift = raw river water
- Suction flange PN 16
- Discharge flange PN 40
The pump should be suitable for continuous operation for the entire 24 hours
The data relating to the flow rate and head must correspond to 70% of the maximum values of
actual performance of the pumps.
Description of the components:

 Pump suction and discharge stages material: grey Cast Iron (JL1040) for inlet pressure
up to 16 bar and discharge pressure up to 40 bar, Carbon steel (GP240GH+N) for
higher pressure in inlet and/or outlet.
 Pump intermediate stages material in grey Cast Iron (JL1040).
 Rotor made by closed multi-vane dynamically balanced impellers in Cast Iron
(JL1040) or Tin bronze, and is must be designed for minimized the axial thrust on the
bearings.
 High torque resistance shaft in tempered steel (C45+N) or Chrome steel
(1.4057+QT800) corrosion and wear protected by a shaft sleeve in chrome steel
(1.4057+QT800) or Duplex Stainless Steel.
 The rotor should be positioned between two high reliability anti-friction grease
lubricated bearings in the radial inlet version and between an high reliability medium
lubricated ceramic (SicC) bearing in suction side and an anti-friction grease lubricated
bearings in the discharge side, for all the axial inlet version.
 Normalized single mechanical seal should ensure a perfect operation during the entire
working period, it will be two for the radial inlet pump version or one for the axial
inlet version.

Pag. 26
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
 The flange could be positioned in every direction with step of 90° for a better fitting
with the pipe both in suction and discharge side in the radial inlet pump version and
only in discharge side for the axial inlet pump version..
 The electric motor will be as provided in the specification VG 011 and protected to IP
55 with an efficiency as per IE3 standard.
 Pump and motor will be supplied mounted on a high resistance welded steel baseplate
coated with the same grade of quality of the pump, and assembled each other using a
flexible coupling provided by an anti-contact guard in galvanized steel.

Pag. 27
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION PC 104 – HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMP FOR INLET

BACKWASHING
The horizontal centrifugal pump will be installed in the main lifting station house located near
Kahengye river. The pump will be lift the raw water from the river to backwash action.

- Flow (l/s) = 7 10.5 13
- Head (m) = 51 44.1 37
- Liquid to lift = raw lake water

bearings.
inlet version.

Pag. 28
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

Pag. 29
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION CP 105 – OVERHEAD CRANE FOR LIFTING STATION
The overhead crane will be installed indoor above the main lifting station and will lift pumps
installed on the lifting station.
The crane will be carrying capacity 2 t x 4.15 m gauge (to be verified during the works and
according to max weight to be lift + 25%). The crane beam is done with profile. The connection
between beam and headroom is bolted. The carpentry of the crane is sized according to DIN 15018,
lifting class H2 and stress B3. The crane is designed for indoor service, under normal environmental
conditions and operating temperature range from -10 ° C to +50 ° C maximum.
Overhead crane complete with low headroom monorail trolley with hoist rope to traverse the
beam on the lower wing.
Headroom monorail trolley:
Class mechanism: FEM: 1Am / ISO: M4 with duration of 20% higher than
FEM (ISO)
Hook size: 2.5 according to DIN 15400
Hook travel: up to 4.0 m
Motors data (ca.) and working speed:

Main uplift: 4.5 m/min 5.30 kW 40%
Slow uplift: 0.8 m/min 0.80 kW 20%
Translation with inverter: 5.0-30.0 m/min 0.70 kW 60%
Sliding: 10.0/40.0 m/min 2x0.13/0.50 kW 40/40%
Control:
As specified in the paragraph “Power electric line”; sliding board along the bridge beam;
length of bowden 5.0 m
Power supply:
Power supply cart festooned with ribbon cable, including a ground wire
Electrical equipment:
The layout shall give a high working security according to the safety category 3 following the
EN 954 rules. Every connection of the flexible cables are vibration proof and plugged with
connectors on the modular plates. The power units are deactivated together with a disconnector.

Pag. 30
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Power type: According to SPECIFICATION VG 011

Operating voltage: According to SPECIFICATION VG 011
Frequency: According to SPECIFICATION VG 011
Control voltage: 48 V
Prerequisite for good sliding characteristics is that the crane way must be in perfect conditions
and shall follow the tolerances according to rule VDI 3576 – tolerance class 2 (in keeping with
DIN4132), or similar.
Power electric line:

Built compact and protected against accidental contacts.
The power line shall be made by 4 copper conductors: 3 for the phase and 1 ground; fixed in a
polyvinyl chloride shell (PVC). The drawing of the current shall be made with a trolley with sliding
contacts, which will act on the copper conductors. The line shall be dimensioned for supplying at
the edge. Shelves supporting the line shall be included.
Power Line length 13.10 m
Craneway:
Type: Rolled profile, HE kind, plate rail superimposed, rectangular shaped section, welded
sections, full buffers made of high absorbing power microcellulose, shimming plates bearing, to
compensate for any unevenness up to 20 mm, and not higher than 100 weight.
Color primer made of iron oxide, 30 micrometers coat.
Dimensioning shall be made according to DIN 4132.
Total craneway’s length is 11.10 m x 2
Full assembling:
Any possible cost of a chief assembler to assemble, to check and to start the working of the
overcrane head is included. Any possible cost of staff and equipment needed for the full assembly
of the plant is also included.
CE testing:
At the end of the assembly, the assembler shall do every test needed for the validation of the
CE mark, or similar

Pag. 31
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION CP 106 – HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMP FOR HIGH LIFTING

STATION
The horizontal centrifugal pump will be installed in the high lifting station house located in
the WTP. The pump will be lift the disinfected water from the WTP to the screen section of the
WTP.

- Flow (l/s) = 20 45 60
- Head (m) = 345 320 250
- Liquid to lift = disinfected water

bearings.
inlet version.

Pag. 32
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

Pag. 33
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION GA 107 - AUTOMATIC FINE SCREENING
Installation characteristics
The grid will be installed in the screening sector and it will treat the raw water entering the
WTP
The screening duct will be of the following sizes:
- Width : m 0.75
- Height : m 1.70
- max level of raw water in the pit: about m 0.77 upstream of the grid;
Operating characteristics
The screen will satisfy the following functions:
- will be able to filter a sewage peak flow equal to 40 l/sec.
- will be able to filter both bigger materials and smaller and fine ones, suspended and floating
in the sewage, such as cotton swaps and other similar objects.
The grid must have the following main features:
- Max. filterable flow rate = 40 l/sec
- Spacing and degree of filtration equal to 3 mm, which must be able to contain solid materials
greater than 3 mm.
- Devices for automatic cleaning of the filtering surface, able to minimise the assistance service
and the controls from the operative staff of the installation.
- Automatic starting device linked in time to a control level.
- Suitable protection devices of all the moving parts to meet the current regulations concerning
safety.
- Engine as specification VG 011
Materials
The screen will consist of:
- The chassis for containing the anchor screen civil work will be made of stainless steel AISI
304;
- The filter element is made of stainless steel AISI 304;
- The grid must be provided with all the accessories required to allow the right operation of the
same.
All the components of the machinery must have a solid and accurate structure, made of high
quality material, with industrial parameters of reliability and durability.
Machinery, tools, components and wiring systems must be suitable to meet the current

Pag. 34
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
regulations concerning safety.

The grid must be equipped with stainless steel AISI 304 cover

Pag. 35
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION TC 108 - HORIZONTAL SCREW CONVEYOR
The horizontal screw conveyor will be placed at the service of the fine bar screening to collect
and remove the grits.
The horizontal screw to remove grits will be composed of:
- Supply hopper of the discharged material
- Tube storage of the spiral
- Spiral to move material (shaftless helical spiral)
- Discharge hopper
- Suitable engine for the field installation, provided with reduction gear (the motorisation will
be installed near the discharge area of the screw)
- Frame for supporting and anchoring the screw, made of profiles of suitable section.
Materials
Tube storage, hoppers, frame and nuts and bolts: Stainless steel AISI 304
Helical spiral: Special high-strength steel
Inner coating: High molecular weight polyethylene
Technical characteristics
Length : mm 7,500 (motor not included)
Nominal diameter : mm 350
Flow rate : t/h 1.7
Installed power : kW 1.5

Pag. 36
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION PB 109 - COMPACTOR FOR SCREENED MATERIAL
The compactor will be placed near the screen station of the raw water entering the system, in
the right way to receive the material from the transportation system and move it in the collection
bins.
Operating characteristics:
The compactor must have the following functions:
- Receiving the material which comes from the screen, compacting this material and move the
compacted material in the collection bins.
- The above-mentioned operations must happen without any material discharge on the ground
and, for this reason, the compactor must be provided with all the suitable devices for the
restraint of the material which has to be compacted.
- The compacted material will be given back with a content of S.S. at least equal to 50% in
volume.
- The separated sewage of the compactor will be directed to the internal drainage system of the
installation.
- The compactor will have construction characteristics which will allow regular maintenance to
be carried out and it will be provided with devices for the automatic washing of the same.
The compactor will be dimensioned and built to meet the above-mentioned operating features.
It will have the following main features:
- Minimum flow rate equal to 1.7 mc/h.
- It will be built with suitable materials and precautions for treatment of highly abrasive
materials.
It will be provided with the following components:
- Devices for the conveying of the material to the compactor.
- Screw compacting system, provided with suitable devices to avoid obstructions and
breakages, also when there are solid objects of bigger sizes.
- Automatic cleaning devices of the compactor, which can minimise the assistance service and
the controls from the operative staff of the installation.
- Control devices able to change the solid content of the compacted material.
- Automatic starting device linked to the grating station.
- Collecting and conveying device of the liquid separated from the lifting station of the
installation.

Pag. 37
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
- Suitable protection devices of all the moving parts to meet the current regulations concerning
safety.
Materials
- Carpentry construction: stainless steel AISI 304
- Bolts: stainless steel AISI 304
- Helical spiral: Special high-strength steel.

Pag. 38
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION CP 110 – CLARIFYING TANK RADIAL BRIDGE
The bridge is to be installed on a basin with a circular plan having the following
characteristics:
- Diameter (clarification): 12.50 m;
- Diameter (flocculation): 3.00 m;
- Average height of the outside (clarification): 3.10 m;
- Average height inside (flocculation): 3.20 m
- Bottom slope of the clarification: 16.40° ;
The bridge by means of suitable structures will be required to convey, into the channel pit, the
sludge that will settle on the bottom of the tank.
Central column made of concrete inside of which the water feed pipe and the electric feed
pipe are positioned. The central column supports the radial bridge and the sludge slow mixer.
Mobile bridge made of mild steel, having length = radius + 1/3, equipped with gratings,
handrails and toeplate according to the law.
The bridge is supported by a grease-lubricated slewing ring, connected to the bridge head by
means of a joint. The slewing ring is greased by means of proper greasers placed on the bridge.
At its extremity, the bridge is supported and pulled by a driving trolley fixed to the end of the
beam by bolts and locators assuring its perpendicularity. The trolley is also equipped with No. 2
rubbered wheels, one of which is drive and the other is idle. Both wheels are supported by shafts
with grease-lubricated bearings.
Gearbox with hollow shaft directly keyed to the drive wheel shaft and connected to trolley
frame by means of a reaction arm.
The motor shut-down is given by an electrical signal from a dynamometric cell which
connects the reaction arm to the trolley frame.
Grease-lubricated slewing ring, connected to the bridge head by means of a joint. Slip ring
for power supply.
Bottom scraper consisting of a series of blades (or a sole blade according to the diameter)
fixed to arms which are hinged to the bearing beam.
In this way, a perfect coupling between the scraping blades and the bottom can be achieved.

Pag. 39
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The bottom blades are equipped with neoprene lips and supported by nylon wheels which
prevent the lips from an excessive flexion.
Adjustable toothed weirs with Thompson profile, made of AISI 304L anchored to the
concrete ditch by means brackets and expansion bolts ( included in the supply).
The gate slow mixer is operated by a motorvariator. The blades must transmit such a power to
the water to achieve a speed gradient suitable for the water slow mixing. The relevant technical data
are mentioned in the para 1. The variator allows to change the speed gradient from a minimum
value of usually 20 sec-1 to about 40 sec-1.
Scum collection system consisting of:
• a skimmer consisting of a fixed part and a mobile and swinging one to convey the floating
scum and complete with neoprene lip;
• a scum box to be anchored to the basin, equipped with chutes and scum discharging pipe;
• a scum baffle made of galvanized Carbon Steel, anchored to the concrete ditch by means
brackets and expansion bolts.
Control panel on board
The sludge slow mixer, expected to work 24h/24, must be able to:
o Give to the water a continuous power of at least 0.5 kW;
It will be mainly composed of the following components:
a) slide frame for a moving installation, with a hoisting tackle
b) three-bladed helix
c) electrical engine
Ref. a) the installation frame will be completely made of galvanised steel profiles, built to
allow a quick introduction-extraction of the agitator in the tank and also, it will allow
the agitator to rotate in the horizontal plane.
Ref. b) The helix, which will be a three-bladed one with “marine” profile, must be made of
stainless steel AISI 316 and it must be properly balanced and will have a diameter of
between 500 and 700 mm.
Ref. c) The electrical engine, directly set on the helix shaft, will be a submersible one with a
shell in AISI 316, the number of the poles must be able to reach the required speed to
allow the agitator to work in the right way, speed must be between 100 and 120 rpm;
however the engine will correspond to the general lines of the specification VG 011.
Surface coating
Bolts and nuts: galvanized carbon steel.
Gratings: hot dip galvanized carbon steel.
All the equipment components are protected as follows:

Pag. 40
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
• white metal sand-blasting: Sa 2.5

Parts above water level:
• hot dip galvanized
Submerged parts:
• white metal sand-blasting: Sa 2.5
• complete cycle of food grade painting

Pag. 41
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION DA 111 – SUPPORT FOR FILTER BED AND WATER AND AIR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
The system shall be installed inside the filters in the filter bed.
it will support the filter bed and it will allow the passage of process water than water and air
backwash.
Each filter will have the following dimensional characteristics:
 Surface area = 9 m²
 Width = 2.50 m;
 Length = 4.00 m;
Each filter will have the following functional characteristics:
 Water flow for filter = 48.15 m³ / h;
 Backwash water flow rate = 180 m³ / h;
 Air flow backwashing = 180 m³ / h.
Construction characteristics and dimensions

The system will be essentially consists of two main components:
a) support structure in reinforced concrete plates;
b) nozzles of distribution .
Rf. a) the support structure will be made with panels of reinforced concrete (vibrated) Rck 30 with
dimensions 1.00 x 1.25 x 0.15 (more or less) with armor FeB 44K according to project
documents, the plates will have to bear this structure with the following loads:
 Load (from the top to the bottom): constituted by the difference in specific weight of the
filtering layer with respect to water 2.2 ton / m³ - 1 ton / m³ = 1.2 ton / m³ for the height
of the filtering layer equal at 1.3 m = 1.56 ton / m², to which is added the maximum
pressure drop of the filtering layer (meter of water column ) m.w.c 2.41 = 2.41 ton / m².
For a maximum total load agent downwards equal to: 1.56 + 2.41 = 3.97 ton / m².
 Load (from the bottom to the top): constituted by the pressure of the air cushion below
the plate equal to the pressure drop through the nozzles of the mixture of air and water
calculated in 3 m.w.c for a load of 3 tons / m², from which to subtract the thrust of the
liquid column height of the overflow for muddy water m.w.c = 3.72 for a total = 3.72 ton
/ m², and the load from the top down consists of the difference in specific weight
between filtering layer and water to 1.56 ton / m². For a counter from down upwards
equal to: 3,00 – 3.72 - 1.56 = - 2.28 ton / m².
The plates will have adequate embedded sleeves for nozzles with diameter of 1.1 / 4 ", but
not less than 49; the sleeves will be completed of caps for the positioning and protection
coupling.

Pag. 42
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The sleeves (length 150 mm) are made of polypropylene suitable to embed into the
reinforced concrete equipped with female threads adapted to mate with one of the nozzles
protected by special cap; mounting adapter sleeve on the formwork.
Alternatively and depending on the type of nozzles, the supplied sleeves can be replaced
by a suitable number of holes of suitable diameter.
The plates will be complete with steel hooks to lift and they will be resting on supports
and pillars made of reinforced concrete as part of the civil works.
Ref b): The nozzles shall be made of polypropylene long shank type with vertical slot for
backwashing and air inlet poppet valve with 0.5 mm slot width and total area of
distribution not less than 480 sq. mm, stem length not less than 280 mm such as to protrude
not less than 100 mm from the plate.
Male thread of the first part of the stem adapted to mate with the embedded sleeves in the
plates.
Alternatively the thread, for coupling to the sleeves, may be replaced with a system of
fixing rings, able to ensure correct positioning and fixing of the nozzle with the holes on
the plate, respecting that: on each plate will be mounted a suitable number of nozzles for
the distribution, but not less than 49.

Pag. 43
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION GP 112 – PRODUCTION AND DISTRIBUTION AIR GROUP
The compressor, the drying system and lubrication will be installed in the same room in
which it will be placed where the blower operate and they must be able to feed the solenoid control
valves of the pneumatic actuators subservient to the butterfly valves installed in the field.
The following describes the main characteristics of the equipment covered by this
specification.
AIR COMPRESSOR
Yield and operating characteristics
The compressor must be single with a working pressure not less than 8 bar with a reservoir
with a capacity of at least 200 liters.
The compressor will be equipped with all safety systems for pressure vessels, under existing
law, as well as with a pressure switch for manual reset and an automatic starting device.
The electric motor, according to VG 011.
The engine of the compressor and the tank will be mounted on a single frame fitted with anti-
vibration supports suitable for attachment to reinforced concrete structures
DRYER
Yield and operating characteristics
In order to avoid the formation of condensate in the compressed air distribution piping, it
must be placed downstream of the compressor operates a refrigerant dryer having the following
characteristics:
 capacity with a temperature of 35 ° C: 350 l / min;
 Power: 230 V 50 Hz
 attacks: ½ ";
 maximum operating pressure: 16 bar.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
The lubrication system is of the type oil mist and must be installed downstream of the dryer
and must be of adequate size to ensure the correct lubrication of the entire system of distribution of
compressed air.
PRESSURE CONTROL
On each of the three manifolds compressed air supply to pneumatic actuators of the butterfly
valves must be provided with pressure reduction valves.
Constructional characteristics and yield
 connections: threaded ½ "gas;
 Pressure control: 0 to 8 bar

Pag. 44
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION SF 113 - VOLUMETRIC BLOWER
The blower shall be installed in a suitable building.The blower must send the compressed air
to the backwash system.
Rendering data
- Gas to be aspirated : air
- Flow rate : 180 Nmc/h
- Prevalence : 8.00 m
The blower must be a volumetric lobe one and its rotation can be clockwise and
anticlockwise.
When blowers work regularly with silencers setting on the induction and discharge pipes, the
blowers must have the max noise level not more than 80 dBa.
- Blowers : in cast iron
- Rotors : in ductile iron
- Coupling with engine : direct through flexible coupling
- Rotor-casing shafts : in chrome-nickel steel cemented and rectified
- Aspiration and discharge pipe : vertically opposed with flange UNI/PN 10
The blower must be composed of a base and a coupling joint with the engine inside the
cabinet.
Accessories:
The blowers must be provided with the following accessories:
- Silencer for aspiration and discharge pipe.
- Spring and plate safety valve calibrated for the required work
- Glycerine filled gauge to check pressure on the discharge pipe
- Air filter on the aspiration pipe
- Cabinet against noise
Electrical engine:
As in specification VG 011.

Pag. 45
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VV 114 - COOLING VENTILATION GROUP
The ventilation group, composed of a centrifugal ventilator with impeller directly set on the
engine shaft, shall be installed on a suitable base and near the room to be cooled, in particular the
cooling ventilation group shall be installed on the roof of the filter building.
The aspiration group must have the following rendering characteristics:
- Aspiration flow rate at least equal to: 5,000 Nm³/h
- Differential pressure not less than: 150 mm
- Element to be aspirated : air
The aspirator, a centrifugal one with lateral duct, will be composed of the following
components:
a) impeller
b) aspirator and conveyor
c) impeller supports
d) electric engine
e) connection between the aspirator and the conveying duct
f) accessories
The provided aspiration and conveying system will be composed of ducts made of rigid 100
UPVC pipes, with abutments in concrete for the buried part and supported with galvanized steel
stirrups for the visible part.
Components description:
Ref. a) The impeller, independently from the shape and number of blades, must be made of
synthetic material, it must be suitably dimensioned to guarantee the required performances,
and it will be electronically balanced and coupled directly with the engine shaft.
Ref. b) The ventilator will be made of UPVC., suitably rigidified and assembled with nuts and bolts
in stainless steel.
Ref. c) The impeller must be supported on suitable spherical bearings able to completely absorb
both centrifugal forces and axial ones. The bearings will be placed on suitable supports
easy to disassemble for the extraordinary maintenance. It will be also provided with a
suitable lubrication system of the moving parts.

Pag. 46
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Ref. d) The electrical engine, directly setting on the ventilator, must be suitable to operate outdoor
with protection level IP 56 (hose jet).
Ref. e) The joint between the aspirator and the conveying duct must be realised through a special
connecting piece between the discharge pipe of the machinery (rectangular) and the duct
(circular) with an anti-vibration interposed joint suitably dimensioned. The union between
the parts must be realised through flanges, seals and nuts and bolts in stainless steel.
Ref. f) The aspirator must be provided with plate check valve, type Wafer on the discharge pipe, the
valve must be dimensioned according to the low differential pressure generated by the
machinery and must be a stainless steel AISI 304 cover in according to the drawings.
Cover for fan should be installed on the roof of the filter building and is made in stainless

Pag. 47
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION VV 115 - COOLING VENTILATION GROUP
The ventilation group, composed of a centrifugal ventilator with impeller directly set on the
engine shaft, shall be installed on a suitable base and near the room to be cooled, in particular the
cooling ventilation group shall be installed on the roof of the filter.
- Aspiration flow rate at least equal to: 500 Nm³/h
components:
a) impeller
d) electric engine
f) accessories
in stainless steel.

Pag. 48
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

Pag. 49
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION FS 116 – VENTILATION, SOUNDPROOFING AND FILTERING

SYSTEM FOR BLOWER ROOM
The system shall be installed in the blower room to reduce the blower noise.
The system must be able to guarantee a soundproofing of the blowers room loopholes,
because all the aspiration system of the blowers must be placed in the above-mentioned area.
The system must be composed essentially of the following functional groups:
- Filtering group of the aspirated air equally composed of only one filter installed in a general
aspiration collector.
The ventilation and filtering group must be dimensioned and composed according to the
features of the whole air production installation, all must have a flow rate not less than 5,000
Nmc/h.
- Soundproofing of the blowers room loopholes composed of sound absorbing devices installed
in the ventilation loopholes of the air production area made to allow aspirated airflow of the
blowers.
The size of the openings and the features of the sound absorbing devices will be defined
according to the features of the whole air production group, all must have a flow rate not less
than 5,000 Nmc/h.
The whole group must be realised to meet the current regulations concerning safety and must
meet the regulations on safety and hygiene in workplaces.
Materials
Carpentry construction: galvanized steel.

Pag. 50
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION PC 117 - HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMP FOR

BACKWASHING FILTERS
The horizontal centrifugal pump shall be placed at the service of the backwash stage of the
filters unit and will be set indoor, in a suitable building. The pump shall lift the filtered water from
the wet well of the filters to the backwash system.

- Flow rate (l/s) = 10 25 32
- Head (m) = 13 11.50 9
- Liquid to lift = filtered water for backwashing

bearings.
inlet version.

Pag. 51
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

Pag. 52
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION CP 118 – OVERHEAD CRANE FOR FILTER BUILDING
The overhead crane will be installed inside the filter building and will lift machines that
require maintenance.
The crane will be carrying capacity 2 t x 7.65 m gauge (to be verified during the works). The
crane beam is done with profile. The connection between beam and headroom is bolted. The
carpentry of the crane is sized according to DIN 15018, lifting class H2 and stress B3. The crane is
designed for indoor service, under normal environmental conditions and operating temperature
range from -10 ° C to +50 ° C maximum.
FEM (ISO)

Sliding: 10.0/40.0 m/min 2x0.13/0.50 kW 40/40%
Control:
Power supply:

Pag. 53
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA


Craneway:
sections, full buffers made of high absorbing power microcellulose, shimming plates bearing , to
Full assembling:
CE testing:
CE mark, or similar

Pag. 54
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION GE 119 – STAND BY GENERATORS (SEE ANNEX: “RU_B_RP.05.3 -

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF WTP’S ELECTRICAL WORKS”)
SPECIFICATION SA 120 – UNDERGROUND GASOIL TANK (SEE ANNEX:

WORKS”)

Pag. 55
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION CS 121 – COOLING SYSTEM FOR ELECTRICAL BUILDING

The cooling system is made by: outdoor unit and internal split
OUTDOOR UNIT
Condensing unit in heat pump systems to refrigerant flow Variable controlled by Inverter
Technology dc, modular structure for side-by-side installation of more external drives, with the
ability to connect up to 40 indoor units with a minimum capacity of 2.2Kw.
 Structure in self-supporting steel equipped with front panel removable, painted with
treatment suitable to protect it from weathering.
 Grid for expulsion of the air in resin.
 A hermetic compressor type TWIN ROTARY at magnetic reluctance high efficiency driven
by inverter dc + 3 SCROLL compressors ON/OFF.
 Fans consisting of fans of helical type high-efficiency ,molded resin, which allow a
reduction of the noise levels as compared to conventional fan; motors controlled by inverter
technology in direct current, with a reduction of 50% of the electrical consumption
compared to conventional motors.
 De-icing system, during winter, the batteries made without cycle reversal by by-pass valves
hot gas.
 Safety devices supplied: high pressure switch, safety thermostat of the fan, overload
protection devices for inverter, microprocessor for the control and complete management of
self-diagnosis, automatic backup (in case of failure to a compressor the system deactivates
and continues to work with the remaining compressors).
 Link electric communication between external and internal by single digital line (two poles
not polarized and shielded).
 The addressing of the units takes place in an automated way (without micro switches on the
internal units to program) for a more easy and quick to install.
INTERNAL UNIT (SPLIT)

Internal drives to install in the individual environments of the models described below, are of
the type specifically provided for by the same manufacturer for external drives. The units are of the
type to vista for installation to a wall or the floor.
 Mobile plastic faceplate.
 Air Filter can be regenerated.
 Battery of heat exchange in copper tubes and fins to aluminum plate with high efficiency.
 Tangential Fan directly coupled to the electric motor single-phase.
 The silencer must be:

Pag. 56
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
o on channel a rectangular section at the exit from UTA;

o Frame: in galvanized steel minimum thickness 15/10 mm;
o Partitions: absorbing areas;
o sound absorbing material: certificate in class 1, moisture-resistant, protected against
the cleavage, suitable for a maximum air velocity of 20 m/s, in part covered with
galvanized sheet;
o Connections: flanged;
Operating characteristics of the machines constituting the group:

 CS 121
- Thermal power: 46,000 BTU/h
- Number of internal unit: 2

Pag. 57
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION CT 122 – FILTRATION PACKAGE

Formation of the filter bed to be realized within the individual sectors of filtration, which
must be made with the following materials and according to the following modalities:
 supply and laying of washed gravel of sizes between 38 to 54 mm for the formation of
the base layer of the filter bed that will have a thickness equal to the amount indicated
in the design drawings and in any event not less than 20 cm, including the work
required for installation inside the individual areas of filtration and expenses for the
next laying (by hand) of the layer;
 supply and laying of washed gravel of sizes between 16 to 23 mm for the formation of
 supply and laying of washed gravel of sizes between 5.6 to 8 mm for the formation of
 supply and laying of washed gravel of sizes between 2 to 2.8 mm for the formation of
the intermediate layer of the filter bed that will have a thickness equal to the amount
indicated in the design drawings and in any event not less than 15 cm, including the
work required for installation inside the individual areas of filtration and expenses for
the next laying (by hand) of the layer;
 supply and laying of washed quartz sand of sizes between 0.5 to 1 mm for the
formation of the surface layer of the filter bed that will have a thickness equal to the
amount indicated in the design drawings and in any event not less than 75 cm,
including the work required for installation inside the individual areas of filtration and
expenses for the next laying (by hand) of the layer.

Pag. 58
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION GP 123 – PRESSURIZATION SET FOR POTABLE WATER
The pressurization set for potable water (booster set) shall be installed indoor the pumping
station building – High lift pump - and shall lift potable water to all users internally to WTP.
The booster set shall have the following design characteristics:
- Flow rate in m3/h = 3.00
- Heads in meters = 24.00
- Liquid to be treated = potable water coming from the storage tank
- Working time = 24h/24
The booster set shall be composed by:
a) 2 centrifugal pumps;
b) 2 expansion tanks;
c) Electrical panel;
d) Accessories.
a) Vertical centrifugal pumps, with cast iron body and impeller, shaft seal stuffing box,
monoblock, three-phase closed and ventilated motor, inlet ND 2" outlet ND 1",
adjustment by inverter. The main features are: capacity: 2 mc/h, head: 35 m;
b) Expansion tank with membrane with 100 liters capacity;
c) Electrical control and monitoring cabin equipped with: Switch with Manual, 0, and
Automatic functions; Power Protection - Relay for exchange and automatic operation
of pumps sequence; all contained in plastic cabinet with IP55 protection;
d) Shut-off valves, instrumentation, ball valves supplied with the expansion tanks,
suction and discharge valves, check valves for each installed pump, outlet pressure
gauges.
Materials
Stainless steel AISI 304

Pag. 59
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION CP 124 – OVERHEAD CRANE FOR LIFTING STATION
The overhead crane will be installed indoor the high lifting station and will lift out of order
pumps and other parts.
FEM (ISO)

Sliding: 10.0/40.0 m/min 2x0.13/0.50 kW 40/40%
Control:
Power supply:

Pag. 60
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA


Craneway:
Full assembling:
CE testing:
CE mark, or similar

Pag. 61
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION CP 125 – OVERHEAD CRANE FOR EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL

POWER BUILDING
The overhead crane will be installed indoor the emergency electrical power building and will
lift out of order parts of emergency generator.
FEM (ISO)

Sliding: 10.0/40.0 m/min 2x0.13/0.50 kW 40/40%
Control:
Power supply:

Pag. 62
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA


Craneway:
Full assembling:
CE testing:
CE mark, or similar

Pag. 63
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION SM 126 - EXTINGUISHER WALL
Installation:
The fire extinguisher is to be installed inside the premises to fire risk and will be fixed to one of the
walls of the room.
Construction:
Type portable fire extinguisher with metal casing type, capacity 6 kg, powder-purpose classes of
fire 34ABC, rechargeable type, complying with regulations in force at the time of the contract and
complete with accessories and includes the necessary documentation, signage and forbidden as the
standard rules.

Pag. 64
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION AT 127 – AIR TANK
Installation Characteristics
The air tank (water-hammer arrester tank) will be installed on reinforced concrete basement
into WTP and will be connected to transmission line to users.
The water-hammer arrester tank must have a minimum capacity of 3 m³, anyway it must
contain the water hammer of the transmission line to users.
In principle, the water-hammer arrester tank will consist of the following parts:
- Membrane food butyl air/water separator
- Vertical layout
- Manhole
- Equipment level with its protections and gauges isolation
- Gauges

Pag. 65
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION PC 201 - SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP FOR SLUDGE
The pump must be installed in the equalization tank to lift sludge to thickener.

- Flow rate = 5 l/sec.
- Head = 4.50 m
- Liquid to treat = recirculation sludge
- Operation = 24h/24
The pump must be submersible with recessed impeller, incorporated electric motor, equipped
with automatic coupling feet and guide rails.
- Pump body, stator housing, impeller = in special cast iron
- External bolts, in contact with the liquid = in stainless steel
- Mechanical seals on the shaft = mechanical with interposed oil chamber with fixed
and rotating rings in tungsten carbide
- Wear ring = anti-clogging type
- Oil pressure inside the chamber = uniform with pressure balance
- Stator cooling = direct from the same liquid to be lifted
- Shaft = in carbon steel even if in contact with sewage
- Motor insulation = class F.
The materials of both the mobile and fixed parts in contact with the sewage shall be selected
so as to give maximum resistance from the abrasion of the sewage.
Pump selection will be made with appropriate safety measures taking into account that the
required head must be no more than 70% of the maximum head of the pumps.
Motor power
As in specifications VG 011
Accessories
- Feet with automatic coupling to the delivery pipe, attachment counter frame with flange type
UNI NP 10.
- Galvanized chain of adequate length for lifting and extraction of pump.
- Guide upper attachment to anchor in the pump well.
- n° 2 floating switches.

Pag. 66
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION PC 202 - SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP FOR SLUDGE
The pump must be installed in the thickener tank to lift the sludge to drying beds.

- Flow rate = 5 l/sec.
- Head = 4.50 m
- Liquid to treat = recirculation sludge
- Operation = 24h/24
The pump must be submersible with recessed impeller, incorporated electric motor, equipped
with automatic coupling feet and guide rails.
- Pump body, stator housing, impeller = in special cast iron
- External bolts, in contact with the liquid = in stainless steel
- Mechanical seals on the shaft = mechanical with interposed oil chamber with fixed
and rotating rings in tungsten carbide
- Wear ring = anti-clogging type
- Oil pressure inside the chamber = uniform with pressure balance
- Stator cooling = direct from the same liquid to be lifted
- Shaft = in carbon steel even if in contact with sewage
- Motor insulation = class F.
The materials of both the mobile and fixed parts in contact with the sewage shall be selected
so as to give maximum resistance from the abrasion of the sewage.
Pump selection will be made with appropriate safety measures taking into account that the
required head must be no more than 70% of the maximum head of the pumps.
Motor power
As in specifications VG 011
Accessories
- Feet with automatic coupling to the delivery pipe, attachment counter frame with flange type
UNI NP 10.
- Galvanized chain of adequate length for lifting and extraction of pump.
- Guide upper attachment to anchor in the pump well.
- n° 2 floating switches.

Pag. 67
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION DR 301 – DISINFECTANT SOLUTION PREPARATION SYSTEM
The disinfectant solution preparation system will be installed inside the chemical building
(near the storage tank), water will be supplied by the withdrawal pump and eventually the system
shall convey the solution to the dosing pumps.
The system shall be capable of continuously dosing the required amount of disinfectant
solution into the treated water 24x7.
The disinfectant solution preparation system shall generate active chlorine from electrolysis of
Sodium Chloride (salt) or any other safe and robust process/technology approved by the Engineer
which implies the use of Sodium Chloride as main input material.
A softener unit shall be integrated in the system, in order to prevent the formation of lime
deposits.
The Contractor shall also provide an amount of salt tablets able to satisfy the estimated
consumption for 6 months after the commissioning of the WTP, in accordance with the instruction
of the Engineer. The salt tables shall comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations, and in
particular with EN 16401:2013 “Sodium chloride used for electrochlorinator systems”.
The Contractor shall also supply all the needed chemicals (if any) and the spare parts
recommended by the manufacturer, in order to ensure the correct functioning of the system for 6
months after the commissioning of the WTP.
Construction and operating characteristics:

Minimum Brine tank volume 200 liter
Max total size of the disinfectant solution preparation system (incl. brine tank) 3mX1m
Minimum concentration of Free Active Chlorine in the prepared solution 500 mg/L
Minimum capacity of the preparation system 190 gFAC/h
Max Salt consumption during operation 16 gNaCl/gFAC produced
Electrical connections 3 x 400 V / 50 Hz
Max Power Consumption 5.4 kW
Ambient temperature min./max. in °C +5 to +40
The disinfectant solution preparation system shall be equipped also with:
1. Analyser;
2. Ventilation group.

Pag. 68
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1. The analyser with polarising cell (without carbon column) suitable for measuring free
or total chlorine. The unit consists of two separately mounted items, a transmitter and
residual cell. The cell is fitted with a solenoid valve which closes preventing sample
water entering so polarising the electrodes and causing the cell output to fall and
stabilise. The polarised cell is immediately responsive to further chlorine readings.
The cell which is covered with a UV protective cover. The analyzer is complete of:
Transmitter mounted IP54 enclosure which provides a 4-20 mA isolated signal for re-
transmission to separate control provided by others. Four sets of volt free contacts for
HIGH and LOW chlorine level alarms are also included. The transmitter scale and
outputs are programmable.
2. The ventilation group is composed of a centrifugal ventilator with impeller directly set
on the engine shaft, shall be installed on a suitable base and near the room to be
cooled, in particular the cooling ventilation group shall be installed on the wall of the
chemical building.
- Aspiration flow rate at least equal to: 100 Nm³/h
components:
a) impeller
d) electric engine
f) accessories
in stainless steel.

Pag. 69
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

Pag. 70
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION PC 302 – HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMP
The horizontal centrifugal pump will be installed indoor the chemical building and will draw
filtered water from the mixing section tank and send it to the preparation system of the disinfectant
solution.

- Flow = as per disinfectant solution preparation system’s manufacturer recommendation
(depending on solution’s concentration)
- Head = 80
- Liquid to lift = filtered water

- Stainless steel AISI 304 pump body with a design pressure of twice the operating pressure.
- The impeller must be recessed and in stainless steel AISI 304.
- The stainless steel shaft motor supported by ball bearings has a diameter in the intermediate
area above the diameter in relation to the bearings.
- The bearings must be protected by appropriate seals to prevent leakage and against leakage of
the lubricating oil.
- The pump body and impeller are provided with replaceable wear rings.
- The couplings joints are elastic with or without spacer protected by a joint cover in sheet
metal fixed to the base of the pump.
- The base should be made in metal profiles that are sufficiently rigid it must ensure continuous
alignment between motor and pump.
- Both flanges shall be in accordance with BS PN 16. The upper part of the flange will be
flattened or rolled at the holes for the coupling bolts.
The electric motor will be as provided in the specification VG 011 and protected to IP 68.

Pag. 71
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION PD 303 - METERING PUMP
The metering pump will be installed to dose the disinfectant solution into mixing section tank.
Operation and performance characteristics:

Considering the service requirements, the metering pump shall have the following
characteristics:
- Flow = as per disinfectant solution preparation system’s manufacturer
recommendation (depending on solution’s concentration)
- Prevalence = 10.00 m
- Fluid to be lifted = disinfectant (hypochlorite) solution at ambient temperature
- Linear adjustment field = 60 100%
It will be required for a 24/24 h continuous service.
The metering pump will be of the membrane-type and it will mainly consist of:
- 400/50 Hz electric motor as required in the VG 011 specification.
- Pump body in nodular cast iron or in lightweight alloy derived from fusion and subsequent
machine tool manufacturing
- Flow regulation device composed of rpm variable-speed motor or piston travel positioner for
eccentric mean, crank or vernier
- Inlet piston in stainless steel with appropriate diameter
- Output head equipped with:
a) dual retain ball valves both on the intake and output
b) pierced flanged attachments
The pump shall be realized with such a criterion that the replacement of the parts more subject
to wear will not require the disassembling of the line tubes or accessories.
The pump will be predisposed for the automatic positioner housing.

Pag. 72
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION SS 304 – DISSOLVING GROUP OF ALUMINA
The dissolving group of alumina will be installed indoor of the chemical (alumina) building
and will be used for dissolved in the water the alumina dust.
The booster set shall be composed by:
a) Hopper for unloading of raw materials from bags;
b) Screw conveyor;
c) Sliding valve;
d) Dissolving tank
e) Electric board for dosing Al2O3.
a) Hopper for unloading of raw materials from bags, with:
o storage hopper
o hood with connection to general suction system
o shelf for supporting of bags width 750 mm
o safety grid
o Built in stainless steel (grid and hopper), carbon steel (hood)
b) Screw conveyor:
o tubular case diam. about 139 mm
o length approx 6,500 mm
o sloped 30°
o 1 inlet
o 1 outlet
o drive group with motorgear 2,2 kw approx
o built in stainless steel for parts contacting product
o supporting frame for screw conveyor, fixing on the floor built in tubular beam in
painted carbon steel
c) Sliding valve, square section ND 150 with:
o body and blade built in stainless steel
o pneumatic drive
o 2 magnetic switch
o electrovalve
d) Dissolving tank about diam. 3000 mm h=3200 mm (cap. 10,000 l) with:
o tubular beams of reinforcement on the perimeter
o cylinder
o concave bottom with rounded edge for an easy cleaning

Pag. 73
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
o 1 central outlet diam. 2"

o 1 inlet diam.2" (for liquids)
o 1 inlet diam 150 mm
o 3 supporting legs
The dissolving tank has an agitator with:
o gearmotor 2,2kW
o langed shaft
o twin bearing
o impeller adjustable in height
The dissolving tank and the agitator is built in stainless steel for the parts contacting products
The dissolving tank has a level indicator to measure maximum level with:
o 1 electrode
o length 250 mm
e) Electric board for dosing Al2O3
uses list:
o 1 motor of screw conveyor
o 2 valve at outlet of screw with 2 switch
o 1 dissolving motor
o 3 level indicators

Pag. 74
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION PD 305 - METERING PUMP
The metering pump will be installed into chemical building (flocculant building) to dose the
sulphate of aluminium (alumina) into the pits of flow divider , to aid solid removal.
Operation and performance characteristics:

Considering the service requirements, the metering pump shall have the following
characteristics:
- Flow = 0 100 l/h
- Prevalence = 8.00 m c.a.
- Fluid to be raised = ferric chloride at ambient temperature
- Linear adjustment field = 60 100%
It will be required for a 24/24 h continuous service.
The metering pump will be of the membrane-type and it will mainly consist of:
- 400/50 Hz electric motor as required in the VG 011 specification.
- Pump body in nodular cast iron or in lightweight alloy derived from fusion and subsequent
machine tool manufacturing
- Flow regulation device composed of rpm variable-speed motor or piston travel positioner for
eccentric mean, crank or vernier
- Inlet piston in stainless steel with appropriate diameter
- Output head equipped with:
a) dual retain ball valves both on the intake and output
b) pierced flanged attachments
The pump shall be realized with such a criterion that the replacement of the parts more subject
to wear will not require the disassembling of the line tubes or accessories.
The pump will be predisposed for the automatic positioner housing.

Pag. 75
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION CP 306 - OVERHEAD CRANE FOR CHEMICAL (ALUMINA)

BUILDING
The overhead crane will be installed inside the alumina storage room and will lift alumina
pallets.
The crane will be carrying capacity 2 t x 6.24 m gauge (to be verified during the works
FEM (ISO)

Sliding: 10.0/40.0 m/min 2x0.13/0.50 kW 40/40%
Control:
Power supply:

Pag. 76
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA


Craneway:
Type : Rolled profile, HE kind, plate rail superimposed, rectangular shaped section, welded
sections, full buffers made of high absorbing power microcellulose, shimming plates bearing , to
Full assembling:
CE testing:
CE mark, or similar

Pag. 77
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION ZX 401 – PRESSURE METER AND TRANSMITTER FOR PRESSURE

PIPES
Installation:
The meter transmitter will be placed on the power supply line of the raw water to WTP and it
will detect the fluid pressure in said line and send the signal of this value to the PLC into electric
board installed into pumping station house
Construction and working characteristics:

The measurement will be based on the principle of the change in electrical capacitance
resulting from the change of distance between a fixed electrode and another movable moved by the
pressure variation in antagonism to a contrast spring and will have to send the signal (analog) of this
value to the PLC into electric board installed into pumping station house, which must open and
close the motorized gate valves.
Technical characteristics:
- Installation: indoors in derivation of steel pipe ND 200
- Parts in contact with fluid: AISI 316
- Measuring range: 0 ÷ 12 bar
- Accuracy of at least + / - 0.5% of full scale
- Setting range: 0 to 6 bar
- Analog output signal: 4 to 20 mA
- Calibration: by surface reflection note
- Fluid temperature: +5 to +40 ° C
Materials and tools protections:

Electrical instruments will be of the appropriate type to meet the regulations on the safety.

Pag. 78
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION ZX 402 – AUTOMATIC SAMPLER
The automatic sampler will be installed inside a special protective cabinet, to be placed
outdoor near to the sampling point in order to have the minimum possible distance between the
sampling point and the automatic sampler. The container shall be suitable to outdoor environments.
The automatic sampler will consist of the following main components:
a) Completely autonomous suction sampling device.
b) Storage system of the samples in 24 bottles of 1,000 cc each, equipped with conditioning
system able to guarantee the perfect conservation of the taken samples.
c) Completely autonomous washing device of the sampling line.
d) Control device of all the functions of the sampler.
However, everything will be configured so as to satisfy the operating characteristics following
stated.
The automatic sampler will be able to autonomously provide for the cyclic sampling of water
samples and to their storage in 1,000 cc bottles.
These samples shall then be collected and sent to the laboratories for the analysis.
The sampler shall be configured so as to allow the customization of the sampling and storage
cycles and shall be set for the installation of the device that allows the activation of the sampling
cycles through a remote control; moreover, it shall be equipped with an automatic washing device
of the sampling line.
Materials and instrument protections:

All the system parts which come into contact with the fluid will be in inert material resistant
to wear, corrosion, etc.
The electric instruments will be of the type suitable to comply with the safety regulations in
force.
The metallic surfaces will be protected with an appropriate varnish cycle for environments
characterized by continuous and high moisture and maritime climates.

Pag. 79
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION ZX 403 – ULTRASONIC FLOW METER FOR TRIANGULAR WEIR
The flow meter shall be installed on the effluent pit of fine screen and shall measure the flow
sent to the CU by detecting the height of the raw water downstream the triangular weir.
The flow meter shall be ultrasonic type equipped with temperature compensation system to
obtain an accuracy level equal to  0.5%. The required meter shall perform the continuous
measurement of a flow that will vary from 0 120 l/s of raw water and with variable level from 0
60 cm. It shall be equipped with a local indicator of the flow with scale from 0 140 l/s, and shall
send the detected measure to the monitoring system.
The whole instrumentation will be composed of the following main parts:
a) No. 1 ultrasonic transducer with working field from + 0.30  0.80 from the H₂O maximum
level, complete with attachments, gaskets in OR rubber for the vibration dampening, cable for
direct connection to the data processing electronic card, everything suitable for immersion on
drain H₂O.
b) No. 1 temperature compensation probe with outflowing “proper variations” level of 0.01% for
each °C, equipped with cable for the direct connection to the electronic card, everything
suitable for immersion in sewage.
c) No. electronic complex, installed on varnished steel panel equipped with electric anti-
condensation heater, for the processing and conversion of the signals received both by the
ultrasonic transducer and the temperature detection probe having the following main
characteristics:
- sampling contacts every volume unit measured;
- IP 56 protection;
- 220 V 50 Hz power supply;
- -20  70°C exercise temperature;
d) 6 digit pulse totalizer of digital type to be installed on the door of the electronic unit described
in the previous point.
e) direct reading flow indicator (expressed in m³/h) with measurement field from 0  394 m³/h to
be directly installed on the door of the electronic unit;
f) No. 1 protection in clear plexiglass for electronic panel manufactured according to IP 67;
g) accessories and others for mounting and functioning.
h) devices for the transmission of the measure to the monitoring system.

Pag. 80
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION ZX 404 – TURBIDITY TRANSMITTER DEVICE
The flowmeter will be placed at the service of line for measurement of the turbidity of the
water sent to the filtration and water out from the filtration, it will be made of the type flow-meter,
and will be located within the local filtration.
The flow of the fluid for analysis shall be carried out through a pipe whose diameter is
dedicated, with the necessary shut-off and safety devices.
The fluid discharge will be made directly into the existing sewer system.
Construction and working characteristics

The measurement of turbidity will be of the continuous type on the fluid derived directly from
the intake piping, and must be able to continuously detect the value of the turbidity of the slurry,
and to send the signal (analog) to the PLC installed in the cabinet inside the filtration building.
The equipment will consist of the following main elements:
- Connections for sewage to be analyzed;
- Connections for clean water
- Various valves (gate valves, pressure reducers, valves, etc.).
- Plenum chamber
- Filter
- Light control circuit
- Measuring cell
- Room for reflection
- Light circuit
- Turbidity transducer / transmitter current full-amplifier with output signal 4 - 20 mA DC.
- Indicating instrument in the field with a scale compatible with the performance below.
Performance:
The instrument shall meet the following performance:
- Measuring range: 0 to 10 NTU (the instrument will not have to undergo any kind of
alteration: No right value for calibration, etc.. Even
in cases where the value of the turbidity of the fluid

Pag. 81
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
analyzed exceeds the limit of the measuring range:

max value found 15 NTU)
- Adjustment range: whole measuring range
- Accuracy of at least + / - 3% of full scale
- Power supply: 220 Volt, 50 Hz
- Calibration: by surface reflection note.

Pag. 82
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION ZX 407 – COMPRESSED AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUP
The group will be installed within local of the filtration, and it will be placed at the service of
butterfly valves and pneumatic control gates installed on the sand filters.
Yield characteristics and operating

The group must be able to implement the automatic movement of the pneumatic valves
according to the following characteristics:
- Air flow (compressor from ref. GP 112): not less than 350 l / min;
- Pressure: not less than 8 Bar;
- Pneumatic butterfly valves to move: n.8 of the ND 200;
- Pneumatic gates to move: n.32 of 300 x 600;
- Pneumatic gates to move: n.8 of 400 x 400.
the performance above must be considered as minimum benefits, the final size of the group
must be defined based on the type and characteristics of pneumatic actuators supplied.
The group should be composed of the following main parts:
a) equipment for command and control, such as: pressure, PLC and software for managing
sequence of opening and closing of the pneumatic valves, electric control panel, solenoid
valves, transducers, electro / pneumatic valves, safety valves;
b) flexible hoses for connection of distribution manifolds to the solenoid valves and
solenoid valves to pneumatic actuators;
c) facilities for automatic start-up;
d) containment framework of the solenoid valves and electro/pneumatic transducers both
places at the service of pneumatic actuators, with protection level compatible with the
electrical installation adopted.
e) accessories such as filters, connection terminals, pressure reducing valves, pressure
gauges, valves, condensate, oil mist lubricators, valves.

Pag. 83
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION ZX 406 – ULTRASONIC LEVEL METER AND TRANSMITTER
The level meter should be installed on all sections of filtration and the storage basin and
discharge of filter backwash.
Functional characteristics
The level meter, for each of the following parts of the line of filtration, must be able to:
- Determine the maximum level in each section of filtration, before that the emergency spillways
( weirs) go, and send its signal to the PLC installed in the building filtration;
- Detecting the maximum level in the accumulation section and the discharge of backwash water
before the entry into operation of the overflow of emergency, and send its signal to the PLC
installed in the building of filtration.
Performance:
Measuring range: variable, depending on the point of installation, up to a maximum of 10 m;
Cone width measuring no more than 3 °
Instrument accuracy = + / - 0.5% of full scale;
The level meter and transmitter shall consist of the following main components:
a) Group level detection consists of: No. 1 transmitter / receiver of ultrasound.
b) Group transducer signal / electrical current complete any amplifier with output signal of 4-
20 mA DC, able to send the signal to the PLC activation of the operations of backwashing
of the filters installed in the building of filtration.
c) Local meter with a measuring range compatible with the measuring range of the meter (ref.
Performance).
The meter must be of solid construction and accurate, made with top quality components,
with parameters of reliability and durability of industrial type.

Pag. 84
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION ZX 407 – DIGITAL DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE AIR FLOW METER
The instrument shall be installed on the pipe carrying the air flow produced by the blowers.
The measuring elements shall be installed inside the filters building. The electronic devices and the
display shall be installed in the administration building.
The instrument shall be able to:
1. Measure the discharge of the air flow sent to the treatment lines, in a range of 50  250
Nm³/h.
2. Make visible the measured value through digital indicator
3. Send the measure to the monitoring system
The air flow meter shall be normalized diaphragm type with support of double large annular
chamber.
It shall be provided with electrical transmitter, with mercury differential pressure gauge
system and variable-resistance electrical transducer.
All devices and accessories will be able to provide a local measure, on a linear scale. The
output signal will be of 4-20 mA.
The meter shall be provided with a local alphanumeric, liquid crystal display, showing the air
flow measure in different modifiable engineering units. It shall be provided with devices for the
transmission of the measure to the monitoring system.

Pag. 85
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION ZX 408 - TIME CONTROL DEVICE
The timer is the control system for the functioning of equipment such as: submersible pumps,
mixers, motorized gate valve, grids, etc., to be installed in the various sections of the system.
In the specific case, the timer shall control the functioning of the sludge lifting pumps
installed in equalization tank.
The timer shall be able to perform the following operations:
- providing the signal for the cyclic activation of each individual device, at programmable and
changeable intervals.
- providing the signal for stopping each individual device, at programmable and changeable
intervals.
As “cyclic activation” of the pumps is meant the activation performed so as to avoid the
consecutive start-up of the same device.
The timer shall also be suitable to allow the contemporaneous adjustment of the start-and-stop
cycles of all different devices served. Each individual cycle shall be adjusted with the following
time interval:
- 5 minutes minim interval
- 24 hours minimum interval
- 5 minutes adjustment intervals.
The timer shall be equipped with a control system able to prevent the simultaneous activation
of served devices, particularly in the case of automatic restart due to absence of electric power.
The timer device shall be composed by the following main components:
- Casing of the electronic and electric components with a protection grade not lower than
IP65.
- Control and command unit consisting of programmable microprocessor able to perform all
the functions described in the operating characteristics.
- Connection units to the served devices.

The electric instruments shall be suitable to comply with the safety regulations in force.

Pag. 86
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION ZX 409 - TIME CONTROL DEVICE
The timer is the control system for the functioning of equipment such as: submersible pumps,
mixers, motorized gate valve, grids, etc., to be installed in the various sections of the system.
In the specific case, the timer shall control the functioning of the sludge lifting pumps
installed in thickening tank.
The timer shall be able to perform the following operations:
- providing the signal for the cyclic activation of each individual device, at programmable and
changeable intervals.
- providing the signal for stopping each individual device, at programmable and changeable
intervals.
As “cyclic activation” of the pumps is meant the activation performed so as to avoid the
consecutive start-up of the same device.
The timer shall also be suitable to allow the contemporaneous adjustment of the start-and-stop
cycles of all different devices served. Each individual cycle shall be adjusted with the following
time interval:
- 5 minutes minim interval
- 24 hours minimum interval
- 5 minutes adjustment intervals.
The timer shall be equipped with a control system able to prevent the simultaneous activation
of served devices, particularly in the case of automatic restart due to absence of electric power.
The timer device shall be composed by the following main components:
- Casing of the electronic and electric components with a protection grade not lower than
IP65.
- Control and command unit consisting of programmable microprocessor able to perform all
the functions described in the operating characteristics.
- Connection units to the served devices.

The electric instruments shall be suitable to comply with the safety regulations in force.

Pag. 87
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION ZX 410 - ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION FLOW METER FOR

PRESSURE PIPES
The flow meter shall be installed in the High lift pumping station, on the ND 350 piping
which sends the drinking water to town.
The detection unit will be installed on the ND 350 piping, the effective flow meter stub pipe
diameter shall be established according to the technological characteristics of the provided
instrument and, anyway, shall not be lower than ND 150 (speed at the maximum flow: 5.03 m/sec).
The sensor stub pipe unit, the case containing the converter and the other electronic
components shall be physically separated.
The sensor stub pipe unit will be installed so as to have a minimum straight distance equal to:
- upstream the meter = 3 times the duct diameter
- downstream the meter = 2 times the duct diameter
The local indicator converter unit shall be installed on the on the bottom of the lifting station,
in such a position to allow an easy access to the maintenance staff.
The meter shall be able to:
 continuously measure the flow value in the outlet pipe;
 send the 4-20 mA analogic signal to the local display and to the monitoring system;
 detect the totalized volume with an un-resettable counter of fiscal type.
Even if, for long periods, the pipe shall remain empty or with a free surface these events shall
not, in any case, cause the system decalibration, or make necessary interventions of any type to
restore its functionality.
Furthermore, the meter shall be equipped with a zero automatic compensation device in
conditions of free surface or empty piping.
Performances:
Measurement field (speed) = 1.5 ÷ 10.0 m/sec;
Measurable minimum flow = 30 l/sec;
Use maximum flow = 150 l/sec;
Use standard flow = 90 l/sec;
Instrument accuracy = +/- 2% for fluid speeds comprised between 2.5 and 8.5 m/s.

Pag. 88
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Response times compatible with the signal sending times;

Functioning conditions: adequate to the continued functioning in all the seasons with climate
typical of the installation area and with the indicated installation characteristics.
The flow meter will consist of the following main components:
a) Flow detection unit composed of the following elements and main characteristics:
 PN 10 flanged stub pipe of a diameter to be defined according to the provided
instrument but not lower than the ND 150, body and flanges in painted carbon
steel, the body shall consist of dismountable elements (not welded) in order to
allow the service of the internal components;
 Measure pipe, measure electrodes, in AISI 316 stainless steel, internal coating in
hard rubber;
 IP 68 protection class.
b) Converter unit, local indicator, remote, able to receive the signals of the detection unit and to
process them, returning the measure of the flow on the pipe in conformity with what
indicated in the described performances. The unit shall be complete with:
 case in ABS or similar, equipped with a clear door and independent terminal
compartment, for the housing of all the components of the unit. IP 68 protection
class.
 devices and instruments for the acquisition, processing and transmission of data
and signals to the local display and to the monitoring system.
 alphanumeric LCD display for displaying instantaneous flow, totalized volume,
both expressed in engineering units, and the error signals.
 Programming keyboard.
c) Accessories for the mounting and installation of the meter and its components, included the
connection cables between the detection unit and the converter unit etc.
All the meter components shall be of solid and accurate construction, realized with premium
quality components, with reliability and accuracy parameters of industrial type.
The instruments and the electric systems shall be of the type suitable to comply with the
safety regulations in force.

Pag. 89
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION ZX 411 – PRESSURE METER AND TRANSMITTER FOR PRESSURE

PIPES
Installation:
The meter transmitter will be placed on the power supply line (ND 350) of the disinfected
water to town and it will detect the fluid pressure in said line and send the signal of this value to the
PLC into electric board installed on the WTP.
Construction and working characteristics:

The measurement will be based on the principle of the change in electrical capacitance
resulting from the change of distance between a fixed electrode and another movable moved by the
pressure variation in antagonism to a contrast spring and will have to send the signal (analog) of this
value to the PLC into electric board installed on the WTP.
Technical characteristics:
- Installation: outdoors in derivation of steel pipe ND 350
- Parts in contact with fluid: AISI 316
- Measuring range: 0 ÷ 12 bar
- Accuracy of at least + / - 0.5% of full scale
- Setting range: 0 to 6 bar
- Calibration: by surface reflection note
- Fluid temperature: +5 to +40 ° C
Materials and tools protections:

Electrical instruments will be of the appropriate type to meet the regulations on the safety.

Pag. 90
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION ZX 412 – MONITORING AND AUTOMATION SYSTEM
Description:
Monitoring and automation system will be organized on 2 levels:
 PLC level with N° 6 PLC to manage the plant. N° 1 PLC will be placed in control room and
N° 5 PLC will be installed respectively in Electrical Room (PLC-02), in Chemical building
(disinfectant) (PLC-03), Chemical Building (flocculant) (PLC-04), Filtering Building (PLC-
05), Pure water pumping station (PLC-06), Raw water pumping station (PLC-07), to control
the local processes.
 DCS (distributed control system), located in control room to supervise the PLC running,
with the possibility to manage the plant in order to have the maximum flexibility of the
control system.
To optimize the costs, the automation system will be organized with N° 7 PLC:
 PLC-1 in control room, to manage all other PLC.
 PLC (2/3/4/5/6/7) located on site to control: pump motors, blowers, motorized valves,
disinfection system, etc.
 DCS will be installed to supervise the PLC network running with the possibility to modify
sequences scheduled by PLC. A SCADA engineering working station will be dedicated to
this function; 2 others working station will control the process.
In particular, the PLC-05 will provide for the possibility to implement even manually
backwashing filters.
The transmission system is also to be equipped with instruments such as level transmitters and
Telemetry Remote Terminal Units (covered under separate Items in the BOQ) connected to the
envisaged Monitoring and Automation system, which will operate the water supply scheme
according to a specific logic.
A flowmeter is installed at the beginning (near the pure water pump station) of the rising main
to measure the amount of water pumped.
In case of High Level the level sensor installed in the MBR closes the Motor Operated Valve
installed at pump’s discharge. This action trips the pump and overflow of reservoir is avoided.
Pumps restart when the MBR level falls below a preset value (60% of tank height, to provide
sufficient water for peak hours). This value can be adjusted and calibrated according to the actual
daily water demand ascertained in the previous periods.
Besides, the pump is in any case stopped when the pure water storage tank level falls below
the Low Level preset value.

Pag. 91
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
All levels shall be set in such a way that both overflow events are prevented and acceptable
time intervals of the pump start-stop cycles are ensured.
In case of multiple pumps, sequence control of pumps shall be employed. Additional facility
of starting by time sequence or manual start when in ‘manual’ mode can be provided.
A prelarm shall be available for the operator to be aware of the impending problem before the
level reaches High value or Low value and the control system takes appropriate action.
This same control logic is applicable to the intake pumps, whose start and stop is commanded
by the levels in the WTP pure water storage tank and in the intake chamber, in place of the MBR
and the pure water storage tank respectively.
The instruments and the Telemetry Remote Terminal Units installed in remote locations
having no access to reliable power sources shall be battery-powered type. The battery life shall be
such as continuous operation of the devices is guaranteed for at least 4 years.
Control & communication System (PLC)

PLC have the task of manage commands and signals to and from the devices connected and to
transmit all data parameters collected from the field and buildings devices to the remote control
station.
This transmission function will be made by using a switch/transceiver linked together
primarily with a modem/network adapter (min. speed 56 Kb/sec) for data transmission via Internet
connection on physical cable.
The switch/transceiver (both in an expansion slot of PLC or standalone device) has the task to
convert signals from PLC, in a format managed by the modem/network adapter.
In order to allow data transmission from the base station, a contract with local Internet
provider will be signed.
It will be a feedback from transmission device that provide information to PLC of "normal" or
"fault" device and/or transmission condition.
A call management software facility will be implemented in the PLC device for programming
the modality for data transmission during normal condition and in case of fault, via modem/network
adapter or phone device.
The main PLC will be installed inside the Control Room and will have, at least the following
features:
 powerful performance, optimum modularity and open communications.

 the PLC programming tools must be very easy:

Pag. 92
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
 the required PLC has to be easy to program, allowing fast and easy realization of
applications
Open communication
 Built-in RS 485 interface with data transmission rates up to 187.5 kbit/s
 PPI protocol system bus for trouble-free networking
 Freeport mode programmable for user specific protocols for any peripheral devices
 Fast connection to PROFIBUS using the slave module
 Powerful connection to AS-Interface using the master module
 Communications anywhere using the modem module (for remote maintenance, tele-service
or tele-control)
 Connection to Industrial Ethernet via the Ethernet module
 Internet connectivity, e-mail, HTTP, and FTP server functionality using the Internet module
 PC Access – OPC Server for simple connection to the PC environment
Powerful performance
 Basic and advanced functionality are required
 Large program and data memory
 Outstanding real-time response – being in total command of the entire process at any time
means increased quality, efficiency and safety
 Easy-to-use engineering software – it must be simple for both beginners and experts
Systems engineering:
 Distinct CPUs in the performance range with comprehensive basic functionality and
integrated Freeport communications interface
 A wide range of expansion modules for various functions:
 Digital/analog expansions, scalable to specific requirements
 PROFIBUS communication as a slave
 AS-Interface communication as a master
 Exact temperature measurement
 Remote diagnostics
 Ethernet/Internet communications

Pag. 93
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
 SIWAREX MS weighing module

 HMI functions
 Compelling systems engineering – now featuring precise dimensioning and optimum
solutions for a wide range of different requirements for the complete automation task
DCS Control and monitoring System

A correctly designed DCS control system is essential for the safe and efficient operation of
the water process plant. The Supplier will provide a qualified and experienced instrument and
control system with engineers and technicians that will review the P&I diagrams in detail to
determine if the DCS control system will meet the needs of the water plant Customer.
A simplified P&ID diagram of the water supply scheme is provided in the following Figure.

Pag. 94
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Particular attention is to be paid to DCS control system feed-forward, feedback, and cascade
control systems. Although final tuning of DCS control system controllers can only be done with the
plant in operation, the initial setting of the controller tuning coefficients is essential for a smooth
start-up of the process. Suppliers engineers and technicians will utilize results from dynamic model
simulations, process flow-sheets, and equipment sizes to estimate the impact of dead-time and
equipment holdup times on DCS control system tuning coefficients for the various processing units
throughout the process.
The process variables sent to a DCS control system include pressure, level, and flow sensors.
Qualified and experienced instrument and control system engineers and technicians of the Supplier
will provide valuable insights and consultation regarding the reliability and accuracy of a variety of
sensors.
Experienced instrument technicians must pre-commission DCS controls and provide a

preliminary set of parameters that will provide for a smoother and more orderly start-up of process
units utilizing accurate P&IDs.
The system, will be as minimum composed by:
 Switch for the connection to Control Room PLC

 Nr. 2 Working station with a Led monitor not less than 24 inches
 Nr. 1 Working station for SCADA system engineering

Pag. 95
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
 Nr. 1 Color printer

 Nr. 1 router to allow the internet connection.
 Nr. 1 firewall device

Pag. 96
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION ZX 413 – WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT

 workshop equipment
 Electrical -Arc Welding Machine Suitable for using in a workshop N. 1

 Diesel- Arc Welding Machine Suitable to draw by a Tractor N. 1
 Electrical -Arc Welding Machine Suitable to handle by hand N. 2
 battery charger N. 1
 Hammer-Drilling Machine N. 1
 Drilling Machine N. 2
 Gear-Drilling Machine N. 1
 Portable-Grinding Machine Small N. 2
 Portable-Grinding Machine Big N. 2
 Fixed-Grinding Machine Medium size N. 1
 Chain Block 1-Ton N. 2
 High Pressure Pump To wash the basins N. 1
 sockets (To Open Bolts) Up to 30mm N. 2 Set
 Grease Pump N. 4
 Oxy-Estelline Welding Set Contain-Botteles,hand,hoses,Etc… N. 2
 Milling Machine Size 2 N. 1
 Fixed Gear Drilling Machine N. 1
 Air Compressor Suitable for workshop N. 1
 Outsite pullar 2'',4'',6'',10'',12'' N. 1
Each
 Inside Pullar 2'',4'',6'',10'',12'' N. 2
Each
 Hydraulic Jack 2-Ton N. 2
 Press bench Suitable for workshop N. 1
 Hydraulic Jack 5-Ton N. 2
 F-Key 12'',14'',24'' N. 2-
Each
 Adjestable Spanner 8'',12'',15'' N. 2-
Each
 Complete Machanical Tool Kit With Steel Box, Suitable to carry by hand N. 4-Set
 Complete Electrical Tool Kit With Steel Box, Suitable to carry by hand N. 4-Set
 Slide Gauge Up To 30Cm/S.Steel N. 5
 Portable Cutting Machine 24'' Disck N. 1

Pag. 97
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
 Ring Plier -Inside-Outside Different sizes N. 2 Set

 Vise Up to 8''/Steel Material N. 1
 Vise Up to 6''/Steel Material N. 1
 Taps M6-M8-M10-M12-M14-M16-M18-M20 N. 4
Set-Each
 Tap-Hand 4
 Dies M6-M8-M10-M12-M14-M16-M18-M20 N. 4-
Each
 Die Hand N. 4
 Steel Wire 1/4'' 40L.M
 Shackles Different sizes N. 50
 Easy Out Up To 30mm N. 2-Set
 Easy Out Hand N. 2
 Tongue Hand N. 2
 Bubble Level N. 4
 Hummer 2 Kg N. 4
 Hummer 4 Kg N. 4
 Torque Hand Medium N. 1
 Torque Hand Big N. 1
 Ring-Spanner Size 41 N. 4
 Welding Rod 6013*2.5mm N. 10
Pockets
 Welding Rod 6013*3.25mm N. 10
Pockets
 Welding Rod S.S 316*2.5mm N. 10
Pockets
 Grinding Disc Small For Grinding N. 24
Pcs
 Grinding Disc Big For Grinding N. 24
Pcs
 Grinding Disc Small For Cutting N. 24
Pcs

Pag. 98
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
 Grinding Disc Big For Cutting N. 24

Pcs
 Drill Set Up to 25mm N. 4-Set
 Drill for hummer drilling machine N. 2-Set
 Tools and instrument
 N. 1 hydraulic press machine for cable shoes fixing complete with dies for fixing (10-
630)mm cable.
 N. 1 draw-off tackler for coupling and bearing in pumps and another one motor
bearings.
 N. 1 Venire (1 set) and micrometer
 N. 1 steel rulers.
 N. 2 Universal test indicator set with Knuckle joint holder and magnetic base. 2 Set of
files, 2 sets of Allen Keys, 3 set of pliers, set of curved and half round bearing scraper,
4 sets of heavy duty screw driver, 4 set of Adjustable spanners.
 N. 2 ton 1 chain block
 N. 1 Electric pipe cutter with 24 spanners wheel.
 N. 1 lifting trolley hydraulic type
 N. 2 hydraulic jack for vehicles up to 2 tons weight
 N. 2 elect driven flushing pumps on trolley capacity 250m3/hr at 20m head, complete
with 5m suction hose and 50m, delivery hose (5m pieces) with 20m power cable.
 N. 4 complete set of chlorine handling suit with head cover and breather hinge with
small air bottle.
 N. 2 battery operated frock lifting capacity of 2 Tons complete with Battery charges.
 N. 5 small submersible pumps with floating switches.
 Portable compressor to be used for cleaning switch gear and for painting with spray
gun and 5m long flexible rubber tube
 The Contractor shall supply a complete service set tools in each Boosting Station,
contained in a lockable trolley also for L.L a separate site

Pag. 99
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION ZX 414 – LABORATORY MATERIAL

The laboratory equipment of the plant shall include:
- 1 fume cupboard, equipped with suction hood, water and air fittings, exhaust pipes etc. all
made of chemical resistant material;
- 1 central table with two operating positions equipped with water and gas fittings and exhaust
pipes;
- 3 iron swivelling stools with backrest;
- 1 desk with two chests of drawers;
- 2 cupboards with shelves with shelves and drawers;
- 1 assay balance;
- 1 precision balance;
- 1 colorimetric comparator equipped with disks for pH measuring, residual chlorine, nitrates,
nitrites, ammoniac, phosphates;
- 1 thermostatic cabinet at 20°C for BOD sample conservation and stability;
- 10 supported Imhoff cones
- 200 bottles with 200 cc capacity with ground stopper for BOD and stability test;
- 20 calibrated burette for titration;
- 1 l/h distiller;
- 1 set of glassware and various laboratory equipment;
- 1 thermostatic stoves with adjustable thermostat up to 200°C;
- 5 burette housings;
- 2 Bunsen burners;
- 1 BOD meter with respirometric method for 5 BOD direct reading samples;
- 1 hydrogen sulphide meter;
- 2 dipping thermometers;
- 2 room temperature thermometers.
For the details of this list and for devices of laboratory see below:
OFFICE CUM LABORATORY
N. 1 central table with two operating positions equipped with water and gas fittings
and exhaust pipes consisting of:

Pag. 100
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
o work plan will have to be monolithic stoneware ;

o taps for water, air and gas
o command groups for combustible gases will always be equipped with safety
mechanisms to prevent accidental opening ;
o water dispensers inside the panel pan ;
o drain pan in polypropylene should be applied on the back of the work plan and
completed with discharges ;
N. 3 iron swivelling stools with backrest consisting of;

o iron frame painted with anti-acid and base with five-spoke wheels, height adjustable
stand;
o armrests padded with foam rubber and covered with fabric in UPVC;
o sitting in iron with upholstery foam rubber and covered with fabric UPVC;
o ergonomic iron back with foam rubber padding and covered with fabric UPVC;
N. 1 desk with two chests of drawers consisting of;

o Solid wood desk with rounded corners features two built-in drawers in the desk
itself;
o Drawers feature profiles to "L" bolted to the sides of the drawer to form the sliding
guides for drawers and equipped with travel stop;
o Wooden drawers with wheels for easy closing of the drawer;
N. 2 cupboards with shelves with shelves and drawers consisting of:

o Hips final : made of steel sheet mm 0.9 press-formed , to form a profile view of mm.
5 , honeycomb wood internally with linings made of sheet mm 0.9 press-formed , to
accommodate the upper profile of aluminum finish .
o Hips central : steel sheet of mm. 0.9 , must be made in two elements which fit
between them , by means of hooks not in view .
o Top: made of steel sheet mm . 0.8 with the long sides press-formed of 5 orders of
folds so as to form a profile in view of mm. 5 .
o Bases: made of sheet metal bent -profile "c" mm. 1.5 with two longitudinal and two
cross-members , forming a frame and electrically welded for strength . The whole
thing is finished with double bottom base plate mm. 0,8.
o Shelves: made of sheet mm. 0.8 with the four reinforced sides and adjustable in
height, with side racks with pitch mm . 50 .
o Furniture door : metal, are made with two sheet metal elements from mm . 0.8
paneled facades to form two perfectly flat ;
o Drawers are made of sheet mm. 0.8 with the four reinforced sides with wheels for
extraction closing.
N. 2 wooden office tables with drawers.

Pag. 101
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
N. 4 straight backed teakwood office chair
N. 1 wall cupboard with 2000mm long x 600mm high
N. 1 acid resistance bench along 3 walls porcelain sink of 90cm

height and 60cm depth
N. 1 small refrigerator (14 ft3)

LABORATORY EQUIPMENTS
Inlet Chemical hood formed by:

o metal base consisting of pillars in painted steel and appropriately treated with high
chemical and physical resistance of baked paint with adjustable feet at the basement ;
o scaffolding and sides made of steel frame painted with high chemical and physical
resistance
o vertical latch that will have the locking device fall and must be equipped with safety
glass plates of minimum thickness of 6 mm ;
o work plan will have to be monolithic stoneware ;
o double suction backrest must be shaped in such a way as to suck evenly , vapors,
gases and fumes, light and heavy , leaving no dead points of interception ; this
backrest must be removable in order to ensure the cleaning;
o suction connection must be made of suitable material and the upper canopy will
facilitate the conveying of fumes and vapors ;
o valve or vent panel against accidental explosions placed over the hood ;
o taps for water, air and gas remote control outside the work area and internal
providers ;
o command groups for combustible gases will always be equipped with safety
mechanisms to prevent accidental opening ;
o solenoid valve ATEX ;
o water dispensers inside the panel pan ;
o drain pan in polypropylene should be applied on the back of the work plan and
completed with discharges ;
o door modules - dispensing fluids and gases , removable for maintenance, provided
on the back ;
o dashboard for electric utilities and fluid controls with fittings suitable for the type of
gas expected and knobs with color coded according to the standard;
o ceiling light with protection with adequate illumination of the work plan ;
o sub-structural pull-out cabinets on wheels ;
o electrical systems installed in accordance with the British Standard ;
o gas plant built according to the British Standard ;
o centrifugal fan with blades reversed by mounted to the outside of the building and
connected to the suction point by PVC manifold ; must be of the type condensation ,
spark-proof and antistatic equipped with gaskets antacid and able to withstand an

Pag. 102
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
operating temperature of at least 80 pario ° C and has a three-phase motor with

degree of protection IP 66;
o In addition, you must provide the panel with:
 switching on and off of the vacuum cleaner;
 adjustment of alarm systems;
 turning on and off light of the work area;
 opening and closing of the electric valve that controls the fuel gas.
o The hoods must be accompanied by the following services and electric utilities:
 lighting as described above.
 switch type circuit breaker housed in waterproof IP55;
 command and control system as described above;
o Electric utilities service (electrical outlets) consisting by:
 - type UNEL Schuko 2P + E 10/16A 220 V with ground contact in the center
and side, IP 65;
 - interblock 2P + E 16 A 220 V – IP65 with fuse;
 - interblock 3P + E 16 A 380 V – IP65 with fuse.
N. 1 assay balance
o Flowrate: 2100g
o Resolution: 0.01 g
o Stabilization time: ≤ 1 seconds
o AC Power Supply: AC Adapter 12VDC 0,42 A (included), 100-240V 0.25A 50-
60Hz
o Adjustment: Adjusting the linearity of the flow or user selectable with external
weights / Digital with external weight
o Operating Relative Humidity: 20% to 85%
o Display size: 20 mm Figures
o Keyboard: 4 mechanical keys, raised and with tactile feedback and 2 touchless
sensors
o Adjust leveling: front level bubble with illumination / adjustable leveling feet with
slip
o Overload: 400% of rated capacity
o Power Management: Auto power off activated by the user after 5 minutes of
inactivity
o Storage conditions: -20 ° C to 55 ° C with 10% to 90% relative humidity, non-
condensing
o Application Modes: Weighing, Weighing
N. 1 precision balance with following features;

o Capacity (g) 1100
o Readability (g) 0.001
o Repeatability standard (g) ± 0.001

Pag. 103
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
o Linearity (g) ± 0.002

o Settling time (sec) ≤ 1.5
o AC Adapter Power Supply Input: 100-240 VAC 50-60 Hz 0.6A
o Display Type VGA graphics display colors, touch screen 4-wire resistive
o Display size 145 mm (diagonal) 5.7 "
o Communication RS232, USB
o Application Modes: Weighing (17 units + 3 custom units), parts counting, percent
weighing, dynamic weighing, check weighing, filling, totalizing, formulation,
differential weighing, density determination, maintaining peak value, costing
ingredients, pipette calibration, gross / net / tare
N. 1 colorimetric comparator equipped with disks for pH measuring, residual

chlorine, nitrates, nitrites, ammoniac, phosphates;
o The colorimeter must be programmed to perform the tests with only reagents or
cuvette and should cover all the main analytical parameters of wastewater and
drinking water (COD , total nitrogen , total phosphorus , etc.). . Must also be able to
detect with extreme precision the presence of cyanide , arsenic, cadmium, and other
substances in traces. The instrument must be given the opportunity to be powered by
mains or battery .
o Optics: 6 LEDs with temperature compensation , each combined with an interference
filter, internal reference channel ( dual technology bean ) with interference filters ,
internal reference channel ( Dual Ray Technology )
o Light source: 6 LEDs ×
o Wavelengths (nm) : 430, 530, 560, 580 , 610 , 660
o System Check : ' Self- Check ' self-diagnostic
o Storage capacity: approx. 1000 data readings (including date, time and identification
number )
o Display: Graphic large format
o Keyboard: Membrane resistant to acids and solvents
o Operating conditions: up to a max. 90% relative humidity (non-condensing) 0 ~ 60
°C
o Interface: RS232 port for connection to printer or PC
o Power: 7 NiCd rechargeable batteries (AA / Mignon ) with charger.
N. 1 thermostatic cabinet at 20°C for BOD sample conservation and stability;

o Temperature range 0 ° C / +80 ° C.
o Setting and readability of the temperature in increments of 0.1 ° C.
o Temperature stability of ± 0.1 ° C.
o Built entirely in stainless steel AISI 304.
o CFC-free polyurethane insulation with a thickness of 75 mm.
o Self-closing doors with magnetic gaskets.
o Inner doors resin polycarbonate.

Pag. 104
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
o Grids removable and adjustable in height.

o Electronic temperature controller with microprocessor to continuously monitor and
digital display light of the internal temperature and the set temperature.
o Visual and audible alarm for minimum and maximum temperature with acoustic
acknowledgment and dry contact remote connection. Heating elements with low
inertia.
o Safety device that switches off completely when the heating temperature exceeds the
preset maximum value and not editable.
o Internal ventilation.
o Noise level less than 55 dB.
o Adjustable steel feet.
o Supply Voltage Power 220V 1-50Hz.
N. 10 Imhoff cones and support with following features:

o Imhoff cone made of perfectly transparent methacrylate material with permanent
graduations printed in relief, with lower cap screw for emptying and cleaning
o Support for Imhoff cones for 2 people. With size: 150x300 and Height: 294mm
o Supporto per coni Imhoff da 2 posti. Con Dimensioni: 150x300 ed Altezza: 294mm.
N. 200 bottles with 200 cc capacity with ground stopper for BOD and stability test
consisting of:
o Glass bottle with glass stopper beveled calibrated and weighed with exact capacity
marked on the body;
N. 20 Calibrated burette for titration

o Each burette will be formed by a glass tube graduated at constant diameter, that will
present an opening at one end of the other a faucet.
o Must be equipped with an indication of the gradation.
o 10 burettes will be of class A with precision up to 1/20 of a milliliter (± 0.05 mL);
o 10 burettes will be Class B with a precision of up to one tenth of a milliliter.
N. 5 burette housings
o Consists of a stainless steel base 18/8 white, with dimensions 180 x 360 mm;
o With rod in stainless steel 18/8 white, with a diameter of 12 mm, height 600 mm;
o Equipped with metal clamp for burette No. 1, made of light alloy coated steel springs
and supports in polished brass, length 105 mm, 0-20 mm capacity.
N. 1 l/h distiller
o Distiller laboratory, equipped for distillation tank in stainless steel.
o The water is brought to the temperature of distillation by means of resistors
immersed.
o External structure made of stainless steel coated with epoxy powder.

Pag. 105
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
o Switch with pilot green light for the ignition and the production of distilled water.
o Technical Specifications:
 Production capacity: 1 l / h
 Fuel tank capacity: about 6 l
 Conductivity: 2 μ S cm -1
 Level Control: Yes
 Water Control Valve: Yes
 Level control valve: Yes
 Twin tank: Stainless Steel
 Gasket: Silicone
 Heating: 2 resistors metal
 Heating power: 6000 W
 Power supply: 220 V - 50/60 Hz
 Dimensions W x D x H: 460 x 370 x 700 mm
 Weight: 16 kg
N. 1 Set of glassware and various laboratory equipment

The Set will be consisted of the following features:
o N. 5 cups 1000ml ,low form, not graduated in Duran glass
o N. 5 Glasses with beak -shaped high borosilicate glass 50 ml
o N. 5 Glasses with beak -shaped high borosilicate glass 1000ml
o N. 5 Glasses with beak -shaped high borosilicate glass 2000ml
o N. 2 Beute cone frosted glass duran 50 ml
o N. 2 frosted glass cone duran flasks 100 ml
o N. 2 Beute cone frosted glass duran 600 ml
o N. 2 frosted glass cone duran flasks 1000ml
o N. 2 frosted glass cone duran flasks 2000ml
o N. 1 wide neck flasks graduated 50 ml glass duran
o N. 1 wide neck graduated flasks 1000ml glass duran
o 2 flasks for vacuum filtration with suction oil duran glass 500 ml
o 2 flasks for vacuum filtration with suction oil duran glass 1000ml
o N. 5 Bottle 250 ml b.o.d. with glass cap , adjusted , numbered on cap and bottle
o N. 5 Bottle 300 ml b.o.d. with glass cap , adjusted , numbered on cap and bottle
o N. 2 Measuring cylinders, tall form with spout glass class in 50 ml
o N. 2 Measuring cylinders, tall form with spout glass class to 100 ml
o N. 2 Measuring cylinders, tall form with spout glass class up to 1000 ml

Pag. 106
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

o N. 5 Imhoff cone 1000ml grad . up to 100 ml glass
o N. 1 Filter crucible duran diam. 30 mm por . 2 30 ml glass
o N. 1 hoppers, automatic compl. polyethylene bottle of glass 20 ml , 40 ml, 100 ml
o N. 1 dryer diam. 200 mm cover glass faucet with porcelain plate
o N. 5 Bottle 500 ml autoclavable duran gl 45 iso grad cap .
o N. 5 bottle of 1000 ml autoclavable cap duran gl 45 iso grad
o N. 5 Funnel filter angle 60 ° diameter . 55 mm por . 2 septum diam. 20 mm glass
o N. 2 Alcohol lamp 100 ml glass
o N. 5 Volumetric flask 500 ml flat bottom cone 19/26 cap with cl
o N. 1 sprayer chrome . flask with 300 ml cone 29/32 adj. Coll. svl 15 glass
o N. 2 vacuum pump waterjet glass
o N. 5 tube diam. 20x100 mm screw cap flat bottom glass
o N. 2 Pliers made of wood or iron , used for handling hot objects.
o N. 2 Tripods and metal mesh , which support the containers on fire and it spread the
heat over a larger surface area .
N. 1 Thermostatic stoves with adjustable thermostat up to 200°C

o Equipped with forced air circulation system, act to ensure the accuracy of the
temperature and the homogeneity within the chamber. The rise times at the selected
temperature must be fast and accurate.
o The insulation will consist of: a sheet of aluminum which incorporates a layer of
rock wool insulation.
o Available capacity 55 liters.
o Working temperature 10 ° C above ambient to 250 ° C
o Interior part in stainless steel AISI 304.
o Technology:
 The control of the temperature inside the chamber will be through a
microprocessor control.
 RS232 serial port for sending data to a PC using the software.
 6 programs (4 presets and 2 free with 40 sections each).
 Memory Card - Class 2 digital security - Key lock.
 The timer is controlled by the microprocessor is able to set certain times of
up to 16 years.
 Ventilation adjustable 0-100%.
 The alarm over the sight glass will be equipped with audible signal more
effective and immediate.
 Interior stainless steel 1.4301
 volume 55 liters
 Nr.porte 1
 internal dimensions

Pag. 107
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
- width 400 mm
- depth 390 mm
- height 350 mm
 External dimensions (including door and handle)
- width 620 mm
- depth 640 mm
- height (including feet or castors) 680 mm
 Net weight 55 kg
 Gross Weight 61 kg
 trays
- No. max 4 trays
- Trays included 2
- Maximum load 20 kg per tray
- Max load 50 kg per stove
 Working temperatures
- 10 ° C above ambient to 250 ° C
- Temperature accuracy according to DIN 12 880 T2, at working
temperature> 50 ° C, closed the door and chimney deviation in space
approx. (±) 2%
- Temperature reached ca change over time. 0 ± 0.4 ° C,
- Time of heating at 250 ° C with closed fireplace units and 230 VAC
min. 53
- Heat emission at 250 ° C 760 W
 Parts of air to 150 ° C / hour 49
 Voltage V - 50/60 hz 230/115 3x400 3x230 + N + PE
N. 2 Bunsen burners
o The Bunsen burner will consist mainly of a gas burner fuel, suitable for use in a
chemical laboratory.
o The Bunsen burner is formed by a base on which is fixed a nozzle connected via a
side tube to the pipeline of the fuel gas.
o The nozzle body will be screwed a metal torch of about 10 cm in length, which
presents at its base two diametrically opposite holes, a ring, which is also perforated
and free to rotate, complete the apparatus.
o The Bunsen burner will be of the type suitable for all types of gas.
o It will be equipped with a safety device consisting of a thermal valve that interrupts
the flow of gas (within 15 s) in the case of accidental extinguishing of the flame.
o Power: 480 Kcal. / Hr adjustable.
LABORATORY INSTRUMENTS
N. 1 BOD meter with respirometric method

Pag. 108
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
o The principle of measurement : gauges, mercury-free, electronic pressure sensor

o Range: 0.40 0-80, 0-200, 0-400, 0-800, 0-2000, 0-4000 [mg / L]
o Accuracy: 0.5% of full scale at 20 ° C
o Applications: BOD5
o Display Results: BOD [mg / L], 4 digits, 7-segment LED
o Display parameters: BOD-range, volume, duration, time
o Measurement period: selectable from 1 to 28 days
o Automatic storage of results: up to 28 results
o Interval: time (1 day) every 2 hours (2 days), daily (3-28 days)
o Function "automatic start": After temperature equalization (ON / OFF)
o Power Source: 3 alkaline-manganese
o Battery life: 1 year (max 1 test per day)
o Interface: RS232 for PC or printer
o Clock: Real-time
o Protection: IP54
o Dimensions (WxDxH): 375x195x230 mm
o Weight: 3,850 g (combined with bottles), 5.750 g (complete with agitation)
o Housing: ABS
N. 1 hydrogen sulphide meter;

o Dual sensor able to perform simultaneously two readings contemporaneous giving
the maximum reliability of the resulting data.
o The two sensor readings are processed using a proprietary algorithm and displayed
as a single reading for the user.
o Replaceable Sensor: The sensor has an average life of between 3 to 4 years and will
be replaced very easily.
o Hook Alarm: the alarm volume of the instrument to 100 dB.
 Detected gases: hydrogen sulfide (H2S)
 Measurement Range: 0.0 to 200.0 ppm
 Increments: 0.1 ppm
 Battery Life: 3 years
 Battery: 3.6 V Primary lithium-thionyl chloride (Li-SOCl2), 1.5Ah, 2/3AA,
replaceable, non-rechargeable.
 Alarms: Three LED lights with strobe effects for visual alarm (two leds red,
one blue); audible alarm 100 decibels (dB), Vibrating Alarm
 Sensor: Electrochemical H2S with Technology
 Display: LCD
 Keyboard: 2 Buttons
 Materials: Top Case: Polycarbonate with rubber protection.
 Dimensions: 99 x 51 x 35 mm
 Weight: 126.0 g

Pag. 109
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
 Working temperature: -20 ° C to +50 ° C

 Working Humidity: 15% -95% Non-condensing
 Protection Class: IP67
o Certificate:
 ATEX: Ex ia I Ma, Ex ia IIC T4 Ga,Equipment Group and Category: I M1
and II 1G
 IECEx: Ex ia I Ma Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
 UL (C-US):Class I, Groups A, B, C, and D; Class II, Groups E, F, and G; T4;
Ex ia Class I, Zone 0, A Ex ia IIC T4
 CSA: Ex ia IIC; Class I, Groups A B C D; T4
N. 2 Dipping thermometers
o Digital thermometer with immersion sensor for temperature sensing of liquids.
o Temp. max +70 ° C temp. min -50 ° C;
o Equipped with a probe for detecting the temperature in liquids, with alarm for
temperatures below 0 ° c.
o Equipped with dual dial to measure indoor and outdoor temperature.
o Ability to store the minimum and maximum measurement.
o Weight 80 grams including batteries
o Dimensions 65x77x19 mm.
o Temp. max +70°c temp. min -50°c;
N. 2 Room temperature thermometers

o Weight gr. 38 Dimensions 60x65x18 mm. Temperature -50 to +70 ° C Accuracy ±
0.1 ° C
o temp. max +70 ° C temp. min -50 ° C, Accuracy ± 0.1 ° C
o Equipped with built-in sensor for detecting the ambient temperature, with alarm for
temperatures below 3 ° c.
o Featuring dial for temperature measurement.
o Ability to store the minimum and maximum measurement.
o Weight 38 grams
o Dimensions 60x65x18 mm.
CHEMICAL LAB
 Laboratory turbidity meter, HACH model 2100A or high equivalent, with all
necessary accessories.
 pH meter, 0-14, with electrode stand & holder, meter display preferable,
accuracy ±0.05 on normal range, with 2 spare electrodes.
 Laboratory Floc-Tester, with six stirring units, rpm regulator, 0-200 rpm with
necessary spare parts including drive belts & motor.

Pag. 110
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
 Conductivity-meter measuring ranges 0-20ms/cm complete with electrode

stand, holder and 2 spare electrodes.
 Oven drying, capacity 40-60 liter, temperature range 5°C above ambient to
250°C, ±2°C.
 Furnace muffle, temperature up to 1100°C ± 5°C capacity 3-5 liter.
 Spectrophotometer, UV/VIS, 195-1000nm, bandwidth 8nm, Analogue, with

deuterium lamp, built-in power supply, with necessary cells.
 Balance, analytical, capacity 160g, precession ±0.05mg, readability 0.1mg.
 Water Bath, 6 openings of 90mm.
 Hot plate, rectangular, acid resistance, temperature up to 350°C with 3 more

step switch, size ~ 35x25cm Qty 2.
 Magnetic stirrer, variable speed, with necessary magnetic followers Qty 2
 Water distilling apparatus all glass, 2-4 liter/hr distillate conductivity 1ms/cm.
 Water Sampler standard model for sampling from river, streams, etc.
 Nessler, lovibond BDH, with necessary discs for determination Cl2, Fe, Mn,
N- compounds in water.
BACTERIOLOGICAL LAB
 Auto clave, electrically heated, ~ 30 liters capacity, with all necessary

accessories.
 Hot air sterilizer 40-250°C, ~ 12 liters working volume, with time switch up to
2 hrs.
 Incubator, temperature range 5°C above ambient to 70°C working volume ~

35 liters.
 Water bath with cover, for bacteriological purpose, temperature controller, ~

15 liters capacity, with necessary test tube racks.
 Balance - top loading, capacity 2000g, precession ±0.1g.
 Refrigerator.
 Magnetic stirrer hot plate variable speed, thermostat control, with necessary
magnetic followers.

Pag. 111
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
CHEMICALS
 Ammonium acetate 6 kg
 Ammonium chloride 1kg
 Ammonium hydroxide 12 L
 Acetic acid , glacial 6L
 Barium chloride 1kg
 Calcium chloride 1kg
 Calcium carbonate I kg
 Ethyl alcohol, absolute 12 L
 Ferrochrome black T 25 g
 Ethylene diamine tetra acetic acid di sodium salt 500 g
 Ferrous , ammonium sulphate 1kg
 Hydrixyl amine hydrochloride 1kg
 Hydrochloric acid, cone 12 L
 Methyl red 50 g
 Methyl orange 100 g
 Murexide 25 g
 Methyl alcohol 6L
 Magnesium sulphate heptahydrate 500 g
 Mackonky Broth 12 kg
 Nutrient Agar 6 kg
 Nitric acid, cone 3L
 Potassium permanganate 500 g
 Potassium chromate 100 g

Pag. 112
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
 Potassium hydroxide 1kg

Pag. 113
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
SPECIFICATION ZX 501 - emergency shower

Supply and installation of Emergency Shower with chain and handle, PPR/GI water
pipework, valves, fittings, shower tray 80x80x10cm, including connection to the water inlet pipe,
complete, to the Engineer's satisfaction.
Specifications for plumbed showers:

1. Heads
o Positioned no less than 205 cm from floor.
o Spray pattern will have a minimum diameter of 20" at 60" above the floor.
o Flow Rate=minimum 1 liter per second at a velocity low enough to be non-injurious
to the user.
o Center of spray pattern shall be located at least 40 cm from any obstruction.
2. Valves
o Off to "On" in 1 second or less.
o Stay-open valve (no use of hands).
o Valve remains on until the user shuts it off.
3. Installation
o 10 seconds from the hazard.
o Shower location shall be identified with a sign.
4. Maintenance and Training

o Showers will be tested weekly to verify correct operation.
o All employees who might be exposed to a chemical splash shall be trained in the use
of the equipment.

Pag. 114
RU.B.RP.06.3
SPECIFICATION OF
WTP’S ELECTRICAL
WORKS
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 11KV, RING MAIN UNIT ..................................................................................................... 1
1.1 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 TOLERANCES..................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 RECOMMENDED SPARES .................................................................................................... 2
1.4 ERECTION AND MAINTENANCE TOOLS ............................................................................... 2
1.5 SERVICE CONDITIONS ........................................................................................................ 2
1.6 APPLICABLE STANDARDS .................................................................................................. 3
1.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENT: .................................................................................................. 3
1.8 CONFIGURATIONS RECOMMENDED.................................................................................... 3
1.9 ENCLOSURE :..................................................................................................................... 4
1.9.1 Outer enclosure .................................................................................................. 4
1.9.2 Inner enclosure (Main tank) ............................................................................... 4
1.10 BUSBARS ........................................................................................................................... 4
1.11 LOAD BREAK SWITCHES (ISOLATORS) .............................................................................. 4
1.12 EARTHING OF ISOLATORS AND DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER BREAKERS
(EARTH SWITCH). .............................................................................................................. 5
1.13 CIRCUIT BREAKER (SF6 OR VACUUM MEDIA FOR ARC QUENCHING). ................................. 5
1.14 BUSHINGS ......................................................................................................................... 6
1.15 CABLE BOXES.................................................................................................................... 6
1.16 VOLTAGE INDICATOR LAMPS AND PHASE COMPARATORS ................................................. 7
1.17 EXTENSIBLE ...................................................................................................................... 7
1.18 WIRING & TERMINALS ...................................................................................................... 8
1.19 EARTHING ....................................................................................................................... 10
1.20 TAKE OFF TERMINAL UNITS FOR FUTURE AUTOMATION .................................................. 10
1.21 FAULT PASSAGE INDICATORS / EARTH FAULT INDICATORS (FPI/EFI ) ............................. 11
1.22 TROPICALISATION ........................................................................................................... 11
1.23 SAFETY OF PEOPLE .......................................................................................................... 11
1.24 OPERATING LEVER .......................................................................................................... 11
1.25 FRONT PLATE .................................................................................................................. 12
1.26 DANGER BOARD : ............................................................................................................ 12
1.27 TYPE AND ROUTINE TESTS : ............................................................................................. 12
1.27.1 Type tests .......................................................................................................... 12
1.28 ACCEPTANCE & ROUTINE TESTS: .................................................................................... 13
1.29 INSPECTION: .................................................................................................................... 14
1.30 PROTOTYPE SAMPLE ........................................................................................................ 14
1.31 MANUFACTURING FACILITIES: ........................................................................................ 14
1.32 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN: ........................................................................................... 14
1.33 DRAWINGS: ..................................................................................................................... 14
1.34 NAME PLATE ................................................................................................................... 15
2 CONTROL PANELS FOR RUKUNGIRI WTP ............................................................... 16

2.1 SCOPE: ............................................................................................................................ 16
RU_B_RP.06.3 – Technical specification of WTP’s electrical works

Pag. i
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.1.1 Scope of supply ................................................................................................. 16

2.2 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................. 16
2.3 STANDARDS AND CODES: ................................................................................................ 16
2.4 DESIGN CRITERIA : .......................................................................................................... 17
2.5 SPECIAL REQUIREMENT ................................................................................................... 17
2.6 CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................................... 18
3 L.T. PVC POWER AND CONTROL CABLES ................................................................ 22

3.1 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................. 22
3.2 SERVICE CONDITIONS ...................................................................................................... 22
3.3 STANDARDS .................................................................................................................... 22
3.4 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 22
3.4.1 Power and control cables ................................................................................. 22
3.4.2 Insulation, inner sheath and outer sheath ........................................................ 23
3.4.3 Sequential marking of length on cable ............................................................. 23
3.4.4 Continuous a.c. current capacity ..................................................................... 24
3.4.5 Short circuit current ......................................................................................... 24
3.5 TESTS AND TESTING FACILITIES ...................................................................................... 25
3.5.1 Type tests .......................................................................................................... 25
3.5.2 Routine test ....................................................................................................... 25
3.6 ACCEPTANCE TESTS ........................................................................................................ 25
3.7 PACKING AND MARKING ................................................................................................. 25
3.7.1 Standard lenght ................................................................................................ 25
3.7.2 Non standard lenght ......................................................................................... 25
3.7.3 Particulars ....................................................................................................... 25
3.7.4 Packaging and informations ............................................................................ 26
3.7.5 Cables statistical data ...................................................................................... 26
3.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN ............................................................................................ 26
3.9 ANNEXURE-I: LIST OF STANDARDS ................................................................................. 26
4 POWER TRANSFORMER ................................................................................................. 27

4.1 GENERAL LOADS DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 27
4.2 CABLE TERMINATIONS .................................................................................................... 27
4.3 APPLICABLE STANDARDS................................................................................................ 28
4.4 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES ........................................................................................... 28
4.5 TOLERANCE ON LOSSES:.................................................................................................. 29
4.6 TECHNICAL DETAILS: ...................................................................................................... 29
4.7 TESTS .............................................................................................................................. 31
4.8 IMPULSE TEST AND HEAT RUN TEST............................................................................... 31
5 EARTHING & PROTECTION TO STRUCTURES AGAINST

LIGHTNING ......................................................................................................................... 33
5.1 EARTHING GENERAL ....................................................................................................... 33
5.2 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................. 33
5.3 EARTHING PROTECTION SYSTEM INSTALLATION ............................................................. 34
5.4 CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................................. 35
5.5 EARTH ELECTRODE PITS .................................................................................................. 35
5.6 MINIMUM SIZES............................................................................................................... 36
5.7 APPLICABLE STANDARDS ................................................................................................ 37

Pag. ii
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
5.8 EARTHING OF SWITCHBOARDS / PANELS ......................................................................... 37

5.9 PROTECTION TO STRUCTURES AGAINST LIGHTNING ELECTROMAGNETIC PULSE .............. 38
6 LT MOTOR .......................................................................................................................... 40
6.1 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................. 40
6.2 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 40
6.3 SELECTION OF MOTORS ................................................................................................... 40
6.4 SITE CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................ 40
6.5 APPLICABLE CODES ......................................................................................................... 40
6.6 DUTY .............................................................................................................................. 41
6.7 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 42
6.8 DIRECTION OF ROTATION ................................................................................................ 42
6.9 ENCLOSURE .................................................................................................................... 42
6.10 WINDINGS ....................................................................................................................... 43
6.11 WINDING TEMPERATURE DETECTORS.............................................................................. 43
6.12 TERMINAL BOX ............................................................................................................... 43
6.13 BEARINGS ....................................................................................................................... 44
6.13.1 Grease lubricated bearings .............................................................................. 44
6.14 WINDING INSULATION ..................................................................................................... 44
6.15 BEARING INSULATION ..................................................................................................... 45
6.16 JOINTS ............................................................................................................................. 45
6.17 BEARING TEMPERATURE DETECTORS .............................................................................. 45
6.18 COOLING ......................................................................................................................... 45
6.19 SPACE HEATER ................................................................................................................ 45
6.20 LIFTING HOOKS ............................................................................................................... 45
6.21 EARTHING TERMINALS .................................................................................................... 46
6.22 CABLE GLANDS ............................................................................................................... 46
6.23 FOUNDATION BOLTS........................................................................................................ 46
6.24 NAME PLATE ................................................................................................................... 46
6.25 DUTY .............................................................................................................................. 46
6.26 NOISE LEVEL ................................................................................................................... 47
6.27 VIBRATIONS .................................................................................................................... 47
6.28 PAINTING ........................................................................................................................ 47
6.29 INSPECTION & TESTING ................................................................................................... 48
6.30 SCHEDULE OF TYPE TESTS ............................................................................................... 48
6.31 SCHEDULE OF ROUTINE TESTS ......................................................................................... 49
6.32 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTATION. ................................................................................. 49
6.33 SPARES, TOOLS & TACKLES ............................................................................................. 52
6.34 MOTOR DATA SHEET ....................................................................................................... 52
7 D.G. SET ................................................................................................................................ 58

7.1 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................. 58
7.2 SITE CONDITION .............................................................................................................. 58
7.3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DETAILS ........................................................................................ 58
7.4 STANDARDS .................................................................................................................... 58
7.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................... 59

Pag. iii
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
7.5.1 Diesel engine .................................................................................................... 59

7.5.2 Governor .......................................................................................................... 59
7.5.3 Flywheel ........................................................................................................... 59
7.5.4 Starting ............................................................................................................. 59
7.5.5 Fuel system ....................................................................................................... 60
7.5.6 Lubrication ....................................................................................................... 60
7.5.7 Cooling ............................................................................................................. 60
7.5.8 Ventilation ........................................................................................................ 61
7.5.9 Exhaust ............................................................................................................. 61
7.5.10 Engine control monitoring & protection .......................................................... 61
7.5.11 Coupling ........................................................................................................... 62
7.5.12 Misc. equipments .............................................................................................. 62
7.5.13 Alternator ......................................................................................................... 62
7.5.14 Excitation system .............................................................................................. 63
7.5.15 Voltage regulator ............................................................................................. 63
7.6 LOCAL CONTROL PANEL .................................................................................................. 63
7.6.1 Construction ..................................................................................................... 63
7.6.2 Cleaning and painting ...................................................................................... 64
7.6.3 LCP/ AMF ........................................................................................................ 64
7.6.4 Measuring instruments and instrument transformer: ....................................... 64
7.6.5 Indication and control:..................................................................................... 65
7.6.6 System operation .............................................................................................. 65
7.6.7 Manual mode.................................................................................................... 66
7.6.8 Engine panel..................................................................................................... 66
7.6.9 Engine spares tools & tackles .......................................................................... 66
7.6.10 Drawing and data ............................................................................................ 66
8 EXTENSION OF 11 KV LINE TO RAW WATER PUMP HOUSE (WORK

TO BE EXECUTED BY UMEME)..................................................................................... 68
8.1 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................. 68
8.1 CONTRACTOR’S DUTIES .................................................................................................. 68

Pag. iv
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1 11KV, RING MAIN UNIT
1.1 Scope
Specification covers Design, Engineering, Manufacture, Assembly, Stage testing,

Inspection , of 11 kV Ring Main Units extensible and non extensible type (Outdoor &
Indoor) comprising 1 number Loadbreak Isolators and two Circuit breaker for
Distribution Transformer protection. The Unit should be extensible on both sides for
future requirement. The RMU to be supplied against this specification are required for
vital installations where continuity of service is very important. The design, materials
and manufacture of the equipment shall, therefore, be of the highest order to ensure
continuous and trouble-free service over the years.
The RMU offered shall be compact , maintenance free, easy to install reliable, safe
and easy to operate and complete with all parts necessary for their effective and trouble-
free operation. Such parts will be deemed to be within the scope of the supply
irrespective of whether they are specifically indicated in the commercial order or not.
The offered equipment shall conform to the relevant standards and be of high
quality, sturdy, robust and of good design and workmanship complete in all respects and
capable to perform continuous and satisfactory operations in the actual service
conditions at site. and shall have sufficiently long life in service as per statutory
requirements. As per relevant standards, I.E. Rules, I.E.Act and other local statutory
provisions.
1.2 Tolerances
Tolerances on all the dimensions shall be in accordance with provisions made in

the relevant Indian/EN standards amended upto date and in this specifications.
Otherwise the same will be governed by good engineering practice in conformity with
required quality of the product.
Pag. 1
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1.3 Recommended spares
The tenderer shall furnish in his offer a list of recommended spares with unit rates
for each set of equipment that may be necessary for satisfactory operation and
maintenance of circuit breaker and Isolators for a period of 5 years. The purchaser
reserves right of selection of items and quantities of these spares to be ordered.
1.4 Erection and maintenance tools
The tenderer shall submit a list and unit rates of all the special tools, equipment
and instruments required for erection, testing, commissioning and maintenance of the
equipment. The purchaser shall decide the quantity of tools to be ordered. Prices of these
tools shall not be considered for tender evaluation. However, the list of necessary
tools/equipment which will be supplied free of cost with each Ring Main Unit may be
furnished separately.
1.5 Service conditions
System particulars:
 Nominal system voltage ... 11 kV
 Corresponding highest system voltage ... 12 kV
 Frequency ... 50 Hz ± 3%
 Number of phases ... 3
 Neutral earthing ... Solidly grounded
 Fault level (minimum) ... 20 kA for 3 sec for 11kV
Equipment supplied against the specification shall be suitable for satisfactory operation
under the following tropical conditions:-
 Max. ambient air temperature : 50 Deg. C
 2 Max. relative humidity : 100 %
 Max. annual rainfall : 1450 mm
 Max. wind pressure : 150 kg/sq.m.
 Max. altitude above mean sea level : 1500 mtrs.
 Seismic level (Horizontal acceleration) : 0.3 g.
 Climatic Condition : Humid tropical climate. conducive to rust and fungus
growth.
 Reference Ambient Temperature for temperature rise 50 deg C
Pag. 2
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1.6 Applicable standards
The RMU Switchgear shall comply with BS EN 62271 standards and

specifications ameneded upto date
1.7 General requirement:
The Ring Main Unit shall be installed at 11 kV junction points extensible. One
Load break isolators for incoming & Two Circuit breaker for transformer protection
shall be enclosed in the main tank using SF6 gas as insulating and vacuum as arc
quenching medium or SF6 gas as both insulating and arc quenching medium.
Metering of Power, pressure and current, should be included in the unit.
The total breaking time for transient fault should not exceed 40-60 mS ( CB +
Relay+ trip coil).
The main tank ( Inner enclosure of Circuit Breaker & Load break Isolators
assembly) and all Switchboard assembly shall be housed in a single compact metal clad
suitable for both indoor/outdoor applications.
The switchgear and switchboard shall be designed such that the position of the
different devices shall be visible to the operator on the front of switchboard and easy to
operate and prevent access to all live parts during operation without the use of tools.
There shall be no access to exposed conductors.
Sulphur Hexa Fluoride Gas (SF6 GAS):
The SF6 gas shall be suitable in all respects for use in RMUs under the stipulated
service conditions. The SF6 shall be tested for purity, dew point air hydrolysable
fluorides and water content. and test certificate shall be furnished to the owner
indicating all the tests.
1.8 Configurations recommended
The following configurations of RMUs are recommended:

a) Non extensible RMU with Two numbers of 200A circuit breaker for transformer
protection and two number of Load Break Isolators for network sectionalising
Pag. 3
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
with earth isolator.

b) Extensible RMU with one number of 200A circuit breaker and two Load break
isolators with earth isolator arrangement having provision for adding one
number of 200A circuit breaker for one extensible and two 200 A circuit
breakers for two extensible RMU.
1.9 Enclosure :
1.9.1 Outer enclosure
The RMU enclosure (Outer) shall be made up of CRCA of 3 mm thickness or

galvanised of 1.6 mm thickness. The rating of enclosure shall be suitable for operation
on three phase, three wire, 11 KV, 50 cycles, A.C. System with short-time current rating
of 20KA for 3 seconds for 11kV and with Panels. The complete RMU enclosure shall be
of degree of protection IP 54 (Main Door open) and IP 41(main door open)
1.9.2 Inner enclosure (Main tank)
Oil or Air filled Switchgear will not be considered. The temperature rise test shall
be carried out on complete RMU unit and test reports shall be submitted with the offer.
The compact RMU Unit shall be provided with a pedestal made up of M.S. Angle
to mount the unit on plain surface. The height of the bottom of cable box shall be 310
mm to provide the turning radius for the HT cable termination.
1.10 Busbars
The three nos of continuous Busbars made up of EC grade tinned copper of rating
current 630A shall be provided. The Short time rating current shall be 20 kA for 3
seconds for 11 kV . The Busbar connections shall Anti- oxide greased.
1.11 Load Break Switches (Isolators)
The Load Break Isolators for Incoming and Outgoing supply must be provided
and the load break isolators are fully insulated by SF6 gas. The operating mechanism
shall be spring assisted mechanism with operating handle for ON /OFF. Earth positions
with arrangement for padlocking in each position. Also independent manual operations
Pag. 4
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
with mechanically operated indicator. The earth switch shall be naturally interlocked to
prevent the main and earth switch being switched ‘ON’ at the same time. The selection
of the main and earth switch is made by a lever on the facia, which is allowed to move
only if the main or earth switch is in the off position. The load break isolators should
have the facility for future remote operation. Each load break switch shall be of the
triple pole,
simultaneously operated, non automatic type with quick break contacts and with
integral earthing arrangement. The rated current of Isolator shall be 630 Amps
continuous at maximum ambient temperatures. No Derating shall be allowed. For the
isolator at an Ambient temperature of 50 °C, which means that Isolator rating should be
630 A maximum ambient temperature of 50 °C.
1.12 Earthing of isolators and distribution transformer breakers (earth

switch).
The unit shall consist of a 630 Amp Tee Off spring assisted three position rotating
arc type SF6 circuit breaker unit, with integral fault making/dead breaking earth switch,
the function shall be naturally interlocked to prevent the main and earth switch from
being switched ÒN` at the same time and the CB not allowed to trip in Èarth On`
position. The selection of the main/earth switch lever on the fascia, which is allowed to
move only if the main or earth switches in the off position. The lever may be padlocked
in either the main or earth position.
The cables shall be earthed by an integral earthing switch with short-circuit

making capacity, in compliance with EN 129 standard. The earthing switch shall be
operable through the main circuit mechanism and manual closing shall be driven by a
fast-acting mechanism, independent of operator action.
1.13 Circuit breaker (SF6 or vacuum media for arc quenching).
The 3 pole circuit breaker for the protection of Distribution transformers shall be
enclosed in the main tank. The rated breaking and making current at rated voltage shall
be as follows:
Pag. 5
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
For 11kV system : Rated breaking capacity shall be 20 kA for 3 second.
Rated making current shall be 50 kA for 3 second
The manual operation of the circuit breaker shall not have an effect on the spring
charging mechanism.
The circuit breaker shall be fitted with a mechanical flag, which shall operate in
the event of fault occurrences. The breaker indications ON and OFF positions shall be
indicated by suitable flag. For ON position indication by Red flag and OFF position
indication by Green flag shall be provided.
The circuit breaker shall be operated by the same unidirectional handle or switch.
The rated operating sequence shall be O-3min-CO-3 min- CO.
The protection on the circuit breaker:
The circuit breaker unit fitted with 3 nos protection CT’s ( tape wound) of ratio
100-50A/1 A, 5P10 class, having low burden and trip coil and auxiliary switch assembly
allowing the use of a self powered non directional IDMT (Inverse Definite Minimum
Time) Over Current and Earth Fault Relays (Micro processor based). One Three
Element Relay having two O/C elements and one E/F element shall be provided for this
purpose. All these relays shall be of 3 seconds IDMT characteristics, the O/C elements
current setting variable from 10% to 200% of CT secondary ratings, and the E/F
elements having current setting variable from 10% to 40%. The protection curves and all
other settings shall be adjustable from touch panel.
1.14 Bushings
All the bushings shall be of same height, parallel, on the equal distances from the
ground and protected by a cable cover. It is preferable to have bushings accessible from
the rear side of the RMU.
1.15 Cable boxes
All cable boxes shall be air insulated suitable for dry type cable terminations. The
cable boxes at each of the two ring switches suitable HV cables of size 3C x 300 sq.mm
Pag. 6
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
and circuit breaker cable suitable up to 3C x 300 sq.mm. Necessary Right angle Boot
should be supplied to the cable terminations. Compound filled cable boxes are not
acceptable. The cable box shall be arc resistant as per EN 62271-200 amended uptodate.
The internal arc fault test on cable box shall be carried out for 11 kV system for 20 kA
for 1 second and for 22 kV system for 16 kA for 1 second. The clearance between phase
to phase and phase to earth shall be as per EN 61243 – 5 amended upto date. The cable
termination and gland arrangements shall be appropriate for the type and style of cables
used at the time.
1.16 Voltage indicator lamps and phase comparators
The RMU shall be equipped with a voltage indication. There should be a facility
to check the synchronization of phases with the use of external device. It shall be
possible for the each of the function of the RMU to be equipped with a permanent
voltage indication as per EN 601958 to indicate whether or not there is voltage on the
cables.
It shall be possible for each of the functions on the RMU to be equipped with a
voltage indication, to indicate whether or not there is voltage on the cables. The
capacitive dividers will supply low voltage power to sockets at the front of the unit, an
external lamp must be used to indicate live cables.
Three outlets can be used to check the synchronization of phases with the use of
an external device.
1.17 Extensible
Each combination of RMU shall have the provision for extension by load break
isolators / breakers in future, with suitable trenching chamber, accessories and necessary
Busbars. Extensible isolators and circuit breakers shall be individually housed in
separate SF6 gas enclosures. Multiple devices inside single gas tank / enclosure will not
be acceptable. In case of extensible circuit breakers, the Breaker should be capable of
necessary short circuit operations as per BS standard i.e. 20 KA for 3 second for 11kV
Pag. 7
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
system and 16 kA for 3 second for 22 kV 3 second. The Breaker should have a rated
current carrying capacity of
1.18 Wiring & terminals
The wiring should be of high standard and should be able to withstand the tropical
weather conditions. All the wiring and terminals (including take off terminals wiring for
future automation, DC, Control wiring), Spare terminals shall be provided by the
contractor. The wiring cable must be standard single-core multi stranded, non-sheathed,
Core marking (ferrules), stripped with non-notching tools and fitted with end sleeves,
marked in accordance with the circuit diagram with printed adhesive marking strips.
All wiring shall be provided with single core multistrand copper conductor wires
with P.V.C insulation and shall be flame retardant low smoke type.
The wiring shall be carried out using multi-strand copper conductor super flexible
PVC insulated wires of 1.1 KV Grade for AC Power, DC Control and CT circuits.
Suitable coloured wires shall be used for phase identification and interlocking type
ferrules shall be provided at both ends of the wires for wire identification. Terminal
should be suitably protected to eliminate sulphating. Connections and terminal should be
able to withstand vibrations. The terminal blocks should be stud type for controls and
disconnecting link type terminals for CT leads with suitable spring washer and lock
nuts.
Flexible wires shall be used for wiring of devices on moving parts such as
swinging Panels (Switch Gear) or panel doors. Panel wiring shall be securely supported,
neatly arranged readily accessible and connected to equipment terminals, terminal
blocks and wiring gutters. The cables shall be uniformly bunched and tied by means of
PVC belts and carried in a PVC carrying trough.
The position of PVC carrying trough and wires should not give any hindrance for
fixing or removing relay casing, switches etc., Wire termination shall be made with
solder less crimping type of tinned copper lugs. Core identification plastic ferrules
marked to correspond with panel wiring diagram shall be fitted with both ends of each
Pag. 8
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
wire. Ferrules shall fit tightly on the wire when disconnected. The wire number shown
on the wiring shall be in accordance with BS.
All wires directly connected to trip circuits of breaker or devices shall be

distinguished by addition of a red colour unlettered ferrule.
Inter-connections to adjacent Panels (Switch Gear) shall be brought out to a

separate set of Terminal blocks located near the slots or holes to be provided at the top
portion of the panel. Arrangements shall be made for easy connections to adjacent
Panels (Switch Gear) at site and wires for this purpose shall be provided and bunched
inside the panel. The bus wire shall run at the top of the panel. Terminal block with
isolating links should be provided for bus wire. At least 10% of total terminals shall be
provided as spare for further connections. Wiring shall be done for all the contacts
available in the relay and other equipment and brought out to the terminal blocks for
spare contacts. Colour code for wiring is preferable in the following colours.
Voltage supply Red, Yellow, Blue for phases , Black for Neutral
CT circuits similar to the above
250V AC circuits Black for both phases and neutral
Earthing Green
The wiring shall be in accordance to the wiring diagram for proper functioning of
the connected equipment. Terminal blocks shall not be less than 650V grade and shall
be -moulded type with insulation barriers.
The terminal shall hold the wires in the tight position by bolts and nuts with lock
washers. The terminal blocks shall be arranged in vertical formation at an inclined angle
with sufficient space between terminal blocks for easy wiring.
The terminals are to be marked with the terminal number in accordance with the
circuit diagram and terminal diagram. The terminals should not have any function
designation and are of the tension spring and plug-in type.
Pag. 9
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1.19 Earthing
The RMU outdoor metal clad, Switch Gear, Load break isolators, Distribution
Transformer, R.S.Joists, M.S. Channels / M.S. Angles etc, shall be equipped with an
earth bus securely fixed along the base of the RMU.
When several units of the RMU (Extra Isolators / Breakers) are mounted adjoining
to each other, the earth bus shall be made continuous and necessary connectors and
clamps for this purpose shall be included in the scope of supply. The size of earth busbar
of tinned copper flat shall be as per EN standards and shall be fixed inside the RMU.
Provision shall be made on end of RMU for connecting the earth bus to the earth grid by
erecting suitable 2 earth pipes of 40mm diameter MS rod of 3 meters in pits. Both the
earth pipes are also to be connected in a grid formation. Necessary terminal clamps and
connectors shall be included in the scope of supply.
1.20 Take off terminal units for future automation
The RMU should be provided with necessary take off terminal units for future
automations. Remote operation of the RMU’s line switches must be possible using
motors fitted to the operating mechanism.
It shall be possible to fit the motors either directly in manufacturing plant or on

site as and when required. Installation on site shall be possible with the RMU fully
energised and manufacturer should provide detailed instructions for installation to the
control mechanism.
The fitting of the motors to the mechanism must not in any way impede or
interfere with the manual operation of the switches or circuit breaker.
The tenderer may wish to advice of options and cost for remote supervisory
control units of the RMU and MV network supervisory control system.
Complete Ring Main Unit shall be capable of withstanding this current without
any damage being caused, in accordance with the recommendations
Pag. 10
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1.21 Fault passage indicators / earth fault indicators (FPI/EFI )
These shall facilitate quick detection of faulty section of line. The fault indication
may be on the basis of monitoring fault current flow through the device. The unit should
be self-contained requiring no auxiliary power supply. The FPI shall be integral part of
RMU.
1.22 Tropicalisation
Due regard should be given to the climatic conditions under which the equipment
is to work. Ambient temperature normally varies between 20 °C and 32 °C, although
direct sun temperature may reach 45 °C. The climate is very humid and rapid variations
occur, relative humidity between 90% and 100% being frequently recorded, but these
values generally correspond to the lower ambient temperatures. The equipment should
also be designed to prevent ingress of vermin, accidental contact with live parts and to
minimize the ingress of dust and dirt. The use of materials, which may be liable to attack
by termites and other insects, should be avoided.
1.23 Safety of people
Any accidental overpressure inside the sealed chamber will be limited by the
opening of a pressure limiting device in the enclosure. Gas will be released to the rear of
the unit away from the operator. Manufacturer shall provide type test report to prove
compliance with EN 298 appendix AA 'Internal fault'.
1.24 Operating lever
An anti-reflex mechanism on the operating lever shall prevent any attempts to re-
open immediately after closing of the switch or earthing switch.
All manual operations will be carried out on the front of the switchboard.
The effort exerted on the lever by the operator should not be more than 250 N for
the switch and circuit breaker.
Pag. 11
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The overall dimensions of the RMU shall not be increased due to the use of the
operating handle. The operating handle should have two workable positions 180° apart.
1.25 Front plate
The front shall include a clear mimic diagram which indicates different functions.
The position indicators shall give a true reflection of the position of the main
contacts. They shall be clearly visible to the operator.
The lever operating direction shall be clearly indicated in the mimic diagram.
The manufacturer's plate shall include the switchboard's main electrical

characteristics.
1.26 Danger board :
The danger Board plate as per relevant IS shall be riveted on the front plate of the
RMU.
1.27 Type and routine tests :
1.27.1 Type tests
The equipment offered in the tender should have been successfully type tested at
NABL laboratories in India or equivalent international laboratories in line with the
relevant standard and technical specification, within the last 5 (five) years from the date
of offer. The bidder shall be required to submit complete set of the type test reports
along with the offer.
In case these type tests are conducted earlier than five years, all the type tests as
per the relevant standard shall be carried out by the successful bidder at NABL in
presence of purchaser's representative free of cost before commencement of supply. The
undertaking to this effect should be furnished along with the offer without which the
offer shall be liable for rejection.
The list of type tests is as follows:

 Short time current withstand test and peak current withstand test.
Pag. 12
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
 Lightening Impulse voltage with-stand test

 Temperature rise test.
 Short Circuit current making and breaking tests.
 Power frequency voltage withstand test (dry).
 Capacitive current switching test confirming to EN.
 Mechanical operation test.
 Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit.
 Degree of protection of main tank and outer enclosure
 Switch, circuit breaker, earthing switch making capacity.
 Switch, circuit breaker breaking capacity.
 Internal arc withstand.
 Checking of partial discharge on complete unit.
The details of type test certificate according to the composition of the Switchboard
shall be submitted with the offer.
In addition, for switches, test reports on rated breaking and making capacity shall
be supplied.
For earthing switches, test reports on making capacity, short-time withstand

current and peak short-circuit current shall be supplied.
1.28 Acceptance & routine tests:
After finalisation of the test program of type/acceptance/routine testing, the

purchaser will depute his representatives for witnessing the tests.
1. Conformity with drawings and diagrams,
2. Measurement of closing and opening speeds,
3. Measurement of operating torque,
4. Checking of filling pressure,
5. Checking of gas-tightness,
6. Dielectric testing and main circuit resistance measurement.
7. Power frequency voltage
8. Resistance test for the circuit
9. Mechanical operation tests.
All major type tests shall have been certified at an independent authority.
Pag. 13
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1.29 Inspection:
The inspection may be carried out by the purchaser at any stage of manufacture.
1.30 Prototype sample
Not Applicable
1.31 Manufacturing facilities:
As RMU are having sealed pressure system. in compliance with BS / EN.
1.32 Quality assurance plan:
The bidder shall invariably furnish following information along with his offer.
The supplier shall submit the routine test certificates of bought out items and raw
material, at the time of routine testing of the fully assembled breaker.
1.33 Drawings:
All drawings shall conform to relevant EN Standards Specification. All drawings

shall be in ink.
The Tenderer shall submit along with his tender dimensional general arrangement
drawings of the equipments, illustrative and descriptive literature in triplicate for various
items in the RMUs, which are all essentially required for future automation.
i. Schematic diagram of the RMU panel
ii. Instruction manuals
iii. Catalogues of spares recommended with drawing to indicate each items
of spares
iv. List of spares and special tools recommended by the supplier.
v. Copies of Type Test Certificates as per latest IS/EN.
vi. Drawings of equipments, relays, control wiring circuit, etc.
vii. Foundation drawings of RMU.
viii. Dimensional drawings of each material used for item Vii.
ix. Actual single line diagram of RMU/RMUs with or without extra
combinations shall be made displayed on the front portion of the RMU
so as to carry out the operations easily.
Pag. 14
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1.34 Name plate
Each RMU and its associated equipments shall be provided with a nameplate
legible and indelibly marked with at least the following information.
a) Name of manufacturer
b) Type,
c) Serial number
d) Voltage
e) Current
f) Frequency
g) Symmetrical breaking capacity
h) Making capacity
i) Short time current and its duration
j) Purchase Order number and date
k) Month and Year of supply
l) Rated lighting impulse withstand voltage
Pag. 15
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2 CONTROL PANELS FOR RUKUNGIRI WTP
2.1 Scope:
This scope shall cover design, manufacture, check test, and supply of low voltage
motor/power control Panel boards, MLDB boards etc. as described in this specification
as per drawings and schedule of quantities.
2.1.1 Scope of supply

Panels shall be supplied with the following:
a) The base channel frame with hardware, nuts, bolts, washers etc.
b) Commissioning spares.
c) All relevant drawings, data and instruction manuals.
2.2 General specifications

All the Panels shall be metal clad, totally enclosed, rigid, floor mounting, air
insulated, cubicle type suitable for operation on three phase / single phase, 415 V /230
V, 50 Hz., neutral effectively grounded at transformer and short circuit level as
mentioned in the drawings.
All the outdoor panel shall be double door type with IP55 protection class
construction. All the indoor panel shall have IP52 protection class construction.
The painting of all the metal part shall be as per the painting specification defined
in the datasheet
Panels shall be designed to withstand heaviest condition at site, with maximum
expected ambient temperature of 45° c., 95% humidity and salty, dusty weather.
2.3 Standards and codes:

The Panels shall comply with the latest edition of relevant BS.
BS EN 61439 - General requirements for switchgear and control gear for Voltages
not exceeding 1000 V AC or 1200 V D.C.
up to and including 1000 V AC and 1200 V D.C.
BS EN 60947-2 - Miniature circuit breakers.
EN 60044 - Current transformers
EN 60044 - Voltage transformer
Pag. 16
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
BS EN 60255-118-1 - Electrical relay for protection

BS EN 60051-1 - Indicating instruments
BS EN 60947 - AC motor starters of voltage not exceeding 1000 V..
2.4 Design criteria :

The PMCC, Lighting Panel, Capacitor panel and Auxiliary Panel boards shall be
used to provide power supply in the PUMP HOUSES & WTP at Rukungiri. All the
equipment will be located in humid and tropical atmosphere.
Duty involves direct-on-line / star-delta / Soft starting of large induction motors
and also under certain emergency conditions manual transfer of loads from one source
of supply to other.
For DOL starts motor staring current varies from 6 to 8 times full load current
with maximum of 3 starts per hour.
For Star-Delta starts motor starting current varies from 2.0 to 2.5 times full load
current with maximum of 3 starts per hour.
For Soft Starts, motor starting current varies from 1.4 to 2.5 times full load current
with maximum of 3 starts per hour.
For continuous operation at specified ratings, the temperature rise of various
equipment / components shall be limited to the permissible values stipulated in relevant
standards and/or this specification.
All equipment and components thereof shall be capable of withstanding the
mechanical forces and thermal stresses of the short circuit currents listed in the
Appendices without any damage or deterioration of the materials.
Circuit breaker shall not produce any harmful over voltage during switching off
induction motors.
2.5 Special requirement

Starter of each motor should have provision for START & STOP control through
SCADA along with manual control and local control.
1 Starter of each motor should have communication port RS-485.
2 Motors of rating 7.5 kw and smaller will have DOL Starter.
3 Star-Delta Starters should be Fully Automatic Type.
4 Motors less than 90 kw will have Star-Delta Starter.
5 Bus bar design should be suitable for current density not less than 0.8 amp /
mm2
Pag. 17
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
6 The panel should withstand Short circuit fault level of 50 kA / 1 Sec. Vendor
should submit valid certificate, not older than 10 years, from CPRI / Competent
Authority.
2.6 Construction
CUBICLE TYPE PANELS:
a) STRUCTURE:
The Panels shall be metal clad enclosed and be fabricated out of high quality
CRCA sheet, suitable for indoor installation having dead front operated and floor
mounting type.
The design construction shall be such as to allow extension at either end.
All CRCA sheet steel used in the construction of Panels shall be 2 mm. thick and
shall be folded and braced as necessary to provide a rigid support for all components.
Joints of any kind in sheet steel shall be seam welded, all welding slag grounded off and
welding pits wiped smooth with plumber metal.
The PCC & MCC shall be of single front construction and Non-draw-out type.
The Panels shall be totally enclosed, completely dust and vermin proof,
conforming to degree of protection IP-52. Gaskets between all adjacent units and
beneath all covers shall be provided to render the joints dust proof. All doors and covers
shall have neoprene rubber gaskets and shall be lockable.
All panels and covers shall be properly fitted and secured with the frame and holds
in the panel correctly positioned. Fixing screws shall enter into holes, taped into an
adequate thickness of metal or provided with bolts and nuts. Self-threading screws shall
not be used in the construction of Panels.
A base channel of 75 mm x 45 x 5 mm. shall be provided at the bottom. A
clearance of 300 mm. between the floor of the Panels and the bottom of the lower most
units shall be provided.
Panels shall be preferably arranged in multi-tier formation. The Panels shall be of
adequate size with a provision of 20% spare feeders and also 20% space to
accommodate possible future additional switchgear. The size of the Panels shall be
designed in such a way that the internal space is sufficient for hot air movement and the
electrical component does not attain temperature more than 45°c.
All the electrical component shall be de-rated for 50°c.
Knock out holes of appropriate size and number shall be provided in the Panels in
conformity with the number, and the size of incoming and outgoing cables.
Pag. 18
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Alternately, the Panels shall be provided with removable sheet steel plates at top
and bottom to drill holes for cable entry at site.
The Panels shall be designed to facilitate easy inspection, maintenance and repair.
The panels shall be sufficiently rigid to support the equipment without distortion under
normal and under short circuit condition. They shall be suitably braced for short circuit
duty.
b) PROTECTION CLASS :
All the indoor Panels shall have protection class of IP 52 for indoor installation
and IP 55 for outdoor installation.
c) PAINTING
Panels shall be powder coated after proper cleaning. The thickness of painting
shall be between 70- 80 microns. Paint shade will be as per data sheet.
d) CIRCUIT COMPARTMENTS:
Each switch fuse unit shall be housed in separate compartments and shall be
enclosed on all sides. Sheet steel hinged lockable door shall be duly interlocked with the
switch fuse unit in ÒN’ and ÒFF’ position. Safety interlocks shall be provided for SFU
to prevent the SFU from being open when the SFU is in ÒN’ position.
In case of ACB, it should be as per data sheet.
The door shall not form an integral part of draw out position of the circuit breaker.
All instruments and indicating lamp shall be mounted on the compartment door. Sheet
steel barriers shall be provided between the tiers in a vertical section.
e) INSTRUMENT COMPARTMENTS:
Separate adequate compartment shall be provided for accommodating instruments,

indicating lamps, control contactors / relays and control fuses etc. These components
shall be accessible for testing and maintenance without any danger of accidental contact
with live parts of the circuit breaker / switch fuse unit, busbar and connections.
f) BUSBARS:
The busbar shall be air insulated and made of high quality, high conductivity, high
strength Aluminium. The busbar shall be of 3 phases and neutral system with separate
neutral and earth bar. The bus bar and interconnection between bus bars and various
components shall be of high conductivity Aluminium. The busbar shall be of rectangular
cross-section designed to withstand full load current for phase bus bars and half rated
current for neutral bus bars and shall be extensible on either side. The busbar size shall
be as per drawing. The busbar shall have uniform cross-section throughout the length.
Pag. 19
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Bus bar design should be suitable for current density minimum 0.8 amp / mm2
The bus bars and interconnections shall be insulated with heat shrinkable PVC
sleeve and be colour coded in red, yellow, blue and black to identify the 3 phases and
neutral of the system if specified in datasheet. The busbar shall be supported on
unbreakable, non-hygroscopic SMC insulated supports at sufficiently close intervals to
prevent bus bars sag and shall effectively withstand electromagnetic stresses in the event
of fault level of 50KA.
The bus bar shall be housed in a separate compartment. The bus bar shall be
isolated with 3 mm. thick Bakelite sheet to avoid any accidental contact. The bus bar
shall be arranged such that minimum clearance between the bus bars to be maintained as
below:
Between phases : 25 mm. minimum
Between phases and neutral : 25 mm.
Between phases and earth : 25 mm.
Between neutral and earth : 20 mm. Minimum
Minimum current rating for vertical busbars shall not be less than 200A.
All bus bar connections shall be done by drilling holes in bus bars and connecting
by chromium plated or tinned plated brass bolts and nuts. Additional cross-section of
bus bar shall be provided in all Panels to cover up the holes drilled in the bus bar. Spring
and flat washers shall be used for tightening the bolts.
All connections between bus bars and circuit breakers / switches and cable
terminals shall be through aluminium strips of proper size to carry full rated current.
These strips shall be insulated with insulating tapes.
g) ELECTRICAL POWER AND CONTROL WIRING CONNECTION:
i. Terminal for both incoming and outgoing cable connections shall be suitable
for 1100 V grade, aluminium / copper conductor PVC insulated and sheathed,
armoured cable and shall be suitable for connections of solder-less sockets for
the cable size as indicated on the relevant drawings of the Panels.
ii. Power connections for incoming feeders of the main Panels shall be suitable
for 1100 V grade aluminium conductor (LT XLPE/PVC) cables.
iii. Both control and power wiring shall be brought out in cable alley for ease of
external connections, operation and maintenance.
iv. Both control and power terminals shall be properly shrouded.
v. 10% spare terminals shall be provided on each terminal block. Sufficient
terminals shall be provided on each terminal block, so that not more than one
Pag. 20
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
outgoing wire is connected per terminal. Terminal strips for power and control
shall preferably be separated from each other by suitable barriers of enclosures.
vi. Wiring inside the modules for power, control, protection and instruments etc.
shall be done with use of 1100 V grade, PVC insulated copper conductor
cables conforming to BS. Power wiring inside the starter module shall be rated
for full current raring of respective contactor, but not less than 4.0 sq.mm.
cross section area. For current transformer circuits, 2.5 sq.mm. copper
conductor wire shall be used. Other control wiring shall be done with 1.5
sq.mm. copper conductor wires. Wires for connections to the door shall be
flexible. All conductors shall be crimped with solder-less sockets at the ends
before connections are made to the terminals.
vii. Control power for the Motor starter module shall be taken from the respective
module switchgear outgoing. Control power wiring shall have control fuses,
(HRC fuse type) for circuit protection. All indicating lamps shall be protected
by HRC fuses.
viii. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that the layout of wiring is neat and
orderly. Identification ferrules shall be fitted to all the wire termination for ease
of identification and to facilitate checking and testing.
ix. Spring type washers shall be used for all copper and aluminium connections.
x. Final wiring diagram of the Panels power and control circuit with ferrules
numbers shall be submitted along with the Panels as one of the documents
against the contract.
Pag. 21
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3 L.T. PVC POWER AND CONTROL CABLES
3.1 Scope
The specification covers design, manufacture, shop testing, packing and delivery
of 1100 Volts grade , Aluminium conductor , PVC insulated multi core power cables.
3.2 Service conditions

Cables to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory
continuous operation under the following tropical conditions.
 Maximum ambient temperature (deg C) 50
 Maximum temperature in shade (deg C) 45
 Minimum temperature in air (deg C) in shade 3.5
 Relative Humidity (%) 10 to 100
 Maximum annual Rainfall (mm) 1450
 Maximum Wind Pressure (kg/mm2) 150
 Maximum altitude above mean sea level (Meters) 1500
 Isoceraunic level (days/year) 50
 Seismic level (Horizontal acceleration) 0.3 g.
 Ground temperature (deg. C ) 30
 Thermal Resistivity of soil ( deg. C cm / watt ) 150
 Depth of laying for 1.1 kV (cm) 75
 Cables installed singly for twin / multi core Cables and 3 Nos. of single core
cables in Trefoil Touching.
 Moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to rust and fungus
growth.
3.3 Standards
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification, the rating as well as
performance and testing of the LT PVC cables shall conform to the latest relevant
standards as listed in, but not limited to Annexure-I.
3.4 General technical requirements
3.4.1 Power and control cables

A. ARMOURED ALUMINIUM POWER AND CONTROL CABLES
Pag. 22
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1100 Volts Grade L.T. cable with stranded H2/H4 grade aluminium conductor ,
PVC / XLPE insulated ( Type-A ), colour coded , laid up , with fillers and/or binder tape
where necessary provided with extruded PVC inner sheath , single galvanised round
steel wire armoured and provided with PVC outer sheath. Cable shall be conforming to
BS 7870..
B. UNARMOURED ALUMINIUM POWER AND CONTROL CABLES
1100 Volts Grade L.T. cable with stranded H2/H4 grade aluminium conductor ,
PVC / XLPE insulated ( Type-A ), colour coded , laid up , with fillers and/or binder tape
where necessary, provided with extruded PVC inner sheath and provided with PVC
outer sheath . Cable shall be conforming to BS 7870 & BS 7835
C. UNARMOURED COPPER CONTROL CABLES
1100 Volts Grade L.T. control cable with stranded untinned copper conductor ,
PVC insulated ( Type-A ), colour coded upto 5 cores and number coded above 5 cores,
laid up , with fillers and/or binder tape where necessary, provided with extruded PVC
inner sheath and provided with PVC outer sheath . Cable shall be conforming to BS
7870.
D. ARMOURED COPPER CONTROL CABLES
1100 Volts Grade L.T. cable with stranded untinned copper conductor , PVC
insulated ( Type-A ), colour coded upto 5 cores and by number coded above 5 cores,
laid up , with fillers and/or binder tape where necessary, provided with extruded PVC
inner sheath , single galvanised round steel wire armoured and provided with PVC outer
sheath . Cable shall be conforming to BS 7870.
3.4.2 Insulation, inner sheath and outer sheath

Insulation , inner sheath and outer sheath shall be applied by separate extrusion .
Inner sheath shall be applied by extrusion only. Bedding of PVC tape for inner sheath is
not acceptable. Colour of outer sheath for L.T. PVC Power cable and control cable shall
be black .
The quality of insulation should be good and insulation should not be deteriorated
when exposed to the climatic conditions.
3.4.3 Sequential marking of length on cable

Non erasable Sequential Marking of length shall be provided by embossing on
outer sheath of the cable for each meter length.
Pag. 23
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3.4.4 Continuous a.c. current capacity

Continuous a.c. current capacity shall be conforming to BS.
3.4.5 Short circuit current

Short circuit current of L. T . PVC cable shall be as per Table given below.
Duration of Short Circuit in sec Area of Al. Short circuit current in kA

Conductor
T A I=0.07575 x A/sq.rt (t)
1 1.5 sq.mm 0.114
1 2.5 sq.mm 0.189
1 4 sq.mm 0.303
1 6 sq.mm. 0.455
1 10 sq.mm 0.758
1 16 sq.mm. 1.212
1 25 sq.mm. 1.894
1 35 sq.mm. 2.651
1 50 sq.mm. 3.788
Duration of Short Circuit in Area of Cu. Short circuit current in kA

sec Conductor
T A I= A/( 8.7 x sq.rt (t) )
1 2.5 sq.mm 0.287
Pag. 24
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3.5 Tests and testing facilities
3.5.1 Type tests

Type tests are required to be carried out from the first lot of supply on a sample of
any one size of cable ordered .
3.5.2 Routine test

All the Routine tests shall be carried out on each and every delivery length of
cable. The result should be given in test report.
3.6 Acceptance tests

All Acceptance tests including the optional test shall be carried out on sample
taken from the delivery lot.
3.7 Packing and marking
3.7.1 Standard lenght
Cables shall be supplied in standard length of 500 meters with plus minus 5%
(five percent ) tolerance wound on non returnable wooden drums of good quality.
3.7.2 Non standard lenght
Non standard length 5% ( five percent ) of the ordered quantity of respective size
shall be acceptable in non-standard length which shall not be less than 100 ( One
Hundred ) meters.
3.7.3 Particulars
The following particulars shall be properly legible embossed on the cable sheath at
the intervals of not exceeding one meter through out the length of the cable. The cables
with poor and illegible embossing shall be liable for rejection.
a) Manufactures name .
b) Voltage grade.
c) Year of manufacture.
d) Successive Length.
e) Size of cable
f) ISI mark
Pag. 25
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3.7.4 Packaging and informations

The cable shall be packed on a drum of suitable size. The cable drum shall carry
the following information .
a) Manufacturers name.
b) Type of cable and voltage grade.
c) Nominal cross sectional area of the conductor.
d) Length of cable on drum .
e) Number of lengths on drum .
f) Direction of rotation of drum ( an arrow )
g) Approximate gross weight.
h) Year of manufacture.
3.7.5 Cables statistical data

Supplier should provide statistical data regarding cables of all sizes viz.-
1) Weight of one meter of finished product of cable of various sizes and ratings.
2) Weight of one meter of bare conductor used for cables of various sizes and
ratings
3.8 Quality assurance plan

The bidder shall enclose the quality assurance plan invariably along with offer
followed by him in respect of the bought out items
3.9 Annexure-I: List of standards
(All amended upto date)
SR.NO. STANDARD NO. TITLE
1. BS 7835 COPPER OR ALUMINIUM CONDUCTOR FOR PVC / XLPE

CABLE.
2. BS 7870 LV & MV INSULATED MULTI CORE CABLES FOR

GENERATION & DISTRIBUTION.
Pag. 26
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
4 POWER TRANSFORMER
GENERAL - PRESENT POWER SOURCE:
4.1 General Loads description
The capacity of the transformers is calculated based on the total simultaneous

maximum demand (calculated based on the load factors and diversity factors) plus 10 %
contingency. A transformer with the next higher standard rating recommended as per BS
EN, will be selected. 100% stand by transformers will be provided.
Lifting lugs and eyebolts shall be so located that a safe clearance is obtained
without the use of a spreader, between the sling and transformer bushings.
Transformers shall be provided with fixed type radiators. Fins of the radiators
shall not have sharp edges and shall be rounded in shape.
The sequence and orientation of HV/LV side phase and neutral bushings shall be
as specified in the latest edition of relevant BS.
Transformer shall operate without injurious heating at the rated KVA and at any
voltage up to + 10 % of the rated voltage of any tap. Transformer shall be designed for
110 % continuous over-fluxing withstands capability.
Noise level of the transformer shall be less than 75 dB.
4.2 Cable terminations
HV & LV side cable boxes shall have sufficient space for segregating the cable
cores and for adequate clearance in air between bare conductors at the terminals.
Cable boxes shall be complete with necessary glands, lugs and armor grips.
All auxiliary wiring from current transformers, bucholz relay, oil/winding

temperature indicators, etc. shall be marshaled to a separate weatherproof and vermin
proof marshalling box with an independent access cover. The degree of protection of the
enclosure of the marshalling box shall be IP 55.
Pag. 27
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The marshalling box shall be complete with necessary cable glands and cable lugs.
The marshalling box and components shall comply with the requirements specified for
control cabinets elsewhere in this specification.
4.3 Applicable Standards
The transformer and its accessories shall conform to the latest editions, including
all amendments and revisions, of the following standards:
Power transformer: BS 60076-1
Transformer oil: BS EN 60296
Bushing BS EN 60137
4.4 Fittings and Accessories
The following fitting and accessories shall be provided on the transformer.

 Inspection manhole in the cover.
 Lifting lugs for both the transformer and the core.
 Two earthing terminals on opposite ends of the transformer tank.
 Name plate, rating plate and diagram plate.
 Radiator banks with suitably located thermometer pockets for measuring inlet
and outlet oil temperature.
 Conservator, complete with filling plug, sump and drain valves and a shut- off
valve on the pipe connection between transformer tank and conservator, to
permit removal of the conservator. The conservator shall be designed to
maintain an oil seal up to a temperature of 100°C.
 Oil temperature indicator with a range of minimum 20°C up to the maximum
operating temperature.
 Weatherproof dehydrating breather with activated alumina or silica gel as the
dehydrating agent.
 Oil level indicator
Gas detector relays, with separate alarm and trip contacts, complete with shut-off
valves.
 Separate drain valve, oil-sampling valve with plug and a top filter valve on the
tank.
 Explosion vent with diaphragm. The device shall be rainproof. An equalizer pipe
connecting the pressure relief device to the conservator shall be provided.
 Separately mounted, waterproof and dustproof marshalling box (IP55) housing
the oil temperature indicator with alarm and trip contacts and marshalling
Pag. 28
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
facilities for electrical devices mounted on the transformer.

 Adequate number of air vents for relieving trapped air during oil filling and
during maintenance.
 Thermometer pockets and sensing element mounted on the transformer tank
cover for measuring top oil temperature.
 Adequate amount of insulating oil required for first filling, plus 10% excess oil.
4.5 Tolerance on losses:
The permissible tolerances on the guaranteed values of transformer losses shall be

as per BS.
4.6 Technical details:
The specific technical details of the main transformer shall be as per the draft
given below:
Sr. No. Description Particulars
1 Rated output (kVA) (*)
2 Transformer installation Outdoor / Indoor
3 No load transformation ratio (*)kV / (*)V
4 Number of phases Three
5 Rated Frequency 50 Hz
6 Impedance at principal tap As per IEC
Number of windings / Material of

7 Two / Copper
conductor
8 Type of cooling ONAN
9 Vector group Dyn 11
10 LV neutral earthing Solidly earthed
11 Design ambient temperature. 40°C
12 Winding temperature rise As per BS
Pag. 29
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

measured by resistance method
Oil temperature rise by

13 As per BS
thermometer
Full capacity, ON Load circuit tap changer
14 Tap changer
on HV side with pad locking facility
15 Tap range + 5 % to -5 %
16 Tap step 2.5 %
17 Terminal connection
Bushings suitable for overhead ACSR

“DOG” conductor for outdoor type; /
a) HV bushing / Cable box
Cable box suitable for terminating 11kv
grade Al XLPE arm cable.
Cable box suitable for terminating 1.1kV

b) LV cable box
Grade XLPE arm. Cable (*) Al.
LV neutral shall be through 1.1 kV rated

bushings, both inside the cable box for
c) LV Neutral forming the 3 Ph, 4-wire system and
outside the cable box for direct
connections to earth pits.
18 Insulation of windings HV LV
a) Nominal system voltage (*) kV (*) V
b) Rated voltage (*)kV (*)kV
One minute power frequency

c) (*)kV (rms) (*)kV (rms)
withstand voltage (dry & wet)
Pag. 30
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

1.2/50 micro second full wave
d) (*)kV (rms) --
impulse withstand voltage
19 Insulation of bushings HV LV (Line & Neutral)
a) Nominal system voltage (*) kV (*) V
(*) values to be worked out by the contractor based on approved calculations submitted by
contractor
4.7 Tests
The tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Project Manager /
representative. The following tests shall be carried out on the assembled transformer
during inspection at the manufacturer’s works.
• Measurement of resistance of windings at principal and extreme taps
• Ratio at each tap, polarity and phase relationships
• Measurement of impedance voltage at principal and extreme taps
• Measurement of no load current and no load losses at rated frequency
and at both the rated voltage and 110 % rated voltage
• Measurement of efficiency at ½, ¾ and full load
• Measurement of insulation resistance
• Induced over voltage withstand test
• Separate source voltage withstand test
• Magnetic unbalance test
• Pressure Test for the tank
4.8 Impulse Test and Heat Run Test
In addition to the above tests, a withstand test with lightning impulse, chopped on
the tail, shall be carried out on one limb of HV winding of the transformer if impulse
test has not been already carried out on transformer of similar capacity in the last three
years. Similarly heat run test shall also be carried out if the same has not been already
Pag. 31
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
carried out on transformer of similar capacity in the last three years. Type test certificate
shall be submitted before supply.
If the type test has to be carried out, it shall be at the contractor’s expense.
Pag. 32
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
5 EARTHING & PROTECTION TO STRUCTURES

AGAINST LIGHTNING
5.1 Earthing general
The earthing shall be carried out as per BS 7430. The material of earthing
conductor will be GI. The values of fault level for designing the electrical system shall
be based on transformer capacity, its impedance and system fault level. Fault clearing
time for sizing of earth conductor will be taken as one second. While sizing the buried
earth conductor, a corrosion allowance of at least 20 % shall be taken. Plant earthing
system shall be designed such that the overall earthing grid resistance is maximum one
ohm.
Main earthing conductors outside and inside the building shall be planned in such
a manner that various equipment are connected to earthing system by two connections in
a reliable manner.
5.2 Scope
The scope includes supply of earthing conductors, earth electrode pits and their
installation including associated civil work as per the specifications and approved
drawings.
Earthing system shall be provided to ensure equipment safety, personnel safety

and to facilitate designed operation of protective devices during earth fault conditions in
the associated system.
All work such as cutting, bending, supporting, painting/coating, drilling, welding,

clamping, bolting and connection to structures, equipment frames, terminals, hardware
and consumables such as fixing cleats/clamps, anchor fasteners, lugs,bolts, nuts,
washers, bituminous compound, welding rods, anti-corrosive paint as required for the
complete work shall be deemed to be included by the Contractor as part of the
installation work.
Pag. 33
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
5.3 Earthing protection system installation
Earthing protection system (wherever required) shall conform to the latest edition
including all official amendments and revisions of BS 7430 & BS 7454. All materials
and fittings used in the earthing installation shall conform to the relevant BS. Installation
work shall be in accordance with approved earthing layout drawings and any change in
routing, size of conductors etc. shall be subject to the prior approval of the Project
Manager.
Installation of earth conductors in outdoor areas, will be buried in ground, with

excavation of trench of size 600 mm deep and 450 mm wide, laying of conductor at 600
mm depth, welding as required of main grid conductor joints; as well as provision of
risers up to 500 mm above ground at required locations and then backfilling of
excavated area by material that is free from stones and other harmful mixtures. Backfill
shall be placed in layers of 150 mm, uniformly spread along the trench and compacted
by approved means. If the excavated soil is found unsuitable for backfilling, the
Contractor shall arrange for suitable material from outside.
Metallic frames of all electrical equipment shall be earthed by two separate and
distinct leads and then connected with earthing system. Cable sheaths and armour shall
be bonded to the earthing system. Metal pipes and cable conduits shall be effectively
bonded and earthed. Neutral connection shall never be used for equipment earthing.
The work of embedment of earthing conductor in RCC floors/walls along with

provision of earth plate inserts/pads/earth risers shall be done by the contractor
preferably before the floors/columns/walls are cast. The embedded conductors shall be
connected to reinforcing rods wherever necessary.
The scope of installation of earthing leads to the equipment and risers on steel
structures/walls shall include laying the conductors, welding / cleating at specified
intervals, welding to the main earth grids, risers, bolting at equipment terminals and
coating welded joints by bituminous paint.
Pag. 34
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Galvanised conductors shall be touched up with zinc-rich paint, when holes have
to be drilled in them at site for bolting to equipment/structure.
Wherever earthing conductor passes through walls, GS sleeves shall be provided

for the passage of earthing conductor. The pipe ends shall be sealed by suitable water-
proof compound. Water stops shall be provided where earthing conductor enters the
building from outside, below grade level.
The lightning protection system for the structures shall be installed by forming a
grid of exposed continuous earth conductors and taking down-comers along the walls /
supports of the structure and terminating the same at earth pits. The lightning protection
system earth pits shall be inter-connected to form the safety earthing grid provided for
the building / structure. The safety earthing grid shall be connected to the mains grid of
the switch yard.
5.4 Connections
All connections between the earth conductors buried in earth / concrete and
between earth conductor and earth leads shall be of welded type. Connection between
MS conductor buried in ground and GS conductor above ground shall be welded type
made by bringing the MS conductor above ground.
Connection between earth leads and electrical equipment/distribution boards /

lighting panels, etc. shall be of bolted type. Lighting panel shall be earthed by 8 SWG
GI wires and distribution Board shall be earthed by 25x6mm GI strip as applicable.
5.5 Earth electrode pits
Electrodes shall, as far as practicable, be embedded below permanent moisture

level. Test pits with concrete covers shall be provided for periodic testing of earth
resistance. Installation of pipe electrodes in test pits shall be suitable for watering. The
necessary materials required for installation of test pits shall be supplied and installed by
Contractor. The installation work shall also include civil works such as
excavation/drilling and connection to main earth grid.
Pag. 35
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Treated earth pits shall be treated with salt and charcoal, if average electrical
resistively of soil is more than 20 ohm meter. Soil, salt and charcoal placed around the
electrode shall be finely graded, free from stones and other harmful mixtures. Backfill
shall be placed in layers of 250 mm thick uniformly spread and compacted. If excavated
soil is found unsuitable for backfilling, the Contractor shall arrange for a suitable soil
from outside.
5.6 Minimum sizes
Following are the minimum sizes of various components of earthing system
Sr. No. Description Size & Material No. of Leads
LV Switchboard & Sub-

1 50 x6 mm GS flat 2
DB
11kV Outdoor Vacuum

3 50 x6 mm GS flat 2
Circuit breaker
4 Capacitor Control panel 50 x 6 mm GS flat 2
5 Cable tray support 50 X 6 mm GS flat 2
6 Local PB station 14 SWG - GS 1
7 Motors
a) Small motors (motor

8 SWG GS wire 2
ratings up to 7.5kW)
b) Main motors 50 X 6 mm GS flat 2
4(2 nos for neutral and

8 Transformer 65 x 10 mm GS flat
2 nos. for body.
9 Lightning Arrestor Set 65 X 10 mm GS flat 2
10 Isolator 65 X 10 mm GS flat 2
Pag. 36
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Sr. No. Description Size & Material No. of Leads
40 mm dia., 3 M long,
11 Earth Electrode heavy duty GI pipe -
electrode
12 Internal Earthing Grid 65 X 10 mm GS flat -
Main grid buried in

13 65 x 10 mm MS flat -
ground
5.7 Applicable standards
All standards and codes of practice referred to below shall be the latest edition
including all official amendments and revisions.

• Code of practice for earthing : BS 7430
• Lightning protection : BS EN 62305
5.8 Earthing of Switchboards / Panels
Each switchboard, control panel, etc. shall be provided with an earth busbar
running along its entire length. The earth busbar shall be located at the bottom of the
board/panel. Earth busbars shall be of copper and shall be rated to carry the rated
symmetrical short circuit current of the associated board/panel for one second, unless
otherwise specified. Earth busbars shall be properly supported to withstand stresses
induced by the momentary short circuit current of value equal to the momentary short
circuit rating of the associated switchboard/panel.
Positive connection of the frames of all the equipment mounted in the switchboard
to the earth busbar shall be maintained through insulated conductors of size equal to the
earth busbar or the load current carrying conductor, whichever is smaller. All instrument
and relay cases shall be connected to earth busbar by means of 650 V grade, green
Pag. 37
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
coloured, PVC insulated, stranded, tinned copper, 2.5 sq. mm conductor looped through
the case earth terminals.
All panels shall be equipped with an earth bus securely fixed along the inside base
of panels. Copper bus bar of size 25 x6 mm shall be used. When several panels are
mounted adjoining each other, the earth bus shall be made continuous and necessary
connectors and clamps for this purpose shall be included in the scope of supply of the
Vendor. Provision shall be made for extending the earth bus bars to future adjoining
panels on either side.
All metallic cases of relays, instruments and other panel mounted equipment shall
be connected to the earth bus by independent copper wires of size not less than 2.5
sq.mm. The color code of earthing wires shall be as per applicable standard. Earthing
wires shall be connected on terminals with suitable clamp connectors and soldering shall
not be permitted.
Looping of earth connections which would result in loss of earth connection to

other devices when the loop is broken shall not be permitted. However, looping of earth
connections between equipment to provide alternative paths to earth bus shall be
provided.
CT secondary neutral or common lead shall be earthed at one place only at the
terminal blocks where they enter the panel. Such earthing shall be made through links so
that earthing may be removed from one group without disturbing continuity of earthing
system for other groups.
5.9 Protection to structures against lightning electromagnetic pulse
All the structures will be protected against lightning.
The relevant standard BS EN 62305 to referred.
The lightning protection for structure and its connected services would be to
enclose the structure within an earthed and preferably conducting metallic shield [box],
Pag. 38
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
and in addition provide adequate bonding of any connected services at the entrance
point onto the shield.
Pag. 39
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
6 LT MOTOR
6.1 Scope
These specifications cover the design, manufacture, inspection, testing, packing

and supply of Energy Efficient high voltage squirrel cage induction motor and
associated accessories, to run pump as specified.
6.2 General
The motor and its components parts and auxiliaries shall be designed and
manufactured to provide inter-changeability in the product of any vendor between the
same class, size and type. The vendor shall use only highest standard material and the
workmanship employed shall be of best quality accepted internationally.
6.3 Selection of motors
Motors are to be selected with consideration of Torque-speed characteristic of

pump, duty cycle and mounting.
Supply voltage of motors is to be as below:
Motors up to 250 kW and below : 415 Volt /3 phase / 50 Hz., as per the power
source made available.
6.4 Site conditions
Motor shall be suitable for operating satisfactorily in humid atmosphere.
Ambient temperature: 400C , maximum Humidity: 98%
Altitude: 1500 meters above (MSL) Mean Sea Level.
6.5 Applicable codes
The offered motor and its components shall be in accordance with latest editions
of following standards. Vendor shall clearly bring out in the offer the applicable
Pag. 40
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
standard for every features of the offered motor, if different from the following
standards.
Sr. No. Standard No. Title

a) BS EN 60034-1 Specifications for three-phase induction Motors.
b) BS EN 60034-1 Specifications of Rotating Electrical machines.
c) NOT APPLICABLE
d) BS EN 60034-5 Degree of protection provided by enclosures of rotating
electrical apparatus.
e) BS EN 60034 IE-2 Efficiency class.
f) EN 60034 Dimensions of three phase foot mounted Induction
motors.
g) BS EN 60034-7 Types of construction and mounting of motors
h) BS EN 60034-8 Terminal marking for rotating electrical machinery
i) BS EN 60034-1 Value of performance characteristics for three phase
induction motors.
j) BS EN 60034-1. Guide for testing of three phase induction motors.
k) BS EN 60034-2 Method of determination of efficiency of rotating
electrical machines.
l) BS EN 60034-14 Measurement of evaluation of vibration of rotating
m) BS EN 60034-18 Insulating materials for electric machinery and
apparatus in relation to their thermal stability in service.
n) BS EN 60034-6 Designation of Methods of cooling for rotating
o) BS EN 60034-9 Noise level
6.6 Duty
Motor offered shall be suitable for continuous duty for driving the pump having
details given in the pump data sheet, at the required loads.
The motor shall be designed suitable for Star-Delta Starting. The starting current
shall be limited to 6 times the full load current at rated voltage. Motor shall be designed
Pag. 41
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
for restarting under full load, after a momentary loss of voltage with the possibility of
application of 100% of the rated voltage when the residual voltage has dropped down to
50% and is in phase opposition to the applied voltage. The offered motor shall also be
suitable for DOL starting at 80% of rated voltage.
The motor shall be designed to allow the minimum of consecutive starts indicated
below:
a) No. of consecutive start ups with initial temperature of motor at ambient level
(cold): 3
b) No. of consecutive start-ups with initial temperature of the motor at full load
temperature (hot): 2
c) No. of hourly start-up uniformly distributed starting from final steady working
temperature: 3
The locked rotor withstand time of the motor at 110% of the rated voltage shall be
at least 25 seconds more than the motor starting time at 80% of the rated voltage
6.7 Electrical system
(i) Rated voltage : 415 Volts ± 10%
(ii) Rated frequency : 50 Hz ± 5%
(iii) Any Combination of (i) & (ii) : 10%
(iv) Rated output : To meet the pump requirement as specified.
6.8 Direction of rotation
The direction of rotation shall suit the requirement of pump. It shall be clearly
marked on the body of motor together with phase sequence of the motor terminals
associated with this rotation.
6.9 Enclosure
The motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled, with IP-55 protection as per BS
standard.
Pag. 42
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
6.10 Windings
Motor shall be provided with class F insulation with temperature rise (above the
specified ambient temperature) limited to class B as specified in the relevant Standard.
Winding shall be adequately braced to prevent any relative movement during operating
conditions.
6.11 Winding temperature detectors
The motor shall be provided with platinum resistance temperature detector (RTD)
of 100 Ω resistance and temperature coefficient of 3.85 x 10-3. RTDs shall be located in
suitable positions to measure the winding temperature. A minimum of duplex type three
(One per phase) or Simplex type Six (Two per phase) detectors shall be provided
between the coil sides to measure the winding temperature and Duplex type three (one
per phase) or Simplex type Six (Two per phase) at the base of the slots to measure core
temperature, each placed 1200C apart. A separate terminal box shall be provided for the
temperature detectors for connection with the remotely located controller unit of the
Owner. Details of this terminal box are given elsewhere in the tender.
6.12 Terminal box
The ends of the winding shall be brought out into the terminal box by means of
non-tracking fire proof and non hygroscopic bushing with adequately sized bolted anti
vibration terminals. The terminals shall be adequately designed to prevent slackening of
connections & reduction of clearances due to vibration. Line terminal shall be
thoroughly insulated from the frame. The terminal box shall be located on the right side
of motor, viewed from the driving end. The terminal box shall be suitable to rotate by 90
deg in all positions.
Necessary clearances and creep age distances between live parts and between live
parts & earth shall be kept. Motor terminal box shall be suitable for withstanding a 3-
phase short circuit at the terminals of the motor for 0.25 sec.
Pag. 43
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Terminals shall be distinctly marked inside the terminal box as per relevant BS.
The marking shall be non-removable, indelible, non-cracking, insulating and chemical
resistant.
Nickel or cadmium plated brass double compression cable glands and copper lugs
shall be provided for the number and size of the cables specified. Cable sizes specified
in the data sheet are tentative and same shall be confirmed after placement of the
purchase order. All cable entries shall be NPT sized.
6.13 Bearings
Motor bearing shall be of suitable type and size to accommodate any axial thrust
from pump and its own axial/radial thrust. Motor bearing shall be chosen such that in all
case bearing shall have a minimum life of 40,000 hours. Detailed specifications of
bearings and lubrication shall be furnished along with the offer. Motors shall have
preferably Grease lubricated bearings (Ball or Roller) or of manufacturers standard type.
6.13.1 Grease lubricated bearings
Bearings shall be capable of grease injection from outside without removal of

covers. When grease nipples are provided, these shall be associated where necessary,
with appropriately located relief devices, which ensure passage of grease through the
bearings. The motors shall have facility of on line greasing.
6.14 Winding insulation
The motor winding shall be specially treated to resist the action of corrosive
agents, liquid or gaseous substances deteriorate the insulation. The winding shall be
tropicalized and shall be suitably varnished, baked and treated with epoxy gel for
operating satisfactorily in humid and corrosive atmospheres. Adequate insulation shall
be provided between coils of different phases, which lie together.
The supplier shall clearly indicate the level of inter turn insulation provided.
Pag. 44
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
6.15 Bearing insulation
The NDE bearing shall be insulated from the motor frame to avoid circulating
shaft current. A detailed drawing showing the insulation arrangement shall be furnished.
In any case, the induced voltage at the shaft end with motor running on no-load shall not
exceed 250 mV rms for ball/roller bearings and 400 mV rms for sleeve bearings.
6.16 Joints
All joints in the motor insulation such as coil connection etc shall be insulated to
the same level as that of complete motor. Additionally, joints should have minimum
resistance and mechanically strong. Joints shall be braced to withstand various stresses
likely to encounter during their service.
6.17 Bearing temperature detectors
Resistance type temperature detectors for both DE & NDE shall be provided.
Details of the temperature sensing device and their termination are given in the
Instrumentation section of the tender.
6.18 Cooling
Motor shall be fan-cooled. Cooling fan should be arranged to direct the airflow
towards the motor pump coupling. The fans shall be of corrosion resistant material, non-
sparking type and appropriately protected with a fan guard.
6.19 Space heater
The motor shall have space heater, suitable for 240 V single phase, to avoid
condensation during shut down period. Heater shall conform to the provisions of
applicable IEC codes. The heater leads shall be brought out into separate weather proof
terminal box fitted with gland of NPT size suitable for specified cable.
6.20 Lifting hooks
Suitable eye bolts or lifting lugs of adequate design shall be provided on the body
of the motor for facilitating easy lifting/ rigging during erection/ maintenance.
Pag. 45
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
6.21 Earthing terminals
Provision shall be made on the body of the motor to earth effectively at two
distinct locations (Diametrically Opposite). Requisite nuts and spring washers shall be
provided for earth connection. These earthing terminals shall be in addition to the earth
terminal provided in the terminal box for earthing of the armour. Minimum size of the
stud shall be 12mm.
6.22 Cable glands
The vendor shall also supply necessary double compression cable glands and
copper lugs.
6.23 Foundation bolts
Requisite number of holding down bolts/foundation bolts with locking nuts shall
be supplied to mount the motor on the combined base plate/foundation.
6.24 Name plate
A corrosion resistant stainless steel nameplate shall be affixed on the body of the
motor at an accessible and easily visible place and shall have the following data.
Manufacturer’s name
Serial number and frame size
6.25 Duty
Rated KW, voltage, current, frequency
Number of phases
Winding connection
Type of motor with ISI/International marking.
RPM at full load
Insulation class
Pag. 46
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Maximum temperature rise
Type of cooling
Certifying authority & certificate no.
Tag. No. (shall be furnished by the Owner at the time of drawing approval)
Owner’s purchase order No.
NDE bearing type and cat. No.
DE bearing type and Cat. No.
Any other data specified by relevant IS/IEC.
Any other data the manufacturer deems fit.
6.26 Noise level
The permissible Noise level shall not exceed the stipulations laid down in BS
4999.
6.27 Vibrations
Motor Vibrations shall not exceed the values prescribed in BS EN 60034-14.

Proximity probes are to be provided both at DE & NDE side bearings of motor for
monitoring of vibration from control room.
6.28 Painting
All internal and external metal parts likely to come in contact with the surrounding
air shall be protected with anti-acid paint suitable to resist the highly corrosive
environment and given site conditions. All external surfaces shall be epoxy painted for
the mentioned environment conditions. The color shade shall be NO. 631 as per
BS:381C.
Pag. 47
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
6.29 Inspection & testing
Owner and/or representative of Owner shall have free entry in the factory of the
manufacturer for inspection of the motor during the process of manufacture and after the
motor is ready for final inspection and testing.
All routine and type testing shall be done in presence of the Owner and/or
Owner’s representative. The testing and inspection facilities shall be as per
internationally acceptable norms.
The motor shall be subjected to routine test and type tests as per latest editions of
IEC standards.
Type test shall be conducted on One Motor of each rating and frame size and
routine test shall be conducted on all motors. All tests shall be duly witnessed by the
owner’s Inspector. Internal tests certificate for all motors from the motor manufacturer
along with approval certificate from the competent authority of explosives from the
country of origin in support of having got the approval of subject motor for its use in
hazardous area as specified, are to be submitted to the Inspector for verification &
endorsement.
6.30 Schedule of type tests
Type tests to be carried out & witnessed in one sample of each type/rating
a. Full load test to determine efficiency, power factor and slip.
b. Temperature rise test.
c. Measurement of surface temperature of frame and space heater.
d. Momentary over load test.
e. Over-speed test.
f. Measurement of starting torque, starting current, full load torque, pull out
torque.
g. Measurement of efficiency & power factor on the motor by giving ½, ¾
and full load.
h. NDE Bearing insulation checking.
Pag. 48
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
6.31 Schedule of routine tests
Routine tests to be carried out & Witnessed 100 %. Following checks and tests to
be carried out under routine tests.
 General visual checks & dimensional checks, name plate details and mounting.
 Terminal box type and location checking. Checking of size of cable glands.
 Winding resistance measurement.
 Reduced voltage running up test at no load – to check the ability of motor to run
up to the full speed on no load with 1/√3 of the rated line voltage applied to the
motor for squirrel cage motors.
 Insulation resistance test (both before and after the high voltage tests).
 High voltage test.
 No load test of motor to measure power, current & speed to determine no load
loss, etc.
 Locked-rotor test and measurement of Voltage, current and power input at a
suitable reduced voltage.
 Shaft voltage checking
 Resistance measurement of space heater, RTD’s & BTD’s.
 Measurement of Vibration level.
 Measurement of Noise level.
 Measurement of shaft centre height dimensions and clearance in terminal box.
 Verification of direction of rotation, cooling system & lubrication system.
 The details of the above tests ( both Type & Routine ) procedure along with
desired acceptance values wherever relevant are to be furnished along with the
drawing for Owner’s approval.
6.32 Drawings and documentation.
Following drawings and documents in English language shall be furnished as per

the schedule mentioned hereunder:
Sr. No. Drawing/ Document Time of Number

submission of sets
1. Motor data sheet duly filled in Along with the Two

offer
Pag. 49
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

submission of sets
2. Flameproof, explosion proof certificate from Along with the Two

CCE, India or competent approving authority offer
in country of origin for offered motor and
associated accessories in English.
3. List of spares being supplied for erection, site Along with the Two
testing, commissioning and two years offer
continuous operation
4. Quality Assurance Plan Along with the Two

offer
5. Past supply (last three years) list of motors of Along with the Two
similar category and rating with PO copies and offer
performance certificates from end users for the
supplies only in India.
6. Fully filled compliance / deviation sheet Along with the Two

offer
7. Completed Motor data sheet On placement Three

of Order
8. Certified General Arrangement, cross-sectional On placement Three

and dimensional drawings of motor and its of Order
components
9. Rotor shaft dimensional drawing showing On placement Three

weight and GD2value of Order
10. Foundation/mounting drawing of motor along On placement Three

with static/ dynamic load details. of Order
Pag. 50
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

submission of sets
11. Detailed dimensional drawing of main, neutral On placement Three

star point and auxiliary (space heater & RTDs) of Order
terminal boxes to the extent stipulated in the
purchase order, vendor shall ensure that prior
approval of the purchaser is obtained for
design, drawings or other documentation
before proceeding with manufacture of the
terminal boxes.
12. Thermal withstand curves (hot & cold) On placement Three

of Order
13. Load characteristics curve showing variations On placement Three

of efficiency, power factor, slip with respect to of Order
load
14. Speed torque curve. On placement Three

of Order
15. Test certificates for Fault level of Terminal On satisfactory One

box & Enclosure certificates duly signed by the completion of
inspecting agency. testing &
inspection
16. All final plotted curves indicated in Sr. No. 12, Along with One
13 & 14 inspection test
reports.
17. Operation and Maintenance manuals Along with the Three

despatch of
material
Pag. 51
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

submission of sets
18. Lubrication chart On placement Three

of Order
19. Preventive maintenance Schedule Along with the Three

despatch of
material
20. Details of type test & routine test On Two

procedure along with desired placement
acceptance values of Order
To the extent stipulated in the tender, vendor shall ensure that prior approval of the
purchaser is obtained for design, drawings or other documentation before proceeding
with manufacturing of the equipment.
6.33 Spares, tools & tackles
Vendor shall enclose list of special tools & tackles required for maintenance of
Motor. List of spares recommended other than as per Annexure VI shall also be
submitted along with the offer.
6.34 Motor data sheet
(To be submitted separately for each location)
1. Motor LT SQUIRREL CAGE

INDUCTION MOTOR
2. Driven equipment CENTRIFUGAL PUMP
Pag. 52
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3. Duty CONTINUOUS
4. Manufacturer
Bidders to choose/ select and freeze the make
of motor while submitting their offer.
5. Country of origin *
6. Applicable standard(s) As specified.
7. Type Squirrel Cage Induction
8. Selected Kilowatt rating *
9. Frame size *
10. Operating speed range Rated.
11. Rated Voltage 415 V ± 10%
12. Rated frequency 50Hz ±5% (shall be suitable for

Star-Delta)
13. Number of poles *
14. Mounting Horizontal
15. Method of cooling *
16. Frame designation *
17. Flame proof designation Not applicable
18. Explosion proof certificates no. Not applicable
19. Details of explosion proof certificate Not applicable
20. Full load current in AMPS *
21. Full load speed *
22. Method of starting Using variable frequency drive

& DOL
Pag. 53
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
23. Insulation Class F with temperature rise limited

to Class B
24. Average ambient temperature 40 °C
25. Max temp. rise over ambient temp. on CLASS – B

continuous full load under normal condition.
26. dv/dt level of the insulation Not applicable
27. Voltage withstand capacity of insulation * KV
28. Winding RTDs
a Number of RTDs per phase 02 (Duplex type) / 04 (Simplex

Type)
b Type of RTD As specified.
c Resistance at 0°C 100 Ω
d Temperature coefficient 3.85 x 10-3
e Recommended Winding Temperature settings

for *
Alarm( 0C)
Trip( °C) *
29. Full load torque in Kg. m. *
30. Efficiency
a At Full load *
b At 3/4thload *
c At ½ load *
31. Power factor at
a At Full load *
Pag. 54
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
b At 3/4thload *
c At ½ load *
32. Starting power factor *
33. Full load torque *
34. Starting torque as % of full load torque *
35. Break down or pull out torque % ( not less than >=175% of FLT
175 % of full load torque)
36. GD2 of motor (Kgm2) *
37. Rotation viewed from driving end As per pump requirement.
38. Starting Time (Sec): At 80%V *
At 100%V *
39. Locked rotor withstand time (Sec) (Shall be at *

least 25 sec. more than motor stating time)
40. Heating time constant *
41. Cooling time constant *
42. Duty point parameters of Motors i.e. at the

actual KW requirement of the Pump at the
actual
a Net KW consumption *
b Efficiency in % *
c Power factor *
d Current in Amps. *
43. CABLE Gland Size
a For Power cable entry in main Terminal box. To be supplied as per cable
Pag. 55
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
dimensions, which shall be

provided during Drawing
approval stage.
b For Space heater cable entry in auxiliary Cable dimensions shall be

Terminal box. Tentative Cable size is 2Cx4 provided during drawing
mm2Copper conductor, XLPE insulated, approval stage.
armoured cable.
c Cable for winding/bearing RTDs Refer Instrumentation

Chapter 6
44. Bearings DE/NDE
a Type DE *
NDE *
b Bearing No. DE *
NDE *
c Minimum life – L10(in hours) 40,000
d Maximum allowable temperature (0°C) *
e Type of lubrication *
45. Bearing RTDs
a Number of RTDs at DE
b Number of RTDs at NDE
c Type of RTD
d Resistance at 0°C
e Temperature coefficient
f Recommended Bearing Temperature settings for:
- Alarm( 0C) *
Pag. 56
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
- Trip( 0C) *
46. Space heater rating *
47. Maximum space heater temperature (0C) *
48. Fault level of the main terminal box 25KA FOR 0.25
SECONDS
49. Coupling DIRECT / FLEXIBLE
50. Weight in Kg. *
51. Noise level in db at rated speed, 1 mtr. away, at no load *
52. Whether list of spares / tools / tackles Yes /No (Strike

furnished complying clause 30.0 of motor whichever is
specifications not applicable)
Note:
‘*’ data to be filled up and furnished for approval
1. Motor shall be suitable for starting with DOL.
2. Motor shall meet all specific requirements for the application as per the tender
specifications.
Pag. 57
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
7 D.G. SET
The scope of D.G. set supply shall include.

1 Diesel engine suitable to operate on HSD, Radiator cooled with necessary fan, electronic
governor, control module (AMF) & Power module, electric start.
2 Permanent Magnet, Brushless alternator coupled to diesel engine pre aligned in shop.
3 Common base frame.
4 Residential Silencer.
5 990 Liters fuel tank.
6 Battery & Battery leads.
7 Protection relays. Necessary CT’s shall also be included.
8 Adaptor box suitable for connecting cables as required.
9 AMF Panel suitable for xxxx KVA DG set.
7.1 Scope
This specification covers the requirements of design assembly, testing, supply and
commissioning of LT Diesel Generator Set with associated Switchgears and Control
Panels.
7.2 Site condition
Ambient temp. : 40° C; Altitude : 1500 M from MSL.
Climate : Tropical
7.3 Electrical system details
D. G. Set shall be water/ coolant cooled with radiator and shall be continuous
duty.
7.4 Standards
The Diesel Generator sets, accessories and control panel shall comply with
relevant BS/IS or other internationally accepted standards including the following:
BS 649 & BS 8528: Diesel Engines for general purpose.
BS EN 60034-22 : Rotating Electrical Machinery.
Pag. 58
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
BS EN 60034 : Electrical performance of rotating electrical machines.
BS EN 60034: Terminal marking for rotating electrical machines.
BS EN 60034 - 14: Measurement of vibrations of rotating electrical machines.
7.5 General requirements
Diesel Generator set shall comprise of main equipment’s specified in this para.
Vendor shall also include any other accessories; equipment’s required for the
satisfactory operation of the DG set.
7.5.1 Diesel engine
The water cooled diesel engine shall suitably rated such that Alternator shall give
defined KVA output after applicable de-rating considering site conditions.
It shall be possible to draw rated output continuously 24 hours each day. The
engine shall be suitable for starting from cold at min. ambient temperature and necessary
accessories like preheated etc. shall be supplied, if required.
Engine shall be multicylinder turbocharged heavy-duty industrial type. The Diesel

Engine shall be suitable for operation on HSD.
7.5.2 Governor
The Governor shall be Electronic type with synchronous to 0 to 5% droop

externally adjustable both manually and with motor for speed control.
7.5.3 Flywheel
Shall be solid disc type accurately balanced. Suitable guard shall be provided for
flywheel.
7.5.4 Starting
The engine shall be suitable for 24V DC motor starting Necessary batteries and
battery charger shall be provided and charger shall have constant potential
Pag. 59
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
characteristics which maintains the battery in peak condition at all times without causing
excessive gassing.
The input voltage for the battery charge shall be 240v, 50 HZ. One set of the
batteries with necessary cables and jumpers shall be located near the engine or housed in
the panel as specified. Battery shall be either sealed maintenance free & dry type or
tubular lead acid long life (Low maintenance).
If pneumatic starting is offered it shall be complete with Compressor, Air Bottle,

and Electronics Solenoid Valve etc.
7.5.5 Fuel system
Engine shall be suitable for HSD fuel operation. The fuel system shall be equipped
with fuel filters. The fuel oil day tank shall be sized to house fuel for eight hours. But
the size of tank shall not exceed 990 litters.
The day tank shall be equipped with fuel return connection, vent sight glass, fuel
level indicator switch for transfer pump control, overflow line, and drain valve.
All necessary fuel line pipes valves and other misc,, piping materials from day
tank to engine is in vendors scope. Alarm shall be provided for fuel low level and fuel
high level in Day Tank.
7.5.6 Lubrication
Pressure feed lubrication system by means of engine driven gear type lubricating
oil pump shall be included for lubrication of main and piston bearings, camshaft
bushing, valves trains, etc.
7.5.7 Cooling
Engine shall be water / coolent / cooled with radiator unless otherwise specifically
asked for water shall be circulated by engine driven centrifugal pump around cylinder
liners, Cylinders heads and injector sleeves.
Pag. 60
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Engine coolant shall be cooled by engine mounted fan assisted radiator of tropical
capacity, driven directly from the engine. Fresh water quantity required for topping up
shall be indicated. Incase of heat exchanger cooled option, the heat exchanger shall be
mounted on Engine. The other accessories like FRP cooling Tower with fan, RW pump
and associated piping shall be in DG vendor's scope. Also Ancillary panel shall be
provided. Pump in cooling circuit shall be electric driven and heaters shall be provided,
if required.
7.5.8 Ventilation
Vendor shall plan well ventilated layout such that clean cool and dry air flows
over the engine and generator and that temperature rise of the room / canopy with DG in
operation is within permissible limits of 7°C above ambient temperature. Radiator
Exhaust ducting is being planned separately
7.5.9 Exhaust
Exhaust system shall consist of Expansion Bellows, insulated exhaust manifold,

silencers and other misc. piping materials as required, supply of total exhaust system
from engine exhaust outlet flange is in vendor’s scope.
The exhaust system shall be so designed to maintain backpressure within

permissible limits. The exhaust outlet shall be outside the building and at a height
stipulated by pollution control board. Necessary information for pollution control board
for exhaust outlet height shall be obtained by vendor. The exhaust piping approachable
and seen lengths shall be provided with proper insulation and aluminum cladding.
7.5.10 Engine control monitoring & protection
Engine shall be equipped with following control monitoring and protection

system.
Over speed device for automatic shut down of engine independent of governor at
Speed of 10% above rated speed. The shutdown shall be enunciated in control panel.
a) Tachometer shall be provided on engine panel for engine speed indication.
Pag. 61
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
b) Pressure gauge for lubrication oil shall be provided on engine panel.

c) Temperature gauge for jacket water shall be provided on engine panel.
d) For following condition an alarm and trip indication shall be given on control
panel.
 Lube oil pressure low.
 Water temperature high.
 Over speed stop.
The engine shall be equipped with electric shut down valves.
7.5.11 Coupling
The engine and the alternator shall be close coupled with appropriate Adapter and
discs as per SAE standards.
7.5.12 Misc. equipments
Al necessary misc. material/ equipment comprising of bearing (base) Plates and

shims for setting up the DG set foundation, foundation bolts, nuts, washers, brackets,
piping supports and any other necessary materials shall be provided. The base frame
shall be provided with lifting facility and predrilled foundation holes. Anti vibrating
pads shall be provided on the base plates.
7.5.13 Alternator
a) a) The alternator design shall meet the Rated out put KVA, at 415v rated
voltage, 0.8 P.F. 3 Phase, 4 wire, 50HZ AC.
b) The alternator shall be mounted on a common base frame together with the
engine.
c) The insulation shall be class-F, The windings and overhangs shall be suitably
braced to withstand the short circuit forces.
d) Alternators should be preferably permanent magnet generators with 2/3-pitch
winding (PMG for better starting & 2/3 pitch winding to eliminate third
Harmonics.)
e) The line and neutral ends of the windings shall be connected to six terminals
mounted on insulated base of non-hygroscopic and fire proof materials. Suitable
clamping and terminating arrangements for cables shall be provided.
Alternator shall be star connected and star point (Neutral) shall be brought out into
a terminal box on alternator for connection to earth. All parts and accessories shall be
Pag. 62
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
suitable to withstand stresses due to over speed /over load/short circuit conditions
specified.
f) The alternator shall be complete with following:
 Suitable terminal boxes for connecting cable with necessary extenuation of
box & busbar arrangement.
 Space heaters if required only due to atmospheric conditions- These shall
be wired up to separate terminal box.
 Lifting hooks.
 Earthing terminals - 2 Nos.
 Rating plate.
g) g) Necessary terminal box suitable for cable connection shall be provided with
Alternator.
7.5.14 Excitation system
The alternator shall have brush less self exciter-mounted on the same shaft.
7.5.15 Voltage regulator
a) Automatic solid-state voltage regulator shall be provided.
b) The voltage regulator shall be complete with cross current compensation,

voltage setting device and all accessories required for successful operation.
7.6 Local control panel
7.6.1 Construction
The panels shall be free standing, floor mounting compartmentalized cubicle type
panels with framed structure and bottom channel frame of suitable section. The frame
structure shall be rolled/folded sheet section of 2.0 mm thick sheet. Partitions shall be
1.6mm thick. Doors and gland plates shall be 2.0 mm thick. The panel shall be dust and
vermin proof with neoprene gasketing. All doors shall be provided with concealed
hinges, necessary Earthing arrangement and shall be provided with bracings wherever
required to avoid deformation. Easily openable door locks with common key shall be
provided for all doors including alleys. Bolts should not be provided for fixing doors
except for busbar chambers.
Pag. 63
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
7.6.2 Cleaning and painting
The fabricated sections shall be thoroughly cleaned by 7-tank process, which

include alkaline degreasing, cold water rinsing, acid pickling, water rinsing, phosphating
and pacivation. Panels shall then be powder coated unless other wise specified including
corrosion resistance treatment. No alternative treatment or part treatment other than 7-
tank process is acceptable.
In case enamel painting is to be done corrosion resistance treatment shall be done

under controlled conditions and then two coats of stoving enamel paint of approved
shades shall be given.
The paint / powder coating shade shall be RAL 7032 unless otherwise specified.
7.6.3 LCP/ AMF
The LCP / AMF shall be with power module Panel. LCP/AMP shall provide
a) Start/ stop provisions
b) D.G.Set indications
c) KWH metering
d) Protection / fault indication
Necessary CT’S shall be provided in adapter box with proper mountings control
cabling for this is to be considered in scope.
7.6.4 Measuring instruments and instrument transformer:
All meters on panels unless other wise specified shall be digital meters either
individual or combined with minimum class 1 accuracy and will be calibrated. These
will be flush mounting type.
Direct reading instruments shall be in confirmation with BS EN 60051 and of

accuracy class 1.0. All analog meters wherever used shall be flushed mounting type with
minimum 96 x 96mm size and in dust proof enclosures. The meters shall have white
dials with black scales. All meters shall have sealing arrangement and zero adjustment
screw from outside. Voltmeters and ammeters shall be moving iron type with suitable
selector switches and protective MCB’s for potential circuits.
Pag. 64
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The current transformers shall be single pole wire wound resin cast accuracy class
1.0 for metering and 5p for protection. Separate CT's shall be provided for metering and
protection. The polarities shall be prominently marked CT circuits shall be wired with
2.5 sq.mm. Multistrand copper wires. CT's shall not be kept open and terminal-shorting
arrangement shall be provided.
PT’s wherever specified shall be of appropriate voltage class and 100 VA Burden.
All Main & DG incomers shall be provided with Digital LOAD MANAGERS
unless otherwise specified instead of regular meters. LOAD MANAGERS shall provide
minimum voltages, currents, KW, KVA, KWH, KVA Rh, frequency, Cos Ø %
harmonics, Maximum demand KVA reading with scrolling. These will be with RS 485
port for down loading data. LOAD MANAGER should be able to store last 8 days data,
which can be downloaded. Necessary software for Load Manager shall be provided.
7.6.5 Indication and control:
The control switches shall be rotary type with suitable isolation transformer
provided for control supply. Control supply bus shall be provided wherever necessary.
Indicating lamps shall be LED Type only with translucent lamp covers. Push buttons
shall be momentary contact type with suitable colour code and shall be fitted with
integral marker plate. The control wiring shall be with 1.5 sq.mm. multistrand 1100V
grade copper wire except CT Circuit which shall be with 2.5 sq.mm. wires.
Identification ferules and colour coding shall be used for all wire. MCB’s for protection
shall be provided wherever required. The control wires shall be bunched and dressed
properly and shall not be left hanging. Control MCB’s shall be provided in all potential
circuits.
7.6.6 System operation
The Diesel Generator set shall be either suitable for manual start or auto start. In
manual mode started manually by an operator & in auto start the Diesel Generator shall
start on receiving an impulse from certain relay, mostly it shall be under voltage relay.
In either case the DG set may be required to work in isolation.
Pag. 65
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
7.6.7 Manual mode
In this mode of operator shall manually start the engine from local panel of engine
after carrying out necessary initial steps, The operator shall close the outgoing circuit
breaker after the voltage builds up to rated value.
7.6.8 Engine panel
On this panel annunciation for following unhealthy condition shall be provided.
- Lube oil pressure low.
- Water temperature high.
- Engine over speed.
In case of unhealthy condition both hooter and announciator will get energized,
Accept PB will silence the hooter and reset PB will reset the announciator.
7.6.9 Engine spares tools & tackles
Vendor shall furnish complete list of spare for two years of satisfactory operation
along with unit price and suggested quantity.
Vendor shall quote for complete set of tools and tackles required for maintenance
of engine and alternator.
7.6.10 Drawing and data

 Following documents shall be furnished along with the offer without which offer without
which offer will not be considered.
a) Plan & Sectional Layout of DG Area showing various auxiliary and panels. Size
of DG plinth shall be as specified.
b) GA of panels showing arrangement of various devices on panels.
c) P & I Diagram for the following:
I. Lube Oil System.
II. Fuel Oil System.
III. Cooling water System.
 Following documents shall be furnished in triplicate for purchaser comments / approval
within 3 weeks after placement of LOI Vendor shall incorporate Client/consultants
comments on these drawings and furnish revised / final drawing in 3 sets for inspection
Pag. 66
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
final 6 sets of AS BULITS" drawings.

a) Layout of DG Area with all accessories weight of equipment, maintenance space
etc. clearly indicated.
b) Wiring and scheme diagrams for LT system and control system of D.G. set.
c) P & I Diagrams for the following system.
I. Lube oil system
II. Fuel oil system
III. Cooling water system.
d) Foundation drawing of a DG set with static and dynamic loading / center of
gravity of loads and location of all loads.
e) Foundation requirement of all auxiliaries like compressors heat exchangers,
tanks cooling tower etc.
f) Bill of material for DG Set, Fuel oil system cooling water system, lube oil
system electrical system (including cables engine and alternator control system
(including cables)
g) GA of panels showing arrangements of various devices on panel and foundation
details.
h) Test Certificates
i) Installation. Operational & maintenance Manual.
Pag. 67
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
8 EXTENSION OF 11 KV LINE TO RAW WATER PUMP

HOUSE (WORK TO BE EXECUTED BY UMEME)
8.1 Scope
This Item includes the design, supply of material, and erection of all necessary pole
structures, conductors and accessories for extending the existing 11 kV line located near
the WTP site up to the intake raw water pump house. The distance between the WTP
and the intake raw water pump house is approximately 1000 meters.
The item also includes connection of UMEME power i.e. UMEME shall energize all the
installed transformers.
8.1 Contractor’s duties

The Contractor shall be responsible of getting in touch with the Energy Utility company
and shall apply timely in order to get the works done within the project deadline. The
Contractor is responsible of submitting the application for obtaining the connection to
the Energy Utility company’s power on time, and he will be deemed responsible for any
delays that may occur.
The Contractor shall follow up the whole process of application and obtaining the
quotation from the Energy Utility company, he shall also supervise the whole
construction works in order to get the work done to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The extended line shall ideally comprise the following items, and in any case it shall
comply with all laws and regulations for erection of medium-high voltage power lines in
Uganda:
List of items for extension of 11 kV line to raw water pump house

100X116 mm RSJ poles 13 m long nr 21
100X116 mm RSJ poles 9 m long for stude support nr 2
100X116 mm RSJ poles 11 m long for D.P. structure nr 2
Double pole cut point channel 75X75X6 mm nr 4
crass arm 11 kV(75X40X6 mm) nr 15
Top fitting for 11 kV line nr 15
50X6 M.S. flat Kg 100
11 kV pin Insulator with pin nr 90
11 kV disc Insulators7000 Kg nr 30
11 kV strain set (55 Sq.mm conductor) set 30
11 kV Arc break switch (Gang Operated) set 6
11 kV vacuum circuit breaker/LBS ring main unit (1I/C & 2 O/G) nr 2
440 volts 1000 Amps air circuit breaker nr 6
11 kV 95 sq.mm XLPE cable m 100
Pag. 68
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
List of items for extension of 11 kV line to raw water pump house

Outdoor type heat shrink end joint nr 4
In door type heat shrink end joint nr 8
240 Sq.mm 3.5 C XLPE LT cable m 150
LT control pannel with all accessories nr 2
HT stay sets nr 16
HT stay G.I. wire Kg 350
Bird Guard nr 15
G.I wire 8 SWG for line Guarding Kg 400
G.I. strip 25X5 Kg 100
HT earthing set set 30
100 Sqmm ACSR conductor - DOG m 3,000
Pag. 69
RU.C.RP.04
SPECIFICATION OF
TRANSMISSION
PIPELINES &
RESERVOIRS
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 EARTHWORKS ..................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 3
1.6 .EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING OF PIPE TRENCHES ........................................................ 5

2.1 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................. 8
2.3 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 9
2.4 MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE ................................................................................... 10
2.4.1 Aggregates ....................................................................................................... 10
2.4.3 Fine Aggregates ............................................................................................... 12
2.4.4 Cement ............................................................................................................. 12
2.5 STEEL ............................................................................................................................ 20
2.7 WORKMANSHIP .......................................................................................................... 22
2.7.1 Concrete ........................................................................................................... 22
2.7.2 Mix Design ....................................................................................................... 23
2.7.3 Trial mixes ........................................................................................................ 26
2.7.17 Shuttering ......................................................................................................... 50
2.7.19 Grout ................................................................................................................ 55
2.8.2 Foam Concrete ................................................................................................. 66
RU_C_RP.04 – Technical specifications of transmission pipelines & reservoirs

Pag. i
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

2.9 WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES ......................................................................... 67
2.10.1 Water proofing ................................................................................................. 71
2.10.2 Rendering ......................................................................................................... 72
2.10.3 Painting ............................................................................................................ 72
3 PIPES, FITTINGS, VALVES AND PIPE WORK ............................................................ 73

3.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPES AND FITTINGS ................................................................................. 73
3.1.1 Pipes ................................................................................................................. 73
3.1.2 Fittings ............................................................................................................. 76
3.1.3 Locking Restrained systems ............................................................................. 77
3.1.4 Quality of pipes and Certificates ...................................................................... 77
3.1.5 Reliability of the pipe manufacturer ................................................................. 77
3.1.6 Respect of health regulations ........................................................................... 78
3.1.7 Language .......................................................................................................... 78
3.2 PVC PIPES ....................................................................................................................... 78
3.3 PE PIPES .......................................................................................................................... 78
3.4 VALVES........................................................................................................................... 79
3.4.1 Sluice valves ..................................................................................................... 79
3.4.2 Butterfly valves ................................................................................................. 80
3.4.3 Air valves.......................................................................................................... 84
3.4.4 Non-return valves ............................................................................................. 85
3.4.5 Pressure reducing valves ................................................................................. 87
3.5 JOINTS ............................................................................................................................. 88
3.5.1 Flanged joints................................................................................................... 88
3.5.2 Flange adaptors ............................................................................................... 89
3.5.3 Mechanical Couplings...................................................................................... 89
3.5.4 Flexible joints for cast (spun) and ductile iron pipes ....................................... 90
3.5.6 Joints for HDPE pipes...................................................................................... 90
3.6 BULK WATER METERS – WOLTMAN TYPE...................................................................... 90
3.6.1 General specification for Bulk water meters & Strainers ................................ 91
3.8 HANDLING PIPES ............................................................................................................. 96
3.11 CLEANING ....................................................................................................................... 98
3.13 STERILISATION AND COMMISSIONING OF PIPELINES ...................................................... 100
3.14 MARKER POSTS ............................................................................................................. 100
3.15 VALVE CHAMBERS ........................................................................................................ 101
3.16 CONCRETE SURROUND TO PIPES .................................................................................... 101
4 MISCELLANEOUS WORKS ........................................................................................... 103

4.1 WINDOWS, DOORS, FENCE AND GATES .......................................................................... 103
4.2 ROADS AND PAVING ...................................................................................................... 104
4.2.1 Sub-Bases ....................................................................................................... 104
4.2.2 Surfacing ........................................................................................................ 104
4.2.3 Kerbs .............................................................................................................. 104

Pag. ii
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1 EARTHWORKS

NO. CODE DESCRIPTION

Valves for water supply. Fitness for purpose requirements and
1 BS 1074-1 & 2 : 2000 appropriate verification tests
This standard is applicable to cast iron gate valves mainly used for
2 BS 1171 industrial and general-purpose applications
3 BS 1377 Method of Testing Soils for Civil Engineering Purposes

Specification for elastomeric seals for joints in pipework and
4 BS 2494 : 1990 pipelines
Specification for Class I arc welding for ferritic steel pipework for
5 BS 2633 : 1987 carrying fluids
Methods for radiographic examination of fusion welded
6 BS 2910 : 1986 circumferential butt joints in steel pipes
7 BS 3416 Specification for ductile iron pipes and fittings
8 BS 4147 Specification for ductile iron pipes and fittings

Specification for unplasticized PVC soil and ventilating pipes ,
9 BS 4514 : 1983 fittings and accessories
10 BS 4515 : 2009 Specification for welding of steel pipelines on land and offshore
Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride ( PVC-U ) rainwater goods and
11 BS 4576-Part 1 : 1989 accessories – Half-round gutters and pipes of circular cross-section
Specification for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride ( PVC-U ) pipes
12 BS 4660 : 1989 and plastic fittings of nominal sizes 110 and 160 for below ground
gravity drainage and sewerage
Specification for arc welding of austenitic stainless steel pipework
13 BS 4677 : 1984 for carrying fluids
Valves for waterworks purposes. Predominantly key-operated cast
14 BS 5163-1 : 2004 iron gate valves
15 BS 5255 : 1989 Specification for thermoplastics waste pipe and fittings
Pag. 1
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
16 BS 5911-Part 3 : 1982 Specification for pipes and fittings with ogee joints
Non-alloy steel tubes and fittings for the conveyance of water and
17 BS EN 10224 : 2002 other aqueous liquids. Technical delivery conditions
18 BS EN 10241 : 2000 Steel threaded pipe fittings

Non-alloy steel tubes suitable for welding and threading. Technical
19 BS EN 10255 : 2004 delivery conditions
Joints for the connection of steel tubes and fittings for the
20 BS EN 10311 : 2005 conveyance of water and other aqueous liquids
Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings
21 BS EN 1092-1 : 2007 and accessories, PN designated. Steel flanges
Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings
22 BS EN 1092-2 : 1997 and accessories, PN designated. Cast iron flanges
23 BS EN 12201-1 : 2003 Plastics piping systems for water supply - Polyethylene (PE)
24 BS EN 12201-2 : 2003 Plastics piping systems for water supply - Polyethylene (PE)
25 BS EN 12201-3 : 2003 Plastic piping systems for water supply - polyethylene fittings
Plastic piping systems for non-pressure underground drainage and
26 BS EN 1401-1 : 2009 sewerage. Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U).
Specifications for pipes, fittings and the system
Ductile iron wide tolerance couplings and flange adaptors for use
27 BS EN 14525 : 2004 with pipes of different materials: ductile iron, grey iron, steel, PVC-
U, PE, fibre-cement
Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for water
28 BS EN 545 : 2010 pipelines
29 BS EN 558 Valves for water supply

Plastics piping systems for water supply and for buried and above-
30 ISO 1452-1 : 2009 ground drainage and sewerage under pressure -- Unplasticized
poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) -- Part 1: General
3
ISO 1452-2 : 2009 ground drainage and sewerage under pressure -- Unplasticized
1 poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) -- Part 2: Pipes
32 ISO 1452-3 : 2010 ground drainage and sewerage under pressure -- Unplasticized
poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) -- Part 3: Fittings
ground drainage and sewerage under pressure -- Unplasticized
33 ISO 1452-4 : 2009 poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) -- Part 4: Valves and ancillary
equipment
ground drainage and sewerage under pressure -- Unplasticized
34 ISO 1452-5 : 2009 poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) -- Part 5: Fitness for purpose of the
system
35 ISO 559 : 1991 Steel tubes for water and sewage
Pag. 2
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1.2 Introduction
Pag. 3
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Pag. 4
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
work
1.6 .Excavation and backfilling of pipe trenches

Pag. 5
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

from the Engineer.
formation.
Pag. 6
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

Pag. 7
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.1 SCOPE
account.


Pag. 8
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
imposed loads.
roof loads.
and construction.
circumstances.
2.3 GENERAL
Pag. 9
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.4.1 Aggregates
2.4.1.1 Testing

2.4.1.2 Grading
Pag. 10
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
of the concrete.
2.4.2.1 Types
Pag. 11
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.4.2.2 Stone chips
2.4.4 Cement

Pag. 12
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.4.4.5 Water
Pag. 13
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.4.5.1 Approval
Pag. 14
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

2.4.5.2 Usage

fresh concrete


grouts.


flexural).

Pag. 15
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

2.4.5.4 Types

slag.

Pag. 16
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

lime.
contraction.

Pag. 17
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA






Pag. 18
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
concrete.

2.4.5.8 General

admixtures.
Codes.
cost.

Codes.
Pag. 19
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA


2.5 STEEL
The quantities of steel for reinforcement of storage reservoirs structures are

detailed below.
Mukazi MBR (RU_R1)
Large rectangular GSR

 Support pipes 60 kg/m3
 Foundations 90 kg/m3
 Elevations 90 kg/m3
 Insole 70 kg/m3
Rwanyakashesha ESR (RU_R2) - not to be constructed under this Contract
Large cylindrical ESR

 Elevations (underground basement’s vertical walls) 110 kg/m3
 Insole (ground level) 110 kg/m3
 Vertical baffles 50 kg/m3
 Elevations (inner square shaft) 110 kg/m3
 Insole (intermediate insoles, tank bottom and tank top) 110 kg/m3
 Elevations (tank external walls and tank internal wall) 90 kg/m3
 Insole (above FSL) 110 kg/m3
Bwoma ESR (RU_R3) - not to be constructed under this Contract
Large octagonal ESR

 Foundations (including underground basement’s vertical walls) 70 kg/m3
Pag. 20
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

 Elevations (columns and shaft) 100 kg/m3
 Insole & beams (tank bottom and tank top) 100 kg/m3
 Elevations (all external walls and tank internal wall) 100 kg/m3
Kebisoni GSR, Buyanja SR & Buyanja HLR (RU_R4, RU_R5 & RU_R6) -
not to be constructed under this Contract
Small rectangular GSR

 Support pipes 60 kg/m3
 Elevations 90 kg/m3
 Insole 70 kg/m3
Rwerere ESR (RU_R7) - not to be constructed under this Contract
Small cylindrical ESR

 Foundations (including underground basement’s vertical walls) 70 kg/m3
 Elevations (all external walls and tank internal wall) 100 kg/m3
 Insole (intermediate insole, tank bottom and tank top) 100 kg/m3
Pag. 21
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
or reduce bond.

2.7 WORKMANSHIP
2.7.1 Concrete


Pag. 22
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.2 Mix Design
2.7.2.1 General

Pag. 23
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

of the Engineer.
2.7.2.3 Workability
formwork.

Pag. 24
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

Minimum Maximum

the like.
Uncongested wide and shallow R.C.C

Low 25.0 50.0
structures

Medium 25.0 75.0

and inserts
Pag. 25
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Note :
2.7.2.5 Durability

2.7.3 Trial mixes
the mix design.
Pag. 26
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

CONTRACTOR.
strength.
2.7.5.1 Cement

Pag. 27
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.5.2 Aggregates

2.7.5.3 Water

conditions.

Pag. 28
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Moist sand 2.5 40
2.7.5.5 Admixtures
Pag. 29
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Pag. 30
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

limits.

Pag. 31
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
b) Over walls
by the Engineer.
reinforcement.
Pag. 32
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Pag. 33
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

guide lines :
(a) In Columns
Pag. 34
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

slab.
(c) In beams



Pag. 35
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
water tight.

construction joint.
 In ribbed beam
joint.
2.7.11.2 Cold joint

Pag. 36
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

concrete.


Codes.
Pag. 37
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
undertaken.

Pag. 38
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
below:


Pag. 39
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.14.1 General
the CONTRACTOR.
Engineer:
 Ponding

Pag. 40
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
setting.

kept damp
setting.

an impervious sheet


unformed surface.

Pag. 41
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

linoleum.

Pag. 42
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.15.1 General


concrete.
Pag. 43
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

 Mark on cubes

Pag. 44
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA



Pag. 45
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
the Engineer.
2.7.16.1 Material
2.7.16.2 Storage


Pag. 46
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.16.5Tests
Pag. 47
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.16.6Cleaning


British Codes.

Pag. 48
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

conduits
Pag. 49
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
prevent damage.

Engineer.
2.7.17 Shuttering
2.7.17.1 General

Pag. 50
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
responsibilities.
2.7.17.2 Material
diagonally.
2.7.17.3 Fixing
Pag. 51
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA


concrete.

Pag. 52
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.17.9 Removing
load gradually.


by the Engineer.
span: 14 days
Pag. 53
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

kind.

2.7.18.1 Mix

Pag. 54
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.18.4 Finishing
2.7.18.5 Curing
2.7.19 Grout
2.7.19.1 Scope
2.7.19.2 Materials


Pag. 55
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
water jet.
2.7.19.4 Curing

Pag. 56
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Engineer.
Pag. 57
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.20.4 Lighting
2.7.20.5 Cleaning
2.7.20.6 Testing
completed.
Pag. 58
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide a suitable chlorine-based disinfectant generator (including

the provision of the raw material to produce the chlorine-based disinfectant), which shall be
capable of injecting the required concentration of chlorine solution at a steady rate into the
reservoir or tank.
Pag. 59
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

disinfection.
Pag. 60
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.8.1.1 General
made available.
2.8.1.3 Shutters
cement slurry.
Pag. 61
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.8.1.4 Workmanship

concrete.

2.8.1.5 Vibrating

2.8.1.7 Size

Pag. 62
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3m to 4.5m ---- do----- 9mm
4.5m to 6m ----do----- 12mm
500mm to 700mm -----do----- 9mm
upto 3m -----do---- 6mm
3m to 6m -----do---- 9mm
6m to 12m -----do---- 12mm
2.8.1.8 Squareness
1.8m and over ...... 12 mm
Pag. 63
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.8.1.10 Twist
2.8.1.11 Flatness:
2.8.1.13 Curing
Pag. 64
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.8.1.15 Marking
2.8.1.17 Erection
Pag. 65
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.8.1.18 Finishing
2.8.2 Foam Concrete

2.8.3.1 General Use
Pag. 66
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.8.3.2 Materials
2.8.3.3 Density
2.9 WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES
2.9.1.1 General

Engineer.
Pag. 67
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.9.1.4 Lighting
2.9.1.5 Cleaning
2.9.1.6 Testing
completed.
Pag. 68
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Contractor.
Pag. 69
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The Contractor shall provide a suitable chlorinator (including the provision of the
chlorine), which shall be capable of injecting the required concentration of chlorine solution at
a steady rate into the reservoir or tank.

Pag. 70
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
disinfection.




Pag. 71
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.10.2 Rendering

2.10.3 Painting



Pag. 72
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3 PIPES, FITTINGS, VALVES AND PIPE WORK
In this tender document the bidders shall quote for the pipelines indicated in the
following Table.
Pipeline Material, Diameter, Class
Raw water pumping main uPVC 225mm PN16
Backwash discharge pipe (included in Raw water

uPVC 315mm PN10
pumping main’s BoQ)
Pure water pumping transmission system (Trunk 1) DI 350mm Class 40 bars
Pure water gravity system – Trunk 2 uPVC 450mm PN10-16
Pure water gravity system – Trunk 4 uPVC 450mm PN16
Pure water gravity system – Trunk 8 uPVC 400mm PN10-16
3.1 Ductile iron pipes and fittings
3.1.1 Pipes
3.1.1.1 Ductile iron socket and spigot pipes, Standards and

Pressure resistance
The ductile iron pipes are socket and spigot pipes, manufactured by a
centrifugal process in accordance with EN 545-2010.
3.1.1.2 Pressure class pipes
Unless specified otherwise in the above Table or in the Bill of Quantities,

all DI pipes will be pressure class pipes according to EN 545-2010
according to the preferred classes specified in these standards:
Pag. 73
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
i. For DN 60 to DN 300 mm : Class 40 bars

ii. For DN 350 to DN 600 mm : Class 30 bars
iii. For DN 700 to DN 2000 mm : Class 25 bars
The Class pressure is corresponding to the PFA of EN 545-2010 :

Allowable Operating Pressure, or continuous working pressure without
water hammer.
The EN 545:2010 cancels and replaces the former editions.

Consequently, the DI Pipes manufacturers, proposing former K thickness
pipes, will be rejected.
The pipe wall thickness is defined as in the relevant EN 545:2010

Standards, and will have to be controlled within the Pipe Manufacturer
plant for each pipe, and all along its length, in order to guarantee the
compliance to these standards. For this purpose, the manufacturer will be
equipped with automatized calibrated specific device, allowing the
control of the wall thickness all along the pipe. For DN 60 to 1000 mm,
the number of measurements during production must be sufficient, with
at least more than several thousand points of control, to be representative
of the thickness everywhere in the pipe.
The manufacturer will be able to visually show on a screen the result of

these several thousand random controls during the production.
3.1.1.3 Compliance with hydraulic tests
The final customer requires the pipes to be tested in the

manufacturer factory with a hydraulic pressure corresponding to the
concerned PFA, in reference to the Pressure class. For instance, If it is a
Class 30 pipe, the Hydraulic test will be performed at 30 Bars.
In order that the Client get evidence that the pipes, joints and
fittings comply with the high constraints of surge pressure, a specific type
test of cyclic positive – negative internal pressure will have to be carried
out by the pipe manufacturer, with roughly 1000 cycles.
Pag. 74
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The pipe manufacturer must provide a relevant certificate issued by

independent first class (preferably European) third party- testifying that
the pipes are up to the requirements
3.1.1.4 Internal lining
Pipes are internally lined with a blast furnace cement, suitable for potable
water, resisting to sulphates, applied by centrifugation, in accordance
with ISO 4179:2005 and EN 545-2010.
Thickness of mortar
Nominal Mini
Nominal Diameter mm mm
200 to 300 4 2,5
350 to 600 5 3,0
700 to 1200 6 3,5
1200 to 2000 9 6
3.1.1.5 External coating
Pipes will be externally coated with a Zinc 85% / Aluminium 15% Alloy
400g/m2, plus a finishing layer, in compliance with EN 545:2010.
To complete the Zinc 85% / Aluminium 15% alloy, an anticorrosive paint

suitable for potable water is applied, over the zinc/Aluminium alloy, in
accordance with EN 545-2010 and ISO 8179-2004. The thickness will not be
less than 100µ
In order to prove the compliance of the 400g/m2 Zinc 85% / aluminium 15% ,
the manufacturer shall provide
 in-factory control results of the Zinc grammage sprayed on the pipe, in
compliance with paragraph 6.2 of the ISO 8179:2004 or EN 545-2010.
 a certificate of compliance for the wire of alloy of ZnAl 85-15 according to
EN 14919 code 2.3 table 4, issued by an independent third party.
The Ductile Iron manufacturer will have a complete range of external coatings,
for all its diameters, adapted to different types of soil resistivity.
Pag. 75
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3.1.1.6 Gaskets and joints

Water tightness is insured by a Tyton or Standard push-on joint.
In order to allow line optimization and save the cost of large diameter
fittings, the angular deflection permitted by the socket joints will be the
following in accordance to EN 545-2010:
 5 degrees for pipes equal of inferior to DN 300

 4 degrees for pipes DN 350 to 1200
 3 degrees for pipes DN 1400 to 1600
 Superior or equal to 2 degrees for DN superior to DN 1600
The gaskets are manufactured in elastomer EPDM suitable for potable

water in accordance with ISO 4633-2002. Health regulation certificates from
Europe will be demanded and taken into account into the evaluation.
3.1.2 Fittings
The ductile iron fittings will be sand cast in accordance with the European
Standard EN 545:2010.
Each fitting is subjected, in accordance with the European Standard

EN545:2010, to a work leak tightness test carried out under a one bar air
pressure.
Internal lining of fittings
The fittings will be internally lined by a fusion bonded epoxy according to EN

14901:2006, with a 250 microns thickness.
External coating of fittings
The fittings will be externally coated with a fusion bonded epoxy with a 250
microns thickness, in compliance with EN 14901:2006.
Pag. 76
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3.1.3 Locking Restrained systems
The restrained joints and anchoring systems solutions of DI pipes will be

featured with separate water tightness and anchorage system functions.
Solutions with no bolts must be proposed by the manufacturer.
The pressure of the anchored joints will be 25 bars.
The manufacturer will need:

 to demonstrate its available range of restrained joints and anchoring systems for
all its manufactured DN
 to provide the certificates issued by a recognised independent third party
showing that the type tests for restrained joints specified in EN 545:2010 have
been carried out successfully
3.1.4 Quality of pipes and Certificates

 Dl Pipes must comply with EN 545-2010.
 ISO 9001-2008 certificate must be provided for general Quality Compliance,
manufacturing and commercialisation of the products ranges.
 if fittings or gaskets are manufactured by a different manufacturer than the pipe
manufacturer, full reports of type tests on these components and their
compatibility with pipes, shall be made available to the final client by the fitting
or the gasket manufacturer.
 The type tests will be carried out either by the manufacturer or, at his request, by
a competent testing institute in order to demonstrate compliance with the
requirements of this international standard. Full reports of these performance
tests are retained by the supplier of pipes, fittings, and gaskets as evidence of
compliance.
3.1.5 Reliability of the pipe manufacturer
DI pipes manufacturer must give evidences that it supplied, over at least the past
10 years, equivalent projects, including the specificities of the project.
The manufacturer must show its expertise and Evidences of research and
development of Ductile Iron Pipelines, as well as innovation, by patents from the
manufacturer.
Pag. 77
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3.1.6 Respect of health regulations

Health Regulation
Certificates insuring that the products in contact with the transported water are
suitable for potable water will be provided by the manufacturer: internal cement mortar,
rubber gasket, internal linings, external coatings, and lubricant paste.
The tests will be performed according to Heath Regulations in force in European

countries and be covered by a certificate delivered by an independent worldwide
recognized Organism of Certification (such as WRAS etc).
ISO 14001
The manufacturer will provide an ISO 14001 certificate, certifying the

environmental management and its control.
3.1.7 Language
All the certificates must be provided in English
3.2 PVC pipes
3.3 PE pipes
PE Pipes - BS EN 12201-Part 1 & 2
Fittings - BS EN 12201-Part 3
Pag. 78
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3.4 Valves
3.4.1 Sluice valves
The sluice valves for pipeline installation shall comply with the BSEN 1074:1-
2000 and BSEN 1074 : 2 – 2000 or BS 5163-1:2004 for diameters up to and including
600 mm and BSEN 1171:2002 for diameters above 600 mm and shall be of PN 16
pressure rating, for potable water applications.
The valves shall be suitable for the maximum pressure (including water hammer
pressure, where applicable) at the maximum liquid temperature encountered by the
valve during operation
3.4.1.1 Construction
Sluice valves shall be standard Non-rising spindle (inside screw), wedge gate
valves.
3.4.1.2 Seating arrangement
The valve shall be provided with solid taper wedge seat, with precision machined
seat rings and body rings of materials as per project specifications. For sizes up to 300
mm resilient seated (EPDM lined seat) valves will be provided. For sizes above 300
mm, metallic seats shall be provided.
3.4.1.3 Operating mechanism
As a basic requirement the valves shall be provided with hand wheels made of cast
iron and shall have arrows and words ‘open’ and ‘close’ cast on to indicate direction of
rotation for opening and closing the valve Directions of closure of the valves shall be
‘clockwise”.
Valves above 300 mm size, or when the operating torque more than 130 Nm, shall
be provided with gear drive The gear drive shall be provided with suitably designed
thrust bearing for ease of operation. The gear mechanism shall be spur/bevel/worm
gearing as per recommendations of the valve manufacturer to suit the site conditions
Pag. 79
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
All Tee-Key operated valves shall be provided with valve cap as per BS 5163:
2004. By pass arrangement shall be provided for valves of DN 300 and above
The valves shall be provided with optional operating mechanism like extended
shaft with head stock if asked for in tender specifications.
3.4.1.4 Body and bonnet:
The valve body shall be ductile iron. Cast iron body will be acceptable up to and
including DN 150 complying with BS 5163-1:2004 and BSEN 1563:2004 if specified in
tender data sheets. For diameters above 150 mm, the valve body shall be ductile iron
complying with BSEN 1563:2004.
3.4.1.5 Spindle
Valves shall have stainless steel spindle, machined bronze mating faces securely
fixed to the valve body The Spindle shall have precision threading for ease of operation,
and to prevent slip. Standard rotation shall be clock-wise to close.
3.4.1.6 Flanges
The valves shall be double flanged, with flange-to-flange distance strictly as per
BS EN 558:2008. The flange thickness and drilling table shall be based on the
maximum pressure (including water hammer pressure, where applicable) specified in
the project specifications
3.4.2 Butterfly valves
Standard butterfly valves shall conform to BS EN 593: 2004
Except where otherwise specified, all butterfly valves shall be equipped with
manual operators with hand wheels and shall give tight closure against unbalanced water
pressure in either direction. The unbalanced water pressure shall be the design pressure
rating of the valve.
The valve body shall be ductile iron complying with BS EN 1563:2004 and shall
be designed to withstand the maximum working pressure specified.
Pag. 80
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The manufacturer's preferred direction of flow for the valve shall be clearly
marked on the valve.
The valve seat shall be replaceable and be formed of EPDM or other approved
resilient material. Seats shall be of a design that permits removal and replacements at the
site of installation. The valve seat shall be securely clamped into a machined groove in
the valve body or to the edge of the disc by seat retention members or other equivalent
retention device, in such a manner as to prevent leakage of water under the seats and to
hold the seat securely in position during opening and closing of the valve disc. The seat
retention members shall be of stainless steel and shall be securely fastened to the body
or disc with stainless steel fasteners.
The valve disc shall be made of ductile iron. Disc edges shall be machined with
rounded corners and shall be polished to a smooth finish. The valve disc shall rotate
through an angle of 90 degrees from the fully opened to the fully closed position and the
seat shall be of such design as to allow the valve disc to seat at an angle normal to the
axis of the pipe when the disc is in the fully closed position. Adjustable mechanical
stops shall be provided in the valve body to be capable of absorbing full operating
torque with necessary safety factor.
The valve disc shall be double eccentric construction
The disc seal ring shall be made from EPDM, hypalon or nitrile rubber, based on
the pressure-temperature rating given in the project specifications. The seal retaining
ring shall be made from DI or SS of suitable grade
The shaft seal shall be made from EPDM, hypalon or nitrile rubber, based on the
pressure-temperature rating given in the project specifications
The shaft and nuts and bolts shall be fabricated of stainless steel complying with
relevant provisions of BS 970:1996. The shaft and disc fixing shall be capable of
absorbing the full operating torque with necessary safety factor. Shaft seals, when used,
shall be EPDM rubber O-ring type. Packing shall be either rubber O-ring or self-
adjusting chevron type.
Pag. 81
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
When all the seat retention members are in place, the finished edges shall fit
closely and the surface shall be smooth with all fastenings set flush in the water passage
so as to offer the least resistance possible to the flow of water through the valve.
Valve seats which extend over the face of the flanges to secure the seat in place, or
which require surface grinding and/or hand fitting of the disc; or designs which require
the adjoining pipe flange to retain the seat in place and resist line pressure, shall not be
supplied.
Operating gear for butterfly valves shall be of the fully enclosed type. Valves shall
be suitable for operation by one man at all working pressure conditions that can apply.
All butterfly valves shall be tested at the manufacturer's works in accordance with
BS EN 593:2004 as specified and under 'open-end' conditions. The seat test shall be for
tight closure under maximum unbalanced water test pressure in either direction. The
maximum permissible leakage for each valve shall be 0.05 litre per hour per 100 mm
nominal diameter of the valve. The word “CLOSE” or its abbreviation and the arrow
mark indicating the direction of rotation to close the valve shall also be cast on the cover
of the body.
Pressure rating of the valve shall be based on the maximum pressure (including
the water hammer pressure where applicable), at the maximum liquid temperature
encountered by the valve.
3.4.2.2 End connections
Valves up to 200NB shall be of wafer type constriction, sandwiched between two

pipe flanges. (wafer type butterfly valves)
3.4.2.3 Wafer type butterfly valves
Wafer type butterfly valves shall have following features

• Acceptable standards – BS EN 593
• Bi – directional shut off
• Pressure rating – PN 10 & 16
• For manual operation: Hand-lever upto 200 ø; Worm Gear box for higher sizes
• Suitable for easy installation between pipe flanges as per BS EN 1092-2
Pag. 82
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3.4.2.4 Flanged butterfly valves
Valves of sizes 250 NB and above shall be double flanges construction.
The face-to-face dimensions shall be as specified in BSEN 558:2008 , Table 4.

The flange thickness and drilling table shall be based on the maximum pressure
(including water hammer pressure, where applicable) specified in the project
specifications
For Valves designed as per BS: EN: 593 the flanges shall conform to BS EN
1092-2
3.4.2.5 Fabricated valves
Fabricated butterfly valves instead of cast body valves are acceptable for larger
size (600 mm and above) provided testing features and face to face dimension of the
valve are as per the relevant design standard BS: EN:593 . In such a case the valve
supplier should submit the design calculations for selection of major dimensions such as
body, shaft diameter, disc thickness etc. for client/consultant’s approval.
3.4.2.6 Shaft bearings
Shaft bearing shall be sleeve type and shall be made from bearing bronze or PTFE
Valves of size 350 NB and above shall be provided with one or two thrust
bearings to hold the disc securely in the center of valve seat without hydraulic or
external axial shaft loads.
Sleeve and other bearings fitted into the valves body shall be of self lubricated
materials that do not have any effect on the fluid handled and other components of the
valves.
3.4.2.7 Operators
Wafer type valves shall be provided with hand-lever with graded position
indicator
All the valves shall be equipped with adjustable mechanical stop-limiting devices
to prevent over travel of the valve disc in the open and closed positions.
Pag. 83
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Flanged valves shall be provided with hand wheel and quarter-turn gear box.
When specified in the project specifications, the valves shall be provided with electric or
pneumatic actuators, selected considering the torque required, the closing/opening time.
The actuator shall be provided as per the specifications for the actuator given in the
project specifications. Manual hand wheel shall be provided for valves with actuator.
3.4.3 Air valves
Automatic air release valves shall be provided at locations given in the project
specifications. These valves shall conform to BS EN 1074:2000 part 4
Air valves shall be constructed so that internal working parts, which may need
repairs, shall be readily accessible, removable and replaceable without use of special
tools and removing the valve from the line.
Standard air valves shall be designed so that the floats seat against orifices without
leakage at all pressures between 0.1 bar and the maximum field test pressure.
The design for the floats and seats shall be such that the risk of adhesion is a
minimum and shall be of a type proved by experience to be suitable for the duties
required.
All valves shall be suitable for operation under working pressures conforming to
clause 4.3 and Table 1 of BSEN 1074-1:2000, Valves shall be so designed that the floats
cannot be held or blown shut against the orifices by air pressure or turbulence due to
escaping air.
Standard air valves shall have a minimum pressure rating of 16 bar and in all cases
shall be supplied with PN 16 (i.e. 16 bar) flanges, complying with BS EN 1092-1: 2007.
Double air valves shall be constructed of cast iron and shall be fitted with a
flanged inlet to EN 1092. The cover shall be bolted to the body and be fitted with a cast
iron splash plate. In addition, the air valve shall be complete with isolation valve so that
the pressure chambers can be isolated from the main when examination and repairs have
to be carried out.
Pag. 84
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Double orifice valves shall comprise one large orifice air valve and one small
orifice air valve integrated into a single unit assembly and having a single pipeline
connection. It shall have ductile iron body and double float actuated air valves with
flanged ends.
Double orifice air valves shall be provided with a separate isolating valve.
Isolating valves must be so arranged that they can be closed from the ground surface
above, with a tee key even when the air valve chamber is flooded. Where required, a
short length of double-flanged pipe could be supplied to increase the height above the
main to suit the operational requirements depending on the depth of installation of Air
valve. Air valves shall be insect proof at the outlet vents leading to the atmosphere.
Tests shall be carried out on all types of air valves, as specified in BSEN 1074-
4:2000 and BSEN 1074-1:2000 and the contractor shall submit the manufacturer’s
certificates certifying that such tests have been conducted satisfactorily.
3.4.4 Non-return valves
Unless otherwise specified, check valves shall be swing type conforming to BS

EN 12334:2001 with a pressure rating of PN 16 (i.e. 16 bar).
Horizontally mounted Check valves shall be constructed so that disc, seat, seat
rings and other internal working parts, which may become necessary for repairs, shall be
readily accessible, removable and replaceable without use of special tools and removing
the valve from the line.
Vertically mounted check valves shall be only floating ball type or tilting disc type
The valve body and the disc shall be of ductile iron complying with BS EN
1563:1997 and having smooth operating stainless steel hinge pins with gun metal
bushes, EPDM encapsulated discs. They shall possess high speed closing characteristics
with minimum shock on closing.
Pag. 85
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
All valves shall be tested to BS EN 12334:2001 and as specified in BS EN 12266-

1:2003 and the test certificates issued by the manufacturer shall be submitted. The
flange drilling shall comply with BS EN 1092-1:2007 or BS EN 1092-2:1997
The swing check valve shall be suitable for mounting on a horizontal pipeline
Flow direction shall be clearly embossed on the valve body.
Valves shall have in built quick closing non-slam characteristics achieved by

suitable disposition of weight on door and the hydraulic passage when specified in the
tender.
Multi-door type check valves shall be additionally provided with a supporting

foot.
The door shall be integral with the hinge and shall have a flat seating face.
Minimum suspension lugs shall be cast integrally and shall be of adequate

strength.
Pressure rating of the valve shall be based on the maximum pressure (including
the water hammer pressure where applicable), at the maximum liquid temperature
encountered by the valve.
3.4.4.2 Closing mechanism
For sizes up to 600 NB, single door pattern shall be used. For sizes above 600 NB,
multi-door pattern or tilting disc pattern valves shall be used. The hinge shall be made
from stainless steel. Precision machined seat rings and body rings of materials as per
project specifications shall be provided.
For sizes upto 300 NB Non-return valves with rubber coated floating ball with
Gun metal seat ring will be preferred.
Spring loaded wafer flap / lifting disc check valves shall be employed only where
there is space limitation. These valves shall be used in vertical lines only.
Pag. 86
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3.4.4.3 By-pass arrangement
By-pass arrangement with regulating globe valve shall be provided for 200 NB
and higher valves. Smaller valves shall be provided with by-pass connection if asked for
in project specifications
3.4.4.4 Anti-slam mechanism
For valves fitted on pump discharge and rising main pipelines, suitable anti-slam
mechanism like counterweight or hydraulic dash-pot shall be provided if asked for in
the project specifications. The design of the anti-slam mechanism shall be submitted for
pre-approval to client or their consultant.
3.4.4.5 Flanges
The valves shall be double flanged, with flange-to-flange distance strictly as per
BSEN 558:2008. The flange thickness and drilling table shall be based on the maximum
pressure (including water hammer pressure, where applicable) specified in the project
specifications
Non-return valves shall be of best cast iron with gunmetal bearing faces
conforming to B.S. 5153 & BS EN 12334:2001.
The standard for testing of valves shall be as per BS EN 12266-1:2003. The

contractor shall submit manufacturer’s Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) for approval. The
inspection shall be carried out as per the approved QAP.
3.4.5 Pressure reducing valves
Pressure Reducing valves shall be conforming to BS EN 1567:1999.
Supply and laying of pressure reducing valve to Reduce and stabilise the
downstream pressure to the set point provided that the inlet pressure is itself greater and
regardless of the flow rate.
Pag. 87
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The standard for testing of valves shall be as per BS EN 12266-1:2003. The

contractor shall submit manufacturer’s Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) for approval. The
inspection shall be carried out as per the approved QAP.
3.5 Joints
3.5.1 Flanged joints
All flanges shall conform to EN 1092 unless otherwise specifically mentioned.

Flanged joints for cast (spun) and ductile iron pipes are specials, for steel pipes and for
valves shall be made, unless specified otherwise, with full face rubber joint gaskets and
steel bolts and nuts which shall include two washers per bolt. Joint gaskets shall be
made from 3 mm thick rubber to BS. 1154 and of such physical properties as to be
capable of forming permanent watertight joints. The use of jointing paste or grease will
not be permitted. No jointing material shall be left protruding into the bore of the pipe
work.
All bolts shall first be tightened by hand and bolts, on opposite sides of the joint
circumference, shall then be alternatively and progressively tightened with a standard
spanner so as to ensure even pressure all round the joint.
Where flanged joints are to remain exposed in ducts and buildings, all damaged
sheathing or coatings to the barrels of pipes, adjacent to joints shall be made good by
cleaning the affected areas which shall then be primed and re-sheathed or recoated to the
same thickness as the original protection. All other surfaces of joints shall be cleaned,
painted with an approved rust inhibitor and then shall receive one coat of an approved
bituminous paint.
Where pipes or joints have been supplies with their external surface bare, or
primed only with a rust inhibitor, for the purpose of later painting with non-bituminous
Pag. 88
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
gloss paints, then instead of the application of one coat of a bituminous paint they shall
receive one coat of a red lead primer, to B.S. 2523, before painting.
Where flanged joints are to be buried, the exterior of all joints and their parts and
the barrels of pipes, for a distance of a 150 mm from the backs of both the joint sides,
shall be cleaned of any rust, and any damaged or loose coating, then dried. The prepared
pipe surface, and the joint, shall then be protected by lap wrappings, with approved
water resistant tape, in accordance, with the manufacturer's instructions. The cost of this
protection shall be included in the rate for making the joint.
Where steel flanged pipes are being used with bitumen coating and fibre glass
protection, the joints shall be protected by first cutting the fibre glass protection, to
expose the bitumen coating, a distance of 75 mm from the back of each flange. The
flanges, bolts, and all exposed metal shall be cleaned, dried and given two coats of quick
drying bituminous paint. The flanges and bolts shall then be covered, to a minimum
thickness of 12 mm, with approved hot run bitumen using a special mould or where no
mould is available, the protection may be completed by hand, care being taken to join
the new bitumen to the existing external bitumen coating.
3.5.2 Flange adaptors
Approved flange adaptors shall be used to joint flanged pipes, specials and valves
to plain ended pipes. They shall be joined in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and protected as specified for flanged joints.
3.5.3 Mechanical Couplings
In jointing asbestos cement, cast (spun) iron, steel or other plain ended pipes with
mechanical couplings, the Contractor shall take account of the manufacturer's
recommendations as to the methods and equipment to be used in assembling the joint. In
particular the Contractor shall render the end of each pipe perfectly smooth so as to
allow the joint sleeve to slide freely, and where necessary shall recoat the pipe ends with
two coats of quickly drying bituminous paint. The joint shall be protected as for flanged
Pag. 89
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
joints except where the diameter is 600 mm or greater when the coupling shall also be
sealed internally in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.5.4 Flexible joints for cast (spun) and ductile iron pipes
In jointing cast (spun) and ductile iron spigot and socket pipes and specials with
flexible joints the Contractor shall take account of the manufacturer's recommendations
as to the methods and equipment to be used in assembling the joints. The Contractor
shall ensure that the spigot end of the pipe to be joined is smooth and has been properly
chambered, that the rubber ring is correctly positioned in the socket and that the two
pipes are accurately in line before the joint is made. After the joints have been made the
Contractor shall ensure, by the use of suitable feeler gauge, that the rubber ring is evenly
seated in its correct final position. The rubber rings and any recommended lubricant
shall be obtained only through the pipe supplier.
3.5.6 Joints for HDPE pipes
Pipe joining for pipes buried underground, below pavement or slab or concealed in
slab shall use electro-fusion or fully automatic butt fusion jointing unless instructed
otherwise by Engineer Incharge.
The following types of fittings shall comply to BS EN 12201 –3
a) Spigot fittings
b) Electro-fusion fittings and
c) Mechanical fittings and joints
3.6 Bulk Water Meters – Woltman Type
Scope:
Supply and Installation of Bulk type water meters above 50 mm to 500 mm sizes,
Woltman type with removable mechanism, magnetic drive, dry dial, hermetically sealed
Pag. 90
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
register of IP68 protection class, Class-B accuracy water meters in any installation
position, manufactured in accordance with ISO: 4064 standards & have EEC pattern
approvals & shall bear EEC marking on meter dial for each size.
3.6.1 General specification for Bulk water meters & Strainers
3.6.1.1 Technical Specification for Water Meters conforming

to Class – B of ISO:4064 (Woltman type)
Bulk Water Meters shall be Woltman type with removable mechanism, magnetic
drive, dry dial, hermetically sealed register of IP68 protection class, Class-B accuracy
water meters in any installation position, manufactured in accordance with ISO: 4064
standards & have EEC pattern approvals & shall bear EEC marking on meter dial for
each size.
Sizes of Water Meters shall be: (50 mm, 80 mm, 100 mm, 150 mm, 200 mm, 250
mm, 300 mm, 400 mm, 500 mm)
3.6.1.2 Technical Specification for Bulk Water Meters
3.6.1.2.1 Type of Meters :-
The meters offered should be Woltman type cold water meter.
All meters offered under the terms of the tender and specification must be
Woltman type meter and be fitted with a low mass rotor which is parallel to the direction
of water flow and exhibits dynamic thrust relief.
The meter bodies will be flanged for connection and be drilled in accordance with
DIN2532/3 or BS4622, NP10/16
3.6.1.2.2 Material and Workmanship
The meter shall be guaranteed against defects in material and workmanship for a
minimum period of one year from date of delivery. Parts to replace those in
which a defect may develop within such period shall be supplied without charge,
Pag. 91
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
piece, upon the return of such defective parts to the supplier thereof or upon proof of
such defects.
All parts of the meters shall be finished to ensure interchangeability which is to be

guaranteed. The materials for the various parts of the meter shall be as follows.
3.6.1.2.2.1 Main Casting
The meter body shall be manufactured of cast iron and shall be coated with
a high quality fusion bonded powder coating inside and outside the meter body.
3.6.1.2.2.2 Register
The meter will have a magnetic coupling between the meter mechanism
and the register. This must be fully tamper-proof and prevent the meter reading
being affected by any external methods.
The register mechanism will be mounted within a copper housing and should be
fitted with a mineral glass window. The thickness of the mineral glass should be 5 mm.
The register will be submersible to 2m depth of water and will remain
condensation free. The Register should belong to IP68 protection class.
The register shall consist of both a direct straight reading numeric display
and two dial displays with sweep hands. The main dial display will show the lowest unit
of registration and the second dial display will show the tens of units Registers
will be available in both cubic meters and gallons.
Indicating device shall be able to record in straight in-line digits a maximum

reading of 999999.99 Kl for meter size 50 to 150 mm, 999999.9 Kl for meter size of 200
to 300 mm and 99999999 Kl for size 300 mm and above and shall thereafter indicate
zero.
3.6.1.2.2.3 Pulse Output:
The register mechanism will be pre equipped to receive a pulse output unit
in the future which can be added to the meter onsite without breaking the meter
seal and without removing the meter mechanism.
Pag. 92
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The meter must offer the facility for both optical and reed switch outputs which
can be used at the same time. The meter shall offer the facility for electronic pulse
outputs with 1 Pulse per 10 liter for sizes 50 mm to 125 mm, 1 Pulse per 100 liter for
Sizes 150mm to 300mm and 1 Pulse per 1000 Liters for sizes 300mm and above.
Mechanism:
The complete measuring mechanism of the meter shall be removable and

interchangeable with a replacement pre calibrated mechanism. Service mechanisms
must bear same type of EEC pattern approval as that of complete meters for on-site
exchange without re-calibration.
The meter should be capable of installation in any position with no change

in accuracy of reading. The meter should also be able to function in reverse flow and
maintain the EEC Class B Standard.
3.6.1.2.2.4 Strainers
A full range of strainers will be available in sizes compatible with the

meters and will have the same general specification as the water meter.
3.6.1.2.2.5 Flange Connections :-
The meters will be supplied complete with connecting gaskets to provide a

working seal between the meter and the adjoining pipe work.
3.6.1.2.2.6 Marking
Each water meter shall be marked with the following information

a) Direction of flow of water on both sides of the meter.
b) Maximum flow rate.
c) Serial number.
d) Manufacturers name.
e) Year of manufacture.
f) EEC Mark and Approval No.
g) Nominal Flow Rate
Pag. 93
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3.6.1.2.2.7 Metrological Characteristics
The meters performance specifications shall be to ISO 4064 Class B

performance. Approbation Certificates -Copies of the relevant Approbation
Certificates are to be provided by the Tenderer.
3.6.1.2.2.8 Headloss
Meters shall show a loss of head not exceeding 0.1 Bar at Qn in

accordance with ISO 4064.
3.6.1.2.2.9 Working Pressure
The meters working pressure shall be 16 Bar with test pressure of 25 Bar.
3.6.1.2.2.10 Working Temperature
The meter must be able to withstand a maximum working temperature of

50 Deg C (warm water meter type)
3.6.1.2.2.11 Seals
All meters shall be sealed with approved type of seals and seal wires. The
seals and seal wires shall be provided by the Supplier.
3.6.1.3 Technical Specification of Dirt Box with S. S. Strainer
Sizes of Strainer shall be: (50 mm, 80 mm, 100 mm, 150 mm, 200 mm, 250 mm,
300 mm, 400 mm, 500 mm)
The Dirt box shall be made of materials , which are not susceptible to
electrolysis , corrosion and non toxic . The body shall be of stream flow design
with closed grain cast iron material to suit a working pressure of 6 Kg/cm Subject to a
test pressure of 9 Kg /cm during shop test inspection
The cover shall be fixed with the help of hinged bolts, nuts with
rubber gaskets/packing for easy removal of the strainer basket and quick cleaning
of dirt . The dirt box shall be of sufficient size and design to trap the silt and foreign
Pag. 94
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
materials so that the frequency of cleaning the strainer and dirt box is minimum/
optimal.
The strainer basket shall be of rigid special web design made of stainless
steel with perforated punched opening which provided largest possible area of filter
element with minimum head loss and the pressure rating test pressure shall be
same as mentioned in above.
The head loss to the strainer basket shall be minimum and shall confirm to
the relevant standard depending on the diameter of the strainer .As the strainer shall be
placed up – stream of the meter the profile of the same shall be such that the
turbulence caused by it shall be arrested within Day of the strainer.
The strainer with dirt box shall be of doubled flanged flat machined faced
type and details of the flanged shall be similar to that of water meter type
WOLTMAN. The internal diameter of the strainer shall be same that of the
corresponding meter.
3.6.1.3.1 Strainer Materials

 Body: C.I. IS:210 FG 200
 Strainer Frame : SS Perforated Sheet, SS 304
 Mesh (30) : SS Perforated Sheet, SS 304
 Gasket : Rubber
 Cover : C.I. IS:210 FG 200
 Stud / Bolts / Nut : IS:1363CL4.6 & CL4.0
 Eye Bolt : IS:1363CL4.6 & CL4.0
 Plug : 13% CR. SS (AISI 410)
 Flange Dimensions as per EN 1092 PN16
Pag. 95
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3.8 Handling pipes
Pag. 96
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

any direction.
Pag. 97
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
approval.

3.11 Cleaning

Pag. 98
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
The pipeline shall be pressurized for 8 hours, during which the pressure drop shall
be lower than 3% of the initial test pressure. If this condition is not met the pipeline shall
be repaired and re-tested until a satisfactory test is carried out. In case the test is
unsatisfactory, all the costs have to be covered by the Contractor, who shall then account
for such possible occurrences in his rates – only the satisfactory tests will be
acknowledged.

Pag. 99
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
least 40 mg/l of free chlorine. The chlorine shall be derived from a 1% solution of
calcium hypochlorite in water. The solution shall be added in a manner and rate
3.14 Marker posts
The location of all sluice valves, air valves, scour valves, Non return valves &
Pressure reducing valves along the pipelines shall be defined by the provision of marker
posts, as shown on the Drawings, placed on the surface adjacent to the fitting. Where the
pipeline traverses open country the position of any change in horizontal direction of the
pipe shall be indicated by marker posts located directly over the change in position.
Road crossings shall be similarly identified by a post in the verge.
Pag. 100
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3.15 Valve chambers
Construction of valves chambers, made in-situ concrete with dosage and resistance
according to the indications of the design drawings. This includes the following charges:
a) excavation, in any type of soil and backfill with suitable material, in
excess of those required by sections type of pipe laying;
b) the provision and in-situ concrete of concrete and reinforcement/rods
steel B450C to withstand loads maps of first category, as specified in the
details of construction or, if not sufficient, according to the static
calculations;

3.16 Concrete surround to pipes
Where indicated on the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer, pipes shall be

bedded, haunched or surrounded in concrete according to the details shown on the
Drawings or as specified by the Engineer. The rates for bedding, haunching and
surround shall include for extra excavation and removal of material and rough shuttering
as required.
Such concrete shall not be placed until the joints at each end of the pipe have been
completed. Each pipe shall be supported on at least two purposes made precast concrete
blocks which shall be left in place and the full width and depth of bedding concrete shall
be placed and carefully punned beneath the pipe followed at once by the addition of any
haunching or surround concrete.
Pag. 101
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Concrete shall be placed continuously and measures taken to prevent flotation of

the pipes. Concrete shall not be placed within 150 mm of flexible joints or as otherwise
directed by the Engineer.
Pag. 102
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
panels, simple galvanized sheet steel thickness 10 / 10 mm with lock and handle and
also horizontal chrome handle for antipanic.
of marble threshold with aeration slots.
External doors over 2.0 meters in width, with closure of the manual type (as book)
for passage of machinery in general and aeration slots, consist of: modular aluminum
elements, sliding on the upper and lower galvanized steel guides, with folding doors that
open to "four or more modules (panels) that is in function on the width of the door . the
modules will be divided into sections that can be of type: closed with infill panel
sandwich double sheet of aluminum with soundproof internal lining , grille of
ventilation with fixed type aluminum with unbreakable glass 3 +3. They must be
complete: internal and external trims, appropriately sized hinges, locks and handles.
Including the construction of lintel and shoulders , to be carried reinforced concrete,
Pag. 103
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
including the respective reinforcing iron and the formworks, all anchored to the walls of
buildings.
Doors single and double doors, built with wooden inner frame hive, boundaries in
wood edges on both sides made of poplar plywood - 4 mm thick - more the veneered ,
accompanied by at least three hinges, with mortise lock (chromated boundaries), coated
with paints with two components, which comprises the realization of the lintel and of
any shoulders, to be carried in reinforced concrete, including the respective reinforcing
iron and the formworks, all anchored to the walls of buildings. with measures indicated
on the drawings.
4.2.1 Sub-Bases
MDD AASHTO gravel material for flexible sub-base for depth 150-300 mm"
4.2.2 Surfacing
Wearing course, of slurry double surface bitumen seal, placed and rolled as
specified; to Engineer's approval"
4.2.3 Kerbs
Pag. 104
RU.D.RP.03
SPECIFICATION OF
SANITATION
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 EARTHWORKS ..................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 EXCAVATION OF ARTIFACTS AND BASINS .......................................................................... 2
1.6 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING OF PIPE TRENCHES ......................................................... 4

2.1 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................. 7
2.3 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 8
2.4 MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE ..................................................................................... 9
2.4.1 Aggregates ......................................................................................................... 9
2.4.3 Fine Aggregates ............................................................................................... 11
2.4.4 Cement ............................................................................................................. 11
2.5 STEEL ............................................................................................................................ 19
2.7 WORKMANSHIP .......................................................................................................... 20
2.7.1 Concrete ........................................................................................................... 20
2.7.2 Mix Design ....................................................................................................... 20
2.7.3 Trial mixes ........................................................................................................ 24
2.7.17 Shuttering ......................................................................................................... 48
2.7.19 Grout ................................................................................................................ 53
2.8.2 Foam Concrete ................................................................................................. 60
RU_D_RP.03 – Technical specification of Sanitation

Pag. i
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

2.9.1 Water proofing ................................................................................................. 61
2.9.2 Rendering ......................................................................................................... 62
2.9.3 Painting ............................................................................................................ 62
3 PIPES, FITTINGS AND PIPE WORK .............................................................................. 63

3.1 PVC PIPES ....................................................................................................................... 63
3.2 JOINTS ............................................................................................................................. 63
3.4 HANDLING PIPES ............................................................................................................. 64
3.7 CLEANING ....................................................................................................................... 66
3.9 STERILISATION AND COMMISSIONING OF PIPELINES ........................................................ 67
3.10 CONCRETE MANHOLE FOR PIPELINE WORK ...................................................................... 68
4 SANITARY SYSTEM .......................................................................................................... 69

4.1 WATERBOURNE LATRINES .............................................................................................. 69
4.1.1 Construction characteristics ............................................................................ 69
4.2 SHOWER FOR EXISTING LATRINES ................................................................................... 70
5 MISCELLANEOUS WORKS ............................................................................................. 71

5.1 WINDOWS, DOORS, FENCE AND GATES ............................................................................ 71
5.2 ROADS AND PAVING ........................................................................................................ 72
5.2.1 Sub-Bases ......................................................................................................... 72
5.2.2 Surfacing .......................................................................................................... 72
5.2.3 Kerbs ................................................................................................................ 72

Pag. ii
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1 EARTHWORKS
1.1 Introduction
Pag. 1
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
1.3 Excavation of artifacts and basins
Excavation of trench for the artifacts, basins and ancillary related works , in
ordinary soil of any nature and consistency, executable by mechanical means, including
reporting of underground utilities (electrical or telephone cables, pipes , pipelines,
sewers, irrigation canals, drains roads, etc..). And claim also covers the burden of
sorting the material up and free of stones for the First backfill of the artifacts or basins,
and the topsoil that may be present on surface, the perfect restoration of the campaign
plan by mechanical means, the compaction of the material, any refills. Including the cost
of transporting the waste material or if it is not deemed acceptable by supervisor
engineer and its cost to the landfill. Any excavated material not required or permitted for
backfilling of excavations shall be run to a tip provided by the Contractor. The disposal
tip and manner of disposal shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The rates for
excavation entered by the Contractor in the Bills of Quantities shall include for this
disposal. The volume of excavation will be computed on the basis of the width
determined by the conventional type sections attached and of the project depth plus the
thickness of the substrate. It must include in the price all charges resulting from any
increase in section, over the kind of sections attached, resulting from the nature of the
soil, the presence of water, rock, artifacts, etc.. or arising from weather events of any
kind, all executed in a workmanlike manner and in accordance with the directions of the
Pag. 2
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Pag. 3
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
work.
1.6 Excavation and backfilling of pipe trenches

Pag. 4
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

from the Engineer.
formation.
Pag. 5
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

Pag. 6
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.1 SCOPE
account.


imposed loads.
Pag. 7
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

roof loads.
and construction.
circumstances.
2.3 GENERAL
Pag. 8
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.4.1 Aggregates
2.4.1.1 Testing

2.4.1.2 Grading
Pag. 9
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
of the concrete.
2.4.2.1 Types
Pag. 10
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.4.2.2 Stone chips
2.4.4 Cement

Pag. 11
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Pag. 12
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.4.4.5 Water
2.4.5.1 Approval
Pag. 13
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

2.4.5.2 Usage

fresh concrete


grouts.


flexural).
Pag. 14
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA


2.4.5.4 Types

slag.

Pag. 15
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA


lime.
Pag. 16
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
contraction.





Pag. 17
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

concrete.

2.4.5.8 General

admixtures.
Codes.
Pag. 18
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
cost.

Codes.


2.5 STEEL
or reduce bond.
Pag. 19
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

2.7 WORKMANSHIP
2.7.1 Concrete


2.7.2 Mix Design
2.7.2.1 General

Pag. 20
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

Pag. 21
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
of the Engineer.
2.7.2.3 Workability
formwork.

Pag. 22
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

Minimum Maximum

the like.
Uncongested wide and shallow R.C.C

Low 25.0 50.0
structures

Medium 25.0 75.0

and inserts
Note :
Pag. 23
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.2.5 Durability

2.7.3 Trial mixes
the mix design.
Pag. 24
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

CONTRACTOR.
strength.
2.7.5.1 Cement

2.7.5.2 Aggregates
Pag. 25
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

2.7.5.3 Water

conditions.

Pag. 26
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Moist sand 2.5 40
2.7.5.5 Admixtures
Pag. 27
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Pag. 28
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

limits.

Pag. 29
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
b) Over walls
by the Engineer.
reinforcement.
Pag. 30
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
Pag. 31
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

guide lines :
(a) In Columns
Pag. 32
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

slab.
(c) In beams



Pag. 33
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
water tight.

construction joint.
 In ribbed beam
joint.
2.7.11.2 Cold joint

Pag. 34
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

concrete.


Codes.
Pag. 35
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
undertaken.

Pag. 36
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
below:


Pag. 37
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.14.1 General
the CONTRACTOR.
Engineer:
 Ponding

Pag. 38
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
setting.

kept damp
setting.

an impervious sheet


unformed surface.

Pag. 39
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

linoleum.

Pag. 40
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.15.1 General


concrete.
Pag. 41
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

 Mark on cubes

Pag. 42
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA



Pag. 43
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
the Engineer.
2.7.16.1 Material
2.7.16.2 Storage


Pag. 44
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.16.5Tests
Pag. 45
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.16.6Cleaning


British Codes.

Pag. 46
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

conduits
Pag. 47
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
prevent damage.

Engineer.
2.7.17 Shuttering
2.7.17.1 General

Pag. 48
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
responsibilities.
2.7.17.2 Material
diagonally.
2.7.17.3 Fixing
Pag. 49
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA


concrete.

Pag. 50
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.17.9 Removing
load gradually.


by the Engineer.
span: 14 days
Pag. 51
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

kind.

2.7.18.1 Mix

Pag. 52
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.7.18.4 Finishing
2.7.18.5 Curing
2.7.19 Grout
2.7.19.1 Scope
2.7.19.2 Materials


Pag. 53
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
water jet.
2.7.19.4 Curing
Pag. 54
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.8.1.1 General
made available.
2.8.1.3 Shutters
Pag. 55
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
cement slurry.
2.8.1.4 Workmanship

concrete.

2.8.1.5 Vibrating

2.8.1.7 Size

Pag. 56
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3m to 4.5m ---- do----- 9mm
4.5m to 6m ----do----- 12mm
500mm to 700mm -----do----- 9mm
upto 3m -----do---- 6mm
3m to 6m -----do---- 9mm
6m to 12m -----do---- 12mm
2.8.1.8 Squareness
1.8m and over ...... 12 mm
Pag. 57
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.8.1.10 Twist
2.8.1.11 Flatness:
2.8.1.13 Curing
Pag. 58
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.8.1.15 Marking
Pag. 59
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.8.1.17Erection
2.8.1.18 Finishing
2.8.2 Foam Concrete

Pag. 60
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
2.8.3.1 General Use
2.8.3.2 Materials
2.8.3.3 Density

Pag. 61
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA



2.9.2 Rendering

2.9.3 Painting



Pag. 62
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3 PIPES, FITTINGS AND PIPE WORK
3.1 PVC pipes
3.2 Joints
Pag. 63
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3.4 Handling pipes

Pag. 64
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
any direction.
approval.

Pag. 65
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
3.7 Cleaning

Pag. 66
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

least 40 mg/l of free chlorine. The chlorine shall be derived from a 1% solution of
calcium hypochlorite in water. The solution shall be added in a manner and rate
Pag. 67
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

3.10 Concrete manhole for pipeline work
Construction of inspection pit with manhole for water networks and sewage, made
in-situ concrete with dosage and resistance according to the indications of the design
drawings. This includes the following charges:
a) excavation, in any type of soil and backfill with suitable material, in excess
b) the provision and in-situ concrete of concrete and reinforcement/rods steel


Pag. 68
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
4 SANITARY SYSTEM
In this chapter will be described the latrines utilized in the city.
4.1 Waterbourne latrines
The public latrine with six stances is divided in a male and a female section with
separate entrance. Near the entrance there will be a reception area. In the male section
two flush toilets will be present, one of them provided with devices for disabled. There
will be a urinal, too and a shower box. In the female section there will be four flush
toilets, one of them provided with devices for disabled. There will be also a shower box.
Both sections will have a hand wash basin.
4.1.1 Construction characteristics
The public latrines is formed by:

a) flush toilets
b) flush toilet for disabled with hand wash basin
c) shower box
d) urinal
e) hand wash basin
a) Vitreous China WC bowl eastern type with outlet 4 litre cistern with valve
fittings, complete with valve cistern fittings, including outlet and inlet valves,
internal overflow, connecting fitments from cistern to bowl and all accessories to
make functional;
b) Vitreous China WC bowl western type with outlet 4 litre cistern with valve
fittings and seat and cover, complete with valve cistern fittings, including outlet
and inlet valves, internal overflow, connecting fitments from cistern to bowl and
all accessories to make functional, hand wash basin in Vitreous China with
approved drawing dimension with one tap hole and chain-stay hole, complete
with chromium plated pillar tap, chrome plated chain waste, plastic bottle trap,
handrails for disabled, and all accessories to make functional;
c) Shower box with plate made directly in concrete floor of latrine with slope to the
centre trap door connected to PVC outlet pipe, the shower will have valves from
½ " and 2 m height wall covered by tiles 30 x 30 cm and thickness of 2,5 cm
Pag. 69
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
single-fired glazed surface and all the accessories to make the work fully
functional;
d) Urinal discharge made directly in concrete floor of latrine with 2 m height wall
covered by tiles 30 x 30 cm and thickness of 2,5 cm single-fired glazed surface
in according to approved drawings;
e) Hand wash basin in Vitreous China with approved drawing dimensions with tap
holes and chain-stay hole, complete with chromium plated pillars taps, chrome
plated chain waste, plastic bottle trap and all accessories to make functional
From all discharge points (flush toilets, showers, urinal and washing basins)
wastewater is collected through PVC pipes with nominal diameter 110 mm arriving in
manholes from which PVC pipes with nominal diameter 160 mm carry water towards
the septic tank. Septic tank with 24.5 m3 is design to receive all wastewater produced in
the public latrine. Effluent from septic tanks is discharged in a gravel bed with a square
shape with sides of 10.00 m and depth of 2.00 m through a slotted PVC pipe with
nominal diameter 200 mm that helps effluent dispersion. Gravel bed is unlined and
back-filled with coarse gravel.
4.2 Shower for existing latrines
In the existing latrines will be built new showers according to approved drawings.
The new shower box will have plate made directly in concrete floor of latrine with slope
to the centre trap door connected to PVC outlet pipe, the shower will have valves from
½ " and 2 m height wall covered by tiles 30 x 30 cm and thickness of 2,5 cm single-fired
glazed surface and all the accessories to make the work fully functional.
Pag. 70
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
panels, simple galvanized sheet steel thickness 10 / 10 mm with lock and handle.
of marble threshold.
Pag. 71
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
5.2.1 Sub-Bases
MDD AASHTO gravel material for flexible sub-base for depth 150-300 mm"
5.2.2 Surfacing
Wearing course, of slurry double surface bitumen seal, placed and rolled as
specified; to Engineer's approval"
5.2.3 Kerbs
Pag. 72
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

Kampala, UGANDA

DETAILED DESIGN OF RUKUNGIRI
Consultant:
Annex
BY Scale
A. GENERAL F.F.
CHECKED
GENERAL A.G. Contractual Date
APPROVED
February 2015
M.I.
Project
FILE NAME
RU.A.RP.01 rev3.pdf 1404501
General Report Rev. Date DESCRIPTION
0 First emission
1 Second emission
2 Third emission - Tender Documents
3 Fourth emission - Tender Documents
GENERAL REPORT
FOREWORD
This General Report is attached to the bidding documents as ‘Additional Information’, in order to provide
better understanding of the overall project.
The Contract is meant to represent the First Stage of works of the overall project, therefore whatever is
detailed in BOQ, Specification and Book of Drawings shall always take precedence over the General Report
for the purpose of Contract’s interpretation.
Design Review (where applicable), Feasibility Study, Detailed Engineering Designs, and Construction Supervision of the Small Towns in Lot 2:
Rukungiri, Katwe-Kabatoro and Koboko
RU.A.RP.01 - GENERAL REPORT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
0 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY .......................................................................................................... 13

0.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... 13
0.2 PROFILE OF THE PROJECT AREA ........................................................................................... 14
0.3 THE SOCIO-ECONOMIC HOUSEHOLD SURVEY ..................................................................... 15
0.4 DETAILED DESIGN – INTAKE WORKS AND WATER TREATMENT PLANT ............................... 16
0.4.1 General Overview .................................................................................................... 16
0.4.2 Water demand assessment ..................................................................................... 17
0.4.3 Design flows ............................................................................................................. 19
0.4.4 Intake works............................................................................................................. 19
0.4.5 Water Treatment Plant ............................................................................................ 21
0.5 DETAILED DESIGN – WATER SUPPLY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS........... 24
0.5.1 Raw Water Transmission System ............................................................................. 24
0.5.2 Pure Water Pumping System ................................................................................... 25
0.5.3 Pure Water Gravity System...................................................................................... 26
0.5.4 Distribution System.................................................................................................. 27
0.6 DETAILED DESIGN - SANITATION ......................................................................................... 30
1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................... 32
1.1 BACKGROUND ..................................................................................................................... 32
1.2 PROJECT OBJECTIVE & OUTPUTS ......................................................................................... 32
1.2.1 Overall Objective...................................................................................................... 32
1.2.2 Project Outputs ........................................................................................................ 33
1.3 THE CONSULTANCY CONTRACT AND SCOPE OF SERVICES................................................... 33
1.3.1 Mobilization and Staff Assignment .......................................................................... 33
1.3.2 Reporting Obligations .............................................................................................. 33
1.4 DETAILED DESIGN REPORT CONTENTS ................................................................................ 34
2 PROFILE OF THE PROJECT AREA............................................................................................. 35

2.1 LOCATION ............................................................................................................................ 35
2.2 CLIMATE AND TOPOGRAPHY ............................................................................................... 36
2.3 GENERAL GEOLOGY ............................................................................................................. 37
2.4 ENVIRONMENT SETTING ..................................................................................................... 37
1
2.5 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SOCIAL SET-UP ................................................................................ 37

2.6 COMMUNICATION INFRASTRUCTURES ............................................................................... 39
2.7 SOCIO ECONOMIC CONDITIONS .......................................................................................... 40
2.7.1 Population ................................................................................................................ 40
2.7.2 Commercial and Industrial Base .............................................................................. 40
2.7.3 Institutions ............................................................................................................... 41
3 SUMMARY OF THE FEASIBILITY STUDY REPORT ..................................................................... 42

3.1 THE SOCIO-ECONOMIC HOUSEHOLD SURVEY ..................................................................... 42
3.2 EXISTING WATER SUPPLY..................................................................................................... 47
3.2.1 Areas in Rukungiri district ........................................................................................ 47
3.2.2 Areas in Ntungamo district ...................................................................................... 49
3.2.3 Water Production and Supply Challenges ............................................................... 49
3.3 EXISTING SANITATION ......................................................................................................... 50
3.4 WATER DEMAND ASSESSMENT ........................................................................................... 50
3.5 WATER RESOURCES ASSESSMENT ....................................................................................... 52
3.5.1 Quantity ................................................................................................................... 52
3.5.2 Quality ...................................................................................................................... 53
3.6 PRELIMINARY DESIGN - WATER SUPPLY .............................................................................. 54
3.6.1 Evaluation of Surface Water Supply Options ........................................................... 54
3.6.1.1 Scenario 1 ................................................................................................ 54
3.6.1.2 Scenario 2 ................................................................................................ 54
3.6.1.3 Scenario 3 ................................................................................................ 54
3.6.2 Cost estimate comparison ....................................................................................... 55
3.6.3 Financial Analysis ..................................................................................................... 55
3.6.4 Water Supply System components .......................................................................... 55
3.7 PRELIMINARY DESIGN- SANITATION.................................................................................... 59
3.7.1 Central Sewerage System ........................................................................................ 60
3.7.2 On-Site Sanitation .................................................................................................... 60
3.8 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS.......................................................................... 61
3.8.1 Water Supply ........................................................................................................... 61
3.8.2 Sanitation ................................................................................................................. 62
3.8.3 Budget ...................................................................................................................... 62
4 DETAILED DESIGN – INTAKE WORKS AND WATER TREATMENT PLANT ................................... 63

4.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................... 63
2
4.2 WATER DEMAND ASSESSMENT ........................................................................................... 64

4.2.1 Population Projections ............................................................................................. 64
4.2.2 Unit Consumption Rates .......................................................................................... 65
4.2.2.1 Domestic Consumption Rates .................................................................. 65
4.2.2.2 Non-Domestic Consumption Rates .......................................................... 66
4.2.2.3 Summary of Proposed Unit Consumption Rates ...................................... 67
4.2.3 Unaccounted For Water (UFW) ............................................................................... 68
4.2.4 Water Demand......................................................................................................... 69
4.3 WTP AND INTAKE WORKS DESIGN DATA ............................................................................. 73
4.3.1 Design flows ............................................................................................................. 73
4.4 INTAKE WORKS .................................................................................................................... 74
4.4.1 Site description ........................................................................................................ 74
4.4.2 Design of intake works ............................................................................................. 74
4.5 WATER TREATMENT PLANT ................................................................................................. 76
4.5.1 Site description ........................................................................................................ 76
4.5.2 Design of water treatment plant ............................................................................. 76
4.5.2.1 WTP scheme ............................................................................................ 76
4.5.2.2 Aeration System, Fine Screening Station and Flow Divider ..................... 77
4.5.2.3 Chemical building (for flocculant) ............................................................ 78
4.5.2.4 Clarifying Tanks, Sludge Extraction and Lifting Station ........................... 79
4.5.2.5 Sludge production from the clariflocculation .......................................... 80
4.5.2.6 Filters Building and Filter Backwashing Building ..................................... 80
4.5.2.7 Disinfection tank ...................................................................................... 81
4.5.2.8 Chemical building (for chlorine preparation and storage) ...................... 82
4.5.2.9 High Lift pump station ............................................................................. 82
4.5.2.10 Sewage Equalization Tank ..................................................................... 83
4.5.2.11 Sludge treatment ................................................................................... 83
4.5.2.12 Complementary structures .................................................................... 85
5 DETAILED DESIGN – WATER SUPPLY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS ................ 87

5.1 DESIGN CRITERIA ................................................................................................................. 87
5.1.1 Peak Factors ............................................................................................................. 87
5.1.2 Pipe Flow Velocities ................................................................................................. 87
5.1.3 Storage Capacity ...................................................................................................... 87
5.1.4 Operating Pressures................................................................................................. 87
3
5.1.5 Design Economic Life ............................................................................................... 87

5.1.6 System Operation Time ........................................................................................... 88
5.1.7 Pipe Diameters & Materials ..................................................................................... 88
5.2 TRANSMISSION SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 89
5.2.1 Raw Water Transmission System ............................................................................. 89
5.2.1.1 Proposed Alignment ................................................................................ 89
5.2.1.2 Controlling Hydraulic Levels..................................................................... 89
5.2.1.3 Hydraulic Design ...................................................................................... 89
5.2.1.4 Proposed Valves and Appurtenances ...................................................... 90
5.2.2 Pure Water Transmission System ............................................................................ 91
5.2.3 Pure Water Pumping System ................................................................................... 92
5.2.4 Pure Water Gravity System...................................................................................... 94
5.3 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ........................................................................................................ 98
5.3.1 Hydraulic Design ...................................................................................................... 99
5.3.2 Proposed Valves and Appurtenances .................................................................... 101
6 DETAILED DESIGN – SANITATION ........................................................................................ 103

6.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 103
6.2 PRIVATE LATRINE IMPROVEMENT ..................................................................................... 103
6.3 PUBLIC LATRINES IMPROVEMENT ..................................................................................... 103
6.3.1 New Waterborne Latrines ..................................................................................... 104
6.4 CO-COMPOSTING PLANT ................................................................................................... 106
6.4.1 Plant Localization ................................................................................................... 106
6.4.2 Reference Population ............................................................................................ 106
6.4.3 Sludge Characteristics and Amount ....................................................................... 107
6.4.4 Organic Fraction of Municipal Solid Waste............................................................ 107
6.4.5 Composting Process and Required Area................................................................ 108
4
6.4.5.1 Drying beds ............................................................................................ 109

6.4.5.2 Treatment pond ..................................................................................... 110
6.4.5.3 Compost windrows ................................................................................ 110
6.4.6 Possible Future Improvements .............................................................................. 111
6.5 GENERAL LAYOUT OF FUTURE CENTRAL SYSTEM (AFTER 2040 SCENARIO)....................... 112
6.5.1 Population and consumption projections ............................................................. 112
6.5.2 Central Sewage System Layout .............................................................................. 113
6.5.3 Wastewater Treatment Lagoons Layout ............................................................... 114
7 PREPARATION OF BILL OF QUANTITIES AND TENDER DOCUMENTS ...................................... 118
5
LIST OF ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
AC Asbestos cement
BOQ Bills of quantities
CI Cast iron
DEM Digital Elevation Model
DI Ductile Iron
EIA Environmental Impact Assessment
ESIA Environmental and social impact assessment
ESR Elevated Storage Reservoir
FSL Full supply level
GI Galvanized iron
GIS Geographic Information System
GoU Government of Uganda
GSR Ground Storage Reservoir
HLR High-Level Reservoir
HRT Hydraulic retention time
IRR Internal Rate of Return
LC Local Council
LDL Lowest draw level
LLR Low-Level Reservoir
LPCD Litres Per Capita per Day
MBR Master Balancing Reservoir
MSW Municipal Solid Waste
MWE Ministry of Water and Environment
NEMA National Environment Management Authority
NPV Net Present Value
NRW Non Revenue Water
NWSC National Water and Sewerage Corporation
O&M Operation & Maintenance
PSU Primary Sampling Units
PVD Polyvinyl chloride
RCC Reinforced cement concrete
SEHS Socio-Economic Household Survey
6
SR Storage Reservoir
SRS Simple Random Sampling
TC Town Council
TDS Total Dissolved Solids
ToR Terms of Reference
TSS Total Suspended Solids
UFW Unaccounted-for Water
VHT Village Health Team
VIP Ventilated Improved Pit toilet
WMDP Water Management and Development Project
WSS Water Supply System
WTP Water Treatment Plant
wtp Willingness To Pay
7
LIST OF TABLES
Table 0.1 – Population characteristics in the Project area ...............................................................................14

Table 0.2 – Water supply facilities in Rukungiri water supply system .............................................................16
Table 0.3 - Proposed Consumption Rates for non-domestic activities ............................................................18
Table 0.4 – Gross water demand (m3/d) in the project area............................................................................19
Table 0.5 – Calculation of the raw water amount to be withdrawn from the Kahengye River to supply
the WTP ..........................................................................................................................................19
Table 0.6 – Design flows for intake structure ...................................................................................................20
Table 0.7 – Design data for intake pumps dimensioning .................................................................................20
Table 0.8 – Main high pressure pumps ............................................................................................................24
Table 0.9 – Details of Proposed MBR ...............................................................................................................26
Table 0.10 – Summary of proposed Service reservoirs considered for Transmission System .........................26
Table 0.11 – Salient Features of Pure Water Gravity System...........................................................................27
Table 0.12 – Summary of Water Supply Zones & Reservoirs ...........................................................................29
Table 2.1 - Administrative units by County in whole Rukungiri district ...........................................................38
Table 2.2 - Summary of Administrative units in whole Rukungiri district ........................................................39
Table 2.3 – Population characteristics in the Project area ...............................................................................40
Table 2.4 - Institutions in the Municipality.......................................................................................................41
Table 3.1 - Access, behavioral/cultural dynamics, attitude and challenges regarding water , sanitation
and health in Rukungiri...................................................................................................................42
Table 3.2 - Water Utilization and Willingness to Pay (wtp) for the new water system ...................................44
Table 3.3 - Water utilization, demand, attitude and wtp amongst institutional communities and large
water users in Rukungiri .................................................................................................................44
Table 3.4 - Access to sanitation amongst households in Rukungiri .................................................................46
Table 3.5 – Characteristics of Water Supply schemes managed by NWSC in Rukungiri district ......................47
Table 3.6 – Characteristics of Water Supply schemes in surrounding villages of Rukungiri district ................48
Table 3.7 – Water tariffs applied by NWSC in Rukungiri district .....................................................................48
Table 3.8 – Service fees for water supply connections applied by NWSC in Rukungiri district ......................48
Table 3.9 – Main water supply challenges in the surrounding villages of Rukungiri district ..........................49
Table 3.10 - Proposed Consumption Rates for non-domestic activities ..........................................................51
Table 3.11 – Gross water demand (m3/d) in the project area .........................................................................52
Table 3.12 – Assessment of Kahengye river as raw water source ...................................................................53
Table 3.13 – Water quality test results for Kahengye river .............................................................................53
8
Table 3.14 –Financial indicators for selected Scenario ...................................................................................55

Table 3.15 – Analysis of the water demand for the different stages of the Project .......................................56
Table 3.16 – Summary of proposed storage reservoirs in the project area.....................................................58
Table 4.1 – Water supply facilities in Rukungiri water supply system .............................................................63
Table 4.2 – Population projection in the project area .....................................................................................64
Table 4.3 – Levels of Service (at 5% income)....................................................................................................66
Table 4.4 - Proposed Consumption Rates for non-domestic activities ............................................................67
Table 4.5 - Summary of Proposed Consumption Rates ....................................................................................67
Table 4.6 – Total net LPCD (L/c/d) applied for calculating the water demand in the project area .................68
Table 4.7 - Administrative units totally considered for calculation of water demand .....................................69
Table 4.8 - Administrative units partially considered for calculation of water demand ..................................69
Table 4.9 – Net water demand (m3/d) in the project area ...............................................................................70
Table 4.10 – Peak water demand (m3/d) in the project area ...........................................................................71
Table 4.11 – Gross water demand (m3/d) in the project area .........................................................................72
Table 4.12 – Analysis of the water demand for the different stages of the Project .......................................73
Table 4.13 – Calculation of the raw water amount to be withdrawn from the Kahengye River to supply
the WTP ..........................................................................................................................................74
Table 4.14 – Design flows for intake structure.................................................................................................74
Table 4.15 – Design data for intake pumps dimensioning ...............................................................................75
Table 4.16 – WTP inlet work design data .........................................................................................................78
Table 4.17 - Main design parameters of alumina storage and dosage ............................................................78
Table 4.18 – Clariflocculation design data........................................................................................................79
Table 4.19 – Design parameters of filters ........................................................................................................80
Table 4.20 – Filter backwashing design ............................................................................................................81
Table 4.21 – Pump sizing summary ..................................................................................................................82
Table 4.22 – Main high pressure pumps ..........................................................................................................83
Table 4.23 – System details for main high pressure pumps .............................................................................83
Table 4.24 – Potable water pumps ...................................................................................................................83
Table 4.25 - Sludge production from clarification and equalization ................................................................84
Table 4.26 – Rukungiri WTP dried sludge production ......................................................................................84
Table 5.1 – Project Components and design Period........................................................................................87
Table 5.2 – Economic life and annual M&R cost .............................................................................................88
Table 5.3 - Pipe Diameters and Materials ........................................................................................................88
Table 5.4 - Suggested diameter of Air valves ...................................................................................................90
Table 5.5 - Summary of proposed Air Valves on raw water transmission pipeline .........................................90
9
Table 5.6 - Summary of proposed Scour Valves on raw water transmission pipeline .....................................91
Table 5.7: Summary of proposed Non-Return Valves on raw water transmission pipeline ............................91
Table 5.8 – Salient Features of Pure Water Pumping System ..........................................................................93
Table 5.9 – Summary of proposed Air Valves on Pure Water Pumping Main..................................................94
Table 5.10 – Summary of proposed Scour Valves on Pure Water Pumping Main ...........................................94
Table 5.11 – Summary of proposed Non-Return Valves on Pure Water Pumping Main .................................94
Table 5.12 – Details of Proposed MBR .............................................................................................................95
Table 5.13 – Summary of proposed Service reservoirs considered for Transmission System .........................95
Table 5.14 – Salient Features of Pure Water Gravity System...........................................................................96
Table 5.15 – Summary of proposed Air Valves on Pure Water Gravity Main ..................................................96
Table 5.16 – Summary of proposed Scour Valves on Pure Water Gravity Main ..............................................97
Table 5.17 – Summary of proposed In-line Sluice/Butterfly Valves on Pure Water Gravity Main ..................97
Table 5.18 – Summary of proposed Butterfly Valves on Pure Water Gravity Main.........................................98
Table 5.19 – Summary of PRVs in Pure Water Transmission System ...............................................................98
Table 5.20 – Summary of Water Supply Zones & Reservoirs .........................................................................101
Table 5.21 – Summary of Proposed Distribution Pipes ..................................................................................101
Table 5.22 – Summary of proposed Air Valves in Distribution System ..........................................................101
Table 5.23 – Summary of proposed Scour Valves in Distribution System......................................................102
Table 5.24 – Summary of proposed Sluice Valves in Distribution System .....................................................102
Table 6.1 – Details regarding population density and population served by central co-composting plant. .107
Table 6.2 – Sludge characterizations depending on latrine type. ..................................................................107
Table 6.3 – Sludge to be treated in the co-composting plant. .......................................................................107
Table 6.4 – Preliminary cost estimates for PVC pipes network......................................................................114
Table 6.5 – Parameters used in the lagoon dimensioning. ............................................................................115
Table 6.6 – Required water net area per each treatment step. .....................................................................115
Table 6.7 – Ponds water net area, divided by plants. ....................................................................................116
Table 6.8 – Area increased due to land requirements for dams, banks and passage around ponds. ...........116
Table 6.9 – Preliminary cost estimates for WW treatment ponds plant .......................................................117
10
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 0.1 – Overall area considered ................................................................................................................13

Figure 0.2 – Water supply facilities in Rukungiri water supply system ............................................................17
Figure 0.3 – Intake structure section: inlet and screening ...............................................................................21
Figure 0.4 – WTP layout....................................................................................................................................22
Figure 0.5 – Key Map of Rukungiri Raw Water Transmission System ..............................................................24
Figure 0.6 – Key Plan of Rukungiri Pure Water Transmission System ..............................................................25
Figure 0.7 – Rukungiri Proposed Water Supply Zones .....................................................................................28
Figure 0.8 – Rukungiri Distribution Network Map ...........................................................................................29
Figure 2.1 – Overall area considered ................................................................................................................35
Figure 2.2 – Temperature graph of Rukungiri ..................................................................................................36
Figure 2.3 – Rainfall graph of Rukungiri ...........................................................................................................36
Figure 2.4 – Areas included in the new Rukungiri Municipal Council ..............................................................39
Figure 2.5 – 2010 Population density (persons/km2) by sub-county in Rukungiri district ...............................40
Figure 3.1 –River Kahengye near the bridge on Rukungiri - Ntungamo districts’ border ................................53
Figure 3.2 – Proposed location for new WTP at Kabingo .................................................................................56
Figure 3.3 –WTP schematic layout ...................................................................................................................57
Figure 3.4 – Layout of proposed transmission system .....................................................................................58
Figure 3.5 – Layout of proposed distribution system.......................................................................................59
Figure 3.6 – Proposed new sanitation public facilities and upgrading of existing ones...................................61
Figure 4.1 – Water supply facilities in Rukungiri water supply system ............................................................63
Figure 4.2 – Monthly income of households in Rukungiri Municipality ...........................................................66
Figure 4.3 – Overall area considered for calculation of water demand ...........................................................70
Figure 4.4 – Picture of the proposed location for new intake works ...............................................................74
Figure 4.5 – Intake structure section: inlet and screening ...............................................................................75
Figure 4.6 – Proposed location for new WTP at Kabingo and view of the site from the existing road ...........76
Figure 4.7 – WTP layout....................................................................................................................................77
Figure 4.8 – Aeration system ............................................................................................................................77
Figure 4.9 – Filter bed section ..........................................................................................................................80
Figure 4.10 – Rukungiri WTP dried sludge production .....................................................................................85
Figure 5.1 - Key Map of Rukungiri Raw Water Transmission System ...............................................................89
Figure 5-2 – Design flows (m3/d) for Rukungiri Pure Water Transmission System ..........................................92
11
Figure 5.3 – Key Plan of Rukungiri Pure Water Transmission System (Trunk number is shown in red
colour).............................................................................................................................................93
Figure 5.4 – Rukungiri Proposed Water Supply Zones .....................................................................................99
Figure 5.5 – Rukungiri Distribution Network Map .........................................................................................100
Figure 6.1 – Localization of interventions regarding public latrine improvements. ......................................104
Figure 6.2 – Plan of the new waterborne latrines with six stances................................................................105
Figure 6.3 – Plan of the showers to be added to existing latrines. ................................................................105
Figure 6.4 – Percentages of total population that have been considered for central plant design. .............106
Figure 6.5 – Scheme of co-composting process. ............................................................................................108
Figure 6.6 – General layout of the co-composting plant. ..............................................................................109
Figure 6.7 – Scheme of unplanted drying beds. .............................................................................................109
Figure 6.8 – Drying beds plant. .......................................................................................................................110
Figure 6.9 – Compost windrow section. .........................................................................................................111
Figure 6.10 – Example of covered drying beds in Kampala and covered compost windrows. ......................112
Figure 6.11 – Town Council subbasins, sewage network layout and localization of wastewater
treatment lagoons. .......................................................................................................................113
Figure 6.12 – Wastewater treatment lagoons scheme. .................................................................................115
Figure 6.13 – General layout of WW treatment ponds plant in Kinyasano valley. ........................................116
Figure 6.14 – General layout of WW treatment ponds plant in Kashangowa valley. ....................................116
Figure 6.15 – General layout of WW treatment ponds plant in Nyakibale valley..........................................117
Figure 7.1 – Project sites ................................................................................................................................119
12
0 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
0.1 INTRODUCTION
The GOVERNMENT OF UGANDA through the Ministry Of Water and Environment (MWE) entrusted SGI –
Studio Galli Ingegneria SpA (hereinafter referred to as the Consultant) with the implementation of the
Water Management and Development Project (WMDP) for Rukungiri, Katwe–Kabatoro and Koboko town
for water supply infrastructures, sanitation sewerage services, storm water and solid waste management.
The overall project objective is to assist the Ministry of Water and Environment (MWE), through the
Directorate of Water Development (DWD), in improving water and sanitation services in Rukungiri, Koboko
and Katwe-Kabatoro towns.
The aim of this detailed design is to design a water supply scheme comprising the Municipality of Rukungiri
and the following additional towns, whose water supply systems are currently managed by NWSC:
 Buyanja (sub-county of Buyanja)
 Kebisoni (sub-county of Kebisoni)
 Rwerere (sub-county of Nyakagyeme)
Figure 0.1 – Overall area considered
The feasibility of a possible future expansion of the proposed water supply system to Ntungamo district is
also considered.
As of the sanitation system, the Consultant carried out the detailed design of proposed sanitation facilities
for serving the Municipality of Rukungiri.
Page 13
0.2 PROFILE OF THE PROJECT AREA

The Project area is located in Rukungiri district, in the Western region of Uganda. Rukungiri district is
bordered by Ntungamo district in the East, Kabale in the South, Mitooma in the north and Kanungu in the
West. The District has a total area of 1,524.28 km2, 11% of which comprises tropical high forests, 5.5%
woodland, 2.6% bush land, 21.3% grassland, 52% farmland and 7.6% open water. Rukungiri District
headquarters are situated in Rukungiri Municipal Council.
The Municipality lies on an area of approximately 64.9 km2. Rukungiri is located at Latitude 0° 47’ 21”S and
Longitude 29° 56’ 30” E, 362 km by road from Kampala and 99 km from Mbarara, the largest town in the
Western Region.
The temperatures are generally cool, ranging from 13°C to 26°C with an average temperature of 19°C. The
coolest month is June and the hottest is February.
The mean annual rainfall is 1197 mm. The rainfall pattern is bi-modal with two seasons. Rains are received
in the months of March-May, the lowest and September-December, the highest peak.
The geology of the project area is mainly of Pleistocene rift valley sediments type (Rift alluvium).
The soils are generally sandy and clay loams. A dark brown sandy clay loam exists in some areas. The rift
valley sediments and volcanic ashes are the parent rock to these soils.
The whole of Rukungiri District lies within the catchment of Lake Edward basin and all surface water
eventually drains north-westward into Lake Edward. Another smaller lake lies within the Project area i.e.
Lake Nakasanda, in Garubunda parish (Kebisoni sub-county).
The Municipality has no natural forests but some land is under cultivation. These are public woodlands over
a total area of 26 hectares planted with eucalyptus trees and owned by individuals.
Forest/Savanna mosaic are commonly found in Buyanja, Kebisoni, and Nyakagyeme subcounties.
The main characteristics of the population in the project area are reported in the table below. The data
refer to the UBOS Population and Housing Census 2002.
Table 0.1 – Population characteristics in the Project area
Administrative division 2002 Population Households Male Female
Rukungiri Municipality 34,578 7,305 16,796 17,782
Kakinga - Subcounty of Kebisoni 4,926 921 2,379 2,547
Kigiro - Subcounty of Kebisoni 2,626 493 1,231 1,395
Nyakaina - Subcounty of Buyanja 5,102 958 2,498 2,604
Bugyera - Subcounty of Buyanja 3,211 577 1,614 1,597
Nyabiteete - Subcounty of Buyanja 3,130 612 1,520 1,610
Kyamakanda - Subcounty of Buyanja 5,589 1,016 2,749 2,840
Rwerere - Subcounty of Nyakagyeme 3,538 731 1,739 1,799
Kigaaga - Subcounty of Nyakagyeme 3,912 774 1,910 2,002
The main commercial and industrial activities are concentrated in the Municipality. Commercial activities
include peasantry farming, with limited livestock rearing of cattle and goats of local breed, service industry
(restaurants, bars and lodges), and petty trade. Small scale industries are involved in agro-processing of
grain and coffee. Other small scale industries are engaged in metal fabrication, wood works and carpentry,
milk cooling plants, tailoring, motor garages, bakery and soap industry. The most grown crops are potatoes,
bananas, beans, and coffee. Other activities include brick making, small scale trading in produce and
merchandise (wholesale and retail shops), cattle market, abattoir, and butcheries.
Page 14
0.3 THE SOCIO-ECONOMIC HOUSEHOLD SURVEY

The Socio-economic household survey involved the administration of a household/business population
questionnaire on a sample of 141 sampled households. The Socio economic survey also involved key
informant interviews with Municipal Council Staff and heads of institutions, and Focus group discussions all
carried out in September 2014. As result of the social economic survey, a number of observations were
made that are documented in this report.
Rukungiri Municipality hosts the district headquarters of Rukungiri district in South Western Uganda. The
town has a piped water supply system which was constructed around the year 1996. Management of the
piped water supply system was done by WSS Services as the Private Operator being supervised by
Rukungiri Town Water Authority and Board. Today this management has been taken over by National
Water & Sewerage Corporation. The existing boreholes water supply has had a number of problems
associated with the hydrogeological characteristics of the area. Water levels have continuously dropped
and this has drastically affected the production of water for town consumption.
By the time of this socioeconomic survey, the main sources of water accessed by households are protected
springs( 87% ) and rain water harvesting (23%) with some households reporting more than one main
source.
Many households reported that the problem of water supply and unsafe drinking water were very serious
with 93 (66%) saying that they were not satisfied at all with the water supply services they are currently
receiving due to extreme irregularity and low supply.
Only 43.3% of the households reported that they buy water. The average price at which households
reported that they buy a 20L jerry can of water is UGX.346. Asked whether they are willing to be one of the
new customers if a new water supply system is established, most households and business premises
indicated that they are willing to be one of the new customers if a new water supply system is built and all
further reported that they would be able to pay for the improved water services. The average maximum
price that households are willing to pay for 20L jerry can from a safe water supply system is UGX.156 while
the highest price that institutions will to pay for a 20L jerry can on the new water system is between
UGX.50 to UGX.100, with the prisons and police posts reporting the lowest prices of under UGX.50.
Given choice to determine preferred service level, 45% households opted for house connection, 44% for a
yard tap & 9% for a public standpipe. The majority of large institutions prefer the yard tap water supply
option.
Using interval regression, the average maximum price at which each household would be able to provide
each member of its household a 20L jerry can of water a day stands as UGX.227; for institutions between
UGX.50 to UGX.100 with the prisons and police posts reporting the lowest prices of under UGX.50. The
monthly average price households are wtp for a connection from a new water supply system irrespective of
service level is UGX.25,156. The monthly average price those who opted for a House connection are wtp for
a connection is UGX.35,583; those for Yard tap UGX.15,648; those for a Pubic Standpipe is UGX. 19,434.
Traditional pit latrines or logs were the commonest (79%) faecal disposal facilities used. Many households
(53%) reported that they do not regularly practice hand washing. Sickness of any household member in the
last two days prior to the interview was reported in only 16% of the households. Diarrhoea was not
reported common 48 hours prior to the interviews and many households acknowledge boiling drinking
water (98.6%).
The most common method of solid waste disposal is dumping at a designated point and collection by the
Municipal Council trucks. However, some households report collection and burning at household level.
Page 15
Kebisoni, Buyanja, and Rwerere sub counties have typically farming communities with a significant
population of absentee households (owning rather large chunks of fenced up livestock farms and working
outside the project area). Introduction of water supply based on a billing system needs to be done with
caution in these subcounties considering that:
a) Water supply in all these subcounties has basically been a “free service” offered from gravity flow
schemes. The populations here have no experience consuming billed water.
b) wtp will be based on the benefits that the new system can be seen to offer in contrast to existing
water sources. Water is only a problem during the dry season. But even here, the majority of
households do not buy water. The experience shared regarding maintenance efforts for Gravity
Flow schemes and current efforts by NWSC give testimony to the fact that the concept of billed
water has not received a good reception.
0.4 DETAILED DESIGN – INTAKE WORKS AND WATER TREATMENT PLANT

0.4.1 General Overview
The project consists of the design and construction of a water supply system for Rukungiri Municipality as
well as for towns beyond the Municipality in order to include the following additional areas, whose water
supply systems are currently managed by the National Water and Sewerage Corporation (NWSC):
The system is designed for a final capacity corresponding to the water demand of year 2040, but it is
expected to be implemented adopting a phased approach. Eventually the project will imply the
construction of the facilities (intake works, water treatment plants, storage reservoirs) listed in Table 0.2.
The location of such facilities is shown in Figure 0.2.
Table 0.2 – Water supply facilities in Rukungiri water supply system

Code Name
RU_I1 Kahengye Intake
RU_W1 WTP for Rukungiri scheme
RU_R1 Mukazi proposed MBR
RU_R2 Rwanyakashesha proposed SR
RU_R3 Bwoma proposed SR
RU_R4 Kebisoni proposed SR
RU_R5 Buyanja proposed SR (Gravity scheme)
RU_R6 Buyanja proposed HLR
RU_R7 Rwerere proposed SR
Page 16
Figure 0.2 – Water supply facilities in Rukungiri water supply system
To reduce the initial investment, a subdivision of the works to be implemented immediately (referred to as
‘First phase’) and the less urgent ones which can be postponed is proposed -
 WTP: all civil works will have to be implemented for the First stage, except for 4 clariflocculators, 2
group of drying beds, and the second compartment of the disinfection tank. Part of the mechanical and
electrical works is also postponed to later phases.
 Reservoirs: in 2030 stage only the reservoir R1 (700 m3 Ground Service Reservoir) shall be constructed.
In the meanwhile the existing reservoirs at Rwanyakashesha and Bwoma can be used, whereas the
proposed reservoirs R2÷R7 will be constructed at later phases, next to the existing reservoirs.
 Transmission Lines: the pumping transmission systems will be laid immediately, whereas the gravity
transmission system will initially comprise only the main pipeline going from Mukazi MBR to Rukungiri.
 Distribution Network of Rukungiri: the entire distribution network – both Primary Network (around 12.5
km out of 39 km total) and Secondary Network - will be laid in later phases.
 Sanitation system: only 2 waterborne public latrines are considered to be carried out immediately in the
first stage.
0.4.2 Water demand assessment
Population projections are made for the “Initial Year” 2015, the “Future Year” 2030, and the “Ultimate
Year” 2040.
Population growth rate applied for Rukungiri district is 1.5%, and for Ntungamo district is 1.9%, according
to the calculated trends.
Four services levels have been considered:
 House Connection (HC) - individual house connection with internal plumbing, kitchen, toilet and
bathroom with shower;
 Yard Tap (YT) connection - no internal plumbing, no water borne sanitation;
 Public Standpipe (PSP) - offsite supply, from a public standpipe;
 Non pipe supply / None of the above (NS) – part time users who consume water only for necessary
household use and take the rest of the water supply from traditional sources.
Page 17
A review of the rates in current use in the country was carried out. Both the rates advised by the 2013
MWE Water Supply Design Manual and rates adopted by other recent Water Supply Project in Uganda
were considered. The adopted unit consumption rates are as follows:
 House Connection - 100 L/c/d
 Yard Tap is - 40 L/c/d
 Public Standpipe - 20 L/c/d
 Non pipe supply / None of the above - 5 L/c/d
The average domestic consumption rate is a function of the consumer population figures, the levels of
service, the Ability to Pay of the households, and the proposed tariff level, and in the project area it equals
45.88 L/c/d.
The non-domestic consumption covers the institutional, commercial and industrial demand. For these,
rates have been adopted from the design manual, rates used in other similar schemes designed recently,
and in some cases modified to suit the site conditions.
The information collected during the socio-economic survey were used to precisely assess the non-
domestic demand.
Knowing the average number and size of non-domestic activities willing to become customers of the new
water supply scheme, the specific unit consumption rates were assigned to each type of institution or
commercial/industrial activity, and the total non-domestic demand calculated accordingly. The proposed
non-domestic consumption rates are given in the following table.
Table 0.3 - Proposed Consumption Rates for non-domestic activities
Average Day Demand
Demand Category Unit
Adopted Rates
Institutional
Schools L/c/d 10
Hospitals / Health Centres L/bed/d 100
Worship Places L/c/d 15
Police stations & Prisons L/c/d 20
Commercial / Industrial
Markets L/d 2,000
Hotels
Low / Medium class L/c/d 100
High class L/c/d 600
Restaurants L/d 200
The total non-domestic net demand is estimated as 312.71 m3/d for Rukungiri Municipality. This yields a
Non-Domestic Net LPCD of 7.41 L/c/d.
The sum of domestic net LPCD and the non-domestic net LPCD gives a total Net LPCD of 53.29 L/c/d for
Rukungiri Municipality.
The per capita consumptions indicated in the MWE Water supply design manual for calculating the total
water demand are:
 20 L/c/d for small towns up to 5,000 .persons
 35 L/c/d for medium towns up to 20,000 persons
 50 L/c/d for the larger towns.
Page 18
These total Net LPCD have been used as reference for estimating the net demand in the sub-counties of
Buyanja, Kebisoni, Nyakagyeme, Bwongyera and Nyabihoko.
The net water demand has been calculated by multiplying the population by the Net LPCD.
The maximum gross water demand has been calculated by applying the following assumptions:
 Daily peak factor = 1.2
 UFW = 10%
 WTP losses = 5%
The results for the initial, future, and ultimate year of the project are shown in the following table.
Table 0.4 – Gross water demand (m3/d) in the project area
% Popn Population Served Net Gross Water Demand (m3/d)

Municipality / Subcounty Served 2015 2030 2040 LPCD 2015 2030 2040
Rukungiri Municipality 100% 42,181 52,736 61,202 53.29 3,116 3,895 4,521
Kebisoni subcounty 67% 16,798 21,001 24,373 32.15 749 936 1,086
Buyanja subcounty 95% 24,696 30,875 35,832 35 1,198 1,498 1,738
Nyakagyeme subcounty 100% 5,108 6,386 7,411 32.61 231 289 335
Total Rukungiri district population 90% 88,782 110,998 128,818 43.02 5,293 6,618 7,680
Total Ntugamo district population 100% 21,363 28,331 34,199 35 1,036 1,374 1,659
TOTAL 92% 110,145 139,330 163,017 41.33 6,329 7,992 9,339
0.4.3 Design flows

The intake and WTP works are sized to supply sufficient raw water for the 2030 and 2040 project horizons.
In year 2030, the population served will be that of Rukungiri Municipality. In year 2040, the population will
include also that in Rukungiri district and Ntugamo district.
The calculation of the design flows is shown in Table 0.5.
Table 0.5 – Calculation of the raw water amount to be withdrawn from the Kahengye River to supply the WTP
Nominal production (m³/d) Nominal production (m³/h)
Water flows Future year Ultimate year Future year Ultimate year
2030 2040 2030 2040
Peak Water demand 3,710 8,894 155 371
Max water supplied to the users (100%) 4,560 9,120 190 380
WTP losses (5%) 240 480 10 20
Raw water to be treated (105%) 4,800 9,600 200 400
0.4.4 Intake works
The selected raw water source is river Kahengye. The new intake facility is placed near Kahengye river’s
bridge, on the border between Rukungiri and Ntungamo districts (Rubumba LC1, Kabingo parish, Kebisoni
sub-county).
The intake structure is dimensioned for the following river discharge values, corresponding to the Low flow
with 25 years return period, and the Flood flow with 100 years return period, respectively.
Page 19
Table 0.6 – Design flows for intake structure

Kahengye river Flow (m3/s) Water level (m)
Min 0.23 1397.40
Max 30.1 1399.10
The pumping station will withdraw from the Kahengye River 200 m3/h in the first phase (up to year 2030)
and up to 400 m3/h in the final stage (year 2040).
The intake works will be constituted by a civil structure containing:
 gabions against bank erosion

 2 coarse screening systems (50 mm) provided with an automatic cleaning system (constituted by a
moving rake which conveys the screened materials into a container), 1 of which will be installed in
the later construction phases
 4+1 lifting pumps, 4 of which will be installed in the later construction phases.
The following table summarizes the pumps design data.

Table 0.7 – Design data for intake pumps dimensioning
INTAKE WORKS - PUMPING STATION
WTP design flowrate:
INTERMEDIATE STAGE 2030 200 m3/h
FINAL STAGE 2040 400 m3/h
Number of pumps:
INTERMEDIATE STAGE 2030 2+1
FINAL STAGE 2040 4+1
design capacity, each 100 m3/h
The pumps characteristics are the following:
 Nominal flow: 100 m3/h

 Pump head: 95 m
Page 20
Figure 0.3 – Intake structure section: inlet and screening
The pipes feeding the pumps (ND 250 ductile iron) are provided with protective suction strainers. A
backwashing pump is also installed, to wash these strainers when they get clogged. The feeding pipe (ND
125 ductile iron) of this pump is also provided with a suction strainer. All valves controlling the opening of
connections are motorized. The pump (which will be 4 + 1 in the 2040 construction phase) feeds HDPE
pipes ND 225, which carry the water to the WTP inlet. In 2030 horizon only 2 of these pipes will be actually
used.
To avoid risk of erosion the River bank and bottom to the side of the intake structure will be protected by
posing boulders of adequate size. A part of the intake works section (inlet and screening) is shown in Figure
0.3.
0.4.5 Water Treatment Plant
The new water treatment plant will be built in an area of approximately 1.5 hectares located in the parish
of Kabingo, in Kebisoni sub-county. The available land for the constructions is hilly. The ground level in the
site considered for the WTP construction, adjacent to the North side to an existing road, varies from about
1480 m to 1457 m, which will allow a gravity flow among the treatment units of the facility.
The WTP consists of:
 Aeration System, Fine Screening Station and Flow Divider

 Clarifying Tanks, Sludge Extraction
 Storage and Dosage of Flocculant
 Filters’ Building
 Disinfection, Contact and Storage Tanks
 High Lift pump station
 Sewage Equalization Tank
 Thickening Tank
 Drying Beds
The WTP layout is depicted in the following Figure.
Page 21
Figure 0.4 – WTP layout
Aeration System, Fine Screening Station and Flow Divider

An aeration system is designed, to increase the removal of pollutants from water by stripping or oxidizing
dissolved metals.
After aeration, water is sent to 4 (only 3 to be installed in the first stage) automatic fine screening (3 mm
spacing) sections, provided with a screw for the transport of the screened material to a 5 m3 container.
After screening, water is distributed evenly to a flow divider, where the dosage of flocculant (aluminium
sulphate) takes place.
The flocculant will be stored in bags and prepared as a solution in the chemical building for flocculant.
Clarifying Tanks, Sludge Extraction and Lifting Station
The flocculation and clarification processes will take place in 6 circular reinforced concrete tanks, each one
dimensioned to receive a discharge 67 m3/h. During the first operation phase, only 2 clarifiers will be
constructed.
The area of flocculation will be equipped with slow mixers, to favour the floc-formation.
The area of clarification will be equipped with scrapers to collect the sludge settled on the bottom. The
sludge will be sent to the thickening tank.
Page 22
Sludge production from the clariflocculation

The sludge production has been calculated as 960 kg/day of TSS in the ultimate horizon. Considering a
settled sludge concentration of 35 kg/m3 (3.5%), the amount of sludge produced by the clariflocculation
results to be about 1 m3/h.
Filters Building and Filter Backwashing Building
The number of gravity filters will be of 8 units, each one with a filtration surface of 9 m2. The hydraulic load
during the normal functioning will be of:
 2.8 m3/m2/h during the 2030 operation phase (with total loading of 200 m3/h)
 3.2 m3/m2/h during the 2030 operation phase, with 1 filter under washing
 5.5 m3/m2/h during the ultimate operation phase (with total loading of 400 m3/h).
 6.3 m3/m2/h during the ultimate operation phase, with 1 filter under washing
The filtering material shall be clean silica sand, acid-washed, having a depth of not less than 70 cm.
Each filter shall be cleaned by an upward wash water flow, in conjunction with agitation by pressurized air.
Disinfection tank
The filtered water shall be disinfected by free available chlorine (FAC) and for this purpose chlorinators
shall be provided to dose the effluent of the filters with chlorine.
The filtered water is sent to the disinfection tank, dimensioned for a flow rate of 380 m3/h and a residence
time of at least 2 hours, with a volume of about 880 cubic meters.
The free available chlorine can be obtained by a disinfectant in powder, granules or salt tablets, which
reacts with water generating brine with high (500 mg/L or higher) free active chlorine concentration,
The dosage is dimensioned in order to obtain a free chlorine concentration of 0.5 mg/L in the filtered
water.
Chemical building (for chlorine preparation and storage)
The brine production system will be located in a building adjacent to the disinfection tank.
The chemicals will also be stored in this building, which will be conditioned to ensure sufficient ventilation
and adequate conditions for the storage (dry and cool atmosphere).
High Lift pump station
The pumps will be horizontal centrifugal split case type. The floor level under the pumps will be lower than
the ground level, and will be placed just below the bottom of the storage tank of the treated water. This
way, the pumps will always work under the head and if necessary it will be possible to empty the tank
completely.
The pump sizing for the main high pressure pumps (conveying water to Mukazi hill MBR) is given in the
following table.
Page 23
Table 0.8 – Main high pressure pumps

PUMPING PHILOSOPHY Units Year 2030 Year 2040
Pumping hours Hrs. 24 24
No. of working pumps in parallel 1 2
No.s standby 1 1
Total discharge required m3/hr 154.58 302.86
Individual pump discharge m3/hr 154.58 151.43
Required actual discharge m3/hr 160 160
Pump head m 306 315
Sewage Equalization Tank

The sewage equalization tank’s function is separating the TSS contained in the wash water, in order to send
this sludge to the sludge treatments, and the clarified water back to the river. The concentration of this
water cannot overcome 50 mg/L.
Sludge treatment
The total sludge production takes into account the sludge coming from the equalization tank, and that from
the clariflocculation tank.
In this unit, the sludge concentration increases up to 50 kg/m3, and its volume is reduced to about 1/3 of
the initial. Eventually, the sludge is further dewatered on drying beds.
0.5 DETAILED DESIGN – WATER SUPPLY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

0.5.1 Raw Water Transmission System
It has been proposed to construct an Intake structure on the Kahengye River at a location near the bridge
on the border between Rukungiri and Ntungamo districts. From the intake, raw water will be pumped to
the proposed conventional WTP having ultimate year capacity 380.95 m3/h. WTP is located around 772 m
from the Intake. Detailed alignment of the proposed Pumping main is shown in the following key map.
Figure 0.5 – Key Map of Rukungiri Raw Water Transmission System
The lowest suction level (LSL) in the Intake is 1397 m and the inlet level of WTP is 1477.70 m which clearly
indicates the static head difference of 80.7 m.
Page 24
Raw water Pumping main has been designed to cater the design flow of year 2040 i.e. 400 m3/hr. Three
pipes of OD 225 mm, HDPE are proposed from intake to WTP.
Following types of valves and appurtenances are provided in the transmission system:
 Air Valves
 Scour Valves/ Washouts
 Sluice Valves
 Non Return Valves
0.5.2 Pure Water Pumping System
Pure Water will be pumped from WTP Pure Water Sump to the Proposed MBR which is situated at the
Mukazi hilltop around 4615 m from the WTP location. Detailed alignment of the proposed Pumping main is
shown in the key map below.
Figure 0.6 – Key Plan of Rukungiri Pure Water Transmission System
Lowest Drawl Level (LDL) of Pure Water Sump is 1459.80 m from which treated water will pumped to the
MBR whose Full Supply Level (FSL) is 1759.00 m which indicates the static head difference for the Pumping
main design is 299.20 m.
Pure water Pumping main has been designed to cater the design flow of year 2040 which is 305 m 3/hr. A
pipe of nominal diameter 350 mm Class 40bars is proposed from WTP pure water sump to MBR.
 Air Valves
 Non Return Valves
Page 25
0.5.3 Pure Water Gravity System

The transmission system is designed in order to cater for the possible future developments and expansions
of the water supply scheme. The strategic location of MBR allows to feed all service reservoirs by gravity
which assures minimum 3 m residual head at the reservoirs inlets and also avoids different pumping mains
to different reservoirs, which ultimately is a cost effective solution. Taking advantage of strategic location
of MBR, an option of gravity system has been worked out economical and the same has been considered
for further analysis. A pure water gravity system consists of following components:
1. Transmission Network of around 32.50 km
2. Service Reservoirs: 6 Numbers
3. Provision of Bulk supply in future to the en-route villages
Detailed alignment of the proposed pipes and the strategic locations of the reservoirs & MBR are shown in
Figure 0.6.
Due to the limited availability of funds, the gravity transmission system will initially comprise only the main
pipeline going from Mukazi MBR to Rukungiri. For the remaining branches, tee junctions will be setup, in
order to allow the future expansion of the system also to the other towns encompassed in the project.
LDL of MBR is 1754.00 m from which water will be supplied by gravity to all the downstream reservoirs.
Capacity of the MBR is worked out considering 2 hrs of storage for the cumulative daily water demand of
the downstream villages. The ESR proposed at Bwoma has maximum LSL of 1727.50 m as compared to the
other proposed reservoirs. Also the ESR proposed at Rwerere has minimum FSL of 1538.75 m as compared
to the other proposed reservoirs. But throughout the alignment, there are many variations in the elevations
and the minimum pipe invert level along the pipe alignment is 1509.00 m which occurs around 20.64 km
from the MBR. This means that the maximum static head difference needs to be considered for the design
purpose is 245.00 m.
Main trunk outlet of MBR has been designed to cater the design flow of year 2040 which is 294.42 m 3/hr.
Details of the proposed MBR are given below.
Table 0.9 – Details of Proposed MBR
Proposed MBR
MBR Name Capacity
Type/construction LDL (m) FSL (m)
(m3)
RU_R1 Mukazi Proposed MBR GSR / RCC 700 1754.00 1759.00
From the proposed transmission line, there will be different branches to each proposed reservoirs and all
are designed for the design flow of year 2040 from that particular branch.
Summary of proposed service reservoirs for each village with their details is given in Table 0.10.
Table 0.10 – Summary of proposed Service reservoirs considered for Transmission System
Water Details of service reservoirs
Water supply zone demand Capacity Status
(m3/d) (m )3
(E/P)
RU_R2 Rwanyakashesha Zone 3328.00 ESR / RCC 1000 P 1715.00 1720.50
RU_R3 Bwoma Zone 977.50 ESR / RCC 300 P 1722.00 1727.50
RU_R4 Kebisoni Zone 522.79 GSR / RCC 150 P 1641.50 1645.00
RU_R5 Buyanja Gravity Zone 589.62 GSR / RCC 150 P 1681.00 1684.50
RU_R6 Buyanja HLR Zone 1065.83 GSR / RCC 300 P 1705.00 1710.00
RU_R7 Rwerere Zone 287.81 ESR / RCC 100 P 1534.25 1538.75
Page 26
Pressure reducing valves are proposed to restrict the residual pressure to prevent excessive pressure at
reservoir inlet.
Salient features of the proposed pure water gravity system are given in Table 0.11.
Table 0.11 – Salient Features of Pure Water Gravity System
Proposed Service Reservoirs
Sr. Buyanja
Description Unit Kebisoni Buyanja Rwerere Rwanyaka_ Bwoma
No. Gravity
GSR HLR ESR shesha ESR ESR
GSR
1 LDL of MBR (m) m 1754.00 1754.00 1754.00 1754.00 1754.00 1754.00
2 FSL of Reservoir m 1645.00 1710.00 1684.50 1538.75 1720.50 1727.50
3 Daily Demand MLD 0.52 1.07 0.59 0.29 3.33 0.10
4 Static Head m 109.00 44.00 69.50 215.25 33.50 26.50
5 Proposed Pipe mm 160 200 140 140 280 250
Diameter
6 Pipe Material -- HDPE-PN16 HDPE-PN16 HDPE-PN16 HDPE-PN20 HDPE-PN16 HDPE-PN16
 Air Valves
 Sluice Valves
 Butterfly Valves
 Pressure Reducing Valves
0.5.4 Distribution System
As per the Terms of Reference, the distribution system is designed for Rukungiri Municipality. The
Municipal area is divided into two water supply zones i.e. Bwoma Zone & Rwanyakashesha Zone. The
formation of zones has been made based on the location, zonal demand, topographic survey data and
natural boundaries.
Key map showing proposed water supply zones is given below.
Page 27
Figure 0.7 – Rukungiri Proposed Water Supply Zones
Considering the small sizes of the existing pipelines, entire new distribution network has been designed for
Rukungiri Municipality. Total length of proposed distribution network is 39.12 km. Due to the limited
availability of funds, neither the so-called “Primary Network” (i.e. the main pipelines of the proposed
network - around 12.5 km - to which the existing secondary distribution network will be connected) nor the
new secondary network (which will replace the existing network) will be laid at First stage.
Following Figure 0.8 gives the overview of proposed distribution network.
Page 28
Figure 0.8 – Rukungiri Distribution Network Map
The details of the water supply zones, such as gross water demand, and service reservoirs are presented in
the following Table.
Table 0.12 – Summary of Water Supply Zones & Reservoirs
Water demand Details of service reservoirs
Water supply zone
(m3/day) Type/construction Capacity (m3) LDL (m) FSL (m)
Bwoma Zone 977.50 ESR / RCC 300 1722.00 1727.50
Rwanyakashesha Zone 3328.00 ESR / RCC 1000 1715.00 1720.50
The uPVC and HDPE pipes have been proposed in the distribution system. Minimum diameter used in the
network analysis is OD 75 mm. The lower diameters of OD 63 mm & OD 50 mm will be used for the smaller
lanes as service lines.
Page 29
 Air Valves
 Sluice Valves
 Pressure Reducing Valves
0.6 DETAILED DESIGN - SANITATION

In Rukungiri, at present, sanitation system can be considered very rudimental and cannot ensure to
population adequate hygienic services. Most of population count on private pit latrines that are not
regularly emptied and properly maintained. No central services are provided for faecal sludge treatment
and proper disposal. Sludge is dumped in an uncontrolled site, as well as municipal solid waste. In such a
situation, main objective in sanitation sector is to ensure population health and provide a system able to
reduce the risk of water contamination, the spread of pathogens and waterborne disease transmission.
Moreover, an environmental friendly choice is advisable, since population growth and the increase of
consumptions suggest that in the next future the anthropogenic pressure on environment will be sensibly
higher than today and an adequate solution is necessary.
Proposed technology has to take into account the relatively low per capita water provision and must be
able to face up water scarcity. Decentralized systems must be considered first and integrated solutions that
take into account the various aspects of the problems and the interactions among sectors are advisable. It
is important to favour options that require low maintenance, low energy and chemicals and few
electromechanical equipments. After an analysis of the sector, it has been found that actions that need to
be taken in order to improve the sanitation system can be summarized in the following list:
 awareness campaign addressing the population (regarding both sanitation and waste management
issues) and improvement of private sanitation facilities (not included in the present project)
through the promotion of EcoSan latrines usage;
 construction of two new waterborne public latrines (at Greenland and Ntungamo stage) and of
shower boxes near two existing latrines (at central car park and market place) and construction of a
faecal sludge treatment plant in Kinyasano valley, namely a co-composting plant where also organic
solid waste is treated (detailed design included in the present project);
 construction of a central sewerage system and of WW treatment lagoons, if viable, after 2040
(general layout included in the present project).
The new waterborne public latrines will have six stances each. Four stances will be in the female section
(including one for disabled) and two stances will be in the male section (including one for disabled). In the
male section a urinal will be present, too. In both sections there will be a shower. Collected wastewater will
pass through a septic tank (external dimensions H x W x L = 2.70m x 2.80m x 4.30m for an internal volume
of 16.50 m3) before being discharged in a gravel bed for further treatment through filtration. A unique
square gravel bed with depth 2.00 m and side 10.00 m located near Ntungamo place will receive effluent
from both septic tanks. Moreover, two gravel beds with triangular surface (half surface area compared to
square bed) will receive effluents from existing septic tanks whose effluent will be increased by showers
addition and needs to be carried away from the residential central area.
The co-composting plant will be placed in Kinyasano valley, according to Client’s indications. Population
served by the central co-composting plant is 100% of population in the main residential area of TC, 90% of
Page 30
scattered population inside TC and 60% of population of municipality not included in TC for a total of
44,512 inhabitants. Remaining population is supposed to rely on on-site disposal systems.
Sludges coming from private latrines will be composted for a period of 90 days together with organic
fraction of municipal solid waste that need to be collected separately. Sludges and waste will be received
and mixed in the plant and windrows will be formed with mixed material. During composting period the
aerobic exothermic reactions will ensure high temperatures inside the core of the windrows that sterilize
the compost and make it safe to be handle and used in agriculture. In order to enhance aeration and to
ensure that all the compost will reach high temperatures, windrows must be turned periodically by
operators. Septage will be pre-treated in drying beds for at least 14 days to dewater it before being mixed
with other spadable sludges. Effluent from drying beds will be treated in a pond. A covered storage area for
finished compost will be present. Most of the co-composting plant area will be dedicated to compost
windrows.
To summarize, in the co-composting plant the main units are:
 receiving and mixing area (about 800 m2);
 drying beds (about 290 m2);
 treatment pond (about 110 m2);
 compost windrows (about 10,400 m2);
 storage area (about 230 m2).
Land requirements for banks, passage zones and vegetation buffers must be taken into account, for a total
plant surface of about 1.32 ha.
Due to the limited availability of funds, only 2 waterborne public latrines shall be constructed in the first
stage, whereas the shower boxes and the co-composting plant will have to be constructed at a later stage.
Even if at present it is not viable to build a central sewerage system, this scenario could become likely in a
long term perspective. Thus, a general layout of a central sewerage system and of wastewater treatment
lagoons has been developed for the TC where population is expected to have a high density, taking 2060 as
reference year. The TC will be divided into three subbasins, that will function as independent systems, each
one with its sewerage network carrying wastewater to a ponds system for treatment. It will be important to
take advantage of gravity force as far as possible, in order to minimize the use of pumps.
The total extension of sewerage in the TC will be around 40 km and most of the pipes will have nominal
diameter 200 mm and will follow the natural ground slope. The plants for wastewater treatment through
ponds will be placed in Kinyasano, Kashangowa and Nyakibale valleys. The Kinyasano plant is supposed to
serve around 40% of population of TC and will have a total surface (including also land requirements for
banks and passage) of about 6.80 ha, while Kashangowa plant will serve about 35% of population of TC with
a total area of 5.93 ha and Nyakibale plant will serve about 25% of population of TC with a total area of
4.11 ha.
Page 31
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 BACKGROUND
The GOVERNMENT OF UGANDA through the Ministry Of Water and Environment (MWE) entrusted SGI –
Studio Galli Ingegneria SpA (hereinafter referred to as the Consultant) with the implementation of the
Water Management and Development Project (WMDP) for Rukungiri, Katwe–Kabatoro and Koboko town
for water supply infrastructures, sanitation sewerage services, storm water and solid waste management.
The scope of work specifically for Rukungiri water supply and sanitation systems originally included:
 the design review of Rukungiri Municipality water supply system (based on the existing detailed
design carried out by a separate consultant)
 the detailed design of Rukungiri Municipality water supply and sanitation systems
 tender preparation
Following a request made by the Client, a Pre-feasibility study had been undertaken, to evaluate the
possibility of connecting the en route villages into the Water Supply Schemes proposed for Rukungiri
Municipality by M&E consultant.
The technical feasibility of the proposed water supply schemes was checked by means of tailored hydraulic
models. The different options had then been compared in terms of capital and maintenance costs, by
applying parametric costs derived from the BOQs and cost estimates included in the existing studies
elaborated by the MWE:
 the detailed design for Rukungiri WSS
 the feasibility study for Katwe-Kabatoro WSS
After the presentation of the pre-feasibility study held in Kampala on July 2014, the Client accepted to
renegotiate the Terms of References of the original contract - which was meant for the Municipality of
Rukungiri only – and expand the study area to the surrounding towns of Buyanja, Kebisoni, Rwerere,
Nyamunuka and Rwashamaire, in these terms:
 Intake works having enough capacity for covering the demands of all towns (Rukungiri, Buyanja,
Kebisioni, Rwerere, Rwashamaire, Nyamunuka) to facilitate possible future expansion of the system
 Water Treatment Plant designed for its final capacity (Rukungiri, Buyanja, Kebisioni, Rwerere,
Rwashamaire, Nyamunuka) but to be constructed adopting a phased approach
 Total Storage capacity covering the demand of 4 towns i.e. Rukungiri, Buyanja, Kebisioni, &
Rwerere
 Gravity transmission main up to Rukungiri Municipality, with branches up to 3 discharge points
corresponding to the location of the existing tanks of Buyanja, Kebisoni, and Rwerere
 Distribution network to be designed only for Rukungiri Municipality
1.2 PROJECT OBJECTIVE & OUTPUTS

1.2.1 Overall Objective
The overall project objective is to assist the Ministry of Water and Environment (MWE), through the
Directorate of Water Development (DWD), in improving water and sanitation services in Rukungiri, Koboko
and Katwe-Kabatoro towns.
Page 32
1.2.2 Project Outputs

The project will result into immediate and overall outcomes. The expected overall outcomes include:
 Improvement in health standards, through the provision of safe and adequate water for domestic
use and hygiene, reducing the occurrence of water-borne diseases.
 Improvement in socio-economic conditions, through a reduction in walking distances for water
collection, resulting in substantial time and energy savings by households (especially women and
children) and their redirection for other productive or leisure activities.
The immediate outcomes for the project water supply and sanitation services are:
 Increased satisfaction, equity and user support for the water and sanitation services.
 Increased access and usage of water and sanitation services.
1.3 THE CONSULTANCY CONTRACT AND SCOPE OF SERVICES

The Client and the Consultant signed a contract for Consultancy services for design review, feasibility study,
detailed engineering design and construction supervision of the small towns in Lot 2: Rukungiri, Katwe-
Kabatoro and Koboko.
1.3.1 Mobilization and Staff Assignment
Work commenced in March 2014 after the signing of the consultancy contract. The following staff
commenced their activities:
 Team Leader / Water supply & Sanitation Engineer,
 Design Engineer – Water supply systems
 Electrical Engineer / Mechanical engineer
 Assistant engineer
 Water / Natural resources management expert
 Environmental Health specialist
 Surveyor
 Monitoring and evaluation expert
 Sociologist
 Water supply and sanitation modeler
 Hydrological modeler
 Water treatment plant expert
 Solid waste management expert
 Chemical processes expert
 Geologist
 Structural engineer
They visited the towns on different occasions and various field activities were carried out.
1.3.2 Reporting Obligations
The major deliverables under this contract are:
 Inception Report
Page 33
 Feasibility Study Reports

 Detailed Design Reports
 Tender documentation
The results of the Detailed Design for Rukungiri area are presented in this report.
1.4 DETAILED DESIGN REPORT CONTENTS

This Detailed Design General Report contains the following chapters:
Chapter 0 Executive Summary of all the content in the Report.
Chapter 1 Introduction: detailing the project background, objectives, outputs, consultancy contract,
report contents.
Chapter 2 Profile of the project area: detailing the profile of the area where the water supply and
sanitation project is to be implemented.
Chapter 3 Summary of the Feasibility Study Report: detailing the Socio-Economic Household Survey;
existing Water Supply and Sanitation; Projection of population and Water Demand; Water Resources
Assessment; Preliminary Designs of the Water Supply and sanitation systems; conclusions and
recommendations on the proposed interventions in the project area.
Chapter 4 Detailed Design - Intake Works and Water Treatment Plant: detailing the alternative
intake and the water treatment plant.
Chapter 5 Detailed Design - Water supply transmission and distribution systems: detailing the raw
and treated water transmission systems, reservoirs, and distribution system.
Chapter 6 Detailed Design – Sanitation: detailing the proposed sanitation systems.
Chapter 7 Preparation of BOQ and Tender Documents: summarizing the Bill of Quantities for the
water supply and sanitation project.
Every effort during execution of this Detailed Design, where applicable, was made to refer to the MWE
Water Design Manual 2013.
Page 34
2 PROFILE OF THE PROJECT AREA
2.1 LOCATION
The Project area is located in Rukungiri district, in the Western region of Uganda. Rukungiri district is
bordered by Ntungamo district in the East, Kabale in the South, Mitooma in the north and Kanungu in the
West. The District has a total area of 1,524.28 km2, 11% of which comprises tropical high forests, 5.5%
woodland, 2.6% bush land, 21.3% grassland, 52% farmland and 7.6% open water. Rukungiri District
headquarters are situated in Rukungiri Municipal Council.
The Municipality lies on an area of approximately 64.9 km2. Rukungiri is located at Latitude 0° 47’ 21”S and
Longitude 29° 56’ 30” E, 362 km by road from Kampala and 99 km from Mbarara, the largest town in the
Western Region.
The aim of this detailed design is to design a water supply scheme comprising the Municipality of Rukungiri
and the following additional towns, whose water supply systems are currently managed by NWSC:
Figure 2.1 – Overall area considered
The feasibility of a later further expansion of the proposed water supply system to Ntungamo district is also
assessed. More precisely, the study comprised the following towns in Ntungamo district:
Page 35
 Nyamunuka (sub-county of Bwongyera)

 Rwashamaire (sub-county of Nyabihoko)
As of the sanitation system, the Consultant carried out the detailed design of proposed sanitation facilities
for serving the Municipality of Rukungiri.
2.2 CLIMATE AND TOPOGRAPHY

The temperatures are generally cool, ranging from 13°C to 26°C with an average temperature of 19°C. The
coolest month is June and the hottest is February. These temperatures are favourable for arable farming.
Figure 2.2 – Temperature graph of Rukungiri
The mean annual rainfall is 1197 mm. The rainfall pattern is bi-modal with two seasons. Rains are received
in the months of March-May, the lowest and September-December, the highest peak, though recent
climatic observations indicate that the rainfall pattern, distribution and amount are becoming more
unpredictable. The dry season runs June-August and January-February. The difference between the
precipitation in the dryest month and in the wettest one is 115 mm.
Figure 2.3 – Rainfall graph of Rukungiri
Page 36
The project area is characterised by undulating hills, with steep slopes and V-shaped valleys. Rukungiri
Municipality instead, is characterized by undulating hills with flat planes.
2.3 GENERAL GEOLOGY

The geology of the project area is mainly of Pleistocene rift valley sediments type (Rift alluvium).
The soils are generally sandy and clay loams. A dark brown sandy clay loam exists in some areas. The rift
valley sediments and volcanic ashes are the parent rock to these soils.
The whole of Rukungiri District lies within the catchment of Lake Edward basin and all surface water
eventually drains north-westward into Lake Edward.
Another smaller lake lies within the Project area i.e. Lake Nakasanda, in Garubunda parish (Kebisoni sub-
county).
2.4 ENVIRONMENT SETTING

The Municipality has no natural forests but some land is under cultivation. These are public woodlands over
a total area of 26 hectares planted with eucalyptus trees and owned by individuals.
Forest/Savanna mosaic are commonly found in Buyanja, Kebisoni, and Nyakagyeme subcounties.
Due to pressure of population increase, poor methods of farming, soil management and land tenure
system, soils have been affected negatively and degradation is increasing.
2.5 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SOCIAL SET-UP

The local government structures of Uganda are described below.
1. The district
A district is made up of several counties and any municipalities in that area. A district is led by an elected
local council V (LCV) chairman and his executive. There is also an elected LCV council, with representatives
from the sub-counties and technical staff in the district. The council debates budgets, decisions and bylaws.
On the technical side, the district is led by a chief administrative officer, appointed by central government.
The district also has heads of various departments such as education, health, environment and planning,
which are responsible for relevant matters in the whole of the district.
2. The county / Municipality
A county is made up of several sub-counties. Each county is represented in the national parliament in
Kampala by an elected member (an MP). In major towns, the equivalent of a county is a municipality (which
is a set of divisions). LCIII executive committee members of all the sub-counties constitute the local council
IV (LCIV). They then elect an LCIV executive committee from among themselves. These committees have
limited powers, except in municipalities, which they run.
3. The sub-county
A sub-county is made up of a number of parishes. The sub-county is run by the sub-county chief on the technical
side and by an elected local council III (LCIII) chairman and his/her executive committee. The sub-county also has
an LCIII council, a kind of parliament at that level, complete with a speaker and deputy speaker. The council
consists of elected councillors representing the parishes, other government officials involved in health,
development and education, and NGO officials in the sub-county. In towns, a sub-county is called a division.
Page 37
4. The parish
A parish is made up of a number of villages. Each parish has a local council II (LCII) committee, made up of
all the chairman from the village LCIs in the parish. Each LCII will elect, from among themselves, an
executive committee. Today, LCIIs are largely involved in settling land distributes and mobilising the
community for various activities. The parish is largely run by a parish chief – a government employee who
provides technical leadership to the LCII.
5. The village
A village is the lowest political administrative unit. A village usually consists of between 50 and 70
households and may be home to anywhere between 250 and 1,000 people. Each village will be run by a
local council – local council I (LCI) - and is governed by a chairman (LCI chairman) and nine other executive
committee members.
Rukungiri District is composed of two counties (Rujumbura and Rubabo), 1 Municipal Council (Rukungiri
municipality), 3 Municipal Division Councils, 4 Town Boards, 9 Subcounties, 80 Parishes and 827 Villages.
Rujumbura County covers most of the district area as it comprises of 5 subcounties, followed by Rubabo
County, which comprises of 4 subcounties and then Rukungiri Municipality with 3 divisions. The District has
4 town boards namely: Buyanja, Kebisoni, Rwerere and Bikurungu. Administrative units by County are
shown in the following tables. In the first table, the subcounties/divisions involved in the Project area are in
bold.
Table 2.1 - Administrative units by County in whole Rukungiri district
S/N County Subcounty/Division No. of Parishes /Wards No. of Villages /cells
1 Buyanja 9 79
2 Nyakishenyi 9 115
Rubabo
3 Nyarushanje 9 123
4 Kebisoni 8 66
Sub-total 35 383
S/N County Subcounty/Division No. of Parishes /Wards No. of Villages /cells

1 Bwambara 6 63
2 Buhunga 6 77
3 Rujumbura Nyakagyeme 8 82
4 Bugangari 7 79
5 Ruhinda 6 58
Sub-total 33 359
1 Eastern Division 4 33
Rukungiri
2 Western Division 4 26
Municipality
3 Southern Division 4 26
Sub-total 12 85
Grand total 80 827
Page 38
Table 2.2 - Summary of Administrative units in whole Rukungiri district

No. of Subcounties
County No. of Parishes/wards No. villages
/Divisions
Rubabo 4 35 383
Rujumbura 5 33 359
Rukungiri Municipality 3 12 85
Total 12 80 827
Rukungiri Town Council was approved by The Parliament of Uganda as a Municipal Council on 19th May
2010, and gazetted as a Municipality from the 1st of July 2010. The Municipality, which is the
administrative capital of Rukungiri District, is divided into 3 Divisions (Local Council III). These are divided
into 12 Parishes (Local Council II) which contain 84 Villages (Local Council I). The whole of Kagunga Sub-
County and selected villages of the Nyakagyeme Sub-County Parishes of Kigaaga and Kitimba in Rukungiri
district were added to Rukungiri Town Council to form the new Municipality, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 2.4 – Areas included in the new Rukungiri Municipal Council
2.6 COMMUNICATION INFRASTRUCTURES

The project area is connected to the National hydro-electricity power grid which goes along the main
tarmac road coming from Ntungamo town and passing through Kebisoni and Buyanja and eventually
Page 39
reaching Rukungiri Municipality. The power transmission line then continues beyond Rukungiri up to
Rwerere. The Municipality is linked by wireless telephone services provided by MTN, ORANGE, AIRTEL,
WARID and UTL-MANGO. The television reception from the NBC is extremely poor though various other
channels with the booster are quite clear. A number of FM radios are received. The most received network
being Rukungiri FM radio, and many others especially from western Uganda.
2.7 SOCIO ECONOMIC CONDITIONS

2.7.1 Population
The main characteristics of the population in the project area are reported in the table below. The data
refer to the UBOS Population and Housing Census 2002.
It is worth noticing that for Rukungiri the UBOS projection was made on the basis of the administrative
structure of the old Town Council which only had 12,765 inhabitants (6,217 male and 6,548 female) and
2,921 households. Basing on the new structure of the Municipality the UBOS 2002 population is 34,758
with 7,305 households, instead.
Table 2.3 – Population characteristics in the Project area
Administrative division 2002 Population Households Male Female
Rukungiri Municipality 34,578 7,305 16,796 17,782
Kakinga - Subcounty of Kebisoni 4,926 921 2,379 2,547
Kigiro - Subcounty of Kebisoni 2,626 493 1,231 1,395
Nyakaina - Subcounty of Buyanja 5,102 958 2,498 2,604
Bugyera - Subcounty of Buyanja 3,211 577 1,614 1,597
Nyabiteete - Subcounty of Buyanja 3,130 612 1,520 1,610
Kyamakanda - Subcounty of Buyanja 5,589 1,016 2,749 2,840
Rwerere - Subcounty of Nyakagyeme 3,538 731 1,739 1,799
Kigaaga - Subcounty of Nyakagyeme 3,912 774 1,910 2,002
Figure 2.5 – 2010 Population density (persons/km 2) by sub-county in Rukungiri district
2.7.2 Commercial and Industrial Base

The main commercial and industrial activities are concentrated in the Municipality. Commercial activities
include peasantry farming, with limited livestock rearing of cattle and goats of local breed, service industry
(restaurants, bars and lodges), and petty trade. Small scale industries are involved in agro-processing of
Page 40
grain and coffee. Other small scale industries are engaged in metal fabrication, wood works and carpentry,
milk cooling plants, tailoring, motor garages, bakery and soap industry. The most grown crops are potatoes,
bananas, beans, and coffee. Other activities include brick making, small scale trading in produce and
merchandise (wholesale and retail shops), cattle market, abattoir, and butcheries.
2.7.3 Institutions
There are a number of institutions in the Municipality and these are given in Table 2.4 below.
Table 2.4 - Institutions in the Municipality
Institution Remarks
Pre-primary Schools Total 10 no.
Primary Schools Total 20 no.
Secondary Schools Total 5 no.
Government-owned Health Units Total 6 no.
NGO-owned Health Units Total 1 no.
Health Centres Total 12 no.
Other institutions in the Municipality include the Post Office, 5 Police Stations, 1 Prison, the District Head
Quarters, the Municipal Council Head Quarters, and 30 worship places (Churches and Mosques).
Page 41
3 SUMMARY OF THE FEASIBILITY STUDY REPORT
3.1 THE SOCIO-ECONOMIC HOUSEHOLD SURVEY

A socio-economic household survey involving household/business population questionnaire, key informant
interviews with Municipality Staff and heads of institutions, and Focus group discussions, was carried out in
September 2014.
The administration of household/business population questionnaire comprises the basic approach to
soliciting information. This was done based on sampling of households and business persons.
The samples obtained using simple random sampling (SRS) were proportionally weighted to the household
population of each cluster, drawing a 4% sample from each cell; a sample size of 141 households was
obtained.
Two thirds were males and majority (80%) were household heads. 52% of the households had a household
head with only a primary education while 23% had at least a Post secondary education. The average size of
the households is 5. The household members were about evenly distributed by age. 72% of the households
are located in residential areas and 11% in informal areas. About two thirds of the households own the
building in which they live whereas 33% households rent. 68% of the households live in permanent
buildings. 17% households reported a monthly income of less than UGX.120,000, 36% earn between
UGX.120,000 and UGX.350,000, and 19% earn above UGX.600,000.
Data about access, behavioral/cultural dynamics, attitude and challenges regarding water in Rukungiri are
reported in the following table.
Table 3.1 - Access, behavioral/cultural dynamics, attitude and challenges regarding water , sanitation and health in
Rukungiri
Variable n(%)
Main Sources of water (multiple response)
Piped water 13(9.2)
Protected spring 122(86.5)
Rain water harvesting 33(23.4)
Unprotected spring 7(5.0)
Water vendor 6(4.3)
Others 7(5.0)
Reason for preference of current water source
Short distance 41(29.1)
Free water 18(12.8)
Clean water 15(10.6)
No other choice 66(46.9)
Tastes better 1(0.7)
How serious is the problem of water supply
Very serious 111(78.7)
Somewhat serious 19(13.5)
Not serious 11(7.8)
How serious is the problem of unsafe water
Very serious 100(70.9)
Page 42
Variable n(%)
Somewhat serious 19(13.5)
Not serious 22(15.6)
Your opinion on the water supply services that you are receiving
Very satisfied 4(2.8)
Reasonably satisfied 42(29.8)
Not satisfied at all 93(66.0)
Don’t know 2(1.4)
Do you in the household collect water
Yes 127(90.1)
No 14(9.9)
Distance to water source where you collect water (if you collect water) n=127
< 0.2 km 33(26.0)
0.2km -0.5km 47(37.0)
>0.5km- 1km 40(31.5)
>1km-2km 7(5.5)
Who is mainly involved in collecting water(if you collect water) n=127
Adult Female 49(38.8)
Girl child 24(18.9)
Adult male 40(31.5)
Boy child 14(11.0)
Trips made to collect water (if you collect water) n=127
1 to 3 79(62.2)
>3 to 5 36(28.4)
>5 12(9.4)
Time taken to reach source of drinking water (if you collect water) n=127
< 1 hour 85(66.9)
≥1 hour 42(33.1)
How do you make your water safe for drinking
Boiling 139(98.6)
Water guard 1(0.7)
Filtering 1(0.7)
Priority attached to water amongst items a household must have
High 95(67.1)
Not high 46(32.6)
All households reported that they are both willing to be one of the new customers if a new water supply
system is built and that they are able to pay for the improved water services.
Data about water utilization and willingness to pay (wtp) of households are reported in the following table.
Page 43
Table 3.2 - Water Utilization and Willingness to Pay (wtp) for the new water system
Variable n(%)
How many 20 liter jerry cans of water do you use per day ,median(IQR) 4(3-6)
Do you buy water
Yes 61(43.3)
No 80(56.7)
What is the cost(in UGX) you are currently paying for a 20L jerry can ,mean(SD) 346(186)
If a new water system is built in your town, are you willing to be one of the customers
Yes 141(100.0)
No -
If a new water system is built in your town, are you able to pay for the improved water services
Yes 141(100.0)
No -
Which of the four service levels would you opt for
House connection 64(45.4)
Yard tap 62(44.0)
Public standpipe 13(9.2)
None of the above 2(1.4)
Maximum price(UGX) you are wtp for each jerry can obtained from a safe water supply 156(115)
system, mean(SD)
Using interval regression, the average price households are wtp for a connection to the new water supply
system was estimated by applying a model. The result of our model estimation showed that the average
monthly price households are wtp for a connection to the new water supply system irrespective of the type
of service level is UGX.35,583. Knowing that the average household size is 5, this corresponds to 168
UGX/c/d. Being the proposed average tariff 2022 UGX/m3 (for domestic users), this corresponds to a LPCD
of 83 L/c/d, which means the households will be able to afford the new tariffs.
Data about water utilization, demand, attitude and wtp at institutional communities and large water users
in Katwe-Kabatoro are reported in the following table.
Table 3.3 - Water utilization, demand, attitude and wtp amongst institutional communities and large water users in
Rukungiri
Prisons &
Health Centers, Hotels and
Schools Worship places Police
Restaurants
[only figures
n (%) n (%) [results are
given] n (%)
listed]
No. sampled 1 Prison & 3
50 8 21 19
police posts
Average daily
Mean(SD): Mean(SD): Mean(SD):
Population size per 42(53) 456 ; 1;2;106
348(479) 807(663) 257(319)
institution
Main Sources of water
Piped water
16(32.0) 1 6(28.6) 13(68.4) 3
supply
Bore hole 7(14.0) 1 1(4.8) - 1
Protected spring 19(38.0) 2 12(57.1) 3(15.8) -
Page 44
Prisons &
Restaurants
[only figures
given] n (%)
listed]
Rain water
1(2.0) 2 - 1(5.3) -
harvesting
Others 7(14.0) 2 2(9.5) 2(10.5) -
Reason for preference of current water source-
Short distance 6(12.0) 1(9.5) 2(10.5) -
Free water 2(4.0) - 2(10.5) -
Clean water 2(4.0) 2 5(23.8) 5(26.3) 1
No other option 36(72.0) 6 13(61.9) 8(42.1) 3
Others 4(8.0) 1(4.8) 2(10.5) -
Are you satisfied with the current water sources
Yes 6(12.0) 3 - 5(26.3) 1
No 44(88.0) 5 21(100.0) 14(73.7) 3
How many jerry cans do you use per day
1-4 3(6.0) 4 2(9.5) 1(5.3) 2
5-10 6(12.0) 1 11(52.4) 1(5.3) -
11-20 9(18.0) - 2(9.5) 4(21.1) -
21-30 5(10.0) - 2(9.5) 1(5.3) -
>30 25(50.0) 3 3(14.3) 12(63.2) 2
Non Response 2(4.0) - - - -
How much(UGX)
4 aren’t paying;
are you currently to Median(IQR): Median(IQR): Median(IQR): Non response;
other 4 paying:
paying per 20L jerry 217(238) 0(0-500) 500(500-600) 300;0;500
200;500;600
can
Do you make your water safe for drinking
Yes 48(96.0) Yes=6 ;non 18(85.7) 19(100.0) 3
No 2(4.0) response =2 3(14.3) - 1
If a new water system is built in your town, is your institution willing to be one of the customers
Yes 50(100.0) 7 21(100.0) 16(84.2) 4
No - 1 - 3(15.8) -
If a new water system is built in your town, are you able to pay for the improved water services
Yes 50(100.0) 7 21(100.0) 16(84.2) 4
No - - - - -
Don’t know
- 1 - 3(15.8) -
/non response
Which of the four service levels would you opt for
House
38(76.0) 7 12(57.1) 16(84.2) 2
connection
Yard tap 11(22.0) 9(42.9) - 2
Public standpipe 1(2.0) - -
Non pipe supply - - -
Page 45
Prisons &
Restaurants
[only figures
given] n (%)
listed]
None/ none
- 3(15.8) -
response
Highest price you
Median(IQR): Median(IQR): Median(IQR): Median(IQR): 30;45;50; Non
are willing to pay
100(50-100) 50(50-85) 50(50-100) 100(50-200) response
for a 20L jerry can
Type of sanitation facility do you use for fecal disposal
Ventilated pit
latrine/flush
24(48.0) 5 6(28.6) 17(89.5) 2
toilets/ Ecosan
toilet
Traditional Pit 26(52.0) 3 15(71.4) 3(10.5) 2
None -
*the population size of worship centers is not the daily population but the population size on their main respective day of worship
e.g. Christians it’s a Sunday, Muslims it’s a Friday.
53% of the households reported they don’t regularly practice hand washing.
16% households reported that they had had a member falling sick within the last two days from the date of
the interview.
Data about access to sanitation amongst households in Rukungiri are reported in the following table.
Table 3.4 - Access to sanitation amongst households in Rukungiri
Variable n(%)
What Type of sanitation facility do you use for fecal disposal
Flush toilets 3(2.1)
Ventilated Improved pit latrine 23(16.3)
Ecosan toilets 4(2.8)
Traditional pit latrine/logs 111(78.7)
Do you own the above sanitation facility
Yes 87(61.7)
No 54(38.3)
Do you plan to improve your sanitation facility in the next one year
Yes 108(76.7)
satisfied 33(23.4)
Does your household regularly practice hand washing
Yes 67(47.5)
no 74(52.5)
Have you had any member of your household who has fallen sick within the last 2 days
Yes 23(16.3)
no 118(83.7)
Have you had any member of your household who has had diarrhea within the last 2 days
Yes 2(1.4)
No 138(98.6)
The most common method of solid waste disposal is dumping at a designated point and collection by the
Municipal Council trucks. However, some households report collection and burning at household level.
Page 46
Most waste water finds its way into the Municipal drainage system. In many cases, this comprises of waste
water arising from washing of domestic utensils which finds its way into the valleys and wetlands around
Rukungiri Municipal Council.
3.2 EXISTING WATER SUPPLY

3.2.1 Areas in Rukungiri district
The water supply system in Rukungiri, Buyanja, Kebisoni and Rwerere had been managed by WSS Services
as the Private Operator (supervised by Rukungiri Town Water Authority and Board) until 1 March 2014,
when the management was taken over by the National Water and Sewerage Corporation (NWSC). The
existing water supply systems in the 4 towns are summarized below.
Table 3.5 – Characteristics of Water Supply schemes managed by NWSC in Rukungiri district
Town Rukungiri Kebisoni Buyanja Rwerere

Water source 4 boreholes 1 Spring 1 Borehole / 1 Borehole
(3 active) 1 Spring
Type of scheme Through submersible Gravity flow from the Through submersible Through submersible
pumps to SRs and spring to a SR and pumps to SRs / pumps to SR and from
from SRs to from the SR to Gravity flow from the SR to distribution
distribution network distribution network spring to a SR network
and from the SRs to
distribution network
Rukungiri Municipality has got an existing piped water supply that was constructed in the year 1999/2000.
The water is abstracted from 2 main boreholes fitted with submersible pumps. No treatment nor
disinfection is carried out.
The first borehole pumps water to the first 150 m3 elevated storage tank located at Bwoma hill through a
1300 m-long 2” HDPE pipeline. The tank takes about 3 days to fill.
The second borehole pumps water to the second 150 m3 elevated storage tank located at Rwanyakashesha
hill through a 400 m-long 3” PVC pipeline. The tank takes about 24 hours to fill.
Within the Town Council there is also a third borehole supplying water to 2 schools and the town hospital,
and a fourth borehole which is no longer in operation.
The 2 storage tanks release water into a distribution network mainly made of 2” HDPE pipes covering the
core area of the town, which was constructed in the year 1999/2000 under the Small Towns Water and
Sanitation Project, Phase IIB- IDA funded. The summary of the distribution system at the time of its
commissioning was as follows:
 From Rwanyakashesha Reservoir - 13.12 km of OD 40 HDPE to OD 110 uPVC pipework
 From Bwoma Reservoir - 21.0 km of OD 40 HDPE to OD 90 HDPE pipework
 From Nyakibale Hospital Reservoir - 1.0 km of OD 63 HDPE pipework
 From Immaculate Heart SSS Reservoir - 0.7 km of OD 63 HDPE pipework.
Due to the scarce yield of the boreholes the storage tanks fill at a very slow rate, and the water supply is
intermittent. Normally each area receives water only 1 day per week, and sometimes during the dry season
even at a lower frequency.
Apart from Rukungiri Municipality, NWRC is also in charge of managing the water supply systems in 3
surrounding areas within Rukungiri district, namely Kebisoni, Buyanja, and Rwerere.
Page 47
Kebisoni has a gravity-based scheme, Buyanja has 2 separate water supply schemes (1 having a borehole as
raw water source and 1 smaller gravity-based scheme receiving water from a spring), Rwerere has 1
borehole and 1 elevated tank. All the distribution networks in these areas are entirely made of HDPE pipes,
ranging from ¾” to 3” in size.
The characteristics of each system are summarized in the following Table.
Table 3.6 – Characteristics of Water Supply schemes in surrounding villages of Rukungiri district
Town Kebisoni Buyanja Rwerere

Water source Spring Borehole / Spring Borehole
Type of scheme Gravity flow from the spring Through submersible pumps Through submersible pumps
to a SR and from the SR to to SRs / Gravity flow from the to SR and from SR to
distribution network spring to a SR distribution network
and from the SRs to
distribution network
Storage 60 m3 RCC GSR 2 x 80 m3 RCC GSR (HLR and 1 x 40 m3 elevated steel tank
LLR) / 30 m3 RCC GSR (Gravity
Scheme)
In all 4 areas taken into account in Rukungiri district, all consumer connections are metered and the
customers are charged proportionally to the registered consumption.
Different tariffs are applied to different categories of consumers, as shown below.
Table 3.7 – Water tariffs applied by NWSC in Rukungiri district
CATEGORY RATE (UGX/m3) – incl. VAT

Public stand posts 1323
Domestic 2046
Institutions / Schools / Govt. 2518
 First 1500 m3/month 3089
 Over 1500 m3/month 2468
In addition to the rates in the above table, a service fee is charged to the consumer connection depending
on the category and the size, as per the following table.
Table 3.8 – Service fees for water supply connections applied by NWSC in Rukungiri district
CATEGORY SIZE OF CONNECTION FEE (UGX/m3)

Public stand posts - 2000
Domestic 15 mm 1500
20 mm 2000
25 mm 5000
Yard tap 2000
Institutions / Schools / Govt. 15 mm 2000
20 mm 3000
25 mm 5000
50 mm 8000
75 mm 10000
100 mm 15000
150 mm 20000
Page 48
CATEGORY SIZE OF CONNECTION FEE (UGX/m3)

Commercial / Industrial 15 mm 2000
20 mm 5000
25 mm 7500
50 mm 10000
75 mm 15000
100 mm 20000
150 mm 30000
From the available records (up to April 2014) the characteristics of the system are the following:
 The average amount of water produced per month is 10,297m3.
 The average amount of water sold per month is 8,762m3.
 The unaccounted for water (UfW) is 14.9%.
 The total number of connections is 1,358 no. of which 38 are public stand posts, 1,123 are
domestic, 8 are institutional, and 189 are Commercial / Industrial connections.
3.2.2 Areas in Ntungamo district
As per the information received from Ntungamo district water officer, the water supply system of
Rwashamaire is currently managed by the Water Board and it employs 1 care taker only. The water is
pumped from springs, one of which is equipped with solar panels for power supply. The amount of water
supplied is reported to be insufficient to satisfy the town’s demand, and no treatment is carried out,
though the water quality is good. In Nyamunuka town no efficiently functioning water supply system is
present. For these reasons, a future expansion of the system to cover also the towns of Rwashamaire and
Nyamunuka would be welcome.
3.2.3 Water Production and Supply Challenges
Almost the entire project area is suffering from water shortage. This problem is particularly evident in the
municipality of Rukungiri in which, due to the urbanization and population growth, the water demand has
dramatically increased and concentrated in the last years.
The existing boreholes water supply has had a number of problems associated with the hydrogeological
characteristics of the area. Water levels have continuously dropped and this has drastically affected the
production of water for municipal consumption. The water supply is intermittent.
Also the surrounding villages are facing many challenges with respect to the water production and supply
(see following table).
Table 3.9 – Main water supply challenges in the surrounding villages of Rukungiri district
Town Kebisoni Buyanja Rwerere

Water source Spring Borehole / Spring Borehole
Remarks Quantity of water is not Problems due to iron content Quantity of borehole water is
sufficient as the spring dries in the raw water (not due to sufficient but distribution
up during the dry season. the pipes) are reported. network made of 1” pipes is
Maintenance work needed People are reluctant to use becoming too small due to
every year at the source due this water even for washing growing water demand.
to tree roots growing inside clothes.
the spring.
Page 49
There are 1358 total connections in the 4 towns, as of July 2014. NWSC is finding it difficult to increase this
number, as most of the new developing areas of the town cannot receive water from the piped network at
present.
The system capacity is outstripped and hence it requires a new reliable and adequate surface water source.
3.3 EXISTING SANITATION

Rukungiri town does not have a sewerage system. The town population is served by pit latrines and septic
tanks. Septic tanks serve mainly the high income population and the hotel. There are five public sanitation
facilities:
 two flush toilets connected with septic tanks in the market and the park areas;
 three VIP latrines in the slum area.
Socio-economic survey results indicate that 79% of the households that have toilets use pit latrines, 16%
have Ventilated Improved Pit latrines, 3% have EcoSan toilets, and 2% have flush toilets. 62% of the
households own the sanitation facility while 38% use shared latrines. 77% of the population declares they
are planning to improve the quality of their current sanitation facility within next year.
The town has no faecal sludge treatment plant. Sludge exhausted from filled up pit latrines and septic tanks
is deposited in an area designated by town council at 2 km from the town centre. People needing the
emptying service contact owners of cesspool emptying vehicles who empty pit latrines and septic tanks at a
fee.
3.4 WATER DEMAND ASSESSMENT

Population projections are made for the “Initial Year” 2015, the “Future Year” 2030, and the “Ultimate
Year” 2040.
Population growth rate applied for Rukungiri district is 1.5%, and for Ntungamo district is 1.9%1, according
to the calculated trends.
Four services levels have been considered:
1 Uganda Bureau of Statistics (2002). The 2002 Uganda Population and Housing Census, Report, October 2006, Kampala, Uganda.
Page 50

service, the Ability to Pay of the households, and the proposed tariff level, and in the project area it equals
45.88 L/c/d.
The non-domestic consumption covers the institutional, commercial and industrial demand. For these,
rates have been adopted from the design manual, rates used in other similar schemes designed recently,
and in some cases modified to suit the site conditions.
domestic demand.
Average Day Demand
Adopted Rates
Institutional
Schools L/c/d 10
Markets L/d 2,000
Hotels
Restaurants L/d 200
Non-Domestic Net LPCD of 7.41 L/c/d.
Rukungiri Municipality.
water demand are:
These total Net LPCD have been used as reference for estimating the net demand in the sub-counties of
Buyanja, Kebisoni, Nyakagyeme, Bwongyera and Nyabihoko.
Page 51
The net water demand has been calculated by multiplying the population by the Net LPCD.
The maximum gross water demand has been calculated by applying the following assumptions:
 UFW = 10%
 WTP losses = 5%
% Popn Population Served Net Gross Water Demand (m3/d)

Municipality / Subcounty Served 2015 2030 2040 LPCD 2015 2030 2040
Rukungiri Municipality 100% 42,181 52,736 61,202 53.29 3,116 3,895 4,521
Kebisoni subcounty 67% 16,798 21,001 24,373 32.15 749 936 1,086
Buyanja subcounty 95% 24,696 30,875 35,832 35 1,198 1,498 1,738
Nyakagyeme subcounty 100% 5,108 6,386 7,411 32.61 231 289 335
Total Rukungiri district population 90% 88,782 110,998 128,818 43.02 5,293 6,618 7,680
Total Ntugamo district population 100% 21,363 28,331 34,199 35 1,036 1,374 1,659
TOTAL 92% 110,145 139,330 163,017 41.33 6,329 7,992 9,339
3.5 WATER RESOURCES ASSESSMENT

3.5.1 Quantity
The boreholes surrounding Rukungiri have an average yield of 3.8 m3/h. As the 2040 projected water
demand for Rukungiri Municipality is equal to 188.33 m3/h, it means that 50 boreholes would be required.
Therefore groundwater is deemed to be insufficient as source for a piped water system.
The feasibility of using surface water was checked considering the following options:
 Yawambi river,
 Mitano river,
 Kahengye river,
 Birira river.
In a recent study carried out by M&E Associates Consulting Engineers Ltd, the option of river Kahengye was
found to have the best financial indicators, therefore this river is selected as raw water source for the
project.
The possible raw water source for the project is checked considering 2 parameters:
 D7Q95 (7-day average daily flow that is exceeded 95% of the time)
 T25 (25 years return period low flow)
The amount of raw water is deemed sufficient throughout the year and throughout the project time if the
ratio between the above-mentioned parameters and the Ultimate year water demand is greater than 2.
There are several ways to assess the Minimum Environmental Flow of a river, which are the result of a
specific study and hence they vary from case to case. From the analysis of recent water supply projects
carried out in Uganda, it is found that generally the MEF ranges from 10% to 30% of the D7Q95.
Page 52
The D7Q95 flow at the possible abstraction points on River Kahengye in Rubumba LC I at the bridge on
Rukungiri-Ntungamo districts’ boundary is 85,732 m3/d. By 2040, if the total gross water demand is
considered, the ratio between the D7Q95 flow and the total abstraction for the water supply scheme would
be 9.18, which is acceptable.
Even considering the 25 years return period low flow (20,301 m3/d), the ratio would still be positive and
equal to 2.17, which is also acceptable.
If MEF is taken as 12% of the D7Q95 (10,288 m3/d) or lower, the amount of water left in the river is always
expected to be sufficient to sustain the life of instream fauna throughout the project time.
Table 3.12 – Assessment of Kahengye river as raw water source
Horizon 2040
3
D7Q95 = 85,732 m /d Rukungiri district +
Rukungiri municipality Rukungiri district
T25Q = 20,301 m3/d Ntungamo district
Population 61,202 128,818 163,017
Max daily gross demand 4,520 7,680 9,339
D7Q95 / Demand 18.97 11.16 9.18
T25 low flow / Demand 4.49 2.64 2.17
Figure 3.1 –River Kahengye near the bridge on Rukungiri - Ntungamo districts’ border
3.5.2 Quality
Sampling of Kahengye river water was done at a time when the water is expected to be of bad quality
(rainy season) and analysed at the National Water and Sewerage Corporation Central Laboratory in
Bugolobi (Kampala). The results are reported in the following Table.
Table 3.13 – Water quality test results for Kahengye river
National Standards for Potable

Parameter Units River Kahengye
Water (Class I)
Turbidity NTU 74 5.0

Total Dissolved Solids mg/l 53.5 500
Total Suspended Solids mg/l 64 0.0
Fluoride: F- mg/l 0.0 1.0
Iron: total mg/l 2.3 <0.20
Source: NWSC Laboratory, Bugolobi
Page 53
3.6 PRELIMINARY DESIGN - WATER SUPPLY

3.6.1 Evaluation of Surface Water Supply Options
Three scenarios have been evaluated.
3.6.1.1 Scenario 1
Scenario 1 has the following characteristics:
 Ultimate target population = 61,202
 intake on Kahengye river at a location near the bridge on the border between Rukungiri and
Ntungamo districts
 0.8 km-long 300 mm (or a number of parallel pipes with same equivalent diameter) raw water
pumping transmission main
 WTP in the parish of Kabingo, in Kebisoni sub-county, having ultimate year capacity 4,520 m3/d
 21.4 km-long 300 mm DI pure water pumping transmission main
 New storage reservoir at Rukungiri (1 no. of 1300 m3 capacity)
 New distribution system (39 km total) for Rukungiri municipality
3.6.1.2 Scenario 2
Ntungamo districts (location slightly changed with respect to Scenario 1)
pumping transmission main
 4.5 km-long 300 mm DI pure water rising transmission main
 400 m3 MBR at Mukazi hill top
 Gravity transmission system from the MBR to each of the proposed Storage Reservoirs
 New storage reservoirs at Rukungiri (2 no. of 1000 m3 and 300 m3 capacity, respectively)
3.6.1.3 Scenario 3
Ntungamo districts (location slightly changed with respect to Scenario 1)
rising transmission main
Page 54
 Gravity transmission system from the MBR to each of the proposed Storage Reservoirs
 New storage reservoirs at Rukungiri (2 no. of 1000 m3 and 300 m3 capacity, respectively), Kebisoni
(1 no. of 150 m3 capacity), Buyanja (2 no. of 300 m3 and 150 m3 capacity, respectively), and
Rwerere (1 no. of 100 m3 capacity)
3.6.2 Cost estimate comparison
Scenario 1 and 2 cover the same area (Rukungiri municipality) but with a different water supply scheme,
whereas scenario 3 covers a wider area and hence and larger population target. It is worth noticing that
scenario 2 (gravity transmission) is cheaper than scenario 1 (pumping transmission) in terms of total capital
cost.
The regional scheme (Scenario 3) has lower Per-Capita investment cost, lower Per-Capita re-investment
cost, therefore it shall be preferred.
Following a request of the Client, a slight change in the design was applied to Scenario 3 in order to include
the possible future expansion of the system to the towns of Nyamunuka and Rwashamaire in Ntungamo
district, in these terms:
 Design intake works having enough capacity for covering the demands of all towns (Rukungiri,
Buyanja, Kebisioni, Rwerere, Rwashamaire, Nyamunuka) to facilitate possible future expansion of
the system
 Design Water Treatment Plant for its final capacity (Rukungiri, Buyanja, Kebisioni, Rwerere,
Rwashamaire, Nyamunuka) but to be constructed adopting a phased approach
These amendments are not going to change the project cost substantially.
3.6.3 Financial Analysis
The financial analysis is developed for the selected scenario i.e. Scenario 3 – amended.
Table 3.14 –Financial indicators for selected Scenario
SCENARIO 3 - amended
FINANCIAL INDICATORS
NPV (million UGX) 12,386
IRR 1.58%
The financial analysis showed that the Project is economically viable as both the NPV and the IRR are
positive and equal to 12,386 million UGX and 1.58% respectively.
3.6.4 Water Supply System components
Intake works
The intake works is sized to supply sufficient raw water for the Ultimate Year of the project, which equals
9,339 m3/d. The selected raw water source is river Kahengye. The new intake facility will be located at
Rubumba LC1, near the bridge on the border between Rukungiri and Ntungamo districts, either in the
Eucalyptus plantation or in the agricultural land of mainly potatoes. In the latter case (0.829660° S;
Page 55
30.050655° E) there will be very little damage to trees or crops as only about 30 m by 30 m of land will be
needed. Then the untreated (raw) water will have to be pumped to the WTP.
Raw water pumping main
Either a single 350 mm pipeline or a number of parallel pipes with same equivalent diameter are required
to convey the raw water from the intake pump house to the Water Treatment Plant. The pumping main is
sized for a maximum flow of 389 m3/h.
Water treatment plant
The proposed area for the WTP is in the parish of Kabingo, in Kebisoni sub-county, about 700 m far from
the proposed intake works on river Kahengye.
Figure 3.2 – Proposed location for new WTP at Kabingo
An alternative location for the WTP was also studied i.e. locating the WTP next to the intake facility.
In both cases, the water is to be pumped to a master balancing reservoir to supply Rukungiri, Buyanja,
Kebisoni, Rwerere and en route villages.
The Water Treatment Plant is designed for its final capacity (i.e. to satisfy the total demand of Rukungiri,
Buyanja, Kebisioni, Rwerere, Rwashamaire, and Nyamunuka) but adopting a phased approach.
The WTP shall be initially constructed with the objective of satisfying the demand of the Future year 2030
in the project area included in Rukungiri district i.e. 71% of its final capacity. Therefore the WTP is designed
with 6 clariflocculation basins and 8 filters: 4 clariflocculation basins and 6 filters to be constructed
immediately, whereas the fifth and sixth clariflocculation basins and the seventh and eighth filters will be
completed at a later stage.
The analysis of the water demand for the different stages of the Project is shown in the following Table.
Table 3.15 – Analysis of the water demand for the different stages of the Project
RIVER KAHENGYE Unit 2015 2030 2040
Total population Rukungiri district 88,782 110,998 128,818
Daily peak demand m3/d 5,041 6,302 7,314
Demand/2040 total Demand % 57% 71% 82%
Population Ntungamo district 21,363 28,331 34,199
Daily peak demand m3/d 987 1,309 1,580
Total population 110,145 139,330 163,017
Total Daily peak demand m3/d 6,028 7,611 8,894
Page 56
As for raw water characteristics, to respect the water quality required by the Uganda Drinking Water
Standard, WTP will include the following components: intake works, aeration, fine screening, flocculation,
clarification, filtration, disinfection, contact and storage tank.
Figure 3.3 –WTP schematic layout
Pure water transmission system

The Pure Water Transmission system consists of 2 stages.
 Stage 1 - pumping system from the Pure water sump of the WTP to the MBR;
 Stage 2 - gravity system from the MBR to all the Villages & Towns considered under the Rukungiri
Water supply scheme.
The MBR (Master Balancing Reservoir) is planned to be located on Mukazi hill (LC I) in the parish of
Karuhembe, subcounty of Kebisoni. The MBR capacity is 700 m3, to provide proper functioning of the
downstream gravity system.
The selection of pipe diameters has been made to ensure the minimum residual head of 3 m at the FSL of
all the storage reservoirs.
Page 57
The total length of the proposed transmission system is 37,371 m (4,505 m for Stage 1, and 32,866 m for
Stage 2). Proposed pipe sizes will range between 140 and 450 mm. Pipes of Stage 1 will be made of Ductile
Iron, whereas pipes of stage 2 will be made of plastic material.
Figure 3.4 – Layout of proposed transmission system
Storage reservoirs
The details of the proposed storage reservoirs in the project area are as below.
Table 3.16 – Summary of proposed storage reservoirs in the project area
Location Capacity (m3)

Rwanyakashesha 1000
Bwoma 300
Kebisoni 150
Buyanja HLR 300
Buyanja - Gravity Scheme 150
Rwerere 100
Distribution system
As per the Terms of Reference, the distribution system is designed for the municipality of Rukungiri.
Considering the small size of the existing pipelines, the distribution system for Rukungiri Municipality is
considered to be entirely replaced. However, to postpone part of the initial investment, it is considered
Page 58
that only the primary network will be constructed at the 2030 stage, whereas the secondary network will
be laid at a later stage.
The total length of the proposed distribution system is 39,118 m. Proposed pipe sizes will range between
75 and 315 mm. All proposed pipes will be made of plastic material.
Figure 3.5 – Layout of proposed distribution system
3.7 PRELIMINARY DESIGN- SANITATION

The type of sanitation facilities will depend on the level of service for water supply as follows:
 High water consumption (e.g. house connections) – water borne sanitation in the form of septic
tank systems or central sewerage;
 Low water consumption (e.g. yard tap or stand tap users) – non-water borne on site sanitation
facilities.
Page 59
3.7.1 Central Sewerage System

A Central sewerage system requires that adequate waste water should be generated to drive the excreta
down the sewers. A sewage generation rate of 5 m3/d/ha is considered as the lowest rate at which a central
sewerage system can function.
At present, a central sewerage system is not feasible, thus on-site sanitation is the most viable solution.
Besides an improvement of private facilities, it is important to provide also public facilities for people that
cannot afford to have a private sanitation facility.
A central sludge treatment plant must be included in the sanitation system, in order to minimize impacts on
health and on environment of unmanaged faecal sludges. Most viable solution seems to be a co-
composting plant, in which faecal sludges coming from latrine empting are composted together with
organic fraction of municipal solid waste. Through composting, organic matter is stabilized and converted
to humus, which can be used in agriculture. The relative high temperatures that are achieved during the
thermophilic aerobic process of composting almost nullify pathogens presence.
3.7.2 On-Site Sanitation
On-Site Sanitation systems that can be progressively upgraded with time i.e. EcoSan toilets / improved pit
latrines and septic tanks are highly recommended for the Town Council authorities to begin enforcing now
to make it easier in future to simply connect to a central sewerage system. The following is foreseen:
 Septic tank system for the high-income group i.e. households with house connections,
 EcoSan toilets / Improved pit latrines for the low-income groups i.e. households with yard taps and
those who use public stand posts).
Although it is the responsibility of households to provide for their own sanitation facilities, this is often not
possible for a variety of reasons. There is need for some intervention to improve the level of coverage,
particularly the pit latrines for the low-income groups. The approaches can be grouped into three
categories - encouragement, education and enforcement. In particular, the local communities shall be
encouraged to construct Ecosan toilets rather than traditional pit latrines, which have many disadvantages
and are more difficult to empty.
There are five public toilets in the town, two flush toilet systems connected with septic tanks serving the
market and the park areas, and three VIP toilets in the slum area.
It is proposed to upgrade existing flush toilet facilities adding also two showers and washbasins in each
facility. An additional septic tank with a pipe to a proper soak pit will be necessary for each facility.
Moreover it is proposed to construct two additional flush toilet facilities of six stances each (two male, four
female), provided also with two showers. Also a urinal will be located in the male section. Two stances in
both the male and female sections will be reserved for the disabled. Septic tanks with proper discharge
pipe to a soak pit are necessary.
The location of the proposed sanitation facilities is shown in the following figure.
Page 60
Figure 3.6 – Proposed new sanitation public facilities and upgrading of existing ones.
3.8 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

3.8.1 Water Supply
The proposed water supply system will have the following characteristics:
 intake on Kahengye river, at a location near the bridge on the border between Rukungiri and
Ntungamo districts
rising transmission main
 WTP in the parish of Kabingo, in Kebisoni sub-county, having future year capacity 300 m3/h and
ultimate year capacity 400 m3/h
 Gravity transmission system from the MBR to each of the proposed Storage Reservoirs, comprising
HDPE pipes of size ranging from 140 to 450 mm
 New storage reservoirs at Rukungiri (2 no. of 1000 m3 and 300 m3 capacity, respectively), Kebisoni
(1 no. of 150 m3 capacity), Buyanja (2 no. of 300 m3 and 150 m3 capacity, respectively), and
Rwerere (1 no. of 100 m3 capacity)
The feasibility study proved that the proposed project is technically, financially, and socially feasible.
However, the following difficulties are envisaged and shall be addressed prior to the actual implementation
of the project:
 Most of the proposed location for the new facilities (intake, WTP, SRs) are private lands and shall
be acquired
Page 61
3.8.2 Sanitation
At present, a central sewerage system is not feasible, thus on-site sanitation is the most viable solution. The
local communities shall be encouraged to construct Ecosan toilets rather than traditional pit latrines, which
have many disadvantages and are more difficult to empty. Besides an improvement of private facilities, it is
important to provide also public facilities for people that cannot afford to have a private sanitation facility.
The public facilities will be flush toilets with a urinal and showers. Two stances in both the male and female
sections will be reserved for the disabled.
A sludge treatment must be included in the sanitation system, in order to minimize impacts on health and
on environment. Due to the high organic fraction of solid waste that is supposed to be produced, the
possibility to treat faecal sludge with the organic waste in a co-composting plant seems to be the most
viable solution.
The proposed interventions in public sanitation are centred on the construction of:
 2 showers beside existing latrines near the central car park
 2 showers beside existing latrines near the market place
 a 6-stance flush toilet with a urinal and showers at Ntungamo stage
 a 6-stance flush toilet with a urinal and showers at Greenland (city centre)
 a co-composting plant in Kinyasano valley, in which faecal sludges coming from latrine empting are
composted together with organic fraction of municipal solid waste.
3.8.3 Budget
The investments can be handled in 2 phases:
 Investment 2030 (Future year)
 Re-investment 2040 (Ultimate year).
The total available budget allocated for the water supply and sanitation project until 2040 is 6,526,200 USD
(17.62 billion UGX). This amount is by far not sufficient to cover the costs for implementing the project.
Page 62
4 DETAILED DESIGN – INTAKE WORKS AND WATER TREATMENT PLANT
4.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW

The project consists of the design and construction of a water supply systems for Rukungiri Municipality as
well as for towns beyond the Municipality in order to include the following additional areas, whose water
supply systems are currently managed by the National Water and Sewerage Corporation (NWSC):
The system is designed for a final capacity corresponding to the water demand of year 2040, but it is
expected to be implemented adopting a phased approach. Eventually the project will imply the
construction of the facilities (intake works, water treatment plants, storage reservoirs) listed in Table 4.1.
The location of such facilities is shown in Figure 4.1.
Table 4.1 – Water supply facilities in Rukungiri water supply system
Code Name
RU_I1 Kahengye Intake
RU_W1 WTP for Rukungiri scheme
RU_R1 Mukazi proposed MBR
RU_R2 Rwanyakashesha proposed SR
RU_R3 Bwoma proposed SR
RU_R4 Kebisoni proposed SR
RU_R5 Buyanja proposed SR (Gravity scheme)
RU_R6 Buyanja proposed HLR
RU_R7 Rwerere proposed SR
Figure 4.1 – Water supply facilities in Rukungiri water supply system
Page 63
4.2 WATER DEMAND ASSESSMENT

4.2.1 Population Projections
The formula of MWE 2013 Water supply Design Manual is used for the calculation:
𝑃𝑛 = 𝑃(1 + 𝑟)𝑛
where:
Pn = population after n years
P = present population
r = annual growth rate (%)
Population growth rate applied is 1.5% for the areas within Rukungiri district, and 1.9% for those in
Ntungamo district, as per the latest calculated trends in the respective districts2.
The results for the various study areas are reported in the following table:
Table 4.2 – Population projection in the project area
Division / Ward / % Popn Initial year Future year Ultimate year
Sub-County
Parish Served 2015 2030 2040
Western Division 100% 15,338 19,176 22,255
Rukungiri Municipality Southern Division 100% 11,949 14,939 17,337
Eastern Division 100% 14,894 18,621 21,610
Rukungiri Municipality Total population 100% 42,181 52,736 61,202
Kakinga 100% 5,978 7,474 8,674
Kigiro 100% 3,187 3,984 4,624
Kabingo 25% 915 1,144 1,327
Kebisoni
Karuhembe 75% 2,779 3,474 4,032
Garubunda 75% 2,773 3,467 4,024
Nyeibingo 25% 1,167 1,458 1,693
Nyakaina 100% 6,192 7,741 8,984
Bugyera 100% 3,897 4,872 5,654
Buyanja Nyabiteete 100% 3,798 4,749 5,511
Rwakirungura 75% 4,027 5,034 5,842
Kyamakanda 100% 6,783 8,480 9,841
En-route Total population 81% 41,494 51,877 60,205
Rwerere 100% 4,294 5,368 6,230
Nyakagyeme
Kigaaga 100% 814 1,018 1,181
Total population beyond Rukungiri 100% 5,108 6,386 7,411
Total population in Rukungiri district 100% 88,782 110,998 128,818
2 Uganda Bureau of Statistics (2002). The 2002 Uganda Population and Housing Census, Report, October 2006, Kampala, Uganda.
Page 64
Division / Ward / % Popn Initial year Future year Ultimate year

Sub-County
Parish Served 2015 2030 2040
Nyamunuka 100% 7,235 9,596 11,583
Bwongyera Katomi 100% 5,588 7,411 8,945
Kakiika 100% 4,575 6,067 7,324
Nyabihoko Rwashamaire 100% 3,964 5,258 6,347
Total population in Ntugamo district 100% 21,363 28,331 34,199
Total Population in the Project area 92% 110,145 139,330 163,017
4.2.2 Unit Consumption Rates
4.2.2.1 Domestic Consumption Rates
The per capita consumptions (also referred to as LPCD – Litres Per Capita per Day) are related to the level of
service being offered. Four services levels have been used and these include:
service, the Ability to Pay of the households, and the proposed tariff level.
The proposed domestic tariff is calculated as the weighted arithmetic mean value considering the national
NWSC tariffs adopted in Uganda for Public Standposts (1323 UGX/m3) and Residential customers (2046
UGX/m3), and the actual number of registered connections for each category in the Project area (38 PSP
connections and 1123 Residential connections respectively):
𝑈𝐺𝑋 1323 ∙ 𝑃𝑆𝑃 + 2046 ∙ 𝑅𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑐𝑢𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑚𝑒𝑟𝑠

𝑇𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑓𝑓 [ 3 ]= = 2022
𝑚 𝑃𝑆𝑃 + 𝑅𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑐𝑢𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑚𝑒𝑟𝑠
The Ability to Pay (ATP) of households is derived as 5% of the income, considering the information collected
during the socio-economic household survey carried out in September 2014. The households’ monthly
Ability to Pay are plotted in the following graph.
Page 65
Figure 4.2 – Monthly income of households in Rukungiri Municipality
ATP
120000
100000
80000
UGX
60000
40000
20000
0
0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100%
The levels of service are derived from the ATP as below:

Table 4.3 – Levels of Service (at 5% income)
Level of Service LPCD Percentage of users
NS 5 17%
PSP 20 0%
YT 40 11%
HC 100 72%
Given the percentage of users for each category, the net domestic LPCD is calculated as the weighted
arithmetic mean value of the LPCD of each Level of Service, which is equal to 45.88 L/c/d.
4.2.2.2 Non-Domestic Consumption Rates
This category covers the institutional, commercial and industrial demand. For these, rates have been
adopted from the design manual, rates used in other similar schemes designed recently, and in some cases
modified to suit the site conditions.
domestic demand, as explained below.
The sampled institutions and commercial/industrial activity were asked about the service level they would
opt for in case a new water supply scheme is implemented:
 House Connection (HC) - individual connection with internal plumbing, kitchen, toilet and bathroom
with shower;
 Not willing to become new customers / None of the above – non-domestic activities not interested
at receiving piped water supply.
Page 66
Average Day Demand
Adopted Rates
Institutional
Schools L/c/d 10
Markets L/d 2,000
Hotels
Restaurants L/d 200
Non-Domestic Net LPCD of 7.41 l/c/d.
4.2.2.3 Summary of Proposed Unit Consumption Rates
The proposed consumption rates are given in Table 4.5. For easy comparison, the rates proposed in the
MWE Water Supply Design Manual are also included.
Table 4.5 - Summary of Proposed Consumption Rates
Average Day Demand
Design Manual Adopted Rates
Domestic
House connection L/c/d 50 ÷ 200 100
Yard tap L/c/d 40 40
Public Standpipe L/c/d 20 20
Non pipe supply L/c/d - 5
Institutional
Schools L/c/d 10 10
Hospitals / Health Centres L/bed/d 20 ÷ 200 100
Worship Places L/c/d - 15
Police stations & Prisons L/c/d - 20
Markets L/inst./d 20,000 l/ha/d 2,000
Hotels
Low / Medium class L/c/d 50 ÷ 300 100
High class L/c/d 600 600
Restaurants L/d 500 200
Source: Published studies and Project estimates
Rukungiri Municipality. The water supply system is sized and designed according to this value.
Page 67
The Average net LPCD calculated for Rukungiri is higher than the one proposed in the MWE Water supply
design manual for towns above 20,000 population (50 L/c/d).
water demand are:
These LPCD have been used as reference for estimating the net demand in the sub-counties of Buyanja,
Kebisoni, Nyakagyeme, Bwongyera and Nyabihoko, in accordance with the following table.
Table 4.6 – Total net LPCD (L/c/d) applied for calculating the water demand in the project area
Division / Ward / % Popn Population served Total population Net LPCD
Sub-County
Parish Served 2040 2040 L/c/d
Western Division 100% 22,255 22,255 50.02
Rukungiri Municipality Southern Division 100% 17,337 17,337 58.45
Eastern Division 100% 21,610 21,610 52.53
Kakinga 100% 8,674 8,674 35
Kigiro 100% 4,624 4,624 20
Kabingo 25% 1,327 5,309 35
Kebisoni
Karuhembe 75% 4,032 5,376 35
Garubunda 75% 4,024 5,365 35
Nyeibingo 25% 1,693 6,770 35
Nyakaina 100% 8,984 8,984 35
Bugyera 100% 5,654 5,654 35
Buyanja Nyabiteete 100% 5,511 5,511 35
Rwakirungura 75% 5,842 7,790 35
Kyamakanda 100% 9,841 9,841 35
Rwerere 100% 6,230 6,230 35
Nyakagyeme
Kigaaga 100% 1,181 1,181 20
Nyamunuka 100% 11,583 11,583 35
Bwongyera Katomi 100% 8,945 8,945 35
Kakiika 100% 7,324 7,324 35
Nyabihoko Rwashamaire 100% 6,347 6,347 35
4.2.3 Unaccounted For Water (UFW)
Allowance must be made in the design for losses, and other unaccounted for water use. UFW can be given
either as a percentage of the average daily water consumption or of production. For the design the latter
ratio has been selected. In this approach, the UFW is assumed to be constant and not subject to seasonal
variations. Water consumption recorded by NWSC in the months of March and April 2014 indicate that the
average water losses in the system are equal to 28%. With key sections of the distribution system due to be
replaced and overhauled, this average figure is expected to drop. The UFW has thus been taken as 10% of
the water demand.
Page 68
4.2.4 Water Demand

Given the above considerations on the projected population and the applied Unit Consumption Rates, the
net water demand has been calculated by multiplying the population by the total net LPCD.
The population taken into account is the total projected population living in Rukungiri Municipality plus the
total population living in the parishes currently served by the existing water supply distribution network
managed by NWSC. For the water demand of Ntungamo district, the parishes in which the 2 target towns
(Nyamunuka and Rwashamaire) are located plus the en route parishes (between the proposed intake works
and the 2 towns) have been considered.
The study of such an extended regional scheme takes into account an overall water demand corresponding
to that of the areas listed in Table 4.7.
Table 4.7 - Administrative units totally considered for calculation of water demand
District County Sub-county / Division Parish / Ward
Eastern Eastern
Rukungiri Municipality Western Western
Southern Southern
Kakinga
Kebisoni
Kigiro
Rukungiri Nyakaina
Rubabo
Bugyera
Buyanja
Nyabiteete
Kyamakanda
Rwerere
Rujumbura Nyakagyeme
Kigaaga
Nyamunuka
Bwongyera Katomi
Nrtungamo Kajara
Kakiika
Nyabihoko Rwashamaire
The percentage of en-route population (i.e. people living in the parishes crossed by the transmission mains)
served by the proposed water supply scheme has been determined on the basis of the distance from the
water supply services as well as the population density. Therefore a provision of water supply has been
considered also for the administrative units listed in Table 4.8.
Table 4.8 - Administrative units partially considered for calculation of water demand
District County Sub-county / Division Parish / Ward
Kabingo
Karuhembe
Kebisoni
Rukungiri Rubabo Garubunda
Nyeibingo
Buyanja Rwakirungura
The overall area considered for calculation of water demand is depicted in the following Figure: the white
areas are the parishes/wards in Rukungiri district whose population is 100% included, the red areas are the
parishes/wards in Ntungamo district whose population is 100% included, and the blue areas are the
parishes/wards in Rukungiri district whose population is only partially (25%-75%) included.
Page 69
Figure 4.3 – Overall area considered for calculation of water demand
Table 4.9 – Net water demand (m3/d) in the project area
Net Water Demand (m3/day)

%
Division / Ward / LPCD
Sub-County Popn
Parish Considered Initial year Future year Ultimate year
Served
2015 2030 2040
Western Division 100% 50 767 959 1,113
Rukungiri Municipality Southern Division 100% 58 698 873 1,013
Eastern Division 100% 53 782 978 1,135
Rukungiri Municipality Total demand 100% 2,248 2,811 3,262
Kakinga 100% 35 209 262 304
Kigiro 100% 20 64 80 92
Kabingo 25% 35 32 40 46
Kebisoni
Karuhembe 75% 35 97 122 141
Garubunda 75% 35 97 121 141
Nyeibingo 25% 35 41 51 59
Nyakaina 100% 35 217 271 314
Bugyera 100% 35 136 171 198
Buyanja Nyabiteete 100% 35 133 166 193
Rwakirungura 75% 35 141 176 204
Kyamakanda 100% 35 237 297 344
En-route Total demand 81% 1,404 1,756 2,038
Nyakagyeme Rwerere 100% 35 150 188 218
Page 70
Net Water Demand (m3/day)

%
Division / Ward / LPCD
Sub-County Popn
Parish Considered Initial year Future year Ultimate year
Served
2015 2030 2040
Kigaaga 100% 20 16 20 24
Total demand beyond Rukungiri 100% 167 208 242
Total demand in Rukungiri district 100% 3,819 4,775 5,541
Nyamunuka 100% 35 253 336 405
Bwongyera Katomi 100% 35 196 259 313
Kakiika 100% 35 160 212 256
Nyabihoko Rwashamaire 100% 35 139 184 222
Total demand in Ntugamo district 100% 748 992 1,197
Total demand in the Project area 92% 4,567 5,766 6,738
The peak water demand (i.e. the outflow of the WTP which has to be supplied to the system) has been
calculated by applying the following assumptions:
 UFW = 10%
Table 4.10 – Peak water demand (m3/d) in the project area
Peak Water Demand (m3/day)

% Popn
Sub-County Division / Ward / Parish
Served Initial year Future year Ultimate year
2015 2030 2040

Rukungiri Municipality Southern Division 100% 922 1,153 1,338
Kakinga 100% 276 345 401
Kigiro 100% 84 105 122
Kabingo 25% 42 53 61
Kebisoni
Karuhembe 75% 128 161 186
Garubunda 75% 128 160 186
Nyeibingo 25% 54 67 78
Nyakaina 100% 286 358 415
Bugyera 100% 180 225 261
Buyanja Nyabiteete 100% 175 219 255
Rwakirungura 75% 186 233 270
Kyamakanda 100% 313 392 455
Rwerere 100% 198 248 288
Nyakagyeme
Kigaaga 100% 21 27 31
Page 71
Peak Water Demand (m3/day)

% Popn
2015 2030 2040

Nyamunuka 100% 334 443 535
Bwongyera Katomi 100% 258 342 413
Kakiika 100% 211 280 338
Nyabihoko Rwashamaire 100% 183 243 293
Total demand in Ntugamo district 100% 987 1,309 1,580
The maximum gross water demand (i.e. the maximum amount of raw water that shall be abstracted from
the source) has been calculated by applying the following assumption:
 WTP losses = 5%
Gross Water Demand (m3/day)

% Popn
2015 2030 2040

Rukungiri Municipality Southern Division 100% 968 1,210 1,404
Kakinga 100% 290 363 421
Kigiro 100% 88 110 128
Kabingo 25% 44 55 64
Kebisoni
Karuhembe 75% 135 169 196
Garubunda 75% 135 168 195
Nyeibingo 25% 57 71 82
Nyakaina 100% 300 376 436
Bugyera 100% 189 236 274
Buyanja Nyabiteete 100% 184 230 267
Rwakirungura 75% 195 244 283
Kyamakanda 100% 329 411 477
Rwerere 100% 208 260 302
Nyakagyeme
Kigaaga 100% 23 28 33
Page 72
Gross Water Demand (m3/day)

% Popn
2015 2030 2040

Nyamunuka 100% 351 465 562
Bwongyera Katomi 100% 271 359 434
Kakiika 100% 222 294 355
Nyabihoko Rwashamaire 100% 192 255 308
Total demand in Ntugamo district 100% 1,036 1,374 1,659
4.3 WTP AND INTAKE WORKS DESIGN DATA

4.3.1 Design flows
The analysis of the water demand for the different stages of the Project is shown in Table 4.12.
The intake and WTP works are sized to supply sufficient raw water for the 2030 and 2040 project horizons.
In year 2030, the population served will be that of Rukungiri Municipality. In year 2040, the population will
include also that in Rukungiri district and Ntugamo district.The calculation of the design flows is shown in
Table 4.13.
The WTP is designed to work 24h/24, therefore the considered capacity, in hourly flow, will be of 200 m³/h
in the first stage (year 2030) and 400 m³/h in the second stage (year 2040).
Table 4.12 – Analysis of the water demand for the different stages of the Project
RIVER KAHENGYE Unit 2015 2030 2040
Population Rukungiri municipality 42,181 52,736 61,202
Daily peak demand m3/d 2,967 3,710* 4,305
Additional Population Rukungiri district 46,602 58,263 67,616
Total population Rukungiri district 88,782 110,998 128,818
Population Ntungamo district 21,363 28,331 34,199
Daily peak demand m3/d 987 1,309 1,580
Total population 110,145 139,330 163,017
Total Daily peak demand m3/d 6,028 7,611 8,894**
Page 73
Table 4.13 – Calculation of the raw water amount to be withdrawn from the Kahengye River to supply the WTP
Nominal production (m³/d) Nominal production (m³/h)
Water flows Future year Ultimate year Future year Ultimate year
2030 2040 2030 2040
Peak Water demand 3,710* 8,894** 155 371
Max water supplied to the users (100%) 4,560 9,120 190 380
WTP losses (5%) 240 480 10 20
Raw water to be treated (105%) 4,800 9,600 200 400
4.4 INTAKE WORKS

4.4.1 Site description
The selected raw water source is river Kahengye. The new intake facility is placed near Kahengye river’s
bridge, on the border between Rukungiri and Ntungamo districts (Rubumba LC1, Kabingo parish, Kebisoni
sub-county, Rukungiri district), in the location shown in the following Figure. The ground level in the place
chosen for the intake works varies from about 1398 m in correspondence to the river side to about 1401 m
above the average sea level (A.S.L).
Figure 4.4 – Picture of the proposed location for new intake works
4.4.2 Design of intake works

The intake structure is dimensioned for the following river discharge values, corresponding to the Low flow
with 25 years return period, and the Flood flow with 100 years return period, respectively.
Table 4.14 – Design flows for intake structure
Kahengye river Flow (m3/s) Water level (m)
Min 0.23 1397.40
Max 30.1 1399.10
Considering the characteristics of river Kahengye in the vicinity of the proposed intake structure, a
Gauckler-Manning coefficient of 0.04 and a safety factor of 1.5 have been considered.
The pumping station will withdraw from the Kahengye River 200 m3/h in the first phase (up to year 2030)
and up to 400 m3/h in the final stage (year 2040).
The intake works will be constituted by a civil structure containing:
Page 74
 gabions against bank erosion

 2 coarse screening systems (50 mm) provided with an automatic cleaning system (constituted by a
moving rake which conveys the screened materials into a container), 1 of which will be installed in
the later construction phases
 4+1 lifting pumps, 4 of which will be installed in the later construction phases.
The following table summarize the pumps design data.

Table 4.15 – Design data for intake pumps dimensioning
INTAKE WORKS - PUMPING STATION
WTP design flowrate:
INTERMEDIATE STAGE 2030 200 m3/h
FINAL STAGE 2040 400 m3/h
Number of pumps:
The pumps characteristics are the following:
 Nominal flow: 100 m3/h

 Pump head: 95 m
Figure 4.5 – Intake structure section: inlet and screening
The pipes feeding the pumps (ND 250 ductile iron) are provided with protective suction strainers. A
backwashing pump is also installed, to wash these strainers when they get clogged. The feeding pipe (ND
125 ductile iron) of this pump is also provided with a suction strainer. All valves controlling the opening of
connections are motorized. The pump (which will be 4 + 1 in the 2040 construction phase) feeds HDPE
Page 75
pipes ND 225, which carry the water to the WTP inlet. In the 2030 operation phase only 2 of these pipes will
actually be used.
To avoid risk of erosion the River bank and bottom to the side of the intake structure will be protected by
posing boulders of adequate size. A part of the intake works section (inlet and screening) is shown in Figure
4.5.
4.5 WATER TREATMENT PLANT

4.5.1 Site description
The new water treatment plant will be built in an area of approximately 1.5 hectares located at in the
parish of Kabingo, in Kebisoni sub-county. The available land for the constructions is hilly. The ground level
in the site considered for the WTP construction, adjacent to the North side to an existing road, varies from
about 1480 m to 1457 m, which will allow a gravity flow among the treatment units of the facility. The
following Figures identify the area of construction.
Figure 4.6 – Proposed location for new WTP at Kabingo and view of the site from the existing road
4.5.2 Design of water treatment plant

4.5.2.1 WTP scheme
The WTP scheme is of conventional type, and consists of the following units:
 Aeration System, Fine Screening Station and Flow Divider

 Clarifying Tanks, Sludge Extraction
 Storage and Dosage of Flocculant
 Filters’ Building
 Disinfection, Contact and Storage Tanks
 High Lift pump station
The filters’ backwashing water is sent to a clarification unit “Sewage Equalization Tank”; the settled sludge
is then pumped to the Thickening Tank, together with the sludge from the clarifloculation units. The
supernatant water from these two units is sent back to the river, downstream the intake works.
The sludge collected from the thickening tank is dried in Drying Beds.
Complementary buildings are:
 Power house
 Emergency electrical power
 Administration and workshop building
Page 76
The WTP layout is depicted in the following Figure.

Figure 4.7 – WTP layout
4.5.2.2 Aeration System, Fine Screening Station and Flow Divider

An aeration system is designed, to increase the removal of pollutants from water by stripping or oxidizing
dissolved metals like iron and manganese. The aeration system is a simple pipe connected to the inlet pipe
in correspondence of a Venturi reduction. This reduction determines a depression which causes air suction
from the atmosphere. All three inlet pipes are provided with this aeration system.
Figure 4.8 – Aeration system
Page 77
After aeration, water is sent to 4 (only 3 to be installed in the first stage) automatic fine screening (3 mm
spacing) sections, provided with a screw for the transport of the screened material to a 5 m 3 container. Out
of the 4 total screens, only 1 shall be installed in the first stage, due to lack of funds.
The screening station will be equipped of devices for the collection, compaction and removal of the
material extracted from the grids.
The design data of aeration and fine screening are summarized in the following table, followed by the
subsequent treatment stages:
Table 4.16 – WTP inlet work design data
INLET WORK TREATMENT STAGES
AERATION SYSTEM:
air suction and mixing with ejector
number of ejectors
INTERMEDIATE STAGE 2030 2
FINAL STAGE 2040 3
FINE SCRENING:
number of screens
FLOW DIVIDER:
divider with triangular weirs
number of weirs/lines
FINAL STAGE 2040 6
flow on each line 67 m3/h
After screening, water is distributed evenly to a flow divider, constituted by six wells, each one feeding a
unit of the subsequent treatment stage (the clariflocculation).
The number of used wells will be 3 in the 2030 horizon, and 6 in the ultimate horizon.
In each well, the dosage of flocculant takes place. The flocculant used is aluminium sulphate.
4.5.2.3 Chemical building (for flocculant)
The flocculant will be stored in bags and prepared as a solution in a building (the “chemical building for
flocculant”) of about 8.50 x 12 m.
The amount of flocculant to be stored is calculated assuming a concentration of 50 mg/L in the raw water,
which leads to a total flocculant consumption of 480 kg/day at the final operation phase (2040). The
concentration of the solution will be of about 50 g/L, and the average dosing pump flow of 67 L/h.
The following table provides the main units and characteristics of the chemical building.
Table 4.17 - Main design parameters of alumina storage and dosage
CHEMICAL BUILDING
STORAGE AND DOSAGE OF FLOCCULANT:
Chemical coagulant: alumina Al2(SO4)3
Concentration of the solution From 10 to 100 g/L
Density 1.14 kg/dm3
Dosage 50 mg/L
Page 78
CHEMICAL BUILDING
Dosage pump approximate power 1,5 kW
Consumption of flocculant
INTERMEDIATE STAGE 2030 240 kg/d
FINAL STAGE 2040 480 kg/d
flocculant supplied in bags – area of pallets 18 m2
storage tank dimension 10 m3
number of dosing pumps
design capacity of each pump (variable up to) 100 l/h
4.5.2.4 Clarifying Tanks, Sludge Extraction and Lifting Station

From each tank of the inlet work, the water reaches a clariflocculation unit. The flocculant is mixed to the
water thanks to the turbulence which creates in the pipes connecting tanks and clariflocculators.
The flocculation and clarification processes will take place in 6 circular reinforced concrete tanks, each one
dimensioned to receive a discharge 67 m3/h. During the first operation phase, only 2 clarifiers will be
constructed.
The area of flocculation will be equipped with slow mixers, to favour the floc-formation.
The area of clarification will be equipped with scrapers to collect the sludge settled on the bottom, and
send it to the hopper, and from here to the sludge well for extraction.
The sludge extraction will be performed using telescopic valves. The sludge will be sent to the thickening
thank.
The following tables provide the main design parameters and characteristics of this process unit.
Table 4.18 – Clariflocculation design data
CLARIFLOCCULATION
CLARIFLOCCULATION TANKS:
number of tanks
FINAL STAGE 2040 6
flow to each tank 67 m3/h
FLOCCULATION SECTION:
detention time 20 min
volume of each tank 22 m3
Inner diameter 3,00 m
Average depth 3,60 m
Inner surface 7,0 m2
CLARIFICATION SECTION:
detention time > 180 min
volume of each tank > 200 m3
surface load 0,65 m/h
surface of clarification section 105 m2
Inner diameter 12,50 m
Side water depth 2,7 m
Page 79
4.5.2.5 Sludge production from the clariflocculation

The sludge production has been calculated considering the measured TSS concentration in the period of
higher water turbidity, which resulted to be 64 mg/L, and the mass increase due to the addition of
flocculant, causing the precipitation of TSS as aluminium salts. A total TSS concentration has thus be
considered, which gives 960 kg/day of TSS production in the ultimate horizon. Considering a settled sludge
concentration of 35 kg/m3 (3.5%), the amount of sludge produced by the clariflocculation results to be 27
m3/day, which is, about 1 m3/h.
4.5.2.6 Filters Building and Filter Backwashing Building
The filtration section is made by gravity filters. The filters’ tank will be made of reinforced concrete, the
central part of which will be constituted by the filter beds and the service room, within which the process
piping will be placed.
The number of filters will be of 8 units, each one with a filtration surface of (4.5 x 2) 9 m2. The hydraulic
load during the normal functioning will be of:
 2.8 m3/m2/h during the 2030 operation phase (with total loading of 300 m3/h)
 3.2 m3/m2/h during the 2030 operation phase, with 1 filter under washing
 5.5 m3/m2/h during the ultimate operation phase (with total loading of 400 m3/h).
 6.3 m3/m2/h during the ultimate operation phase, with 1 filter under washing
The filtering material shall be clean silica sand, acid-washed, having a depth of not less than 70 cm, and
actual size as in the figure below.
Figure 4.9 – Filter bed section
Table 4.19 – Design parameters of filters

FILTRATION
number of filters 8
surface load with all filters operating (int. ph.) 2.8 m/h
surface load with one filter in backwash (int. ph.) 3.2 m/h
surface load with all filters operating (final ph.) 5.5 m/h
surface load with one filter in backwash (final ph.) 6.3 m/h
surface of each filter 9.00 m2
dimensions of each filter
length 2.00 m
width 4.50 m
Page 80
Table 4.20 – Filter backwashing design

BACKWASHING
FILTER BACKWASHING EQUIPMENT
Calculation for backwashing pumps = 9 m2 x 20m/h 180 m3/h
backwashing pumps
number of pumps 2+1
Washing time: 15 minutes 0.25 h/d
Daily water consumption 360 m3/d
Hourly discharge 15 m3/h
Calculation for backwashing blowers = 9 m2 x 20m/h 180 m3/h
air scour blowers
number of blowers 1+1
Each filter shall be cleaned by an upward wash water flow, in conjunction with agitation by pressurized air.
The design parameters for backwashing are the following:
 Wash water surface load: 20 m/h

 Air scour surface load: 20 m/h
 Washing interval: 1 backwash for each filter
 Washing time: 15 minutes (= 0.25 hours/day)
The water for the backwashing will be withdrawn from a chamber receiving the filtered water.
The daily water consumption is estimated as it follows:
 (180 m3/h x 0.25 h/d) x 8 filtri = 360 m3/d
This means an average hourly discharge of 15 m3/h. This water will be sent to the equalization tank.
The air scour production system will have the following capacity:
 9 m2 x 20 m/h = 180 m3/h.
4.5.2.7 Disinfection tank

The filtered water shall be disinfected by free available chlorine (FAC) and for this purpose chlorinators
shall be provided to dose the effluent of the filters with chlorine.
The filtered water is sent to the disinfection stage, constituted by an underground tank, dimensioned for a
flow rate of 380 m3/h and a residence time of at least 2 hours (about 2.3 hours during the ultimate phase,
and 4.6 hours during the intermediate phase of operation), with a volume of about 880 cubic meters.
The disinfection tank is divided in 2 symmetric compartments (only 1 to be constructed in the First phase),
each one at times separated in other 2 sub-compartments with a volume of 220 m3.
The 2 compartments are equipped with an emergency overflow able to discharge away the incoming
water, in case of failure to the high lift pumps.
Page 81
The free available chlorine can be obtained by a disinfectant in powder, granules or salt tablets, which
reacts with water generating brine with high (500 mg/L or higher) hypochlorite concentration (the “free
active chlorine”). This brine is then sent to the inlet of the disinfection tank section.
The reference dosage considered for dimensioning the disinfection system is 0.5 mg/L of active chlorine in
the filtered water.
4.5.2.8 Chemical building (for chlorine preparation and storage)
The brine production system will be located in a building adjacent to the disinfection tank.
The chemicals will also be stored in this building, which will be conditioned to ensure sufficient ventilation
and adequate conditions for the storage (dry and cool atmosphere).
The brine formation systems for conventional chemicals are generally constituted by:
 a hopper, where the chemical is loaded,

 a screw which brings the chemical into a storage tank,
 a storage tank, receiving also water and provided with mixers
The suggested system is a more modern device, which allows using special NaCl salt tables, which can be
easily stored and transported. The resulting brine is also a good quality solution, which prevents the
formation of biofouling inside pipes. This system can generate the disinfecting brine also from pure calcium
or sodium chloride.
4.5.2.9 High Lift pump station
The high lift pump station is adjacent to the disinfection tank. All pumps inside are equipped with inverters
that will be used for adjusting the flow rate and pressure in the pipelines.
The pumps will be horizontal centrifugal split case type. The floor level under the pumps will be lower than
the ground level, and will be placed just below the bottom of the storage tank of the treated water. This
way, the pumps will always work under the head and if necessary it will be possible to empty the tank
completely.
The pump sizing is given in the following table.
Table 4.21 – Pump sizing summary
Main high pressure pumps Potable water
PUMP SIZING Unit
Year 2040 Year 2030 pumps
Individual pump discharge m3/hr 160.0 160.0 2.0
Pump head MWC 315.0 306.0 22.0
Pump RPM RPM 1465 1465 2900
Pump efficiency % % 77.5 77.5 73.0
Pump Bkw kw 176.6 176.6 0.51
Bkw with Parallel operation margin kw 203.0 203.0 0.51
Motor rating kw kw 200 200 0.55
Motor frame - 315L 315L
Motor RPM RPM 1490 1490 2900
Pressure control devices will be installed on the force mains, to command the pump inverters, maintain the
right pressure and adjusting the discharge according to the actual demand. The pipelines will be also
equipped with safety valves against overpressure. Lastly, one non-return valve with counterweight at the
beginning of the rising main (after the flowmeter assembly piping) is suggested as additional safety
Page 82
measure. An air valve is suggested to be fitted on the rising main outside the pump house at the first hump
as increased safety, in addition to the surge protection system for the rising main. The main data
concerning the pump stations are given in the following tables:
Table 4.22 – Main high pressure pumps
PUMPING PHILOSOPHY Units Year 2030 Year 2040
Pump type Hor. Multistage
Pumping hours Hrs. 24 24
No. of working pumps in parallel 1 2
No.s standby 1 1
Total discharge required m3/hr 154.58 302.86
Individual pump discharge m3/hr 154.58 151.43
Required actual discharge1 m3/hr 160 160
Pump head m 306 315
1Note: As the pumps are to be operated in parallel, the design discharge is taken 5% extra to account for system friction in parallel
operation.
Table 4.23 – System details for main high pressure pumps

System static head m 299.2
Rising main Material and class DI-C40
Rising Main ID mm 350
Rising Main length m 4615
Table 4.24 – Potable water pumps

Discharge m3/hr 3.0
Total Head m 24.0
Nos. working 1
Nos. standby 1
Suction 2 m - positive
Sump bottom RL m 1459.8
Admin building top RL m 1480
Pump house to admin building distance m 190
4.5.2.10 Sewage Equalization Tank

The sewage equalization tank receives the water coming from the filters’ backwashing and carrying the
removed clogging material (TSS).
The equalisation tank has been dimensioned for a detention time of 6 hours. Its function is that of
separating by settling the TSS contained in the wash water, in order to send this sludge to the sludge
treatments, and the clarified water back to the river. The concentration of this water cannot overcome 50
mg/L.
1+1 pumps are located on the tank bottom, to lift the settled sludge (about 2m3/day) into the thickener.
4.5.2.11 Sludge treatment
The total sludge production takes into account the sludge coming from the equalization tank, and that from
the clariflocculation tank.
The total sludge amount calculation is reported in the following table.
Page 83
Table 4.25 - Sludge production from clarification and equalization

SLUDGE PRODUCTION
FROM CLARIFICATION
Concentration of TSS in raw water 100 mg/l
Daily dry sludge produced by clariflocculation 960 kg/d
Daily sludge volume with dry 3.50% 27 m3/d
Hourly flow 1 m3/h
FROM EQUALIZATION
Concentration of TSS in backwash water 100 mg/l
Daily dry sludge produced by equalization 36 kg/d
Daily sludge volume with dry 2.00% 1.8 m3/d
Hourly flow 0.1 m3/h
TOTAL
Daily production 996 kg/d
Daily flow 29 m3/d
Hourly flow 1,2 m3/h
Sludge concentration 34.1 kg/m3
The sludge thickening is a process aimed at reducing the sludge water content; the water will be clarified
and sent back to the river.
The thickener receives the sludge from the clarifier and from the equalization tank, at a concentration of 34
kg/m3. In this unit, the sludge concentration increases up to 50 kg/m3, and its volume is reduced to about
1/3 of the initial. The sludge settles in fact to the bottom, where it is collected in a central hopper thanks to
the action of scraper blades, and from here it is sent to subsequent units to be dried.
Eventually, the sludge dewatering will be operated on drying beds. In the first stage only 1 out of 3 groups
of beds shall be constructed (total 5 beds). The dewatered sludge will have an average concentration of
around 400 kg/m3.
Safe disposal of dried sludge
The dried sludge shall be disposed in the nearest suitable landfill for hazardous waste. The following table
shows the quantities of sludge expected to be disposed in landfills.
Table 4.26 – Rukungiri WTP dried sludge production
Sludge production m3/d m3/y
Initial year 2015 0.811 296
2016 0.825 301
2017 0.839 306
2018 0.852 311
2019 0.866 316
2020 0.879 321
2021 0.893 326
2022 0.906 331
2023 0.920 336
2024 0.933 341
2025 0.947 346
2026 0.960 351
Page 84
Sludge production m3/d m3/y

2027 0.974 356
2028 0.987 361
2029 1.001 366
Future year 2030 1.014 370
2031 1.156 422
2032 1.298 474
2033 1.440 526
2034 1.581 578
2035 1.723 629
2036 1.865 681
2037 2.007 733
2038 2.148 785
2039 2.290 837
Ultimate year 2040 2.432 888
Figure 4.10 – Rukungiri WTP dried sludge production
It is inferred from the Table and the Graph above that a typical 20 m3-capacity truck will be needed to
empty the drying beds once every 25 days (i.e. 15 trips per year) at the time of project implementation. It is
expected that the time between two consecutive truck trips will reduce to 20 days in 2030 (19 trips per
year) and to about 8 days in 2040 (44 trips per year).
The amount of sludge produced is quite small therefore in the initial years the construction of a dedicate
landfill in the proximity of the WTP is not deemed necessary. It is however understood that such facility
catering for the needs of Rukungiri municipality will be constructed when budget permit it in the near
future.
4.5.2.12 Complementary structures
The project will include the construction of complementary service facilities, such as:
 WTP fence
Page 85
 n. 1 power house
 n. 1 emergency electrical power
 n. 1 administration and workshop building
Eventually (2040 stage) the plant shall be provided with water service networks supplied by high lift pumps
which shall reach every point to be fed. Also, sewer network discharging waste water of houses and
administration building into septic tank properly designed shall be constructed. Septic tank shall be
provided with draining bottom aimed at discharging the liquid fraction into subsoil.
Page 86
5 DETAILED DESIGN – WATER SUPPLY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
5.1 DESIGN CRITERIA

5.1.1 Peak Factors
The water demand during a typical day will vary during different supply periods. The maximum hourly
demand during the peak period is considered as twice the average hourly demand. This will mean that the
distribution system will be designed for a peak factor of 2.
The daily water demand may vary over different seasons, and also depending on the transient population.
The factor of 1.20 is considered for computing the design daily demand, and all the water supply system
components are designed considering this demand.
5.1.2 Pipe Flow Velocities
The minimum and the maximum pipe flow velocities have been decided to avoid the deposition of the
particles, as well as erosion of the inner pipe surface. These values are considered as 0.60 m/s and 2.50 m/s
respectively.
5.1.3 Storage Capacity
The storage capacity of the service reservoir provides the balancing storage to cater for the variation of
hourly water demand, as against the constant inflow rate in the service reservoir.
The present practice in Uganda is to provide the service storage as 30% of the daily water demand. The
Consultant has confirmed the adequacy of this provision by preparing a typical Mass Diagram, by assuming
the constant inflow and variable supply pattern.
Required storage capacity derived from Mass Diagram is 21%. Therefore on the safer side, the service
storage as 30% of the daily water demand is adopted.
5.1.4 Operating Pressures
The minimum terminal pressure in the distribution system is considered as 10 m, whereas the maximum
pressure was restricted to 60 m, to an extent possible by introducing the Pressure Reducing Valves (PRV) in
the Distribution System. At very few demand nodes this may exceed 40 m, due to extremely low ground
levels.
5.1.5 Design Economic Life
The project is planned to be designed for a period of 25 years, as specified in the Terms of Reference. The
initial year, i.e. the year in which the project is likely to commissioned, is considered as 2015. Consequently
the design year shall be 2040. The intermediate stage of 15 years is considered for design of some
components, considering the economic useful life. The project components and the corresponding design
periods are summarized in the following table.
Table 5.1 – Project Components and design Period
Sr. No. Project component Design period in years
1 Intake works and related civil structures 25
2 Raw water pumps 15
3 Raw water pumping main 25
4 Water treatment plant 25
5 Pure water sumps, BPTs, storage reservoirs and Pump houses 25
6 Pure water pumps 15
Page 87
Sr. No. Project component Design period in years

7 Pure water transmission mains 25
8 Distribution system 25
The economic life and percentage rates for annual maintenance & repair works of various system
components have been decided, as below.
Table 5.2 – Economic life and annual M&R cost
Annual M & R cost
Component Economic life in years
(As % of capital cost)
Mechanical and Electrical equipment 15 5%
Pumping Pipelines 30 1%
Gravity Pipelines 30 0.5%
Civil structures and allied works 50 1%
5.1.6 System Operation Time

The water supply system is designed considering 24 hour operation of all system components. This will
mean raw & pure water pumping, as well as distribution system will work for 24 hours.
5.1.7 Pipe Diameters & Materials
Based on the standard practices in the Uganda and referring to the design manual, three types of pipe
materials i.e. HDPE, uPVC & DI has been selected for distribution and transmission system analysis which
has been agreed by the client. Same is elaborated in the table below. Minimum diameter considered for
hydraulic analysis is 75mm and lower diameters i.e. 50mm & 63mm are considered as intensification lines.
Table 5.3 - Pipe Diameters and Materials
Gravity System / Pumping Diameter & Material
Water Supply System
System 50mm to 110mm 125mm and above
Distribution System Gravity HDPE uPVC
Gravity Main All Pipes of HDPE
Transmission System
Pumping Main All Pipes of DI/HDPE
However, to reduce the initial investment, the option of using cheaper material for transmission pipelines
will be allowed:
 Pumping pipelines having Pressure Rate lower than PN20 can be either uPVC or HDPE (the former
being generally more economical).
 Pumping pipelines having Pressure Rate equal or greater than PN20 shall be either HDPE of DI (the
former being generally more economical), for technical reasons.
 Gravity pipelines having Pressure Rate lower than PN20 can be either uPVC or HDPE (the former
 Gravity pipelines having Pressure Rate equal or greater than PN20 shall be HDPE, for technical
reasons.
Page 88
5.2 TRANSMISSION SYSTEM

5.2.1 Raw Water Transmission System
5.2.1.1 Proposed Alignment
It has been proposed to construct an Intake structure on the Kahengye River at a location near the bridge
on the border between Rukungiri and Ntungamo districts (Rubumba LC1, Kabingo parish, Kebisoni sub-
county). From the intake, raw water will be pumped to the proposed conventional WTP having ultimate
year capacity 380.95 m3/h. WTP is located in the parish of Kabingo, in Kebisoni sub-county which is around
772 m from the Intake. Total length of the raw water Pumping main travels through the road except the
initial 90 m portion from intake to the main road which travels through the trees and bushes. Detailed
alignment of the proposed Pumping main is shown in the key map given in Figure 5.1
Figure 5.1 - Key Map of Rukungiri Raw Water Transmission System
5.2.1.2 Controlling Hydraulic Levels

The lowest suction level (LSL) in the Intake is 1397 m and the inlet level of WTP is 1477.70 m which clearly
indicates the static head difference of 80.70 m.
5.2.1.3 Hydraulic Design
The network analysis of the transmission system is conducted by using the Water Gems software. Raw
water Pumping main has been designed to cater the design flow of year 2040 i.e. 400 m3/hr. Based on the
hydraulic design, three pipes of OD 225 mm, HDPE are proposed from intake to WTP. Selection of pipe class
is verified from the water hammer analysis. The velocities of flow and water hammer for design flow of
year 2015 & year 2030 is also checked.
One separate line for discharging backwash water from WTP is also proposed from WTP to the river. Here
same alignment has been considered for the raw water Pumping main and the backwash water pipe.
Page 89
5.2.1.4 Proposed Valves and Appurtenances

Following types of valves are provided in the transmission system for the better functioning of transmission
system.
Air Valves
Air release valves are provided:
 To release air from a pipeline during the filling process
 To release air from a pipeline during normal operation
 To allow air to enter into a pipeline in order to prevent the occurrence of a vacuum.
Following considerations are kept in mind during placing of air valves:
1. At the peak point of pipeline along its path
2. At every 600 m on a straight run
3. Near to the steep slopes
4. After a Pump
5. Where negative slope changes
The choice of diameter of the air valves can be made using the values shown in Table 5.4
Table 5.4 - Suggested diameter of Air valves
Pipe (mm) Air Valve Diameter (mm)
ND<= 250 ND 50
ND from 300 to 400 ND 80
ND from 450 to 600 ND 100
Summary of proposed Air Valves on raw water transmission pipeline is given in Table 5.5
Table 5.5 - Summary of proposed Air Valves on raw water transmission pipeline
Air Valve
Pipe Diameter
Trunk No Pipe Material Diameter ND
(mm) Qty
(mm)
Trunk - 1 OD 225 HDPE / uPVC 50 5
Total 15
Scour Valves / Washouts
In the lowest points of the pipeline path provision of scour valves are necessary to be made in order to
keep the pipeline clean and ensure their maintenance as well as performance standards. Diameters of the
valves are calculated as half of the diameter of pipe on which valve is proposed and the same is rounded up
to the higher side.
Summary of proposed Scour Valves on raw water transmission pipeline are given in Table 5.6.
Page 90
Table 5.6 - Summary of proposed Scour Valves on raw water transmission pipeline
Scour Valve
Pipe Diameter
(mm) Qty
(mm)
Total 3
Sluice Valves
Sluice valves are provided in the system in such a way that whenever required selected sections of the
system can be isolated for maintenance or any other purpose. Diameter of the valve are considered as
same as that of the diameter of pipe on which valve is proposed. Being butterfly valves cheaper than sluice
valves for the larger diameters, the butterfly type is selected for diameters above 300 mm (included).
No sluice valves are proposed in the raw water transmission system.
Butterfly Valves
All branch pipelines are provided with butterfly valves at their points of connection to the main pipelines in
such a way that whenever required selected sections of the system can be isolated for maintenance or any
other purpose. Diameter of the valve are considered as same as that of the diameter of pipe on which valve
is proposed. Here in raw water transmission system there is no any branches, hence no butterfly valves are
provided in this system.
Non Return Valves
To avoid backflow in the pumping system, non-return valves are provided on each pump outlet. Diameter
of the valve are considered as same as that of the diameter of pipe on which valve is proposed.
Summary of proposed Non Return Valves on raw water transmission pipeline are given in Table 5.7
Table 5.7: Summary of proposed Non-Return Valves on raw water transmission pipeline
Non-Return Valve
Pipe Diameter
(mm) Qty
(mm)
Total 3
5.2.2 Pure Water Transmission System
A pure Water Transmission system comprises of two subsystems i.e. Pure Water Pumping System from
WTP to MBR and Pure Water Gravity System from MBR to all service reservoirs.
The transmission system is designed in order to cater for the possible future developments and expansions
of the water supply scheme.
The WTP pump house is designed keeping enough space for installing, besides the pumps considered in this
project to convey water to Mukazi MBR, 4 additional pumps. These pumps (2 pairs of 1 working + 1 standby
pump) will be ideally used to supply an ultimate peak demand of 1580 m3/d to Ntungamo district, and an
estimated 61 m3/d to Kabingo parish (the population living near the WTP, in Kebisoni subcounty).
Page 91
The population living along the proposed pure water gravity transmission main alignment has also been
taken into account by providing tee pieces at convenient places. These will be used either for laying new
pipelines to the nearby villages, or for direct installation of Public Stand Posts for the local users. The
location of the tees was selected in accordance with the MWE 2013 Water supply design manual i.e.
considering a maximum walking distance equal to 1 km, for sparsely populated rural areas. Totally a peak
water demand of 186 m3/d has been considered for supplying Karuhembe parish (the population living near
Mukazi MBR, in Kebisoni subcounty), 264 m3/d for supplying the parishes of Garubunda and Nyeibingo
(Kebisoni subcounty), 31 m3/d for supplying Nyakagyeme village (Nyakagyeme subcounty).
The peak water demand taken into account for sizing each branch of the pure water gravity transmission
system is shown in the following Figure.
Figure 5-2 – Design flows (m3/d) for Rukungiri Pure Water Transmission System
(* = pumping supply to Kabingo parish and Ntungamo district, ** = gravity supply to Karuhembe parish, *** = gravity supply to
Garubunda and Nyeibingo parish, **** = gravity supply to Nyakagyeme village)
5.2.3 Pure Water Pumping System

Pure Water will be pumped from WTP Pure Water Sump to the Proposed MBR which is situated at the
Mukazi hilltop around 4615 m from the WTP location. Out of total length, 350 m length of the pure water
Pumping main travels not on road. This is due to the location of MBR situated on hill top for which Pumping
main needs to travel along the edge of the hill. Remaining length i.e. around 4315 m is travelling through
the road only. Detailed alignment of the proposed Pumping main is shown in the following key map.
Page 92
Figure 5.3 – Key Plan of Rukungiri Pure Water Transmission System (Trunk number is shown in red colour)

Lowest Drawl Level (LDL) of Pure Water Sump is 1459.80 m from which treated water will be pumped to
the MBR whose Full Supply Level (FSL) is 1759.00 m which indicates the static head difference for the
Pumping main design is 299.20 m.
The network analysis of the transmission system is conducted by using the Water Gems software. Pure
water Pumping main has been designed to cater the design flow of year 2040 which is 305 m3/hr. Based on
the hydraulic design and techno economic analysis of the Pumping main, one single pipe of nominal
diameter 350 mm DI- Class 40bars is proposed from WTP pure water sump to MBR. The velocities of flow
and water hammer for design flow of year 2015 & year 2030 is also checked.
Salient features of the proposed Pure Water Pumping System are given in Table 5.8.
Table 5.8 – Salient Features of Pure Water Pumping System
Sr. No. Description Value Unit
1 LDL of Pure Water Sump (m) 1459.80 m
2 FSL of MBR (m) 1759.00 m
3 Daily Demand 7.32 MLD
4 Static Head 299.20 m
5 Hours of Pumping 24 Hour
6 Total Length of Pumping Main 4615 m
7 Proposed Pipe Diameter 350 mm
8 Pipe Material DI- Class 40bars --

The criteria and methodology for various valves are already described in section of Raw Water Transmission
System. These valves are accordingly provided.
Page 93
Air Valves
Summary of proposed Air Valves on Pure Water Pumping Main are given in below.
Table 5.9 – Summary of proposed Air Valves on Pure Water Pumping Main
Pipe Diameter Air Valve
Trunk No Pipe Material
(mm) Diameter ND (mm) Qty
Trunk - 1 ND 350 DI 80 12
Total 12

Summary of proposed Scour Valves on Pure Water Pumping Main are given in below
Table 5.10 – Summary of proposed Scour Valves on Pure Water Pumping Main
Pipe Diameter Scour Valve
Trunk - 1 ND 350 DI 200 8
Total 8
Non Return Valves

Summary of proposed Non Return Valves on Pure Water Pumping Main are given in below.
Table 5.11 – Summary of proposed Non-Return Valves on Pure Water Pumping Main
Pipe Diameter Non Return Valve
Trunk - 1 ND 350 DI 350 1
Total 1
5.2.4 Pure Water Gravity System

The strategic location of MBR allows to feed all service reservoirs by gravity which assures minimum 3 m
residual head at the reservoirs inlets and also avoids different pumping mains to different reservoirs, which
ultimately is a cost effective solution. Taking advantage of strategic location of MBR, an option of gravity
system has been worked out economical and the same has been considered for further analysis. A pure
water gravity system consists of following components:
1. Transmission Network of around 32.50 km
2. Service Reservoirs: 6 Numbers
3. Provision of Bulk supply in future to the en-route villages
Due to the limited availability of funds, the gravity transmission system will initially comprise only the main
pipeline going from Mukazi MBR to Rukungiri (trunks 2-4-8-9-10-11). For the remaining branches, tee
junctions will be setup, in order to allow the future expansion of the system also to the other towns
encompassed in the project.
Detailed alignment of the proposed pipes and the strategic locations of the reservoirs & MBR are shown in
Figure 5.3.
Page 94

LDL of MBR is 1754.00 m from which water will be supplied by gravity to all the downstream reservoirs.
Capacity of the MBR is worked out considering 2 hrs of storage for the cumulative daily water demand of
the downstream villages. The ESR proposed at Bwoma has maximum LSL of 1727.50 m as compared to the
other proposed reservoirs. Also the ESR proposed at Rwerere has minimum FSL of 1538.75 m as compared
to the other proposed reservoirs. But throughout the alignment, there are many variations in the elevations
and the minimum pipe invert level along the pipe alignment is 1509.00 m which occurs around 20.64 km
from the MBR. This means that the maximum static head difference needs to be considered for the design
purpose is 245.00 m.
The network analysis of the transmission system is conducted by using the Water Gems software. Main
trunk outlet of MBR has been designed to cater the design flow of year 2040 which is 294.42 m 3/hr. Details
of the proposed MBR are given below.
Table 5.12 – Details of Proposed MBR
Proposed MBR
MBR Name Capacity
(m3)
RU_R1 Mukazi Proposed MBR GSR / RCC 700 1754.00 1759.00
For each village considered in the planning, separate reservoirs have been considered for providing bulk
supply to each reservoir from the proposed transmission system. From the proposed transmission line,
there will be different branches to each proposed reservoirs and all are designed for the design flow of year
2040 from that particular branch.
Summary of proposed service reservoirs for each village with their details is given in Table 5.13.
Table 5.13 – Summary of proposed Service reservoirs considered for Transmission System
Water Details of service reservoirs
Water supply zone demand Capacity Status
(m3/d) (m )3
(E/P)
RU_R2 Rwanyakashesha Zone 3328.00 ESR / RCC 1000 P 1715.00 1720.50
RU_R3 Bwoma Zone 977.50 ESR / RCC 300 P 1722.00 1727.50
RU_R4 Kebisoni Zone 522.79 GSR / RCC 150 P 1641.50 1645.00
RU_R5 Buyanja Gravity Zone 589.62 GSR / RCC 150 P 1681.00 1684.50
RU_R6 Buyanja HLR Zone 1065.83 GSR / RCC 300 P 1705.00 1710.00
RU_R7 Rwerere Zone 287.81 ESR / RCC 100 P 1534.25 1538.75
Detailed geotechnical investigations shall be carried out in every site before the construction of reservoirs
takes place, to confirm the structural designs.
These investigations will include the following:
 Drilled boreholes at continuous coring with rotation system to 20 m below ground level, with
sampling and storage of representative samples (number 3 for each borehole);
 N° 2 soil samples in overburden and N° 1 sample in rock, to carry out the laboratory tests for
geotechnical characterization of soil;
Page 95
 Specific Geotechnical Laboratory Test, depending on the typology of extracted sample -

 Oedometric Consolidation Test for cohesive soils,
 Grain Size Analysis and Triaxial Test for granular soils,
 Point Load Test to determine rock strength indexes.
The details of the geotechnical investigations required in each site are described in RU.A.RP.03 –
Geotechnical Report (Geotechnical Monographs).
Care has been taken during design to ensure minimum residual pressure of 3 m at reservoir inlet. Pressure
reducing valves are proposed to restrict the residual pressure to prevent excessive pressure at reservoir
inlet. The velocities of flow for design flow of year 2015 & year 2030 is also checked.
Salient features of the proposed pure water gravity system are given in Table 5.14.
Table 5.14 – Salient Features of Pure Water Gravity System
Proposed Service Reservoirs
Sr. Buyanja
Description Unit Kebisoni Buyanja Rwerere Rwanyakas Bwoma
No. Gravity
GSR HLR ESR hesha ESR ESR
GSR
1 LDL of MBR (m) m 1754.00 1754.00 1754.00 1754.00 1754.00 1754.00
2 FSL of Reservoir m 1645.00 1710.00 1684.50 1538.75 1720.50 1727.50
3 Daily Demand MLD 0.52 1.07 0.59 0.29 3.33 0.10
4 Static Head m 109.00 44.00 69.50 215.25 33.50 26.50
Proposed Pipe
5 mm 160 200 140 140 280 250
Diameter
HDPE-/ HDPE-/ HDPE-/ HDPE-/ HDPE-/
6 Pipe Material -- HDPE-PN20
uPVC PN16 uPVC PN16 uPVC PN16 uPVC PN16 uPVC PN16

The criteria and methodology for various valves are already described in section of Raw Water Transmission
System. These valves are accordingly provided. In the following tables, Trunk-2 refers to the main pipeline
starting from Mukazi MBR outlet (RU_R1) up to the branch to Kebisoni, Trunk-3 refers to the branch
heading to RU_R4, Trunk-4 refers to the pipeline starting at the branching point to Kebisoni up to the
branching point to Buyanja, Trunk-5 refers to the pipeline starting at the branching point to Buyanja up to
the branching point to RU_R5, Trunk-6 refers to the branch heading to RU_R5, Trunk-7 refers to the branch
heading to RU_R6, Trunk-8 refers to the pipeline starting at the branching point to Buyanja up to the
branching point to Rukungiri, Trunk-9 refers to the pipeline starting at the branching point to Rukungiri up
to the branching point to RU_R2, Trunk-10 refers to the branch heading to RU_R2, Trunk-11 refers to the
branch heading to RU_R3, Trunk-12 refers to the branch heading to RU_R7.
Air Valves
Summary of proposed Air Valves on Pure Water Gravity Pipelines are given below.
Table 5.15 – Summary of proposed Air Valves on Pure Water Gravity Main
Page 96

Total 90
Summary of proposed Scour Valves on Pure Water Gravity Pipeline are given below.
Table 5.16 – Summary of proposed Scour Valves on Pure Water Gravity Main
Pipe Diameter Scour Valve
Total 65
Sluice Valves
Summary of proposed In-line Sluice/Butterfly Valves on Pure Water Gravity Pipeline are given below.
Table 5.17 – Summary of proposed In-line Sluice/Butterfly Valves on Pure Water Gravity Main
Pipe Sluice Valve Butterfly Valve
Pipe
Trunk No Diameter Diameter Diameter ND
Material Qty Qty
(mm) ND/OD (mm) (mm)
Total 27 33
Page 97
Butterfly Valves
Summary of proposed Butterfly Valves on Pure Water Gravity Pipeline are given below.
Table 5.18 – Summary of proposed Butterfly Valves on Pure Water Gravity Main
Pipe Diameter Butterfly Valve
Total 9
Pressure Reducing Valves (PRV)

Due to high static head difference between MBR location and all proposed service reservoirs, water
reaches to the inlet with very high head which can cause damages to the transmission system as well as to
the reservoir. Hence pressure reducing valves are provided at proper location to restrict the terminal
pressures in the system.
Summary of proposed Pressure Reducing Valves on Pure Water Gravity System is given in Table 5.19.
Table 5.19 – Summary of PRVs in Pure Water Transmission System
Valve Pressure
Elevation
ID Label Trunk No. Diameter Setting Flow (m³/d)
(m)
(mm) (m H2O)
181 PRV-1 Trunk - 3 1,647.71 100 11 523.00

182 PRV-2 Trunk - 6 1,681.19 100 14 590.00
183 PRV-3 Trunk - 7 1,669.56 200 50 1,066.00
184 PRV-4 Trunk - 12 1,510.00 150 40 288.00
5.3 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

As per the Terms of Reference, the distribution system is designed for Rukungiri Municipality. The
Municipal area is divided into two water supply zones i.e. Bwoma Zone & Rwanyakashesha Zone. The
formation of zones has been made based on the location, zonal demand, topographic survey data and
natural boundaries such as nalla, river, major roads, railway line etc.
Key map showing proposed water supply zones is given below.
Page 98
Figure 5.4 – Rukungiri Proposed Water Supply Zones
5.3.1 Hydraulic Design

The network analysis of the distribution system is conducted by using the Water GEMS software.
Considering the small sizes of the existing pipelines, entire new distribution network has been designed for
Rukungiri Municipality. Total length of proposed distribution network is 39.12 km. Due to the limited
availability of funds, neither the so-called “Primary Network” (i.e. the main pipelines of the proposed
network - around 12.5 km - to which the existing secondary distribution network will be connected) nor the
new secondary network (which will replace the existing network) will be laid at First stage. However, it is
recommended to lay at least the primary network earlier than year 2030.
Following Figure 5.5 gives the overview of proposed distribution network.
Page 99
Figure 5.5 – Rukungiri Distribution Network Map
The details of the water supply zones, such as gross water demand, and service reservoirs are presented in
the following Table 5.20.
Page 100
Table 5.20 – Summary of Water Supply Zones & Reservoirs

Water demand Details of service reservoirs
Water supply zone
(m3/day) Type/construction Capacity (m3) LDL (m) FSL (m)
Bwoma Zone 977.50 ESR / RCC 300 1722.00 1727.50
Rwanyakashesha Zone 3328.00 ESR / RCC 1000 1715.00 1720.50
The uPVC and HDPE pipes have been proposed in the distribution system. Minimum diameter used in the
network analysis is OD 75 mm. The lower diameters of OD 63 mm & OD 50 mm will be used for the smaller
lanes as service lines.
Summary of the proposed distribution pipes is given below.
Table 5.21 – Summary of Proposed Distribution Pipes
Length of Pipe (m)
Outer Diameters
Materials
(mm)
uPVC-PN10 HDPE-PN10
75 10783
90 741
110 4462
125 7814
140 2962
160 6673
180 3974
200 198
225 578
250
280 504
315 628
Total 23331 15986
5.3.2 Proposed Valves and Appurtenances
The criteria and methodology for air valves and scour valves are already described in section of Raw Water
Transmission System. These valves are accordingly provided.
Air Valves
Summary of proposed Air Valves on in the Distribution System are given in the following Table.
Table 5.22 – Summary of proposed Air Valves in Distribution System
Air Valve
Pipe Diameter (mm) Pipe Material
Diameter ND (mm) Qty
OD 75 HDPE 50 3
OD 125 uPVC 50 4
OD 160 uPVC 50 7
OD 180 uPVC 50 5
OD 280 uPVC 80 2
Total 21
Scour Valves
Summary of proposed Scour Valves in the Distribution System are given in the following Table.
Page 101
Table 5.23 – Summary of proposed Scour Valves in Distribution System

Scour Valve
OD75 HDPE 50 4
OD110 HDPE 65 1
OD125 uPVC 65 2
OD140 uPVC 75 1
OD160 uPVC 100 3
OD180 uPVC 100 2
Total 13
Sluice Valves
Summary of proposed Sluice Valves in the Distribution System are given in the following Table.
Table 5.24 – Summary of proposed Sluice Valves in Distribution System
Sluice Valve
OD 110 HDPE 100 6
OD 125 uPVC 100 3
OD 140 uPVC 100 1
OD 160 uPVC 150 4
OD 180 uPVC 150 3
OD 200 uPVC 200 1
OD 225 uPVC 200 2
Total 20
Pressure Reducing Valves (PRV)
The details of the PRVs are listed in the following Table.
Table 6.6 – Summary of PRVs in Distribution System
Valve Pressure Pressure Hydraulic Hydraulic Head
Elevation Flow
ID Label Diameter (From) (To) Grade Grade loss
(m) (m³/day)
(mm) (m H2O) (m H2O) (From) (m) (To) (m) (m)
474 PRV-1 1,654.00 200 56 28 2,302.00 1,710.00 1,682.07 27.94
475 PRV-2 1,648.57 250 62 12 1,776.00 1,711.04 1,660.60 50.43
476 PRV-3 1,651.38 150 60 18 1,361.00 1,711.61 1,669.43 42.19
477 PRV-4 1,661.83 200 51 25 300.00 1,713.40 1,686.89 26.51
Page 102
6 DETAILED DESIGN – SANITATION
6.1 INTRODUCTION
Actions that need to be taken in order to implement the sanitation system are summarized in the following
Table.
Table 6.6 – Summary of actions for sanitation sector
Action Included in the present project Implementation timeframe
Population awareness and private latrines
no as soon as possible
improvement
New public latrines and showers detailed design as soon as possible
Co-composting plant detailed design before 2030
Central sewage system general layout after 2040
Wastewater treatment lagoons general layout after 2040
6.2 PRIVATE LATRINE IMPROVEMENT

Although it is the responsibility of households to provide for their own sanitation facilities, this is often not
possible for a variety of reasons. There is need for some intervention to improve the level of coverage,
particularly the pit latrines for the low-income groups.
In particular, the local communities shall be encouraged to construct EcoSan toilets rather than traditional
pit latrines. The main advantage of properly managed EcoSan toilets are that they do not smell, they can
always easily be emptied (unlike VIP and traditional pit latrines), and that the manure can be readily used
as agricultural amendment. Ash to be added in the toilet after usage is easily available and can be collected
from rural kitchens using firewood.
Lot of advantages make EcoSan toilets advisable, namely:
 they do not require a pit and therefore can be cheaper and more suitable than pit latrines in areas
where pit excavation is difficult – e.g. areas with poor soils, high groundwater or rocky ground;
 they do not need to be relocated as faeces and urine are removed and disposed of on a regular
basis;
 urine and treated faeces can be recycled for agricultural purposes;
 urine and faeces are kept separate which makes it easier to remove them from the toilet and
simplifies the disposal process;
 toilets can be used immediately after construction;
 it is not necessary to have a reliable source of water to flush excreta because they are dry toilets.
Main challenge in EcoSan toilets usage is a proper operation and clear instructions to users. Thus, besides
an awareness campaign to inform population, it is advisable to provide clear instructions for toilet correct
use.
6.3 PUBLIC LATRINES IMPROVEMENT

Based on Client’s request, the following interventions have been considered:
 two new waterborne latrines with flush toilets (six stances), a urinal and two showers at Greenland
in the city centre (LAT 1) and at Ntungamo stage (LAT 2);
Page 103
 two shower boxes beside existing latrine near the central car park (SH 1) and gravel bed for water
infiltration coming from septic tank connected to existing latrine;
 two shower boxes beside existing latrine near the market place (SH 2) and gravel bed for water
infiltration coming from septic tank connected to existing latrine.
New waterborne latrines, having six stances, are supposed to be able to serve about 450 occasional user
per day each, corresponding to 90 equivalent inhabitants.
Due to the fact that LAT 1 is in the city centre, it has been decided to collect effluent from its septic tank
towards LAT 2 and to provide a unique gravel bed for effluent filtration and percolation into the soil. The
PVC pipe carrying effluent from LAT 1 to LAT 2 has a nominal diameter of 200 mm and follows the natural
ground slope (about 5.8%), since it is enough to ensure a proper velocity to the effluent. Pipe crown is 1.00
m depth, in order to protect pipe.
Figure 6.1 – Localization of interventions regarding public latrine improvements.
Water discharge from new shower boxes beside existing latrines is supposed to by-pass existing septic tank,
due to the fact that organic load of wastewater coming from showers is supposed to be low. Due to the
increase of the amount of discharged water, it is necessary to provide a proper infiltration area for effluent
of septic tank. Gravel beds have been placed westwards in the nearest areas not occupied by buildings. A
buffer native vegetation will prevent soil contamination and river pollution.
6.3.1 New Waterborne Latrines
The public latrine with six stances is divided in a male and a female section with separate entrance. Near
the entrance there will be a reception area. In the male section two flush toilets will be present, one of
Page 104
them provided with devices for disabled. There will be a urinal, too and a shower box. In the female section
there will be four flush toilets, one of them provided with devices for disabled. There will be also a shower
box. Both sections will have a hand wash basin.
Figure 6.2 – Plan of the new waterborne latrines with six stances.
Collected wastewater will pass through a septic tank (external dimensions H x W x L = 2.70m x 2.80m x
4.30m for an internal volume of 16.50 m3) before being discharged in a gravel bed for further treatment
through filtration. A unique square gravel bed with depth 2.00 m and side 10.00 m located near Ntungamo
place will receive effluent from both septic tanks. Moreover, two gravel beds with triangular surface (half
surface area compared to square bed) will receive effluents from existing septic tanks whose effluent will
be increased by showers addition and needs to be carried away from the residential central area.Shower
Boxes Beside Existing Latrines
Besides the new waterborne latrines, interventions include also the addition of shower boxes to two
existing latrines in the city centre, namely to the existing latrines near the central car park and near the
market place. In each existing latrine two showers will be added: one in the male section and one in the
female section.
Figure 6.3 – Plan of the showers to be added to existing latrines.
Page 105
6.4 CO-COMPOSTING PLANT

6.4.1 Plant Localization
According to Client indications, a large area in the valley westward the city centre (Kinyasano valley) has
been considered to place the co-composting plant. Since also one of the future wastewater treatment
lagoons will be placed in the same area, the co-composting plant has been placed in the upper zone of the
indicated area, in order to leave space for the river and for the lagoons in the bottom of the valley.
Moreover access for trucks and machineries to the plant will be easier since it is near a road. The shape of
the plant has been defined according to topography, in order to minimize soil excavation and filling.
6.4.2 Reference Population
Since it is advisable that the use of EcoSan toilets becomes common in the entire municipality and that
private traditional pit and VIP latrines are substituted by EcoSan toilets, it is possible to suppose that in the
future only a part of population will need to empty their toilets and to deliver faecal sludge to a central
treatment plant. Indeed, in case EcoSan are used, faeces decomposition and stabilization occurs inside the
storage vaults of the EcoSan latrine, then latrine can be emptied easily and the manure can be readily used
as agricultural amendment. In this way, each household (or group of households using the same toilet) is
independent: no need for a centralized service for faecal sludge transport, treatment and disposal.
It can be supposed that most of EcoSan toilets will be implemented in the countryside. On the contrary, in
the city centre, compost is difficult to be used directly by the toilet users. Thus, it is supposed that
population served by the central plant is 100% of population of city centre, 90% of population within old
Town Council boundaries not included in the city centre, and 60% of population of Municipality not
included in the old Town Council boundaries.
Figure 6.4 – Percentages of total population that have been considered for central plant design.
Page 106
Table 6.1 – Details regarding population density and population served by central co-composting plant.
Density in Served Served
Area Population (2040)
Zone 2040 population (2040) population (2040)
[ha] [inhab]
[inhab/ha] [%] [inhab]
Municipality TOT 6,521 9.4 61,202
Town Council TOT 1,436 15.7 22,477
Municipality – Town Council 5,085 7.6 38,725 60% 23,235
Town Council – city centre 1,278 9.4 11,996 90% 10,796
City centre 158 66.4 10,481 100% 10,481
TOTAL 44,512
Reference population to be considered for co-composting plant design is 44,512 inhabitants.
6.4.3 Sludge Characteristics and Amount
As resulting from site investigations, most of the people uses pit latrines (79% pit latrines + 16% VIP) and
only high income population and hotels have septic tank systems (2%). 3% of population uses EcoSan
toilets. If these percentages are applied to reference population, it results that in 2040 42,287 inhabitants
will be served by non-waterborne latrines, 890 by waterborne latrines and 1,335 by EcoSan. Moreover four
waterborne public latrines have been taken into account, each one of six stances and thus accounting for
90 equivalent inhabitants, for a total of 360 PE using public waterborne latrines. Total PE using waterborne
latrines results to be 1,250. In conclusion, co-composting plant is designed to receive faecal sludge from:
 42,287 PE using non-waterborne latrines;
 1,250 PE using waterborne latrines.
Sludge characteristics depends on the type of latrines that are used.
Table 6.2 – Sludge characterizations depending on latrine type.
Sludge type Solids content [%] Density [t/m3]
Sludges from non-waterborne latrines 40% 0.9
Sludges from waterborne latrines (septic tanks) 4% 1.0
Table 6.3 – Sludge to be treated in the co-composting plant.

Sludge type Sludge volume [m3/yr] Sludge amount [t/yr]
Sludges from non-waterborne latrines 3,806 3,425
Sludges from waterborne latrines (septic tanks) 229 229
TOTAL sludge to be treated 4,035 3,654
6.4.4 Organic Fraction of Municipal Solid Waste
In order to facilitate composting process of sludge and to obtain a good compost quality, organic fraction of
municipal solid waste will be mixed with faecal sludge and composted together. It has been assumed that
per capita solid waste production rate will be 0.70 kg/p/d in 2040, with a percentage of organic fraction of
70%. Thus, assuming to serve the reference population, the amount of municipal organic waste produced in
2040 will be 7,961 t/yr, corresponding to 22 t/d. Assuming a collection efficiency of 90% in 2040, the
amount of waste arriving to the co-composting plant to be treated, will be 7,165 t/yr, corresponding to
14,330 m3/yr for a waste density of 0.5 t/m3.
Page 107
6.4.5 Composting Process and Required Area

To have a good mix between sludges and organic waste, it is advisable to have a volume ratio between
sludge and waste ranging between 1:2 and 1:3 in case of dewatered sludges and between 1:5 and 1:10 in
case of liquid sludges, thus it is necessary to dewater sludge coming from septic tanks before it is mixed
with the organic waste to be composted.
After a period of about 15-20 days, when septage reach a proper moisture content to be spadable (around
20% of solids content), it can be mixed with sludge coming from non-waterborne latrines and organic
fraction of municipal solid waste coming from separate waste collection. Mixed material will be composted
in windrows. If mixing is difficult, it is possible to form directly the windrows alternating a layer of organic
waste (about 20 cm) and a layer of sludge (about 5-10 cm).
Figure 6.5 – Scheme of co-composting process.
It is fundamental to ensure the occurrence of aerobic processes in the whole windrows in order to have a
final compost free of pathogens, safe to be handled and to be used in agriculture. A general rule of thumb
for pathogen suppression is to maintain the composting process at 55°C to 65°C for 3 consecutive days.
The regular turning of the compost windrows enhances aeration, ensuring exothermic aerobic processes
occurrence that heat up the core of the compost windrows.
After a period of about 90 days, compost is done and it can be stored in a covered area for final refinement
and to be sold/delivered to farmers or other purchasers/users.
In the co-composting plant the main units are:
 receiving and mixing area (about 800 m2);
 drying beds (about 290 m2);
 treatment pond (about 110 m2);
 compost windrows (about 10,400 m2);
 storage area (about 230 m2).
Page 108
Figure 6.6 – General layout of the co-composting plant.
It is necessary to leave enough space around units to ensure the possibility of passage for trucks or other
means used during the plant operation . The total area of the plant results to be about 1.32 ha.
6.4.5.1 Drying beds
The septage will be dewatered by drying beds. The permeable bed, when loaded with sludge, collects
percolated leachate and allows the sludge to dry by evaporation. The bottom of the drying bed is lined with
perforated pipes that drain away the leachate. On top of the pipes are layers of sand and gravel that
support the sludge and allow the liquid to infiltrate and collect in the pipe.
Figure 6.7 – Scheme of unplanted drying beds.
Source: Tilley, E. et al, 2008. Compendium of Sanitation Systems and Technology.
The drying period has been assumed to be at least 14 days. When the sludge is dried, it must be separated
from the sand layer and mixed with other sludge coming from non-waterborne latrines and organic solid
waste to be composted. Since during dried sludge removal some sand can be lost, it must be replaced when
the layer gets thin. The effluent that is collected in the drainage pipes is subsequently treated in a pond.
Drying beds need to have a net area of 80 m2. The drying beds area has been divided in four beds.
Page 109
Figure 6.8 – Drying beds plant.
Two equal lines of drying beds have been designed, in order to face up the case of simultaneous emptying
of two public septic tanks or the empting of private septic tanks while one line of beds is occupied by drying
sludge from public latrines. Thus, the total net area of drying beds is 160 m2. Accounting also for passage
area for trucks and ancillary areas around the beds, the total area occupied by beds is about 290 m2.
The bed media is constituted by the following layers:
 A layer of 10 cm of sand;
 A layer of 10 cm of fine gravel with diameter 10-15 mm;
 A layer of 20 cm of coarse gravel with diameter 25 -30 mm
6.4.5.2 Treatment pond
Leachate coming from drying beds enters a shallow treatment pond which has the function of:
 reducing organic and nutrients load;
 ensuring pathogens die-off.
Pond will have shallow water (0.40 m) in order to achieve pathogens removal through UV. In order to have
a good performance, treatment pond requires constant maintenance to remove algae that will grow easily
due to the nutrient presence in the leachate and to the fact that light can penetrate the shallow water.
Removed algae can be mixed with the sludge and the organic waste to be composted.
In the pond organic load will be reduced thanks to aerobic processes due to bacterial activity. In order to
achieve a good reduction of organic load, a hydraulic retention time of 30 days has been set and a peak
flow of about 1 m3/d has been considered (when a public latrine is emptied). A total of 110 m2 have been
considered.
6.4.5.3 Compost windrows
In order to assess the required area for compost windrows, proper values have been assigned to design
parameter. Namely the duration of composting cycle has been set at 90 days, including 30 days of
Page 110
decomposition and 60 days of maturation. During composting process, it has been considered a mass
reduction of composted material of 70% and it has been assumed that volume decrease during composting
cycle is linear. Moreover a final compost density has been assumed, namely 0.52 t/m3.
To ensure proper aeration in the compost windrows and an easy turning, the width of the windrows has
been set at 3.00 m and a resulting height of 1.50 m has been calculated assuming an angle of repose of 45°.
Consequently the required total length of compost windrows results to be 1,348 m. Every day about 22 m
of new compost windrow will be built up.
Figure 6.9 – Compost windrow section.
A maximum of 1,600 m of compost windrows can be managed in the plant.

During plant operation, compost turning will be every three days in the beginning of composting cycle (day
3, 6, 9, 12 and 15), then every five days (day 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 and 45) and in the second half of the
composting cycle every 10 days (day 55, 65, 75, 85). At day 90th the compost will be ready to be transferred
in the storage area for final refinement and distribution to users. At least one skid steer loader will be
required in order to facilitate and speed up turning operations. Every day about 90 m of compost windrow
will require to be turned.
In the compost windrows area, the ground has a slope of 0.5 % in order to drain storm water towards the
drainage channel along the fence in the south and south-east sides of the plant.
6.4.6 Possible Future Improvements
The plant design has been developed taking into account local background, using low cost technologies and
solutions with low energy intensity. Few machineries are used in the plant and low maintenance is
required. No pumps or other electromechanical equipments are present and plant does not require a great
deal of regular care to function at an acceptable level, indeed it is intended to function every day with the
efficiency envisaged even if there is no highly qualified operational staff which is closely supervised by an
experienced management. Thus, present project can be considered as a base solution that can be improved
in the future in case new funds are allocated to improve plant functioning.
Some possible improvements are:
 provide coverage for the drying beds in order to avoid interference by rainfall in the drying process;
 provide coverage for the compost windrows in order to avoid interference by rainfall in the
composting process;
 add initial shredding of waste and final sieving of compost to improve compost quality (need for
relatively expensive machineries);
Page 111
 add a weigh station to register sludge and waste amounts conferred to the plant;
 use adequate instruments to control composting process (measure temperature, moisture content,
etc);
 analyse samples and characterize materials during the entire process (received material - namely
sludges and organic waste -, compost during the process, final compost, water entering and exiting
treatment pond)
Figure 6.10 – Example of covered drying beds in Kampala and covered compost windrows.
6.5 GENERAL LAYOUT OF FUTURE CENTRAL SYSTEM (AFTER 2040 SCENARIO)

Even if before 2040 it is not viable to implement a central sewerage system in Rukungiri, after 2040, due to
the increase of population and of per capita water provision, it could become possible to implement a
central sewerage system. It is likely that progressive improvements of sanitation facilities will follow these
steps:
 increase of water supply level of service leading to have house connections and thus waterborne
sanitation systems (flush toilets);
 development of private septic tanks until a central sewerage will be present to collect wastewater;
 subsequent connection of septic tanks to central sewerage system.
In this natural sequence it happens that, before central sewage, the construction of septic tanks occurs,
therefore, when the central sewerage system will be developed, septic tanks will act like a buffer between
private toilets and piped network. This means that major part of solids contained in wastewater are
accumulated in the septic tanks, while effluent collected in the piped network will have a low solids content
and a low organic load compared to fresh wastewater that is directly collected in a central pipes system.
Effluent characteristics and space availability will make it viable to implement a wastewater treatment
system based on lagoons.
6.5.1 Population and consumption projections
The considered year for the future scenario is 2060 and the same grow rate used until 2040 has been
considered (1.5%). Thus population of Rukungiri Town Council in 2060 is expected to be 30,273.
Wastewater treatment lagoons have been dimensioned to serve the entire population of Town Council in
2060.
Page 112
Per capita water provision in 2060 has been assumed to be higher than per capita water provision used in
the present project, thus wastewater production rate has been estimated to be around 100 l/p/d.
Therefore the total amount of wastewater to be treated is 3,027 m3/d.
6.5.2 Central Sewage System Layout
Due to the topographic characteristics of Rukungiri Town Council, it is advisable to collect wastewater
towards the bottom of the valleys surrounding the city centre and avoid as much as possible to pump
wastewater, in order to save energy. Moreover, Municipality already identified some possible areas to
place the wastewater treatment lagoons that are in the bottom of surrounding valleys, namely:
 Kinyasano valley;
 Kashangowa valley;
 Nyakibale valley.
Thus, the layout of the central sewerage system has been defined in order to collect wastewater towards
the lagoons sites. Most of the network can work well following natural slope of the ground.
Figure 6.11 – Town Council subbasins, sewage network layout and localization of wastewater treatment lagoons.
The slope of the ground where pipes are placed is on average about 3%. With such a slope, a per capita
wastewater production rate of 100 l/p/d and considering the division of the Town Council in subbasins,
Page 113
pipes with ND 200-250 mm are considered suitable for the entire network, indeed they are able to carry
away wastewater produced by 12,000-25,000 inhabitants respectively. It is not advisable to use pipes with
diameter smaller than 200 mm because they become clogged easily.
The preliminary cost estimates for the sewerage system is reported in the following Tables.
Table 6.4 – Preliminary cost estimates for PVC pipes network
Depth (ground-
Diameter Length Rate Cost
crown)
[mm] [m] [UGX/m] [UGX]
[m]
200 1.00 - 2.00 40,386 380,000 15,347,000,000
200 2.00 - 4.00 0 407,000 0
250 1.00 - 2.00 0 415,000 0
250 2.00 - 4.00 0 448,000 0
315 1.00 - 2.00 0 462,000 0
315 2.00 - 4.00 0 504,000 0
400 1.00 - 2.00 0 515,000 0
400 2.00 - 4.00 0 567,000 0
500 1.00 - 2.00 0 574,000 0
500 2.00 - 4.00 0 637,000 0
Total 40,386 Total 15,347,000,000
For the network, the cost of a gravity sewerage with inspection in-line manholes has been considered,
without considering the cost of the private connections and assuming sewerage alignment along roads or
public land, backfilling of the trench and compaction without finishing layer.
6.5.3 Wastewater Treatment Lagoons Layout
Selected wastewater treatment method is a lagoons system. The ponds can be used individually, or linked
in a series for improved treatment. There are three types of ponds, (1) anaerobic, (2) facultative and (3)
aerobic (maturation), each with different treatment and design characteristics.
The anaerobic pond reduces solids and BOD as a pre-treatment stage. A facultative pond is shallower than
an anaerobic pond and both aerobic and anaerobic processes occur within the pond. Maturation ponds are
designed mainly for pathogen removal.
Page 114
Figure 6.12 – Wastewater treatment lagoons scheme.
Source: Tilley, E. et al, 2008. Compendium of Sanitation Systems and Technology.
In a preliminary pre-dimensioning of the ponds, the following parameters have been assumed.
Table 6.5 – Parameters used in the lagoon dimensioning.
Parameter Unit of measure Value
ANAEROBIC PONDS
Depth of the pond m 4.00
Hydraulic retention time days 10
Number of ponds n. 3
Desludging interval months 60
FACULTATIVE PONDS
AEROBIC POND
Treatment ponds have been design in order to achieve a good treatment performance and to ensure the
respect of the discharge limits imposed by the law, namely 50 mg/l of BOD5 and 100 mg/l for COD. Total net
water areas required to achieve the treatment objectives are shown in table below.
Table 6.6 – Required water net area per each treatment step.
Pond type Water net area [ha] Water net area [%]
Anaerobic ponds 0.86 7.8%
Facultative ponds 9.78 88.3%
Aerobic ponds 0.43 3.9%
TOTAL 11.07 100%
Page 115
Since there will be three WW treatment ponds plants (in Kinyasano, Kashangowa and Nyakibale valleys),
population has been divided into three parts, depending on subbasins defined through the sewage layout.
In particular, the ponds of Kinyasano valley are expected to treat about 40% of produced wastewater, the
ponds of Kashangowa valley 35% and the ponds of Nyakibale valley about 25%.
Table 6.7 – Ponds water net area, divided by plants.
Anaerobic ponds Anaerobic ponds Anaerobic ponds
Name Afferent population
area [ha] area [ha] area [ha]
Kinyasano valley plant 40% 0.34 3.91 0.17
Kashangowa valley plant 35% 0.30 3.42 0.15
Nyakibale valley plant 25% 0.22 2.44 0.11
TOTAL water net area 0.86 9.78 0.43
The land required for dams, banks and passage around ponds has been added to the water net area,
obtaining a total area of ponds increased of about 48-54%, as reported in table below.
Table 6.8 – Area increased due to land requirements for dams, banks and passage around ponds.
Name Water net area [ha] Total ponds area [ha] Area increased [%]
Kinyasano valley plant 4.43 6.80 54%
Kashangowa valley plant 3.87 5.93 53%
Nyakibale valley plant 2.77 4.11 48%
Since ponds are localized in the bottom of the valleys, it is necessary to assess the flooding risk to which
they are subjected, being always present streams beside the ponds area. At this stage, a buffer zone around
the river has been identified for each lagoons plant and it has been considered as river preservation area.
Figure 6.13 – General layout of WW treatment ponds plant in Kinyasano valley.
Figure 6.14 – General layout of WW treatment ponds plant in Kashangowa valley.
Page 116
Figure 6.15 – General layout of WW treatment ponds plant in Nyakibale valley.
The preliminary cost estimates for the lagoon system is reported in the following Table.
Table 6.9 – Preliminary cost estimates for WW treatment ponds plant
depth of pond area Rate cost

[m] [m2] [UGX/m2] [UGX]
5.00 0 630,000 -
4.00 13,365 500,000 6,682,000,000
1.30 0 160,000 -
1.00 102,528 125,000 12,816,000,000
0.70 4,847 90,000 436,000,000
SubTotal Ponds 120,739 19,934,000,000
Passage 47,706 60,000 2,862,000,000
TOTAL WWTP 168,445 22,796,000,000
Costs have been roughly estimated without taking into account the topography of the area.
Unit costs for ponds have been calculated as one third of the parametric costs obtained for the total
excavation, including 5 cm of sand and the HDPE layer. This reduction is justified by the fact that it has been
hypothesized that ponds will be constructed partially excavating soil and partially containing water with
banks, exploiting natural topography, thus it will not be necessary to excavate the total depth of the pond,
but only a part.
During detailed design, it will be fundamental to find an optimal plano-altimetric configuration, allowing to
have a balance between excavation and filling. Costs are referred to a balanced solution.
Costs do not include expenses for land acquisition.
Page 117
7 PREPARATION OF BILL OF QUANTITIES AND TENDER DOCUMENTS
The consultant prepared a detailed Bill of Quantities for Rukungiri water supply and sanitation works. To
reduce the initial investment, a subdivision of the works to be implemented immediately (referred to as
‘2030 stage’) and the less urgent ones which can be postponed (‘2040 stage’) was proposed by the
Consultant at the time of the draft detailed design. However, due to the limited availability of funds, the
Client requested the Consultant to further reduce the initial investment, by means of postponing even
more works to the later construction phases, and a new subdivision of works was presented at the time of
the final detailed design.
The tender documents are drafted for the so-called ‘First stage’ (i.e. first lot of works) which represents the
initial setup of the 2030 stage described in the detailed design. Precisely, the First stage complies with the
following bullet list
 WTP: all civil works will have to be implemented for the First stage, except for 4 clariflocculators, 2
group of drying beds, and the second compartment of the disinfection tank. All redundant
mechanical and electrical works (i.e. all standby pumps, standby screens, backup transformer) have
been shifted to later phases.
 Reservoirs: in 2030 stage only the reservoir R1 (700 m3 Ground Service Reservoir) shall be
constructed, it will act as storage for all the existing system. This will work in the initial years
because the water demand is expected to grow linearly, while this GSR is already sized for the final
demand. In the meanwhile the existing reservoirs at Rwanyakashesha and Bwoma can be used (the
transmission pipelines shall be erected so that the water is discharged inside the tanks), whereas
the proposed reservoirs R2÷R7 will be constructed at later phases, next to the existing reservoirs.
 Transmission Lines: the pumping transmission systems will be laid immediately, whereas the
gravity transmission system will initially comprise only the main pipeline going from Mukazi MBR to
Rukungiri (trunks 2-4-8-9-10-11, corresponding to red line and pink line in Figure 7.1). For the
remaining branches, tee junctions will be setup, in order to allow the future expansion of the
system also to the other towns encompassed in the project.
 Distribution Network of Rukungiri: the entire distribution network – both Primary Network (around
12.5 km out of 39 km total) and Secondary Network - will be laid in later phases.
 Sanitation system: only 2 waterborne public latrines are considered to be carried out immediately
in the first stage.
To further reduce the initial investment, the option of using cheaper material for transmission pipelines will
be allowed:
 Pumping pipelines having Pressure Rate lower than PN20 can be either uPVC or HDPE (the former
 Pumping pipelines having Pressure Rate equal or greater than PN20 shall be DI, for technical
reasons.
 Gravity pipelines having Pressure Rate lower than PN20 can be either uPVC or HDPE (the former
 Gravity pipelines having Pressure Rate equal or greater than PN20 shall be HDPE, for technical
reasons.
Page 118
Figure 7.1 – Project sites
(Legend: raw water transmission from Intake to WTP (RU_W1) in black colour, pure water pumping main from WTP to
reservoir RU_R1 in orange colour, remaining lines are gravity transmission pipelines)
Page 119
REFERENCES
2006 IPCC Guidelines for National Greenhouse Gas Inventories, Volume 5: Waste, Chapter 2, Waste
Generation, Composition and Management Data.
Aalbers, H., 1999. Resource Recovery from Faecal Sludge using Constructed Wetlands - A survey of the
literature. WASTE advisers on urban environment and development, Gouda, the Netherlands.
Conradin, K. et al, 2010. The SSWM Toolbox. Seecon International Gmbh, Basel. URL: , visited 15th
September 2014.
Directorate of Water Resources Management, Ministry of Water and Environment. National Water
Resources Assessment Report, 2013.
Government of Uganda, Ministry of Water and Environment. The Urban Water Supply and Sanitation
Gender Strategy – Popular Version, 2013.
Government of Uganda, Ministry of Water and Environment. Water Supply and Sanitation sub-Sector
Gender Strategy (2010-15)
Johannessen, B., 2008. Building Rural Roads, Chapter 7: Drainage. International Labour Organization (ILO),
Regional Office for Asia and Pacific, Bangkok, Thailand.
Koné, D. and Strauss, M., 2004. Low-cost Options for Treating Faecal Sludges (FS) in Developing Countries –
Challenges and Performance. In: Proceedings, 9th International IWA Specialist Group Conference on
Wetlands Systems for Water Pollution Control and 6th International IWA Specialist Group Conference on
Waste Stabilisation Ponds, Avignon, France, 27th September – 01st October 2004.
M&E Associates Ltd, Feasibility Study and Environmental Assessments and Economic Analysis of Budaka,
Kadama, Tirinyi-Kibuku, Pallisa, Lyantonde, Katwe-Kabatoro and Busia Town Water Supply and Sanitation
Systems. Katwe-Kabatoro Town Feasibility Study Report, 2012.
M&E Associates Ltd, Rukungiri municipality detailed design report, 2011.
Montangero, A. and Strauss, M., 2002. Faecal Sludge Treatment. International Institute for Hydraulic and
Environmental Engineering (IHE), Delft, the Netherlands and Swiss Federal Institute of Aquatic Science and
Technology (EAWAG), Dübendorf, Switzerland.
Morel A. and Diener S., 2006. Greywater Management in Low and Middle-Income Countries, Review of
different treatment systems for households or neighbourhoods. Swiss Federal Institute of Aquatic Science
and Technology (EAWAG), Dübendorf, Switzerland.
Ojok, J. et al, 2012. Rate and Quantities of Household Solid Waste Generated in Kampala City, Uganda.
Science Journal of Environmental Engineering Research.
Republic of Uganda, Directorate of Water Development, Ministry of Water & Environment. Water Supply
Atlas, 2010.
Republic of Uganda, Ministry of Water and Environment. Water supply design manual – Second edition.
Republic of Uganda. The Public Health Act, Cap. 281
Page 120
Schneider, F. et al, 2010. Shadow Economies All over the World. The World Bank Development Research
Group Poverty and Inequality Team & Europe and Central Asia Region Human Development Economics
Unit.
SONES Societe Nationale des Eaux du Senegal, Programme eau potable et assainissement du millenaire –
Pepam 2015.
Strande, L. et al, 2014. Faecal Sludge Management - Systems Approach for Implementation and Operation.
IWA Publishing, London, UK.
Strauss, M. et al, 1997. Treatment of sludges from on-site sanitation – low-cost options. Elsevier Science
Ltd, Great Britain.
Strauss, M. et al, 1999. Treating Faecal Sludges in Ponds. Swiss Federal Institute of Aquatic Science and
Technology (EAWAG), Dübendorf, Switzerland and Water Research Institute (CSIR), Accra, Ghana.
Strauss, M. et al, 2003. Co-composting of Faecal Sludge and Municipal Organic Waste - A Literature and
State-of-Knowledge Review. Swiss Federal Institute of Aquatic Science and Technology (EAWAG),
Dübendorf, Switzerland and International Water Management Institute (IWMI), Accra, Ghana.
Tilley, E. et al, 2008. Compendium of Sanitation Systems and Technology. Swiss Federal Institute of Aquatic
Science and Technology (EAWAG), Dübendorf, Switzerland.
Uganda Bureau of Statistics (2002). The 2002 Uganda Population and Housing Census, Report. October
2006, Kampala, Uganda
UNEP DTIE IETC (United Nations Environment Programme, Division of Technology, Industry and Economics,
International Environmental Technology Centre), 2000. Environmentally Sound Technologies in wastewater
treatment for the implementation of the UNEP Global Programme of Action (GPA) "Guidance on Municipal
Wastewater", Chapter 5: Sludge treatment, reuse and disposal. UNEP, Nairobi, Kenya. URL: , visited 15th
September 2014.
WHO (World Health Organization), 2005. Pour Flush Latrines, Fact Sheet 3.6. URL: , visited 15th September
2014.
World Bank, 2005. Toolkit on Hygiene, Sanitation and Water in schools. URL: , visited 15th September 2014.
World Water Assessment Programme. National Water Development Report: Uganda, 2005.
Page 121
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

Kampala, UGANDA

DETAILED DESIGN OF RUKUNGIRI
Consultant:
Annex
BY Scale
A. GENERAL M.K.
CHECKED
GENERAL A.G. Contractual Date
APPROVED
February 2015
M.I.
Project
FILE NAME
1404501
Topographic Survey: RU.A.RP.05 rev0.pdf
Rev. Date DESCRIPTION
Benchmark's Monograph 0 First emission
DESCRIPTION CARD
CO-ORDINATES
CONTROL POINT NORTHINGS (X) EASTINGS (Y) LEVEL (Z)
RB1 9911729.19 159381.25 1651.29
JOB: LOCATION: RUKUNGIRI DISTICT
CLIENT: MWE POINT DESCRIPTION: Iron Pin In Concrete, LHS
SURVEYED BY: Katusabe Mitusera

HORIZONTAL DATUM: UTM (National Grid)
DATE: October 2014
VERTICAL DATUM: Above Mean Sea Level
DESCRIPTION
The control is along Buyanja road. From Rukungiri roundabout, take
Kampala road move about 180m, turn left and move 1.7Km along the
marrum road then stop. Turn right to the west road, measure 14.8m
from the center of the junction followed by 6.9m LHS or 14.1m from
the the center of the junction along the North road followed by 8.2m
RHS. They intersect at the point.
DESCRIPTION CARD
CO-ORDINATES
RB2 9911382.68 161371.99 1668.63
JOB:
LOCATION: RUKUNGIRI DISTRICT
CLIENT: MWE
POINT DESCRIPTION: Iron Pin In Concrete, LHS

DATE: November 2014
DESCRIPTION
Kampala road move about 180m, turn left and move 1.7Km to a cross
road. Turn right to the west road and move 2.36Km from the
junction. While at this point, measure off 6.8m Left.
RB2
DESCRIPTION CARD
CO-ORDINATES
RB3 9909903.63 163222.58 1658.01
JOB:
CLIENT: MWE
POINT DESCRIPTION: Iron Pin In Concrete, LHS

DATE: November 2014
DESCRIPTION
Kampala road move about 180m, turn left and move 1.7Km to a cross
road. Turn right to the west road and move 4.9Km from the junction.
While at this point, you sight y junction ahead. Measure of 9.0m from
this junction backwards followed by 8.0m LHS
RB3
DESCRIPTION CARD
CO-ORDINATES

RB4 9909249.34 162765.34 1681.97
RB5 9909204.04 162763.57 1680.37
JOB: LOCATION: RUKUNGIRI DISTRICT

DATE: October 2014
DESCRIPTION
These two controls are located at a tanks site, about 300m from the
junction at KB3.
KR4 is behind the tank, about 4.3m from it.
There is a junction ahead of KB4 and from this junction, taking the
East into the left road,measure 32.8m along the centerline followed
by 6.2m to the left to locate KB5.
Tank
DESCRIPTION CARD
CO-ORDINATES

RB6 9907184.54 162075.20 1702.4
RB7 9907161.55 162104.43 1706.85
JOB:
CLIENT: MWE
POINT DESCRIPTION: Iron Pin In Concrete, RHS

DATE: November 2014
DESCRIPTION
The control is located at a hill in Buyanja at the water tank. From the
tank at RB4, take the straight (keep Right) and move for 1.45km to
the main (paved) road and turn left, move for 600m along the road
and then turn to the right, move for 360m, keeping left. There is an
eucalyptus tree forest. On the right of it is a hill where the tank is.
RB7 is just besides the tank at a distance of 1.7m right.
While standing at the tank facing RB7,measure in that direction a
distance of 38.9m to locate RB6
Tank
DESCRIPTION CARD
CO-ORDINATES
RK1 9910112.23 164092.90 1638.14

JOB:
SURVEYED BY: KATUSABE MITUSERA

DATE: October 2014
DESCRIPTION
From the junction at , Kihumuro drive towards Kebisoni through the

road to Kanyanga, a distance of 1.14km. The benchmark is located on
the right hand side at a distance of 6m from the road centerline.
RK1
DESCRIPTION CARD
CO-ORDINATES
RK2 9909578.40 165610.51 1627.83

JOB:

DATE: October 2014
DESCRIPTION
From the RK1, drive towards Kebisoni a distance of 1.9km. The

benchmark is located on the left at a distance of 11m from the road
centerline.
DESCRIPTION CARD
CO-ORDINATES
RK3 9909815.35 165904.66 1660.30

JOB:

DATE: October 2014
DESCRIPTION
From the RK2, drive towards Kebisoni a distance of 294m. Turn left at
to the road going to the church and drive a distance of 416m from the
junction. The benchmark is located on the left hand side near a house
at a distance of 13m from the road centerline and a distance of 3m
from the house corner.
house
RK3
DESCRIPTION CARD
CO-ORDINATES

RK4 9908324.62 167394.20 1643.96
RK5 9908256.73 167362.79 1640.11
JOB:
CLIENT: MWE POINT DESCRIPTION: Iron Pin In Concrete, IHS

DATE: November 2014
DESCRIPTION
These two controls are located at a tank site in Kebisoni. While at the
tank, RK4 is just near the fence enclosing the tank,south of it at a
distance of 0.5m from the fence's lower/southern side. From the road
it is about 29.3m
Along the road, in line with the south side of the fence, move about
64.2m south and then measure of 5m west to locate RK5
DESCRIPTION CARD
CO-ORDINATES

RB7 9910721.46 168920.46 1753.92
RB8 9910727.30 168848.54 1753.56
JOB: LOCATION: RUKUNGIRI DISTICT
CLIENT: MWE POINT DESCRIPTION: Iron Pin In Concrete

DATE: October 2014
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION CARD
CO-ORDINATES
RK10 9908142.08 171683.49 1400.41

JOB:
CLIENT: MWE POINT DESCRIPTION: Iron Pin In root of an eucalyptus tree

DATE: October 2014
DESCRIPTION
From the the bridge at river Kahengye drive a distance of 222km

towards Rukungiri town. The benchmark is located on the right hand
side of the road about 55m. Or move upstream along the river, a
distance of about 181m. the point is 9m from the river edge. It is a
nail in the root of an old eucalyptus tree.
RK10
DESCRIPTION CARD
CO-ORDINATES
RR1 9911757.51 156284.23 1593.40

JOB:

DATE: October 2014
DESCRIPTION
The benchmark is located 1.9Km from town along Rwerere road on

the Left hand side. It is at a distance of 6.3m from the center of the
road.
RR1
DESCRIPTION CARD
CO-ORDINATES
RR2 9911939.39 152804.97 1626.63

JOB:
CLIENT: MWE POINT DESCRIPTION: Iron Pin In Concrete, RHS

DATE: October 2014
DESCRIPTION
The benchmark is located 6.3Km ordometer distance along Rwerere

road from Rukungiri town roundabout on the Right hand side. It is at
a distance of 11.8m from the center of the road and 26.1m from the
corner.
RR2
DESCRIPTION CARD
CO-ORDINATES
RR3 9911814.59 151049.69 1555.21

JOB:

DATE: October 2014
DESCRIPTION
Set odometer reading to 0.0, move along Rwerere road till the
odometer reads 8.6Km from Rukungiri town roundabout. It is located
on the Right hand side measuring 38.1 from the road center. It lies
amidst an electric pole and a transformer, 29.9m and 47.2m
respectively.
DESCRIPTION CARD
CO-ORDINATES

RR4 9911827.79 149736.76 1528.76
RR5 9911810.59 149710.63 1527.50

JOB:

DATE: October 2014
DESCRIPTION
The two Controls RR4 and RR5 are located at a distance of 10km from
RR4 Rukungiri town measuring the distance from the roundabout. They are
on a hill at Rwerere water tank, RHS of the corner. Before this corner is
a borrow pit. While at the tank, RR4 is west of the tank fence, 31.1m
away from the upper East fence corner and 9.2m from the first tree,
East of the fence
RR5
RR5 is at the Lower East corner of the fence, 0.7m southwards.
DESCRIPTION CARD
CO-ORDINATES
RR6 9911743.65 148654.00 1474.62

JOB:

DATE: October 2014
DESCRIPTION CARD
CO-ORDINATES
TBM1 9912735.89 158135.27 1700.14

JOB:
POINT DESCRIPTION: Iron Pin
CLIENT: MWE
LEA/COM CONSULT
DATE: November 2014
DESCRIPTION
With the ordometer set O.0m at the roundabout, move North towards
the police for about 340m and turn right to the road going to the
water tank and mast at Rwanyakashesha hill, move upto the existing
tank. While at this point measure off from the south western corner
of the tank fence 16.8m southwards and from the 17.4m from the
western fence corner of the mast.
TBM1

RU - Vol 2 - R7 - 15

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

RU - Vol 2 - R7 - 15

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

MINISTRY OF WATER AND ENVIRONMENT

Water management and development project

BIDDING DOCUMENTS - VOL. 2: RUKUNGIRI

PROJECT: 1404501 JUNE 2015

WATER MANAGEMENT AND DEVELOPMENT PROJECT (WMDP)

CREDIT NO. 51270-UG

WATER SUPPLY AND SANITATION IN

Ministry of Water & Environment

I INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (ITB)

VOLUME 2 – Lot 1 (Rukungiri)

VOLUME 3 – Lot 1 (Rukungiri)

VII WORKS REQUIREMENTS

WATER MANAGEMENT AND DEVELOPMENT PROJECT (WMDP)

CREDIT NO. 51270-UG

WATER SUPPLY AND SANITATION IN

Ministry of Water & Environment

A.RP.06.1 - BoQ of General Items Pag. 1

G.39 HIV - AIDS awareness programme, including regular provision of

A.RP.06.1 - BoQ of General Items Pag. 2

B.RP.05.1.1 - BoQ of the civil works for WTP Pag. 1

B.RP.05.1.1 - BoQ of the civil works for WTP Pag. 2

B.RP.05.1.1 - BoQ of the civil works for WTP Pag. 3

B.RP.05.1.1 - BoQ of the civil works for WTP Pag. 4

ROADS AND PAVINGS

B.RP.05.1.1 - BoQ of the civil works for WTP Pag. 5

B.RP.05.1.1 - BoQ of the civil works for WTP Pag. 6

DEMOLITION AND SITE CLEARANCE

DEMOLITION AND SITE CLEARANCE

DEMOLITION AND SITE CLEARANCE

DEMOLITION AND SITE CLEARANCE

B.RP.05.1.2 - BoQ of the civil works for WTP Pag. 7

B.RP.05.1.2 - BoQ of the civil works for WTP Pag. 8

B.RP.05.1.2 - BoQ of the civil works for WTP Pag. 9

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

B.RP.05.1.2 - BoQ of the civil works for WTP Pag. 10

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

B.RP.05.1.2 - BoQ of the civil works for WTP Pag. 11

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

B.RP.05.1.2 - BoQ of the civil works for WTP Pag. 12

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

PIPEWORK-FITTINGS AND VALVES

PIPEWORK - MANHOLES AND PIPEWORK ANCILLARIES

B.RP.05.1.2 - BoQ of the civil works for WTP Pag. 13

B.RP.05.1.2 - BoQ of the civil works for WTP Pag. 14

ROADS AND PAVINGS

B.RP.05.1.2 - BoQ of the civil works for WTP Pag. 15

DEMOLITION AND SITE CLEARANCE

B.RP.05.1.3 - BoQ of the civil works for WTP Pag. 16